Upgrade of the Irrigation System

and Rehabilitation of Existing TSE

Water Tanks and Pumping Station

Specifications
December 2022

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00

dar.com
UPGRADE OF THE IRRIGATION SYSTEM AND REHABILITATION
OF EXISTING TSE WATER TANKS AND PUMPING STATION

SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013529 HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT
013543 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014339 MOCKUPS
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015526 TRAFFIC CONTROL
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300 EXECUTION
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDRUES
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017836 WARRANTIES
017839 RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS
018000 COMMISSIONING, OPERATIONAL, FIELD AND PERFORMANCE TESTING

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

035440 CEMENT-BASED SCREED

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

075213 ATACTIC-POLYPROPYLENE (APP) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE

ROOFING
079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

096723 RESINOUS FLOORING

099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

270501 COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS

270555 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA)
271005 COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA)
271105 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA)
271305 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA)
271505 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA)
272109 DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK
272133 WIRELESS DATA NETWORK
272231 COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS
273123 IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 2

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

281300 ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT

281500 ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES
282000 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (VSS)
283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

311000 SITE CLEARING

312000 EARTH MOVING
312319 DEWATERING
315000 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

328400 PLANTING IRRIGATION

VISUAL INSPECTION OF TSE TANK

CONDITION ASSESSMENT

SYSTEM DESIGN & INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

UNDERGROUND TSE TANK & PUMP STATION – CONDITION ASSESSMENT REPORT

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 2

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 010000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Related Sections:

1. Referenced Sections: List of sections in “Related Sections” or “Related Requirements” is not

intended to be exhaustive or mutually exclusive, it is meant for reference and guidance only
to assist the Contractor.

2. Related sections from the Abu Dhabi Quality and Conformity Council (AD QCC) Standard
and Specifications: The design complies with the standard specification and design
guidelines issued by AD QCC. The Contractor shall obtain the latest edition of the
specifications for execution of the project. Reference to any standard issued by any
authorities listed in these specifications should read as AD QCC Standards and
Specifications. In case there is a conflict between AD QCC Specifications and the particular
specifications included herein, the requirements of AD QCC Standards and Specification
shall govern, all subject to respective authority review and approval at the time of
construction.

3. Missing References: In case a section or part thereof is considered missing, this shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.

4. The several documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one
another; however, in case of ambiguities or discrepancies the same shall be explained and
adjusted by the Engineer who shall thereupon issue to the Contractor instructions thereon
and in such event, unless otherwise provided in the contract.

5. Liability for Missing References: The Contractor is duty bound to fully understand and
appreciate the full provisions included in all the specification sections and the interaction
between these sections. References to related sections are provided for assistance only and
the Contractor is fully liable for any coordination issues related references which are deemed
missing from “Related Sections” or “Related Requirements” parts of the Specification
Sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Specification sections use the terms "Engineer" in lieu of “Architect”, and "Employer" in lieu of
“Owner”. In case the terms “Architect” and “owner” still exist in some sections, they are deemed to
mean "Engineer" and "Employer” respectively.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Industry Standards: When both U.S. and European Industry Standards are applicable to this
project and the standards are in conflict with each other, the most stringent of the industry
standards shall govern.

2. Proprietary Names: Manufacturer's proprietary names indicated for colors, textures and
patterns of materials are for the purpose of indicating the design aspect such as color, texture
and pattern selection only. Other manufacturers’ materials are acceptable and provided they
closely approximate colors, textures and patterns indicated and provided they conform to all
other requirements subject to the Engineer's approval.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - Page 1 of 2

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Source Limitations: Obtain all system components and accessories from single source from
single manufacturer. If some components are not produced by system manufacture, obtaining
these components from other sources may be approved subject to recommendation in writing
by system manufacturer provided it does not negate the warranty. Submit for Engineer’s
approval.

4. Oversize Fire-Rated Doors: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide
certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction
requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 010000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - Page 2 of 2

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections and drawings, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Project information.
2. Works covered by Contract Documents.
3. Work by Employer.
4. Work under separate contracts.
5. Future work.
6. Access to site.
7. Coordination with occupants.
8. Interface with local authorities.
9. Work restrictions.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls".

2. Site Investigation, recommendation and specification, as follows:
a. Visual inspection of TSE tank
b. Condition assessment
c. System design and installation specification.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification and Location:

The project site, located in Abu Dhabi Emirates, Masdar City, while the reservoirs and pumping
stations are located in Sector SE45_04, Plot No. R1.

The primary objectives for the project are summarized as follows:

i. Executing the necessary upgrade of the existing landscape irrigation network for the entire
Masdar city, including TSE water management (Zoning &Timing) and upgrade the
existing irrigation system to fully automated and centrally controlled system

ii. Structural, and architectural rehabilitation of the above-ground TSE water tank, the under-
ground TSE water tank and the main Irrigation pump station. The scope also includes
survey, inspection, testing and renovation works of all MEP works in the main pump station
including, pumps, valves, crane, electrical works, piping, Instrumentation and control, etc.

The works include the following:

- Rehabilitation works at the above-ground TSE Water Tank

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 1 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

- Rehabilitation works at the under-ground TSE Water Tank and its inlet chambers

- Rehabilitation works at the main Irrigation Pump Station including architectural,

structural, Mechanical, instrumentation& Control electrical, and telecommunication
works.

B. Employer: Abu Dhabi Future Energy Company – PJSC (Masdar).

C. Engineer: Refer to the Form of Agreement.

D. Electronic transmission system: ACONEX.

1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for using the
Electronic transmission system.

1.4 WORKS COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. All to be executed in accordance with the contract’s Specifications. The Contractor shall obtain the
necessary construction NOC as per authorities’ requirements and implement the conditions imposed
by authorities during construction as stipulated in Tender Documents.

B. All works shall be executed in accordance with the Tender Documents, the law and regulations of
relevant UAE authorities and compliance with ESTIDAMA requirements and Masdar KPIs.

C. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents. The Scope of works includes, but
is not limited to the following:

I. Upgrade of the Irrigation System

The scope of upgrade consists of upgrade of the Irrigation System to a fully automated coherent and
sustainable system capable of supplying water to all current and projected planted areas adequately.
The works include the following:

a. Supply, lay joint, test and commission of HDPE pipes SDR 11, PE100 in trenches and
fittings for irrigation mainlines, including excavation, dewatering, disposal of unsuitable
material, bedding, backfilling, compaction, protection of services, supports, warning tape
etc. all complete in accordance with QCC drawings and specifications.
b. Supply and installation, testing and commissioning of irrigation gate valves, complete, all
as per QCC drawings and specifications.
c. Supply and installation, testing and commissioning of Irrigation air valves, complete,
including associated valve, all as per QCC drawings and specifications.
d. Supply and installation, testing and commissioning of electrically actuated valves for
Irrigation water, all complete, as per QCC drawings and specifications.
e. Supply and installation, testing and commissioning of electromagnetic flow meter as per
QCC drawings and specifications
f. Other stated chambers including excavation, backfilling, blinding, concreting, block work,
reinforcement, formwork, DI circular cover with frame, thrust block, warning tape, etc. all
complete as per QCC detail drawings and specifications
g. Supply, Installation of Irrigation central Control system and connect all existing controllers
to the central control system
h. Connect the existing inlet of the existing underground TSE water tank to the existing
Irrigation distribution Network
i. Connect discharge pipe of the existing main pump station to the main existing Irrigation
distribution Network
j. Provide provision to connect the system to SCADA .

The Scope of upgrade of the irrigation system Works includes, but is not limited to the following:

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 2 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

Irrigation system, including excavation and backfilling of trenches, supply and installation of
primary system pipes using open cut and NDRC, chambers, valves, ducts for road crossings, all
associated MEP works related full automation of the system and connectivity to SCADA, testing
and commissioning etc. All works are in accordance with authorities’ requirements and to the
approval of authorities, Employer and Engineer

All to be executed in accordance with the contract’s Specifications and Drawings.

The Contractor shall obtain the necessary construction NOC as per authorities’ requirements and
implement the conditions imposed by authorities during construction as stipulated in Tender
Documents.

II. Rehabilitation works at the above-ground TSE Water Tank

1. Architectural Works:
The scope shall include all necessary data collection of the required buildings mentioned-
above.
The Contractor shall provide all the required labor, equipment and all other requirements as
to fit for the purpose of the scope.

In the context of the above targets, the Contractor’s scope covers but is not limited to;
a. Conducting an assessment/ study of the site to identify work boundary as per the
tender documents.
b. Any temporary arrangements needed to avoid any disruption to the adjacent
operational areas.
c. Contractor to reassess the roof’s waterproofing and activate any remedy works
where applicable.

2. Structural Works:
a. Concrete repairs to TSE Tank, Sump Structure and foundation outrigger:
i. Visual inspection: Purpose of visual inspection to confirm previous finding
and to identify new damages such as cracks, delamination, spalling, rust
stains and other defects.
ii. Delamination survey: Works shall be carried out as per ASTM
D4580/D4580M to confirm previous finding and to identify new damages.
iii. Spall Area Repair: The work shall include the furnishing by the Contractor,
of all supervision, training, labour, materials, tools and equipment and the
performance of all operations necessary for the repair of spalled areas. The
works shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
1. Sawing of a regular boundary surrounding the spalled area using
a concrete saw.
2. The concrete within the boundary is to be removed, using a light
jackhammer equipped with a chipping hammer, scarifier, or high-
water pressure blaster, to a depth of at least 25mm, or 13mm
below the surface of visually sound concrete, whichever is
deeper. If a reinforcement bar is exposed during the works with
more than 90 degrees of the perimeter of the bar exposed, a space
should be exposed completely around the bar and at least 20mm
below it, to allow for complete consolidation of the patch material
around the reinforcement steel.
3. A suitable compliant bonding agent should then be applied to the
patch area, then a special patching grout material shall be applied
to repair the surface to match sound surrounding areas.

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 3 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. The patched area shall be cured properly using moist curing or a

white pigmented membrane forming curing compound.
iv. Cracks injection: The work shall include the furnishing by the Contractor,
of all supervision, training, labor, materials, tools and equipment and the
performance of all operations necessary for the resin injection work into
concrete cracks, as required by the manufacturer of the resin, and/or as
directed by the Engineer onsite and as specified. The Contractor shall
undertake a joint inspection with the Engineer in order to verify the scope
for the concrete crack injection works prior to commencement of the
Works on site. A notice should be submitted to the Employer and the
Engineer at least 14 days prior the date of the joint inspection.
b. Replacement of internal waterproofing system, including soffit of roof slab: The
work shall consist of removing all existing internal waterproofing coatings and
membranes, making the surface suitable to receive the new waterproofing system,
as required by the new system manufacturer and as specified, furnishing all
materials, labour and equipment and in performing all operations in connection with
the application of coating to all internal walls, columns, beams, ceiling, and floor of
the TSE water tank.
c. Impressed Current Cathodic Protection; as specified the work shall consist of:
i. designing all components of cathodic protection,
ii. make all inspections and tests to make sure of substrate suitability, such as
but not limited to, visual inspection, concrete cover thickness survey,
delamination survey, electrical continuity between rebars, potential
mapping,
iii. propose adequate solutions for envisaged problems, including but not
limited to, additional repair of reinforced concrete elements, replacing,
cleaning, treatment, and coating of existing reinforcement, electrical
continuity bonding of electrically discontinuous steel elements and
reinforcement, and consider any possible current interferences,
iv. as well as furnishing all materials, labour and equipment and in performing
all operations in connection with the application of the cathodic protection,
including but not limited to, installation of cathodic protection components
and equipment, all concrete and sprayed concrete material, equipment and
works, pre-commissioning and commissioning tests, and all other works,
labour, and equipment needed for the application of cathodic protection
system.
v. production of calculation notes, as built drawings, and Operations and
Maintenance Manual for the cathodic protection systems installed and
commissioned. This manual shall also include the baseline data established
during the final commissioning of the cathodic protection systems, trouble
shooting of various components of the cathodic protection systems and
recommendations such as routine monitoring philosophy. The manual
shall include system operation and monitoring, and preventive routine
maintenance operation protocols.
d. Anti-carbonation coating: The work shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor
and equipment and in performing all operations in connection with the application
of a protective coating as specified, with a colour as decided by the Employer based
on site trials, to all the exposed concrete surfaces of the TSE Tank and Sump Pit.

3. Instrumentation and Control Works:

a. Supply, install, test and commission of two(2) radar type loop powered level
transmitters in the above ground tank

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 4 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

III. Rehabilitation works at the under-ground TSE Water Tank

1. Architectural Works:

In the context of the above targets, the Contractor’s scope covers but is not limited to;
a. External Roof Waterproofing membrane and screed to be replaced
b. Internal soffit sealants to be added, with material approved by the authority to avoid
any water contamination.

2. Structural Works:
a. Concrete repairs to TSE Tank:
i. Spall Area Repair: The work shall include the furnishing by the Contractor,
of all supervision, training, labour, materials, tools and equipment and the
performance of all operations necessary for the repair of spalled areas. The
works shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
1. Sawing of a regular boundary surrounding the spalled area using
a concrete saw.
2. The concrete within the boundary is to be removed, using a light
jackhammer equipped with a chipping hammer, scarifier, or high-
water pressure blaster, to a depth of at least 25mm, or 13mm
below the surface of visually sound concrete, whichever is
deeper. If a reinforcement bar is exposed during the works with
more than 90 degrees of the perimeter of the bar exposed, a space
should be exposed completely around the bar and at least 20mm
below it, to allow for complete consolidation of the patch material
around the reinforcement steel.
3. A suitable compliant bonding agent should then be applied to the
patch area, then a special patching grout material shall be applied
to repair the surface to match sound surrounding areas.
4. The patched area shall be cured properly using moist curing or a
white pigmented membrane forming curing compound.
b. Replacement of internal waterproofing system, for top slab, columns and floor: The
work shall consist of removing all existing internal waterproofing coatings and
membranes, making the surface suitable to receive the new waterproofing system,
as required by the new system manufacturer and as specified, furnishing all
materials, labour and equipment and in performing all operations in connection with
the application of coating to all internal columns, beams, ceiling, and floor of the
TSE water tank.
c. Reinstating HDPE adhered membrane at concrete walls surfaces, where membrane
is damaged or cut. The work shall consist of making the surface suitable to receive
the new waterproofing system, as required by the manufacturer, furnishing all
materials, labour and equipment needed and in performing all operations in
connection with the application of the waterproofing membrane.
d. Treating and injecting the raft joint. The work shall consist of cleaning and
scrubbing of loose joint filler and sealant, providing an adequate approved
polyurethane low viscosity injection material that will form an elastic seal for the
joint injection along a polyurethane based foam that will swell once in contact with
water to form a temporary waterstop prior to injecting the main injection material,
applying a strip cover across the joint, adhered to both concrete sides of the joint,
furnishing all materials, labour and equipment and performing all operations in
connection with the treatment of the raft joint, in compliance with injection material
manufacturer recommendations.

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 5 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

e. Reinstatement or replacing all access shafts. The work shall consist of all reinforced
concrete related works related works and applying internal and external coating,
furnishing all materials, labour and equipment needed and in performing all
operations in connection with the access shafts work.
f. Replacement of screed on the top of ground slab.
g. Replacement of damaged covers and frame as well as the access ladders.

3. Tank Piping:
a. Testing all inlet valves in chambers and replacing defective valves
b. Providing actuator for existing valves in chambers
c. Providing float valves at tank inlets
d. Testing existing overflow and drain pipes of the underground tank and checking the
drains valves and the connectivity to drainage system, in addition to the replacement
of defected/damaged pipe.
e. Testing, commissioning and putting in operational mode of all above items.

IV. Rehabilitation works at the main Irrigation Pump Station

1. Architectural Works:
In the context of the above targets, the Contractor’s scope covers but is not limited to;

a. External Walls cracks to be repaired with non-shrinking grouts and painted with
acrylic emulsion paint that matches the existing color
b. Internal Walls cracks to be repaired with non-shrinking grouts and Anti carbonation
– same was specified in the above ground tank
c. Floors cracks to be repaired with non-shrinking grouts, and Epoxy coating to be
applied

2. Structural Works:
a. Concrete repairs to main Irrigation Pump Station:
i. Spall Area Repair: The work shall include the furnishing by the Contractor,
of all supervision, training, labour, materials, tools and equipment and the
performance of all operations necessary for the repair of spalled areas. The
works shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
1. Sawing of a regular boundary surrounding the spalled area using
a concrete saw.
2. The concrete within the boundary is to be removed, using a light
jackhammer equipped with a chipping hammer, scarifier, or high-
water pressure blaster, to a depth of at least 25mm, or 13mm
below the surface of visually sound concrete, whichever is
deeper. If a reinforcement bar is exposed during the works with
more than 90 degrees of the perimeter of the bar exposed, a space
should be exposed completely around the bar and at least 20mm
below it, to allow for complete consolidation of the patch material
around the reinforcement steel.
3. A suitable compliant bonding agent should then be applied to the
patch area, then a special patching grout material shall be applied
to repair the surface to match sound surrounding areas.
4. The patched area shall be cured properly using moist curing or a
white pigmented membrane forming curing compound.
ii. Cracks injection: The work shall include the furnishing by the Contractor,
of all supervision, training, labor, materials, tools and equipment and the
performance of all operations necessary for the resin injection work into

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 6 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

concrete cracks, as required by the manufacturer of the resin, and/or as

directed by the Engineer onsite and as specified. The Contractor shall
undertake a joint inspection with the Engineer in order to verify the scope
for the concrete crack injection works prior to commencement of the
Works on site. A notice should be submitted to the Employer and the
Engineer at least 14 days prior the date of the joint inspection.

4. Instrumentation and Control Works:

b. Supply, install, test and commission of two (2) radar type loop powered level
transmitters in the below ground tank

3. Mechanical Works:
a. The contractor shall survey and inspect the existing piping and mechanical
installations in the pump station building. the contractor shall report the site survey
findings and recommendations to the client and engineer for their approval. All
required modification works as result of the site survey shall be reported and
described in a method statement and rehabilitation work procedure.
b. Contractor shall arrange to carry out pump testing not limited to pump performance,
motor temperature, vibration, mounting, installation, leakages and unsual sounds.
Based on the testing results, the contractor shall arrange to replace or rehabilitate
the pumps in order to grant the accepted performance and satisfy the safe and proper
operational requirement. this task shall be coordinated with the client representative
and grant engineer approval. any rehabilitation tasks shall be carried out by the
manufacturer maintenance team and only original spare parts are approved to be
used.
c. Replace the defected parts of the piping system for satisfactory and proper operation
according to the testing survey report, including replacement of damaged and
malfunction items and accessories such as valves, supports, fittings, gsakets, bolts
and nuts, paints etc.
d. Replace the defected parts of the HVAC system for satisfactory and proper
operation according to the recommendations of the survey report, including
replacement of damaged and malfunction items and accessories such as fans, AC
units, ducts, dampers, etc.
e. Replace the defected parts of the plumbing system for satisfactory and proper
operation according to the survey report, including replacement of damaged and
malfunction items and accessories such as sump pump set, storm drainage
components, piping, toilet fixtures. etc.
f. Replace or rehabilitated the defected parts of the fire protection system for
satisfactory and proper operation in accordance to the survey report and approved
codes, including replacement of damaged and malfunction items and accessories or
maintenance of the existing FE .... etc.
g. Procurement, supply and installation of 3 automatic screen filters, each of 156 lps
capacity, and 1 pressure sustaining valve including all dismantling piping, joints,
fittings, valves and accessories, in addition to pipe dismantling and reinstallation as
indicated on the drawings.
h. Procurement, supply and installation of a new fertilization system as per
requirements including all dismantling tanks, mixers, dosing pump, controllers, and
all related accessories.

4. Instrumentation and Control Works:

a. Survey, Inspect, Test and Renovate the existing control section including
replacement of damaged and malfunctioning items and accessories, as per site
survey and inspection requirements and recommendations exclusively by PLC
vendor and/or original PLC assembler/system integrator for satisfactory PLC

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 7 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

functional operation, ready for energisation and ready to interface with a remote
SCADA system, such as CPU, IO modules, communication modules, power supply
modules, circuit breakers, relays, protection devices, meters, indication lamps,
terminals, etc.
b. Survey, Inspect, Test and Renovate the existing sensors included in the pump station
for satisfactory and functional operation system, including replacement of damaged
and malfunctioning items and accessories such as flowmeters, pressure transmitters,
pressure gauges, etc.
c. Survey, Inspect, Test and Renovate the existing I&C cables included in the pump
station for satisfactory and functional operation system, including replacement of
damaged and malfunctioning items and accessories such as instrument cables,
control cables, power cables related to I&C equipment, communication cables, etc.
d. Any unforeseen civil and builders works required as part of the rehabilitation works
of the existing Instrument and Control installation works such as supporting devices,
I&C identification and marking, cable containments/trays, touch-up painting, etc.
e. Supply, install, test & commission new I&C cables along with cable containment to
interface with the new added equipment (fertilizer system, three(3) automatic
Screen filters, the four(4) motorized valves, pressure tanks instruments and four(4)
level transmitters)
f. Supply and install 2x100mm sand encased underground UPVC ducts with all
needed manholes to connect the I&C cables from motorized valves and level
transmitters to the control section included in the electrical room
g. Supply, install, test & commission new IO modules, and all necessary modules in
order to allow interface with the newly added equipment included as below:
i. Fertilizer System control panel
ii. Three (3) Automatic Screen Filters control panel
iii. Four (4) motorized valves
iv. Four (4) radar type level transmitters in the water storage tanks.
v. Pressure Tanks instruments
h. Programming of the existing PLC cabinet in order to cater for the added equipment
and for the proper operation of the system.
i. Provisional Item: In case new/additional and replaced components in the control
section doesn’t fit in the existing control section, contractor is required to supply,
program, install, test and commission new PLC cabinet with HMI including but not
limited to IO modules, communication modules, power supply modules, RTU, and
all necessary modules for proper functionning of the system, ready to be interfaced
with remote SCADA system, segregated power supply (normal and UPS),
interfaced with existing and new equipment/sensors, I&C cables/containments, all
as per QCC standards and guidelines.

5. Electrical works
a. Survey, Inspect, Test and Renovate the existing LV Motor Control Center, including
replacement of damaged and malfunctioning items and accessories, as per site
survey and inspection requirements and recommendations exclusively by MCC
vendor and/or original MCC assembler for satisfactory MCC functional operation
and ready for energisation, such as circuit breakers, contactors, relays, protection
devices, meters, indication lamps, terminals, starters, capacitors,
b. Survey, inspect, test and renovate the existing LV feeders and cables for satisfactory
and functional operation system, including replacement of damaged and
malfunction items and accessories such as cables, feeders, cable trays and raceways,
glands, lugs, supports, etc.
c. Survey, inspect, test and renovate the existing lighting installations in the pump
station for satisfactory and functional operation system, including replacement of

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 8 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

damaged and malfunctioning items and accessories such as lighting fixtures,

switches, raceways, wires, boxes, etc.
d. Survey, inspect, test and renovate the existing small power distribution network in
the pump station for satisfactory and functional operation system, including
replacement of damaged and malfunctioning items and accessories such as
disconnect switches, emergency push buttons, socket outlets, wiring devices,
raceways, wires, boxes, etc.
e. Survey, inspect, test and renovate the existing distribution panel boards (DB-1 &
DB-2) in the pump station for satisfactory and functional operation system,
including replacement of damaged and malfunctioning items and accessories such
as circuit breakers, contactors, relays, protection devices, meters, indication lamps,
terminals, etc.
f. Survey, inspect, test and renovate the existing earthing network of the pump station
for satisfactory and functional operation system, including replacement of damaged
and malfunctioning items and accessories such as earth cables, earth rods, clamps,
inspection pits, earth busbars, SPDs, etc.
g. Survey, inspect, test and renovate of any unforeseen civil and builders works
required as part of the rehabilitation works of the existing electrical installation
works such as supporting devices, electrical identification and marking, covers for
trenches, touch-up painting, concrete bases etc.
h. Supply and installation of Uninterruptible Power Supply System (UPS);
1.5kW;50Hz;230V;1phase; non-redundant; 3 hours backup time; for the power
supply of the new PLC system including all required electrical works such as
modification to existing distribution panel, incoming/outgoing feeders, distribution
panel, earthing, etc. as deemed necessary.
i. Supply and installation of Normal Power supply of the new PLC system from
existing panel board, with app. electrical Load=1kW, including all required
electrical works such as feeders/cables, modification to existing distribution panel,
raceways & boxes, wiring devices, earthing, etc. as deemed necessary.
j. Supply and installation of Normal Power supply for the new four (4) motorised
valves from existing panel board(s), with locations inside existing valves chamber
1 and chamber 2 as shown on relevant Water Irrigation drawings, with app.
electrical Load=0.3kW each, including all required electrical works such as
feeders/cables, modification to existing distribution panel, raceways & boxes,
wiring devices, earthing, etc. as deemed necessary.
k. All electrical works shall be carried out in accordance with relevant local authority
requirements and Abu Dhabi City Municipality (ADM) standard specifications.

6. Telecommunication works
a. Survey, inspect, test and renovate the existing fire alarm system and cables in the
pump station for satisfactory and functional operation system, including
replacement of damaged and malfunction items and accessories such as cables,
cable trays and raceways etc. and to add additional fire alarm equipment (detector,
manual call point etc..) for the missing coverage areas of the existing fire alarm
system as per local authority and provided specs requirement.
b. Any unforeseen civil and builders works required as part of the rehabilitation works
of the existing fire alarm installation works
c. Supply and Installation of ICT/ELV and security systems as per local authority’s
requirement and provided specs including head end equipment, cabling,
containment etc.as deemed necessary, including all required electrical installation
works(additional 3 hours UPS backup time for the power supply of the new telecom
systems and additional Power supply for the new telecom system) and mechanical

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 9 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

installation works (additional AC to cater for additional heat dissipation), subject to

engineer review and approval.

D. Type of Contract: Refer to Appendix to Tender.

E. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

F. Existing Site Protection works: the Contractor shall maintain and protect any existing site protection
works including barriers constructed by previous contractor throughout the construction period. It
is the responsibility of the Contractor to remove these works when instructed by the Employer /
Engineer at no additional cost.

G. Dewatering water disposal: Scope will require dewatering of the site. Contractor shall be responsible
for the disposal of water produced by dewatering activities to an approved location by both ADM
and EAD. Costs associated with the dewatering process including disposal of water produced as
per authorities’ requirements including pumping, outfall, treatment etc. as well as permits are
deemed to be included within the quoted fees. All such works shall be executed at no additional
cost.

H. Site Hoarding and Protection is the responsibility of the Contractor. All works shall be done as per
the standards and requirements of ADM and as published by AD QCC, unless otherwise required
to include hoarding with Masdar branding.

I. Ensuring integration and coordination between the works performed or to be performed under the
other contracts and the works under this Contract.

J. Coordinating with all authorities having jurisdiction and attaining all the required permits from these
authorities for his employees and equipment, etc.

K. Developing and implementing good safety practices, to ensure the health and protection of all
employees and non-employees on the work areas.

L. The scope of the Work includes without limitation all engineering, labor, supervision, material,
tools, equipment and other services necessary for the installation, testing and commissioning and
maintenance of all Works under the Contract.

M. The Contractor shall include any and all sundry expenses such as transportation, freight charges,
taxes, interim storage, escalation, any special permits required to carry out the work, related quality
control, compliance to safety requirements as called for in the Tender Documents and compliance
with applicable laws and regulations of Abu Dhabi, UAE.

N. The Contractor is not allowed to store any material on site that is not required for the execution of
the project.

1.5 WORK BY EMPLOYER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Employer so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering
with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Employer. Coordinate the Works of this
Contract with work performed by Employer.

1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors (if any) and programme the Works so that work
on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, efficiently and effectively without interfering with
or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Works of this Contract with
work performed under separate contracts.

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 10 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Concurrent Work: Employer may award separate contract(s) for other Packages or for the
performance of certain construction operations at the Site. Those operations may be conducted
simultaneously with work under this Contract.
C. Subsequent Work: Employer may award separate contract(s) for additional work to be performed at
site following Taking-Over. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of
preparatory work under this Contract.

1.7 FUTURE WORK

A. Other Contracts: Cooperate fully and coordinate with separate contracts and programme the Works
so that work on those contracts may be carried out efficiently and effectively, without interfering
with or delaying work under this Contract.
B. Future Contracts: The Employer reserves the right to perform additional work and/or award further
separate contracts for performance of additional work at the Project site; whether concurrently with,
or after Taking Over of Works under this Contract. Performance and completion of such additional
work may depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract.
C. Cooperate fully and coordinate with any future construction works and/or separate contractors as
necessary, and programme the works so far as reasonably possible so that work on those contracts
may be carried out efficiently and effectively, without interfering with or delaying work under this
Contract.

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: The Contractor shall use the Project site for the execution of the Works and for access
thereto. The Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Employer's right to perform work or
to retain other contractors on portions of Project. The project site shall be shared with other
contractors, if required. Access to the project Site may need to be shared / coordinated with other
contractors executing adjacent or related works.

B. Shared Access: The Contractor shall allow for and facilitate permanent shared access through their
site for: adjacent construction packages, private plot owners and other Employer designated needs.

C. The Contractor is responsible for securing all permits for site access and shall prepare as required
any traffic studies, diversion works etc. all as per AD Police, ADM and DoT Requirements at no
additional cost.

D. Access to the Site shall be agreed with the Employer / Engineer or others with delegated authority
prior to commencement. The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure the safety of all
persons. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for all damages resulting from the use of
the agreed access.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging his own working space, the storage of materials,
locating all temporary accommodations, utilities and other logistical issues at locations to be agreed
with the Employer / Engineer or others with delegated authority. No claim whatsoever will be
entertained for any reason regarding the location, allocation or relocation of any working space
regardless of the distance.

F. Use of Site: Limit work and activities to the area of the project site as defined on Drawings in areas
indicated. Do not disturb areas outside the project site or in which the work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to area of the project site.

2. Employer Occupancy: Allow for Employer occupancy of project site
3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to the Employer, the Engineer and their employees, other contractors engaged in

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 11 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

work on the project site and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for
parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials
and equipment on-site.

4. The Contractor shall perform his Works in a manner not to cause danger, inconvenience, or
difficulties to road users, private and public vehicles, in and around the Site. Lights, markers,
traffic management systems and other such provisions shall be exhibited at all times and
places as required by the Municipality, Works departments, Traffic Police and in accordance
with relevant regulations.
5. If the Contractor requires additional access he shall apply in writing to the Employer,
providing details of the proposed provision and stating the reason why additional access is
needed and also the period for which the additional access is required. Where the access to
the Site proposed to be used by the Contractor lies across land belonging to a third party the
Contractor shall obtain written approval to the access from the owner and/or occupier and
provide the Employer with a copy of such approval.

G. Security of the Works

1. Surveillance of the Works shall be provided by, and is the responsibility of, the Contractor.
The Contractor shall secure the site and the Works with an adequately supported temporary
fence and Hoarding, all in compliance with ADM requirements and to the approval of the
Employer’s Representative. All excavations shall be adequately lit at night complete with
hazard warning lights to both pedestrians and traffic, all in accordance with applicable Traffic
Police Regulations.
2. Any unfenced opening, where fencing is impracticable, and any surface obstructions shall be
attended by day and by night and shall be adequately lit at night.

H. Safe Guard Assessment

The Contractor is required to maintain close coordination with the relevant Authorities on a regular
basis and ensure all works are executed in accordance with the procedures accepted by the
Authorities.

I. Condition of Existing Building (if applicable): Maintain portions of existing building affected by
construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage
caused by construction operations.

1.9 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Employer Occupancy: Employer may occupy site during entire construction period. Cooperate
with Employer during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Employer usage.
Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Employer's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing
exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities
without written permission from Employer and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Notify the Employer not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Employer's
operations.

B. Employer Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Employer reserves the right to
occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Taking Over
of the Works, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 12 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Taking Over for each specific portion of the Work to
be occupied prior to Employer acceptance of the completed Work.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited
Employer occupancy.
3. Before limited Employer occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Employer will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of Work.
4. On occupancy, Employer will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of Work.

1.10 INTERFACE WITH LOCAL AUTHORITIES

A. The Contractor has to coordinate with all local authorities for obtaining all necessary NOCs/Permits
for the proper and safe execution of the Works.

B. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the following utility providers / authorities for all works
(if any) being executed in the vicinity of their assets/systems. The Contractor shall be responsible
for the protection of existing utilities / assets based on the requirements of utility
providers/authorities taking into consideration the latest specifications, requirement and protection
details issued by the respective utility providers/authorities. The specifications, requirement and
protection details may not be fully included in the Tender Documents and it is the responsibility of
the Contractor to collect the same during construction. Utility Providers/Authorities include but not
limited to:

• Abu Dhabi City Municipality (ADM)

• Abu Dhabi Civil Defence (ADCD)
• Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC - Water and Electricity)
• Abu Dhabi Transmission and Dispatch Company (TRANSCO)
• Abu Dhabi Sewerage Services Company (ADSSC)
• Abu Dhabi Police (ADP)
• Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC)
• Abu Dhabi National Oil Company – Natural Gas Distribution (ADNOC-NGD)
• Department of Municipalities and Transport (DMT)
• Emirates Telecommunication Company (Etisalat)
• Emirates Integrated Telecommunication Company (DU)
• Armed Forces - GHQ Military Works and Telecom FP
• Waste Management Centre (CWM) / Tadweer
• Monitoring and Control Center (MCC)
• Abu Dhabi Water and Electrical Authority (ADWEA)
• Tabreed
• Telecommunication Regulation Authority (TRA)
• Dolphin Energy
• Takreer
• Musanada

1.11 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Employer or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 13 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Notify Engineer and Employer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Obtain Employer's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions

C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
vibration, odors, or other disruption to Employer occupancy with Employer.

1. Notify Engineer and Employer not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive
operations.
2. Obtain Employer's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within any building or within 25 feet (8 m) of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on the Project site
is not permitted.

F. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on the Project
site. Require personnel to utilize identification tags at all times.

G. Employee Screening: Comply with Employer's requirements for drug and background screening of
Contractor personnel working on Site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Engineer.

H. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.

I. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of

all Sections in the Specifications.

J. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to
identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the
individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

SUMMARY 011000 - Page 14 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All works shall be carried out in accordance with the AD QCC latest requirements, specifications
and general details. In case of any contradiction between this section and the AD QCC
specifications, the Government of Abu Dhabi specifications shall be followed.

C. The design complies with the standard specification and design guidelines issued by AD QCC. The
Contractor shall obtain the latest edition of the specifications for execution of the project.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 section "Product Requirements” for requirements regarding submittals and

substitutions of architectural products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed
Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of
required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Employer that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor
or Employer.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three hard copies and one soft copy using Aconex of each request
for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include
Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use form approved by Engineer.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Works and to construction performed by Employer and separate
contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - Page 1 of 3

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the

Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Works
specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses
and names and addresses of Engineers and Employers.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from
ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction programme using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Works, including effect on the overall
Contract Period. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Period, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in
delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Price.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with
related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.

3. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15
days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Refer to the Conditions of Contract.

b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - Page 2 of 3

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.

1. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Works.
f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Works.
g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Works, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received within
60 days after commencement of the Works. Requests received after that time may be considered or
rejected at discretion of Engineer.

1. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Employer a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Employer must assume. Employer's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Employer, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Works.
h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Works.
i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Works, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012500

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - Page 3 of 3

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.
3. Key Personnel
4. Requests for Information (RFIs).
5. Project management information software
6. Project meetings.

B. The Contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will
be specifically assigned.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's design and construction schedule.
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-
engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Employer, Engineer, or Contractor seeking information from each other during
construction.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Works. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.

1. Coordination Meetings: Attend Combined Contractors’ Meetings with other separate

contractors (if any) or entities working as and when required by the Engineer. The meetings
will be arranged and conducted by the Engineer for coordinating and sequencing purposes, and
negotiating and agreeing delivery schedules, programmes of work and interfacing activities,
as necessary.
2. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Works depends on installation of other components, before or
after its own installation.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 1 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
4. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate sequencing and programming its construction
operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of
each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in
different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or
after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Coordinate shared access to Site, staging areas and workspaces.
5. Coordinate provision of temporary facilities and controls.
6. Coordinate and schedule interruptions of temporary utilities, including those necessary to make
connections for permanent services.
7. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections, and coordinate
schedule of tests and inspections.
8. Coordinate progress cleaning of common areas.
9. Coordinate protection and security of the Works.
10. Coordinate preparation and submittal of Record (As-Built) Documents.
11. Coordinate preparation and submittal of Operation and Maintenance manuals.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required
for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Employer and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.

D. Licenses and Approvals

1. The Contractor shall obtain all permits from authorities having jurisdiction including but not
limited to: Demolition Permits, Building Permit, Civil Defense Approvals, Municipality
approvals for Irrigation, Drainage, Sewage, Roads, Aviation, etc.
2. The Contractor shall obtain and renew all NOC’s (No Objection Certificates) and all applicable
approvals, permits as required for construction from various government agencies. The
Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer / Engineer or others with delegated authority
for this requirement.
3. The Contractor shall include for all government inspections as required and applicable fees
during the various Zones of work, as per the rules, regulations of various authorities concerned.
Include for all necessary inspections required prior to final acceptance/handover.
4. During the construction period, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer / Engineer or
others with delegated authority copies of all Certificates of Approval, Permits, or Licenses
obtained from Municipality Departments and other Authorities having Jurisdiction, which are
required for the performance of the work.
5. The requirements under this Clause include also for the provision of all temporary facilities,
utilities and the like, as appropriate; however all costs resulting thereof shall be borne by the
Contractor.

E. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 2 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Pre-installation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.

F. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary
utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated
into, the Works. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated
as Employer's property.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with requirements

in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited
space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of
products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and
resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the
following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare

sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems
and components.
b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by
multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the
information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before
submitting for review.
c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement
of components during the life of the installation.
e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
f. Indicate required installation sequences.
g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Engineer indicating proposed resolution
of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization:

1. Review: Engineer will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's
responsibility. If the Engineer determines that the coordination drawings are not being
prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Engineer will so inform
the Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
2. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints in accordance with
requirements of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 3 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files in accordance with the
following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system
as the original Drawings.
2. File Preparation Format: DWG Version Auto cad 2009 or latest version as advised by the
Engineer operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.
3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using format same as file
preparation format and portable data file (PDF) format.

1.6 KEY PERSONNEL

A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting design and construction operations, submit a list
of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers,
including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as replacements in the absence of
individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Electronic
Transmission System and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Employer and Engineer.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

B. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,
acceptable to Engineer. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format.

C. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow
7 days for Engineer’s response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer after 1:00 p.m. will be
considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 4 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

c. Requests for interpretation of Engineer’s actions on submittals.
d. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Engineer’s action may include a request for additional information, in which case Engineer’s
time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Engineer’s action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract
Sum may allow the Contractor to submit Change Proposal, according to the provision of the
Conditions of Contract.

D. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit
log weekly. Use software log that is part of the Electronic Submission System. Include the
following: Software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Engineer.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were withdrawn or returned without action.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Engineer's response was received.

E. On receipt of Engineer's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to
affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer within seven days if Contractor disagrees
with response.

1.8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SOFTWARE

A. Use the Electronic Transmission System (Aconex) for purposes of hosting and managing project
communication and documentation until the issuance of the Defects Liability Certificate. The
Electronic Transmission System shall include the following functions:

1. Project directory.
2. Project correspondence.
3. Meeting minutes.
4. Contract modifications forms and logs.
5. RFI forms and logs.
6. Task and issue management.
7. Photo documentation.
8. Schedule and calendar management.
9. Submittals forms and logs.
10. Payment application forms.
11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating.
12. Online document collaboration.
13. Reminder and tracking functions.
14. Archiving functions.

B. To facilitate contract management and project administration, the Contractor shall utilize the
Electronic Transmission System (Aconex) provided by the Employer.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

General: Unless otherwise indicated, the Engineer will schedule and conduct meetings and
conferences. The party responsible for scheduling and conducting a meeting or conference shall
also:

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 5 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Employer and consultants as applicable of
scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including
Employer, within 3 days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Engineer will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference

before starting construction, at a location and time convenient to Employer and Engineer.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Employer/Engineer, and consultants as applicable;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties
shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, and examine administrative
and procedural requirements; including but not necessarily limited to the following, as
applicable:

a. Distribution of the Contract Documents

b. Mobilization
c. Possession of Site
d. Tentative construction schedule.
e. Phasing.
f. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
g. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
h. Lines of communications.
i. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
j. Procedures for RFIs.
k. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
l. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
m. Submittal procedures.
n. Sustainable design requirements (if applicable).
o. Preparation of record documents.
p. Use of the premises and existing building (if applicable).
q. Work restrictions.
r. Working hours.
s. Employer's occupancy requirements.
t. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
u. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
v. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
w. Construction waste management and recycling.
x. Parking availability.
y. Office, work, and storage areas.
z. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
aa. Safety and health
bb. First aid.
cc. Security.
dd. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 6 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. Pre-installation Conferences: Where individual Specification Sections indicate such a requirement,

conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires
coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Notify Engineer in
advance of scheduled meeting dates. The Engineer may or may not attend pre-installation
conferences.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular
activity under consideration, including requirements for the following, as applicable:
a. Options.
b. Related RFIs.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Submittals.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
l. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
m. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
p. Temporary facilities and controls.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
s. Testing and inspecting requirements.
t. Installation procedures.
u. Coordination with other work.
v. Required performance results.
w. Protection of adjacent work.
x. Protection of construction and personnel.
y. Safety and health.
z. Security.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required

corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party concerned including the Engineer
and to other parties requiring information, within 3 days of the conference.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and
reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time
convenient to Employer and Engineer prior to the scheduled date of Taking Over.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project

closeout.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Employer, and Engineer, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Works.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 7 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including
the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Preparation of As-Built Drawings
c. Procedures required prior to inspection for Taking Over and for final inspection for
acceptance.
d. Submittal of written warranties.
e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
g. Requirements for demonstration and training.
h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Taking Over and for final
payment
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Coordination of separate contracts.
l. Employer's partial occupancy requirements.
m. Installation of Employer's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
n. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: The Engineer will conduct progress meetings at weekly or fortnightly intervals;
or more frequently whenever he considers it to be necessary.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Employer/Engineer, and contractor, subcontractor,

supplier, any other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,
coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All
participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters
relating to the Works.

2. Agenda: The Engineer will set the agenda for each meeting to: review and correct or approve
minutes of previous progress meeting; review other items of significance that could affect
progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in
relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so.
Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent
activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 8 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

14) Status of proposal requests.

15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting
minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

4. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting
where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule to the
Engineer concurrently with the report of each meeting within 3 days of meeting,

a. Incorporate into update programmes, the effect of all Variations issued and agreed as
at time of programme update.

5. Reporting: The Engineer will record, prepare and distribute minutes of the meeting to each
party present and to the Employer, together with a brief report summary in narrative form, of
progress, actions required and other significant matters arising since the previous meeting and
report.

F. The Engineer will establish and chair a co-ordination Committee to ensure absolute co-ordination
on all aspects of this Contract. The Engineer will schedule and conduct Project coordination
meetings at regular intervals, or whenever he considers it to be necessary. Project coordination
meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and
pre-installation conferences.

1. The Engineer at his absolute discretion will determine the following:

a. Committee members and representatives.

b. Location and Frequency.
c. Procedures and processes to be followed in the meetings.
d. Actions and activities instigated by the meetings.

The Committee and meetings will be a forum to table and resolve any co-ordination or
co-ordination related matters. It is the Engineer's intention to resolve these issues by mutual
agreement between the parties, however, should this not be possible the Engineer will make
a determination on the issue and it will become formal and contractually binding on the
Contractor or other concerned contractor as the case may be.

The Contractor must identify a senior individual or individuals to attend co-ordination

meetings and act as a point of contact on all co-ordination issues. These individuals must be
approved in writing by the Engineer who also has the right to remove them and have them
replaced by further approved individuals at his discretion.

It is noted that these meetings are in addition to other project meetings which will be
occurring and that the determination from these higher level co-ordination meetings must
manifest themselves into a series of further lower level meetings to implement and ensure
the practical application of co-ordination throughout the project. It is incumbent upon the
Contractor to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer how co-ordination is actually
being achieved on site.

2. Attendees: In addition to Employer and Engineer, the Contractor and other contractors
employed by the Employer (if any), subcontractors, suppliers, and other entities concerned
with or having a significant part in current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to their work.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 9 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Agenda: The Engineer will set the agenda for each meeting to: review and correct or approve
minutes of the previous coordination meeting; review and record other items of significance
that could affect progress; and include topics for discussion, appropriate to status of Project.

a. The Engineer will review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine
whether each separate contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, and
the impact thereof on the Contractor's construction programme. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Time for Completion.

b. The Engineer will review present and future coordination needs, including but not
necessarily the following, as applicable:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Status of clarification requests.
5) Progress and deliveries.
6) Off-site fabrication.
7) Access.
8) Site utilization.
9) Temporary facilities and controls.
10) Work hours.
11) Hazards and risks.
12) Safety and health.
13) Security.
14) Progress cleaning.
15) Quality and work standards.
16) Variations.
17) Leeds requirements

4. Programme Updating: The Contractor’s Coordinator will update the Contractor's own
construction programme immediately after each coordination meeting where updates and/or
revisions to the programme have been made or recognized, and forward such updated program
to the Engineer so that it can be issued concurrently with the meeting report.

5. Reporting: The Engineer will record, prepare and distribute minutes of the meeting to each
party present and to the Employer and others affected by decisions or actions resulting from
the meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 013100

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - Page 10 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1. Refer to Conditions of Contract and Agreement for definitions and specific dates of Contract
Time.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup network diagram.

2. Preliminary (Programme) schedule.
3. Contractor's construction schedule.
4. Submittals Schedule
5. Daily construction reports.
6. Monthly progress reports
7. Material location reports.
8. Field condition reports.
9. Accident reports
10. Wage book and time sheet records.
11. Special reports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for Work sequence and staged completion and occupation
requirements.
2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for distributing meeting and
conference minutes
3. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.
5. Specifications sections for specific submittal requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and
controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and
resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early
start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 1 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled.
The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by
Engineer.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when
activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule
that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity
relationships

F. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

G. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Party, but is a jointly owned, expiring
Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Time for
Completion.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early
start of the successor activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project Time for Completion

H. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an
activity as scheduled.

I. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater
detail.

J. Major Area: A work area or storey of construction as applicable, a separate building as applicable, or
a similar significant construction element.

K. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement, including for example, but
not necessarily limited to:

1. Commencement Date.
2. Completion dates for specific Sections or parts of the Works.
3. Completion date for the whole of the Works.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects/engineers and Employers, and other information specified.

B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three (3) copies of the schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format, identifying corresponding programme activity or event number for each scheduled
date:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal.

2. Specification Part number and title.
3. Submittal type and category (action or informational).
4. Name of manufacturer and/or subcontractor, as applicable.
5. Description of the work covered.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 2 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

6. Scheduled date for the Engineer’s final release or approval.

7. Scheduled dates for Purchase Order and first delivery to Project site.
8. Scheduled date for commencement of installation.

C. Update Submittals Schedules: Submit two (2) copies of update schedules.

D. Programme: Submit two colored print copies of programme, large enough to show entire programme
for the entire contract period. In title block indicate "Initial", "Revised" or "Update" as applicable,
and date of issue:

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, on CD-ROM using Primavera P6 Professional,

or the latest version of Primavera software, and labelled to comply with requirements for
submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

E. Start-up construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded start-up construction schedule will not constitute approval of

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

F. Start-up Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction
period. Show logic ties for activities.

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for
entire construction period.

H. CPM Reports: Concurrent with each CPM schedule submittal, submit three (3) printed copies of each
of the following corresponding, computer-generated report. Format for each activity in reports shall
contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining
duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar
days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by major area, then by activity number and then
early start date, or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending
order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the Work]
until most recent Application for Payment.
5. Resource Allocation and Loading Report: List of all resources allocated to schedule activities,
sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if
known, including but not necessarily limited to:
a. Number and trade classification of workmen.
b. Quantities of materials and products.
c. Contractor's Equipment.

6. Monetary Value Summaries (cash flow)

I. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies daily, and no later than 4:00 pm on the day
immediately following date of report.

J. Monthly Progress Reports: Submit two copies at monthly intervals. Report progress status
coincidental with cut-off date associated with each Monthly Statement payment application.

1. Submit an electronic copy, using latest version of Project Management software, on a Compact
Disk labelled to comply with requirements for submittals.at monthly intervals.

K. Material Location Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 3 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

L. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.

M. Accident Reports: Submit two copies at time of accident event.

N. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting,

with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Engineer's request.

B. Computer Software: Use a professional high-end, reputable project management software, Primavera
latest edition, that has been developed specifically to manage CPM construction programming,
scheduling and reporting indicated for Project.

C. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but
not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
3. Discuss constraints, including phases, sections, work sequences, area separations, interim
milestones, interface with other contractors, statutory agencies and authorities having
jurisdiction; staged completion, partial Employer occupancy and the like, as applicable
4. Review delivery dates for Employer-furnished products (if applicable).
5. Review schedule (programme) for work of Employer's separate contracts.
6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies.
8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures.
9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
10. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction
activities and with programming scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Programme with the list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment
requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.
2. Coordinate each activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper
sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Arrange Submittals Schedule in chronological order by dates required by the programme.
Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when
establishing dates.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 4 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts and Contractor's Construction Program.
2. Submittal: Submit concurrently with the submittal of completed Contractor's Programme. List
those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long
lead-time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Update Submittals: Continuously update Submittals Schedule to reflect actual and on-going
current status, including additions to and changes in timing of submittals. Submit an Update
Submittals Schedule on the day before each regular Progress Meeting.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Procedures: Comply with relevant provisions and requirements contained in the Conditions of
Contract

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final
completion.

1. Time for Completion shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Variation

C. Working Hours:

1. The normal working hours of the Engineer or others with delegated authority are from 08:00 to
17:00 hours on Monday through Friday.

2. The Employer / Engineer or others with delegated authority shall approve the starting and
finishing times, lunch and tea breaks of the dayshift proposed by the Contractor.

3. The Contractor is allowed, subject to the prior approval of the Employer / Engineer or others
with delegated authority to work in multiple shifts as necessary to meet the construction
schedule. Contractor to bear any additional cost due to this requirement.

4. The Contractor shall note that staggered work hours may required to be adopted to ease
congestion on the site, access road routes, security gates, and elsewhere on the Site or to avoid
inconvenience to the existing neighboring contractors, tenants and public as applicable.

D. Arrangement: Arrange activities on programme by Section and/or major area, as applicable

E. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element
of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Long activity durations provide less detail and, therefore, less information with which to manage
a project.
2. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20> days, unless specifically
allowed by Engineer.
3. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items
and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing,
fabrication, and delivery.
4. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section
"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's
construction schedule with submittal schedule.
5. Startup and Testing Time: Indicate and include appropriate time allowances > days for startup
and testing.
6. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Taking-Over,
and allow time for Engineer's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Taking-
Over.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 5 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

7. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for punch list and final
completion.

F. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as
follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.

3. Work by Employer: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Works performed by
Employer.

4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date
indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest
possible delivery date.

5. Employer-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery
date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest
possible delivery date.

6. Provision of Wild Air (if required): Schedule the early execution of part of the HVAC
installations, such as the chillers, pumps, piping, main air handling units and main ductwork, to
ensure sufficient elements of the HVAC installations can be operated to provide conditioned air
to control the environment during the period when internal finishing works and decorations,
susceptible to environmental temperature and humidity variations, are being executed before the
Works are considered substantially complete.

7. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of Project site.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.

8. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

9. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work.
Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated
with other construction activities to provide for the following:

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 6 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Structural completion.
b. Permanent space enclosure.
c. Completion of mechanical installation.
d. Completion of electrical installation.
e. Substantial Completion.

G. Sectional Completions and Milestones: Include in programme, milestones and any and all sectional
completion requirements, indicated in Contract Documents, including but not necessarily limited to
Commencement Date, dates for Taking-Over, sections or parts of the Works, and date for Taking-
Over the whole of the Works, and any other milestone specified in the Conditions of Contract.

H. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered RFIs.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.

I. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 21 or more calendar days behind the
current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor
intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days,
crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be
accomplished.

J. Cash Flow Correlation: Provide a cash flow correlation line, indicating on the line, monetary value
volume of the Works as planned and as actually performed.

K. Tabulate cash flow correlation, coincidental with cutoff dates associated with Monthly Statement
payment applications, and use as a basis for preparation of Cash Flow Estimate submittal.

L. Contract Variations: If and when requested by the Engineer in connection with any proposed or
instructed contract Variation, prepare and submit a time-impact analysis, using fragnets if necessary,
to demonstrate the effect of the proposed or instructed Variation on the overall programme.

M. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare and update programs and schedules using the following
software program that has been developed specifically to manage programming and scheduling.

1. Primavera project manager, Latest Version for Windows operating system (Professional
Version), and Primavera Contract Manger latest edition.

2.3 PRELIMINARY PROGRAMME (BAR-CHART SCHEDULE)

A. Preliminary Programme: Submit within fourteen (14) calendar days after letter of award, preliminary
horizontal bar-chart-type or network-type programme with Tender in accordance with the
requirements of the Conditions of Contract and appended schedules to “Instructions to Tenderers”.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a
continuous vertical line. Outline significant activities for first 90 days of the project. Include skeleton
diagram for the remainder of the Works and a cash flow prediction based on indicated activities.

2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 7 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 21 days of date established for the Notice to Award.
Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton
diagram for the remainder of the Works and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated
activities.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare and submit a Contractor's Programme, not later than thirty (30) calendar days
after letter of award, using a CPM network analysis diagram. Failure to comply with any and all of
the above mentioned requirements will cause a withholding of the monthly Payments to the
Contractor. Base programme on the Preliminary Programme submitted with Tender and whatever
updating and feedback received to date. Follow procedures and produce CPM schedule and reports
in such form and detail as specified. Incorporate additional requirements, as the Engineer shall
reasonably prescribe.

1. Develop, finalize and submit completed CPM schedule and reports for the Engineer’s review
and consent no later than fifty six (56) days after the Letter of Award, unless specified otherwise
in the Particular Conditions of Contract.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not
excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates,
regardless of Engineer 's approval of the schedule.

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule
information.

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress.
Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and and Monthly Statement payment application
dates.

4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time and indicate number of shifts per workday.

5. Use calendar to identify and indicate holidays and other non-work days

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Works. Using the
start-up network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate for each activity, the estimated time duration, sequence requirements,
resource requirements and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities and
monetary value. Include dates and estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals.

b. Mobilization and demobilization.
c. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Work by Employer that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
i. Testing and commissioning.
j. Punch list and final completion.
k. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion
dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network.

Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the
CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 8 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Use resource-levelling method in computing the CPM schedule

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with
most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
path.

5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the
CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Engineer's approval prior to
assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities.

a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Engineer
b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission,
prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed
change on the overall project schedule.

F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight
"early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.

2. Description of activity.
3. Principal events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Calendar for each activity
9. Total float or slack time.
10. Resource allocation and loading of activity
11. Average size of workforce.
12. Monetary value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
13. Holidays and non-work days
14. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making updates and/or revisions to schedule, prepare (in
addition to other specified CPM reports) tabulated reports showing the following:
15. Identification of activities that have changed.
16. Changes in early and late start dates.
17. Changes in early and late finish dates.
18. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
19. Changes in the critical path.
20. Changes in total float or slack time.
21. Changes in usage or availability of resources
22. Changes in the Contract Period.
23. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. Indicate actual
versus original planned progress.

G. Monetary Value Summaries: Prepare cash flow predictions based on indicated activities

1. In first list, tabulate the following:

a. Activity number.
b. Early finish date.
c. Monetary value.
d. Cumulative monetary value.

2. In second list, tabulate the following:

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 9 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Activity number.
b. Early finish date.
c. Monetary value.
d. Cumulative monetary value.

3. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress
meetings.

a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value
completed" with total at bottom.
b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.

H. Execution Method Statement: Submit with the Contractor's Construction Program a method statement
more detailed than that submitted with Tender, addressing all aspects of work and outlining the overall
safety, health and environmental aspects, access, access to third parties, logistics, storage areas,
security measures. The Method Statement shall be exhaustive and shall cover all major components
of execution. Include in the Method Statement a description of the management and implementation
methods for the engineering, procurement, transportation, installation, testing and commissioning of
all major materials and equipment. Identify any specific coordination/interface requirements with
other contractors' work. Give a description of all temporary construction requirements including
detailed location of construction plant, equipment capacities, clearances, etc. supplemented by
relevant sketches.

2.5 REPORTS AND DASHBOARDS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information
concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events (refer to special reports).
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Site Instructions received.
16. Engineer’s Inspections.
17. Services connected and disconnected.
18. Equipment or system tests and startups (if applicable).
19. Partial completions and occupancies.
20. Substantial Completions authorized.
21. Any other general or specific information, requested by the Engineer to be reported.

B. Weekly Reports and Dashboards: The Contractor shall prepare weekly reports and dashboards, and
submit to the Employer / Engineer or others with delegated authority on the designated day of each
week as decided by the Employer / Engineer or others with delegated authority. Generally, the
submission of weekly reports and dashboards shall be two days prior to the day of the progress
meetings. The cut-off date of data date for this report shall be the Friday of the previous week. The
weekly report shall consist as a minimum the following:

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 10 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Updates of actual progress information

2. Actual utilization of manpower
3. Construction equipment
4. Status of submissions

C. Monthly Progress Reports: Prepare and submit monthly progress reports, summarizing activities,
achievements, advancements and significant events at Project site in month preceding, and reporting
current progress status of Work; including but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Summary of the information included in Daily Construction Reports for the month.
2. Summary of the information included in Material Location Reports for the month.
3. Latest update Submittals Schedule.
4. Progress Review Statement: Refer to latest Update Contractor's Construction Programme;
include:
a. Listing of all current month programmed activities and report whether each is on time,
ahead of schedule or behind schedule in relation to original Contractor's Construction
Programme.
b. On-going comparative line plot of Cash Flow Estimate against Interim Payment
Certificates.
c. Description of means, methods and actions to be taken in following month to expedite
construction behind schedule and ensure current and subsequent activities will be
completed within Time for Completion.

5. Status of Instructions/Information Requests: An updated list of RFI (Request for Information),

NOV (Notice of Variation), EI (Engineer’s Instruction), NCR (Non Conformance Reports),
indicating their status.
6. Updated Manpower Loaded Schedule (including Histogram & ‘S’ curve): The Manpower
Loaded Schedule included with the approved Schedule of Works shall be updated with actual
expended manpower and detailed with forecast manpower to be utilized. The Manpower
Histogram shall be updated every week to compare and reflect the actual manpower at site. The
histogram and ‘S’ curve shall show actual and forecast against planned.
7. Progress Photos: The Contractor shall note the requirements contained elsewhere in this Section.
8. Any other general or specific information, requested by the Engineer to be reported.

D. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials
delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported
plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for
materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.

E. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the
Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information.
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing
the Contract Documents.

F. Accident Reports: On the occurrence of any accident which causes personal injury, or damage to the
Works or any other property, prepare a detailed accident report and submit directly to Engineer within
one day of occurrence. Include details of date and time, location, prevailing conditions, chain of events
and causes leading up to accident, persons involved, response by Contractor's personnel and result or
effect of accident. Obtain and attach witness statements, photographs and sketches as applicable.

1. On the occurrence of an accident or event which causes serious injury to any person, summon
emergency services, notify appropriate authorities and inform Engineer immediately.

2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Employer within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 11 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,
whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events,
persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar
pertinent information. Advise Employer in advance when these events are known or predictable.

2.7 WAGE BOOK AND TIME SHEET RECORDS

A. Wage Books and Time Sheets: Keep and maintain accurate and proper wage books and time sheets
of wages paid to and time worked by all workmen employed by Contractor and subcontractors at
Project site. Comply with regulations and requirements, if any, of authorities having jurisdiction.
Store wage books and time sheets in field office and make available for Engineer’s inspection and
reference during normal working hours. If requested, produce and submit photocopies to Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM
scheduling.

1. In-House Option: Employer may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor
employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit
qualifications.
2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged
delays, and time impact.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual
construction progress and activities. Issue schedule two days before each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to,
changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Engineer/Employer, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of
the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

END OF SECTION 013200

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - Page 12 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
3. Final completion construction photographs.
4. Preconstruction video recordings/DVDs.
5. Periodic construction video recordings/DVD.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.

2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as
project record documents at Project closeout.
3. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site clearing
operations commence.
4. Other relevant specification sections.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects/designers and Employers, Engineer, and other
information specified.

B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site with notation of vantage points marked for location and
direction of each photograph or videotape/DVD... Include same information as corresponding set
of photographs videotape/DVD.

C. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within 3 days of taking photographs.

1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.

2. Format: Minimum 1600 by 1200 pixels, 400 dpi minimum, in unaltered original files, with
same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date- and time- stamped, in folder named by date
of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.

3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file
metadata tag:

a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
c. Name of Engineer.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - Page 1 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point.
g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

D. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within five days of taking
photographs.

1. Format: 203-by-254-mm smooth-surface matte color prints on single-weight commercial-

grade photographic paper, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for
standard ring binder.
2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression
with the following information:

a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
c. Name of Engineer.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point.
g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

3. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of corresponding digital image electronic files with
each submittal of prints. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit
images that have the same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped.

a. Digital image files shall be for the Engineer’s and Employer's free and unrestricted
use.

E. Video Recordings/DVD’s: Submit two copies of each videotape/DVD within five days of
recording.

1. Submit video recordings in digital video disc format acceptable to Engineer.

2. Identification: On each copy provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of photographer.
c. Name of and Engineer.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date video recording was recorded.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point).
g. Weather conditions at time of recording.

3. Transcript: Prepared on A4 paper, punched and bound in heavy-duty, ring, vinyl-covered

binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover
sheet with same label information as corresponding video recording tape/dvd. Include name
of Project and date of video recording tape/DVD on each page.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Photographer Qualifications: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - Page 2 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested,
including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required
to produce clear, well-lit photographs.

1.6 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Employer for unlimited
reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor
size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1600 by 1200 pixels and 400 dpi.

B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital color videotape in full size disc in format
acceptable to Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to
clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without
alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.

2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site,
available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted
to Engineer.

D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Site and

surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different
vantage points, as directed by Engineer.

1. Take additional photographs as required to record in sufficient number and detail to:

a. Show conditions of existing buildings, structures, site improvements and features on

and/or adjacent to Site, accurately recording any physical condition, that might
otherwise be misconstrued as damage caused by subsequent demolition or
construction operations.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - Page 3 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. Show conditions of existing buildings, structures, assemblies, features or other

components scheduled for selective demolition or dismantling, accurately recording
physical condition, for subsequent reconstruction, restoration or rehabilitation

E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take monthly photographs as necessary to illustrate the

detailed progress onsite and to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for
Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs
were taken. Include low altitude (under 100m) aerial photos taken by UAV/drone or equivalent.

F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 72 color photographs after date of Substantial
Completion for submission as project record documents. The Engineer will inform photographer of
desired vantage points.

1. Do not include date stamp.

G. Additional Photographs: The Engineer may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs
specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the
Contract Sum

1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.

2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.
3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the
following:

a. Special events planned at Project site.

b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.
c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These
photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances.
d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.
e. Extra record photographs at time of Taking-Over.
f. Employer's request for special publicity photographs.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS/DVD

A. Video Recording /DVD Photographer: Engage a qualified videographer to record construction

video recordings/DVD.

B. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show
area of construction. Display continuous running time and date. At start of each video
recording/DVD, record weather conditions from local newspaper or television and the actual
temperature reading at Project site.

C. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording /DVD by dubbing audio narration off-site after video
recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed, recent events, and planned
activities. At each change in location, describe vantage point, location, direction (by compass point),
and elevation or story of construction.

1. Confirm date and time at beginning and end of recording.

2. Begin each video recording with name of Project, Contractor's name, videographer's name,
and Project location.

D. Transcript: Provide a typewritten transcript of the narration. Display images and running time
captured from video recording opposite the corresponding narration segment.

E. Preconstruction Video Recording/DVD: Before starting construction/DVD, record video recording

of Site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Engineer.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - Page 4 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Show conditions of existing buildings, structures, site improvements and features on and/or
adjacent to Site, accurately recording any physical condition, that might otherwise be
misconstrued as damage caused by subsequent demolition or construction operations.
2. Show conditions of existing buildings, structures, assemblies, features or other components
scheduled for selective demolition or dismantling, accurately recording physical condition,
for subsequent reconstruction, restoration or rehabilitation.

F. Periodic Construction Video Recordings/DVD: Record video recording monthly, adjusted to

coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points
to show status of construction and progress since last video recordings /DVD were recorded.
Minimum recording time shall be 60 minutes.

END OF SECTION 013233

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - Page 5 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination

Drawings
2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule and construction photographs.
3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
Delegated-Design Submittals and for erecting mock-ups.
4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
5. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
6. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties project record
documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
7. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
8. Specification Sections in addition to Division 1 for specific submittal requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Engineer's
responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as action submittals.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require
Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as
informational submittals.

C. Shop Drawings: Include but are not limited to the following:

1. Setting diagrams.
2. Construction details, plans, profiles and sections
3. All related single line diagrams, schematics, necessary to secure construction NOC as per
the local authorities’ requirements
4. Design mix formulas.
5. Schedules.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 1 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

All shop drawing shall be supported by the necessary calculations, catalog cuts, specification
reference as per concerned authority requirement.

All shop drawings shall be prepared and submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to submission
to concerned authority for approval, as required by the local authorities.

Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not Shop Drawings.

The Contractor shall note that the Tender drawings and subsequently Contract Drawings / Issued
for Construction Drawings provided to the Contractor represent the extent of design information
available at the time of Contract Award and it is the Contractor’s responsibility to validate site
conditions, prepare shop drawings based on site conditions and constraints with all relevant
information and details prior to submission as detailed shop drawings or working drawings for the
review of the Employer / Engineer or review by others including concerned authority. The
Contractor shall schedule the submittal of shop drawings in a timely manner to achieve the
requirements of the Milestone Dates, Sectional Completion Dates and the Time for Completion.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and timely provision of shop drawings which
shall indicate proposed materials and methods of construction, fabrication, erection, layout and
setting out, diagrams on various systems, equipment control, and other descriptive data, catalogs
and brochures required to show that material, equipment and system and position thereof shall
confirm to the Specifications and Drawings

Coordination, shop, or working drawings are to be prepared and submitted by the Contractor in
accordance with Tender Documents, Contract Documents and Issued for Construction Documents.
Certain drawings included in the Tender are for Contractor’s guidance in the evaluation of
coordination and installation interface requirements. The Contractor shall prepare the necessary
shop drawings at interface with other projects / existing systems based on actual conditions and
introduce adjustments to provided information on Contract and issued for construction drawings and
submit to the Engineer for approval. The adjustments shall be supported by site surveys, site photos,
as-built drawings and or shop drawings of under construction systems at the interface.

Contractor shall prepare all shop drawings and As Built drawings to BIM compliant “Level 400”
shop drawings. Contractor to allow in their costing for converting the design drawings to BIM
compliance

The Contractor shall include for additional shop drawings in 1:50, 1:25 scales as required for
detailed coordination.

D. Shop Drawings and As-Built Documentation

1. Allow for all costs involved in the preparation and submission of BIM compliant Shop
drawings and As-Built Drawings showing accurately to scale full details of installation, sizes
and dimensions, connections, etc., all according to Specification and to be submitted as
follows as minimum:
• Three (3) reproducible transparency of all As-Built Drawings and final BIM model
• Four (4) sets of Drawings prints folded to size and enclosed in transparent plastic
envelopes of all As-Built Drawings properly indexed and bounded in size files with hard
covers +CD.

2. Provide BIM compliant Shop drawings of the existing and proposed networks for Engineer
approval.
3. Provide BIM compliant final As Built Drawings for all concerned Authorities, as applicable.

E. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from
another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An
FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and
external users are able to access files.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 2 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

F. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used
for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout
document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Engineer and additional time for handling
and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 90 days of construction. List those submittals required
to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time
for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for
submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action, informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Engineer’s final release or approval.
g. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
h. Scheduled dates for installation.
i. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be
provided by Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial
submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 3 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.

a. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract
Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to
permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required Engineer will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as

initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. No extension of the Time for Completion will be authorized because of Contractor's failure
to transmit submittals to Engineer sufficiently in advance of the concerned operations to
permit processing, and resubmittal if necessary

D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal
item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 150 by 200 mm on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Engineer.
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Engineer.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name and address of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A) or as agreed upon with the Engineer.

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
l. Other necessary identification.

E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal
file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 4 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by
a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-
061000.01.A). or as agreed upon with the Engineer

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Engineer.
4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Engineer.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Name of subcontractor.
g. Name of supplier.
h. Name of manufacturer.
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
l. Related physical samples submitted directly.
m. Other necessary identification.

5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata:

a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
e. Insert additional required information.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Engineer.

G. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate and identify on submittals deviations from
the Contract Documents.

H. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Engineer observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may
serve as final submittal.

1. For submittals requiring concurrent review, submit one extra copy in addition to specified
number of copies to the Engineer.

I. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. The Engineer will discard, without review,
submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.

1. Cover Letter: On attached, numbered, separate sheet(s), prepared on the Contractor's

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested
by the Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract
Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information
as the related submittal.

a. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Transmittal Form: Use a form acceptable to and approved by the Engineer Provide locations
on form for the following information:

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 5 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Contract name.
b. Employer’s name.
c. Date.
d. Destination (To:).
e. Source (From:).
f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
g. Category and type of submittal.
h. Submittal purpose and description.
i. Specification Section number and title.
j. Indication of full or partial submittal.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
m. Remarks.
n. Signature of transmitter.

J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action
stamp.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from
Engineer's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual
Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to the Electronic Transmission
System.

a. The Engineer, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
3. Initial Submittal: Submit two copies of each submittal where selection of options, colour,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. The Engineer will return submittal
with options selected.
4. Action Submittals: Submit four paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated
Submit additional copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals.
The Engineer will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one
returned copy as a Record (As-Built) Document.
5. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. The Engineer will not return copies.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 6 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

6. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements

specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
7. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed
by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.

8. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type
of product or equipment.

1. Provide only copies of original manufacturer published or printed product information,

catalogues, data, colour charts and the like.
2. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
3. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
4. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

b. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.Original publication or digitally-scanned electronic copy
in JPEG format.
c. Manufacturer's product specifications.
d. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
e. Standard color charts.
f. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
g. Testing by recognized testing agency.
h. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Availability and delivery time information.

5. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Mill reports.
e. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
f. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
g. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
h. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.

6. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

7. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. Four paper copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. The Engineer, will
return two copies.

C. Calculations: The Contractor shall be responsible for any design or design calculations, which may
be specified or required by the Employer / Engineer or others with delegated authority, in order to
establish or demonstrate that his submittal conforms to the requirements of the Contractor for

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 7 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

quality, performance or in any other aspect. The Contractor shall provide for any design and
engineering work associated with the builder’s work and coordination with other contractors.

D. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions; in SI units unless otherwise indicated or directed.

b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns
h. Schedules.
i. Design calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
m. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
n. Seal and signature of professional Engineer if specified.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least A4 size, and no larger than A0 size, unless otherwise approved.

4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit four black-line or colour prints. The Engineer will return
one print.
b. Final Submittal: Submit four black-line or colour prints, unless otherwise indicated.
Submit additional prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance
manuals. The Engineer will retain three prints; remainder will be returned. Mark up
and retain one returned print as a Record (As-Built) Drawing.

E. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Section "Project Management and

Coordination". and "Summary of Multiple Contracts

F. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal
and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in
one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples in field offices at Project site, in a secure,
lockable store room, provided and equipped specifically for that purpose. Make available for

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 8 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

the Engineer's reference during normal working hours, for quality-control comparisons
throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final
acceptance of construction associated with each set.

4. Prepare physical units of materials or products Comply with requirements in

Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line the Engineer, will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically
identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and
texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial
sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials;
complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern;
color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. The Engineer will retain one
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. marked with action taken

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

G. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following
information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of space.
4. Location within space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. Two paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. The
Engineer will return one auctioned marked copy.

H. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Construction Progress Documentation."

I. Subcontract List: Prepare and submit a list identifying subcontractor individuals or firms proposed
for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated
to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of the entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
4. Submit subcontract list in the following format:
a. Number of Copies: two paper copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated
The Engineer will return one actioned marked copy.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 9 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

J. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Parts.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. The
Engineer will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarised statement that includes signature of the
Contractor, testing agency, or design professional responsible for preparing certification.
Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to
sign documents on behalf of the company.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Section 1 Part 10 "Quality
Requirements

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified.

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification
(WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on American Welding Society (AWS) forms.
Include names of firms and personnel certified.

M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized
by manufacturer for this specific Project.

N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.

O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements
in the Contract Documents.

R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests
performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.

S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.

T. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 10 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of
product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation
of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for
adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either
during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."

Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include
list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include
page numbers.

Z. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents

manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product
or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer.
Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

AA. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service
representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making

report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements
and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Parts.

BB. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance
or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage,
amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

CC. Payment Certificates: The Contractor shall take into consideration the Guidelines provided by
ADDC when submitting Payment Certificates.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 11 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES (if applicable)

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products
and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Engineer.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit digitally-electronic file and three] paper copies of certificate, signed and
sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to
Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these
services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW AND APPROVAL

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other
Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field
dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to the Engineer.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01

Section "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Contract name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of
Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ENGINEER 'S ACTION

A. General: The Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear the Contractor's approval stamp
and will return them without action.

B. Engineer's Action: The Engineer's review is limited only to checking conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. It is not conducted
for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of details, dimensions or quantities,
nor substantiating integrity or compatibility, nor confirming instructions for installation or
performance. The Engineer's approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor of responsibility
for compliance with specified provisions and the Contract Document requirements.

C. Action Submittals: The Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it to the Contractor. The Engineer will stamp each submittal with
an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where the submittal is marked "APPROVED", the work covered
by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the Contract Documents. Final
acceptance of the work will depend on that compliance.
2. Final-but-Restricted Release: Where the submittal is marked "APPROVED AS NOTED",
the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the Engineer's

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 12 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

notations and corrections on the submittal and the Contract Documents. Final acceptance of
the work will depend on that compliance.
3. Returned for Resubmittal: Where the submittal is marked "NOT APPROVED, REVISE
AND RESUBMIT", do not proceed with the work covered by the submittal, including
purchase, fabrication, delivery, or other activity for the product submitted. Revise or prepare
a new submittal according to the Engineer's notations and corrections.
4. Rejected: Where the submittal is marked "NOT APPROVED, RESUBMIT" or
"REJECTED", do not proceed with the work covered by the submittal. Prepare a new
submittal for a product that complies with the Contract Documents

D. Informational Submittals: The Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements The Engineer will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.

E. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals
has received prior approval from The Engineer.

F. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.

G. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

3.3 MOCKUP REQUIREMENTS (if applicable)

A. General: Construct and erect complete mock-up in accordance with the directions of the Employer
and Engineer, and in the location determined by the Engineer and as required in the Contract
Documents.

B. Comply with the comments of the Employer and the Engineer with the respect to the product, colour
scheme and workmanship.

C. Revise product submittal, if necessary, in accordance with the Employer and the Engineer
Comments

END OF SECTION 013300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - Page 13 of 13

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 013529 - HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section details the Contractor’s responsibilities in relation to Health, Safety and
Emergency response procedures. In general, the full Health and Safety responsibility for the
site and any off-site areas associated with the Contract (haul roads, site access points,
manufacturers and suppliers’ yards) shall be the full responsibility of the Contractor.

1.2 HEALTH AND SAFETY

A. The Contractor shall provide for the safety of the public in conformance with the provisions in
accordance with all relevant authority conditions of public safety as specified in standard
specifications and these particular specifications.

In case that the health and safety requirements as stated in this particular specification
contradict with those stated on the standard specification those stated in the particular
specifications will prevail.

The Contractor must provide and maintain a safe, hazard-free and healthy workplace for his
employees, for his subcontractor employees, for the Employer, the Engineer, his
representatives, visitors and the general public.

The Contractor shall provide health and safety measures during all phases of the contract and
shall comply with all Laws, Ministerial Orders, contractual regulations and Abu Dhabi
Municipality guidelines related to site and construction safety, these include, but are not limited
to the following:

1. Federal Law No.8 (1980)

2. Ministerial Order No.32 (1982)
3. Ministerial Order 37/2 (1982)
4. Federal Law 24/ 1999
5. Decree No. 42 (2009), Environmental, Health and Safety Management System for Abu
Dhabi.
6. Abu Dhabi Occupational Safety & Health Center - System Framework, Version 3.0/
3.01 (OSHAD SF), including the Manual, Elements, Mechanisms, Occupational
Standards & Guideline Values and relevant Codes of Practice.
7. Standard Conditions of Construction Contract
8. Masdar’s HSE Requirements
9. OHSAS 18001:2007 / ISO 45001:2018 and ISO 14001:2015
10. QCC Specifications
11. USACE EM-385-1-1.

B. Safety Management. The Contractor is obligated to pro-actively manage safety during all
phases of the works using the following primary safety management tools:

1. Week Look-Ahead Planner

2. Activity Hazard Analysis and Job Task Analysis
3. Site Safety Inspector Reporting
4. Safety Induction, Orientations, and Training
5. Certifying Competency of Workers
6. Risk Review Inspections

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 1 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

7. Weekly & Monthly Safety Statistics Reporting

8. Weekly Site Inspection
9. Regular HSE Meetings on Site
10. Provision of Competent Staff approved by OSHAD Center

C. Planning Schedule. During the project pre-mobilization planning and scheduling phase
the Contractor shall identify high risk hazardous activities for each work element, and
include all safety requirements into the planning schedule, before works commence. For such
purpose, a mobilization plan shall be submitted for Engineer’s review.

D. Risk Assessment. The Contractor shall make provisions to ensure safe systems of work
are in place. The Contractor shall carry out job task analysis (JTA) or activity hazard
analysis (AHA) for high risk hazardous activities by:

1. Identifying high risk hazardous activities for each work element.

2. Making provisions for engineering control measures and resources (time, manpower,
equipment) to either eliminate, isolate or protect site personnel from the identified
hazard(s), before the work commences.

E. Orientation, Inductions and Training. The emphasis of the Contractor’s health and safety
plan shall be the prevention of occupational injury and ill health by providing certified
training. All modes of training, such as pictures, animations, oral, and written aides shall
be considered to ensure the targeted employee understands the information being
shared. Provisions shall be made to make sure that there shall not be any language barriers in
delivering the training program.

The Contractor shall ensure that all their site personnel receive orientation/ Induction and
training in accordance with Ministerial Order 32 (1982), Article (3).

The Contractor shall ensure during the preconstruction period, that all their project-based
employees, including Sub-Contractors receive induction in the site specific hazards and safe
work practices particular to the employees work activities and the approved project specific
health and safety plan, this exercise shall be documented.

All project health and safety employees must be made aware of their own responsibility to work
in a safe manner.

F. Contractor’s Site Specific Health and Safety Plan. The Contractor shall develop and
implement a project health and safety plan that is site specific.

1. The Contractor’s health and safety plan shall be submitted for the Employers and
Engineer’s review and approval within 30 days of the Contract Commencement Date, or
at least 10 working days prior to starting any field work.
2. No work shall commence prior to the approval of the Contractor’s health and safety
plan by the Engineer.
3. The Contractor’s health and safety plan shall be site specific, describe in detail all of the
Contractor’s safety personnel, procedures, precautions, safety check lists, accident
records, operational procedures and other safety documents that will be used throughout
the project.
4. The Contractor’s health and safety plan shall include the involvement and active
participation of all project employees by requiring safety training which will promote
recognition of unsafe acts, unsafe conditions and significant near miss incidents that
require reporting and immediate corrective action to be taken.

G. The Contractor’s project health and safety plan which will be prepared in accordance
with OSHAD SF Code of Practice 53.1 - OSH Construction Management Plan V3.1 May
2018 and shall include, but not limited to the following:

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 2 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Responsibility/Accountability/Key Line Personnel

2. Statement of Contractor’s Safety and Health Policy and Compliance Requirement
Statement signed by top management
3. Safety Organization diagram (Organogram)
4. Identification of Competent/Qualified staff approved by OSHAD Center
5. Scope of Work Evaluation
6. Induction and Hazard Recognition Training Program
7. Hazard/Risk/Exposure Evaluation
8. Activity Hazard Analysis and Control Measures
9. Contractor’s Periodic Safety Inspections/Audits
10. Contractor’s Weekly Safety Planning Look-Ahead Plan
11. List of specific safety equipment to be provided and a schedule for its delivery.
12. Hazard Correction System
13. Training and Instruction Policy
14. Project Site Orientation Plan
15. Accident/Exposure/Investigation
16. Emergency Action Plan
17. Written Hazard Communication Program
18. Site Specific Work Zone Traffic Control Plans for Movement of Contractor’s Vehicles
19. A Scaffold Management System
20. Written Trenching/Shoring Plan
21. Written Fall Protection Plan
22. Permit to Work Forms
23. List of qualifications of all safety staff.
24. A list of all safety procedures to be utilized and a schedule for their submission.
25. Isolated/Protected Shade Area Plan
26. Isolated/Protected Drinking Water Plan
27. Hearing Conservation Plan (if applicable)
28. Bus Pick Up/Drop off Points and Station Plan(s) for Movement of Workers.
29. EHS Performance Reporting (Monthly)
30. Site Safety Awareness and Incentives Plans
31. Record Keeping
32. Incentives (recognition and rewards) program
33. Disciplinary action plan
34. Other programs as specified by regulatory authorities or contract requirements

H. The following specific requirements shall be addressed in the Contractor’s health

and safety plan as a minimum:

1. Contractor’s Safety Responsibilities. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for

ensuring that their works, and that of their subcontractors, comply with the safety
requirements of the Contract Document, and any other relevant regulations issued by
government authorities.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for ensuring that the approved Contractor’s
Project Safety Plan is implemented and adhered to throughout the duration and extent of
the project.

2. H & S Meetings and Accident Prevention:

a. Contractor’s project safety meetings will be held at least once a month at the
jobsite.
• The meetings shall be convened and conducted by the project H & S manager
or project H & S engineer.
• All Construction Manager(s) & Site Engineers are expected to be in
attendance.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 3 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

• Each subcontractor will have a responsible safety representative present to

follow through on information and resolutions discussed and adopted at these
meetings.
• The Engineer's safety representative(s) may attend these meetings.

b. The agenda for the Contractor’s project safety meetings will generally include, but
not be limited to the following:
• Development of timely topics for discussion and dissemination of safety
bulletins signs and notices.
• A review of the safety inspections, audits, accidents and significant near
misses.
• Identification of potential safety hazards in the coming month, discussion and
implementation of steps to be taken to avoid the same.
• Appointment of safety representatives for subcontractors.
• Two-week look ahead risk mitigation planning
• High risk activities
• Activity hazard analysis
• Hazard recognition training and tool box talks
• Safety resources
• Safety performance
• Recognition and rewards
• Lessons learned

c. Contractor’s Construction Manager(s) & Site Engineers shall be responsible to

plan and accomplish their work with due regard for the safety of all individuals on
the job site.
• Contractor shall be expected to eliminate all possible hazards when planning
the work under their control.
• Subcontractors must observe and correct any accident-producing practices
before injury occurs.

d. If an accident does occur, Contractor shall investigate to determine the cause and
take the required corrective action to prevent a recurrence.

e. All accidents shall be immediately reported to the Contractor’s project H & S

manager, Project Manager and to the Engineer. External communication shall be
occurred within time frame specified by the Law & as per Mechanism 11 OSHAD
SF OHSMS requirements. All authorities such as Police, Municipality, and
Ministry of Labor etc. shall be notified for all major incident(s).

3. First Aid, Medical Facilities and Medical Items.

a. Both office and mobile first aid facilities in all Contractors site vehicles shall be
provided at the project site, and where work activity is in progress.
b. A location map of the project indicating routing to emergency facilities shall be
posted in the first aid station and on the project safety notice board, along with the
list of designated emergency facilities; i.e., hospitals, doctors, ambulances and fire
department, and their respective contact numbers.
c. The medical supply items for first aid purposes shall be in accordance with the
UAE regulations and Ministerial Orders. Contractor shall make sure that all
medical professionals shall be approved by Health Authority Abu Dhabi (HAAD).

4. Accident Notification, Reporting, and Doctors Release. The Engineer shall be verbally
notified immediately of any accidents, in advance of a written report.
a. If serious injury is apparent or suspected, utilize the pre-established
emergency hospital services.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 4 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. The telephone number shall be prominently displayed at all

site locations.
c. For small cuts, scratches, etc. approved mobile first aid kits shall be available from
the Contractor, and for each subcontractor.

All lost time injuries (LTI’s), property damage accidents and material losses shall be
reported in writing to the Engineer within 24 hours of the accident.

In the event of an employee being sent to a Doctor for medical checkup and/or
treatment, a release shall be obtained from the Doctor stating the number of days off
work required, as applicable, and confirmation whether:
• The employee is not medically fit for duty;
• The employee is fit for light duty; or,
• The employee is fit for duty.
• A copy of this release will accompany the accident report.

5. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and Monitoring Equipment:

Minimum requirements for PPE shall be the wearing of hard hats, safety vest and safety
footwear by all personnel, including subcontractors.

Supplemental requirements for PPE shall be developed and provided to cover specific
items such as goggles, protective clothing, safety harness, ear protection, as per the
hazard(s) associated with the work activity and environment.

All PPE shall conform to the requirements of CoP OSHAD SF 2.0 - Personal Protective
Equipment V3.1 June 2018 and shall be approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the design, construction and application of
all safety equipment and systems used by themselves and their subcontractor(s).

The Contractor shall provide all their employees with the necessary PPE to carry out
their assigned site activities in a safe manner as per the requirements of Federal Law(s)
& OSHAD SF V3.0/ 3.1 requirements.

The Contractor shall provide monitoring equipment to measure both ambient and
personal noise levels.

The Contractor shall provide gas monitoring equipment to measure oxygen, flammable,
toxic and other harmful gases that may exist inside a confined space.

All monitoring equipment shall meet ANSI/BS/EN or equivalent standards, be routinely

calibrated and certified by an independent third party testing company having minimum
ten (10) years’ experience, and approved by the Engineer.

6. Fire Protection:

Suitable type and number of portable fire extinguishers shall be provided at the job site,
in the offices, mess, welfare compound and site work areas, and installed in all vehicles
of supervisor personnel for the complete duration of the project period, in accordance
with UAE Fire & Life Safety Code of Practice 2011/ 2017 & OSHAD SF V3.0/ 3.1
requirements.

All heavy equipment, mobile and stationery plant, welding machines,

compressors etc., shall have suitable fire extinguisher at close proximity or inside the
cabin.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 5 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

7. Fire Prevention. No burning of rubbish or debris shall be permitted on the project or

facilities.

a. All fuel storage tanks shall be properly grounded and vented,

provided with suitable types of fire extinguishers.
• "Danger" & "No Smoking" warning and prohibitory signs shall be
prominently placed at these tanks in Arabic, English, and Urdu languages, as
required.
• Fuel storage tanks above ground shall be bunded to prevent the spread of
liquids, in the event of fuel leakages in tanks the bund wall shall hold a
capacity of 110% the volume of the tank, and the floor area shall be protected
to minimize the ingress of liquids into the ground.
• The bund wall and floor design shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.

b. ii. Welding operations, if any, shall only be permitted in designated controlled

areas, and shall be carried out in accordance with standards and recommendation
of OSHAD SF V3.0/ 3.1
• Adequate fire extinguishing equipment shall be provided in the immediate
vicinity of welding operations whenever combustible material is exposed.
• Workmen shall be shielded from welding rays, sparks, slag, etc., by face
shields, screens and filtered goggles.
• A permit-to-work management control system shall be enacted during all
welding hot work operations.

c. iii. All compressed gas cylinders and acetylene cylinders shall comply with the
requirements of OSHAD SF V3.0/ 3.11for construction, use and storage.
• All oxygen and acetylene cylinders, full or empty shall have safety valves,
shall be kept separately in a shaded storage area, stored upright, tied off,
capped, chained in place, and periodically inspected.
• The welding works area shall be designated as a "No Smoking" zone and sign
posted.
• Flash back arrestors shall be used at all times.

8. Scaffolds, Access and Positive Fall Protection. Scaffolds shall be provided for any work
that cannot be accomplished safely from the ground.

a. Safe and defined access shall be provided to all work areas.

• Ladders shall conform to applicable standards and inspected on a regular
basis for defective or worn parts.
• Design and management operating details for erection and use of scaffolds
shall be evaluated by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
• The Engineer's approval however shall not remove any responsibility for
scaffold design, construction and maintenance from the Contractor.
• A scaffold management system shall be used to ensure that the scaffolds to
be used are:
- Designed and approved by a certified competent person.
- A method statement shall be provided for the Engineer’s review and
approval for both the erection and disassembly of scaffolds.
- The scaffolds shall be erected and disassembled by a certified scaffolder.
- The scaffolds shall be inspected by a competent person, viz., a scaffolder
or safety inspector prior to use.
- A scaffold tag system shall be used to record and inform end users
that the structure is safe or unsafe to use during its service life.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 6 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

9. Fall protection equipment shall be used whenever a worker of any trade works on an
elevated platform 1.2 meters or greater from the ground and other permanent or
substantial footing(s).

All fall protective activities shall be in accordance with the approved Contractor’s
fall protection safety plan, which shall include details of, but not be limited to;

a. Horizontal and vertical fall protection devices

b. Operating procedures
c. Training,
d. Certification of competency and
e. Defined key staff responsibilities.

10. Work Zones - Working Near Live Vehicle Traffic: Contactor shall ensure crash worthy
barrier protection system(s) are provided to physically protect workers from errant
vehicles entering a work zone, whilst working near or adjacent to live vehicle traffic.

The work zone and protection barrier system shall be in accordance with the
Employer’s requirements for establishment of traffic control work zone systems, and
Traffic Police requirements.

The Contractor shall submit the Logistic Plan including work zone plans, crash worthy
protection barrier system, and details to the Engineer for review and approval.

The use of plastic ballast “New Jersey” type barriers, and/or traffic cones shall not be
permitted as adequate protection for workers from errant vehicles impacting a work
zone.

DIVERSIONS: The Contractor shall provide temporary diversions and roads to divert
traffic through or around any part of the Works. Location, standard, width and
maintenance of diversions are to be approved by the Engineer's Representative.

TRAFFIC DIVERSION: The Contractor shall provide temporary diversions, detour

roads, temporary bridges, culverts and similar facilities, whenever it is necessary to
safely divert traffic through or around any part of the Works. Locations, widths,
construction and maintenance of diversion and detour routes, including the provision of
signs, pavement markings, lighting, traffic control and the like are to approved by the
Engineer.

11. Shaded Areas and Drinking Water: Shaded areas along with chilled potable drinking
water supply shall be made readily available to all workers at site, wherever work
activities are in operation, on as-needed and continuous bases.

These shaded areas and drinking water locations shall be isolated and physically
protected from the work zone, in such a way to minimize the risk of workers becoming
injured from the ongoing work activities, whilst taking their drink breaks, in particular
from moving heavy equipment and machinery, e.g., haulage trucks, JCB’s and public
vehicles.

No one shall be permitted to take temporary breaks or rest periods within any work
activity area, e.g., adjacent to live vehicle traffic, on a scaffold, inside a trench or
confined space etc.

12. Excavations. Excavations shall comply with OSHAD SF Code of Practice 29.0
- Excavation Work V3.0 July 2016 requirements for trenching and shoring, with
special attention to the following:

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 7 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Sides of excavations over 1.5 metres deep unless capable of free standing without
collapsing, must have sides sloped to a safe angle of repose, battered, or be shored.
b. The Contractor shall ensure excavations are designed and approved by a
competent person(s) to ensure slopes are stable, and the geometric configuration is
suitably safe throughout its service life, both in the short and/or long term
conditions.
c. Details for excavation slope design with calculations shall be evaluated by the
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval, as required.
d. The Engineer's approval however, shall not remove any responsibility for
excavation design and construction from the Contractor.
e. Excavated material must be stored at least 2 meters from the
sides of all excavations.
f. Guard rails or barricades must be provided around all excavations.
g. Access facilities must be provided minimum every 7.0 m within
the protected areas.
h. All excavations must always be kept free of water.
i. All excavations must always be made in the dry, with the ground water table
reduced, minimum 0.5m below excavation level by dewatering technique(s), as
required.
j. Warning and prohibition signs; “Danger–Deep Excavation”, and “Do Not Enter -
Deep Excavation” in English, Arabic, & Urdu languages must be provided next to
excavations, as required.
k. Contingency back-up pump(s) shall be available for use whenever there is a
possibility of groundwater seepages, mechanical failure of an existing pump(s),
and/or inclement weather conditions that may otherwise adversely affect the
stability of an excavation.

13. Hand Tools and Power Tools.

All hand tools and portable power tools shall be in good condition and
shall be used for the purpose intended.

All electric power tools shall be grounded, and inspected frequently for worn out parts
and connections by a certified electrician, the results of this exercise shall be
documented.
• Circular saws shall be equipped with guards that automatically enclose the
cutting edges.
- Radial arm power saws shall be equipped with an automatic brake.
- Explosive actuated tools and their use shall be discouraged, and must
have prior written approval from the Engineer before delivery to the
project site.

14. Temporary Electrical Work. All temporary electrical work shall be protected by ground
fault circuit Interrupters (GFCI) and shall be in accordance with OSHAD SF Code of
Practice 15.0 - Electrical Safety V3.1 June 2017 requirements.

All connections and installation shall be in compliance with ADWEA Regulations.

If portable generators are used to supply temporary power needs, the generators shall be
grounded, inspected and documented on a regular basis for proper operation.

All temporary electrical work shall be inspected on a weekly basis and audited by a
certified electrician and results documented.

15. Explosives. The use of explosives shall not be allowed.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 8 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

16. Radioactive Equipment. The use of radioactive equipment having radioactive source
shall be discouraged, and must have prior written approval by the Engineer before
delivery to the project site.

17. Machinery and Mechanized Equipment. All machinery and mechanized equipment to
be used and/or installed shall be inspected for compliance with safety requirements and
reporting forms shall be completed and submitted, as required.

Supplemental requirements covering operating rules shall be established prior to start of

work using mechanized equipment and machinery.

Machine guards shall be provided on all moving parts of machinery that are directly
exposed to operators.

18. Worker Site Safety Orientation. The workers site safety orientation shall include as a
minimum the following:

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), Minimum PPE to be worn whilst at site:

• Hard hats shall be worn at all times.
• Safety boots shall be worn at all times.
• Safety vests shall be worn at all times.
• Suitable protective eye covering shall be worn whenever welding,
hammering metal, stone, or concrete, grinding or cutting metal units.
• Disposable hearing protection shall be available at all times.

Housekeeping:
• Work areas and access ways shall be kept free of trash, materials and all
tripping hazards.
• Temporary electrical wiring shall be protected from damage by traffic, be in
good condition and protected by ground fault circuit interrupters.
• All portable containers for gas and other inflammable liquids shall have self-
closing lids. No plastic containers are allowed.
• All accidents are to be reported directly to supervisors, and the Engineer
- For small cuts, scratches, etc. approved first aid kits are to be available
from the Contractor, and each subcontractor.

• In the event of a fire: Emergency evacuation plans and procedures shall be

prepared and posted on the safety notice board(s) and communicated.

In the event of a fire, the procedures to be followed if the fire cannot be

immediately contained, shall include notifying the nearest Abu Dhabi Civil
Defense Fire Brigade whose telephone number shall be prominently displayed at
all site telephone locations, and site safety notice boards.

The attempt to put out a manageable fire with available fire extinguishers and
water hoses until help arrives, shall be encouraged, however, the Contactor shall
ensure they do not endanger any personnel in fighting a fire if their personnel are
not suitably trained or volunteer to do so.
• Project Specific Hazards. The Contractor shall ensure the workers site
orientation includes reference to site-specific hazards related to the workers
field of operation, and that both known hazards and engineering controls
measures are communicated to them, including the contents from the
Contractor’s approved health and safety plan.
• Documentation. The workers site safety orientation shall be documented.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 9 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

Heavy equipment suppliers must supply certification of testing, etc., and obtain
clearance from the Engineer before commencement of their work.

• Security.
- Watchman shall be deployed at controlled entrance and exit location(s),
as required.
- No site visiting during nights, week-ends or holidays shall be permitted
without prior permission from the Engineer.
- Visitors to site shall be instructed to report to the reception, and the
Contractor’s safety representative for site safety induction and
authorization to enter site areas, as approved by the Engineer. All record
shall be documented.

19. Contractor’s Check List.

a. use HSE Plan and the standard specification
b. Prepare safety program.
c. Post safety requirements on safety bulletin board. Prepare and post Fire
Prevention Program.
d. Analyze job for potential hazards and hazardous procedures.
e. Establish plans for location of welfare facilities, material storage, personal
facilities and traffic flow.
f. Arrange for sanitary facilities with Abu Dhabi authorities as applicable.
g. Arrange for debris removal to the Center for Waste Management - Abu Dhabi as
required.
h. Establish procedure to obtain subcontractor safety plans.
i. Establish reporting requirements.
j. Arrange for doctor.
k. Arrange for hospital.
l. Arrange for ambulance service.
m. Post phone numbers for police, fire, medical ambulance, emergency services at
each of the onsite telephone locations.
n. Establish adequate first aid kit and stretcher facilities.
o. Post chart to signify weekly checks of first aid kits.
p. Locate archeological sites to be protected.
q. Prepare and post at each on site telephone location "off hours emergency
notification list".
r. Arrange for security guard services.
s. Prepare a watchman's log.
t. Obtain any required reporting forms and posters.
u. Verify insurance on subcontractors starting work on site prior to final execution of
subcontracts.
v. Obtain safety equipment and approval appropriate to operations such as:
• Hard hat, safety vest, safety boots, eye and ear protection.
• Safety harness and lifelines with spring shackles and eyes.
• Leather rigger gloves.
• Atmospheric gas detectors.
• Positive ventilation equipment
• Ambient and personal sound monitoring equipment.
• Portable hand lamps
• Positive pressure face masks with associated portable compressor and air
hoses.
w. Post sketch showing locations of fire alarm boxes, hydrants, and first
aid facilities names/photos of personnel.
x. Arrange for and post, safety posters and warning signs.
y. Establish weekly toolbox safety talks.
z. Set up an accident control chart.
aa. Establish monthly safety meetings.
bb. Ensure competency certificates are issues and validated.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 10 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

cc. Appoint a safety supervisor and obtain approval.

dd. Set date for the first safety meeting.
ee. Ensure that all licenses and approvals issued by the various authorities
having jurisdiction, are valid.

20. Barriers and Enclosures. All open excavations, and other hazardous areas, which in the
opinion of the Engineer result from or due to the Contractor's operations, shall be
enclosed by temporary fencing to ensure that the general public cannot gain access.

Temporary fencing shall have posts set in the ground or shall be free standing
and shall be located as directed by the Engineer.

The temporary fencing shall have an overall height of 2.0 m, and the overall design
shall be such that the fencing cannot be easily displaced, toppled, scaled or crawled
under.
a. The design, details and locations of temporary fencing shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
b. No fabrication or installation of temporary fencing shall commence until the
Engineer's approval has been obtained.
c. Damaged sections of temporary fencing shall be repaired or replaced promptly to
maintain at all times the standards of fencing and installation as initially approved.
d. Temporary fencing shall not be removed from any location without the prior
approval of the Engineer.
e. The barriers shall be having high visibility red/white markings and where
necessary, have steady state/flashing lighting units attached to them.
f. All hoardings/ sign boards shall comply with the requirements of OSHAD SF
V3.0/ 3.1

21. Working in Confined Spaces. CoP 21.0 Permit to Work & CoP 27.0 Confined Spaces
shall constitute the minimum safety requirements when working in confined spaces.
Contractor shall provide formal hazard recognition training to the work force and
document this and inform their work force of the following:

a. Dangers of toxic, asphyxiation, inflammable or explosive gaseous conditions such

as inside life stations, underground water reservoirs, bridge enclosures, manholes,
sewers and ancillary structures.
b. Physical injury, caused by falling objects, or by falling themselves.
Dangers of bacterial infection while working in sewage contaminated
environment.
The Contractor must impress upon his staff the importance of personal hygiene.
c. If working in sewers where accumulations of sludge or silt occur, the Contractor’s
attention is drawn to the fact that, when disturbed, sludge may release toxic gases.
d. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring adequate precautions are taken by
his workforce to safeguard against any accidents; working inside life stations,
underground water reservoirs, bridge enclosures in or adjacent to sewers, sewage
works, manholes, pumping stations, etc. by ensuring they are aware of the hazards,
know how to work in a controlled environment using a permit-to-work system of
operation, as necessary.
e. All members of the workforce shall be vaccinated against tetanus, typhoid, para-
typhoid, cholera, Hepatitis-A and Hepatitis-B or for any epidemic or pandemic
diseases, and shall carry up-to-date medical records at site.
f. The Contractor shall provide a medical certificate of fitness for all members of the
workforce who are expected to work in confined spaces e.g. sewers, manhole,
irrigation chambers etc.

Personnel working in confined spaces shall have no medical history of the

following:
• Any heart defects.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 11 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

• Any history of fits or blackouts.

• Deafness or loss of balance.
• Claustrophobia.
• Recurrent back ailments.
• Shortage of breath on light exertion.

g. Each group of workers engaged on sewers, manholes, pumping or lifting stations

and ancillary structures shall be provided and be familiar with the operation of
reputable gas testing equipment suitable to check hydrogen sulphide, carbon
monoxide, combustible gases and oxygen.

h. Personal protective equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Hard hats.
• Safety boots (with no ferrous studded soles).
• Safety harness (strong readily washable with no ferrous attachments for life
line).
• Leather gloves.
• Overalls, with antistatic fabric.

i. In addition to the above items, each group shall have with them at each entry point
to a confined space the following:
• A lifting harness.
• Four 15 meter lifelines with spring shackle on one end, eye at other.
• Suitable ladder.
• Lifting frame complete with ropes and shackles for hand operation.
• Powerful hand lamp.
• Ventilation blowers together with portable generator and flexible trunking.
• Positive pressure respiratory facemasks with associated portable compressor
and air hoses.
• Gas detectors.
• Communication facilities.
• Washing facilities with disinfectants and toiletries

j. All mobile mess room with washing and changing facilities shall be provided by
the Contractor for each working area.

k. Contractor shall keep installed in the mobile changing rooms, or mobile office,
emergency equipment within easy access of each working group which shall
include, but not be limited to the following:
• Barrier cream.
• Disinfectant.
• First aid kit with eye bath.
• Stretcher.
• Breathing apparatus with air bottle - 2 sets.

l. Address and telephone number of the nearest hospital with emergency facilities
shall be posted in each mess room.
m. Contractor shall provide high visibility safety barriers with red/white markings, to
be erected around all unattended open manholes and cover them over with suitable
temporary steel sheets.
Whenever the Contractor’s work force leaves the site of the works all manhole
covers shall be replaced and fixed into position.
n. Before entering inside any lift station, underground water reservoir, bridge
enclosure, manhole, sewer or ancillary structure the atmosphere shall be tested.
Based upon a risk assessment, a permit-to-work procedure shall be operated, as
necessary.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 12 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

o. Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain adequate scaffolding, ladders, etc.,
required for work and to facilitate the Engineer to inspect and test the works.
p. Remove them as directed upon completion of all works.
q. Contractor shall be solely responsible for liability in respect of any claim or legal
action arising as a result of an accident.
r. The Contractor shall not be absolved of any liability under the contract in respect
of his having complied with the requirements herein.
s. Contractor shall appoint a safety officer who shall be responsible for ensuring that
the Contractor's employees follow the safety procedures.
Safety Officer shall ensure that at least one person in each work group shall be
trained in rescue procedures, resuscitation techniques, basic first aid and the use of
gas detection apparatus.
t. Should any one working in a manhole, sewer or chamber, complain of nausea or
dizziness:
• Assume this to be an Immediate Danger to Life or Health (IDLH)
• Immediately evacuate all personnel from that location.
• Work should resume only when it is safe to do so, or with the use of
breathing apparatus under site supervision of the safety officer.

22. Hazardous Material Identification.

a. There may be hazardous materials present at this facility and hazardous materials
may be supplied as part of the Work.

b. This notice is to warn and alert the Contractor of potentially hazardous materials
even though the materials may be located outside the construction area or in an
area not normally accessible to the Contractor or his employees.
• This notice does not relieve either the Contractor or his subcontractor(s) of
their safety responsibilities.
• Neither the requirements of this clause nor an act or failure to act by the
Client or the Engineer shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility and
liability for the safety of Engineer, Employer, Contractor, or subcontractor
personnel and property.

c. Contractor shall ensure that all containers of substances belonging to the

Contractor and his Subcontractors that are on-site and stored at Client’s facility are
properly labeled as to the contents and the potential hazard (if any).

• Submit a Material Safety Data Sheet for all hazardous material brought to the
project site.
Submit at least 5 days before delivery.
• Applies to hazardous materials as well as items containing hazardous
materials.
In all cases, contractor shall substitute hazardous chemicals with less harmful
alternative chemical(s), whenever practically possible to do so.

I. Contractor’s Operational Requirements. The minimum operational requirements of the

Contractor’s approved health and safety plan shall include the following:

1. Inductions, orientations and training exercises.

2. Monthly safety meetings with site personnel and subcontractors.
3. Plan the works and ensure risk assessments are carried out.
4. Submit job hazard analysis for each major high risk phase or element of work, as
necessary.
5. Inspect the project daily, and record all visible safety and environmental hazards,
including identification of violators.
6. Follow through on timely correction of safety hazards, making
immediate corrections as necessary.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 13 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

7. Take immediate action to ensure compliance with requirements.

8. Check all areas at least once a day for housekeeping and clean up.
9. Post safety signs on the project.
10. Establish a fire protection and first aid program.
11. Prepare monthly safety statistic recording and posting on dedicated site
safety notice board(s).
12. Monitoring on the job safety meetings.
13. Identify and track key performance indicators, and operate a
recognition and rewards program.
14. Follow up, for insurance purposes, all relevant safety reports.
15. Foster a safety awareness attitude for all tradesmen and supervisors on the project.
16. Promoting a safety culture by recognizing and rewarding safe behavior, acts and
milestones achieved during the project.

J. Changes to the Approved Contractor’s Health and Safety Plan. The approved Contractor’s
project health and safety plan shall be updated to include any new or unrealized hazards as
identified on site, or as required to comply with new or revised government regulations.

All proposed revisions to the initially approved project health and safety plan
shall be formally submitted for the Employer’s and Engineer’s approval, and incorporated as
an addendum.

K. Contractor’s Safety Personnel. The Contractor shall provide qualified and adequate health and
safety personnel on the site during all construction operations as shown on the approved project
organization plan.

Prior to the commencement of the site activities the Contractor shall submit details of the
proposed project safety personnel.

All project safety personnel shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval for the project.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing thirty (30) days prior to re-assigning or
replacing any of the health and safety personnel designated and noted in the approved project
organization plan.

The Contractor’s health and safety personnel shall have the authority to stop work which does
not comply with the requirements of the approved health and safety plan and/or Contract
Document pertaining to health, and safety and to expend funds, as necessary to eliminate
hazards and/or dangerous conditions on the job site.

The Contractor’s project-based safety personnel shall include the following:

1. Health and Safety Manager.

a. Minimum qualifications for this position shall be as follows:

• Degree in a technical discipline (Civil, Mechanical, Electrical, etc.)
• Licensed or registered with a recognized authority (OSHAD Center).
• Minimum 12 years’ experience in HSE
• Possess excellent written and verbal communication skills in English, and
preferably other language(s).
• Valid UAE Driving License and a company assigned vehicle.

b. Minimum basic duties will be as the requirements of OSHAD SF V3.0/ 3.1

• Lead management of all contractors’ project safety personnel.
• Develop and implement the Contractor’s health and safety plan and all
related documents.
• Conduct periodic audits to assure project personnel are complying with all
aspects of the approved health and safety plan.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 14 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. The Contractor’s health and safety manager shall report directly to the
Contractor’s corporate management, and independently to the Contractor’s project
manager.

d. Once approved, the Contractor’s health and safety manager shall have full
authority to represent and act for the Contractor on all safety related matters.

2. Health and Safety Engineer.

a. Minimum qualifications for the Contractor’s health and safety engineer shall be as
follows:
• Diploma or Degree in appropriate discipline or qualified training &
experience
• Licensed or registered with a recognized authority - OSHAD Center.6 years’
experience in HSE field.
• Possess excellent written and verbal communication skills (in English), and
preferable other language(s).
• Valid UAE Driving License and a company assigned vehicle.

b. Minimum basic duties will be as follows:

• Plan and schedule safety provision into the works, using a 2-weeks look
ahead planner.
• Conduct orientation and training exercises.
• Conduct tool box sessions.
• Conduct activity hazard analysis/job task analysis.
• Lead root cause analysis and investigations.
• Compile monthly safety statistics.

3. Safety Inspectors.

a. Minimum qualifications for the safety inspector shall be as follows:

• Diploma or Degree in appropriate discipline or qualified training &
experience
• 3 years’ experience in safety activities
• Good verbal and written communication skills in English and other
language(s).
• UAE driving license and company assigned vehicle

b. Minimum basic duties shall be as follows:

• Monitor, inspect and record all site works in accordance with the approved
Contractor’s health and safety plan and promptly report any non-
conformances, to the Contractor’s health and safety engineer.
• Monitor, inspect and record site storage of materials.
• Monitor on site testing and report any non-conformances.

4. Sub-Contractor Safety Representative/Project Safety Officer’s.

a. All subcontractors’ safety representatives/officers shall be responsible for

compliance with the Contractor’s approved health and safety plan.

b. The Contractor shall ensure subcontractor(s) are orientated with their approved
health and safety plan, and this exercise is documented.

c. Subcontractors safety representatives/officer(s) shall be required to attend all

project safety meetings whilst operating and working at site.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 15 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

L. Contractor’s Compliance, Violations, Stop Work Order, and Imminent Danger to Life or
Health. The Contractor shall comply with all the health and safety requirements of the Contract
Document, the approved health and safety plan, and all UAE Laws.

If the Contractor fails to comply with any of the health and safety requirements of the contract,
the Engineer may issue a Stop Work Order (SWO) to the Contractor. There upon, the
Contractor shall immediately stop all work or portion of the work that the Engineer considers is
a health and safety non-compliance or violation and a failure of health and safety performance.

The Engineer shall issue a written SWO to the Contractor on the same day the violation is
known.

No financial or time adjustment shall be made to the Contractor’s price or schedule as a

consequence of the Engineer issuing a Stop Work Order (SWO).

M. Safe Working in Vicinity of ADDC Asset- Underground Services. Reference to the letter
issued by ADDC (ref. ADDC/PROJ/119/PCU/KN/2016/54089), all ADDC Consultants and
Contractors involved in infrastructure works are required to consider Safety Flash, ensure
communication of included instructions and appropriate implementation by engineers and all
involved site operations (refer to Volume 7 for ADDC’s letter and Safety Instruction).

N. Imminent Danger to Life or Health (IDLH). The Engineer and the Contractor’s safety
representatives shall have the authority to stop works under the following circumstances:

1. If there is an imminent danger to life or health (IDLH) which may cause serious injury
or death to any person(s) at site.
2. If the Contractor fails to respond to requests to reduce a high risk activity, condition, or
situation that violates any laws or regulations and/or the approved Contractor’s Project
Safety Plan, and may otherwise result in injury or death to any person(s) at site.

O. Control of Public Access. The Contractor shall provide a site security plan(s) for control of
public access.

The plan(s) shall ensure protection of the site, and protection of the
public by provision of engineering control measures, such as:

1. Warning Signs, for site and public access/egress

2. Corridor routes
3. Segregated and/or protection barrier systems
4. Isolated work zones
5. Flagman operations
6. Security patrols and watchman
7. Security check point at entry/exit locations.

P. Laboratory Safety. The Contractor shall address laboratory safety in their health and safety
plan, and address the following laboratory safety issues accordingly:

1. Chemical Safety
a. Laboratory spill control kit
b. If the chemical spilled is unknown or toxic or highly hazardous,
immediately evacuate the lab and call for assistance
c. No eating and/or drinking in the lab areas.
d. Train what to do in the event of a release of a hazardous material.

2. Radioactive Hazards. No radioactive materials or lasers shall be utilized as part of the

lab operation or equipment, unless approved in writing by the Engineer, prior to
delivery.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 16 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

Always wear appropriate face and eye protection, such as a mask, safety glasses with
side slides, and when necessary a face shield.

3. Hazardous Materials.
a. Storage facilities, chemical segregation according to type.
b. Oxidizers should never be stored near flammable.
c. Compressed gas cylinders shall all be fitted with safety valves, kept upright,
labeled, and stored in the dry, in a temperature controlled environment, away from
direct sunlight.

4. Hazardous Waste.

a. Hazardous waste is any substance that will cause harm to health

and the environment if it is not handled, stored, transported and disposed of
properly.
b. The Environment Agency, Abu Dhabi has a list of chemicals and other
substances classified as being hazardous waste.
c. Hazardous waste shall be labeled, stored and disposed of in accordance
with Legal requirements.

5. Respiratory Hazards.
Certain work situations may require respiratory protection. A respirator protection is
required for: pesticide application, person with allergies, or when working in areas
where engineering controls are inadequate or not feasible.

The respirator woks property when there is a tight seal between the respirator’s face
piece and the skin. Therefore, facial hair shall not be allowed when using a respirator.

6. Personal Protective Equipment.

Hazardous chemicals may have the potential to penetrate the skin, splash into eyes or
cause severe skin irritation. Contractor must ensure all lab personnel wear the correct
PPE at all times whilst working:

The minimum PPE items shall be as follows:

a. Safety glasses with side shield.

b. Face shield for additional protection of face and neck.
c. Chemical resistant gloves.
d. Cut-resistant gloves.
e. Open toed, open healed and canvas shoes are prohibited in all lab areas.
f. Closed top leather shoes are the minimum requirements in the lab areas.
g. Lab coats should be worn whenever you are working in a lab
h. Lab coats and other PPE should not be worn outside the lab environment

7. Laboratory Equipment.
The bitumen testing/extraction area of the lab shall be fitted with a positive ventilation
hood and extractor fan unit to collect and disperse the air borne releases from the
bituminous solvent during asphaltic concrete testing.

All laboratory testing equipment and machinery shall be properly mounted and fixed to
minimize vibrations and noise pollution whilst in operation.

The Proctor machine shall be housed inside a sound barrier chamber or room using
attenuating materials to reduce the noise pollution created whilst testing.

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 17 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

8. Laboratory Inductions.
The Contractor shall ensure all lab personnel are familiar with the specific hazards of
working in a lab environment, receive hazard recognition training and safety induction
with an explanation of the available control measures as described herein, and this shall
be documented. HSE Awareness shall be in line with UAE HSE Regulations.

END OF SECTION 013529

HEALTH, SAFETY & EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 013529 - Page 18 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 013543 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This Section includes:

A. Details of the procedures to follow, related to environmental management.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 013529 Health Safety and Emergency Response Procedures.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES

A. Instructions on environmental procedures relevant to the project shall be in compliance with EAD
standards and guidelines.

B. The Contractor shall comply with the conditions issues by EAD in the environmental permit.

C. No Works shall commence on any activities within the site, until formal approval has been received
from the EAD.

D. Any delays as a result of item C above will not be considered for any requested Extension of Time.

END OF SECTION 013543

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 013543 - Page 1 of 1

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by
Engineer, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of

required tests and inspections.
2. Specifications sections in addition to Division 1 Sections for specific test and inspection
requirements.
3. Specification sections in addition to Division 1 for specific mock-up requirements not
indicated in this Section

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Works to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Works and completed
construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities
performed by the Engineer.

C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to
verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show
interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation
tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the
standard by which the Work will be judged.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - Page 1 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a testing agency qualified to conduct
product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance
and compliance with specified requirements.

E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant,
mill, factory, or shop.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of
the Work and for completed Work.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,

Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain
construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that
requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.

I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being
familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products
and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to the Engineer.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with
the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently
equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum
quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply
with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for
the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size
of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - Page 2 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.

B. Contractor's Quality-Control Manager Qualifications: For supervisory personnel.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent
report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each
product and system specifically assigned to the Contractor to be designed or certified by a design
professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and
design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these
services.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 15 days of Notice to Proceed,
and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to
Engineer. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used
to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with
Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and

experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in
nature and extent to those required for Contract.

1. Project quality-control manager shall not have other Project responsibilities.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through
review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for
submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: Include in quality-control plan a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring
testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and
inspections.
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
"Statement of Special Inspections."

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - Page 3 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during

construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection
specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with
standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved
and rejected results. Include work Engineer has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate
corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.9 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections.
Include the following:

1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the
Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include
the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements
and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making

report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - Page 4 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Employer's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance
with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to

those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production
capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of
the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the
system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,
and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing
and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 or similar recognised standard,
and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed.and with additional
qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction,
that is acceptable to authorities.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's
products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance with
specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and

construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately
demonstrate capability of product to comply with performance requirements.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - Page 5 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analysing
results to prevent delaying the Works.
c. When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on the Works.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to the Engineer, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests
and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or
deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Works requiring mockups, build mockups for each form
of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the
Engineer.
2. Notify the Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that
will be employed during the construction at the Project.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain the Engineer’s approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging

the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.11 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Employer Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as the Employer's

responsibility, the Employer will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. The Employer will furnish the Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are
engaged to perform., the services of which are to be engaged by the Contractor at his own
costs

2. Where the Specifications states that the Employer shall or reserves the right to, engage the
services of a qualified testing Agency to carry out tests, etc., such tests shall be undertaken
by a third party QA/QC bodies and / or testing agencies, as specified for quality control
testing and/or third party inspections, the services of which are to be engaged by the
Contractor at his own costs
3. Costs for performing testing, retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is
necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to
the Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: engage and provide quality-control services specified and required by
authorities having jurisdiction and bear all costs.

1. Where services are indicated as the Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency, acceptable to the Engineer to perform these quality-control services.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when work that requires testing
or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as the Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - Page 6 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Testing and inspecting requested by the Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are the Contractor's responsibility and cost of which shall be borne by the
contractor.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in
writing.

D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were the Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for
construction of revised or replaced work that failed to comply with requirements established by the
Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with the Engineer and the Contractor in performance
of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify the Engineer and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in
the work during performance of its services.
2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service through the Contractor.
4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve
or accept any portion of the Works.
5. Do not perform any duties of the Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Site / work.

2. Incidental labour and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

quality control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 28 days of
Commencement Date.

I. Distribution: Distribute schedule to the Employer, The Engineer, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Works where tests and inspections are required

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - Page 7 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.12 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and pay all related costs.

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying the Engineer, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to the Engineer, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
shall include a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to the Engineer.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for the Engineer reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification
Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend
restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply
with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section
"Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility
for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - Page 8 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 014339 - MOCKUPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Requirements for mockups indicated on Contract Drawings to verify selections
made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials
and execution.

1. Prior to installation in or on building, provide specified mockups identical in every respect

to the finished work specified.
2. In accordance with the provisions of technical specifications, provide engineering design
required to ensure the structural stability of the mockups.
3. Mockups will be reviewed for approval and for acceptance by the Engineer. When so
approved and accepted, the mockups will become the standard of workmanship by which
subsequent work will be evaluated.

B. All works shall be carried out in accordance with AD QCC latest requirements, specifications and
general details. In case of any contradiction between this section and AD QCC specifications, AD
QCC specifications shall be followed.

C. The design complies with the standard specification and design guidelines issued by AD QCC. The
Contractor shall obtain the latest edition of the specifications for execution of the project.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Mockups: Independent structures, installations, or assemblies that represent components of a portion

of the facility or site work to demonstrate the coordination and interfacing of different products,
such as a window assembly and adjacent wall construction.

B. Field Samples:

1. Refer to Article “Field Samples” in the various Sections of the Specifications for descriptions
of in-place installations for review of materials and systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data and Samples: Submit in accordance with the requirements of each respective product
Section.

B. Schedule: Time schedule for the construction of mockups shall be prepared and submitted to the
Engineer for review prior to construction.

C. Field Samples: Field samples are representative applications of finish materials on a limited portion
of the facility or site to verify the aesthetic effect of a critical portion of the work or to evaluate the
qualifications of the installer to complete the construction.

1. Where specified, prepare a field sample at a location on the site designated by the Engineer.

a. Where acceptable to the Engineer, field samples may be actual portions of the finished
work of this Section.
2. Provide one field panel for each type used in the work.

MOCKUPS 014339 - Page 1 of 4

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Make each panel of size indicated in specifications, unless noted otherwise.

4. Make adjustment in the sample panels as required by the Engineer.
5. The field sample, when accepted by the Engineer, shall be used as basis for comparison with
the remainder of the installation of the work of this Section for the purpose of acceptance or
rejection

D. Quality Control Submittals: In accordance with the provisions of Division 01Section ”Submittals
Procedure”, submit the following:

1. Design Data: When and as directed by the Engineer, engineering design calculations
confirming the structural stability of the mockups.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications:

1. Fabricators' and Installers' Qualifications: In accordance with the provisions of the

specification Sections for products and materials incorporated into the mockups.

B. In constructing mockups, take measures to ensure the safety of Project personnel and the public.

C. Field Representation: During construction of mockup, representatives of the manufacturers shall be

present on site to coordinate installation.

1.5 SCHEDULING

A. The Engineer shall be notified at the start of construction of mockups and shall receive progress
reports to allow the Engineer to schedule his inspections.

B. Visual examination of the mockups during construction will be made by the Engineer and other
entities representing incorporated materials.

C. After approximately 50 percent of each mockup has been built, request the Engineer's preliminary
review before completion. Incorporate changes or variations requested by the Engineer into
mockups during their construction and prior to their completion, insofar as possible.

D. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance of visual qualities of mockups before commencing the
corresponding work for the Project, revise the updated Construction Schedule to reflect required
revisions to mockups.

E. Schedule field tests for performance of constructions referred to in specifications sections such as,
but not limited to: windows, curtain walls and glazing systems, stone cladding...

F. Should mockups fail to meet the Engineer's approval or performance testing, partially or completely,
they shall be taken down or dismantled, and reconstructed to the extent necessary, until acceptance
has been obtained.

G. Time the completion and reworking of mockups necessary to obtain acceptance to avoid delay in
the construction schedule of the Project. Update the Construction Schedule to reflect required
revisions to mockups.

H. Retain and maintain mockups during construction to serve as a standard for judging work
incorporated into the Project. Do not alter, or remove.

MOCKUPS 014339 - Page 2 of 4

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Materials and finishes shall comply with the requirements specified in the various applicable
Sections of the Specifications, and shall match previously submitted and approved samples.

B. Mockups shall incorporate all related construction materials and finishes having a visual or technical
effect upon the completed work.

2.2 MOCKUPS

A. Provide full size mockups of construction in accordance with mockup schedule on Contract
Drawings.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area directed by Engineer.

2. Build mockup for type(s) of constructions indicated, in location(s) indicated by Engineer.

B. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to
verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show
interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation
tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the
standard by which the Work will be judged.
1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the
building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

C. Prior to installation in or on building, construct mockups for each system and finish required to
verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution. Building mockups shall comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of work.
1. Place mockups on site in the location directed by Engineer. Provide mockups consisting of
constructions referred to in the various applicable sections of the specifications. Components
shall be full height and can be incorporated into the final work.
2. Notify Engineer one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of work.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
7. Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may
become part of the completed work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in a manner that will duplicate the appearance in the completed building.
1. In constructing mockups, take measures to ensure the safety of Project personnel and the
public.
2. Construct mockups using same construction personnel, means, and methods as intended for
use on actual project.

MOCKUPS 014339 - Page 3 of 4

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Mockups shall be constructed in accordance with details indicated on the drawings and
approved Shop Drawings.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain mockups during course of construction or until removal is directed.

B. Repair damage to mockups immediately upon occurrence. Maintain mockups and surrounding site
in a safe and clean condition.

3.3 REMOVAL

A. Remove mockups at the completion of the work in a manner that shows no evidence of mock up's
previous existence. Complete site work at area of mock up in accordance with Contract Drawings.

END OF SECTION 014339

MOCKUPS 014339 - Page 4 of 4

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, Contractor’s site offices and security and protection facilities.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the
Contract Price unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Employer's construction forces, Engineer, testing
agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction
operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction
operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for
construction operations.

E. Telephone Service: Pay telephone service use charges and connections, for telephones installed at
Site.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show all temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction
General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction
from water absorption and damage, including delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials
subject to water absorption or water damage, discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for
mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water damaged Work.

1. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials,
plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 1 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit
installation of finish materials.

D. Dust-Control and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the
dust-control and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time
frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be
inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of the work.

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.
3. Location of proposed air filtration system discharge.
4. Other dust-control measures.
5. Waste management plan.

E. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar
procedures performed on temporary utilities.

F. Temporary Utilities: Submit detailed proposals including drawings and product data as requested;
obtain the Engineer’s approval prior to purchase, delivery, installation or implementation, as
applicable, of the following:

1. Sewers and drainage.

2. Water service and distribution.
3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities.
4. Electric power service.
5. Telephone service.
6. High-Speed Internet connection.

G. Support Facilities: Submit detailed proposals including drawings and product data as requested for
the lay out area for the location of the support facilities not later than two weeks of issuance of the
Notice to Commence; obtain the Engineer’s approval prior to purchase, delivery, equipping,
installation or implementation of the following:

1. Identification of the Works and temporary signs.

2. Contractor’s Temporary Site offices and site laboratory, including laboratory equipment.

3. Contractor’s Site Canteen including kitchen equipment

4. Site medical clinic including medical equipment for emergency cases.

5. Storage and fabrication sheds.

6. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities:

a. Exterior scaffold system, including ladders, walkways, platforms and guardrails.
b. Protective screens and chutes.
c. Tower cranes.
d. Lifts and hoists for materials and workmen.

H. Drawings showing the plans and elevations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 2 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Any reasonable changes or modifications suggested by the Engineer shall be incorporated

at no additional cost to the Employer

I. Security and Protection Facilities: Submit detailed proposals including drawings and product data as
requested; obtain the Engineer approval prior to purchase, delivery, installation or implementation,
as applicable, of the following:

1. Fire protection and site security.

a. The Contractor shall maintain security as necessary to protect the Works, person or
property at all times.
b. The Contractor shall establish and implement a security program including a gate
pass control and work permit system.
c. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain all necessary approvals and
permits.
d. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer's security and logistic programs.
e. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately of any breach of security or
accident occurring on the site. The verbal notification shall be followed up by a
written report within 24 hours of the incident.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Building code requirements.

2. Health and Safety regulation

3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police and fire department regulations.
5. Environmental protection regulations.

B. Standards: Comply with Local Regulations, IEE, NEC, IEC and NFPA, Abu Dhabi Municipality
Standards, all other Abu Dhabi Government Authority Rules and Regulations, Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA), British Standard Code of Practice for distribution of electricity
on construction and building sites (B.S.7375) and applicable codes of good practice.

C. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, Civil Defense and International codes and standards
such as IEE, NEC, NFPA and IEC and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service,
local ADWEA/ADDC Regulations and Codes, supplies for welding equipment in accordance with
B.S638, Code of practice for distribution of electricity on construction and building sites, CIBSE,
construction Health & Safety published by the Construction Confederation of the U.K, Section 10,
Electricity and any other local Authority Requirements Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

D. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary
utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Engineer, change over from use
of temporary service to use of permanent service.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 3 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Take full responsibility for operation, maintenance, and
protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Taking-Over,
regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

1. Contractor's personnel and workmen, including subcontractors, are not permitted to use
permanent toilet facilities or wash facilities.

C. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all
parties engaged in the Works:
1. Keep clean and neat.
2. Operate in a safe and efficient manner.
3. Do not overload or permit them to interfere with progress.
4. Take appropriate fire prevention measures.
5. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisance to develop or
persist on Site.
6. Relocate as required by progress of the Works

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials suitable for use intended.

B. Construction Materials and Products: Comply with standards and applicable requirements in
appropriate sections of the Specification.

C. Tarpaulins: Waterproof, fire-resistive, with low flame-spread rating.

D. Temporary Enclosures: Translucent, fire-retardant, nylon-reinforced laminated polyethylene or

polyvinyl chloride tarpaulins.

E. Water: Clean, fresh, potable

F. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized steel,
chain-link fabric fencing; minimum (3.5 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum (75-
mm-) OD line posts and - (75-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with galvanized barbed-wire top
strand.

G. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mils (0.25 mm) minimum thickness, with
flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.

H. Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by
1624 mm).

I. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 4 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Contractor’s Temporary Site Offices: Prefabricated, mobile units or job-built construction, with
lockable entrances, operable windows, serviceable finishes and robust and secure fittings; insulated,
weather tight, heated and air-conditioned.
1. Incorporate sanitary facilities to the extent required for the number and gender of personnel
accommodated.
2. Support on foundations adequate for loading.
3. Provide and maintain all necessary and required services and utilities, including but not
necessarily limited to:
a. Sewers and drainage.
b. Water service and distribution.
c. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities.
d. Air-conditioner heating and cooling.
e. Ventilation.
f. Electric power service.
g. Lighting.
h. Telephone service.
i. Firefighting appliances.

B. Janitorial services and facilities, and general attendance.

C. Computers for the Employer /Engineer: New computer equipment and peripheral hardware, licensed
software, Internet connection and associated accessories, including local area networking, computer
workstations, and all necessary cabling as required.

1. PC (4 no.): Acceptable Brand Name; each with:

a. Processor: Intel® Xeon® W-1290P family and above
b. Memory: 32GB (2x16GB) Registered DDR4 RAM
c. Hard drive: 1 x 512GB SSD
d. Graphic card: Nvidia Quadro P2000, 5GB
e. Network: 1G Ethernet Single port
f. Keyboard: USB, English/Arabic layout
g. Mouse: USB, Optical
h. Form factor: Workstation
i. Warranty: 3/3/3 years (Parts/Labor/Onsite)
j. Operating system: Windows 10 Pro 64.

With monitors each with:

k. Size: 24"
l. Category: Professional
m. Panel Type: IPS
n. Backlight: LED
o. Aspect Ratio: 16:09
p. Resolution: 1920x1080 pixel
q. Contrast Ratio: 1000:1
r. Response Time: 5ms

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 5 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

s. Input: DP, HDMI & DVI

t. Brightness: 250 cd/m2
u. Viewing Angle (H, V):178°, 178°
v. Built In Speaker: Yes
w. USB: USB 3.0
x. Maximum Power Consumption: 45 W to 50 W
y. Cabinet Color: Black

2. Laptop (one (01) for the Employer): Acceptable Brand Name; each with:
a. Processor: Intel Core i7-8650U Processor (8MB Cache, up to 4.20 GHz)
b. Memory: 16GB LPDDR3 2133MHz Soldered
c. Hard drive: 1TB SSD PCIe OPAL 2.0 M.2 2280 (16GT/s)
d. Graphic card: 14.0" IPS, Touch Integrated Graphics
e. Operating system: Windows 10 Pro 64.
f. Screen Monitor: 27"

3. Software (for each provided computer): Original, latest Arabic/English version, multi-user
licensed copies of the following software programs for specified operating system, together
with user manuals, and maintenance agreements for the duration of the Works:
a. Windows 10 Professional
b. MS Office 2019
c. Adobe Reader Pro
d. 7 Zip
e. Autodesk True view 2019
f. Autodesk Navisworks freedom 2019
g. PDFill (File conversion)
h. Anti-virus
i. Licenses for Primavera P6 Professional version 20.12.
j. AutoDesk AutoCAD.

4. Internet: Multi-user high-speed subscription and connection to approved local internet service
provider, including wireless router the cost of which shall be borne by the Contractor.

5. Photocopy machine (one (01) no.) (Multi-Function Printer):

a. Function: Copying, faxing, printing, scanning black & color
b. Media size: A4 / A3
c. Print color speed: 40 -50 ppm
d. Required monthly volume: 25000 or more
e. Print resolution: 600x600 dpi minimum
f. Duplex printing: Yes
g. Trays: Input: 100 sheets multi-purpose, 2x500 A4/A3
h. RAM: 2 GB RAM minimum
i. Hard drive: Yes

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 6 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

j. Printer language: HP PCL 5, HP PCL 6, Postscript Level 3

k. Scanner type: Flatbed, Duplex ADF
l. Scan resolution, optical: 600 dpi
m. Scan size, maximum (flatbed & ADF): 11.7 x 17 in
n. Scan speed: 40 ppm
o. Digital sending features: Scan to Network Shared Folder, Send to Email
p. File formats: PDF, JPEG, TIFF
q. Copy resolution: 600 x 600 dpi
r. Copy reduce/enlarge settings: 25 to 400%
s. Maximum number of copies: Up to 999 copies
t. Connectivity, standard: USB 2.0, 10/100/1000 LAN
u. Compatible operating systems: Windows (32Bit and 64-bit), Mac OS X; Linux
v. Touch screen panel: Yes
w. Print Management: support Ringdale follow me print management solution
x. Warranty & Support: 3 year Onsite

6. Printer (one (01) no.):

a. Paper Size: A4
b. Print Speed: 38ppm
c. RAM: 1 GB
d. Duty Cycle Monthly: 80,000
e. Duplexer: Yes
f. Port: Lan/USB

7. UPS Equipment: Similar to Merlin Gerin to accommodate for all the devices.

8. Internet: Multi-user subscription and connection to approved, local, Internet service provider.

9. Computer Workstation, comprising:

a. Desking with wire management; to accommodate PC, monitor, keyboard and
mouse.
b. Operator's swivel chair.

D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials away from incompatible materials.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): The Contractor is responsible for providing personal
protective equipment (PPE) for all site staff including those of his sub-Contractors, the Employer /
Engineer or any visitors to the site. The Contractor shall ensure that all PPE is in good conditions at
all times. PPE may include but not limited to safety helmets, knee boots, work gloves, safety belts,

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 7 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

safety shoes, ear protectors and goggles. Samples of all PPE equipment shall be submitted for the
Employer / Engineer approvals.

B. Fire extinguisher: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.

1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required
by location and class of fire exposure.

C. HVAC Equipment: Unless Employer authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is

prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended us.

3. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter-equipped portable units with four-
stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

D. Electrical Outlets: 240 V properly configured British Standard with 3 pins; equipped with ground-
fault circuit interrupters, switch, and pilot light.

E. Power Distribution System Circuits: The wires, conduit, containment and protection for sockets, air-
conditioning units and other miscellaneous equipment shall comply with local regulations.

F. Temporary Site Toilets: Prefabricated, self-contained, single-occupant units of chemical, aerated

recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell
or similar nonabsorbent material.

G. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-drinking-water units, including paper

cup supply.

1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water
temperature at 7.2 to 12.7 deg C

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve the Works adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Works. Relocate and /or modify facilities as required by progress of the Works.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do
not remove facilities until permitted or directed to do so by the Engineer, or until replaced, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing
service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with
matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company requirements and
recommendations.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 8 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Arrange with utility company, the Engineer, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide for adequate capacity and peak-demand or special load requirements at each stage of
construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services if necessary.
3. Obtain any necessary easements to bring temporary utilities to Site.
4. Charges and Costs: Pay for all connection, service and user charges and costs arising in
connection with the provision of temporary utilities.

B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that
can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches,
dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be
lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site
in a lawful manner.

1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that
might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by sewer department officials.
3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy
use, restore normal conditions promptly.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.

1. Sterilize temporary water piping before use.

2. Provide storage tanks and/or rubber hoses as necessary to serve Site.

3. If at any time, temporary water service supply is interrupted or inadequate for requirements,
provide back-up storage and truck-in water supplies as necessary.

4. If water pressure is inadequate, provide pumps to supply a minimum of 200-kPa static pressure
at highest point. Equip pumps with surge and storage tanks and automatic controls to supply
water uniformly at reasonable pressures

D. Sanitary Facilities:

Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations,
health codes and the Engineer directions for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of
facilities and fixtures. Provide separate toilet facilities for male and female personnel.

1. Generally: Install where facilities will best serve needs of the Works, including relocation
whenever necessary.

a. Service and maintain, and keep clean, sanitary and orderly for use.
b. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for
each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for
disposal of used material.

2. Toilets: Install toilet facilities connected to local water and sewer lines. Provide lavatories,
mirrors, and water closets. Provide only potable-water connections. Provide individual
compartments for water closets. Provide suitable enclosure with nonabsorbent sanitary finish
materials and adequate ventilation and lighting.

3. Temporary Site Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 9 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for
personnel who handle materials that require wash-up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply
cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled.

5. Drinking-Water Facilities: Install containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-drinking-water units,

including paper cup supply

E. Cooling: Provide temporary cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of
completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity.
Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or
elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce
ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level
required to allow installation or application of finishes.

G. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution
system of appropriate and sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for use during
construction, including necessary start-up, testing and commissioning of building operating systems
and equipment. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic
ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear.

1. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage.

2. If at any time, temporary electric power service supply is interrupted or inadequate for
requirements, provide and operate back-up electric generators as necessary.

H. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and
equipment.

1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single
lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe
length-voltage ratio

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with appropriate control and local switching to facilitate safe
and proper execution of the Works. Provide adequate illumination to internal areas during finishing
operations and for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without
operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Works identification sign.

J. Telephone Service: Provide and maintain adequate temporary telephone facilities and service for the
duration of the Contract including Defects Liability Period, for the usage of all available personnel
on site.

K. Charges and Costs: Pay for all connection, reconnection, service and user charges and other costs
arising in connection with the continuation of telephone facilities and services for the Employer /
Engineer, other than the cost of international telephone calls not connected with the Work.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 10 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Site Offices - General: comply with the following:

1. Provide continued maintenance, support and service, including final removal.

2. Supplement, extend, relocate, modify, alter and adapt as necessary to comply with
requirements indicated and specified, and accommodate construction operations under this
Contract.

B. General: Comply with the following:

1. Locate site offices, Contractor’s canteen, site laboratory, site clinic, storage and fabrication
sheds, workshops, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities
for easy access.

2. Maintain support facilities until six months after Taking-Over. Unless otherwise directed,
remove after six months after Taking-Over, but retain adequate support facilities to
accommodate personnel remaining on Project site during defect liability period and after six
months of Taking-Over, including relocating if necessary and under conditions acceptable to
Employer.

C. Contractor's Site Offices: Provide and maintain temporary site offices and facilities of sufficient size,
number and type to accommodate required office personnel, including sub-contractors, at the Project
site. Furnish and equip as necessary. Keep clean and orderly for use.

D. Site Laboratory: Provide temporary site laboratory facility of sufficient size to accommodate,
conduct, perform and report on-site sampling and testing of materials as prescribed and specified in
various Sections of the Project Specification. Furnish and equip as necessary. Keep clean and orderly
for use.

1. Employ qualified laboratory technicians familiar with specified industry standards and skilled
in the testing of construction materials and associated administrative procedures.

E. Temporary Site Medical Clinic: Provide, maintain and equip a medical clinic of appropriate area for
providing basic and emergency medical treatment for work force expected for the construction of the
Contract. The clinic shall be fully furnished with appropriate furniture with all electromechanical
works including, telephones and Data network and sockets in all appropriate locations. Provide and
maintain Medical equipment and accessories. Provide shaded parking for one (1) Ambulance.

The following is an indicative space program:

Reception area, Waiting area, Doctor rooms, Patient rooms, Medical inspection room, Pharmacy,
Ambulance staff room, Ambulance parking area Electro-Mechanical area

1. Employ qualified doctors, personnel’s familiar and skilled in the medical field.

2. Provide continued services, maintenance, support and provide continued medical services with
medicine, first aid, including final removal

F. Site Mosque: provide Site Mosque for usage of all staff on site.

G. Site canteen for Contractor: Provide maintain and equip Contractor’s site canteen of sufficient size to
serve meals and snack for workers and management staff. Design, construct and furnish two (2)
canteens one for senior management staff and general workers (respectively). The size of the canteen
shall be appropriate to accommodate his workers staff, and for managerial staff.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 11 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

The following is an indicative space program: Dining area, Kitchen and food preparation area,
Food serving area (self service), storage areas, Dry storage area, cold storage area, deep, freezer
area, Services, Electro-Mechanical areas

H. Employer/Engineer Site Offices: Provide and maintain temporary offices, and facilities for the
exclusive use of the Employer/Engineer and his staff, sized, arranged, furnished and equipped to the
approval of the Engineer.

1. Provide continued maintenance, support and service, including final removal.

2. Supplement, extend, relocate, modify, alter and adapt as necessary to comply with
requirements indicated and specified, and accommodate construction operations under this
Contract.

The Contractor shall provide a layout for The Employer’s/ Engineer Site Offices showing the
design layout with the necessary circulation areas and the proposed furniture and equipment for
the approval of the Engineer, the following are the minimum requirements:

3. Provide temporary site offices for the Employer and Engineer’s staff, comprising a total of 3
offices (as described below), and including the following facilities:
a. Entrance / Reception.
b. Staff Pantry.
c. Archiving/filling room.
d. Printer room/server.
e. Staff toilets (for males and females separately).
f. Prayer room (for males and females separately).
g. Ablutions.
h. Canteen.
i. First Aid.

4. One (1) Employer’s office, approximately 4m x 6m, each with:

a. 1 double pedestal desk with lockable drawers and 1 swivel armchair.
b. 1 conference table and 6 office armchairs.
c. 1 layout reference table.
d. 2 lockable steel filing cabinets.
e. 1 lockable drawing hanger for 10 sets.
f. 1 shelf unit.
g. 2 pin boards.
h. 2 waste paper baskets.
i. Regularly service and maintain office machines and equipment in good serviceable
condition. Provide and continuously stock offices with all associated consumables,
and supplies as and when required or requested, including stationery and papers.

5. Two (2) Engineer’s Staff Offices, each approximately 4 m x 4 m; each with:

a. 2 desks with lockable drawers and 2 swivel armchairs.
b. 2 office chairs.
c. 2 layout reference tables.
d. 2 lockable steel filing cabinets.
e. 1 lockable drawing hanger for 10 sets.
f. 2 shelf units.
g. 2 pin boards.
h. 2 waste paper baskets.
i. Regularly service and maintain office machines and equipment in good serviceable
condition. Provide and continuously stock offices with all associated consumables,
and supplies as and when required or requested, including stationery and papers.

6. Two (2) Toilets compliant with office size, each with:

a. WC suite.
b. Toilet roll holder.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 12 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. Lavatory basin.
d. Mirror and shelf.
e. Paper towel dispenser.
f. Soap dispenser.
g. Waste bin with cover.
h. Service and maintain, and clean toilets on a daily basis. Provide and continuously
stock with all associated consumable and supplies as and when required or
requested, including soaps, toilet paper and paper towels.

7. One (1) Kitchen; with:

a. 1 refrigerator 14 cu.ft. capacity.
b. 2 electric boiling rings.
c. 1 water filter and 1 twenty litre bottled-drinking-water dispenser - hot/cold.
d. 1 large waste bin with cover.
e. Kitchen base cabinets incorporating heat resistant worktop and stainless steel
sink/drainer.
f. Kitchen wall cabinets.
g. Sets of crockery and cutlery sufficient for number of Employer/Engineer staff and
visitors.
h. Service and maintain, and clean kitchens on a daily basis. Provide and continuously
stock with all associated consumables and supplies as and when requested or
required, including drinking water, milk, sugar, tea and coffee beverages.

8. One (1) Meeting Room; with:

a. 1 conference table and 10 office armchairs.
b. 1 layout reference table.
c. 2 lockable steel filing cabinets.
d. 1 lockable drawing hanger for 10 sets.
e. 2 shelf units.
f. 2 pin boards.
g. 2 waste paper baskets.
h. 1 Digital screen of 70".

I. Temporary Parking area: provide a temporary Parking area appropriate for the exclusive use of the
Employer and Engineer staff, in front of the Employer/Engineer Site Offices.

J. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary asphalted roads and paved
areas adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period.
Submit proposals and obtain prior approval of the Engineer for the proposed location of temporary
roads and paved areas. Coordinate elevation of temporary roads and paved areas, provide and
prepare sub-grade and install subbase and base and hot mixed asphalt pavement. Comply with
applicable requirements in appropriate sections of the Specification for sub-grade, sub-base and
base course and finish asphalted courses construction of temporary road and paving areas.
1. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary
for construction operations, including delivery and storage of materials, equipment usage,
administration and supervision.

K. Restriction on Use of Roads:

The Contractor shall not make use of roads for depositing or storing plant, materials, tools or
implements other than such plant, materials, tools and implements as may from time to time be
required for immediate use on the Works.

Plant, materials, tools implements and temporary works shall be placed in such a way as to cause
minimum interference with the use of any right of way by the Employer / Engineer or others with
delegated authority or other parties and the Contractor shall maintain those parts of the roads not
temporarily occupied by the Works in a clean, passable and safe state at all times.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 13 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

L. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Include warning signs
for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

M. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and in
applicable specification Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not
directly associated with construction activities included in individual sections. Where feasible, use
same facilities to maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties nor endanger permanent Works or temporary facilities.

N. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide and install Project identification name board,
size and lettering and supports are subject approval of the Engineer. Install signs to inform public
generally and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.

1. Design, fabricate and erect project identification signs in approved locations. Support on
posts or framing of paint finished, preservative-treated wood or galvanized steel.

2. Engage an experienced sign manufacturer to apply graphics for Project identification signs
related to this package. Write sign in both English and Arabic, and include:

a. Project name.
b. Employer's name, style and logo.
c. Engineer’s name, style and logo.
d. Contractor's name, style and logo.
e. Such other names, details and information as permitted and/or directed.

3. Provide other appropriate temporary signs to provide directional and safety information to
construction personnel and visitors

4. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

O. Advertising: The Contractor shall not display or permit any signs, posters or other advertising on or
about the premises without the prior written approval of the Employer / Engineer or others with
delegated authority.

P. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply
with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.

Q. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.

R. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial cleaning services on a daily basis for all temporary offices,
toilets, wash facilities, and similar areas.

S. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open
shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 14 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

T. Construction Aids and Miscellaneous Facilities: Provide all necessary aids and miscellaneous
facilities incidental and ancillary to the safe and efficient execution of construction operations and
the carrying out of work in a proper workmanlike manner, including but not necessarily limited to:

1. Scaffolds, ladders, walkways, platforms and guardrails.

2. Protective screens, chutes, coverings and roofs.
3. Small tools; hand and power operated.
4. Mechanical plant, machinery and equipment; stationary and mobile.
5. Tower cranes.
6. Truck mounted cranes.
7. Transportation equipment and vehicles; on and off Site.
8. Lifts and hoists for materials and workmen.
9. Protective clothing, including helmets, goggles, ear protectors and steel-toed safety boots.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction
in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,
waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and
equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that
will minimize complaints and nuisance to persons or establishments near Site.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent
and] requirements specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent
properties and walkways, according to [erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings]
[requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction,
whichever is more stringent].

1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.
2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation
from the project site during the course of the project.
4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in
and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from
heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of
trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from
damage, flooding, and erosion.

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 15 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Taking-Over. Obtain extended
warranty for Employer. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G. Secure Storage: Where materials and/or equipment are of high value or attractive for theft, provide a
secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of such materials
and/or equipment to minimize the opportunity for theft.

H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and
completed, from exposure, inclement weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
The temporary enclosures shall be in compliance with the requirements of ADM.

I. Temporary Partitions: Where necessary, construct, erect and maintain dustproof partitions and
temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration, and to separate areas from fumes and noise.

J. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install
and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably
predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. Strictly observe all requirements
and recommendations pertaining to fire safety on construction sites.

1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible
from space being served, with sign mounted above.

a. Site Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers.

b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of
extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
c. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose;
provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.

3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection

facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous
fire-exposure areas.

4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition.

5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Works, complete
installation of permanent fire-alarm and fire-protection facilities, including connected
services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.

6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for
personnel at Site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

7. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

K. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

L. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

M. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 16 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

N. Avoidance of Nuisance:

1. The Contractor shall ensure at all times that spillage does not occur of concrete, oils or
other deleterious material into any new or existing drainage, duct system or water course.
Nevertheless, should any drainage or duct system or water course be fouled by such
materials the Contractor shall clean the drainage or duct system or water course at his own
expense, to the satisfaction of the Employer / Engineer or others with delegated authority.

2. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no spillage of oil or other contaminant on to the
public roads.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible
signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to
wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage.

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
4. Remove standing water from decks.
5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure
and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and
ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high
organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.
5. Do not install material that is wet.
6. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse,
limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation,

and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to
avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Taking-Over.
Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace
construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 17 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Employer reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into
permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and
aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances
that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs,
and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. At Taking-Over, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction
period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout
Procedures."

3.7 SAFETY PROGRAMME

A. Safety: Take full responsibility for overall control and management of Nominated Sub
Contractors’ safety procedures and must ensure Nominated Sub Contractors’ awareness of and
full compliance with Contractor’s Safety Programme.

B. Security and Site Traffic: Take full responsibility for overall control and management of
Nominated Sub Contractor’s security procedures and site traffic and must ensure Nominated
Sub Contractors’ awareness of and full compliance with Contractor’s security and site traffic
procedures.

C. Upon the Engineer’s approval of the Safety Programme, the Contractor shall, for the full term
of the Contract, operate the Safety Programme, maintain accurate records of safety activities
and accident, and submit safety and accident reports to the Engineer on the approved forms.

END OF SECTION 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - Page 18 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 015526 - TRAFFIC CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Temporary Traffic Management/Traffic Control activities shall include but not limited to: temporary
entrances and exits to project’s premises and internal site traffic control. A major construction
objective is to complete the work in the shortest period possible, minimizing the disturbance to the
existing traffic. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that detouring and construction
activities are coordinated with, and approved by, the Traffic Police, Department of Transport and
any other required authority.

B. Traffic management shall take into consideration the existing road running through the site which
shall be maintained accessible at all time.

C. This Section includes:

1. Submittals

2. Traffic Control Requirements.

3. Quality Assurance.

4. Dust Control.

5. Materials and Equipment

6. Application of traffic control devices

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 013300 - Submittals

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013300.

B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to prepare the detailed plans, including alignments and profiles,
in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications, Drawings, and his proposed construction
methods. This shall include the relocation and/or protection of utilities that conflict with the traffic
management/ detour scheme. The Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings of the detour plans
for the review and approval of the Engineer, the applicable Departments, and the Traffic Police,
prior to commencing each stage of construction.

C. Shop Drawings

1. Provide shop drawings for all areas requiring traffic regulation for review and approval by the
Engineer and any relevant authorities, even if such areas are not shown on the contract drawings to
include but not be limited to:

i. Identify existing services and access to adjacent properties

ii. Detail congested areas at a scale of 1:250.

iii. Vehicular segregation and routing.

TRAFFIC CONTROL 015526 - Page 1 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

iv. Proposed detours during construction.

v. Employee parking areas

D. Method statement for dust control.

1.04 GENERAL TRAFFIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall construct the traffic management schemes and detours in accordance with the
approved shop drawings, Specifications, and Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for
coordinating the relocation and removal of all greenery which obstructs the construction of the
detour route. Similarly, it shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility to obtain the necessary
clearances and approvals for any detours which conflict with existing or proposed utility
installations.

B. Contractor shall maintain and protect vehicular and pedestrian traffic (including plant staff) through
all construction areas.

1. Work shall include but not necessarily be limited to furnishing, erecting and maintaining
temporary traffic control devices including barriers, barricades, cones, drums, warning signs
directional signage and lights.

C. The Contractor shall consider the use of additional sub-stage detours to facilitate any utility
installations in service reservation crossing that pass under existing roads or detour routes. All such
utility installations shall be fully reviewed with the Engineer prior to commencing each detour
phase.

D. Contractor must provide adequate barriers around the Work to define exit ways and limits of the
construction area, and to contain dust and debris within the construction area. The Contractor must
maintain warning lights, temporary walkways, traffic controls and the like, as may be required by
the Employer to give adequate warning and protection for pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
Pedestrian and vehicular traffic should be separated where practical.

E. No work shall be performed during the hours of darkness unless otherwise authorized in writing by
the Engineer and authorities (if required).

F. Contractor shall ensure that adequate access is maintained at all times to properties affected by
construction activities.

1. Replace access ways with the same width, standard and surface type as the existing access
facilities.

i. A minimum width of 3 m shall be provided.

ii. The Engineer shall agree to the layout, width and construction details of all access ways prior to
construction.

2. The access locations to be maintained are not shown on the Drawings.

3. All existing access ways; paved or unpaved, shall be maintained at all times during the contract
period unless specifically authorized otherwise by the Engineer in writing.

G. Detour Works and access to the site shall include but not necessarily be limited to:

1. Field surveys,

2. Construction and maintenance of paved and unpaved detour carriage ways including earthwork,

TRAFFIC CONTROL 015526 - Page 2 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Providing and installing barriers, drainage, lighting, traffic signals, signs, barricades, and other
traffic control devices.

4. Drawings showing details of the proposed Detour Works shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.

5. Temporary protection of existing utility services as required by the Engineer.

6. Restoration of the Detour sites to their original condition (or such other condition as directed or
approved by the Engineer) when the Detours are no longer required.

H. Any required detouring of off-site roads shall be closely co-ordinated by the Contractor with the
Abu Dhabi Traffic Police, the Department of Transport and the Abu Dhabi Municipality, as
required, including any necessary approvals or permits.

I. The Contractor shall co-ordinate any detours with Contractors on neighboring sites and ensures
minimum disruption to adjacent Construction activities.

J. As required, or when directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide protection for existing
or new utilities or services under or alongside temporary roadways.

K. All vehicles and drivers must comply with all applicable Laws prescribed by the Employer, or the
Employer’s Representative. All drivers must be aware of the posted speed limit on the Capital
District Project and the rules regarding overtaking of vehicles and must comply with the same at all
times. Failure to comply may cause the driver to be barred from driving on the Project.

L. All costs associated with Traffic Control (including but not limited to furnishing, erecting and
maintaining temporary traffic control devices including barriers, barricades, cones, drums, warning
signs directional signage and lights, personnel (flagmen etc), application and receipt of necessary
approvals from Authorities) shall be deemed to be included in the BOQ line item for “Traffic
Diversion”.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Traffic Safety Supervisor

1. Provide a competent Traffic Safety Supervisor approved by the Engineer, to oversee the
maintenance of vehicular and pedestrian traffic operations. This supervisor may have collateral
duties but he must give adequate time and attention to traffic safety as required by job site
conditions.

i. Supervisor shall be available at all times,

ii. Supervisor shall have received traffic safety training or shall have had previous experience
regulating traffic flow through construction work areas.

2. The Traffic Safety Supervisor's duties and responsibilities shall include but not necessarily be
limited to the following:

i. Maintain traffic flow through and around the construction site as required by these Contract
Documents.

ii. Coordinate traffic control procedures with all relevant authorities including the plant
operating staff,

iii. Inspect the condition and location of traffic control devices to ensure that they are in proper
working order, clean, visible and conform to these specifications.

TRAFFIC CONTROL 015526 - Page 3 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

iv. Establish traffic control requirements and develop the appropriate control procedures.

v. Provide and maintain such devices as are necessary for safe and efficient traffic movement.
Ensure that these devices are in place at the required time. There will include backup
alarms on equipment and haul trucks.

vi. Coordinate traffic control operations, including maintenance, with the Engineer.

vii. Review the Contractor's material storage and handling procedures with respect to traffic
safety and operation.

viii. Conduct an initial traffic safety meeting with Contractor, Subcontractor Superintendents
and other Contractors prior to beginning construction. Review traffic control procedures,
safety, barricading, traffic speeds, flagman, diversions on the site.

ix. Conduct periodic meetings at least monthly to review traffic control problems and
implement solutions.

• Provide the Engineer with minutes summarizing all discussions.

• The Engineer or other Employer Representatives may elect to attend these meetings.

B. Flagmen

1. Persons acting as flagmen shall be:

i. Physically and mentally qualified

ii. Trained in their duties, and

iii. Courteous.

2. Each flagman on duty shall wear appropriate and distinctive apparel as approved by the Engineer.

i. Shall be equipped with a STOP/GO sign conforming to these Specifications.

ii. Reflective apparel is required for flagging during daylight and darkness.

1.06 DUST CONTROL

A. Contractor shall prevent moving sand or nuisance conditions from developing as a result of dust.

B. Dust control shall be by watering using tanker trucks with spray attachments or by other approved
methods at no additional cost to the Employer.

C. Submit plan for Dust Control for approval by the Engineer.

1.07 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All traffic control devices shall be approved by the Engineer before being used on the Site.

1. After the initial use is complete, the Contractor may reuse any approved items as the need arises.

B. All sign panels, barricades, drums, vertical panels and flagmen's paddles shall be reflectorized.

1. Painting shall not constitute an approved substitute for reflectorization.

C. Barricades shall be made of metal or plastic and shall collapse when tipped over.

TRAFFIC CONTROL 015526 - Page 4 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Barricades made of wood will not be permitted.

D. Cones shall be manufactured of a material capable of withstanding impact without damage to the
cones or vehicles.

1. All cones shall be red and shall have a white reflectorized band.

2. Cones shall be capable of remaining upright during normal traffic flow and wind conditions in the
area where they are used.

E. Vertical panels shall be constructed of metal or plastic.

1. Wood construction will not be permitted.

F. Warning lights shall be Type A (low intensity flashing), or Type C (steady burn).

1. Shall meet the minimum requirement of the Institute of Transportation Engineers "Standard for
Flashing and Steady-Burn Barricade Warning Lights".

G. Temporary traffic signals shall be provided as deemed necessary by the Engineer. The traffic signals
proposed by the Contractor shall be capable of both manual operation and fixed phase operation,
and be approved by the Engineer before use..

H. Signs shall be printed in English and Arabic on the same panel

1.08 APPLICATION OF TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

A. The Contractor shall maintain all temporary works in a safe and usable condition throughout the
period they are in use. This shall include, but not be limited to removing dirt and debris from
temporary and permanent roadways in use relative to the project; cleaning of signs, lights and
reflectors; realigning displaced barriers, barricades and other temporary traffic control devices; and
removing/rectifying any unsafe or confusing conditions that would endanger the public.

B. Provide and maintain traffic control devices, both inside and outside the Contract Limits, as needed
to direct traffic and ensure vehicular and pedestrian safety.

C. Prior to beginning construction, erect the necessary signs, barricades, and other traffic control
devices.

1. Remove or cover all warning signs except those required for public safety during non-working
hours or when construction in that area is completed.

2. Cover signs with either metal or plywood sheets so that the entire sign cannot be seen by on-
coming traffic.

D. Use traffic Control devices only as long as they are needed.

1. Only those devices that apply to conditions actually in existence shall be in place.

E. Reflective materials on signs, drums, barricades, and other devices shall be kept clean, free from
dirt, mud and road grime.

1. Scratches, rips, and tears in the sheeting shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor to the
Engineer's satisfaction.

2. Reflective sheeting materials shall maintain a reflectivity of not less than 50% of their design
intensity values.

TRAFFIC CONTROL 015526 - Page 5 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

F. Traffic Control Devices

1. Shall be supplied and maintained by the Contractor.

2. Shall be relocated, realigned or replaced as necessary.

3. Which are damaged, lost, stolen, destroyed or deemed unacceptable shall be promptly replaced by
the Contractor without additional payment or compensation.

G. Warning lights shall be securely fixed to barricades or drums used singly or in combination with
other devices, unless otherwise specified.

H. In addition to the requirements for Temporary Works in the Specifications, the Contractor shall be
required, when directed by the Engineer, to provide warning lights and reflective painted markings
on continuous temporary barriers in areas where detour pavement is poorly illuminated.

I. The Contractor shall maintain the detour Works to an acceptable condition for the duration that the
detour Works are in place. The cost of the maintenance of these detours shall be deemed to be
included in the BOQ line item for traffic Control.

END OF SECTION 015526

TRAFFIC CONTROL 015526 - Page 6 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements relating to products to be used in
the Work, including the following:
1. Selection of products for the Works.
2. Quality assurance.
3. Product delivery, storage, and handling.
4. Product warranties.
5. Special warranties.
6. Product substitutions.
7. Comparable products

B. If the requirements in this Section contradict with requirements in other Sections, the more stringent
requirements shall prevail.

C. All works shall be carried out in accordance with AD QCC latest requirements, specifications and
general details. In case of any contradiction between this section and AD QCC specifications, AD
QCC specifications shall be followed.

D. The design complies with the standard specification and design guidelines issued by AD QCC. The
Contractor shall obtain the latest edition of the specifications for execution of the project.

E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
2. Specifications Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations
specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Works, whether purchased for Project or taken
from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment,"
"system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature,
that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process,
to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,
physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of
specified product.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 1 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation,
to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,
physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable
products of additional manufacturers named in the Specification..

D. Manufacturer's Instructions and Manufacturer's Recommendations means latest published or printed

version of 'manufacturer's written instructions' and 'manufacturer's written recommendations.

E. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Employer.

F. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
whether to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty, or to provide for joint and several
liability, or to provide more rights for Employer.

G. Manufacturers’ names listed in the specifications are intended to show the minimum acceptable
product standards and are not intended to be exclusive.
1. Products of other manufacturers that are equivalent to the specified product may be accepted
subject to the conditions set in this section and in specification sections.
2. Reference to a manufacturer’s name or product shall not be interpreted as an approval of this
manufacturer or all his product line. Submission for approval of manufacturer and a specific
product is mandatory.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Prepare and submit a list, in tabular from, identifying specified products. Include
generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's and supplier's name and proprietary
product name for each product.
1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Programme, the Submittals Schedule,
and the Subcontract List.
2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a. Specification Section number and title.
b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
c. Specified warranty requirements, if any.
d. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
e. Manufacturer's name and address.
f. Supplier's name and address.
g. Installer's name and address.
h. Total quantity required for the Works.
i. Projected delivery date or, if multiple deliveries, first and last delivery dates.
j. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
3. Completed List: Within 7 days after Commencement Date, submit 3 copies of completed
product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from
Contract requirements.
4. Engineer's Action: Engineer will respond in writing to Contractor within 7 days of receipt
of completed product list. Engineer's response will include a list of unacceptable product
selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Engineer's response, or lack of
response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract
Documents.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 2 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type
of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts.
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g. Printed performance curves.
h. Operational range diagrams.
i. Mill reports.
j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.
k. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
l. Testing by recognized testing agency.
m. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

C. Compliance Statement: Submit a copy of project specifications identifying on each item whether or
not the submission complies with that requirement.

D. Copy of Product Warranty.

E. The Engineer reserves the right to request further clarifications and particulars regarding any
submission.

F. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title
and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided by Engineer.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Employer and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the
Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance,
weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements
indicated.
d. Identify product to be replaced. Include detailed comparison in matrix form between
specified materials and proposed ones.
e. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
f. Samples, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses
and names and addresses of architects and owners.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 3 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

h. Material test reports to the same standards from a qualified testing agency, approved
by Engineer, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements
indicated.
i. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Price.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.

3. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation. Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of
proposed.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.

b. Use product specified if Engineer cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.

G. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Submit three copies of each
request for consideration. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and
titles.

1. Request Form: Use a form acceptable to Engineer.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for approval of an unnamed product.

3. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request. Engineer will notify
Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed comparable product within 14 days of
receipt of request, or within 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation,
whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Variation Order, without additional compensation.

b. Use product specified if Engineer does not make a decision on use of a proposed
comparable product within time allocated.

H. This specification is based on US codes and standards. An accredited and approved laboratory/
certification agency shall provide technical assessment regarding the suitability of products and tests
made to other approved international standards to provide equal or better performance.

1. The technical assessment shall comprise a detailed technical comparison between the two
standards.
2. The most stringent code shall prevail.
3. The Engineer, in all cases, has the right to evaluate such comparison and request from the
contractor to abide by the specified standard.

I. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 4 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

J. Products Manufactured under license: Contractor submitting products in accordance with these
specifications manufactured by a company other than the one specified and in another country shall
submit also:

1. A letter from the original manufacturing company listed in the specifications certifying that
the product submitted is manufactured under license and subject to quality control and
supervision from the original manufacturing company.
2. Both the original manufacturing company and the subsidiary company shall have Quality
Management System such as ISO 9001 and 9002
3. The submitted product under license is equivalent to the original specified product in all
respects.
4. The Engineer has the right to request further testing in an approved independent laboratory
to demonstrate that the product manufactured under license is equivalent in all respects to
the product manufactured by the original company.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Alternative Equivalent Standards: Product references to industry standards establish quantitative

and qualitative attributes, characteristics and properties, required to be inherent in the specified
product. Standard products not conforming to referenced standards, but otherwise exhibiting the
same essential properties and conforming to another recognized equivalent industry standard may
be used, subject to approval and compliance with other specified requirements.

1. Recognized standards are those which are listed in Division 01 Section "References".

2. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of a
product conforming with an alternative equivalent standard.

B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products
for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible
with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible

products, Engineer will determine which products shall be used.

C. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same type and kind from
a single source.

1. If a specified product is available only from a source that cannot produce or supply sufficient
quantities to execute and/or complete Project requirements in a timely manner, request
Engineer to determine the most essential qualities, attributes and characteristics required in
the specified product, in order to select a comparable product possessing the same relevant,
significant properties.

2. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product.

D. Compliance with Contract Documents: Contractor shall fully and unconditionally comply with
Contract Documents. Any qualifying statement should be clearly and explicitly mentioned and
subject to approval of Engineer.

E. Manufacturers’/ Installers’ Qualifications: submit manufacturer / supplier profile form.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 5 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding
of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,
storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage.
7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Works site for storage of materials and equipment,
if any, to be furnished by Employer. Coordinate location with Engineer.
8. Store flammable and hazardous materials in a controlled environment and in a manner that
will not endanger Project structure

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of any obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.

1. Provide complete total system warranty in which Manufacturer Installer and Contractor are
jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without limitations, all or any
part of the products warranted. Warranty shall cover materials and workmanship.

2. All costs of repairing any defects in the works or consequential costs due to this defect shall
be borne by the warrantors.

3. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Employer.

4. Refer to Specifications Sections for specific content requirements and particular

requirements for submitting special warranties.

5. Submit form of warranty for Engineer’s approval.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 6 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Warranty Requirements:

1. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction,
remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be
removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.

2. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected
by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated
warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for
depreciation.

3. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace
or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective
Work regardless of whether the Employer has benefited from use of the Work through a
portion of its anticipated useful service life.

4. Employer's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Employer are in addition to implied
warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available
under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time
in which the Employer can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

C. Rejection of Warranties: The Employer reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection
to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or
part of the Work, the Employer reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor
presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

E. Manufacturer's and Special Warranties: Prepare a written document, ready for execution, that
contains appropriate terms and conditions, and identifies commencement date and warranty period,.
Submit a draft and obtain Engineer's written approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific requirements and

information, and properly executed; or
2. Special Form: Individually prepared and specially drafted to include Project-specific
requirements and information, and properly executed.
3. Refer to Specifications Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.

F. Submittal of Warranties: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that
are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed
for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully
in similar situations on other projects.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 7 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Employer reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will make selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Engineer's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. Or Approved Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by such terms
as "or other equal and approved", “or approved”, "or approved equal" or "or equal", comply
with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed
product.

a. Engineer reserves the right to limit selection to named products specified.

b. Unless otherwise agreed, contract unit rates and prices will be deemed to be based on
the use of named products specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:

1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single

product and manufacturer, provide the product named, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the
manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a
list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"

introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed
that complies with requirements, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.

5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available

Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the
products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions
in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled

"Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by
one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements.
Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of a
product of an unnamed manufacturer.
7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size,
profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or
system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 8 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article

to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated
product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and
Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on
the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will return requests
without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Employer a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Employer
must assume. Employer's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Engineer
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Employer, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated
results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
10. Requested substitution includes full comparison between specified and proposed material.
11. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will return requests
without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

B. Where products are specified by name or industry standard, submit the following, in addition to
other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed or alternative equivalent industry
standard, product:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated
results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty, if any.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects/Engineers and employers, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 9 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 016000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - Page 10 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of
the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Employer-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
9. Correction of the Work.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.

2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Employer-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other

work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Method Statement: Submit method statement to be used for construction layout

B. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time
cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and
other significant visual elements.

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 1 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform
patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and
patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated
and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services and systems
will be disrupted.

C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous
materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services
of the kind indicated.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to
void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and
procedures, utilize products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01
Section "Sustainable Design Requirements."

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces,
use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to the Engineer for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials.

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 2 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other
construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and
other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.

3. All costs involved in negotiating any obstacles shall be borne by the Contractor. In addition,
no claims of any kind will be considered for additional expenses the Contractor may incur
on account of any unforeseen obstacle of whatever nature, over and above those which would
have been incurred had the existence of the obstacle been known at the time of Contract
signature.

4. The Contractor shall obtain all further information required as to the risks, contingencies and
other circumstances, which may influence or affect the execution of the Works and include
the costs thereof in his Tender.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Works,
examine substrates, areas, and conditions... for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work.

b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to
be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

C. Should any work performed under the Contract expose previously unknown or unforeseen
conditions whose presence could cause additional construction cost or endanger the Project in any
way, such work shall be stopped and the matter reported immediately to the Employer /Engineer or
others with delegated authority for instruction. However, the Contractor shall immediately use
measures or methods necessary to ensure safety and prevent any threatened or further damage, injury
or loss.

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 3 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Adjoining Property:

1. All reasonable precautions must be taken by the Contractor to prevent damage to adjoining
property.

2. The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to protect existing structures, fences, gates,
walls, paving and other site features from damage during the currency of the Contract.
Where fences or walls are damaged or destroyed, the whole shall be restored and reinstated
with like materials to the satisfaction of the owners or occupiers and the Employer / Engineer
or others with delegated authority.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Engineer that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located
in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Employer
or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the Engineer and Employer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the Engineer's written permission

C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the construction properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Works are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Works

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of any discrepancy
or the need for a clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information or
instruction to the Engineer. Include a detailed description of discrepancy or problem encountered,
together with recommendations..."

3.3 SETTING OUT AND ACCURACY

A. Site Survey: Before commencing work on Site, the Contractor shall carry out a topographical survey
of the Site, in conjunction with, or as instructed by, the Engineer, or of such parts of the Site as the
Engineer may direct, to record the site limits, dimensions, ground levels, obstructions and other
features and to establish base lines and points for future setting out and to record the basis for re-
measurement of excavation and earthwork, where applicable.

B. Setting Out: Details of methods and equipment to be used in setting out the Works shall be submitted
to the Engineer. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer when setting out is complete and, before
commencing construction, shall provide instruments and assistance for the Engineer to check the
setting out if required by the Engineer.

C. Infrastructure and Utility Work: Setting out shall be as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by
the Engineer. It shall be revised if, in the opinion of the Engineer, modification of grade and line is
advisable.

D. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall record details of all grid lines, existing ground levels,
setting-out stations, bench marks and profiles on the site setting-out drawing; retain on the Site
throughout the duration of the Contract and hand to the Engineer on completion.

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 4 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. Dimensions and levels both on the Drawings and the Site, shall be checked, particularly the
correlation between components and the work in place. Materials and components shall not be
ordered or work carried out until any discrepancies have been resolved with the Engineer.

F. Tolerances: Infrastructure and utility work shall be within tolerances stated in the Specification or
as instructed.

G. Non-Compliance: Work which fails to meet the specified levels of accuracy must not be rectified
without approval. Submit proposals for such rectification or removal and replacement and meet all
costs arising, including effects on other work.

H. Any delay or loss resulting from errors in the setting out of the Works shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Method Statement: Before verifying layout information shown on Drawings, prepare a detailed
method statement comprising a descriptive narrative and drawings, clearly describing and
identifying means and methods to be used for construction layout including but not limited to:

1. Establishing benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels as needed to locate each
element of the Works.
2. Locating offsets for gridlines.
3. Locating and sizing penetrations in structures as needed to transfer lines and levels
horizontally and vertically.

B. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings,
in relation to Contractor's site survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered,
notify Engineer promptly.

C. General: Set out the Works using accepted surveying techniques and practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels as needed to locate each
element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Engineer when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and
topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

E. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical
work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level
foundations and piers from two or more locations.

F. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty
of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for
reference by Engineer

1. Advise the Engineer when deviations, exceeding indicated or recognized tolerances, are
detected.

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 5 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Record deviations that are accepted and not corrected on Record (As-Built) Drawings.

G. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with the Engineer and provide, when requested, auxiliary services
to enable and assist the Engineer to check the Contractor's site survey, layout and control work,
including means of access to Site, use of instruments and tapes, and supply of survey crew

3.5 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: The Engineer/Employer will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and
property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points
during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Engineer. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Engineer before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Site, referenced
to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type
and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Record (As-Built)
Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary
reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction
to its original condition.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of field engineering work. Include dates and times of surveys, weather
conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used.
Make the log available for reference by the Engineer

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and
ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain
conditions required for product performance until Taking Over.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 6 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory
prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Engineer.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Site
in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.

3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed
with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original
condition.

B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.

D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with
requirements of Division 01 Section "Summary."

E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are
required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to
prevent interruption to occupied areas.

F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with
original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering
and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete And Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-
core drill.

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 7 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit to be removed. Cap, valve, or
plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other
foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where
applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and
refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar,
oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements
strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire
work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 8 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on site will not be permitted. Washing waste
materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials
already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or
deterioration at Taking Over.

J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.

K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not
limited to, the following:

1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.

2. Excessive internal or external pressures.
3. Excessively high or low temperatures.
4. Thermal shock.
5. Excessively high or low humidity.
6. Pollution and air contamination.
7. Water.
8. Chemicals and solvents.
9. Light.
10. Radiation.
11. Puncture.
12. Abrasion.
13. Heavy traffic.
14. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.
15. Bacteria.
16. Rodent and insect infestation.
17. Combustion.
18. Electrical current.
19. High-speed operation.
20. Improper lubrication.
21. Unusual wear or other misuse.
22. Contact between incompatible materials.
23. Destructive testing.
24. Misalignment.
25. Excessive weathering.
26. Unprotected storage.
27. Improper shipping or handling.
28. Theft or vandalism.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning
units, replace with new units, and retest.

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 9 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without
binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section

"Quality Requirements."

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.11 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with
matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that
cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

END OF SECTION 017300

EXECUTION 017300 - Page 10 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:

1. Taking Over procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.
3. List of incomplete items (punch list).
4. Warranties.
5. Final cleaning.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion

construction photographic documentation.
2. Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures” Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress
cleaning of Site.
3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
4. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
5. Specification Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Works
in those Sections.

1.3 TAKING OVER

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Taking Over,
complete the following.

1. Prepare, in a tabular format acceptable to the Engineer, a list of items to be completed and
corrected (punch list). Include the value for each item on the list, and reasons why the work
is not complete.
2. Submit a written undertaking in a form acceptable to the Engineer, to complete and/or correct
all items contained in the punch list, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, within 28 days from
date of issue of the Taking-Over Certificate
3. Advise Employer with copy to Engineer of pending insurance changeover requirements.
4. Submit warranties, bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
5. Obtain and submit releases permitting the authorities having jurisdiction and / or the
Employer unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include
occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
6. Prepare and submit to the authorities having jurisdiction and / or the Employer all Project
Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 1 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, HSSE files,

and similar final record information.
7. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Employer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
8. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Employer, as applicable.
Advise Employer's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
9. Complete startup testing of systems.
10. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
11. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Site, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
12. Advise Employer of changeover in heat and other utilities.
13. Submit changeover information related to Employer's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
14. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
15. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects, as applicable.
16. Commence instruction of the Employer's personnel in operation, adjustment, and
maintenance of systems and equipment, and maintenance of products.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, the Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Engineer will prepare the Taking Over Certificate after inspection or will notify
Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Works identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:

1. Complete instruction of the Employer's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance

of systems and equipment, and maintenance of products.
2. Submit certified copy of Taking Over inspection list of items to be completed or corrected
(punch list), endorsed and dated by the Engineer. The certified copy of the list shall state
that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Engineer will issue a Defects Liability Certificate after satisfactory inspection or will notify
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Works identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

1. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each work area
and site area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing
correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by the Contractor that are outside the limits

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 2 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

of construction. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first
and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Engineer.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. Electronic file on CD.

b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Form of Submittal: Produce two (2) original copies of each required warranty, written in the form
approved by the Engineer, and properly executed as specified. Submit in addition electronic copies
of the warrantees on CD’s in PDF format (5 sets).

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the Sections and Parts in the table
of contents of the Specifications.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf ring binders, thickness
as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive A4 paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Provide a typed index and table of contents list at the front of each binder.
4. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Works name, and name of Contractor.

C. Submittal Time: Submit warranties prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Taking
Over for Section of the Works if applicable.

D. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of

designated portions of the Works that are completed and occupied or used by Employer during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

E. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
specifications.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-
by-280-mm) paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab
to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number
of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 3 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications
4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into
a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide
table of contents at beginning of document.

F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator
of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or
property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with
applicable laws and ordinances and environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. The Contractor shall leave the whole of the Works clean and tidy on completion, and the site
compound shall be reinstated to the original or to a better condition, all to the satisfaction of the
Employer/ Engineer or others with delegated authority.

C. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. . Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for determining
date of Taking Over for entire Project or for a portion of Works, as applicable:

a. Clean Site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including
landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign
substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project
site.
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Remove labels that are not permanent.
i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that
already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates.

j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 4 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

k. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.

l. Clean light fixtures and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-
out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy
starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
m. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

D. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

E. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on the Employer's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Site and dispose of lawfully.

F. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements and regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 017700

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - Page 5 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance (O&M) manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Preparing and submitting instruction manuals covering the care, preservation, and
maintenance of engineered components and systems
5. Preparing and submitting O&M Manuals for operating systems, subsystems and equipment.
6. Instruction of the Employer's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of
systems and equipment.

B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation
and maintenance manuals.
2. Division 01 Section “Product Requirements”
3. Division 01 Section “Project Record (As-built) Documents”
4. Specifications Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the
Works in those Sections and for specific pieces of equipment or building operating systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. O&M Manual Preparation: In preparation of O&M Manuals, use personnel thoroughly trained and
experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system involved.

1. Where O&M Manuals require written instructions, use personnel skilled in technical writing
where necessary for communication of essential data.
2. Where O&M Manuals require drawings or diagrams, use CAD operators or drafters capable
of preparing drawings clearly in a clear, understandable industry standard format.
3. System-Level O&M Manuals for mechanical and electrical systems shall be developed
specifically for this Project. Compilation of equipment vendor catalogues and O&M
Manuals is not acceptable.

B. Instructions for the Employer's Personnel: Use experienced instructors thoroughly trained and
experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system involved to instruct the
Employer's O&M personnel.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 1 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Comply with the following schedule for submitting O&M Manuals:

1. Not later than 60 days prior to initial start-up of the subject work scope equipment, when
each installation that requires O&M Manuals is nominally complete, submit 2 draft hard
copies and one electronic copy using the Electronic Transmission System of each manual to
the Engineer for review and approval. Include a complete index or table of contents of each
manual.
2. The Engineer will return 1 copy of the draft through the Electronic Transmission System
with comments within 30 days of receipt.
After receipt of the Engineer’s approval, make any required corrections or modifications to
comply with the Engineer's comments. After approval, and at least 30 calendar days in
advance of initial start-up of an item (i.e., within 30 days of receipt of the Engineer's final
comments and approval), submit the O&M Manuals, in final form, to the Engineer for
distribution and use by the Employer, as follows:
a) Five (5) bound sets of O&M Manuals.
b) One (1) loose set (Coloured print) of O&M Manuals.
c) Five (5) sets of O&M Manuals in electronic PDF format (in CD-ROM), and one
electronic using the Electronic transmission system. The Employer may elect to
replace on CD-ROM by direct upload to his website system.

B. Form of Submittal: Prepare O&M Manuals in the form of an instructional manual for use by the
Employer's operating personnel. Organize into suitable sets of manageable size. Where possible,
assemble instructions for similar equipment into a single binder.

1. Complete Listing: Provide a complete list showing the actual number of volumes and files of
O&M Manuals, for the project. Also provide a list showing the number of volumes and files
included in a particular submittal.

2. Binders: For each manual, provide heavy-duty, commercial-quality, 3-ring, vinyl-covered,

loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to receive Metric-
Size "A4" (210 mm by 297 mm) paper. Provide a clear plastic sleeve on the spine to hold labels
describing contents. Provide pockets on the inside of the covers to receive folded sheets.
a. Where 2 or more binders are necessary to accommodate data, correlate data in each
binder into related groupings for similar items. Establish a logical, well-organized
table of contents and O&M Manual binders layout. Cross-reference other binders
where necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance
of the piece of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with the printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL", Works title or name, and subject matter covered.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume manuals. Indicate applicable 5-digit
specification Part number for reference as appropriate on the front of each major
O&M Manual section.
c. They must be filled with good quality files and proper labelling.

3. Organize each O&M Manual into separate Parts for each piece of related equipment. Each
manual section shall contain a title page; a table of contents; copies of pertinent product data,
supplemented by drawings and written text; and copies of each warranty, bond, and service
contract issued.

a. Title Page: Provide a title page in a transparent, plastic envelope as the first sheet of
each manual. Provide the following:

1) Subject matter covered by the manual section.

2) Name and address of the Works.
3) Contract (project) Number.
4) Date of submittal.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 2 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

5) Name, address, and telephone number of the Contractor.

6) Name and address of the Engineer.
7) Cross-reference to related systems in other O&M Manuals or Parts of the
subject O&M Manual.

b. Table of Contents: After title page, include a typewritten table of contents for each
volume, arranged systematically. Include a list of each product included, identified
by product name or other appropriate identifying symbol and indexed to the content
of the volume. Where a system requires more than one volume to accommodate data,
provide a comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
c. General Information: Provide a general information section immediately following
table of contents, listing each product included in the manual, identified by product
name. Under each product, list the name, address, and telephone number of the
subcontractor or installer and the maintenance contractor. Clearly delineate the extent
of responsibility of each of these entities.
d. Product Data: Where the manuals include manufacturer's standard printed data,
include only sheets that are pertinent to the part or product installed. Mark each sheet
to identify each part or product included in the installation. Where the Project
includes more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item, using appropriate
references from the Contract Documents. Identify data that is applicable to the
installation, and delete references to information that is not applicable.
e. Written Text: Prepare written text to provide necessary information where
manufacturer's standard printed data is not available, and the information is necessary
for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. Prepare written text
where it is necessary to provide additional information or to supplement data included
in the manual. Organize text in a consistent format under separate headings for
different procedures. Where necessary, provide a logical sequence of instruction for
each operation or maintenance procedure.
f. Drawings: Original project record documents as part of O&M Manuals.
g. Warranties, Bonds, and Service Contracts: Original documentation.

4. Dividers: Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid-covered tabs for each separate Section.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Provide a typed description of the product and major parts
of equipment included in the section on each divider.
5. Protective Plastic Jackets: Provide protective, transparent, plastic jackets designed to enclose
diagnostic software for computerized electronic equipment.
6. Text Material: Where O&M Manuals require written material, use the manufacturer's standard
printed material. If manufacturer's standard printed material is not available, provide specially
prepared data, typewritten, on Metric Size "A4" (210 mm by 297 mm), 75-g/sq. m, white bond
paper.
7. Drawings: Provide reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind in with text.

a. Where oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to the same size as text pages
and use as a foldout.
b. If drawings are too large to be used practically as a foldout, place the drawing, folded,
in front or rear pocket of binder. Insert a typewritten page indicating drawing title,
description of contents, and drawing location at the appropriate location in the
manual.
8. Loose Copy: Shall be in coloured prints.
9. Electronic Format: Provide five (5) sets of O&M Manuals in CD – ROM format including file
index, procedures and all related catalogues and brochures.
10. All O&M Manuals shall be stamped as “Final Copy” on the front page assuring that such are
final.
11. All drawings, sketches and diagrams included in the O&M Manuals shall also be stamped as
“As-Built” and certified accordingly by the Contractor.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 3 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

12. Other Documents / Reports: Provide one list of full report about the project, Test results and
any other information / documents, which are not included in the O&M manuals and As-Built
drawings

1.6 O&M MANUAL CONTENT

A. Each O&M Manual shall include the information specified in the applicable individual Specification
Section and, as a minimum, shall include the following general Parts/subsections and information.
The O&M Manual shall address each component/equipment/item and its controls and each major
facility included within the scope of work.

1. How to Use the Manual. This Part shall be a guide to the contents, structure, and layout of
the manual. It shall enable the reader to comprehend the scope of the document and identify
readily where specific information can be obtained.
2. Overall Purpose. This Part shall provide a general overview of the original design intent.
3. Description. This Part shall include the following:

a. Type of system.
b. System location and what it serves.
c. System inputs/interfaces; i.e., what the system depends upon in order to function.
d. Design data, basic design parameters, and basic assumptions made during design.
The appropriate Employer's Design Criteria documents will be made available for the
Contractor’s use and information and to assist in the preparation of this section of the
O&M Manual.
e. Rationale for selecting particular plant processes/equipment.
f. Expected service life (where available).
g. Planned operational efficiencies.

4. Equipment Schedule and Identification. This Part shall include the following for all
components within each system:

a. Type of equipment.
b. Name of manufacturer.
c. Equipment model number of each component.
d. Equipment serial number of each component.
e. Items within each system shall be listed, together with the names of their respective
manufacturers or suppliers.

5. Parts Identification and Recommended Spares. This Part shall include the following for all
components within each system:

a. A parts identification list detailing and identifying replaceable assemblies, sub-

assemblies, and components. It shall include suppliers’ recommendation for both
spares and “running spares” for the First year period and Second year period as a
minimum; i.e., parts required for scheduled replacement due to wear or deterioration.
b. Items normally held in stock locally by the supplier or for which a refurbishment
service is available shall be clearly identified.
c. Recommended stocking levels of spare parts.
d. Manufacturing and shipping time required for imported spare parts.

6. Commissioning Data. This Part shall include the following:

a. Measured data.
b. Measurement points.
c. Test equipment used.
d. Calibration certificate details.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 4 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

e. Test certificates.
f. Safety and fire certificates (where applicable).
g. A statement of whether the design requirements were achieved.

7. Operation. This Part shall include instructions for the safe and efficient operation, under
both normal and emergency conditions. These will be in addition to manufacturers’ literature
for all plant items and shall include the following:

a. A recommended strategy for operation and control.

b. An outline of the general operating mode.
c. Control data (location, effect, object, sequence, limits of capability, modes, set
points).
d. For electric and electronic systems, provide complete circuit directories of control
panels, local panels/racks, programmable logic controller units, panel boards, etc.
including the following:
1) Electric service.
2) Controls.
3) Communications.

e. Charts of valve-tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.
f. Procedure and sequences for start-up, running, and shutdown, under both normal and
emergency conditions.
g. Interlocks between various plant items.
h. Operating procedure for standby operations and plant.
i. Precautions necessary to overcome known hazards.
j. The means by which any potentially hazardous condition may be made safe.
k. Target figures for both energy consumption and energy costs.
l. Forms for recording plant running hours, energy consumption, and energy costs.

8. Maintenance. This Part shall include the following:

a. Manufacturers’ recommendations and instructions for maintenance for each item of

plant and equipment. A clear distinction shall be made between planned tasks
(preventative maintenance) and work done on a corrective basis. Instructions shall
be given on each of the following, as appropriate:
1) The isolation and return to service of systems and equipment.
2) Adjustments, calibration, and testing.
3) Dismantling and re-assembly.
4) The exchange of components and assemblies.
5) Dealing with hazards that might arise during maintenance.
6) The nature of expected deterioration and the types of defects anticipated.
7) Special tools, test equipment, and ancillary services.

b. Maintenance schedules shall be provided for preventative maintenance tasks and shall
be based on manufacturers’ recommendations and other authoritative sources and
shall include the following:
1) Inspections.
2) Examinations.
3) Tests.
4) Adjustments.
5) Calibration.
6) Lubrication.
7) Periodic overhaul.

c. Procedures for the logical diagnosis and correction of faults.

d. A schedule for all systems/components requiring lubrication shall be provided
together with manufacturers’ recommendations on the type of lubricant and the

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 5 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

method and frequency of application. Where the type of lubricant is identified by

product name, a generic reference (e.g., BS) shall also be given. Special requirements
for the handling and storage of lubricants shall be provided. Where applicable, names
of locally available lubricants shall be provided.

9. Modification Information. This Part shall include information on permitted plant or system
modifications allowed for by the manufacturers or system designers for each system. Space
shall be provided in the manual for the recording of all modifications and changes as they
occur.

10. Disposal Instructions. This Part shall include the following:

a. Any known dangers likely to arise during the disposal of specific items of systems or
equipment, together with the necessary precautions and safety measures.
b. Methods for safely disposing of or destroying the equipment or any parts thereof,
including packaging, insulation, and fluids.
c. Sources from which further advice on safe disposal can be obtained.

11. Names and Addresses of Manufacturers. This Part shall include the following:

a. Name of each equipment/item.

b. Name of manufacturer.
c. Address of manufacturer.
d. Telephone number and telex/fax number of manufacturer. Include E-Mail address if
available.
e. Name of local supplier/agent.
f. Address of local supplier/agent.
g. Telephone number and telex/fax number of local supplier/agent. Include E-Mail
address if available.

12. Index of Plans and Drawings. This Part shall include the following:

a. An index shall be provided of all “As Fitted” drawings supplied during the course of
the installation work, included by number and title.
b. The index shall also include a schedule of all drawings issued by each manufacturer
and supplier during the course of the installation work; e.g., control panel wiring
diagrams.
c. In addition to manufacturer-prepared documentation and drawings as specified
below, the O&M Manual shall contain copies of Contractor-prepared Coordination
Drawings that accurately represent the final as-built condition of the facility/system.

13. Emergency Information. This Part shall include the following:

a. Names, addresses, telephone, and telex/fax numbers of the appropriate contacts in the
event of fire, theft, burglary, and fuel, gas, electricity or water failure/leaks. It shall
also list those firms or staff to contact in the event of the failure or breakdown of such
facility items as elevators, security gates, and miscellaneous mechanical and electrical
equipment.
b. Where applicable, location of firefighting equipment, hydrants, and rising mains shall
be identified and described.

14. Manufacturers’ Literature. This Part shall include the following:

a. A complete set of all manufacturers’ literature shall be provided for each of the
systems and equipment installed and assembled. As a minimum, the following
document types shall be provided:

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 6 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1) Product data shall be manufacturer’s original printed data (not copies).

2) Copies of applicable Shop Drawings and Product Data.
3) Assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
4) Wiring diagrams.
5) Inspection and test procedures.
6) Repair instructions including spare parts listing.
7) Maintenance procedures and schedules.
8) Precautions against improper use and maintenance.
9) Sources of required maintenance materials and related services.
10) Description of the sequence of operation and as-installed control diagrams by
the control manufacturer for systems requiring controls.
11) Specially prepared drawings where necessary to supplement manufacturer's
printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment or
systems or to provide control or flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings
with information contained in Project Record Drawings to assure correct
illustration of the completed installation.

b. This literature shall provide the following:

1) Description of the product as purchased.

2) The cost and date of purchase.
3) Performance - behavioural characteristics of the equipment in use (e.g.,
performance curves for pumps).
4) Equipment or system function.
5) Operating characteristics.
6) Limiting conditions.
7) Engineering data and tests.
8) Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
9) Applications - suitability for use.
10) Operation and Maintenance details.
11) Resources of labour, plant, material, and space required.
12) Methods of operation and control.
13) Cleaning and maintenance requirements.
14) Protective measures.
15) Labour safety and welfare associated with the equipment.
16) Public safety considerations.

15. Manufacturers’ Guarantees and Warranties. This Part shall include copies of each warranty,
bond, or service contract in the appropriate manual for the information of the Employer's
operating personnel. Provide written data outlining procedures to follow in the event of
product failure. List circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranty or
bond.

1.6 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE EMPLOYER'S PERSONNEL

A. Prior to final inspection, instruct the Employer's personnel in operation, adjustment, and
maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Provide instruction at mutually agreed upon
times.

1. Use O&M Manual Parts for each piece of equipment or system as the basis of instruction.
Review contents in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 7 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

(Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 017823

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - Page 8 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 017836 - WARRANTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: General requirements for written warranties, guaranties, and bonds required by
the Contract Documents.

B. Referenced Documents and Sections:

1. General Conditions.
2. Particular Conditions.
3. Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures”: Submittal of warranties, guaranties, and bonds
as a condition of Taking Over.
4. Division 01 Section “Operating and Maintenance Data: Incorporation of warranties,
guaranties, and bonds into instruction manuals.
5. Specification sections for warranty clauses specified.

C. All works shall be carried out in accordance with AD QCC latest requirements, specifications and
general details. In case of any contradiction between this section and AD QCC specifications, AD
QCC specifications shall be followed.

D. The design complies with the standard specification and design guidelines issued by AD QCC. The
Contractor shall obtain the latest edition of the specifications for execution of the project.

E. Approval of the warranties, guaranties, and bonds by the Employer is a prerequisite to final payment
under the Contract.

1.2 GENERAL

A. Deliver warranties, guaranties, and bonds required by Contract Documents as stated in the General
Conditions, with Employer named as beneficiary.

B. Total System Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor are jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective components of
the warranted item. Warranty shall include both, materials and workmanship.

C. System Warranty: Provide system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are
jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace defective components of the warranted
item.

D. Additional/Extended Warranties for the HVAC and Electrical Equipment: Provide

additional/extended warranties for all HVAC and electrical equipment put into early operation for
the supply of Wild Air to cover the operation period of the equipment from the Wild Air On date to
the Date of Substantial Completion of the Works. Manufacturers’ Warranty Certificates shall be
submitted which specifically cover this period related to the provision of Wild Air. The provision
of these additional/extended warranties is in addition to the warranties required for the stated period
after the Date of Substantial Completion.

E. Warranty shall include:

1. Defective materials and installation.

2. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
3. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

WARRANTIES 017836 - Page 1 of 2

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.

5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and
use.
6. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may be
required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with Employer,
manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty is not
cancelled due to the repair work.

F. Limitations: state the limitations of the warranty as agreed with Engineer/ Employer.

G. Disclaimers: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve

Contractor of warranty on work that incorporates products, nor does it relieve suppliers,
manufacturers, and Subcontractors required countersigning special warranties with Contractor.

H. Warranty Period: Warranties shall come into force at date of Taking Over. Unless longer warranty
periods are specified in Contract Documents, Employer and/or subsequent owners and operators of
facilities shall benefit, as a minimum, from full available periods of manufacturers’ standard
warranties commencing from end of defects liability period. Accordingly, Contractor shall obtain
any extended warranties required to cover defects liability period.)

1.3 WARRANTY/GUARANTY FORM

A. Submit paper and PDF digital copies of warranties and guaranties, on the Contractor's,
subcontractor's, material supplier's, or manufacturer's own letterhead, addressed to Employer.

B. Submit warranties and guaranties in duplicate, in the form indicated, signed by cognizant entities,
including Contractor in every case, with modifications as approved by Employer to suit the
conditions pertaining to the warranty or guaranty.

1.4 SUBMITTAL

A. Collect and assemble written warranties and guaranties as instructed in Division 01 Section
“Closeout Procedures”, and submit to Engineer for delivery to Employer for final review and
approval.

B. Submittal time: Submit written warranties to Engineer with operations and maintenance data.
Comply with general requirements section of close-out procedures.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty required for operations and maintenance manuals.

1.5 TERMS

A. In addition to specific product requirements, Contractor agrees to repair or replace defective

materials, workmanship, or failures in a timely, satisfactory manner at no cost to the Employer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable

END OF SECTION 017836

WARRANTIES 017836 - Page 2 of 2

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 017839 - RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
other Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record (As-Built)
documents, including and not limited to the following:

1. Record Drawings
2. Record Specifications
3. Record Product Data
4. Miscellaneous record submittals

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.
3. Specification Sections for specific requirements for Miscellaneous Record keeping and submittal
in those Sections.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:

1. Initial Submittal: Using the Electronic Transmission System, submit two hard sets and one
electronic set of As-Built drawings and the original marked-up Record Prints. The Engineer will
initial and date one set of plots and mark whether general scope of changes, additional
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. The Engineer will return one set
of plots and Record Prints through the Electronic Transmission System together with review
comments, for completing, printing, binding, and final submittal.
2. Final Submittal: After incorporating the Engineer's initial submittal review comments, submit:

a. Original marked-up Record Prints set.

b. Sets of (As-Built) Drawings as follows:

1) Four (4) Sets electronic AutoCAD format: (in CD-ROM).

2) Four (4) Sets in electronic PDF format: (in CD-ROM).
3) One (1) set reproducible loose copy.
4) Five (5) bound sets of prints (A0 Size) or other approved size.
5) Comply with Section 017823 “Operation & Maintenance Data” for number of
sets required for the O&M Manual.

B. Record Specifications: Submit five (5) copies of Record Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications and Four (4) Sets in electronic PDF format: (in CD-ROM).

C. Record Product Data Submit five (5) copies of Record Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications and Four (4) Sets in electronic PDF format: (in CD-ROM) of each submittal.

RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 1 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit
duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-
keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit five
(5) sets of miscellaneous records.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: During construction period, print and maintain one set of coloured prints of all
Contract Drawings, approved Shop Drawings and newly prepared Drawings, for Record Print
purposes.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to indicate all changes and field adjustments and to show the
actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult

to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Site Instruction.
k. Changes made following made following Engineer's written orders and the Engineer's
acceptance of substitutions or alternatives, etc.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. All coordinates shown on the drawings shall be in accordance with the system agreed
with the Engineer.
o. Record information on the Works that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark record prints of Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of
showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Works at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from
original Drawings.
6. Note Variation numbers, Site Instruction numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings where the Engineer determines that
neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 2 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. New Drawings may be required when a Variation is issued or as a result of the Engineer
accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
2. Consult with the Engineer for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record
the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared
Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing,
copying, binding, and submitting.

C. Progress Review: Unless otherwise indicated or directed, submit a copy of marked-up Record Prints
and newly prepared Record Drawings at monthly intervals, for progress review and acceptance by
the Engineer.

1. Limit submittals to drawings marked-up, prepared or further amended since previous submittal.
List drawings contained in each submittal on transmittal form.

D. Record CAD Drawings: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Taking Over, review
marked-up final Record Prints with the Engineer. When authorized, prepare a full set of CAD
Drawings of all Contract Drawings, Shop Drawings and newly prepared Drawings, whether or not
changes or additional information are recorded:

1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Delete,
redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
2. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Engineer for resolution.
3. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "RECORD (AS-BUILT)
DRAWING" in a prominent location.

E. Record CAD Drawing Plots: Produce a full set of Record Drawing Plots from completed Record
CAD Drawing files.

F. Final Submittal Format:

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable
sets. Bind each set with thick cover sheets. Include identification and list contents on cover
sheets.
2. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that
correspond to each sheet of the Record Prints. Produce "List of Drawings" sheet. Name each
file with the sheet identification number. Include identification in each CAD file. All as follows:
a. All As-Built drawings to be submitted in coordinate system as agreed with the
Engineer.
b. The master map unit for As-Built drawings should be in meter (m) only.
c. All As-Built CAD drawings to be submitted in digital formats on CD’s media.
d. As-Built CAD is required for any As-Built design / entity submission.
e. All As-Built CAD drawings should be submitted in original AutoCAD format, (not
converted), unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer.
f. Pen width details for plotting should also be provided in each drawing. (Outside the
drawing area).
g. All reference files (if used) should be copied in a directory called ‘reference’.
h. If any of the files/drawings are using fonts other than the normal fonts provided by
the software, then those fonts shall also be copied in a separate directory called
‘fonts’.
i. Drawing should be neat and perfect. None of the items shall be outside the drawing
sheet area.
j. Drawings of different disciplines (i.e. Architectural, Structural, Electrical,
Mechanical etc.) shall be kept in separate directories with suitable names.
k. One file shall contain only one drawing.
l. Drawing shall be drawn/organized in suitable/proper layers/levels. Same kind of
items shall always be in the same layer/level.
m. Drawing shall be copied into CDs in such a way that, when one drawing is opened
from the CD, it must be complete and all reference files, fonts and libraries (if used)
should attach automatically.

RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 3 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

n. The index of drawings shall also be provided in the original format of the drawing
(DGN or DWG) and it must be kept in a directory called ’general’.
o. Total number of As-Built drawings in the index and in the CD shall be the same.
p. Change notice drawings shall be submitted along with all other drawings of that
project package in a new CD.

3. Reproducible Copy: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place in durable tube-
type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each container with identification. If
container does not include a complete set of Drawings, attach label and identify Drawings
included. All as follows:
a. All the drawings must be either A0 or A1 size. (Standard).
b. Maximum size of the sheet shall not exceed 1200 x 880 mm.
c. All drawings must be in good quality paper.

4. Copy Prints: Organize into bound sets matching Record CAD Drawing Plots. The Engineer
will deliver the Employer copy sets. All as follows:
a. They must be in standard in A2 size.
b. They must be properly bound using thick covering sheets.
c. Laminated labelling must be as in the following format:

KEY
PLAN
<PROJECT TITLE>

PROJECT NO:…..
DESCRIPTION
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
DATE:
Vol. No:….. DISCIPLINE

d. The scale of the drawings in the bound book shall match with the scale shown in the
title block of the drawing of bound book.

5. General (for Soft copy & Hard copy)

a. Each document should be verified thoroughly by the Engineer/Contractor before

submission.
b. “As-Built” stamp/seal with date and signature of the verified person shall be
provided in each drawing.
c. “As-Built” stamp/seal (item 5. b above) shall be exactly like below:

AS –BUILT DRAWING
CHECKED AND CERTIFIED BY
CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATIVE
SIGNATURE: DATE:
NAME:
VERIFIED BY ENGINEER
REPRESENTATIVE
SIGNATURE: DATE:
NAME:

RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 4 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

d. Drawing should be in proper scale and Project number, its description and scale of
the drawing shall also be mentioned in the title block along with other details.
e. Key plan and north symbol shall be provided in the upper right corner of the drawings
(wherever it is applicable).
f. North symbol (item 5. e above) shall be as sample below:

g. Provide hard copy of list (index) of drawings as in the following format:

Discipline (Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, etc.)

SI. No. Sheet no. Drg. No. Rev. No. Drg. File name Description

h. All the drawings must be numbered serially (sheet number), starting from 001
(drawing index as sheet no. 001) and must be listed in the drawing index. (Total
number of drawings in one project (Package) should be same as the sheet number of
the last drawing).
i. One file shall contain only one drawing. (This point is also incorporated under item
2.1. F.2 above).
j. All the drawings, sketches or diagrams inside the O&M manuals shall also be stamped
as As-Built and certified by the Contractor and Engineer.
k. All As-Built drawings to be submitted in coordinate system to be agreed with the
Engineer.
l. All As-Built CAD drawings files to be submitted in digital formats on CD’s media.
m. As-Built CAD format is required for any As-Built design / entity submission.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies
from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment
furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide
a record of selections made.

RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 5 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation
and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders record Product Data and record Drawings where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies
substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's
written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.
4. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and title,
electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Parts for miscellaneous record
keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Miscellaneous
records include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Field records on excavations and foundations.

2. Field records on underground construction and similar work.
3. Surveys showing locations and elevations of underground lines.
4. Invert elevations of drainage piping.
5. Surveys establishing building lines and levels.
6. Special and authorized measurements.
7. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products.
8. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records.
9. Testing and qualification of tradesmen.
10. Documented qualification of installation firms.
11. Tests and inspections.
12. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities.
13. Final inspection and correction procedures.
14. Any other information / documents which are not included on As-Built Drawings and Operation
and Maintenance Manuals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record
document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do
not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field
office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry,
legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents
for Engineer's inspection and reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION 017839

RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS 017839 - Page 6 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 018000 - COMMISSIONING, OPERATIONAL, FIELD AND PERFORMANCE TESTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes:

1. Commissioning
2. Field and Performance Testing
3. Operational Testing

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 013300 - Submittals

B. Technical Specification Sections

1.3 COMMISSIONING

A. The Contractor shall provide a thorough testing, functional operational and performance testing of
all systems through its actual operating modes – including part loads and failure modes.

B. The Contractor shall ensure that commissioning during the Construction Phase achieves the
following objectives:
1. Ensure that there is orderly, coordinated process in place to track the commissioning of the
systems

2. Ensure that the manufacturer’s startup procedures are implemented

3. Conduct quality control checks of the components and systems installed

4. Perform operational tests of installed systems to ensure that they are operating according to the
design
5. Coordinate the various project team members that contribute to the test, adjust and balance the
scope of work
6. Verify that the operations staff designated by the Employer receives the documentation and
training called for in the project documents.
7. Comply with the requirements of the Abu Dhabi utilities that will ultimately operate the
networks (e.g. ADM, ADDC, ADSSC, etc.)

C. The Contractor shall designate an individual to fill the role of MEP coordinator for the
coordination detailing activity (CDA), startup, and commissioning phases of the Works. This
individual will act as the main point of contact for the team members for all issues related to the
duties listed below.

D. The Contractor shall ensure that:

1. Eight weeks prior to energizing either the water or electrical systems, the MEP coordinator will
begin scheduling and generating MEP Start-up agenda and meeting minutes for the weekly
MEP Startup meetings
2. The MEP coordinator will schedule the meetings at a time and date agreeable to the Employer
and the Contractor, notifying all members of the team and securing a meeting location.

COMMISSIONING, OPERATIONAL, FIELD AND PERFORMANCE TESTING 018000 - Page 1 of 3

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. After each meeting, the MEP coordinator generates minutes of what was discussed during the
meeting for distribution and review prior to the next meeting.
4. The MEP coordinator generates and updates and MEP startup sequence and schedule clearly
identifying what utilities will be energized when they will be energized, and when the systems
will be ready for issuing the Completion Certificates

1.4 FIELD AND PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. After all construction and starting is complete and before Taking-Over of any part of the
Works, the Contractor shall perform field and performance tests as called for in the
Specifications.
1. Contractor shall demonstrate operation of the facilities to the Engineer showing proper
sequence of operation as well as satisfactory performance of the system and individual
components.
2. Any improper operation of the system or any improper, neglected or faulty construction
shall be repaired or corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. Contractor shall make such changes, adjustments or replacement of equipment as may be
required to make same comply with the specifications, or replace any defective parts or
material.

B. Performance
1. At the time of testing, failure of the system to perform at the specified level will be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
2. In the event of failure of equipment to meet the specified performance, the Employer
reserves the right to:
i. Not accept such equipment or system
ii. Withhold retention money
iii. Make claims on the performance bond

C. Test Schedule
1. Prepare and submit a consolidated schedule of operational, field and performance tests not
later than three months before the scheduled start of the first test.
2. Submit updates at monthly intervals.
3. Prepare and submit weekly a schedule of tests to be carried out during the following week.
4. Inform the Engineer and Employer not later than twenty-four hours in advance of changes
in the scheduling of a test.

D. Submittals
1. For all specified performance tests, prepare and submit:
i. Draft test procedure
♦ Submit not later than two months in advance of the scheduled test date.
ii. Final test procedure
♦ Submit not later than two months in advance of the scheduled test date.
iii. Test report
♦ Submit within fourteen days of the successful completion of the test.

COMMISSIONING, OPERATIONAL, FIELD AND PERFORMANCE TESTING 018000 - Page 2 of 3

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.5 OPERATIONAL TESTING

A. After Work is completed, tested and prior to Taking-over by the Employer; and not less than five
(5) days after submittal of the operation and maintenance data, the Contractor shall operate all the
systems for a period of three (3) 8-hour periods or longer if recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, during which time a qualified factory trained representative familiar with the items
installed shall instruct and supervise the Employer’s Personnel (or designated alternate) in the
operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems.

B. Any instructions from manufacturers’ representatives required under other Sections of this
Specification shall be conducted during this period. This instruction period shall be conducted
after completion of all piping and equipment labelling required by the Contract.

C. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and notices for operation and instruction periods
through the Engineer.

D. This instruction period is in addition and subsequent to any period of operation, testing and
adjustment called for elsewhere in these Specifications.

END OF SECTION 018000

COMMISSIONING, OPERATIONAL, FIELD AND PERFORMANCE TESTING 018000 - Page 3 of 3

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The requirements of AD QCC standard specifications apply to this Section.

C. All buildings, structures, manholes, chambers, etc shall follow the respective authorities’ specifications
and guidelines.

D. In case of conflicting requirements between these specifications and authorities’ specifications,

authorities’ specifications shall be adopted unless otherwise advised by the Employer / Engineer.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.
In Addition to the above, works shall consist of furnishing and installing internal and external concrete
protection (waterproofing, damproofing, etc.), which shall follow relevant authorities’ specifications.

Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of fly ash, ground
granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Submit alternate design mixes when characteristics of materials,
Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according
to ACI Detailing Manual-2004 (SP-66). Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop
spacing and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings
through concrete structures.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer.

E. Samples: For waterstops vapor retarder etc...

F. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 1 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

G. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with
requirements:

1. Cementitious materials.
2. Form materials and form-release agents.
3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
4. Fiber reinforcement.
5. Admixtures.
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing materials.
8. Floor and slab treatments.
9. Bonding agents.
10. Adhesives.
11. Vapor retarders.
12. Epoxy joint filler.
13. Joint-filler strips.
14. Repair materials.

H. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with
requirements:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

I. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and engineering of formwork are
Contractor's responsibility.

1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork,
shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.

J. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and
shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,
and extent.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products

complying with ASTM C 94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to Engineer, ISO certified
and qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding
Code-Reinforcing Steel."

F. Mockups: cast concrete panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, tolerances,
floor treatments and standard of workmanship.
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 2 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. In presence of Engineer, damage parts of exposed surfaces as selected by Engineer, and
demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repairs to match adjacent undamaged
surfaces
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting cast-in-place concrete elements exposed
to view.
5. If Engineer determines that any mockup does not meet requirements, demolish and remove
from the site and cast another until the mockup is approved.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging
the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
[Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.]

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by low temperatures.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 32 deg. C at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated
to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL, MATERIALS

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth
concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as
follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 3 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.
c. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or
fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified
formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads
without detrimental deformation.

D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads
without detrimental deformation.

E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to
support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 20 by 20 mm, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

I. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

J. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties
designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on
removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 25 mm to the plane of the exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 25 mm in diameter in concrete
surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars shall conform to one of the following:

1. ASTM A 615/A615 M and ACI 318 chapter 21 Grade 60 with minimum yield stress of 460
Mpa, with maximum Carbon Content of 0.3%, deformed.

B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184/A 184M, assembled with clips, fabricated from reinforcing bars
conforming to one of the following:

1. ASTM A 615/A615 M and ACI 318 chapter 21.

2. ASTM A615/A615 M, Grade 60 with maximum Carbon Content of 0.3%, deformed.

3. ASTM A 706/A706 M, deformed.

4. BS 4449 Grade 500B, deformed.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 4 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 755M.

C. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed
zinc.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's
"Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete
of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI
Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar

supports.

E. Mechanical Splices (Couplers): Mechanical splices for deformed high yield steel bars preferably for bar
diameter 32mm and above, are to consist of two seamless steel sleeves and interconnecting high tensile
steel stud with plastic protection caps for threaded section of sleeve. Couplers shall be isometric parallel-
threaded type with no reduction of cross section area of the bar. The resulting connection shall not
reduce the ductility of the parent bar and should be able to develop the full tensile capacity of the parent
bar. Heating of the reinforcement bars is prohibited. Only manufacturers that hold a valid CARES and
ISO 9001 certification from an agency that is specialized on reinforcement materials shall be considered
as suppliers, full trace ability is required. Couplers to be tested and the test to exceed 135% min. of the
specified yield strength of steel rebars.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: Cement shall be low alkali with chemical composition in accordance with
ASTM C 150/C150M type I, II & V, gray and white color, of same type, brand and source for the entire
project unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Manufacturer’s test certification shall be supplied
for each delivery of cement and shall confirm that the cement complies with the above requirements and
shall be submitted by the Contractor not later than the day of delivery of the cement. The Engineer shall
have the right to call for tests, the cost of which is to be borne by the Contractor, on each delivery of
cement to confirm that the cement meets the following requirements.

Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) conforming to ASTM C 150/C150M, Type I with minimum
clinker content of 95%. Cement meeting the requirements of rapid hardening Portland cement
shall not be used and the heat of hydration shall not exceed 325kj/kg when tested according to
ASTM C186. This type of cement shall be used for superstructure concrete elements.

1. Moderate Sulfate Resisting Cement conforming to ASTM C 150/C150M Type II with C3A
content ranging from 5% to 8%, shall be used for all reinforced substructure concrete elements.

2. Sulfate-Resisting Cement conforming to ASTM C150/C150M, Type V, C3A content shall not
be more than 5% by weight, shall be used for all sewerage concrete elements.

3. Addition of Fly Ash or GGBS in combination with silica fume is required for all reinforced
substructure concrete mixes to ensure durable and dense concrete meeting the required
permeability, strength and heat of hydration test requirements.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 5 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Sampling shall be carried out in accordance with EN 196: Part 7 or relevant ASTM standard.

5. Test cement for fineness by air permeability apparatus in accordance with ASTM C 204 to
meet the requirements of ASTM C 150/C150M.

6. Test cement for soundness, Autoclave expansion in accordance with ASTM C151/C151M.

B. Silica Fume: Silica fume (SF) used as a cement replacement shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1240,
amorphous silica. There shall be 5 percent replacement of the cementitious content. The silica fume
shall be obtained from an approved supplier.

1. The approved supplier shall provide documentation to establish the following:

a. That the silica fume complies with ASTM C1240 standard requirements.
b. The silica fume results from the production of silicon or ferro-silicon alloys containing
at least 85 percent silicon.
c. That source of supply shall remain the same for the construction period of the project.
d. That the supply shall be adequate to meet the anticipated peak requirement.
e. Chemical analyses to give the percentages of the following materials:

Si O2 C SO3
Ca O Fe2 O3
Al2 O3 Na2 O
K2 O Mg O
f. Loss on ignition.
g. Percentage of particles greater than 44 mm.
h. Specific surface area and method of test, together with corresponding particle size.

2. Delivery of silica fume to the concrete batching plant shall be in dry powder form, with a bulk
density between 400 and 720 kg/cu. m.

3. Manufacturer's test certification shall be supplied for each delivery of silica fume and shall
confirm that the silica fume complies with the above requirements and shall be submitted by
the Contractor no later than the day of delivery of the silica fume.

4. The Engineer shall have the right to call for tests, the cost of which are to be borne by the
Contractor, on each delivery of silica fume, if necessary to establish or confirm that the silica
fume meets the above requirements.

C. Supplementary Cementing materials: blending of fly ash or slag shall be accomplished at mixing plant.
Fly ash, or slag may slow rate of concrete strengthening and affect color uniformity.

1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618. There shall be 30% replacement of the cementitious weight. The Fly
ash shall be obtained from an approved supplier.

2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. There shall be 65%
replacement of the cementitious weight. The GGBS shall be obtained from an approved
supplier.

3. The approved supplier shall provide documentation to establish the following:

a. That the fly ash or GGBS comply with ASTM C618 or ASTM C989 standard
requirements.
b. The grade of the manufactured GGBS or Fly ash and the chemical or physical
requirements shall be reported.
c. That source of supply shall remain the same for the construction period of the project.
d. That the supply shall be adequate to meet the anticipated peak requirement.
e. Chemical analyses to confirm compliance with the relevant ASTM requirements.
f. Loss on ignition of Fly ash.
g. Activity Index.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 6 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

h. Specific surface area and method of test, together with corresponding particle size.

4. Manufacturer's test certification shall be supplied for each delivery of fly ash or GGBS and
shall confirm that the product complies with the above requirements and shall be submitted by
the Contractor no later than the day of delivery of the product.

D. The Engineer shall have the right to call for tests, the cost of which are to be borne by the Contractor, on
each delivery of fly ash or GGBS, if necessary to establish or confirm that the material meets the above
requirements.

E. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Aggregates shall be from approved sources and shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 33/C33M, from the same source for entire project, uniformly graded.
Petrographic analyses shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 295/C295M. Aggregates for exposed
concrete shall not contain substances that cause spalling. Only aggregates not susceptible to alkali
aggregate reaction shall be used. The Contractor shall supply samples of the materials for approval by
the Engineer and each aggregate source shall be subject to monitoring by the Engineer.

1. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate size shall be 20 mm nominal and those retained on a 5mm
sieve and shall consist of crushed or uncrushed gravel or crushed stone and shall be selected,
recrushed, finish screened and washed with water meeting the requirements of Paragraph 2.5.E
as necessary to comply with the following:

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 7 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

Frequency of Tests Test Description Standard Limit

Bi-weekly Los Angeles Abrasion Loss ASTM C 131/ 25% maximum
AASHTO T96
Bi-weekly Ratio of Los Angeles Abrasion Loss ASTM C 131 0.25% maximum
at 100 & 500 Revolutions (100/500
Revolutions Value)
Bi-weekly Clay Lumps and Friable Particles ASTM C 142/C1 0.25% maximum
42M
1 per day Material Finer than 75 Microns ASTM C 117 1.0% maximum
Weekly (Reducing to Water Absorption ASTM C 127 2.0% maximum
bi-weekly when
consistent)
Bi-weekly Chlorides as Cl BS EN 1744-1 0.03% maximum
Bi-weekly Sulfates as SO3 BS EN 1744-1 0.3% maximum
1 per 30 days Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Loss ASTM C 88 10.0% maximum
(5 cycles)
Bi-weekly (Reducing Flakiness Index BS EN 933-3 25% maximum
to weekly when
consistent)
Bi-weekly (Reducing Elongation Index BS 812 25% maximum
to weekly when
consistent)
1 per source Reactive Silica ASTM C 227 Per Appendix
X1.3.7 of
ASTM C 33/C33
M
weekly (Reducing to Specific gravity Minimum 2.6
bi-weekly when
stable)
1 per each batch Moisture Content
Weekly (reducing to Light weight pieces ASTMC 0.5% maximum
bi-weekly when 123/C123M
consistent)
1 in 3 days (Reducing Sieve analysis ASTM C136 As per ASTM
to weekly when C33 requirements
consistent)
1 in 30 days Drying Shrinkage EN 12620 CL 0.04% maximum
5.7 EN 1367.4


Additionally, limits specified in Paragraph 2.13.H for the total salt content of concrete
shall not be exceeded.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 8 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

- For coarse aggregate with a single-face fracture content of at least 25 % by mass, material
finer than the 0.075 mm sieve may increase to 1.5 % by mass. Fracture requirement shall be
at least one fractured face and shall apply to the combined aggregate retained on the 4.75
mm sieve per AASHTO T 335
- Pieces with specific gravity less than 1.95 shall not exceed 2.0 % by mass

2. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate, those passing a 5mm sieve, shall consist of crushed gravel,
crushed stone or natural sand with rounded or surrounded particles and shall be washed with
fresh potable water to comply with the following:

Frequency of Tests Test Description Standard Limit

Bi-weekly Clay Lumps and Friable Particles ASTM C 142/C1 1.0% maximum
42M
1 per day Material Finer than 75 Microns ASTM C 117 maximum 3% for
natural sand and 5%
for crushed sand with
no plastic fines
Weekly (Reducing to Water Absorption ASTM C 128 2.0% maximum
bi-weekly when
consistent)
Bi-weekly Chlorides as Cl BS EN 1744-1 0.06% maximum
Bi-weekly Combined chlorides and sulphates BS EN 1744-1 0.10% maximum
Weekly Organic Impurities ASTM C 40/C40 Lighter than Standard
M Color
Bi-weekly Sand equivalent ASTM D2419 75% minimum
Weekly (reducing to Light weight pieces ASTM C 0.5% maximum
bi-weekly when 123/C123M
consistent)
1 per each batch Moisture Content
1 per source Reactive Silica ASTM C227 Per Appendix X1.3.7
of ASTM C 33/C33M
1 in 3 days (Reducing Sieve analysis ASTM C136 As per ASTM
to weekly when C33/C33M
consistent) requirements
1 per 30 days Drying Shrinkage EN 12620 cl. 5.7 0.04% maximum
EN 1367-4

 Additionally, limits specified in Paragraph 2.13.H for the total salt content of concrete
shall not be exceeded.

3. Certification: Obtain from each proposed source of supply Test Certification to confirm that
the aggregates comply with the above requirements. The following information shall be
provided:

a. Quarry location.
b. Aggregate type.
c. Petrographic analysis report.
d. Grading curve.
e. Shape and surface texture.
f. Flakiness index.
g. 10 percent fines value.
h. Impact test.
i. Shell content.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 9 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

j. Chloride and sulfate content.

k. Relative density.
l. Water absorption value and moisture content.
m. Silt, clay, and dust content.
n. Results of reactive silica tests.
o. Organic impurities (fine aggregate only).
p. Sand equivalent

4. Testing:

a. When a source of supply for each aggregate type had been established, samples of
materials delivered to Project site shall be taken for testing in accordance with BS
812 as follows:

1) Tests for clay, silt and dust, and sieve analysis shall be carried out for every
20 tons of fine aggregate and every 40 tons of coarse aggregate.
2) Chemical analyses shall be carried out on every 100 tons of aggregate.

b. The Engineer shall have the right to call for additional samples at any time for
testing of aggregates delivered to the Project site or of aggregates at the source of
supply in order to confirm that the aggregates meet the above requirements.

5. Transportation: During transportation to the Project site, all aggregates shall be protected from
wind-borne contaminants. If these contaminants are present at time of delivery to the Project
site, then the aggregates shall be washed with water meeting the requirement of Paragraph
2.5.E. Transport vehicles shall be cleaned of possible contamination due to previous use.

6. Storage: Aggregates shall be stored (under shade) on hard concrete floors or other approved
materials having sufficient slope to ensure adequate drainage of aggregate before being used
for concrete and each size and type shall be stored in separate heaps without intermixing.
Storage shall prevent contamination of the aggregates by foreign material including windblown
dust. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be separated by permanent substantial partitions.
Methods of storing, shading and cooling aggregates shall be approved by the Engineer.

F. Water: Water used for mixing concrete, ice production, washing and cooling aggregates, and curing
concrete shall be potable water complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M, free from impurities, oil, acid,
salts, alkali, organic matter, and other potentially deleterious substances in accordance with AASHTO
T26 and when tested in accordance with ASTM D 512 and ASTM D 516. The chloride content shall not
exceed 500 ppm.

1. Once a source of satisfactory supply has been established, further tests shall be made daily with
a portable electrical conductivity probe calibrated against the satisfactory supply. If the
conductivity exceeds that of the satisfactory supply, then further chemical tests shall be
performed.

2. The limits specified in Paragraph 2.13.H for the total salt content of the concrete shall not be
exceeded.

G. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330/C330M.

1. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 20 mm.

2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 10 mm.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 10 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Chemical Admixtures: provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to not contain more than 0.1
percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other
admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
7. Third Generation admixtures, Polycarboxylate Ether, shall be used in concrete containing silica
fume or if self-consolidating concrete is required.

C. Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and

anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel
reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.

2.7 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in
concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, to 40mm long.

2.8 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids
through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Profile: Flat, dumbbell without center bulb

B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids
through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Profile: Flat, dumbbell without center bulb

C. Self-Expanding l Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite or

other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete

D. Sodium bentonite or other hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete10 by 19mm.

2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A Three ply nylon or polyester-cord-reinforced, high
density polythylene sheet, laminated to a non-woven geotechnical fabric 0.25mm thick

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57,
with 100 percent passing a 38-mm sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a 2.36-mm sieve.

C. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand.

D. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf weighing approximately 0.29 kg/sq. m and
complying with AASHTO M182, Class 2.

E. Moisture-Retaining Cover (Impervious Sheeting): One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171:
1. Waterproof paper.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 11 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Polyethylene film.
3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

F. Curing Compound: Curing Compound shall be a non-degradable Pliolite Resin in accordance with
ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. It shall in addition to curing, act as both a sealer and primer coat for
most subsequent coatings. The Contractor shall obtain confirmation from the supplier of the curing
compound that it is compatible with the final applied finishes and meets the above requirements.

G. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces
for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.

H. Underlayment Compound: Free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable, cement-based compound for

applications from 25 mm thick to feathered edges. The underlay shall be applied in passes not thicker
than 6 mm at any interval.

I. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Packaged dry combination of materials consisting of Portland cement,
graded aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use coloring pigments that are finely
ground nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement. Color shall be as selected by the Engineer
from manufacturers' standards, unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

A. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate

of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate containing not less than 50
percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and
cleaning materials.

B. Unpigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of Portland

cement, graded quartz aggregate, and plasticizing admixture.

C. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of Portland cement,
graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use coloring pigments that are
finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement.
1. Colors:Match Engineer's samples As indicated by referencing manufacturer's designations, as
selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

2.11 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.

2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in

thicknesses from 3 mm and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3 to 6 mm or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 30 MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C109/C 109M.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 12 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.13 CONCRETE YEILD FOR STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by laboratory trial mix, as
follows:
1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
2. Proportion lightweight structural concrete according to ACI 211.2 and ACI 301.
3. Proportion Self-Consolidated Concrete according to ACI 237R.

B. Engage a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to the Engineer for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
1. Do not engage the same testing agency for field quality control.

C. Cementitious Materials: limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland
cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 30% percent maximum.
2. Grand Granulated Blast-furnace slag: 65 percent max. The Alumina content (AL2O3) of
GGBS shall not exceed 14%.
3. Silica Fume: 5% percent max.

D. Submit written reports to the Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 8 weeks
prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed
and approved by the Engineer.

E. Design mixes to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings:
1. Blinding Concrete: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:

a. Compressive Strength on cylinder (28 Days): 16 MPa.

b. Minimum cement content : 250kg/m3
c. Maximum Water-cement ratio: 0.5
d. Maximum Slump: 100 mm. Slump for concrete with admixture shall range from
160mm 200mm.
e. Cementitious additions such as fly ash (30% of cementitious weight) or GGBS (65% of
cementitious weight) shall be added to the concrete mix.
2. External works: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:

a. Compressive Strength on cylinder (28 Days): 36 MPa

b. Minimum cementitious content : 435 kg/m3
c. Maximum Water- cementitious ratio: 0.35
d. Maximum Slump: 100 mm
e. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture:
160mm to 200 mm after admixture is added to concrete with 50 to 100 mm slump
f. Cementitious additions such as fly ash (30% of cementitious weight) or GGBS (65% of
cementitious weight) in combination with microsilica (5% of cementitious weight),
shall be added to the concrete mix.
g. Air Content: 2% Maximum.

F. All concrete below ground shall have protective coating as specified or shown on the Drawings.

G. Water-Cement Ratio: Where cementitious additives are used, the water-cement ratio shall be the water
content divided by the cement plus cementitious additives content. The water-cement ratio shall be
continuously checked at the mixer with due allowance made for water contained in the aggregates.
Under no circumstance shall water be added between the mixer and the place of concrete placement.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 13 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

The Engineer may require that the water-cement ratio be checked during tests performed on fresh
concrete samples taken at the time of placement as specified in Paragraph 3.19.

H. Slump Limits: The slump of concrete mixes shall be such that the concrete can be transported, placed
into the forms, and compacted without segregation in accordance with Paragraph 3.9. If no
superplasticizer is required, the slump at time of placement shall be 50-100 mm as measured in
accordance with ASTM C 143/C143M. In accordance with Paragraph 3.9, the concrete shall at all times
exhibit a mobility that enables this placement to be affected with the minimum amount of difficulty.

I. Total Salt Content:

1. Chlorides: The water soluble chloride content of the concrete from all sources, expressed as
chloride ion, shall not exceed 0.1 percent by weight of dry cement, inclusive of cementitious
additives content, when tested in accordance with BS 1881.
2. Sulfates: The water soluble sulfate content of the concrete from all sources, expressed as SO3,
when tested in accordance with BS 1881, shall not exceed 4 percent by weight of dry cement,
inclusive of cementitious additives content.

J. Initial Setting Time:

1. The initial setting time shall be not less than one hour after the production concrete is
discharged into the form. With a maximum time between mixing and placing concrete of one
hour, the total time between mixing and initial set shall be a minimum of 2 hours. There shall
be a maximum setting time of 6 hours.
2. When trial mixes are made to determine the workability of the concrete, the initial setting time
of the cement paste shall be determined using the method defined in ASTM C 191 but at the
maximum allowable temperature and with same proportions of cementitious additives and
retarding superplasticizer as specified in this Specification.

K. Test Mixes - Structural Grade Concrete: When the proposed workability, proportions of aggregates and
superplasticizer, and strength for each grade of concrete have been established, test concrete shall be
produced for approval by the Engineer. The following shall be performed for each grade of concrete:

1. Six separate test mixes shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192/C192M and
tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C39M.
2. The 36 cylinders for each grade of concrete shall be tested for compressive strength at 28 days
and the mean strength and standard deviation established for each grade.
3. The test mixes shall be accepted provided that:

a. The mix proportions and workability are in accordance with this Specification.
b. The standard deviation for each grade is 3.5 MPa or less, as per ACI 214 standard
requirements and depending on the grade of concrete.
c. The mean strength for structural concrete exceeds the specified design strength by the
limits specified according to ACI 318 standard and as approved by the Engineer.

L. Test Mixes - Blinding or Mudmat Concrete:

1. Concrete for blinding or mudmat shall be a designed mix with the specified design cylinder
strength of 16 MPa. The trial mix proportions shall be left to the discretion of the Contractor.
Once they have been chosen, three separate test mixes shall be made with those proportions
and three 150 mm test cylinders shall be made from each mix for testing at 28 days. The trial
mix proportions and water/cement ratio shall be approved if the average strength of the nine
cylinders is not less than 20N/sq. mm.
2. No production test shall be made for this grade of concrete but the Engineer will monitor the
mix proportions and water/cement ratio.

M. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested when characteristics of
materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Laboratory test data for

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 14 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

revised mix design and strength results shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer before using
in the Work.

N. Absorption Test: The absorption of the hardened concrete from the trial mixes for structural grades shall
be tested as a measure of the concrete’s ability to resist the ingress of aggressive salts. No absorption
tests shall be required for blinding or mudmat concrete. Absorption tests shall be in accordance with
modified BS 1881: Part 122, tested at 28-days, as follows:

1. After trial mixes have been accepted, three 150 mm cylinders shall be cast from each grade of
concrete and immersed in water at 20 deg. C for 7 days.

2. At the end of the curing period, 75 mm diameter core specimens shall be cut along the
longitudinal axis of each cylinder to a depth of 75 mm.
3. The specimens shall be dried in an oven at 105 deg. C for 72 hours.
4. The specimens shall be cooled in a dry airtight vessel for 24 hours, weighed, and then
immediately immersed in a tank containing water at 20 deg. C with the longitudinal axis of the
cores horizontal, and with 25 mm depth of water over the specimens.
5. The specimens shall be immersed for 30 minutes, then removed, shaken, surface dried, and
reweighed. The water absorption shall be calculated as the increase in mass resulting from
immersion, expressed as a percentage of the dry mass.
6. If the cores lengths differ from 75 mm, a correction factor (graph given in BS 1881) shall be
applied.
7. The mean of the corrected absorption figure for each concrete grade shall be calculated and the
absorption of the concrete mixes shall be acceptable if the mean absorption is less than 1.5
percent at 30 minutes for in-situ construction. The mean absorption figure and the lowest
absorption figure shall be recorded for each grade and used for comparison purposes with
absorption tests carried out on cores cut from in-situ concrete, as scheduled in Paragraph
3.19.E.4.

O. Permeability Tests:

1. BS EN 12390-8 Depth of Penetration shall be carried out as a measure of water permeability

on concrete samples of different components of the structure before the mix design or
manufacturing method are approved. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with EN
12390-8 at age 28 days and the maximum value of penetration shall not exceed 10 mm.
a. Use ISAT (initial Surface Absorption Test): The test shall be carried out in accordance
with BS 1881-208 and the ISAT value at 28 days shall be lower than 0.15 ml/m²/s (10-
minute test).

2. The chloride permeability of the concrete shall be determined using cores taken from the
concrete samples, in accordance with ASTM C1202 "Electrical Indication of Concrete's Ability
to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration". The 700 Coulombs limits shall not be exceeded at 28-
days.
3. Shrinkage test at 28 days shall be carried out on concrete samples and it shall be in compliance
with the British Building Research Station (BRS) Digest No 35, 1968.
4. The concrete will be deemed to comply with the absorption and permeability requirements of
this specification if all test results comply with the limits indicated in bullet O and paragraphs
1, 2 and 3 of bullet P.
5. If any of the BS EN 12390-8, % absorption and the rapid chloride permeability test results of
unprotected surfaces of a sample failed to meet the above requirements, then all the concrete
work represented by such sample shall be deemed not to comply with the permeability
requirements.
6. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete that has failed to meet the permeability
requirements of this Specification is likely to cause durability problems, three cores shall be cut
from the area represented by failed samples for additional BS EN, absorption and rapid
chloride permeability testing. The actual location shall be decided by the Engineer.

P. Test Construction:

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 15 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Test Foundation: Footing and plinth shall be cast on grade to the details provided by the
Engineer in accordance with specified requirements. This shall be performed before any
permanent works are constructed. The concrete shall be cured for the period required in
Paragraph 3.13.
2. Test Floor Slab: A 3 m by 4 m test area of 150 mm thick floor slab constructed of above
ground reinforced concrete in accordance with this Specification shall be cast on grade and
given a Class U4 finish as specified in Paragraph 3.11.D. The concrete shall be cured for the
period specified in Paragraph 3.13.

2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A. General: Concrete production shall be in accordance with ACI 304R. A checklist for concrete
production shall be produced, such as that used by the NRMCA or approved equal.

1. Batching of materials shall be by weight. All weighing equipment shall be calibrated and
documentation shall be provided to establish that the accuracy is continuously maintained in
accordance with the requirements of ACI 304. Batching scale accuracy shall be in accordance
with the Concrete Plant Standards of the Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau, or approved
equal.
2. Furnish the necessary equipment and establish accurate procedures for determining the
quantities of free moisture in the aggregates. Moisture determinations shall be made daily and
whenever there is an apparent change in the moisture content. The moisture content shall be
recorded. The moisture of aggregates shall be utilized in adjusting the weight of aggregate
added to the mix. The water added to the mix shall be similarly adjusted.

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete:

1. Ready-Mixed concrete shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 94/C94M or BS EN

206 and as follows:

a. Concrete shall be centrally mixed off site and transported in an agitator truck. Truck
mixing shall not be permitted.
b. The plant and trucks shall be certified as meeting the requirements of the NRMCA
Check List, or approved equal.
c. Details and information regarding the supplier proposed by the contractor shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
d. The sewer of ready mixed concrete shall not subsequently be charged without further
approval of the Engineer.

2. When air temperature is between 30 deg. C and 32 deg. C, delivery time from the time water is
added to the mix until it is placed in its final position in the form shall not exceed 60 minutes.
When air temperature is above 32 deg. C, delivery time shall not exceed 45 minutes.

3. Before discharging concrete at the point of delivery, provide the Engineer with a delivery ticket
for each batch of concrete containing the following information as a minimum:

a. Name or number of off-site concrete depot.

b. Serial number for ticket.
c. Date.
d. Time of dispatch.
e. Truck number.
f. Name of Supplier.
g. Grade or mix description of concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 16 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

h. Type of cement.
i. Cement content.
j. Water/cement ratio.
k. Nominal maximum size of aggregate.
l. Source of aggregate, maximum size, weight of fine and coarse aggregate.
m. Type or name of admixture, if included.
n. Quantity of concrete in cubic meters.
o. Certifying that chlorides and sulfate contents are within specified limits and stating their
values.
p. Amount of concrete in cubic meter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can
support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 4 mm.
2. Class B, 6 mm.
3. Class C, 10 mm.
4. Class D, 25 mm.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,
recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off
templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of concrete receiving applied waterproofing membranes.

I. Do not chamfer corners or edges of concrete unless otherwise indicated.

J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in
the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placing concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 17 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.

2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through-
wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at
lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not
support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 10 deg. C for 24
hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal
operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of
concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:

1. 28-day design compressive strength.

2. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
3. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or
laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
4. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening
or disturbing shores.

C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise
damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release
agent.

D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and
secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved
by Engineer.

3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318M, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and
removal of shoring and reshoring.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute
loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in
concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 18 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide
adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and
compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 mm or minus 20 mm.

C. Granular Fill: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment
to elevation tolerances of plus 0 mm or minus 20 mm.

1. Place and compact a 15-mm- thick layer of fine-graded granular material over granular fill.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier and waterproofing membranes during

reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.

B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing
reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4/D1.4M, where indicated.

C. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

D. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging.
Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths
to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

E. Shipping and Storage:

1. Reinforcement shall be handled and shipped in a manner to avoid bending or other damage to
the bars. Bars shall be bundled, separated in sizes and clearly marked by diameter size
preferably for one placement, in accordance with the placement schedule and as follows:

a. Bars for separate buildings or large structures shall not be bundled together. Bars for
small structures may be bundled together but each bar or group of bars that have the
same piece mark shall be tagged and coded.
b. Metal tags or approved equal shall be provided and labeled with legible markings.
c. All bundles shall be tagged at each end. Tags shall show piece marks corresponding to
the mark numbers on the placement drawings and on the bar list.
d. Bars shall be bundled in the largest size practical for handling and shipping.

2. Reinforcement shall be stored 1m above ground on platforms, skids or other approved supports
and suitably spaced. Contact with the soil shall be avoided. Proper drainage and protection
from the elements shall be provided to minimize corrosion.

F. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy
bond with concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 19 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

G. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement on concrete blocks of a size to give the correct cover to the reinforcement. Concrete
spacer blocks shall be made of the same materials, to the same specified requirements and have the same
inherent properties as the parent material, but with the exception that the maximum aggregate size shall
be appropriate for the thickness of cover to the reinforcement.

1. Where cathodic protection is utilized, reinforcement shall be isolated from the electrical
grounding system.

2. Chairs made of reinforcement shall be used to support the top mats of slab reinforcement and
they shall be so dimensioned as to be stable during concreting operations. The chairs shall
themselves be supported on concrete blocks as specified above.

H. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
placement operations. Ties at intersections shall be made with 1.5 mm diameter annealed wire with wire
ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

I. Concrete Cover:

1. Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as indicated on Drawings.

2. Cover to reinforcement shall be checked before any concrete is cast. The bending of
reinforcement at a cold joint is not permitted. Concrete cover shall be checked with a cover
meter as soon as formwork is removed.

J. All lap splices shall be in accordance with ACI 318. All reinforcement bars shall be developed in
accordance with ACI 318 unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Welded wire fabric shall be lapped 1.5
mesh plus the extension on the wires unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

K. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement.
Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to
ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.

L. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated reinforcement. Repair
cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Engineer.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction

joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip
placements of floors and slabs.
2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with
keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 40 mm into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in
girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders
and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near
corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 20 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete
thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each
edge of joint to a radius of 3 mm. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3-mm wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear,
abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions
with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 12 mm or more than 25 mm below finished
concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are
indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where
indicated.

1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install
in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-
fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening and firmly pressing
into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with ACI 301, ACI 304R, and ACI 318.

B. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections have been performed.

C. Concrete shall not be placed until the condition of the reinforcement, other embedded items, and the
formwork has been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

D. Transportation: Concrete, after being discharged from the mixer, shall be transported as rapidly as
possible to its final position in the Work by agitator trucks, which shall prevent adulteration,
segregation, loss of workability or contamination of the ingredients. The containers that convey the
concrete shall be kept clean and free from hardened or partially hardened concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 21 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. The addition of water at the point of discharge is prohibited and trucks shall have the watertank
completely disconnected from the drum.
2. The use of chutes, spouts, skips and pumps shall be permitted if approval is obtained. Under
no circumstances shall any aluminum pipe or other conveying equipment containing aluminum
be allowed to contact fresh concrete when it is conveyed to its point of placement.

E. Do not add water or admixture to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

F. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

G. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete
will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section
cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator.
Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 150 mm into preceding layer. Do
not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each
insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to
segregate.

H. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface
plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface.
Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and
defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for
class of surface specified.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an

orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective
areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 3 mm in height.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering
material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or
painting.
2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces
and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and
texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 22 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to
coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part Portland cement to one and one-half parts fine
sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white Portland cement in
amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub
grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap
and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part Portland
cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white
Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish
surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated.

3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or
darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or
mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded
cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float
passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and
slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane
roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or
power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks
and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through
applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to
be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane,
paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155/ E 1155M, for a
randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.
d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 24.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 23 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled
freestanding 3-m long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the
surface, does not exceed4.8 mm.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [where ceramic or
quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method]. while concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as
indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-
bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with
Engineer before application.

G. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish where
indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly spread 12 kg/10 sq. m of dampened slip-resistive aggregate over surface in one or
two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface.
2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish.
3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone, and water to
expose slip-resistive aggregate.

H. Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply mineral dry-shake materials to surfaces
according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly apply mineral dry-shake materials at a rate of 49 kg/10 sq. m, unless greater amount
is recommended by manufacturer.
2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of mineral dry-shake materials over surface by
hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a
second mineral dry-shake application, uniformly distributing remainder of material, and embed
by power floating.
3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended
by dry-shake material manufacturer and apply immediately after final finishing.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work
of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and
by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly
rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
2. Construct concrete bases as per manufactured requirements, unless otherwise indicated; in each
direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated
or unless required for seismic anchor support.
3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 35 MPa at 28 days.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 24 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-
in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.

E. Tolerance and concrete dimensions for in-situ concrete members shall, under no circumstances,
exceed the permissible ones as indicated in the ACI.

3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in
ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 1 kg/sq. m x h before and during finishing operations.
Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and
other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If
removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,
including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:

a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces
and edges with 300 mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for

curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 300
mm, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof
tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor
coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover
or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings.

3. Curing Compound: Shall be to the Engineer’s approval applied uniformly in continuous

operation by power spray or roller according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat
areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous
operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat
areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24
hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during
curing period.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 25 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete
surface repairs.
2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old.
3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and
repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry.
Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened
concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.15 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of
joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 50 mm deep in formed
joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two and
one-half parts fine aggregate passing a 1.2-mm sieve, using only enough water for handling and
placing.

C. Concrete exposed by the removal of formwork shall be inspected by the Engineer before any remedial
work, subsequent coating or other treatment that would hinder the proper inspection of the concrete is
carried out. Any concrete not complying with this requirement shall be liable for rejection.

D. Concrete not meeting the specified requirements shall be removed and rebuilt without delay unless the
Engineer approves that a repair may be satisfactorily affected. This agreement shall not preclude the
subsequent rejection of the repaired work by the Engineer. The proposed method for removal and
replacement of defective work shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval for each concrete
placement before the removal commences.

E. All repairs approved by the Engineer shall be performed by a subcontractor specialized in the repair of
concrete in the Middle East and prepared to guarantee the work. Any repair method submitted for
approval shall produce a result that is as impermeable as the original concrete. Subsequent tests on
the repaired concrete shall be carried out at the discretion of the Engineer in order to establish the
quality of the repair, particularly at the joint between the original and the repaired concrete.

F. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air
bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 26 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 13
mm in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 25 mm in depth. Make edges of cuts
perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids
with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard
Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test
area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with
patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Engineer.

G. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify
surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to
drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.25 mm wide or that penetrate to
reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other
objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas
to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written
instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas
to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 6 mm to match adjacent floor elevations.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written
instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 25 mm or less in diameter, by
cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts
and expose steel reinforcement with at least 20 mm clearance all around. Dampen concrete
surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of
same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact,
and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 25 mm or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar
before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent
concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

H. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.

I. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval.

3.17 GROUTING

A. Preparation: Concrete foundation top shall be cleaned of dirt, laitance, oil and grease. Anchor bolt
boxes and sleeves shall be cleaned of all polystyrene and other deleterious material. The surface of
the concrete shall be thoroughly wetted just prior to grouting but shall contain no excess water,
particularly in the bolt boxes and sleeves.

B. Materials:

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 27 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Type G1: For interior bases protected from weather and saline bearing waters and not subject
to heavy or vibratory loads, grout shall consist of one part Portland cement to two parts well
graded sand by volume. Sand shall comply with Paragraph 2.5.D.2. A retarding
superplasticizer may be used if necessary to obtain the correct fluidity in high ambient
temperatures.
2. Type G2: For all heavily loaded structural column bases and equipment bases subjected to
vibratory loads, a proprietary non-shrink, non-metallic high strength grout especially
formulated for high-temperature work.
3. Type G3: For all other exterior work exposed to potential saline ingress, a proprietary general
purpose non-shrink grout, especially formulated for high temperature work.

C. Placement:

1. The manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed for proprietary grouts. The

temperature of the grout at time of placement shall not exceed 25 deg. C and the temperature of
the elements in contact with the grout shall not exceed 40 deg. C. To obtain the required
temperatures, it may be necessary to do the following:
a. Shield the materials from the direct rays of the sun.
b. Mix materials with flaked ice.
c. Cool base plates with water but ensure that anchor bolt pockets are free from water.
d. Require certification of plant and trucks to meet requirements of the NRMCA Check
List or approved equal.

2. Grout strength shall not be less than 30 N/sq. mm at 28 days. Document to Engineer that this
strength is being achieved. Grouting shall not proceed until the steel work or equipment has
been leveled and plumbed with the bases being supported in the meantime by steel packers and
shims.

3. Completely fill anchor bolt sleeves with grout before placing grout under base plates. The
gravity grouting method shall be used wherein the flowable self-leveling grout is poured on
one side of a base until it flows out at the opposite side. Packers and shims used to level bases
shall be removed after the grout has set and the resulting pocket repaired with similar grout.

3.18 WATER-RETAINING CONSTRUCTION

A. General: Water-retaining construction shall comply with this Specification.

B. Joints: Joints shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ACI 504R. Details and positioning
of joints, together with the materials to be used, shall be shown on the Drawings.

1. Waterstops shall be in accordance with Paragraph 2.8. Jointing of waterstops shall be made by
welding in an approved fashion. Lapping of waterstops at joints and the use of adhesives for
jointing purposes shall not be permitted unless specifically authorized. Waterstops shall not be
perforated or damaged. Concrete shall be carefully placed and compacted to ensure dense
impervious concrete, particularly around the ribs of waterstops. At all joints the concrete shall
be placed up to the centerline of the waterstop. All starters to walls of watertight construction
shall be cast using hung formwork so that the concrete in the starters is placed simultaneously
with the concrete in the slab.

C. Testing: In addition to the testing required in Paragraph 3.19.C, further tests to determine the water
tightness of the structure shall be performed based on the requirements of ACI 350.1-01. Testing shall
be performed after completion of the structure, installation of fittings and accessories, but before the
application of internal waterproofing, and before any backfilling behind the structure's walls has taken
place. The following measures should be considered:

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 28 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. All tank penetrations and outlets shall be securely sealed to prevent loss of water from the tank
during the test. Tank penetrations and outlets shall be monitored before and during the test and
shall be repaired from leakage (if any) prior to taking test measurements.

2. Rate of initial filling of a new tank should not exceed 1.2m/hour (of the tank height). Tank
filling shall be continued until the water surface is at the design maximum water level or
100 mm below any fixed overflow level, whichever is lower.

3. Test measurements shall be recorded at 24 hours intervals. The test period shall be at least the
theoretical time required to record a drop in the water surface of 10 mm, which is, according to
the acceptance criterion, ( ) days, rounded up, where h is the water depth in (mm).
Test period need not exceed five consecutive days.

4. The change in water volume in the structure shall be calculated and corrected, if necessary for
evaporation, precipitation and temperature. If loss exceeds the required criterion, the structure
shall be considered to have failed the test. The structure shall also be considered to have failed
the test if observed flowing or seeping from the structure or if moisture can be transferred from
exterior surface to a dry hand. The structure shall not be considered to have failed the
acceptance criterion if dampness or wetness on top of a footing, in the absence of flowing
water, is observed.
5. Acceptance criterion and performance of test shall be in accordance with the requirements of
ACI 350.1, standard criterion HST-050, which requires that the drop in the water surface not
exceed 0.05% in 24 hours.

6. Retesting shall be permitted if the first test fails to satisfy the criterion. A second test may be
performed immediately following the first test, provided that no visible leakage is exhibited. If
the tank fails the second test or if it was not tested immediately after the first test failure, the
tank shall only be retested after probable areas of leakage have been detected and repaired.
Tanks shall be retested until they meet the required criterion.

3.19 QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING

A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a special inspector or qualified and independent testing and inspecting
agency, approved by the Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction, to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified and independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.
3. Headed bolts and studs.
4. Verification of use of required design mixture.
5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.

D. Quality Control - Testing on Fresh Concrete:

1. Compressive Strength and Permeability Tests for Structural Concrete:

a. Sampling, curing and testing shall be performed using the relevant procedures in
ASTM C 31/C31M, ASTM C 39/C39M, and ASTM C 172/C172M.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 29 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Samples for production concrete cylinders shall be taken at the point of

placement at the average rate of one per 25 cu. m of concrete placed, with a
minimum of one sample taken every day that the mix is used. A sample shall
consist of four 150 mm cylinders molded and stored for laboratory-cured test
specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required. One cylinder is
for testing at 7 days after casting, two for testing at 28 days after casting, and one
reserved for later testing if required.

2. If frequency of testing provides fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of
concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each
batch if fewer than 5 are used.

3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 25 cu. m, the
Engineer may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength
is provided.

4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion

laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
5. Samples shall be collected and tested for all permeability testing, from all classes
of concrete, as specified under Clause 2.13M and N. The frequency should be a
minimum of one set of specimens (3 cores taken from test cubes) for every 500m³
of each class of concrete, as approved by the Engineer. For every 500m³ of each
class of concrete cast, a minimum of one set of specimens (3 cores) shall be taken
from the structure, as advised by the Engineer. The Engineer may require
additional testing, as deemed necessary, at no extra cost to the Owner. All core
holes in the structures should be filled/repaired with suitable non-shrink mortar or
grout, as approved by the Engineer.

b. Records: Records shall be kept of the mix details and position in the works of all
batches of concrete and of all samples taken for cylinders and other specimens and of
their test results. A copy shall be supplied to the Engineer within 24 hours after
recording/testing. Records shall contain, but not be limited to, the following
information:

1. Date, time, location, and volume of pour.

2. Ambient temperature and humidity.
3. Concrete temperature (at time of placement).
4. Cement type and manufacture.
5. Concrete type and class.
6. Aggregate type and source.
7. Admixture details.
8. Water/cement ratio.
9. Identification of test cylinder.
10. Name of concrete testing service.
11. Date and time of sampling.
12. Method of compaction.
13. Date of testing and results of test.
14. Age of sample in days, weight in grams, density in kg/cu. m.
15. Crushing load in newtons and crushing strength in N/sq. mm.
16. Signatures of person preparing cylinder and of person crushing cylinder.
17. Results of compressive strength and permeability testing.
18. Compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-days tests.

c. For the 28-day tests, the concrete will be deemed to comply with the specified design
strength if the average strength determined from all sets of 3 consecutive tests is at least
equal to the specified design strength and no individual strength test falls below the
specified design strength by more than 3.5 N/sq. mm. Any concrete not complying with

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 30 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

the specified design strength shall be at risk for removal and replacement at the
Contractor’s expense.

d. The 28-day cylinder crushing results shall be grouped consecutively in groups of 40 and
each group shall have a standard deviation less than 3.5 N/sq. mm. If the standard
deviation is greater than or equal to 3.5 N/sq. mm, then concrete production shall be
investigated by the Engineer and further tests on trial mixes may be required.

e. Tests shall be carried out at 7 days to establish a relationship between the 7-day and
28-day strengths. This relationship shall be used to interpret future test results in order
to predict the corresponding 28-day strength. The Engineer shall be advised without
delay of any 7-day test result indicating that the corresponding 28-day strength will
likely fail to meet the specified strength so that any necessary action can be taken to
minimize the effect of such possible failure.

2. Compressive Strength Test for Blinding or Mudmat Concrete: There shall be no production
tests on blinding or mudmat concrete. The Engineer will require compressive strength tests if
it is believed that the characteristic strength is below 16 N/sq. mm. Characteristic strength is
defined as that value of the cube strength below which 5 percent of all possible test results
would be expected to fall. If the tests confirm that the characteristic strength is less than 16
N/sq. mm, then the Engineer will require revisions to the mix design to ensure that the concrete
meets the specified requirements.

3. Measurement of Concrete Temperature: Temperature measurements shall be in accordance

with ASTM C 1064/C1064M. Concrete temperature shall be measured 50 mm below the
surface prior to and at the point of placement and recorded on the pour card for each pour.
There shall be one test hourly when air temperature is 4 deg.C and below and when air
temperature is 27 deg.C and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength
specimens. Concreting shall stop if the temperature of the concrete does not meet the
requirements of Paragraph 3.9.L

4. Cement Content and Water/Cement Ratio: Samples of freshly mixed concrete shall be chosen
by the Engineer at least once per month from each structural grade and determination made of
cement content and water/cement ratio in accordance with BS 1881. If the cement content is
less than 90 percent of the requirement in Paragraph 2.16.E. or the water/cement ratio greater
than 110 percent of the requirement in Paragraph 2.16.F. then there shall be an investigation to
establish the cause and the Engineer may reject the casted concrete for the pour from which the
samples were taken. The Engineer may request an analysis of fresh concrete from any pour.
No analysis of freshly mixed concrete is required for blinding or mudmat concrete.

5. Salt Content: The total concentrations of sulfates and chlorides in the fine and coarse
aggregates shall be measured at least once a week for all structural grades of concrete. Tests
shall be in accordance with BS EN 1744-1. Concentrations of each ion shall not exceed the
limits specified in Paragraphes 2.5.D.1 for coarse aggregates, 2.5.D.2 for fine aggregates and
2.15.H for the total salt content of concrete. If these limits are exceeded, the concrete pour
from which the samples were taken shall be rejected and further tests performed on the cast
concrete in accordance with Paragraph 3.19.D to determine the total extent of the problem.

6. Slump: Slump tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 143/C143M. There shall
be a minimum of one test at the point of discharge for each day's pour for each type of
concrete. Additional tests shall be performed when concrete consistency appears to have
changed

7. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;; ]one test for each
composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

8. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 31 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. Quality Control - Testing on Hardened Concrete:

1. General: The Engineer may request samples to be taken and tests carried out on any hardened
structural grade concrete as specified below if he suspects that the concrete does not meet the
specified requirements. If the tests confirm that the concrete does not meet the requirements of
this Specification, then the Engineer may require the concrete to be removed at the
Contractor’s expense. If the tests confirm that the concrete meets the requirements of this
Specification, then the cost of taking the samples shall not be at the Contractor’s expense.

2. Compressive Strength Tests: The Engineer may request cores to be drilled from a particular
pour. 100 mm diameter cores shall be drilled as requested, in accordance with
ASTM C 42/C42M, and sent for crushing. If the cores from that pour have an average
compressive strength less than 85 percent of the characteristic strength or any individual core
has a compressive strength less than 75 percent of the characteristic strength, it shall be
evidence that the concrete from which it was taken is not in accordance with the specified
requirements.

3. Concrete Cover: The Engineer may check the concrete cover over the reinforcement with a
cover meter. Any indication that the cover is generally less than the requirements specified in
Paragraph 3.6.I shall be checked by limited surface concrete removal. If it is confirmed that
the actual cover is generally less than specified, then the concrete shall be removed at the
Contractor’s expense. In the case of localized lack of cover and where appearance is not
important, a repair shall be effected by removal of the inadequate cover and the cutting back of
concrete for 50 mm behind the reinforcement. Resurfacing of the concrete with the specified
cover shall be carried out as a repair by a specialist subcontractor as specified in Paragraph
3.16.
4. Absorption: A sample of three 75 mm diameter cores, 75 mm long, shall be taken from
hardened concrete if directed by the Engineer and tested in accordance with Paragraph 2.13.O.
Should the absorption of any core exceed by more than 1 percent the highest approved test
result, then the concrete from which it was cut shall be removed. No absorption test shall be
required for blinding or mudmat concrete.
5. Permeability Tests: Sample of three 75 mm diameter cores, 75 mm long, shall be taken from
hardened concrete if directed by the Engineer and tested in accordance with Paragraph 2.13.P.
Should the permeability of any core exceed the highest approved test result, then the concrete
from which it was cut shall be removed. No permeability test shall be required for blinding or
mudmat concrete.
6. Salt Content: Engineer may request samples to be taken from two 20 mm diameter drillings
into the concrete surface, spaced 75 mm apart. Each drilling shall proceed in 25 mm
increments for a total depth of 100 mm and the dust from the 4 samples in each hole shall be
sent for sulfate and chloride content analysis in accordance with BS 1881 Part 124. Should the
tests show that the limits specified in Paragraph 2.13.J are exceeded, the concrete shall be
removed.
7. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
used but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
8. Additional Tests: The testing agency shall make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in
the structure, as directed by the Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C42M, or by other
methods as directed.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 32 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.20 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.
Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by
liquid floor treatments installer.

END OF SECTION 033000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - Page 33 of 33

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 035440 - CEMENT-BASED SCREED

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Standard aggregate concrete floor screed for interior finish flooring.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete slab construction and finish.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Screed: means a layer of cement-sand or other material laid on a structural floor or roof slab to
achieve the correct level, finished and prepared as a base to receive another material, typically the
wearing surface.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for concrete floor toppings.

C. Design Mixes: For each cement screed mix. Include alternative mix designs when characteristics
of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of
current materials:

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.

2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.

CEMENT-BASED SCREED 035440 - Page 1 of 9

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency acceptable to the Engineer and qualified
according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.

B. Ready-Mixed Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products

complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.

D. Mockups: Place concrete floor screed mockups to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,
bonding, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build mockups approximately 9.3 sq. m in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting construction.
4. If Engineer determines that mockups do not meet requirements, demolish and remove them
from the site and cast others until mockups are approved.
5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's
labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components, and
application.

B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate

temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other
conditions affecting concrete floor topping performance.

1. Place concrete floor screed only when ambient temperature and temperature of base slabs
are between 10 and 30 deg C.

B. Close areas to traffic during screed application and, after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCREED MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

CEMENT-BASED SCREED 035440 - Page 2 of 9

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Sand: ASTM C 404, fine aggregate passing 1.18-mm sieve.

C. Premix Mix: Factory prepared mix with fibrous reinforcement and admixtures applied over struc-
tural deck to receive another finishing material.

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 20 MPa at 28 days when tested according to C 109M.
3. Water-cement ratio: Adjust ratio to achieve the required compressive strength and slump
and as per manufacturer’s printed instructions.
4. Where the thickness of the screed exceeds 70 mm, use fine concrete if directed. Submit
mix proportions for approval.

D. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33 and as follows:

1. Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard, free of deleteri-
ous matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:

a. 9.5 mm: 100 percent

b. 4.8 mm: 95-100 percent
c. 2.4 mm: 80-90 percent
d. 1.2 mm: 50-75 percent
e. 600 m: 30-50 percent
f. 300 m: 10-20 percent
g. 150 m: 2-5 percent

2. Coarse aggregate, consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hard, free of deleterious
matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:

a. 12.5 mm : 100 percent

b. 9.5 mm : 30-50 percent
c. 4.8 mm : 0-15 percent
d. 2.4 mm : 0-5 percent

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

A. Fibrous Reinforcement: 100 % virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fibers containing no reprocessed

olefin materials and specifically manufactured to an optimum gradation for use as concrete
secondary reinforcement. Proportion shall be not less than 0.9 Kg per m3 of concrete to give the
required strength. Fibrous reinforcement shall be as follows:

1. Specific gravity: 0.91

2. Tensile strength: 345 - 758 N/mm2

B. STEEL REINFORCEMENT

1. Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.

2.3 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble
chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures. Do not use admix-
tures containing calcium chloride.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

C. High Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494.

CEMENT-BASED SCREED 035440 - Page 3 of 9

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.

E. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 305 g/sq. m when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A
Shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self-expanding cork.

C. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A
hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

D. Acrylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.

E. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 0.025 mm thick, clear.

2.6 SCREED MIX

A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and
strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data
bases.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for
the laboratory trial mix basis.

C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): submit mix for approval to give a 28-day compressive
strength of not less than 20 MPa. Minimum cement sand ratio should be not less than 1 : 4
by volume.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.51.
3. Maximum Slump: 125 mm.

D. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

Portland cement in concrete as follows:

E. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not
less than 0.90 kg/cu. m.

CEMENT-BASED SCREED 035440 - Page 4 of 9

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.7 MIXING

A. Bonding Slurry: Mix Portland cement with water to a thick paint consistency.

B. Bonding Slurry: Mix 1-part Portland cement and 2 parts sand with water and an acrylic-bonding
agent according to manufacturer's written instructions to a thick paint consistency.

C. Floor Screed: Mix concrete floor screed materials and water in appropriate drum-type batch
machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of concrete floor
screed.

B. Verify that base concrete slabs comply with scratch finish requirements specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by the
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

D. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound concrete.
Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with an amplitude of
6 mm.

1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to concrete floor screed manufacturer's
written instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
2. Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair bond of floor
screed.
3. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in existing concrete to a depth of 13 mm and
fill with semirigid joint filler.
4. To both sides of joint edges and at perimeter of existing base slab mechanically remove a
100-mm- wide and 0- to 25-mm- deep, tapered wedge of concrete and retexture surface.

B. Install joint-filler strips where screed abuts vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation
walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with screed surface,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width, joint-filler strips 13 mm below screed surface where joint sealants,
specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with rec-
ommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

CEMENT-BASED SCREED 035440 - Page 5 of 9

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Comply with division 3 section "Cast In Place Concrete" for placing steel reinforcement

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at loca-
tions where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement termi-
nates at isolation joints.

1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not con-
tinue reinforcement through sides of strip pavement, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partial-
ly hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 15.25 m, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate joint filler not less than 13 mm or more than 25 mm below finished surface if
joint sealant, specified in Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants," is indicated.
3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed where possible. Where
more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together.
4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other tem-
porary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides
of joint.

D. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints
where indicated.

1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
from bonding to one side of joint.

E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as in-
dicated. Construct contraction joints as indicated on shop drawings for a depth equal to at least
one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contrac-
tion joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

a. Radius: to suit final pattern and layout.

3.5 FLOOR SCREED APPLICATION

A. Start floor screed application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

B. Monolithic Floor Screed: After textured-float finish is applied to fresh concrete of base slabs
specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete," place concrete floor screed while
concrete is still plastic.

C. Deferred Floor Screed: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bonding slurry into
dampened concrete to a thickness of 1.6 to 3 mm, without puddling. Place floor screed while
slurry is still tacky.

CEMENT-BASED SCREED 035440 - Page 6 of 9

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Existing Concrete: Apply epoxy-bonding adhesive, mixed according to manufacturer's written

instructions, and scrub into dry base slabs to a thickness of 1.6 to 3 mm, without puddling. Place
floor screed while adhesive is still tacky.

E. Place concrete floor screed continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve
tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop within pour
strip.

1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.
3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane
free of humps or hollows.

F. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as concrete floor screed can
support equipment and operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat
float passes and restraightening until concrete floor screed surface has a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.

1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
concrete floor screed by power-driven trowel without allowing blisters to develop.
Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is smooth and uniform in texture.

a. Finish surfaces to specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness,
F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15,
and measure within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155M for a randomly
trafficked floor surface.
b. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between surface and an unleveled
freestanding 3-m- long straightedge, resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on
the surface, does not exceed 6 mm.

G. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete floor screed, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.

1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where concrete floor
screed is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete floor screed.

H. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3-mm- wide joints into concrete floor
screed when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before random
contraction cracks develop.

1. Form joints in concrete floor screed over contraction joints in base slabs, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Construct contraction joints for a combined depth equal to screed thickness and not less
than one-fourth of base-slab thickness.
3. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of concrete floor screed thickness,
but not less than 13 mm deep.

3.6 INITIAL CONCRETE FINISHING

A. General: Wetting concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is
prohibited.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut
down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately refloat surface to uniform granular texture.

CEMENT-BASED SCREED 035440 - Page 7 of 9

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.7 PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor screed from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete floor screed surfaces in hot, dry, or
windy conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's
written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying floor screed, but before
float finishing.

C. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete floor screed. Cure by one or a combination of
the following methods, according to concrete floor screed manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with water or
absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover screed surfaces and
edges with 300-mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

3.8 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install semirigid joint filler, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, once screed has fully cured.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces
of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim semirigid joint
filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.9 REPAIRS

A. Remove and replace or repair, as directed by the Engineer, screed that does not comply with
requirements in this Section.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of concrete floor screeds shall
take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows:

1. Sample Sets: At point of placement, a set of 3 molded-cube samples shall be taken from
the screed mix for the first 93 sq. m, plus 1 set of samples for each subsequent 464 sq. m of
screed, or fraction thereof, but not less than 6 samples for each day's placement. Samples
shall be tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compliance with compressive-
strength requirements.
2. Concrete floor screed shall be tested for delamination by dragging a steel chain over the
surface.
3. Concrete floor screed shall be tested for compliance with surface flatness and levelness
tolerances.

C. Remove and replace applications of concrete floor screed where test results indicate that it does
not comply with specified requirements.

CEMENT-BASED SCREED 035440 - Page 8 of 9

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Protect screed from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective
methods and materials approved by Engineer, including temporary covering, recommended in
writing by screed manufacturer.

B. Protect screed from damage. Do not permit construction traffic on concrete screed. Exclude other
traffic from screed for at least 28 days after placement.

C. Maintain screed free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep screed not
more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

D. Clean screeds not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish
date of Substantial Completion in each Project area. Use cleaning materials and procedures rec-
ommended in writing by screed manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 035440

CEMENT-BASED SCREED 035440 - Page 9 of 9

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 075213 - ATACTIC-POLYPROPYLENE (APP) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE

ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. This Section should be read in conjunction with ADNOC Onshore General Specifications during
construction. Both the documents are complementary to each other. In case of conflict between a
requirement in this Section and a requirement in ADNOC Onshore General Specification during
construction, the most stringent requirement shall prevail. Drawings and general provisions of the
Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Protected, APP-modified bituminous membrane roofing.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install a free draining, watertight membrane roofing system including upstands, flashings
and coverings, with compatible components, that will not permit the passage of liquid water and
will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

1. Roofing system is to be without patches as far as practicable. If patches are inevitable, their
number, location and size shall be as recommended and allowed by roofing manufacturer
and approved by the Engineer.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.

C. Roofing system assembly shall comply with test requirements in Chapter 1, Section 6, Table 1.22:
Roofing System Test Requirements in UAE Fire & Life Safety Code of Practice.

D. The roofing systems manufacturers/suppliers and their product systems shall be registered with
Abu Dhabi Municipality and Civil Defense Authority.

E. Roofing System Design: Provide a roofing system that is identical to systems that have been
successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist the factored design uplift
pressures calculated according to SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and
Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Submission is to be made complete and
comprising all accessories and materials needed to complete the job.

B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other Work. Drawings are to be approved by the manufacturer before submission to the Engineer.

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075213 - Page 1 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. 300-by-300-mm square of roofing membrane sheet.

2. 300-by-300-mm square of roof insulation.
3. 300-by-300-mm square of separation layer.
4. 4.5 kg of aggregate ballast in color and gradation indicated.
5. Full-size concrete roof-paver in color and texture required.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies
with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system.

H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system.

I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

K. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing
installation.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Local Regulations and Codes: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section with
minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or licensed by the
product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty.
Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of engineers and employers, and other
information specified.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has 15 years minimum experience for
roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability
to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing system
manufacturer.

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response

characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL,
FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075213 - Page 2 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.

G. Mock-ups: Apply waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) of substrate to demonstrate surface
preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, and execution quality.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for
storage.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and
within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid
material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Roofing Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in ma-
terials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APP-MODIFIED ASPHALT-SHEET MATERIALS

A. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade S, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, APP-
modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified.

1. Thickness: 4 mm minimum.
2. Tensile Strength, @ 23+2ºC: 16 KN/m longitudinal and 16KN/m transverse according to
ASTM D5147/D5147M.
3. Penetration @ 25ºC: 20 dmm according to ASTM D5147/D5147M.
4. Elongation at @ 23+2ºC: 40 % longitudinal, 40% transverse according to ASTM
D5147/D5147M.

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075213 - Page 3 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

5. Tear Strength: 400N longitudinal, 200N transverse according to ATSM D 5147/D5147M.

6. Low-Temperature Flexibility, ºC: -6 to -10 according to ASTM D5147/D5147M.
7. Puncture resistance: 1155 N according to ASTM E 154.
8. Water Absorption, % Wt @ 23 ºC 24hrs: < 1 according to ASTM D 5147/D5147M.
9. Water vapor transmission, g/m2/24hrs: < 0.5 according to ASTM E96.

B. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, APP-
modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified.

2.2 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with roofing membrane.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.

C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen, nonhardening, nonmigrating,

nonskinning, and nondrying.

D. Metal Termination Strips: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum strips,

approximately 35 by 3 mm thick; fixed with anchors as specified. Top edge is to be turned to
outside to allow sealing top edge of membrane with backer rod and sealant.

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance
provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate,
tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.

F. Cants: Formed in place from cement-sand mortar of 400 kg Ordinary Portland Cement to 1 m3 of
clean sand. Cement and sand shall be as specified in Division 9, Section “Cement Plastering”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to
roof deck have been removed.
3. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary
moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

a. Test for moisture by pouring 0.5 L of hot roofing asphalt on deck at start of each
day's work and at start of each roof area or plane. Do not proceed with roofing
work if test sample foams or can be easily and cleanly stripped after cooling.

4. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units
in excess of 1.6 mm out of plane relative to adjoining deck.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075213 - Page 4 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.

C. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 0.3 L/sq. m and allow primer to
dry.

3.3 APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install modified bituminous roofing membrane sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written
instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and
terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:

1. Torch apply to substrate.

2. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required
by manufacturer.

B. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side
and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.

1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.

C. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water.

3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at
penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions and as follows:

1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.

2. Flashing Sheet Application: Torch apply flashing sheet to substrate.

B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 200 mm above roofing membrane and
100 mm onto field of roofing membrane.

C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.

1. Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass-fiber fabric set in asphalt roofing
cement.

D. Install roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on
membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Roof Drains: Set 760-by-760-mm metal flashing in bed of roofing-manufacturer-approved

asphaltic adhesive on completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with roofing membrane
cap-sheet stripping and extend a minimum of 150 mm beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of
roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain
clamping ring.

1. Install stripping according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075213 - Page 5 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion and submit report to the Engineer.

B. Notify Engineer and Employer 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection.

C. Testing: All waterproofed horizontal surfaces shall be subject to testing. Test each surface area
for leaks after waterproofing and before protection course and overlaying construction are placed.
Plug or dam drains and provide suitable temporary barriers at perimeter where required, and fill
with water to a depth of 100 mm. Maintain water in each area for 48 hours. Examine underside of
decks and termination for evidence of leaks. Repair leaks and make further repairs until
waterproofing installation is watertight. Retest to determine compliance of repairs with
requirements, repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, repair flashing and make new tests until
acceptance. No compensation shall be paid to the Contractor for resting, repairs, reinstallation of
waterproofing or new testing.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Engineer and
Employer.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 075213

APP MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075213 - Page 6 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Preformed joint sealants.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Trafficable Sealant: To qualify for traffic use under ASTM C 920 requirements, elastomeric
sealants must demonstrate a Shore A hardness of not less than 25 or more than 50.

B. Low Modulus: Tensile strength of 310 kPa or less.

C. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 310 kPa or more than 517 kPa. Movement
capabilities of ±50%.

D. High Modulus: Tensile strength of more 517 kPa. Joint movement is limited to ±25% or less.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with
joint sealants in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 150-mm- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience. Include lists of five completed projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 1 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

successfully with project names and addresses, names and addresses of engineers and employers,
and any other information specified or required by Engineer.

B. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that installer is approved,

authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.

C. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted
in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article.

D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating
the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
3. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.

E. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a

qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.6 ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH AND SAFETY (EHS) SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Estidama requirements for products covered by this Section

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Local Regulations and Codes: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Estidama as applicable for the Project.

B. Quality System: Provide the products of a manufacturer who holds valid ISO 9001 certification.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics of Joint Sealants: As tested according to ASTM E 84; testing by a

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

D. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for

installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.

F. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 2 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements
specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement,
adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

G. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative
present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory
adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.

H. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to
receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in
this Section.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer Installer and Contractor are
jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace, without limitations, all or any part of the

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 3 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

elastomeric joint sealant assembly that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not limited to:
water penetration, adhesive and cohesive failures, deterioration in sealants; other than due to nor-
mal ageing and weathering; and any other defects in other components of the work.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years minimum from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint
sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers for interior applications shall
comply with Estidama limits for VOC content.

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that
will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
otherwise indicated.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not
stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

E. Trafficable Sealants: in accordance with ASTM C920, trafficable sealants grade T shall have a
hardness reading, after being properly cured, of not less than 25 or more than 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 661.as recommended by ASTM C920. Do not use silicone sealants for
such applications.

F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 4 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining

to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and
have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to
ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
otherwise indicated.

2.3 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.

B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Modulus: medium.
2. Shore A hardness: 30
3. Intended use:Conventional glazing and weathersealing applications

C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M,

Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.

1. Modulus: low
2. Shore A hardness: 15
3. Intended use: Moving joints, color flexibility, EIFS, expansion and control joints, tilt-up
panel joints, precast concrete panel joints, perimeter caulking (windows, door, panels), etc.

D. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Modulus
2. Shore A hardness 25
3. Intended use: Suitable for use in bathrooms, spas and similar sanitary applications where
joints need protection against fungi and bacteria and in ceramic tile grouting

2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.

2.5 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Immersible Joint Sealants. Suitable for immersion in liquids; ASTM C 1247, Class 1 or 2; tested
in deionized water unless otherwise indicated

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 5 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 50, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent
and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T, NT, and I.

2.6 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to
prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component,
nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing
silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

2.7 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured low-
modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing
silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

B. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell

foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 160 kg/m3 and impreg-
nated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or
stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and
covered with protective wrapping.

2.8 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufactur-
er for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at
back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum
adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 6 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply
with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous
joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 7 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint
substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 300 m of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per
elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand
Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for
opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes
sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products
in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so
installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 8 of 8

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 096723 - RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. High-build epoxy-based floor coating system with anti-slip finish for service rooms and
where indicated on drawings.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section "Cement-Based Screed" for cement-based screed over base concrete
slabs to receive resinous flooring.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation of sealant
materials at joints in resinous flooring systems.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical data,
installation instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.

A. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.

B. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 150 mm square, applied to
a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,

authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products and complies with specified
requirements.

A. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer.

B. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in the maintenance manuals.

1.6 ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH AND SAFETY (EHS) SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Estidama requirements for products covered by this Section

RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - Page 1 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Local Regulations and Codes: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Quality System: Provide the products of a manufacturer who holds valid ISO 9001 certification.

C. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of flooring systems required for this Project.

1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as

qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.

2. Installer must also be listed and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins,
hardening agents, and sealing or finish coats, through one source from a single manufacturer.
Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials
of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

E. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 1200-mm- square floor area selected by Engineer.

2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Engineer's review of mockups.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Taking Over.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer of
other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace resinous flooring
that fail in materials, finishes or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include,
but are not limited to, the following:

1. Failure in adhesion to substrate.

2. Failure to provide required performance.
3. Deterioration of finish beyond normal weathering.
4. Chipping.

C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Taking Over.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's
labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components.

B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.

RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - Page 2 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for
substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting
resinous flooring installation.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent
lighting conditions during resinous flooring installation.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after
application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. VOC Content of Liquid-Applied Flooring Components: Mot more than 100 g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

2.2 HIGH-BUILD EPOXY-BASED FLOOR COATING SYSTEM <EP-01>

A. Epoxy-resin-based, pigmented, two-component, solvent-free, liquid, coating compound for

application onto cured cementitious surfaces to provide seamless, hard wearing, heavy-duty and
abrasion-and-chemical resistant cementitious floor surfaces and shall comply with the following
minimum properties at when tested at 20º C and 30º C:

1. Compressive Strength: 70 N/mm2.

2. Flexural Strength: 40 N/mm2.
3. Tensile Strength: 20 N/mm2.
4. Water absorption (According to ASTM C 413:1996): 0.06%.
5. Shore D Hardness (According to ASTM D 2240:1996): 85.
6. Chemical Resistance: product shall resist the following when tested in accordance to
ASTM D 543:

a. Acids:

1) Hydrochloric acid 18%

2) Sulphuric acid 50 %

b. Alkalis:

1) Sodium hydroxide 50 %

c. Solvents:

1) Petrol.
2) Hydraulic Oil.
3) Kerosene.
4) Skydrol.
5) Grease.
6) Lubricants.

d. d. Others:

1) Saturated sugar solution

RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - Page 3 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. In addition to the above, the manufacturer shall submit third-party laboratory test reports to
demonstrate that the used floor coating system is heavy duty based on evaluation of the submitted
test reports for the following properties:

1. Shore D hardness.
2. Abrasion resistance to ASTM D 4060 using Taper CS-17: Acceptable limit shall be as
specified for traffic coating under Division 7, Section “Traffic Coating”.
3. Bond strength to cement-based substrate.

C. Color shall be selected by the Engineer from manufacturer’s standard range.

D. Primer: Shall be compatible with floor coating to the recommendations of the manufacturer.

E. Finish: Smooth and high gloss.

F. Coats:

1. Apply minimum two top coats.

2. Apply with a method to attain continuous uniform coating.
3. Each coat is to be a minimum 200-micron DFT to obtain minimum Dry Film Thickness
(DFT) of 400 microns. No pinholes or air bubbles shall present.
4. For walkways and trafficable spaces provide third coat with minimum 200-micron to
obtain total minimum dry film thickness of 600 microns
5. Maximum elapse time between successive coatings shall comply with manufacturer’s
printed instructions.
6. Aggregates: Manufacturer's standard anti-slip aggregates in grading and coverage
(intensity) as necessary to provide medium-textured surface.
7. Finish: Smooth, easily cleaned surface.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coats indicated.

B. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer
and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

C. Joint Sealant: To be compatible with floor coating as certified by both manufacturers of coating
and sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written
instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.

B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing
compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with
resinous flooring.

1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:

a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the
dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.

RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - Page 4 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions

are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's

written instructions.
3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable
levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within
acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application
only after substrates pass testing.

C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring
manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting
through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written

instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring

system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's
written instructions.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks.

D. Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.

1. Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured,

remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.

E. Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power
trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method
recommended by manufacturer.

F. Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface
of final body coat and to produce wearing surface indicated.

G. Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in
writing by manufacturer.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Core Sampling: At the direction of Employer and at locations designated by Employer, take one
core sample per 100 sq. m of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness. For each sample
that fails to comply with requirements, take two additional samples. Repair damage caused by
coring and correct deficiencies.

RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - Page 5 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Material Sampling: Employer may at any time and any number of times during resinous flooring
application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements.

1. Engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used. Material
samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable
referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in
manufacturer's product data.
3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for
testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable
materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use
protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by
resinous flooring manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 096723

RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - Page 6 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product:

1. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, indicating compliance with requirements
for low-emitting materials.

C. Paint Submissions: Paint shall be submitted as one complete system from single source including,
but not limited to: primer, putty, undercoat and finishing coat(s).

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 200 mm square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Local Regulations and Codes: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing paints similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance not less than 15

EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - Page 1 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

years, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required quantity.

C. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with minimum five
years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or licensed by the product
manufacturer to apply his product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Include
project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and Employers, and other
information specified.

D. Testing Laboratory: an independent testing laboratory/ agency approved by the Engineer to carry
out the testing required in this Specification.

E. Surface-Burning Characteristics of Exterior Paintings: As tested according to ASTM E 84; testing

by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

F. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with:

1. Requirements specified in this Section.

2. Requirements specified in BS 6150.
3. Manufacturer’s printed instructions and data sheets.

G. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each
specified paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 10 sq. m.

b. Other Items: Engineer will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Engineer at no added cost to Employer.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in
writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
5. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Container Labeling:

1. Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage,
surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions
for mixing and reducing.

B. Inspection:

EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - Page 2 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's sealed and labeled containers.

2. Inspect for damage and to verify acceptability.

C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 10 and 40 deg C.

B. Do not apply paints in rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Employer of
other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties provided in accordance with the
express requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty for Exterior Paint systems: Manufacturer’s special warranty in a form acceptable
to Engineer in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace any exterior paint system that fails
within the specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to:

a. Peeling or blistering of paint film.

b. Cracking of pain film.
c. Crazing of pain film
d. Efflorescence.
e. Change in color of finish top coat.
f. Staining.
g. Patchiness of sheen or color.

C. Warranty Period for Paint Coatings: 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each paint product from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PAINT PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. General

1. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure
free of blemishes, sags, air entrapment, etc.
2. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings

EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - Page 3 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

designated by local authorities.

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits Estidama requirements.

D. Colors: To match existing color.

2.3 PRIMERS/FILLERS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT SUBSTRATES

A. Exterior, Alkali-Resistant, Water-Based Primer: Pigmented, water-based primer formulated for

use on alkaline surfaces, such as exterior plaster, vertical concrete, and masonry.

B. Exterior, Latex Block Filler: Water-based, pigmented, high-solids, emulsion coating formulated to
bridge and fill porous surfaces of exterior concrete masonry units in preparation for specified
subsequent coatings.

1. Minimum Solids Content: Manufacturer's standard percentage solids by volume.

2.4 FINISH COATINGS

A. Textured Latex Coating: Water-based pure acrylic emulsion, pigmented coating that contains sand
or other hard aggregate, with high UV resistance and wet surface adhesion properties, and is
formulated for use on exterior plastered and concrete surfaces.

1. Gloss and Sheen Level: As per approved Mock-up.

2. Aggregate Size: Fine.
3. System shall be comprised of:

a. Prime coat: Primer, alkali-resistant, solvent based exterior, acrylic-latex bonding

primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: same as topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Light Textured Acrylic Paint Finish: Alkali-resistant water based,
environmentally friendly, exterior, flexible, 100% acrylic weather-resistant UV-
resistant and color stable, washable and resistant to repeated scribing, water vapor
permeable and of crack bridging capability up to 0.6 mm. the paint shall also
provide protection to concrete against salts and carbon dioxide and has the
advantage of reducing dust and dirt pick up
d. Properties:

1) Carbon Dioxide- Equivalent Air layer Thickness R Value -250 m

2) Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate - Equivalent Air layer Thickness SD –
0.9 m
3) Chloride Ion Diffusion – shall show No penetration after 365 days
4) Reduction in water absorption - 99.9 %
5) Crack bridging ability (BS EN 1062-7) from Taywood UK Certificate No.
9243: up to 600 µm.

EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - Page 4 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Employer reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. If paint
materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site.
2. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency in the presence of the
Contractor.
3. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
4. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected
materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted
surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as
follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not
to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - Page 5 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not
paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
4. Primers specified in the Exterior Painting Schedule may be omitted on items that are
factory primed or factory finished if compatible with intermediate and topcoat coatings and
acceptable to intermediate and topcoat paint manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate
identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has
a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Employer may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.

1. Do not clean equipment with free-draining water and prevent solvents, thinners, cleaners,
and other contaminants from entering into waterways, sanitary and storm drain systems,
and ground.
2. Dispose of contaminants in accordance with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Allow empty paint cans to dry before disposal.
4. Collect waste paint by type and deliver to recycling or collection facility.

EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - Page 6 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing,
scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Engineer, and leave
in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION 099113

EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - Page 7 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the interior
substrates.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Submit manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions

for each material proposed for use. Submit evidence that paints proposed for use satisfy
requirements for performance of paints as specified hereafter
2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and
application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalogue number and general
classification.

B. Paint Submissions: Paint shall be submitted as one complete system from single source including,
but not limited to: primer, putty, undercoat and finishing coat(s).

C. Comparable Product Requests: Coordinate with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Product Requirements". Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
to be replaced. Include a detailed comparison of physical properties, qualities and performance
characteristics between specified and proposed comparable paint product, including as a
minimum:

1. Chemical composition and properties.

2. Opacity.
3. Cleanability.
4. Scrub resistance, wet and dry
5. Adhesion.
6. Exposure resistance.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 200 mm square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

F. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 1 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. VOC content.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Local Regulations and Codes: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Comply with Estidama requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing paints similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance not less than 15
years, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required quantity.

C. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with minimum five
years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or licensed by the product
manufacturer to apply his product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Include
project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and Employers, and other
information specified

D. Source Limitations: Obtain fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from
the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

E. Surface-Burning Characteristics of Interior Paintings: As tested according to ASTM E 84; testing

by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

F. Performance Of Paints: Paints shall be fit for purpose and manufactured specifically for the
applications indicated and uses intended, taking into account the type, nature, location, and
aesthetic and utility requirements of the project

1. Opacity: paint shall cover or hide the substrate to the Engineer's satisfaction.
2. Cleanability: paint shall not absorb dirt and shall be capable of being washed or scrubbed
periodically, to the Engineer's satisfaction, without adverse effect on its attributes or
appearance.
3. Scrub resistance wet and dry: paint shall resist abrasion caused by scrubbing in accordance
with ASTM D 2486.
4. Adhesion: paint shall adhere firmly to the substrate without peeling.
5. Exposure resistance: paint shall resist yellowing and weathering caused by UV rays and
ozone.

G. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each
paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 10 sq. m.

b. Other Items: Engineer will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 2 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark

samples of additional colors selected by Engineer at no added cost to Employer.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion
5. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in
writing.
6. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of
additional colors selected by Engineer at no added cost to Employer.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.5 REGULATORY REQIREMENTS

A. Environmental Protection: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental

protection, provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of the local Air Pollution
Control District and regional jurisdiction. Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein
which fails to conform.

B. Lead Content: Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of
nonvolatile content.

C. Chromate Content: Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate.

D. Asbestos Content: Materials shall not contain asbestos.

E. Mercury Content; Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.

F. Silica: Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystalline silica.

G. Human Carcinogens: Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100Doc and ACGIH 0100Doc
confirmed human carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2).

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at an ambient
temperature as recommended by manufacturer in technical datasheet Maintain storage containers
in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 3 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Store materials that have low flashing point in full accordance with manufacturer’s printed
instructions.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 10 and 40 deg C.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 3 deg C
above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Employer of
other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties provided in accordance with the
express requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty for paint finishes: Provide complete paint system warranty in which Contractor,
Manufacturer and applicator are jointly and severally liable and shall repair or replace paint
coatings that fail within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to:

1. Peeling or blistering of paint film.

2. Cracking of pain film.
3. Crazing of pain film
4. Efflorescence.
5. Change in colour.
6. Staining.
7. Patchiness of sheen or colour.

C. Warranty Period for Paint Coatings: 3 years from the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Colors: To match existing.

2.2 BLOCK FILLERS

A. General: Obtain from same manufacturer of the paint system and to be compatible with other coats
of the system.

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 4 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Block Filler: Latex block filler suitable for interior and exterior applications.

C. Acrylic Paint Systems: Use acrylic-based materials.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Portland Cement Plaster Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer

for interior application.

1. Apply to attain dry film thickness recommended by manufacturer but not less than 0.025
mm

B. Portland Cement Plaster Primer: Factory-formulated 100%-acrylic sealing and priming stucco as
standard with manufacturer for acrylic-based Earthtone paints.

C. Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive lead-and-chromate-free

epoxy-based metal primer.

1. Apply to attain dry film thickness recommended by manufacturer but not less than 0.070
mm.
2. Primer coat shall be in addition to priming coat specified to be workshop-applied.

D. Galvanized Steel Substrates Primer:

1. Washing Primer: Polyvinylbutaryl (PVB) etching primer or other primer as recommended

by manufacturer of the coating system.
2. Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive lead-and-chromate-free epoxy-based metal
primer as recommended by paint system manufacturer.
3. Apply to attain dry film thickness recommended by manufacturer but not less than 0.070
mm.
4. Primer coat shall be in addition to priming coat specified to be workshop-applied.

2.4 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Portland Cement Plaster, and Concrete Surfaces:

1. General: Interior emulsion paints shall be:

a. Based on 100% acrylic, specially produced acrylic or resin approved by Engineer.

b. The used emulsion paint shall successfully pass tests for adhesion to substrate, non-
yellowing, opacity and viscosity to the requirements of an International Standard
acceptable Engineer.
c. Where indicated in finish schedule, apply the paint with stencil to provide the
pattern indicated.

2. Acrylic Emulsion Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion paint for interior

application suitable for repeated washing. Paint shall be highly recognized as interior
emulsion paint, of acrylic binder, of high leveling and hiding properties and excellent flow
properties and washability properties. Crack bridging capability of paint shall be 1.00 mm
minimum. Paint shall be of anti fungal and anti bacterial properties and shall be classified
as Class 1Y or better surface spread of flame to BS 476: Part 7. Solid content shall not be
less than 36%, by volume when tested to ISO 3233: 1998 (E). Scrub Resistance Test Result
shall be not less than 5000.

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 5 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. First and Second Coats: Acrylic -based, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a Dry Film Thickness (DFT) of not
less than 0.060 mm per coat, and a total paint DFT of 120 microns.

B. Anti-carbonation for protection of concrete walls, columns, and soffits in interior structures

1. Coating shall be water-based and nontoxic, allows substrate to breath, and of elastic nature
with crack bridging properties.

C. Ferrous Surfaces:

1. Aliphatic-Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel: High solids, high build, satin to semi-gloss finish
applicable on steel surfaces, primed with same manufacturer’s recommended primers
and/or intermediate coats. Dry enamel film shall exhibit excellent gloss and color
retention, durability, scratch and abrasion resistance, corrosion and chemical resistance.
Comply with the following:

a. Binder: Aliphatic acrylic polyurethane.

b. Pigments: Rutile titanium dioxide and/or color pigments and functional extenders.
c. Appearance:Semi-Gloss.
d. % Solids, by Volume: 70% ± 2%, minimum.
e. Color: To match existing color.
f. Application:Airless spray.
g. Primer: Epoxy based primer as recommended by paint system manufacturer.
h. Dry Film Thickness: Apply two coats at spreading rate recommended by
manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 75-125 microns per coat, minimum.

2.5 FLOOR COATINGS

A. Stain, Interior, for Concrete Floors: Penetrating semi-transparent stain specifically manufactured
for interior and exterior concrete horizontal & vertical surfaces as a “stand alone” finish.

B. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: Water based, acrylic co-polymer emulsion type, clear
sealer for interior and exterior horizontal concrete floors, decks and exposed aggregate driveways
and walkways. Use in residential and light to moderate traffic commercial locations. Oil, gasoline,
alkali and water resistant.

C. Sealer, Solvent Based, for Concrete Floors: Solvent based, acrylic type, clear sealer for interior
and exterior horizontal concrete floors, decks and exposed aggregate driveways and walkways.
Oil, gasoline, alkali and water-resistant.

D. Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss (Maximum Gloss Level 3): Abrasion-resistant, latex type,
pigmented paint for new interior and exterior horizontal concrete and primed wood surfaces not
prone to water permeation from below. It shall be water resistant to incidental splash and spillage.
Use in low to medium traffic, residential and commercial locations.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Employer reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. If paint
materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site.
Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Where the Specifications states that the Employer shall or reserves the right to, engage the
services of a qualified testing Agency to carry out tests, etc., such tests shall be undertaken
by an approved third-party QA/QC bodies and / or testing agencies, as specified for quality

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 6 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

control testing and/or third-party inspections, the services of which are to be engaged by
the Contractor at his own costs. the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged shall be furnished by the Employer
3. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
4. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected
materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted
surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as
follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.

F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not
to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to requirements of BS 6150:1991 and

manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Remove and reprime incompatible primers.

2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cement plaster, and mineral surfaces to be painted as
follows:

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 7 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as
required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing,
use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
b. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
c. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
d. Prepare surfaces with two coats of filler or putty that is compatible with under coats
and finish coats and obtained from same manufacturer of paint coats:

1) Use compatible acrylic-based filler under acrylic emulsion paints.

2) Sand after setting of filler and patch remaining spots or irregularities and
lightly sand to obtain perfect smooth uniform surface suitable for receiving
paint coats.

3. Drywall Boards: Comply with requirements specified in Division 9, Sections for drywall
Board.
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by methods recommended by manufacturer and paint
applicator.

a. Apply one coat of wash primer to promote and enhance adhesion of paint system to
the galvanized surface.

5. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of SSPC standards and
the following:

a. Treat metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
same primer as the shop coat.

6. Structural Steel Substrates: Clean structural steel surfaces; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose
mill scale, and other foreign substances.

a. Bare Structural Steel; Surfaces: Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint
system manufacturer and according to Swedish Standard SIS 05 59 00 – 1967, Sa 3:
Blast cleaning to visually clean steel. Surface shall be completely free from oil,
grease, mill scale and rust.
b. Coated Structural Steel (before applying undercoat or Finish coat): Touch up bare
areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean
with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer
as the shop coat or the touch up material recommended by manufacturer of the paint
system.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques recommended by paint manufacturer and suited for paint
and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 8 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged
items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or
factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same
material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has
a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety
and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards[ and switch gear].

b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or
other paintable jacket material.
i. <Insert mechanical items to be painted>.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or
other paintable jacket material.
h. Other items as directed by Engineer.
i. <Insert mechanical items to be painted>.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets
that are visible from occupied spaces.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Employer may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 9 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, apply additional coats as needed to provide dry
film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing,
scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Engineer, and leave
in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Coordinate the following paint coats with surface preparation steps as specified.

B. Special Paint System: Apply in compliance with recommendations in manufacturer’s technical

data and literature.

C. Concrete: Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete and brick masonry surfaces:

1. Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate

recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 0.036 mm.
b. Undercoat: same material for finish coats specified hereafter diluted to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
c. First and Second Finish Coats: Acrylic, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 0.06 mm per coat, and a total paint DFT of 120 microns.
d. Sheen level: As selected by Engineer.

D. Drywall Boards: Provide the following finish system over interior gypsum board surfaces:

1. Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the

manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 0.031 mm.
b. First and Second Coats: Acrylic -based, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 0.060 mm.
c. Sheen level: As selected by Engineer.

E. Portland Cement Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over new, interior Portland cement
plaster surfaces:

1. Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 10 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate

recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 0.036 mm.
b. Undercoat: same material for finish coats specified hereafter diluted to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
c. First and Second Finish Coats: Acrylic, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 0.06 mm per coat, and a total paint DFT of 120 microns.
d. Sheen level: As selected by Engineer.

2. Epoxy Paint Finish: 2 finish coats over primer.

a. Primer: 1 coat of manufacturer’s standard water based epoxy primer.

b. First and Second Finish Coats: 2 coats of Epoxy Paint finish as specified, to achieve
a total dry film thickness of 125 microns, minimum.

F. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal:

1. Aliphatic-Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer:

a. Primer: Primer for Galvanized Steel:

1) Washing Primer: Polyvinylbutaryl (PVB) etching primer.

2) Primer: Polyamide epoxy primer or other epoxy resin as recommended by
manufacture.

b. Finish Coats: Aliphatic-Acrylic polyurethane coating as specified. Apply minimum

two coats to obtain dry film thickness recommended by manufacturer but not less
than DFT specified per coat.

G. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:

1. Aliphatic-Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer:

a. Primer: Epoxy polyamide or other epoxy resin as recommended by manufacture.

b. Finish Coats: Aliphatic-Acrylic polyurethane coating as specified. Apply minimum
two coats to obtain dry film thickness recommended by manufacturer but not less
than DFT specified per coat.

H. Coating System For Structural Steel: Provide the following finish over interior structural steel:

1. Corrosion-Resistant Priming Coat: Epoxy zinc rich primer at not less than 75 microns
thickness.
2. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy based intermediate coating, two components, high-build not less
than 80% solids content of DFT specified.
3. Top Coat: Acrylic/Aliphatic polyurethane finish coating of DFT specified.
4. Warranty for the overall finish system shall be 15 years to first maintenance from date of
substantial completion.

END OF SECTION 099123

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - Page 11 of 11

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All works related to the ITS and MCC network shall be carried out in accordance with
DMAT/MCC requirements, specifications and general details.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes underground conduits and ducts, duct banks, pull boxes and handholes,
manholes, and other underground utility structures.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, backfill, and related items for ducts,
manholes, and handholes.
2. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete requirements.
3. Division 07 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing of manholes
and handholes.
4. Division 07 Section "Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing of manholes and
handholes.
5. Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing of manholes and
handholes.
6. Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Underground Ducts for Telecom, MCC and ITS Utility Service: UPVC utility duct encased in
sand or concrete.

B. Underground Ducts for Communication Circuits: UPVC underground conduit encased in

concrete.

C. Manholes: Underground, precast concrete utility structures and polycarbonate manhole for the
MCC and ITS Infrastructures networks.

D. Manholes: Cast-in-place concrete.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For metal accessories for manholes and handholes, conduits and ducts, duct-bank
materials, and miscellaneous components.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details and design calculations for precast manholes and handholes,
including reinforcing steel. Include Shop Drawings prepared by registered professional structural
Company, as indicated by seal on Shop Drawings.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 260543 - Page 1 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground
structures. Include plans and sections drawn to scale.

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

E. Record (as-Built) Documents: Show dimensioned locations of underground ducts, handholes, and
manholes.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with specified Standards.

1.6 TESTING

A. Polycarbonate manhole

1. The supplier will be required to submit the following test certificates:

a. Tensile and bending test.

b. Hardness test on a sample piece.
c. Calculations to prove withstand capacity against environmental elements and soil
situation (especially the salty conditions of the site).
d. UV radiation test for exposed elements like the covers.

2. Certificate of origin of raw materials from the materials manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent
bending, warping, and deforming.

B. Store precast concrete units at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical
damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.

C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Company or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Company not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Company’s written permission.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, and handholes with final arrangement of
other utilities as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes and handholes with final
profiles of conduits as determined by coordination with other utilities and underground

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 260543 - Page 2 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

obstructions. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and to ensure duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by
Company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNPLASTICIZED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (UPVC) DUCTS

A. UPVC Ducts for Outdoor Cable Installations: Non-sparking type, suitable for direct burial in
ground, Class B to BS 3506, supplied in standard 6 m lengths, with one end of each length
tapered.

1. Nominal Size: As shown on Drawings.

2. Minimum Wall Thickness: 3.4 mm for 100-mm ducts; 4.5 mm for 150-mm ducts.

B. Duct Supports: Rigid UPVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete
cover depths indicated, while supporting ducts during concreting.

C. Duct Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to cable
insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 1 deg C. Capable of withstanding temperature
of 149 deg C without slump and of adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits,
conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and
common metals.

2.2 COVERS FOR MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. Frames and Covers: BS EN 124, checkered cast iron or cast steel, recessed type, and of suitable
duty for the particular application. Machine cover-to-frame bearing surfaces

1. Covers: Cast-in legend "Telephone/MCC/ITS" as appropriate or as requested by the related

authorities.

B. Manholes are to be identified with weatherproof labels (Stainless Steel) with the aid of durable
paint applied at top of manholes, besides the manhole cover. Reference shall be given by the
Employer.

2.3 COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION

A. Concrete: Comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete and
reinforcement.

B. Concrete Envelope: For duct banks under roadways and where required or shown on the
Drawings, is to be 21 MPa, 28-day, compressive-strength reinforced concrete using sulfate-
resisting Portland cement. Reinforcement is to consist of 12-mm diameter longitudinal bars at
approximately 300-mm centers along bottom and sides of duct bank with 10-mm diameter U-
shaped transversal bars at 400-mm centers. Extend concrete envelope at least 300 mm beyond
each side of crossing, etc.

C. Cable Manholes and Handholes: 21 MPa, 28-day, compressive strength reinforced concrete using
sulfate-resisting Portland cement, with approved waterproof membrane on external surfaces, and
with cable supports where necessary, pull-eyes, and drain pit and drain pipe as required.
Dimensions and reinforcement are to be as shown on the Drawings or in accordance with
approved standard details shown on shop and construction drawings..

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 260543 - Page 3 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Provide suitable arrangement in the manhole for supporting cables along the walls of the manhole.
Cables shall not be left on the floor of the manholes.

2.4 PULL BOXES

A. Cast-Metal Boxes: Cast aluminum, sized as indicated, with outside flanges and recessed, gasketed
cover for flush mounting. Nonskid finish on cover.

B. Fiberglass Boxes: Molded fiberglass, sized as indicated, with 150-mm square cable entrance at
each side and weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.

2.5 UNDERGROUND, PRECAST CONCRETE UTILITY STRUCTURES

A. Precast Units: Interlocking, mating sections, complete with accessory items, hardware, and
features as indicated. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for ground
rod.

B. Design structure according to details on the Drawings.

C. Structural Design Loading: Heavy traffic.

D. Covers: Recess on cover shall accept finish material in landscaped and paved areas.

E. Joint Sealant: Continuous extrusion of asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion,

flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the
installation location with the ground water level at grade.

F. All electrical manholes shall be provided with stub out at the blank wall of the manhole. The
number of stub-outs shall not be less than 25 percent of the total number of ducts entering the
manhole, with not less than 2 numbers as a minimum. Etisalat manholes, however, shall follow
Etisalat Standards.

G. Provide suitable arrangement in the manhole for supporting cables along the walls of the manhole.
Cables shall not be left on the floor of the manholes.

H. All manholes shall have a sump pit (300 x 300 x 300 mm), with a slope on the floor of the
manhole to drain water into the sump pit.

I. All manholes shall be provided with a GRP ladder if internal depth exceeds 1499 mm.

J. All manholes shall be provided with engraved stainless steel labels fixed to the top of the manhole
cover and slab, with round headed stainless steel threaded screws.

2.6 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

A. Waterproofing: Comply with Division 07 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing."

B. Dampproofing: Comply with Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 260543 - Page 4 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions to receive ducts and utility structures for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
underground ducts and utility structures. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 31 Section "Earthwork" but do not use heavy-
duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Trenches: Width is to be as small as practicable with sides vertical. Remove mud, rock
projections, boulders and hard spots from trench bottom and trim level. Inform the Company in
advance to give him reasonable opportunity to inspect trench for each section of the work.

C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless
otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

D. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore
vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and
mulching. Perform according to Division 32 Section "Landscaping."

E. Restore Disturbed Pavement. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

3.3 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCT ASSEMBLIES

A. Install duct as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Form duct assembly to required line and level, using duct supports spaced to prevent sagging of
ducts and breaking of couplings and watertight seals, and secured with cords (not tie wires) where
necessary.

C. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum of 1:300 (preferably 1% slope) to drain toward manholes and
handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs
between 2 manholes to drain in both directions.

D. Join ducts using waterproof cement, to manufacturer's recommendations, to give waterproof and
sand-proof joint with at least 80 mm overlap.

E. Provide 3 mm galvanized steel wire inside empty ducts, for future pulling of cables, extending 1 m
beyond duct banks at both ends and securely fixed to wooden bungs sealing the duct.

F. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size and required
duct spacing, and install according to the following:

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of
ducts, and secure separators to the earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting.
Do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops
around ducts or duct groups.
2. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between
conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment
unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. Pour each run of envelope between
manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. When more than 1 pour is
necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 19-mm reinforcing rod dowels
extending 450 mm into the concrete on both sides of joint near the corners of the envelope.
3. Reinforcement: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturbed-earth and where
indicated.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 260543 - Page 5 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Forms: Use the walls of the trench to form the side walls of the duct bank where the soil is
self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use
forms.
5. Minimum Clearances between Ducts: 75 mm between ducts and exterior envelope wall,
50 mm between ducts for like services, and 100 mm between power and signal ducts.

G. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare
ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs.

3.4 ENDS OF DUCTS

A. Ducts ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be neatly cut and reamed and set behind
chamfered precast concrete duct end blocks or terminated with appropriate bell-mouth bushing set
in concrete wall. Ducts not ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be properly capped.

B. Sealing Ends Of Ducts: Completely seal conduits and ducts, active or spare, at entry into
buildings or manholes, with approved plastic moulds or wooden bungs to prevent entry of rodents,
gas and vapor.

3.5 SLEEVES OR DUCTS IN EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS

A. Provide sleeves or ducts in equipment foundations, whether or not shown on Drawings, in

accordance with approved shop and construction drawings or as instructed by the Company.
Obtain approval of sleeve or duct installation prior to pouring concrete.

3.6 UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURE INSTALLATION

A. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

B. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has cured at least
3 days. Apply waterproofing according to Division 07 After ducts have been connected and
grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and
scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole and handhole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least
3 days.

C. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has cured at least
3 days. Apply according to Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing." After ducts have
been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and connections and touch
up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole and handhole chimneys after brick mortar
has cured at least 3 days.

D. Cast-in-Place, Underground Structure Installation: Comply with applicable requirements of

Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Finish interior surfaces with a smooth troweled finish.

E. Precast Concrete, Underground Structure Installation: Install as indicated, according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting
ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
2. Support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from the 25-mm sieve to the
4.75-mm sieve and compacted to the same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 260543 - Page 6 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection of Duct Systems: Inspect underground duct assemblies in the presence of the
Company, before backfilling or concreting. Steel mandrel or other approved device, diameter
equal to 90% of inside diameter of duct and 500 mm long, is to be pulled through entire run of
duct and is to pass through without getting stuck. Ducts, which do not allow mandrel to be pulled
through, are to be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Company.

B. Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation

of underground ducts and utility structures.

C. Correct installations where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace
defective products and retest.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean ducts with stiff bristle brush pulled through each duct prior to pulling in cables. Pull brush
through full length of ducts. Use round-bristle brush with a diameter 12 mm larger than the ID of
duct.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.

END OF SECTION 260543

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES 260543 - Page 7 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 270501 - COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in this Specification “Common Clauses for IT & Security
Systems” shall be complimentary to and shall apply to the following SYSTEMS except where a
particular SYSTEM Specification calls for otherwise. In this case, the individual SYSTEM
Specification shall have precedence.
1. IT Systems
a. Section 272109 - Data Communications for Campus Network.
2. Security Systems
a. Section 281300 – Access Control software and Database Management.
b. Section 282000 - Video Surveillance System (VSS).
3. Other Communications Systems
a. Section 275123.15 – IP-Based Intercom System.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes common requirements for IT & Security Systems.

B. Related Sections:
1. Section 260500 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
2. Section 260519 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
3. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 260539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems
6. Section 260543 - Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.
7. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
8. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
9. Section 263353 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.
10. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
11. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
12. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
13. Section 271305 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
14. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
15. All Sections listed in Paragraph (1.1 B) above.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by
a specific edition date.

B. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in
the text by basic designation only.

C. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s

instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean reference to the latest printed
edition of each.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 1 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Conflicts
1. Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which material or
construction methods called for is less than minimum requirement of the reference standards,
immediately inform the Engineer in writing. Consequent to Engineer's approval, supply the
materials and perform the work as though called for to minimum code standards.

E. Codes and Standards: All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the
applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:
1. Comply with the latest issue of several material and test standards, which have been
developed and published by Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) for data
communications industry, but not limited to:
a. IEEE 802.1 – LAN/MAN Bridging and Management,
b. IEEE 802.3 – Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection Access Methods
(Ethernet),
c. IEEE 802.11 – Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Avoidance Access Methods
(Wireless LAN’s).
2. ISO/IEC/IEEE 24765, Systems Software Engineering - Vocabulary.
3. Comply with the latest issue of several Network Equipment Building System (NEBS)
material and test standards, which have been developed and published by Telcordia
(Ericsson). Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are applicable to this Section:
a. SR-3580: NEBS (TM): Criteria Levels.
b. GR-63: NEBS Requirements: Physical Protection.
c. GR-1089: Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Electrical Safety - Generic
Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment.
d. GR-3160-Core: Generic requirements for Data Center Equipment and Spaces.
4. Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
5. International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
6. EMC – Generic: Electrical equipment, devices and components shall comply with the
appropriate Class for project environment as per requirements of EMC:
a. EN 61000-6-1, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Immunity for
residential, commercial and light-industrial environments.
b. EN 61000-6-3, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Emission for
residential, commercial and light-industrial environments.
c. EN 61000-6-2, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Immunity for
industrial environments.
d. EN 61000-6-4, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Emission for
industrial environments.
7. EMC - Power Quality
a. EN 61000-3-2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits - Limits for
harmonic current emissions (equipment input current ≤ 16 A per phase).
b. EN 61000-3-3: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 3-3: limits - limitation of
voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems,
for equipment with rated current ≤ 16 A per phase and not subject to conditional
connection.
8. EMC Multimedia equipment: Information Technology equipment, devices and components
shall comply with the appropriate Class for project environment as per requirements of EMC:
a. EN 55035, Electromagnetic compatibility of multimedia equipment. Immunity
requirements
b. EN 55032, Electromagnetic compatibility of multimedia equipment. Emission
Requirements.
9. And / Or Electrical and Information Technology equipment, devices and components shall
comply with the appropriate Class for project environment as per requirements of EMC:

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 2 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Code of Federal Regulations: 47 CFR - Telecommunication, Chapter I - Federal

Communications Commission, Part 15 - "Radio Frequency Devices." (FCC: 47 CFR
PART 15).
10. Functional Safety
a. IEC 61508, Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-
related systems.
11. Product Safety
a. IEC 62368-1, Audio / video, information and communication technology equipment.
Safety requirements.
b. IEC 62368-3, Audio / video, information and communication technology equipment.
Safety aspects for DC power transfer through communication cables and ports.
c. IEC 60950-1, Information technology equipment. Safety. General Requirements.
d. IEC 60950-22, Information technology equipment. Safety. Equipment to be installed
outdoors.
12. Cyber Security: all installations shall meet:
a. IEC 62443, Security for industrial automation and control systems.
13. European Directives:
a. European Low Voltage Directive (LVD): 2014/35/EU.
b. European Radio Equipment Directive (RED) 2014/53/EU.
c. Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2012/19/EU.
d. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 2014/30/EU
14. All electrical works shall comply with the local Electricity Regulations. Refer also to
Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.

F. System software, terminology, and modeling of Integration Systems shall be compliant with
ANSI/ISA-95 (S95).

G. Local regulations and standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over the
Standards.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Definitions
1. SYSTEM: The IT or Security System to which these Specifications apply.
2. Virtual Server Environment (VSE): An environment that runs multiple independent
operating systems on a single physical computer. In a VSE, a single physical server may be
divided into multiple logical servers.

B. Abbreviations

3DES: Triple Data Encryption Standard.

AC: Access Control.
ACL: Access Control List.
AGC: Automatic gain control.
AHU: Air Handling Unit.
API: Application Programming Interface.
BD: Building Distributor.
BMS: Building Management System.
BNC: Bayonet Neill-Concelman - type of connector.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 3 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B/W: Black and white.

CAN: Campus Area Network.
CCD: Charge-coupled device.
CCTV: Closed Circuit TeleVision.
CFR: Code of Federal Regulations.
CIF: Common Intermediate Format.
CLI: Command Line Interface.
CMS: Cable Management System.
CoS: Class of Service.
CPE: Customer Premises Equipment.
CPU: Central Processing Unit.
CR: Card Reader.
CRTP: Compressed Real Time Transport Protocol.
CU: Control Unit.
DDE: Dynamic Data Exchange.
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
dpi: Dots per inch.
DMZ: Demilitarized Zone.
DoS: Denial of Service.

DSL: Digital Subscriber Line.

DSP: Digital Signal Processing.
EIA Electronic Industry Alliance.
ELV: Extra Low Voltage.
EMI: Electromagnetic Interference.
EOM: Emergency Operation Mode.
EQ: Environmental Quality .
FAS: Fire Alarm System.
FAT: Factory Acceptance Test.
FCC: Federal Communications Commission.
FPS: Frames Per Second.
FTP: File Transfer Protocol.
FTR: Floor Telecommunication Room.
FTTO: Fiber To The Office.
GPRS: General Packet Radio Service.
GTI: Guarantee Time of Intervention.
GTR: Guarantee Time of Resolution.
GUI: Graphical User Interface.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 4 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

HMI: Human Machine Interface.

HSIA: High Speed Internet Access.
HTTPS: Hyper Text Transfer Protocol the Secured Version.
HVTS: Horizontal & Vertical Transportation Systems.
IB: Interface Box.
ICT: Information and Communication Technology.
ID: Identification.
IEC: International Electro-technical Commission.
I/O: Input/Output.
IP: Internet Protocol.
IPSec: IP Security Protocol.
IPTV: Internet Protocol Television.
ISDN: Integrated Services Digital Network.
ISO: International Standard Organization.
ISP: Internet Service Provider.
ITSM: Information Technology Service Management.
IVR: Interactive Voice Response.
KVM: Keyboard Video Mouse (switch).
LAN: Local Area Network.
LC: Line Card.
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.
LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.
LED: Light Emitting Diode.
LPR: License Plate Recognition.
LSZH/LS0H Low Smoke Zero Halogen
MAC: Moves, Adds and Changes.
MAN: Metropolitan Area Network.
MCS: Master Clock System.
MDF: Main Distribution Frame.
MPEG: Moving Picture Experts Group.
MPLS: Multi-Protocols Label Switching.
MTR: Main Telecommunication Room.
MTTR: Mean Time To Repair.
MTBF: Mean Time Between Failures.
NAS: Network Attached Storage.
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
NIC: Not Included in Contract.
NIST: The National Institute of Science and Technology.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 5 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

NIU: Network Integration Unit.

NMS: Network Management System.
NTP: Network Time Protocol.
NTSC: National Television System Committee.
ODBC: Open Data Base Connectivity.
OFE: Owner Furnished Equipment.
OIP: Officially Important Person.
OIW: Operator Interface Workstation.
OLE: Object Linking and Embedding.
ONVIF: Open Network Video Interface Forum.
OOG: Out-Of-Gauge.
OPC: Ole for Process Control.
OSPF: Open Shortest Path First.
PARCS Parking Access and Revenue Control System.
PABX: Private Automatic Branch Exchange.
PAL: Phase Alternating Line.
PAS: Public Address System.
PAX: Abbreviation for Passenger.
PBX: Private Branch Exchange.
PC: Personal computer.
PDA: Personal Device Assistant.
PIACS: Personal Identification Access Control System.
PKI: Public Key Infrastructure.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller.
PMS: Property Management System.
PoE: Power over Ethernet
PRO: Public Relations Office.
PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network.
PTB: Push To Break.
PTZ: Pan-tilt-zoom.
QoS: Quality of Service.
RADIUS: Remote Access Dial-In User Service.
RAID: Redundant Array of Independent Disks.
RAM: Reliability, Availability and Maintainability.
RAS: Remote Access Services.
REX: Request to Exit.
RF: Radio frequency.
RMS: Resources Management System.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 6 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SACS: Security and Access Control System.

SAN: Storage Area Network.
SCN: Structured Cabling Network.
SCP: Secure Copy Protocol (Telephony).
SDK: Software Development Kit.
SLA: Service Level Agreement.
SMS: Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging).
SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNVT: Standard Network Variable Type.
SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol.
SQL: Structured Query Language.
TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet.
TSP: Touch Screen Panel.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories.
UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply.
USB: Universal Serial Bus
VDU: Video Display Unit.
VLAN: Virtual LAN.
VoIP Voice over IP (Internet Protocol).
VPN: Virtual Private Network.
VSE: Virtual Servers Environment.
VSS: Video Surveillance System.
WAN: Wide Area Network.
WMP: Windows Media Player.
WWW: World Wide Web.
X25: Protocol for Packet Switched WAN.
XML: Extensible Markup Language.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall provide, based on these specifications and design drawings, the final design
and construction documents and all equipment, software, material, labor and services required to
construct and install the SYSTEM infrastructure including, but not limited to:
1. All design services, drawings and specifications, equipment, software, materials, labor and
services, not specifically mentioned or shown, which may be necessary to complete the
design and installation of the SYSTEM.
2. Proposal to upgrade the specified systems to the latest technology available, so as to bring
the specified items to the prevailing technology at the time of construction as detailed in
Article “QUALITY ASSURANCE” of this Section.
3. Hardware as specified for the system and any hardware that is specific to the Contractor’s
proposed system.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 7 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Software application and any other software that may be required to make the system fully
operational as specified including the provision of network management software, IP
addresses, setup and configuration and any other required configuration.
5. Installation and setup of the system hardware and software as specified.
6. Coordination with the Service Providers of interfaced systems.
7. Integration of the SYSTEM with other systems and in coordination with the Employer.
8. Risk analysis of system design showing advantages and drawbacks.
9. Post deployment auditing.
10. Delivery of the “Interface Control Document - ICD”.
11. Final connection of hardware to power, infrastructure termination and patch cords
connecting system equipment to the data outlets and other network communication
equipment.
12. Documentation: Licenses, Shop drawings, Specifications, As-built drawings, user’s manual,
operation and maintenance manuals, test reports, etc.
13. Handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts (along with current unit prices) for all
major components in the system for two (2) years fault-free operation.
14. Handover manufacturer’s recommended test equipment and tools (along with current unit
prices) required for system maintenance.
15. Test plan.
16. System testing and commissioning.
17. System roll-out.
18. System warranty as specified herein.
19. Training as specified herein.
20. Maintenance and support as specified herein.
21. Supply the licenses for all software, programs and modules provided for the works including
those developed and modified by the Contractor. The appropriate licenses supplied by the
Contractor shall enable the Employer to use, modify, and develop the software, programs
and modules for the works supplied under this Contract.

B. Systems Integration
1. In addition to the above scope, a Contractor handling systems integration works shall:
a. Coordinate all integrated systems installation with the overall design.
b. Provide all additional studies to align works with other trades requirements.
c. Be in charge of the systems integration and migration of existing interfaces, as
applicable.
d. Be in charge of coordination and systems integration with new systems.
e. Identify and report all required configurations for integrated applications and systems.
f. Provide and implement a proper coordination mechanism agreed upon and accepted by
the end users during Project execution.
g. Provide and implement a clear execution plan for the new configurations and/or
upgrades required on the integrated systems.
h. Provide documentation and submittals in compliance with Contract Documents.
i. Propose an integration strategy including a test plan philosophy, methodology and
assumptions.
j. Provide for all interfaces interface control documents (ICD) signed by all involved
system providers for approval to implement the described functionality.
k. Provide a fully functional test lab facility with simulation of the proposed facilities.
l. Provide all active and passive components required to perform integration within the
test lab.
m. Provide a fully functional virtual environment including all necessary hardware and
software to run the production of all virtualized systems.
n. Provide all additional studies in case of changes due to other systems modification
related to architectural needs.
o. Be in charge of coordinating with other systems to ensure that modifications do not
impact other systems and if that happens, he shall be in charge of additional study to
coordinate and propose a solution to the engineer for final approval.
p. Carry out full coordination with the concerned parties of Local Authorities and other
Contractors prior to commencing work and throughout that process.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 8 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

q. Be responsible to replace and make operational all damaged equipment/accessories at

his own expense, if any, which are part of ongoing contracts or other contracts, while
carrying out the above specified works.
r. Provide gateways to achieve the necessary interface in-between systems along the
Project Data Network. Any equipment shall have to be provided and is deemed included
in the scope of work whether specifically mentioned or not, in order to ensure proper
and functional integration as intended, and enable proper transfer of information in-
between the systems as specified.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. Refer to SYSTEM Specifications Sections listed under Article 1.1 “Related Documents” above
for requirements.

1.7 CONFIDENTIALITY

A. The Contractor shall respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of the Employer, his
employees, processes, products, and intellectual property to the extent necessary, consistent with
the legal responsibilities of the Employer policies.

B. Contractor shall sign a non-disclosure agreement and abide by the requirements to keep
confidential all information concerning bid documents and this Project.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall not perform any part of the work requiring submittal and review of shop
drawings, product data or samples until Engineer / Employer has approved the respective
submittal. Such work shall be in accordance with approved submittals:
1. Product data: For each type of product.
2. Shop Drawings.
3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics.
4. System Operation: Include:
a. System Architecture and performance requirements.
b. Inter-connectivity patching of all network devices
c. Human Machine Interface (HMI) design for all categories of users.
d. Software Architecture and justification (e.g.: off-the-shelf and specific software, etc.).

B. Submittals shall comply with Division 01 requirements including but not limited to Sections
“Submittal Procedures”, “Closeout Procedures” and “Record (As-Built) Documents”.

C. Product Certificates: signed by manufacturers of equipment and /or software certifying that
furnished products comply with contract requirements.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For control consoles, equipment cabinets and racks,
accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s Endorsement
1. Contractor shall submit Manufacturer’s technical validation and endorsement of the design
documentation and implementation.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 9 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

F. Contractor shall deliver signed Warranty.

1. Comprehensive cost structure according to committed GTI, GTR and MTBF.
2. Maintenance stock dimensioning.
3. Distinguish maintenance during and after Warranty period.
4. Teams' organizations (distinguish local and remote teams, give associated manpower).
5. Hardware repairs and software patch support procedures.

G. Testing Plan:
1. The Contractor shall provide Test Plan elaborating the testing methodologies and schedule
to be applied throughout various stages of the work. This shall also include the plan for
integrated tests for interface with other systems. The Contractor shall submit the Test Plan
for approval by the Employer.

H. Contractor shall submit the required Field Test Reports in the format and media specified, upon
completion of testing the installed system.
1. The Contractor shall test all components and circuits of the SYSTEM active infrastructure
after installation to ensure functionality and performance meet industry approved guidelines.
2. The Contractor shall provide and supply all necessary technical and skilled manpower, tools,
test equipment, materials and transportation required for performing system and components
testing.
3. The Contractor shall deliver calibration certificates of testing equipment indicating that
equipment calibration meets the appropriate levels by a qualified testing agency and that
equipment has been calibrated at least once in the year prior to the testing date.
4. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

I. Product data: For each type of product.

1. Factory Tests: All equipment and cables shall be tested at Manufacturer premises, and test
certificates, shall be submitted to Engineer before shipping and delivery to site.
2. Hardware including storage, computation, processor needs, operating system, display, etc.
as specified for the system and any hardware that is specific to the Contractor system.
a. Submit catalogue cut-sheets /Datasheets that include manufacturer, trade name, and
complete model number for each product specified. Model number shall be marked
with an arrow or underlined to indicate exact selection.
b. Identify applicable specification section reference for each product performance for each
component specified for approval prior to purchase and installation.
c. Submit point-by-point compliance statement to the specification, with necessary
supporting documents.
d. For each product, include manufacturer’s installation instructions,
e. Equipment Datasheets to include as a minimum the following:
1) Product performance and features,
2) Electrical and Environmental requirements (power supply, temperature, humidity,
etc.),
3) Software and hardware releases roadmap for the next two years,
4) Troubleshooting guide,
5) Standard tests passed and results,
6) Product certificates,
7) Product compatibility matrix with other manufacturers/vendors.
8) Specify type of testing: in operation or in laboratory.
9) MTBF.
3. Software application and any other software that may be required to make the system fully
operational as specified including the provision of network management software, IP
addresses, setup and configuration and any other required configuration.
4. Management software datasheets to include at least the following information:
a. Product performance and existing features,

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 10 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. Known limitations (number of network elements managed, number of administrators,

number of clients, size of the database, etc.),
c. Hardware requirements (storage, computation, processor needs, operating system,
display, etc.),
d. Features and software releases for the next two years,
e. Standardized tests passed and results and available product certificates,
f. Product compatibility matrix with other Manufacturers/Vendors (specify level of testing
in operation, lab test, declarative or theoretical).

J. Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawings submittals to cover as minimum plan views and elevations of all work to be
installed:
a. Submit for approval diagrams showing layout of network components, schematic
diagrams, wiring diagrams, SYSTEM peripherals, etc.
b. Include data on electrical and physical characteristics of network components, network
management system, SYSTEM peripherals, etc.
c. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
d. Cable schedule: For each type of product indicated.
e. Include drawings for the Servers, consoles and peripheral I/O devices.
2. The Contractor shall make any corrections as required. The Engineer’s approval of such
drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from
drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called the Engineer’s attention to such
deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of
any sort in shop drawings or schedules.

K. Qualifications
1. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with the requirements
described in Article “QUALITY ASSURANCE”, included with, and at the time of, bid
submission.

L. Closeout Submittals (Record Documents):

1. The Contractor shall submit Record Documents for products and systems including but not
limited to:
a. Schematic network diagrams.
b. Parts lists.
c. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1) Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2) Program Software Backup: On approved storage media, complete with data files.
3) Printout of software application and graphic screens.
4) All programming and source code shall be considered as a work for hire and shall
be the property of the Employer upon completion of the project.
d. Network devices inventory.
e. Device configuration details.
f. Device port assignments.
g. IP addressing schedule.
h. VLAN addressing schedule.
i. Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocol configurations.
j. Layer 3 routing paths.
k. Recommended list of spare parts and components to be stocked at Project site.
l. Test Reports.
m. Training Manuals.
n. Warranties.
o. Record (As-Built) Drawings.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 11 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Record (As-Built) drawings shall include the components and cable numbers labeled in
accordance with Division 27 Section “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.
a. Utilize normal recognized drafting procedures that comply with Division 01
requirements.
b. Graphical symbols and component identification on detail drawings should use
commonly understood, unique and unambiguous symbols (an example of such a system
is IEC 60617) - to the approval of the Engineer.
c. The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the project identified in,
but not limited to, addenda, change notices, site instructions or deviations resulting from
site conditions.

M. Operations and Maintenance Manuals to include:

1. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control of the equipment.
2. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
4. Installation and maintenance instructions.
5. Directory numbers, feature codes and special programming.
6. Safety precautions.
7. Diagrams and illustrations.
8. Testing methods.
9. Performance data.
10. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers, list of special tools and instruments
indicating sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.
11. List of qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including
addresses and certified qualifications.
12. Interface Control Document – ICD: The Contractor shall submit the Interface Control
Document (ICD) which will include details of interface signals and/or protocols and details
on communication between the SYSTEM and the FAS (Fire Alarm System), the BMS and
other Building Services Systems.
13. System Maintenance
a. Routine/Preventative Maintenance Schedule.
b. Trouble Shooting Guide.
c. Breakdown Maintenance Instructions.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials and Equipment

1. Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest issue of referenced industry standards,
publications, or regulations referenced in this Section, as applicable.
2. Materials and equipment shall comply with applicable local regulations and code
requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction. These shall have precedence over other
codes and standards indicated, unless otherwise approved by the Employer, in writing.
3. Source Limitation: For each category of technology used for the SYSTEM infrastructure,
obtain system components from one manufacturer who shall assume responsibility for the
system components and for their interoperability and compatibility.
4. Materials and equipment shall be new and shall meet or exceed the latest published
specification of the manufacturer in all respects.
a. These specifications represent the prevailing technology at the time of design. However,
during construction, and because the technology may be rapidly evolving, the Contractor
is required to propose an upgrade of the specified systems to the latest technology
available, so as to bring the specified items to the prevailing technology at the time of
construction.
b. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to amend, as deemed necessary, any other systems
affected by the upgraded submission so as to allow for the complete and proper
functionality of all submitted state-of-the-art systems, equipment and relevant products.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 12 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. All necessary additional works that result from the upgraded materials, systems,
equipment and the ancillary works are to be proposed and detailed in the shop drawings.
d. The Contractor’s proposals must allow in the shop drawings for physical space,
electrical/mechanical support, network connectivity and other incidental items required
for the installation of the proposed updated systems and equipment.
e. The Employer shall review the proposal and shall decide whether or not such
substitutions will be appropriate and prices shall be adjusted to reflect increase or
decrease in cost to Employer. The cost of any change to the converged network system,
the infrastructure cabling or physical plant design due to such changes shall be included
in the presented cost revision prior to Employer acceptance.
5. Equipment shall generally be supplied in complete factory assembled units ready for
installation on site. Dis-assembly necessary for transportation or other purposes shall be
arranged to limit site work to simple re- assembly and inter-wiring of control and power
cabling.
6. Equipment Country of Origin
a. Equipment Country of Origin (manufacturing country) shall be indicated in the
proposal at time of bid submission.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications
1. A firm specializing in providing a SYSTEM, similar to that indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance for at least five years prior to commencing
the corresponding work for the Project.
2. Manufacturer's systems shall be, as often as possible, a standard "off-the-shelf" package
utilizing the latest hardware and software technology. Any major system development effort
necessary to meet specified requirements is unacceptable. Even if this system is a new
concept, it should not require huge development and shall be based on existing and proven
technologies.
3. Manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall maintain a service center capable of
providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs for overall system at
Project site with a response time as detailed under “MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT
DURING WARRANTY PERIOD” Article of this Section.

C. Contractor’s Qualifications
1. Contractor with documented experience in the installation of the subject SYSTEM with a
minimum of 2 projects successfully executed. All projects must be of comparable size and
complexity to that of this Project and they must be verifiable and completed within the last
5 years prior to commencing the corresponding work for the Project.
2. The installer shall have at least one supervisory employee possessing a certification from the
manufacturer or another recognized organization or institution, providing formal training in
the implementation, configuration / programming and system diagnosis for the specified
equipment.
3. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Manager who shall be responsible for
system coordination and project scheduling, testing and commissioning and preparation of
documents related to Record (As-Built Documents) and Operation and Maintenance
Manuals. The Employer reserves the right to approve the Contractor's Project Manager.
4. The Contractor shall be authorized by the manufacturer of the components of the SYSTEM
to sell their products and initiate a Warranty service on the same items.
5. By submitting a Tender, the Contractor thereby certifies that he is qualified in all areas
pertaining to, either directly or indirectly, the works. In the event the Contractor becomes
unable to complete the works in accordance with the Contract Documents, or to the
satisfaction of the Employer, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to retain the
services of the applicable manufacturers' representatives to complete the works in accordance
with Project schedule and at no additional cost to the Employer.
6. The Contractor shall ensure compliance with and have a thorough understanding of all local
codes and contract conditions pertaining to this Project.
7. Installation team members shall have the following skills:

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 13 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Good knowledge of operating systems to be able to configure accurately the servers and
verify their responses to critical events (power cut, disk crash, etc.).
b. Good knowledge of database administration to be able to adjust internal parameters
(redo log size, index, etc.).
c. Implementation experience on Projects of similar size and complexity.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Division 01, Section “Product Requirements”.

1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project environmental

conditions specified under Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”
encountered at the installed location without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
operating capability as applicable to:
1. Interior, Controlled Environments.
2. Interior, Uncontrolled Environments.
3. Exterior Environments.

B. Operational Constraints: The SYSTEM will run 24 hours per day, all the days of the year.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, 25% spare capacity shall be required at all levels of the SYSTEM.

D. Power Supply
1. Power supply for all products shall be supplied or derived from the voltage system described
below, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
2. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution system (AC voltage / No. of Phases
/ Frequency / Earthing system) shall be as per local country standard. For details, refer to
Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty
1. The SYSTEM (comprising any associated hardware and software) shall be warranted by the
Manufacturer to be free from defects in equipment, software and workmanship for a period
defined below in paragraph “Warranty Period”.
2. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the Manufacturer and the
Installer agreeing to replace system devices and equipment that fail in materials or
workmanship and to provide software patch support and updates within specified warranty
period.
3. To maintain the manufacturer’s warranties, equipment shall be installed, commissioned and
serviced by those installers authorized by said manufacturer to perform those duties. If the
Contractor is not authorized, by the said manufacturer, it is his sole responsibility to make
the appropriate arrangements and bear all cost and consequences thereof.
4. All manufacturers’ equipment warranties shall be activated in the Employer’s name and shall
commence on the date indicated in paragraph “Warranty Period” below.

B. Experimental Period
1. There shall be an Experimental Period during which the Contractor shall undertake
supervision and responsibility for operation of the SYSTEM under actual site conditions. If
any malfunction or degradation in the performance is noted on the system during this period,
it shall be attended to immediately.
2. During this period, the Contractor shall fully demonstrate the system performance under
actual operation conditions. This demonstration is to confirm, to the satisfaction of the
Employer / Engineer that the SYSTEM is free of remarks and is ready for taking over.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 14 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. The Experimental Period shall extend over three months and shall start following the
certification by the Engineer of the successful testing and commissioning of the system. The
Experimental Period shall, each time a malfunction is detected, be extended by three months
starting from the certification by the Engineer of the successful testing of the system
following the rectification of the malfunction.

C. Taking Over of the System

1. The system shall be considered ready for taking over by the Employer following:
a. The expiry, with no malfunctions being detected during the last three months, of the
Experimental Period (as may be extended), and
b. The submission by the Contractor, and approval by the Engineer, of the documents and
information required from the Contractor for the use, occupation and maintenance of the
system in accordance with the Contract (updated as necessary to reflect any
rectification(s) introduced during the Experimental Period).

D. Warranty Period
1. The Contractor shall include a statement of warranty on the entire system and on the
individual pieces of equipment for two years from the date of taking over of the system.
2. During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall undertake Maintenance actions as defined
in the “MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD” Article
below.
3. During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall provide all equipment, material, software
and labor needed to replace or repair defective products without any additional cost to the
Contract.
4.

1.13 COMMISSIONING

A. Generally accepted industry standards, as well as manufacturer's written installation instructions,

will be used as a basis for quality control and final acceptance of the works.

B. In-System Commissioning
1. Equipment commissioning shall be done through demonstration of product capability and
compliance with requirements after being wired and configured in the system.
2. Test system and power supply redundancies by unplugging redundant links.
3. Check recovery times.

C. The Contractor shall be required to perform a range of Site Acceptance Tests on site for each
individual sub-system to demonstrate that all items have been correctly installed and adjusted on
a location by location basis and that the sub-system operates in every respect in accordance with
the Specifications.
1. During this commissioning phase, the equipment is powered and the automation and
networking are gradually integrated layer by layer.
2. Any defects, which may become apparent during the course of these tests, shall be
immediately rectified by the Contractor at his expense.
3. The Site Acceptance Test Specifications shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted
for Approval by the Engineer and Employer.
4. All Site Acceptance Tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer who shall sign
off the testing documentation on satisfactory completion of the tests.
5. The Site Acceptance Test Specifications shall at every level, be subjected to configuration
management and change control by the Contractor.
6. If modification or reprogramming is required as a result of the tests, all affected parts of the
Site Acceptance Tests, as determined by the Employer, shall be re-tested.
7. The results of the Site Acceptance Tests, version of software and hardware tested, together
with any re-testing as a result of failure, shall be recorded and signed by the authorized
personnel of the Contractor and the Employer.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 15 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Those tests shall be carried out over two phases.

1. Preliminary Testing:
a. Mechanical:
1) Mechanical tests,
2) Calibration of the components.
b. Automatism / Electrical:
1) Powering Tests with electricity,
2) Control of Input/Output,
3) Control of the safety measure either personal or material,
4) Test of local mode operation.
c. Network / Software Tests:
1) Test of the Network,
2) Test of the Supervision Workstation user interface,
3) Test of the portable Terminal user interface.
2. System Testing
a. The tests performed during this phase are performed with and without loading
conditions.
1) Testing the crippled mode (Safe shut down consecutive to loss of energy, etc.).

1.14 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

A. Support
1. The Contractor shall offer a comprehensive explanation of its Service Level Agreement
(SLA) policy. The SLA should cover at least the following performance terms:
a. 99.99% availability. GTI and GTR should be guaranteed accordingly.
b. Emergency level 24/24, 7/7 phone support shall be available. Distant intervention on
system shall be offered.
c. High-level problem investigation support shall be offered 5/7 during working hours.
d. Maintenance stocks shall be properly sized by the Contractor in order to match
operational quantities replacement needs based on Manufacturers MTBFs for each
component within the network.
e. The MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The MTTR shall include the diagnostic time,
active repair/replacement time and the adjustment/testing time on site, but shall exclude
the response time.
2. Maintenance service shall include:
a. Contract lifetime software patching for revealed problems during operations.
b. Contract lifetime hardware replacements on established malfunctions or weaknesses
generating repetitive loss of service quality.
c. Following receipt of a defective product, Manufacturer shall make reasonable efforts to
repair or replace equipment with new ones and return the equipment within a reasonable
time not exceeding four working days.

B. Maintenance Service
1. During the Warranty Period, Manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall maintain a
service center capable of providing spare parts and emergency maintenance and repairs for
the overall system at Project site 7 days a week and 24 hours a day. Competent personnel
shall be dispatched to rectify stoppages at any time during the day or night when being
called on by the Employer.
2. The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to be sent to the Employer immediately
following every call out, indicating the time of call out visit, cause, remedial action taken
and the time that the service was restored.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 16 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. A Maintenance Manpower Plan shall demonstrate the Contractor’s committed resource level
available for all types of activities to be carried out within the Warranty Period. Such a plan
shall be submitted for Approval six months before commencement of the Warranty Period.
4. The Contractor’s response time, during the Warranty Period, shall not exceed 1 hour. The
response time is defined as the time that elapses between the reporting of a fault and the
maintenance personnel arriving at where the faulty equipment is located.
5. During the Warranty Period, the MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The MTTR shall
include the diagnostic time, active repair/replacement time and the adjustment/testing time
on site, but shall exclude the response time.
6. During the Warranty Period, the monthly average of the Repair Time shall be lower than or
equal to 6 minutes for each device. This performance will be monitored.
7. The Contractor shall provide at least four inspection visits at six-month interval during the
Warranty Period.
8. The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to be sent to the Employer immediately
following every inspection visit, indicating the time of call out visit, cause, remedial action
taken – if any - and the time that the service was restored.
9. The Contractor shall be responsible for clearing away from the Site all surplus materials,
rubbish, temporary works of every kind and leaving Project Site and installation clean and
in a workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of the Employer /Engineer, upon completion
of repair, and maintenance works.

C. Maintenance Performance Data

1. Updates
a. The SYSTEM will have to be conceived to facilitate the updates that will take place
throughout its life. Software update process must be easy, rapid and without risk, and
must be reversible.
b. Update shall be transparent to the user and shall be done without interruption of the
service.
2. Corrections
a. In the event of error, the SYSTEM shall have, as soon as possible, to store in a file a
certain amount of information allowing the correction of this error, e.g. entries in the
transactions, faulty operations of the statistics, etc.
3. The Contractor commits himself to the three (3) main sizing data of maintenance:
a. Annual number hours of preventive maintenance.
b. Annual number hours of corrective maintenance.
c. Average Annual cost of spare parts (Average based on ten years).

D. Preventive Maintenance
1. The Contractor shall describe the selected operations for preventive maintenance as planned
during daily operation.

E. Curative Maintenance
1. The selected operations shall be chosen to correspond to a significant fraction of the
forecasted time devoted to curative maintenance.
2. For each defect incidence, the Contractor shall record:
a. Equipment identification.
b. The object of the Maintenance activity.
c. The type of Maintenance activity (planned or not).
d. The total man-hours spent for the activity.
e. The total down-time duration ascribable to the Maintenance activity (transportation
time, diagnosis time, repair time, restart time).

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 17 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.15 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. The manufacturer shall guarantee the flow and availability of the spare parts without a major
design change for at least ten years’ period from date of System Acceptance by Employer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equipment cabinets
and racks, and components shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."

2.3 PROPOSED SOLUTION

A. The Contractor shall use well-proven technologies.

B. The proposed solution shall be already available in use on other Projects of similar application
and comparable size.

C. System and applications software shall be controlled and configured by working parameters
stored in tables and easy to change without programming.

D. The system shall be easy to deploy throughout the whole Project.

E. The system shall be able to accept multiple devices of different types, technologies and
manufacturers.

F. The Contractor shall ensure that the system does not cause any interference to other systems.

G. The Contractor shall point out in the point-by-point compliance to the Specifications, the
functionalities that :
1. Are implemented and can be easily adapted (i.e. by changing values in a database).
2. Are implemented and can be adapted by programming during project execution.
3. Are partially implemented.
4. Are not already implemented.

H. All functionalities that are partially or completely not implemented shall be quoted as “options”.

I. System Software
1. Manufacturer's standard software that is compatible with the SYSTEM performance and that
provides automatic facility monitoring, supervision, and remote control of SYSTEM from
one or more locations.
2. SYSTEM Performance
a. Software application shall use a popular and user-friendly platform, e.g. Microsoft
Windows.
b. The SYSTEM shall support both manual and automatic responses to alarms. Each alarm
shall be capable of initiating a number of different actions.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 18 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. The system shall support definition of access levels with associated rights and tracking
through passwords assigned to each individual Operator from basic monitoring to full
control and programming of the system.
d. The programming shall be menu-driven and shall include on-line "Help" or "Tutorial"
information, as well as on-line data entry examples.
3. Levels
a. Software shall provide different access right levels and passwords:
1) Level 0: no password is required: access to supervision.
2) Level 1: a password allows to modify certain parameters.
3) Level 2: a password allows to enter certain criteria and parameters.
b. To reach a level, the Operator uses a password to be allowed access to the system.
c. More complex user authentication methods (such as multiple-step verification) shall be
applied depending on system criticality level, manufacturer’s recommendation and
Employer’s requirements.
4. Features
a. Software shall provide reporting comprising:
1) Alarm history consisting of alarm lists.
2) Operator history consisting of database changes and log-ins by Operator.
b. A query function shall allow selected data to be sorted on not less than 3 selection
criteria.
c. Software shall allow a backup function.
d. All servers and workstations shall be fitted with the latest virus protecting software.
5. Other Minimum Features
a. Protocols: TCP/IP.
b. Traffic Management and Quality of Service Mechanisms.
c. VLAN/VLAN tagging (802.1q) support.
d. Hardware Redundancy.
e. Security Features.
f. Network Resiliency Features.
g. Power: PoE support (IEEE 802.3bt).

J. Licensing
1. The Contractor shall provide a Project wide license covering all relevant existing devices
and any future extensions of the Project.
2. There shall be no license limitation on the number of Servers and Clients.
3. There shall be no limitation on the number of concurrent users.
4. Customization of the software shall remain the property of the Employer and shall be made
available at no extra cost.
5. The Contractor shall detail the coverage of licensing in terms of: Maintenance, Revisions,
Upgrades, etc.

K. Communication network
1. All communications between the host workstation, secondary workstations and SYSTEM
equipment shall be via digital transmission through the Project Data Communications
Network backbone.
2. Provide Ethernet TCP/IP or the latest open communication protocol.
3. Data transmission:
a. The data transmission rate between the workstations and the servers shall be bi-
directional using TCP/IP VLAN Network.
b. Coordinate IP addressing, Ethernet switch port counts and assignments, long-term
storage requirements and bandwidth utilization with the Employer.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 19 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.4 NETWORK EQUIPMENT

A. General
1. System Architecture shall be based on a "Client-Server" configuration.
2. System software shall be controlled and configured by working parameters stored in tables
and easy to change without programming.

B. Servers
1. Servers Configuration:
a. The servers shall consist of dual, redundant servers. The intent is to prevent a single
system point of failure.
b. The servers shall be identical, with one server acting as the primary and the second server
acting as a hot stand-by server with automatic fail over capabilities.
c. The two servers shall maintain synchronized databases automatically. Upon loss of
communication of the system with the primary host, the secondary server shall
automatically assume the control of the system and become the primary server. Upon
the re-establishment of communication with the server, the two servers shall
automatically re-synchronize without requiring re-booting of the servers.
2. The Contractor shall design servers that are able to cope with the foreseen workload:
a. The Contractor shall indicate the percentage increase of workload that the servers will
be able to cope with.
3. The Contractor shall deliver and configure the required servers.
a. Requirements for servers shall be given (in terms of operating system, memory, CPU,
storage, associated peripheral I/O devices, etc.)
b. The Contractor shall include servers under the Project Virtual Servers Environment.

C. End Users' Clients

1. The Contractor shall provide workstations on which the client will be able to operate.
2. Main characteristics shall be given in terms of Memory, CPU, Screen size, resolution, etc.
3. The Contractor shall deliver and configure required workstations.
4. The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at the workstations and terminal/data
servers:
a. Keyboard and mouse
b. Flat panel LCD video display unit.
5. All PC’s shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be sourced from a
recognized manufacturer. Purchase of the PC’s shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the construction schedule to ensure that they will be state-of-the-
art, based on the latest proven technology.

D. Equipment Mounting: Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated, equipment shall
be designed to mount in a 19-inch (483-mm) housing complying with EIA/ECA-310-E and
Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.

E. Specifications of servers, workstations, printers and associated peripherals shall be confirmed by

the relevant SYSTEM manufacturer/supplier.

F. For minimum requirements of servers and related ancillaries, refer to:

2.5 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS

A. General Cable Requirements: Size and type as recommended in writing by system manufacturer
unless otherwise indicated.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 20 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Comply with the following Specification Sections – as applicable to power, control, data and
video signal transmission cables:
1. Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”
2. Division 27 Section “Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)”.

C. Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) cables: for plenum installation as per adopted Standards for
the Project.
1. Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH/LS0H) cables shall comply with the following standards:
a. Flame retardant: IEC 60332-1-2.
b. Halogen-free according to:
1) IEC 60754-1 for amount of halogen acid gas.
2) IEC 60754-2 for corrosiveness of combustion gases according to (degree of acidity).
c. Low smoke density according to IEC 61034-2.

D. Fire Resistant Cables: For life safety installations interface. Refer to Division 26 Section "Low-
Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables".
1. Use Fire-resistant cables Type FR4.

E. Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems".

2.6 CONDUITS, TRUNKING, ENCLOSURES AND FITTINGS

A. Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated, equipment shall be designed to mount in
a 19-inch (483-mm) housing complying with EIA/ECA-310-E and Division 27 Section
“Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.

B. Comply with the following Division 26 Specification Sections:

1. "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems".
2. "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems".
3. “Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General
1. All equipment shall be firmly secured in place unless requirements of portability dictate
otherwise.
2. Equipment is to be laid out properly in communication rooms in a way to reserve relevant
space for maintenance activities. This space shall also account for any future expansion of
the system.
3. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the applicable standards, requirements,
manufacturers’ guidelines and any authorities having jurisdiction.
4. All boxes, equipment, etc. shall be plumb and square.
5. The Contractor shall take such precautions that are necessary to prevent and guard against
electromagnetic interference. Refer to “Separation/Segregation of Services” paragraph in
Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
6. After the proper layout of all equipment is accomplished, all components are to be labeled,
and marked in accordance with Division 27 Section “Identification for Communications
Systems (TIA)”.
7. During installation, consideration shall be given to operational efficiency as well as the
overall aesthetic factors.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 21 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

8. The Contractor shall supply and install all fittings and accessories, whether or not specified,
required for proper, safe, and reliable operation of the system.
9. The Contractor shall ensure that safe ingress and egress from all work areas are maintained
during movement and installation of equipment/materials.

B. Examination
1. Examine the areas to receive the works and the conditions under which the works would be
performed.
2. Examine all the communications rooms where equipment are to be deployed:
a. Identify equipment location,
b. Identify links on patch panels,
c. Identify and check general power supply and grounding,
d. Identify premises environmental characteristics (kW/m², air conditioning
characteristics, etc.),
e. Carry out heat dissipation calculations,
f. Confirm feasibility for each communications room before starting to deploy.
3. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cable trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Rack Mounted Equipment

1. The Contractor shall install rack mounted equipment according to locations, elevations, and
plan views developed by the Contractor and approved by the Employer.
2. Rack mounted equipment shall be bolted with at least 4 mounting screws for support.
3. Cable guide shall be installed between each 2U rack unit set of equipment to insure proper
patch cable run and adequate air circulation.
4. All distribution hardware shall be securely mounted in a manner that allows access to the
connections for testing and provides sufficient room for the doors or access panels to open
and close without disturbing the cables.
5. Distribution and backbone cables shall enter from rear of optical patch panels.
6. Cables shall be maintained with D-Rings.
7. Each cable shall enter patch panel through adequate bushings and inserts where required by
Manufacturer’s installation manuals/sheets.
8. Bond all metallic raceway, racks, cable runway, enclosure, and other metallic hardware to
the dedicated bus bar.
9. Ensure that bonding breaks through paint to bare metallic surface of all painted metallic
hardware.
10. All spare or unused space shall be obstructed through blank panels.
11. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are accessible at rear of
rack for maintenance and testing, with each item removable from rack without disturbing
other items or connections.

D. Wiring Methods
1. Comply with Division 26 Sections
a. “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems”.
b. “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems”.
c. “Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems”.
2. Comply with Division 27 Sections:
a. “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
b. “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.
c. “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.
3. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 22 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing
bars and distribution spools.
5. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
6. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations
only at outlets and terminals.
7. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and
outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Cables may not be spliced.
8. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760 mm (30 inches) and not more than
150 mm (6 inches) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
9. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
10. Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation.
11. Protect cable ends at all times with acceptable end caps except during actual termination.
12. After installation, and before termination, all wiring and cabling shall be checked and tested
to ensure there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors or shields.
13. A V.O.M. shall be utilized to accomplish these tests and a reading of greater than 20 Mega
ohms shall be required to successfully complete the test.
14. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
Category rating of components and fiber-optic rating of components, and that ensure Class
EA as per EN 50173-1 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.
Comply with Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)."

E. Cleaning
1. Inspect interior and exterior of installed devices. Remove paint-splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

F. Connections
1. Tighten connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
applicable Standards.

G. Weatherproof Equipment
1. For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or where exposed to weather, install
consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.

H. Impedance and Signal Levels

1. Match input and output impedance and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching
networks where required.
2. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel
location.

I. Labeling and Marking

1. Provide a typed schedule of all data ports according to each related room jack designation
for all Telecommunications Rooms in accordance with Division 27 Section “Identification
for Communications Systems (TIA)”.
2. Patch wiring must be traceable: Keep a database of patch cords installation up-to-date
including details of physical and logical connections in coordination with the SCN
Contractor.

J. Firestopping
1. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling(TIA)”.

K. Grounding

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 23 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Comply with Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.
2. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground
loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

L. Boxes and enclosures

1. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are
easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above
ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction
boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or
the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

M. Push Buttons
1. Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be
stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with 6.4 mm (1/4-inch) high text
and symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the controller associated
with the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike,
electric bolt, or other facility release device.

N. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

O. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete pretesting
to determine compliance of system with requirements in the Contract Documents. Correct
deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones
and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for
systematic recording of acceptance test results.
1. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying that installation
is complete and fully operable; include names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and
that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
2. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system
has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days'
notice of test schedule.
3. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with
Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation
in all functional modes.

F. Record test results.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 24 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

G. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until performance
requirements are met.

H. Integrated Tests with Other Contractors

1. Make equipment available for testing and demonstrating various features specified.
2. Typical test segments shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
a. Communication Tests performed for the serial or LAN interface to ensure that proper
communication can be established between the interfacing systems.
b. Point-to-Point Tests performed on the SYSTEM equipment to the interfacing systems
to verify the functionality and correct animation of each I/O point/command including
alarm messages.
3. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest until total SYSTEM meets requirements of the
Specifications and complies with applicable standards. Prepare written records of tests.
4. Schedule testing with at least 14 days advance notice.

I. The SYSTEM will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

J. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.

K. Prepare test and inspection reports.

L. Experimental Period: As described under “WARRANTY” Article. Demonstrate successful

operation to confirm, to the satisfaction of the Engineer /Employer that the system is free of
remarks and is ready for taking-over.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to configure, program, adjust, operate, and maintain
SYSTEM equipment."

B. In order to provide a reliable training, Employer’s maintenance personnel who are involved in
the training program of this system, could be involved in the follow up of system installation as
well. The Contractor shall provide an installation agenda to the Employer and confirm with him
any coordination with assigned trainees.

C. Training Program
1. Scope: Training shall be in sufficient scope to ensure that all trainees who complete the
program will be certified as capable to operate and/or maintain the equipment, systems, and
facilities provided and installed under this Contract, and to ensure a smooth transition
between construction and operations activities.
2. Language: Training shall be conducted in English and Arabic.
3. Training Aids shall include:
a. Approved Operation and Maintenance (O & M) manual(s) prepared by the Contractor
as part of this Contract,
b. Training manuals, including course outline, basic text of instructions modules, and
trainee workbook,
c. Films, slides, video tape(s),
d. Charts, models, hand-outs, catalogues,
e. Samples and other visual,
f. Written aids to complement instruction.
g. In addition, spare parts and other special hardware shall be provided to support “hands-
on” familiarization with the equipment or systems.
4. Training Manuals

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 25 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Training manuals shall be provided for each training course covering both the classroom
and on-the-job phases.
b. The organization of the manuals shall follow the same sequence as the course’s
scheduled presentation of material, providing such additional background and
supplementary information, as a trainee may need to understand the O & M manuals.
c. There shall be as many Training Manual types as Trainees categories.
5. Training shall be performed in accordance with an approved training program. All training
aids shall be available and approved prior to start of training.
6. Course Contents
a. Training course can be broken down into modules either classroom lecture or ‘On-the-
job’ training.
b. In case of lecture, it is the Employer responsibility to provide the classroom for the
duration of the course.
c. No lecture module should exceed 2-hours interval.
d. “On-the-job” training can be scheduled for an entire 8 hour shift.
e. Handouts must support each module; the collation of the Handouts forms the Training
Manual.
f. Laboratory equipment, spare parts, and mock-up models may be used for theoretical
orientation.
g. However, practical “hands-on” familiarization shall be provided on equipment that is
either installed and operable or ready to be installed and capable of being operated.
SYSTEM spares of special hardware items may be used to support “hands-on”
familiarization as long as said spares are returned to inventory in satisfactory condition
in accordance with approved procedures.
h. The Contractor shall provide a training environment of its SYSTEM, which can be
similar to the “test environment”. All future operations shall be reproduced in this
training environment with no consequences on the test or on the operational
environment.
i. Training schedules: the Contractor shall indicate the duration of all sessions, the number
of trainees and how they shall fit into the overall project planning.
j. Training facilities: the Contractor shall provide facilities for the training of the
maintenance staff, trainers and end-users including equipment, software and
documentation.

D. The Contractor shall provide training for SYSTEM operational, maintenance and administration
staff:
1. Operators shall be provided with a thorough training in all aspects of system/sub-system
operation under both normal and abnormal conditions. This training shall include, but not be
limited to:
a. Orientation to provide overview of system/sub-system purpose, configuration, and
operations,
b. Terminology,
c. Operations theory and interface,
d. Equipment appearance, functions, concepts and operations,
e. Operating mode, practices, and procedures under normal and emergency conditions,
f. Safety precautions,
g. On-the-job operating experience covering all system/sub-system operating functions,
activities, and tasks including those associated with degraded operating modes, failure
recognition, and recovery processes,
h. Familiarity with content and use of O & M manuals and related reference publications.
2. Maintenance Training
a. Maintenance training shall cover all on-site routine, preventive, and remedial
maintenance of the system/sub-system.
b. This training shall include, but not be limited to:

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 26 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1) Orientation to provide overview of system/sub-system purpose, configuration, and

operations,
2) Terminology,
3) Operations theory and interfaces,
4) Equipment appearance, layout, functions, concepts and operations,
5) Operating modes, practice, and procedures under normal and emergency
conditions,
6) Safety precautions,
7) Use of tools and test equipment,
8) Use of system utilities, diagnostic software and various software tools associated
with the system maintenance,
9) Preventive maintenance,
10) Troubleshooting, diagnostics, and testing,
11) Backup and restoration of software/configuration,
12) Assembly and disassembly,
13) Repair and parts replacement,
14) Parts ordering practices and storage,
15) Failure and recovery procedures,
16) System/sub-system cabling,
17) Familiarization with and use of O & M manuals and other reference materials.
3. Administrator Training
a. Administrator course shall be provided so the system administration staff will be able
to:
1) Identify and remedy software faults,
2) Upgrade and implement data and software changes,
3) Production of revised or new displays.
b. This training shall include, but not be limited to:
1) Orientation to provide overview of system/sub-system purpose, configuration, and
operations,
2) Terminology,
3) Operations theory and interfaces,
4) Software design and organization,
5) Database structure, generation, and modification,
6) Assembly, compilation, linking, editing, debugging, distributing, testing and
integration of program modules,
7) Interface software design,
8) Configuration management and control of software,
9) Backup and restoration of software,
10) Use of system utilities, diagnostic software and various software tools associated
with the design, development, and maintenance of the System,
11) Familiarization with and use of O & M manuals and other reference materials.

3.4 APPENDIX A : SERVICE PROVIDER’S SCOPE OF WORK

A. Purpose
1. This Appendix defines the general terms of service to be provided by a Service Provider. It
establishes a structured relationship between the Employer and the Service Provider.
2. In addition to this Section, Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Particular Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Appendix.
3. For the purpose of this Specification, a Service Provider shall be defined as a company that
provides organizations with telephone, mobile wireless communications or other services.
a. SERVICE: Broadband Internet.

B. Service Provider’s Responsibilities

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 27 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. The Service Provider shall provide and pay for all materials, equipment, labor, tools,
transportation, temporary construction and all other services and facilities of every nature,
necessary to execute, complete and deliver the SERVICE within the specified time.
2. Licenses or permits necessary for the execution of the work shall be secured from the local
Authorities Having Jurisdiction and paid for by the Service Provider. This would include all
pole/tower rights and other right-of-way needed for wireless or fiber optic services obtained
through Local Utilities.
3. Service Provider’s proposal shall provide a turnkey solution for the complete installation of
the SERVICE in question to the specified drop point. This shall include all necessary
hardware, electronic equipment, software, conduit, cabling and any other equipment or
materials necessary for the proper installation.
4. The Service Provider shall protect all furniture, equipment, personal items, trees and all
landscaping on Project property from damage. Any damage to the building, roads,
equipment, existing cable, or property that may occur while performing work in the facilities
shall be repaired or replaced at the Service Provider's expense. Labor shall include all
restoration of grounds broken up during the installation of this network.
5. The Service Provider shall responsible for providing and installing the proposed SERVICE
up to the demarcation point as well as the termination hardware at the demarcation point.
6. The Service Provider shall familiarize with the Employer’s premises and shall take into
consideration all existing conditions which might affect this work. The location of the
demarcation (tie-in or drop) point of Entrance Facilities shall be defined by the Employer.
Close coordination with the different Service Providers shall be required to design the
entrance cable pathway.
7. The Service Provider shall perform all work in a professional manner.
8. The Service Provider and his representatives shall follow all applicable regulations of the
Employer’s Project Premises while on site property.
9. All Service Provider personnel shall be easily identified by the use of identification badges
and uniforms or shirts with the Service Provider’s logo clearly visible.
10. The Service Provider shall conduct tests and inspections in the presence of the Employer
after installation has been completed and successfully meets the requirements.
11. The Service Provider shall promptly notify the Employer of completion of this proposed
project.
12. The Service Provider shall promptly correct all defects for which the Service Provider is
responsible.
13. Upon completion of the work each day, the Service Provider shall remove all tools,
equipment, rubbish and debris from the premises and shall leave the premises clean and neat.
14. The Service Providers may use subcontractors to perform work. However, all responsibilities
rest with the Service Provider.
15. The Service Provider shall provide the Employer with complete detailed test results.

C. Employer’s Responsibilities
1. The Employer shall allocate the SERVICE rooms within the Project premises in coordination
with and to the approval of the Service Provider, at the early stages of the Design.
2. The Employer shall, during the progress of the installation, allow the Service Provider and
its employee’s access to the premises and facilities at all reasonable hours or at such hours
as the Employer and the Service Provider agree upon.
3. The Employer shall provide access to existing conduit or the placement of new conduit if
necessary to all work locations, floors, buildings, etc., to support the system installation and
provide Service Provider access to these adjacent areas where and when required.
4. The Employer shall provide general illumination and air conditioning services when required
in rooms where work is to be performed by the Service Provider.
5. The Employer shall promptly make inspections when notified by the Service Provider that
the equipment or any part thereof, is ready for acceptance.
6. The Employer shall provide the necessary reservation and containment for the SERVICE
infrastructure, for example, Utility tunnel and Duct-banks.
7. In addition to the allocation of SERVICE tower plots on external site plan in coordination
with the Service Provider) and fiber connectivity from Backbone Network to the SERVICE
towers, the Employer shall provide General Building Services for the SERVICE rooms
through the Main Contractor – as such:

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 28 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Identification of the A/C Outdoor Units Location.

b. Fire rated Doors.
c. Preparation including electrical socket outlets (Core & Shell).
d. Identification of the Grounding point in the SERVICE rooms.
e. Power connection from the Main Distribution Board to the SERVICE rooms.
f. Electrical disconnect switches inside the SERVICE rooms.
g. Identification of the Fiber path interconnecting multiple SERVICE rooms.

END OF SECTION 270501

COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS 270501 - Page 29 of 29

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 270555 – IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”
except where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Identification for
Communications Systems (TIA)” shall have precedence:
1. Division 27 Section 271005 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the identification of the various components of the
telecommunications infrastructure and pathway system.

B. Works covered by this Section shall consist of furnishing labor, equipment, materials and
software necessary for the labeling of the telecommunications infrastructure as described on the
Drawings and/or required by these Specifications.

C. Related Sections:
1. Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping.
2. Section 099123 - Interior Painting.
3. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
7. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
8. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. In addition to the above, standards relevant to identification include:

1. ANSI/TIA 606-C, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
Infrastructure.
2. ANSI/UL 969, Marking and Labeling Systems.
3. ANSI/TIA-5048, Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM) Systems- Requirements,
Data Exchange and Applications.
4. ISO/IEC 14763-2, Information Technology—Implementation and operation of customer
premise cabling, Part 2: planning and installation.
5. ISO/IEC 18598, Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM) Systems—Requirements,
Data Exchange and Applications.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)” .

B. Definitions

IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA) 270555 - Page 1 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Administration: The method for labeling, identification, documentation and usage needed to
implement moves, additions and changes of the telecommunications infrastructure.
2. Automated Infrastructure Management system (AIM): integrated software and hardware
which automatically records the nature of, and identifies changes to, connections between
the cabling infrastructure and of the interconnected transmission and terminal equipment.
3. Discoverable equipment: equipment with a network address.
4. Identifier: An item of information that links a specific element of the telecommunications
infrastructure with its corresponding record.
5. Label: Means of marking a specific component of the information technology infrastructure
with its identifier and (optionally) other information and intended to be fixed to, or be part
of, the component.
6. MAC: Move, Add, Change.
7. Record: A collection of detailed information related to a specific element of the
telecommunications infrastructure.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.8 MISCELLANEOUS QUALITY MANAGEMENT TOPICS

A. For the following quality management topics, refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses
for Structured Cabling (TIA)”:
1. PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION
2. CONFIDENTIALITY
3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
5. WARRANTY
6. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT
7. SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Description: Computer-based cable management system, with integrated database and graphic
capabilities.

B. Documentation: Document physical characteristics by recording the network and connections

between equipment and cable.

C. Presentation of Data: Information shall be presented in database view, schematic plans and
technical drawings.
1. Microsoft Visio Professional or AutoCAD drawing software shall be used as drawing and
schematic plans software.

IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA) 270555 - Page 2 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. System shall interface with the following testing and recording devices:
1. Direct upload tests from circuit testing instrument into the personal computer.
2. Direct download circuit labeling into labeling printer.

2.3 LABELING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All components of the telecommunications infrastructure and pathway system shall be labeled
according to the applicable Standard and the adopted ‘System Administration Scheme’ described
herein and in coordination with the Employer and Engineer, including but not limited to:
1. Copper and fiber optic cables and patch cords.
2. Workstation outlets faceplates and Individual outlet connectors.
3. Termination panels, blocks, trays.
4. Telecommunications Room entry and exit pathways.
5. Racks, cabinets, and equipment.
6. Fiber optic on either side of the splice closure.
7. Grounding and bonding system for telecommunications.
8. OSP manholes / pull boxes covers.
9. Telecommunications cable tray and conduit pathways.

B. Labels shall provide a direct link to the identifier within the record within the administration
system.

C. Labels shall be machine-manufactured by a labeling machine. Handwritten labels will not be

accepted for final labeling.

D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to acquire, understand, and utilize the Employer’s
labeling scheme for all components of the voice/data communications system.

E. Labels shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of
ANSI/UL969. “Marking and Labeling Systems”.
1. The size, color, and contrast of all labels should be selected to ensure that the identifiers are
easily read.
2. Labels should be visible during the installation of and normal maintenance of the
infrastructure.
3. Labels shall be durably affixed.

F. Labels should be resistant to the environmental conditions at the point of installation (such as
moisture, heat, or ultraviolet light), and should have a design life equal to or greater than that of
the labeled component.

G. Labels shall be accessible and, where necessary, able to be modified.

H. Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed with
alphanumeric cable designations.

I. Flat-surface labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth labels, machine printed with alphanumeric
designations.

J. Where insert type labels are used, provide clear plastic cover over label.

K. Outside plant labels shall be engraved, totally waterproof even when submerged. Provide plastic
warning tape for underground utilities as described in Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods”.

IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA) 270555 - Page 3 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Check actual site conditions prior to start of any work. Ensure all preceding trade work associated
with the telecommunications system is accurate and complete before proceeding with installation
or use of products specified in this Section.

3.2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SCHEME

A. Comply with ANSI/TIA-606 for system administration scheme.

B. ANSI/TIA-606 Administration Scheme

1. The elements of the subject telecommunications infrastructure shall each have an identifier
that:
a. Is unique and informative within the administration system.
b. Defines explicitly the element to which it refers (e. g. closure, cable, outlet, etc).
2. Identify cabling infrastructure elements, including:
a. Distributors
b. Racks
c. Rack-mounted equipment
d. Bonding conductors and pathways
e. Backbone cabling subsystem
f. Horizontal cabling subsystem
g. Patch Cords/jumpers
h. Access points
i. Earth busbars
j. Closures
k. Cables and cable pathways (including fire stops)
l. Premises
m. Spaces
n. Termination points including joints
o. Work areas.
3. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards,
connections, covers, and labels.
4. For installations outside buildings, label cables, jointing chambers and cabinets with a unique
identifier to enable tracing in both directions.
5. Labeling of optical fiber installations should be such that the polarization of duplex optical
fiber connections is known and consistent throughout the installation.
6. Administration Class: 4.
a. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with ANSI/TIA-606 for
the adopted Class of administration, including patch cords and similar wiring
accessories and all optional identification requirements of this Standard.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Using the specified cable management system software, develop a complete and accurate set of
Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use
unique alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals
to which it connects. At Contract completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect
as-built conditions.

IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA) 270555 - Page 4 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Painting and Interior Finishing" for painting
backboards. For fire-resistant or fire retardant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid
frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for
Project.

D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point
labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, entrance
pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, patch cords, work
areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding busbars and pathways, and equipment
grounding conductors. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected
by Employer.

E. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 100 mm (4 inches) of each termination and tap, where it is accessible
in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding
4.5 m (15 feet).
3. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each
cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted
device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
4. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each
connector patch cord, and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.
Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use
a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
5. Patch cords shall be labeled on each end specifying the source and destination of the cord.
6. Long cable runs in underground ducts shall be labeled at 50 meters intervals.

F. Labels shall be pre-printed or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that
contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in ANSI/TIA-606.
1. Labels that snap-around or slip-around the cable/raceway shall be flexible vinyl or polyester
labels that flex as the cable/raceway is bent.
2. Label each component with a machine-generated label where it is accessible for
administration.
3. Coordinate specific ceiling tile (false ceiling panel) or location identification for overhead
Wireless Access Point (WAP) connectivity. Ceiling tile below WAP outlet shall be “tagged”
with a discrete identification method to aid in future locating by Employer. Review with
Employer and Engineer for more information.

3.4 RE-INSTALLATION

A. No additional burden to the Employer regarding costs, network down-time and/or end user
interruption shall result from the re-installation of specified components. Scheduling for re-
installation work shall be coordinated, in writing, with the Employer prior to beginning the work.

3.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Contractor shall provide documentation of all telecommunications system components under this
Section utilized throughout the Project site for review and reference by the Employer and
Engineer. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Contractor shall submit all As-Built drawings required prior to acceptance by the Employer.

IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA) 270555 - Page 5 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. Contractor to submit for PC-based, cabling administration system - as detailed in Division 27

Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”:
1. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation.
2. Software Service Agreement.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

END OF SECTION 270555

IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (TIA) 270555 - Page 6 of 6

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 271005 - COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in this Specification “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling
(TIA)” shall be complimentary to and shall apply to the following Specification Sections except
where a particular Specification Section calls for otherwise. In this case, the individual
Specification Section shall have precedence:
1. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
2. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
3. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general communications design requirements, administration topics, and

installation for Information and Communications Technologies (ICT) cabling infrastructure.

B. Related Sections:
1. Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping.
2. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 260539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems.
7. Section 260543 - Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.
8. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
9. Section 262726 – Wiring Devices.
10. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
11. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
12. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by
a specific edition date.

B. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in
the text by basic designation only.

C. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s

instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean reference to the latest printed
edition of each.

D. Conflicts
1. Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which material or
construction methods called for is less than minimum requirement of the reference standards,
immediately inform the Engineer in writing. Consequent to Engineer's approval, supply the
materials and perform the work as though called for to minimum code standards.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 1 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. Codes and Standards: All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the
applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:
1. ANSI/TIA-568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard.
a. ANSI/TIA-568.0-D + Addendum 1, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises.
b. ANSI/TIA-568.1-D, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
c. ANSI/TIA-568.2-D, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and
Components Standards.
d. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.
e. ANSI/TIA-568.4-D, Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components Standard.
2. ANSI/TIA-569-E, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
3. ANSI/TIA-598-D + Addendum 1&2 , Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
4. ANSI/TIA-606-C, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
Infrastructure.
5. ANSI/TIA-607-D, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for
Customer Premises
6. ANSI/TIA-758-B, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure
Standard.
7. ANSI/TIA-862-B: Structured Cabling Infrastructure Standard for Intelligent Building
Systems
8. ANSI/TIA-1152-A, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for
Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling.
9. Application-Based: Comply with the most current editions of the following TIA Standards:
a. Data Centers:
1) TIA-942-A, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers.
b. Wireless Systems:
1) TIA TSB-162-A, Telecommunications Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access
Points.
c. Premises - Educational:
1) TIA-4966-2014 + Addendum 1, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard For
Educational Facilities.
d. Premises - Healthcare:
1) ANSI/TIA – 1179-A, Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure
Standard.
e. Premises - Industrial:
1) ANSI/TIA-1005-A, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial
Premises
10. BICSI Manuals: Comply with the most current editions of the following BICSI manuals:
a. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) – Volumes 1 & 2.
b. Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM).
c. Outside Plant Design Reference Manual.
11. BICSI Standards - Application Based: Comply with the most current editions of the
following BICSI Standards:
a. Data Center:
1) ANSI/BICSI 002-2019, Data Center Design and Implementation Best Practices
2) BICSI 009-2019, Data Center Operations and Maintenance Best Practices
b. Building Systems:
1) ANSI/BICSI 005-2016, Electronic Safety and Security (ESS) System Design and
Implementation Best Practices

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 2 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2) ANSI/BICSI 007-2017, Information Communication Technology Design and

Implementation Practices for Intelligent Buildings and Premises
c. Installation:
1) ANSI/BICSI N1-2019, Installation Practices for Telecommunications and ICT
Cabling and Related Cabling Infrastructure
2) ANSI/BICSI N2-17, Practices for the Installation of Telecommunications and ICT
Cabling Intended to Support Remote Power Applications
3) ANSI/NECA/BICSI 607-2011, Standard for Telecommunications Bonding and
Grounding Planning and Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings
d. OSP:
1) BICSI G1-17, ICT Outside Plant Construction and Installation: General Practices.
12. Local regulations and standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over
the Standards.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Definitions
1. Distributor: A collection of components used to connect cables (for example, patch panels,
patch cords).
2. Floor Distributor (FD): A distributor used to connect building backbone cabling subsystem,
other cabling subsystems and active equipment (International expression for horizontal
cross-connect (HC).)
3. Pathway: A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of
telecommunications cable.
4. Permanent Link (PL): the transmission path of the installed cabling including the horizontal
cable (Copper or optical fiber) and the connecting hardware (RJ45 or optical fiber connectors
in both the patch panel and the outlet) and an optional intermediate Consolidation point (CP).
5. Channel: the transmission path between active equipment connected together. A typical
channel consists of the permanent link of the subsystem together with the work area and
equipment patch cords.
6. “FTTO” switch known also as “Fiber To The Office” switch: in a Centralized Premises
Cabling System, a “Micro Switch” is used at the Work Area or Office, as the active element
that provides copper access for the terminal devices (computers, VOIP telephone sets, etc.)
on a flexible basis.

B. Abbreviations
1. BD: Building Distributor also referred to as IC
2. BEF: Building Entrance Facility
3. COTS: Commercial-Off-The-Shelf
4. EMI: Electromagnetic Interference
5. ENI: External Network Interface
6. ER: Equipment Room
7. FD: Floor Distributor also referred to as HC
8. HC: Horizontal Cross-Connect
9. IC: Intermediate Cross-Connect
10. ICT: Information and Communications Technology
11. ID: Intermediate Distributor
12. LDP: Local Distribution Point
13. IDC: Insulation Displacement Connector
14. LAN: Local Area Network
15. MC: Main Cross-Connect
16. MD: Main Distributor
17. OTDR: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
18. RFI: Radio Frequency Interference
19. TEB: Telecommunication Earth Bar.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 3 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

20. TR: Telecommunications Room

21. UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair
22. WA: Work Area
23. WAP: Wireless Access Point
24. ZD: Zone Distributor

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The scope shall include the following:

1. Provide structured cabling network inside pump station, this shall include rack, FO patch
panels, Optical Network Terminal (ONT) space, copper Cat6a patch panels, 24 to 48-port
access switch.
2. All the above shall be provided with all needed software, hardware and licenses.

B. This section establishes a communications infrastructure to be used as signal pathways for voice,
video and high-speed data transmission. Contractor shall:
1. Comply with all project Specifications documents and the following requirements for a
complete project installation.
2. Provide a structured cabling system as described hereafter that includes, but is not limited to,
supplying, installing, labeling and testing of: campus backbone, building backbone and
horizontal cabling subsystems, cable connectors, communications outlets and terminations,
and equipment racks/cabinets for networking hardware and patch panels.
3. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for the installation described
herein. All requirements and specifications will be enforced.
4. Cable pathways and runs to individual outlets are not shown in their entirety, but shall be
provided as if shown in their entirety.
5. Verify that conduit routing does not cause cabling to exceed specified length.
6. Follow industry standard installation procedures for communications cable to assure that the
mechanical and electrical transmission characteristics of this cable plant and equipment are
maintained.

C. Works of this section cover a complete installation of both permanent and channel links for a
data, voice and video communications network utilizing copper and fiber transmission media.
The Contractor shall:
1. Provide and install Innerduct, rated appropriately for the fiber optic backbone installation
environment – whether outdoor or indoor.
2. Provide, install, terminate, test, label and document all campus backbone, building backbone
and horizontal cables.
3. Provide and place all termination devices such as modular patch panels, termination blocks,
telecommunication outlets (jacks and plates), phone jacks, fiber optic distribution panels,
bulkheads, connectors, and fiber optic fan out kits.
4. Provide in quantities specified or deemed appropriate interconnect components such as
copper patch cords, fiber optic patch cables and data station cables.
5. Verify lengths and counts of twisted pair and optical fiber patch cords with the Engineer
and/or Employer prior to purchase.
6. Provide and place horizontal and vertical cable support devices such as rack and wall-
mounted horizontal and vertical cable management, cable runway, telecommunications cable
runway, and all required mounting hardware, unless otherwise noted.
7. Provide and install all equipment mounting racks, cabinets and/or brackets.
8. Provide and install approved firestopping systems in all communication pass-throughs,
conduits and cable trays, and ceiling, wall and floor penetrations in coordination with other
trades.
9. Provide all appropriate consumable items, fittings and accessories, whether or not specified,
as required for a complete installation and a proper, safe and reliable operation of the system.
10. Provide grounding and bonding in telecommunications rooms.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 4 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

11. Handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts (along with current unit prices) for all
major components in the system for [two (2)] years fault-free operation.
12. Handover manufacturer’s recommended test equipment and tools (along with current unit
prices) required for system maintenance.
13. Provide complete documentation and demonstration of works.
14. Complete all punch list deficiencies within 10 working days .
15. Provide indexed and organized complete Test Results of all copper and fiber optic cables and
their components.
16. Provide details on how building services relevant to the installation such as power supply
distribution and earthing systems have been taken into account.
17. Provide submittals as outlined in Article “SUBMITTALS” below.
18. Conduct a final document handover meeting with Employer and Engineer to review, discuss
and educate the Employer on the test results and As-Built Drawings.
19. Provide a Manufacturer’s Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for
this wiring system.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and miscellaneous
items that will be installed during the course of the installation process. Such items may not be
indicated in the documents. Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and his suppliers when
considering:
1. Provision and installation of phone systems, computer hardware, racks/cabinets and related
networking software and equipment.
2. Provision and installation of multi-port routers and UPS in communications rooms.
3. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building
earth electrode system.
4. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility outlets.
5. Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
6. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental control sensors.
7. Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit sleeves, and
penetrations in walls and floors.

B. Accordingly, Contractor shall:

1. Meet jointly with representatives of above systems, contractors, Engineer and Employer to
exchange information and agree on details of project implementation, equipment
arrangements and interface, etc.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment in technical rooms to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and ensure necessary interface with other systems.

1.7 CONFIDENTIALITY

A. The Contractor shall respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of the Employer, his
employees, processes, products, and intellectual property to the extent necessary, consistent with
the legal responsibilities of the Employer policies.

B. Contractor shall sign a non-disclosure agreement and abide by the requirements to keep
confidential all information concerning bid documents and this Project.

1.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The objective of this Project is to provide a complete communications structured cabling

infrastructure system installation including, but not limited to: fiber optic backbone, horizontal
cabling with associated terminations, mounting equipment, cable pathway and management
systems, testing and other items/materials, as specified in drawings, these specifications, and
Contract Documents.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 5 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. The Structured Cabling Solution shall be designed and installed to provide the
telecommunications infrastructure (patch panels, frames, patch cords, cables, faceplates and
outlets) necessary to build a uniform premises distribution system, which will function for a
multimedia communications solution as described here below.

C. The Structured Cabling Solution shall use Category 6A components and optical fiber backbone
as described in Division 27, Sections “Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA)” and
“Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)” and shall be capable of supporting current and
future services that require 500MHz or more signaling as specified by ANSI/TIA-568,
performance limits for channel, permanent link and twisted-pair cable for Category 6A.
These include but are not limited to:
1. IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)
2. Building Security and Access
3. Analogue telephone

D. The Structured Cabling Solution shall be designed and installed to enable flexible point to point
patching of the telecommunications services to allow for simple Moves, Adds & Changes,
(MAC’s) without frequent rewiring of locations.

E. The communications channel shall be capable of supporting the provision of power to the Data
Terminal Equipment as specified in ( IEEE 802.3bt “Power over Ethernet” standard.

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall not perform any part of the work requiring submittal and review of shop
drawings, product data, or samples until Employer has approved the respective submittal. Such
work shall be in accordance with approved submittals:
1. Product data: For each type of product.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including:
a. Cross-connects,
b. Patch panels,
c. Patch cords.
4. Cross-connects and patch panels: Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and
physical relationship between the installed components.
5. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
a. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and
format selected by Employer.
b. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the
cabling and asset identification system of the software (Automated Infrastructure
Management System).

B. Submittals shall comply with Project Division 01 requirements including but not limited to
Sections “Submittal Procedures”, “Closeout Procedures” and “Record (As-Built) Documents”.

C. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the certified test data sheet, available from the delivering
distribution warehouse for either a full run or cut piece from the master reel of the fiber optic
cable to be installed
1. The certified test data sheet shall include the master reel number, cable description, a passing
test result with details, test equipment description, date certified, and a certificate of
compliance stamp, and shall be included in the Project Record Documents as a component
of the final deliverables submittal package.

D. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation from the certifying manufacturer
showing that the Project is registered and qualified for the System Assurance Warranty. All
subsequent works shall be in accordance with approved submittals.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 6 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. The Contractor shall deliver his Warranty towards System Installation and Workmanship.

F. The Contractor shall deliver Manufacturer’s signed Extended Product Warranty of installed
cabling system to include all components that comprise the complete cabling system. Delivery
to be effected within two weeks of the time of final Acceptance. Failure of any component to
pass system component tests shall be promptly corrected, repaired or replaced to meet Standards
compliance. Contractor shall coordinate with the Manufacturer for warranty paperwork and
procedures prior to the start of the work.

G. The Contractor’s BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) shall

review, approve and stamp all documents prior to submitting. He shall also warrant in writing
that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein upon completion of all work.

H. Product Certificates shall be signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal

equipment, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

I. Contractor shall submit the required Field Test Reports in the format and media specified, upon
completion of testing the installed system.

J. Cable Testing Plan:

1. The Contractor shall provide a complete and detailed test plan for approval of the cabling
system specified herein, including a complete list of test equipment for copper and fiber optic
components and accessories prior to beginning cable testing. The following minimal items
shall be submitted for review:
a. All testing methods that clearly describe procedures and methods.
b. Product data for test equipment
c. Certifications and qualifications of all persons conducting the testing.
d. Calibration certificates indicating that equipment calibration meets the appropriate
performance Level of ANSI/TIA-1152 by a qualified testing agency and that equipment
has been calibrated at least once in the year prior to the testing date.
e. Examples of test reports, including all graphs, tables, and charts necessary for display of
testing results.
2. The works shall include validation, and testing. Employer will require that the
telecommunications cabling system installed by the Contractor be fully certified to meet all
necessary requirements to be compliant with referenced IEEE and TIA specifications and
Manufacturer’s warranty.
3. The Contractor shall determine the source/cause of test failure readings and correct
malfunctioning component and/or workmanship within each channel or permanent link and
retest to demonstrate compliance until corrected failure produces a passing result.

K. Cable Testing Reports: The Contractor shall submit cable test reports of performed tests as
follows:
1. The tests shall clearly demonstrate that the media and its components fully comply with the
requirements specified herein.
2. Three sets of electronic and hardcopy versions of test reports shall be submitted together
and clearly identified with cable identification.
3. Cable inventory data shall be submitted for all fiber optic and copper cabling and termination
equipment. Submit data electronically on approved storage media, listing products
furnished, including:
a. Manufacturer's name.
b. Manufacturer's part numbers.
c. Cable numbers.
d. Location and riser assignments.
e. Product Data.

L. Samples

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 7 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. For workstation outlet connectors, jack assemblies, housings and faceplates for color
selection and evaluation of technical specifications and requirements. , the Contractor shall
confirm with Engineer and Employer for color and finish before purchasing materials
2. Faceplates shall match the faceplates of electrical wiring devices in terms of brand, color,
and material type. Coordinate with Division 26 Section “Wiring Devices”.

M. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Submit catalogue cut-sheets that include manufacturer, trade name, and complete model
number for each product specified. Model number shall be marked with an arrow or
underlined to indicate exact selection.
2. Identify applicable specification section reference for each product performance for each
component specified for approval prior to purchase and installation.
3. Submit point-by-point compliance statement to the specification, with necessary supporting
documents.

N. Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawings submittals to cover as minimum plan views and elevations of all work to be
installed, diagrams showing room layouts, rack layouts (including elevations), riser layouts,
etc.
2. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Employer / Engineer. The
Engineer’s approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called
the Engineer’s attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him
from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules.

O. Qualifications
1. The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with the requirements
described in Article “QUALITY ASSURANCE”, included with, and at the time of, bid
submittal.

P. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For control consoles, equipment cabinets and racks,
accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.

Q. Closeout Submittals: (Record Documents):

1. The Contractor shall submit Record Documents for products and systems including but not
limited to:
a. Schematic network diagrams.
b. Parts lists.
c. Manufacturers' information on all system components.
d. Recommended list of spare parts and components to be stocked at Project site.
e. Test Reports.
f. Training Manuals
g. Warranties.
h. Software Service Agreements.
i. Record (As-Built) Drawings.
2. Record (As-Built) drawings shall include the components and cable numbers labeled in
accordance with Division 27, Section “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 8 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the Project identified in, but not
limited to, addendum, change notices, site instructions or deviations resulting from site
conditions. Contractor shall:
a. Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of networking components, showing:
1) All communications data/voice/video outlet locations complete with outlet/cable
labeling.
2) Cable routing paths of communications cables to identified infrastructure pathways.
3) All rack and cabinet locations and labeling thereof.
4) One-line diagram of equipment/device interconnecting data/voice/video cabling of
the data, voice and video systems.
5) Standard or typical installation details of installations unique to Employer’s
requirements.
6) Graphical symbols and component identification on detail drawings should use
commonly understood, unique and unambiguous symbols (an example of such a
system is IEC 60617) - to the approval of the Engineer.

R. Operations and Maintenance Manuals to include:

1. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control of the equipment.
2. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
4. Installation and maintenance instructions.
5. Safety precautions.
6. Diagrams and illustrations.
7. Testing methods.
8. Performance data.
9. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers, list of special tools and instruments
indicating sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.
10. List of qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including
addresses and certified qualifications.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements
1. Contractor shall supply all telecommunication cabling permits required by appropriate local
governing agency.
2. Contractor shall be licensed as required by local governing agency for telecommunications
cabling systems.

B. Key Personnel
1. Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the
application, installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and
equipment.
2. More than one key person may be required for this work, depending on the key roles to be
filled such as:
a. Layout Supervisor: for supervision of preparation of Shop Drawings.
b. Installation Supervision: for supervision of installation. He shall be present at all times
when work of this Section is performed at Project site.
c. Field Inspector: for performing the on-site inspection.
3. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful
telecommunications systems within the past 3 years. They shall have factory or factory
approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified
to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and
a maximum of five successful telecommunications system installations for each of the key
personnel.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 9 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations
provided that they are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the
telecommunications system proposed for this Project. Include specific experience in
installing and testing telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at
least two (2) project installations successfully completed using optical fiber and copper
telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system
installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful
full-time service for at least two years prior to commencing the corresponding work for the
Project.
5. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation
date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact information
including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced
project description including system size and construction complexity.

C. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision
of Installer, Level 2.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Installer,
Level 2, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project
site.
3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site inspection.

D. Other Installer Qualifications: Submit written proof that the following experience requirements
are being met:
1. The Contractor shall be manufacturer’s Certified Installer, able to provide the “Extended
Product Warranty” on the Cabling System covering products, performance and applications
assurance. Contractor shall adhere to the industry standard engineering, installation and
testing procedures and shall utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution
channels in implementing this Project.
2. All members of the installation team shall be certified by the Manufacturer as having
completed the necessary training to complete their part of the installation and are capable of
performing an installation that falls under Manufacturer’s guidelines necessary to obtain the
Manufacturer’s System Assurance Warranty. Resumes of the entire team shall be provided
along with documentation of completed training courses.
3. All installation team members must demonstrate knowledge and compliance with all relevant
BICSI, TIA, UL, and NEC methods, standards and codes.
4. Contracting firm shall have installed similar-sized systems in at least ten (10) other projects
in the last five years prior to commencing the corresponding work for the Project and be
regularly engaged in the business of installation of the types of systems specified in this
Specification. Certification shall include, but shall not be limited to, items such as name and
location of project contacts and numbers, total built-up area, total number of cables/drops,
types of media, etc.

E. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: certified by a qualified independent testing agency to
supervise on-site testing.

F. Certifications
1. Contractor shall submit an up-to-date and valid certification verifying qualifications of the
Contractor and installer proposed key personnel to perform the work specified herein at time
of bid submission.
2. Contractor shall submit evidence of compliance with these requirements prior to beginning
work on the Project.

G. Administrative Requirements and Coordination: The Contractor shall:

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 10 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Designate a Project Manager who will be recognized as the single point of contact. The
Project manager shall oversee all work performed to ensure compliance with specifications
as outlined in bid documents to ensure a quality and on time installation within project
schedule. He will attend project meetings with the Engineer, the Employer and other
Contractors.
2. Coordinate work of this section with Employer’s telephone system specifications, LAN,
workstations, equipment suppliers, and installers.
3. Coordinate installation work with other disciplines (examples include ceiling grid, HVAC,
electrical, etc.) to resolve procedures and installation for cable trays and cable bundle
pathways. The goal of this coordination will be to establish priority pathways for critical
data/voice/video network cable infrastructure, materials, associated hardware, as well as
mitigate delays to the project and to allow service access for communications and HVAC
components.
4. Exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation
interfaces. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants,
Employer and Engineer.
5. Adjust arrangement and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross-connect
blocks in equipment rooms and racks to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space
requirements of any Service Provider equipment, telephone system, and LAN equipment.
Tasks shall be coordinated with Employer, and other trades’ installation Representatives.
Specifically, coordinate with Telecom Service Provider(s) <Indicate Service Providers> to
fully implement Telecom connectivity.
6. Follow furniture manufacturers’ written instructions for installing cable and devices in floor
boxes [ and power poles. Wiring locations noted in plans along walls for modular furniture
are approximate and will have to be determined by Contractor at time of installation. Field
condition adjustments for installation may have to be made and coordination efforts with the
electrical installations for pathway must take place early on in the Project to comply with
maximum requirements of pathway fill factors taking into consideration the adopted
expansion capability of the system:
a. 40% conduit fill factor and
b. 25% containment (cable tray, trunking, duct,..) fill factor.
7. When specified or requested by Employer, furnish tools, testing instruments and extra
materials that match specified products and that are factory packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

H. Pre-Installation Meetings - Contractor shall:

1. Attend and/or arrange a scheduled pre-installation conference prior to beginning any work
of this Section.
a. Agenda: Ask and clarify questions in writing related to works to be performed,
scheduling, coordination, etc. with Engineer and/or Employer.
b. Attendance: Contractor’s designated Project Manager shall attend meetings arranged by
the Engineer, Employer or other parties affected by work of this Section.

I. Product Standards
1. Source Limitations: Obtain system components from one manufacturer who shall assume
responsibility for system components and for their compatibility.
2. Equipment and materials shall be standard Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) products of
a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of telecommunications cabling
products and shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least
one years prior to commencing the corresponding work for the Project.
3. Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment,
modules, assemblies, parts, and components.
4. All material and equipment shall be readily available through manufacturers and/or
distributors.
5. All equipment shall be standard catalogued items of the manufacturer and shall be supplied
complete with any optional items required for proper installation.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 11 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

6. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance and backward
compatibility.
7. Backward Compatibility: The provided solution shall be backward compatible with lower
category ratings such that if higher category components are used with lower class and/or
category components, the basic link and channel measures shall meet or exceed the lower
channel’s specified parameters.
8. Component Compliance: The provided solution’s components shall each meet the minimum
transmission specifications listed herein such that each individual component will meet or
exceed the specifications for permanent link and channel, regardless of the fact that tests for
link and channel ultimately meet required specifications.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Division 01 Section “Product Requirements”.

B. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cables to determine the continuity of the strands end to end. Use optical
loss test set.
2. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR)
to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; including the loss
value of each.
3. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.
4. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

1.12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. For Project environmental conditions, refer to Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials
and Methods”.

B. Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under the ambient environmental temperature,
humidity, and vibration conditions encountered at the installed location. For devices located in
harsh environments such as interior uncontrolled or exterior environments, the Contractor shall
provide the necessary housings or enclosures to ensure proper equipment operation and
performance.

C. Continuous operating ranges of temperature and humidity within Communications Rooms shall
be maintained as specified in TIA-569. Refer to Division 27, Section “Communications
Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.

D. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, Contractor shall
inspect exposed finish. Contractor shall remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris. If applicable,
the Contractor shall repair damaged finishes, including scratches and abrasions.

E. Contractor shall provide daily a clean work environment, free from trash/rubbish accumulated
during and after cabling installation.

F. Contractor shall keep all liquids (drinks, sodas, etc.) off finished floors, carpets, and tiles. If any
liquid or other detriment (cuts, soils, stains, etc.) damages the above finishes, Contractor shall
provide professional services to clean or repair scratched/soiled finishes, at Contractor’s expense.

G. Expansion Capability:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare capacity at all levels of the system including ports
in patch panels, cross connects, and terminal strips, and space in cable pathways, ducts and
backboard layouts to accommodate 25% future increase in distribution and active
workstations.

H. Power Supply

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 12 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Power supply shall be supplied or derived from the voltage system described below, as shown
on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
2. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution system (AC voltage / No. of Phases
/ Frequency / Earthing system) shall be as per local country standard. For details, refer to
Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall provide:

1. A minimum of two (2) years Warranty on installation and workmanship plus
2. An “Extended Product Warranty” and “System Assurance Warranty” for this wiring system
signed by both Contractor and Manufacturer and shall commit to make available local
support for the product and system during the Warranty period.

B. The “Extended Product Warranty” shall apply to all passive structured cabling system
components and shall cover the replacement or repair of defective products and labor for the
replacement or repair of such defective products for a minimum of twenty (20) years.

C. The “System Assurance Warranty” provides a complete system and product warranty that will be
transferred to the end-user, ensuring the structured cabling system will be free of defects in
materials and workmanship, will meet or exceed applicable performance requirements defined in
the most current version of the Information Technology Generic Cabling Standards selected for
this Project end-to-end channel performance, and support all current and future network
applications for a minimum of twenty (20) years.

D. System Certification: Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection,
the Employer shall be provided with a “numbered certificate”, from the manufacturer, registering
the installation.

E. Warranty work on the Certified System shall be authorized by the Manufacturer and shall be
performed by a factory certified installer of system components.

F. Warranty periods shall commence on date of Taking Over of the.

1.14 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

A. Support Availability: The Contractor shall commit to make available local support for the
products and system during the Warranty, Defects Liability and Extended Product Warranty
periods.

B. The manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall maintain a service center capable of

providing training, spare parts and emergency maintenance and repairs for overall system at
Project site with four (4) hours' maximum response time.

C. Software Service Agreement

1. Technical Support: Provide software support for two years following the issuance of the
Defects Liability Certificate.
2. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and
program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Project
Completion. Upgrading software shall include Operating System. Upgrade shall include new
or revised licenses for use of software.
a. Provide 30 days' notice to Employer to allow scheduling and access to system and to
allow Employer to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 13 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.15 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major components
in the system for two years fault free operation.

B. However, a minimum of amount of spare parts shall be included in the deliverables irrespective
of Manufacturer’s recommendation – as detailed in the respective Specification Section listed
under Article “Related Documents”, paragraph “General” of this Specification Section for
particular product requirements.

C. The manufacturer shall guarantee the flow and availability of the spare parts without a major
design change for at least ten years’ period from date of System Acceptance by Employer.

D. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for equipment supplied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

B. Refer to Specifications Sections listed under Article (1.1 B)“Related Documents” above for
specific requirements of products and systems.

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Supports and seismic restraints for control consoles, equipment cabinets
and racks, and components shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the Works and the conditions under
which the Works would be performed. Contractor shall remedy conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the works. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.

B. Before construction works commence, visit the site and identify the exact routing for all cable
pathways and equipment placement. Verify all dimensions, locating the works and their relation
to existing works, all existing conditions and their relation to the works and all obstructions and
conditions, etc. affecting the completion and proper execution of the works as indicated in the
project drawings and specifications.

C. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with Engineer, other trades and existing conditions
to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment maintenance and inspections.

D. Install cabling and equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment
components. Provide easy, safe and code mandated clearances at equipment racks and
enclosures, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Coordinate with the
Engineer the exact location and mounting height of all equipment in finished areas, such as
equipment racks, cabinets, termination equipment, communication and electrical devices. As

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 14 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with a minimum of interference
with other installations.

3.2 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before

fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the works.

B. Established Dimensions: Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to

ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Contractor’s on-site supervisor shall review, approve and stamp all shop drawings, coordination
drawings, As-Built Drawings and submittal documents.

B. Pre-installation inspection
1. The Contractor shall visually inspect all cables, cable reels, and shipping cartons to detect
possible cable damage incurred during shipping and transport. Visibly damaged goods are
not acceptable and shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.

C. Coordination with Employer’s Maintenance Personnel

1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer’s Maintenance Personnel who would be
in charge of system operation and maintenance after Taking Over, by engaging them in
follow up of system installation and testing. Acquaintance with the system during various
phases of construction will help ensure a more effective training.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General
1. Contractor shall install works following specifications, drawings, manufacturer’s
instructions and approved submittal data.
2. Allowable cable bend radius and pull tension:
a. In general, communications cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension
during installation. Refer to cable manufacturer's bend radius recommendations for the
maximum allowable limits.
b. After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant
residue. Use only lubricants specifically designed for cable installation.

B. Pull Strings
1. Horizontal Cable
a. The Contractor shall
1) Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed
as part of this Contract.
2) Pull string shall have a rated average breaking strength as per manufacturer's design
installation guidelines.
3) Data and video cables can be pulled in tandem with pull strings. During pulling
sessions, pull strings must move freely to prevent cable jacket/cable damage.

C. Pathway Fill
1. Reference manufacturer's design installation guidelines manual to achieve the specified fill
factor for various types of pathway: conduits, cable trays, trunking, etc.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 15 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Separation / Segregation of Services:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569 for separating unshielded copper voice, video and
data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and
equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 127 mm (5 inches).
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 300 mm (12 inches).
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 610 mm (24 inches).
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded
power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 64 mm (2-1/2 inches).
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 150 mm (6 inches).
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 300 mm (12 inches).
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines
and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as
follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 76 mm (3 inches).
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 150 mm (6 inches).
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA
or HP and Larger: A minimum of 1200 mm (48 inches).
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 127
mm (5 inches).

E. Firestopping Procedures
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
2. Comply with TIA-569, Annex A, "Firestopping."
3. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
4. Contractor shall:
a. Install and seal penetrations (conduit, sleeves, slots, chases) into or through fire-rated
barriers created by or made for or on the behalf of the Contractor to prevent the passage
of smoke, fire or water through the penetrations. All through-penetrations in a fire rated
surface require a sleeve, regardless of penetration diameter or penetrating cable count.
b. Provide approved fire-resistant materials to restore originally-designed fire- ratings to
all wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations used in the distribution and installation for
communications cabling system. Coordinate firestopping procedures and materials with
other trades.
c. Provide and install intumescent mechanical systems in floor chases in an approved
fashion in all openings.
d. Provide and install firestop in an approved manner in all openings where there are
penetrations through walls.
e. Supply Employer with training manuals with instructions on methods of adding or
removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases.
f. Provide manufacturer recommended firestopping material for rated protection for any
given barrier for written approval prior to purchase and installation.
1) The material shall be installed per manufacturer instructions, be listed for intended
use, and shall meet building fire strategic code and regulation for fire stopping
measures.
2) The material chosen shall be distinctively colored to be clearly distinguishable from
other materials, adhere to itself, and maintain the characteristics for which it is
designed to allow for the removal and/or addition of communication cables without
the necessity of drilling holes in the material.

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 16 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3) The material shall maintain/establish the fire-rated integrity of the wall/barrier that
has been penetrated.
g. Design fire barriers to facilitate their refurbishment following cable installation.
h. Ensure that cables passing through fire barriers are segregated and appropriate fire-
stopping techniques applied to minimize disruption to the fire barriers during any
subsequent installation (or removal) of cables

F. Grounding
1. Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems".
2. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, Chapter "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical
Protection".
3. Comply with ANSI/TIA-607.

G. Labeling
1. Comply with Division 27, Section “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Site Tests
1. Upon completion of the communications infrastructure systems, including all pathways and
grounding, the Contractor shall test the system.
2. When the Contractor has completed his own system tests and when the system record
documents, including drawings, operation and maintenance manuals are complete, the
Engineer and Employer are to be notified that the system fulfills the specifications and is
ready for acceptance testing.
3. The Contractor shall be required to perform a range of Site Acceptance Tests on site for each
individual sub-system to demonstrate that all items have been correctly installed and adjusted
on a location-by-location basis and that the sub-system performs in every respect in
accordance with the Specifications.
4. The tests shall be performed by the Contractor. Employer and Engineer reserve the right to
be present during any or all testing.
a. Cables and termination modules shall be affixed, mounted or installed to the
designed/specified permanent location prior to testing.
b. Any removal and reinstallation of any component in a circuit, including faceplates, shall
require retesting of that circuit and any other disturbed or affected circuits.
c. Cable and jack shall be affixed, mounted or installed to the designed or specified
permanent location prior to testing. Any removal and reinstallation of any component in
the circuit shall require retesting of that circuit.
d. Approved instruments, apparatus, services shall be utilized by qualified personnel.
e. If tests fail, Contractor shall correct as required to produce a legitimate passing test.
5. These specifications will be strictly enforced. The Contractor must verify that the
requirements of the specifications are fully met through testing with an approved tester (rated
for testing the cable type in use), and documentation as specified herein. This includes
confirmation of requirements by demonstration, testing and inspection. Demonstration shall
be provided at final walk-through in soft copy and printed test data.
6. Notification of the likelihood of a cable exceeding standardized lengths must be made prior
to installation of the cable.
7. In order to provide a reliable training, Employer’s maintenance personnel involved in the
training program and of this system could be involved in the follow up of system installation.
The Contractor shall provide an installation agenda to the Employer and confirm with him
any coordination with assigned trainees.
8. Third-Party testing
a. Third-Party testing of the completed cable infrastructure is an Employer option that can
be implemented and completed after all Contractor testing is complete and submitted,

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 17 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

and Contractor certifies that cable plant meets or exceeds test result requirements as
specified in ANSI/TIA-568. Third-Party testing can be implemented at the Employer’s
discretion to independently confirm the submitted Contractor’s standards-compliant
testing results.
b. Third-Party shall pick a random sample of [20%] <insert %> of total installed cable
plant. Prior to testing, this party shall develop and submit a test schedule for approval
by Employer.
c. Third-Party testing processes shall adhere to the testing protocols delineated in this
Section.
d. All confirmed failures shall be promptly corrected by Contractor and retested and Third-
Party under the same testing protocols and guidelines.
9. Contractor shall complete all work and documentation according to manufacturer guidelines
to ensure manufacturer’s warranty remains in effect. Contractor shall obtain certificates from
manufacturer attesting to warranty being in effect and include certificates with other
deliverables due at the completion of the Project.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Work areas shall be kept in a broom clean condition throughout the duration of the installation
process.

B. Remove all unnecessary tools and equipment, unused materials, packing materials, and debris
from each area where work has been completed unless designated for storage.

C. The Contractor shall damp clean all surfaces prior to final acceptance by Employer.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including

changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and
keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new
workstation outlets. Include training in cabling administration software..”

END OF SECTION 271005

COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING (TIA) 271005 - Page 18 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 271105 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”
except where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Communications
Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)” shall have precedence:
1. Division 27 Section 271005 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets.
2. Telecommunications mounting elements.
3. Rack mounted power protection and power strips.
4. Backboards.

B. Related Sections:
1. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry.
2. Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping.
3. Section 099123 - Interior Painting.
4. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
5. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
7. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
8. Section 260539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems.
9. Section 260543 - Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.
10. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
11. Section 264313 – Surge Protective Devices.
12. Section 271005 - Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
13. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
14. Section 271305 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
15. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Definitions
1. RMU: Rack Mounting Unit spaces (also denoted as RU) under the EIA/ECA-310-E
Universal hole pattern of 16 mm-16mm-13mm (5/8”-5/8”-1/2”).
2. PUE: Power Usage Effectiveness is a metric used to determine the energy efficiency of a
data center. PUE is determined by dividing the amount of power entering a data center by
the power used to run the computer infrastructure within it.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA) 271105 - Page 1 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of equipment with Employer's communications and LAN
equipment and service Suppliers. Coordinate Service Entrance arrangement with Telecom Utility
Authorities or Service Provider(s).
1. COMMUNICATIONS ROOMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

C. Check provisions of communications rooms for conformance to the general requirements. Any
discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer immediately.

D. Communications rooms must be dedicated to designated equipment and services only:

1. Space shall not be used for storage of equipment not related to designated equipment and
services.
2. Hazardous or corrosive materials shall not be stored in the space.
3. Piping, ductwork and distribution of power, not related to designated equipment and services
shall not pass through or be located within the space.
4. Spaces intended to contain metallic cabling shall be located away from sources of
electromagnetic interference. Examples of such noise sources include electrical power
supply transformers, motors and generators, x-ray equipment and radio or radar transmitters.

E. A minimum of one walls shall be covered with AC-grade plywood backboards starting from 300
mm AFF (smooth side to interior of room mounted vertically), capable of supporting mounted
hardware and equipment. Fire-treatment verification stamps on plywood shall be left unpainted
to be readable.

F. Cable trays or ladder racks shall be used to distribute and protect cables inside communication
rooms or in-between rooms through finished wall penetrations.

G. Each communication room shall be provided with cable ladders/trays or cable trunking, routed
overhead the equipment racks/cabinets for overhead cable management, As shown on Drawings.
A similar arrangement shall be provided for cables distribution from below in a raised floor
system.
1. The ladder / tray / trunking shall be supported to the tops of equipment racks / cabinets using
manufacturer's recommended supports and appropriate hardware.
2. Radius cable drops shall be provided to guide cables to enter or leave the cable ladder / tray.

H. All penetrations through fire-rated building elements (walls and floors) shall be sealed with an
approved fire-stopping system. Riser openings, sleeves, cables, conduits, cable trays, and
raceways, etc. shall be properly fire stopped.

I. Floors shall have anti-static properties.

J. Communications rooms with frames or cabinets that are to be cabled from below, shall be
provided with access floor (raised floor) systems of sufficient under-floor depth as shown on
Drawings but to enable routing of underfloor pathway systems and other underfloor services.

K. Environmental Conditions:
1. Install monitoring sensors with dedicated environmental controls operating 24 hours a day,
365 days a year in the communications rooms.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA) 271105 - Page 2 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Provide ventilation in the communications rooms to dissipate heat generated by active

equipment.
3. Provide continuous operating ranges of temperature and humidity as given by:
a. TIA-569: The components and protection must be selected and implemented so that the
performance requirements set for permanent links are met in the circumstances referred
to in the reference Standard.
4. Where risk of water ingress exists, a means of evacuating water from the space shall be
provided. Where a floor drain is used, it shall be fitted with a back flow preventer.

L. Floor loading capacity

1. Floor loading capacity shall be sufficient to bear both the distributed and concentrated load
of the installed equipment with associated cabling and media. The minimum distributed floor
loading capacity shall be in accordance with TIA-569 requirements based on room function
and types of racks and cabinets housed by the room.

M. Plumbing:
1. If fire suppression is used, install wire cages on sprinkler heads to prevent accidental
operation.
2. Do not place sprinkler heads directly over equipment or cabling.
3. Drainage troughs are recommended under sprinkler pipes to prevent leakage onto equipment.

N. Electrical:
1. One manufacturer's product shall be proposed for each type of installation. Mixing of
different manufacturer products for one item shall not be acceptable.
2. No electrical feeders/branch circuits shall be placed in or run through any communications
room except as required to service those rooms.
3. The Contractor shall provide uniform illumination of at least 500 lux, at 1 meter AFFL using
luminaires located a minimum of 2.6 meters AFFL.
a. Light fixtures in communications rooms are to be positioned for maximum illumination.
Do not install over cable tray, ladder rack, or 19" standing racks.
b. Provide adequate power supply capacity and a sufficient number of socket outlets to
support equipment and service. Coordinate power requirements of active equipment
with electrical design.

O. Earthing and Lightning Protection

1. The installation shall be provided with grounding and bonding in accordance with Division
26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems".
2. The installation shall be provided with Surge Protection Devices (SPD) in accordance with
IEC 62305 and IEC 61643-21 as part of a coordinated set of SPD's for the building. Refer to
Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices".

P. Labeling
1. Refer to Division 27 Section “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA) 271105 - Page 3 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.9 MISCELLANEOUS QUALITY MANAGEMENT TOPICS

A. For the following quality management topics, refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses
for Structured Cabling (TIA)”:
1. CONFIDENTIALITY
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
3. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
4. WARRANTY
5. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT

1.10 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Furnish the following extra materials, as a minimum, (but not less than one from each type) that
match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified
with labels describing contents, irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation:
1. Racks: 2% of each type.
2. Cabinets: 2% of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

2.3 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, void free, (19 x 1200 x 2400) mm (3/4 x 48 x 96
inches) (depth x width x height). Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels
specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

B. The plywood shall be painted with a minimum of two coats of white fire retardant paint on all six
sides.

2.4 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements:
1. Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel and/or aluminium units designed for
telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be
supported.
2. Module Dimensions: Width compatible with EIA/ECA-310-E standard, 19-inch (482.6-mm)
panel mounting.
3. Permanent rack mount unit markings shall be provided in the mounting rails showing the
position of each of the rack mount unit (RMU or RU) spaces.
4. Shelves: fully ventilated and designed to install on front and rear 19” EIA square hole
mounting rails, sliding with adjustable shelf mounting brackets that adapt to various rail
depths.
5. All racks and cabinets shall be provided with vertical and horizontal cable management
channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug and power strips.
6. Finish: Manufacturer's standard , baked-polyester powder coat.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA) 271105 - Page 4 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

7. Power supply should be made available for each rack as such: a minimum of two separate
dedicated electrical circuits rated 20 Amps, 230 VAC, 50 Hz each, drop-down pendants
and terminated by socket outlets of the twist-lock type or IEC 60309 (Commando) type
unless otherwise specified or shown on Drawings. The two circuits will have to be fed from
two (2) different UPS power sources to support resilient operation.
8. Arrangement: The overall equipment arrangement of servers and racks should be configured
to work in conjunction with the cooling system to provide a low PUE for low energy
operation. Coordinate with Mechanical Department for system requirements.
9. Thermal Management Systems including “Air Containment Systems” should be well
integrated into the HVAC system design. Coordinate with Mechanical Department for
system requirements.

B. Modular Freestanding Server Cabinets, steel or aluminum:

1. Removable and lockable side panels.
2. Solid top panel.
3. Hinged and lockable full perforated metal (mesh) front door.
a. High flow vented door offering around an 80% free area.
4. Hinged and lockable split perforated metal (mesh) rear door.
a. High flow vented door offering around an 80% free area.
5. Adjustable feet for leveling.
6. Supports internal baffles to control front-to-rear airflow.
7. Cable access provisions in the roof and base.
8. Grounding bus bar.
9. Back-mounted fan with filter.
10. Module Dimensions:
a. 800 to 800 mm (depth) in increments of 25mm (0.98”), compatible with EIA/ECA-310-
E standard, 19-inch (482.6-mm) panel mounting, 2.1 m (7 ft) high, 45 RU mounting
space.
b. Dimensions shall be coordinated with the actual selected active and passive equipment.
11. Equipment load bearing capacity: not less than 1134 kg (2500 lb) static load when the load
is evenly distributed.
12. Adjustable mounting rails that slide front to rear for greater space utilization.
13. The fastening system used to mount equipment and telecommunications components shall
be through EIA/ECA-310-E Universal hole pattern threaded screws or square punched rail
holes to accept cage nut hardware.
14. Vertical power strip, extending the full height of the cabinet.
15. All cabinets keyed alike.

C. Modular Wall Cabinets:

1. Wall mounting.
2. Steel or aluminum construction.
3. Treated to resist corrosion.
4. Lockable front plexiglass door.
5. Louvered side panels.
6. Vented top panels.
7. Cable access provisions top and bottom.
8. Equipment load bearing capacity: not less than 91 kg (200 lb) static load when the load is
evenly distributed.
9. Adjustable mounting rails that slide front to rear for greater space utilization.
10. Grounding lug.
11. Module Dimensions:
a. Compatible with EIA/ECA-310-E standard, 19-inch (482.6-mm) panel mounting.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA) 271105 - Page 5 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. 600 mm (width) x 600 mm (depth).

12. Roof-mounted fan.
13. Power strip, rack mounted.
14. All cabinets keyed alike.

D. Cable Management for Equipment Racks and Cabinets:

1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.
2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.
3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers.
4. Horizontal cable managers (cable organizers) associated with Patch Panels shall be provided
inside equipment racks/cabinets as described in Division 27, Sections "Communications
Backbone Cabling (TIA)" and "Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)".

2.5 POWER STRIPS

A. Power Strips in wall-mounted cabinets:

1. Horizontal, rack-mounting.
2. A minimum of Six front facing 20 Amp, 250V AC, 50Hz socket outlets complying with
IEC 60320-C13 Standard.
3. LED indicator lights for power status.
4. Cord connected with 3 m line cord and IEC 60320-C14 standard power inlet.
5. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position with cover that prevents
accidental shut-off.
6. Surge Protection Device (SPD) selected in accordance with IEC 62305 and IEC 61643-21
as part of a coordinated set of SPD’s for the building. Refer to Division 26 Section “Surge
Protective Devices”.

2.6 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems".

B. Comply with TIA-607.

2.7 LABELING

A. Comply with Division 27 Section “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)”.

B. Comply with TIA-606.

2.8 PATHWAYS

A. For conduits, trunking, cable ladders/cable trays used for communication rooms, comply with
requirements in Division 26 Sections:
1. "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems".
2. "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems".
3. "Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA) 271105 - Page 6 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.2 FIRESTOPPING

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping".

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.

B. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, Chapter "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical
Protection".

C. Comply with TIA-607.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements specified in Division 27 Section "Identification for Communications

Systems (TIA)."

B. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606 and UL 969.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards.
For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

END OF SECTION 271105

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS (TIA) 271105 - Page 7 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 271305 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions, Project Requirements
and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA)” except where
the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Communications Backbone Cabling
(TIA)” shall have precedence:
1. Division 27 Section 271005 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Optical fiber cabling.
2. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

B. Related Sections:
1. Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping.
2. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
5. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems
6. Section 260539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems
7. Section 260543 - Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.
8. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
9. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
10. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
11. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
12. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Standards relevant to cables mechanical and environmental requirements include:

1. EIA/TIA-492AAAD, Detail Specification for 850-nm Laser- Optimized, 50-µm Core
Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class la Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers;
Suitable for manufacturing OM4 Cabled Optical Fiber.
2. EIA/TIA-492CAAB, Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode
Optical Fibers with Low Water Peak.
3. TIA-492AAAE, Detail Specification for 50-μm Core Diameter/125-μm Cladding Diameter
Class 1a Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers with Laser-Optimized Bandwidth
Characteristics Specified for Wavelength Division Multiplexing.
4. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596, ICEA Standard for Indoor Optical Fiber Cable.
5. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640, Standard for Optical Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable.
6. ICEA S-104-696, Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Fiber Cable.
7. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661, Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor
Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems.
8. ANSI/ICEA S-100-685, Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated and Jacketed
Telecommunications Station Wire For Indoor / Outdoor Use.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 1 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

9. Telcordia GR-409-Core, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Optic Cable.

10. Telcordia GR-20-Core, Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber and Optical Fiber Cable.
11. ANSI/TIA-598-D + Addendum 1&2 , Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Definitions
1. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their
interconnection or cross-connection.

C. Abbreviations
1. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
2. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
3. ISP: Inside Plant.
4. LAN: Local area network.
5. LOMMF: Laser Optimized Multi-mode Fiber.
6. LSZH/LS0H: Low Smoke Zero Halogen.
7. MICE Mechanical, Ingress, Climatic/Chemical, Electromagnetic
8. OSP: Outside Plant.
9. PVDF: Polyvinylidene Difluoride (insulation material)
10. SMF: Single-mode Fiber.
11. U/UTP: Unshielded twisted pair (also known as UTP).
12. F/UTP: Screened Unshielded twisted pair (also known as FTP).
13. U/FTP: Un-screened Shielded twisted pair (also known as STP).
14. S/FTP: Screened Shielded twisted pair (also known as S-STP).

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.7 CONFIDENTIALITY

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.8 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Backbone cabling system for a generic Information and Communications Technology (ICT)
cabling system shall include two subsystems: “Campus Backbone” and “Building Backbone” as
described in Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Backbone cabling system shall also include Data Centers Backbone for Network access system
and Main distribution system – as applicable to the Project and described in Division 27, Section
“Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

C. Each cabling subsystem consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects,
mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-
connection.

D. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in equipment rooms or at entrance facilities.

Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 2 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Backbone cabling system shall comply with both environmental and transmission performance
criteria stated in Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)” in
accordance with TIA-568, when tested according to test procedures of the relevant Standards.

B. Cable Connecting Hardware shall be compatible for use with the Automated Infrastructure
Management (AIM) system of the Project. Refer to Division 27 Section “Identification for
Communications Systems (TIA)”

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Cable Pulling Plan: The Contractor shall submit a cable pulling plan, as follows:
1. Indicate the installed backbone conduit layout in schematic format, including junction boxes
and distances between junction boxes.
2. Indicate contents of each conduit.
3. Indicate the cable pulling calculations, conduit fill ratios and actual cable runs and tensions.
4. Include detail and schedule showing the construction sequence of communications rooms.
5. Installation of cabling shall not commence prior to approval of the pulling plan and
calculations by the Engineer.

C. Splice Plan: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the intended cable splice
points, mounting method and equipment list.

D. Cable Testing Plan: The Contractor shall provide a test plan for media testing as described in
"Field Quality Control" Article of this Section prior to beginning cable testing.

E. Cable Testing Reports: The Contractor shall submit cable test reports in accordance with "Field
Quality Control" Article of this Section.

1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Cable splicing personnel shall have a minimum of three years splicing experience and shall have
completed a minimum of three major splicing projects.

1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.13 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.14 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.15 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.16 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 3 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Furnish the following extra materials, as a minimum, (but not less than one from each type) that
match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified
with labels describing contents, irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation:
1. Patch-Panel Units: 2% of each type.
2. Connecting Blocks: 2% of each type.
3. Patch Cords: 2% of each type.
4. Fiber Optic Cables: 2% of each type.
5. Balanced Twisted Pair Cables: 2% of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

2.3 PATHWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections:

1. "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems”.
2. “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems".
3. “Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems”.
4. “Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems”.

B. Comply with requirements in TIA-569.

2.4 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

A. Optical Fiber Cable - For Indoor Use:

1. Tight buffered, optical fiber cable:
a. Single-Mode .
b. Non-conductive (all-dielectric) construction.
c. Reinforcement:
1) Central strength element aramid / glass fiber yarn.
2) Aramid / glass fiber yarn around the sub-units of fibers.
d. PVC inner jacket.
e. Fiber glass armour.
1) The cable shall be spirally wrapped and encased within an interlocking or
corrugated armored metal without interruption from end to end for protection and
strength.
f. Plenum rated PVDF outer jacket with color to designate the type of optical fiber and
ripcord applied longitudinally underneath.
2. Standards: Comply with:
a. TIA-492CAAB Outside Plant for single mode OS2 cable for optical fiber detailed
specifications.
b. TIA-568.3 for performance specifications.
c. ICEA S-83-596 and Telcordia GR-409-Core for mechanical and environmental
properties.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 4 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Cable shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as
complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following type(s):
a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.

B. Optical Fiber Cable - For Indoor/Outdoor Use:

1. Application: indoor/outdoor fiber optic cables are intended to be used to make
interconnections within and between adjacent buildings or to the first outdoor splice point.
These cables shall be fully resistant to the typical outside plant environment, but also can be
routed indoors, where flame rating requirements apply.
2. Tight-buffered using dry water blocking technology, optical fiber cable.
a. Single-Mode
b. Non-conductive (all-dielectric) construction.
c. Reinforcement:
1) Central strength element aramid / glass fiber yarn .
2) Aramid / glass fiber yarn around the individual fiber
d. PVC Inner jacket.
e. Fiber glass armour.
1) The cable shall be spirally wrapped and encased within an interlocking or
corrugated armored metal without interruption from end to end for protection and
strength.
f. Plenum rated PVDF outer jacket with color to designate the type of optical fiber and
ripcord applied longitudinally underneath.
g. Additional Polyamide/ Nylon jacket for protection against rodents and termites.
3. Standards: Comply with:
a. TIA-492CAAB Outside Plant for single mode OS2 cable for optical fiber detailed
specifications.
b. TIA-568.3 for performance specifications.
c. ICEA S-104-696 and Telcordia GR-20-Core for mechanical and environmental
properties.
4. Cable shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as
complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.

C. Optical Fiber Cable - Jacket

1. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598 (Optical
Fiber Cable Color Coding).
2. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed
1000 mm.

D. Number of Fiber Strands / Cores

1. The number of fiber strands shown on Drawings for various applications is indicative only.
Contractor shall allow for strands in addition to those required for a specific system to ensure
a minimum of 50% spare on all optical fiber cable links.

2.5 SINGLE-MODE OPTICAL FIBER CABLE – CATEGORY OS2

A. Application:
1. Indoor, Plenum Rated (Inside Plant (ISP)).
2. Indoor/Outdoor Plenum Rated (both Inside Plant (ISP) and Outside Plant (OSP)).
3. Outdoor (Outside Plant (OSP).

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 5 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Optical fiber cables shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the
electrical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification and performance
parameters of the Cabled Optical Fiber Category listed below so as to support and exceed the
respective channel transmission performance Class as per TIA 568.3.
1. Category OS2 as per ISO/IEC 11801-1 designation corresponding to:
a. TIA 492CAAB (Outside Plant) (for maximum attenuation limits).
b. B1.3 or B6_a as per EN 60793-2-50.
c. G.652.C/D and G.657 as per ITU-T.

C. Specifications of the Cabled Optical Fiber:

1. Transmission (Performance) Requirements:
a. Comply with TIA 492CAAB (Outside Plant).
b. Maximum attenuation coefficient shall be:
1) 0.4 dB/km using 1310nm wavelength.
2) 0.4 dB/km using 1383nm wavelength.
3) 0.4 dB/km using 1550nm wavelength.
c. All optical fibers inside each individual cable shall be usable to the fullest capacity
specified by the manufacturer and shall meet required specifications at all times.
2. Dimensional, Mechanical and Environmental Requirements:
a. Comply with TIA 492CAAB (Outside Plant); nominal 9/125m (mode field diameter
(MFD) / cladding at 1310 nm).

D. All backbone single-mode optical fiber cables Category OS2 shall meet channel transmission
performance Class of Category OS2 as per TIA 568.3 and shall be capable of Ethernet signal
transmission as per TIA 568.0, Table 7 at:
1. 100 Gb/s up to 10,000 meters in the 1310nm operating window.
2. 40 Gb/s up to 10,000 meters in the 1310nm operating window.
3. 10 Gb/s up to 10,000 meters in the 1310nm operating window.

E. The optical fiber cables shall be rated per the installation environment as required by the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction, National Fire Codes and MICE classification. Select an
appropriate cable construction, including external jacket properties, when installing optical fiber
cables in aerial, outdoor, indoor, underground and corrosive environments.

F. All single-mode optical fiber cable jackets shall have: the industry standard yellow colored jacket
for ISP cablesand black colored jacket for OSP cables

G. All single-mode fiber optic cables shall meet or exceed TIA 568.3 compliant network cable-
testing device certification by an independent laboratory, for verification of performance.

H. Accessory Products: Provide any accessory products related to the optical fiber backbone cabling
required to provide a complete and functional infrastructure system.

2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Optical Fiber Patch Bays

1. Optical fiber patch bay housings shall be provided for cross-connecting or inter-connecting
purposes between OSP, ISP, and/or distribution cables and the active network electronic
switches.
2. All optical fiber termination panels shall be complete factory-provided assemblies that
contain termination panels, factory-polished "pig tails", internal bend radius components and
splice shelves that are provided in a housing which includes an accessible rear access hatch.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 6 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Optical fiber termination panels shall be suitable for installation in EIA/ECA-310-E

standard, 19-inch (482.6-mm) racks.
4. All connections between the horizontal and backbone optical fibers to the factory-provided
"pig tails" within the termination shelves shall be made with either mechanical splicing or
fusion splicing, depending on Project scale and to the approval of the Engineer.
5. All optical fiber patch panel trays and associated bulkhead inserts shall have factory
numerical labeling included in the design and presentation to the user side of the panel.
6. The optical fiber patch panel bulkheads that house the terminating modules for the optical
fiber backbone cabling and any station optical fiber cabling shall accept connectors on the
end of each factory-terminated pigtail assembly.
7. The connectors shall conform to the requirements of the TIA-568.3 for “Connecting
Hardware Requirements” for performance parameters and shall have the same manufacturer,
cable type, and connector and polish as noted above for the respective fiber optic cable
(single-mode/multi-mode).
8. Patch Panels Cable Management:
a. Patch panels shall be provided with horizontal cable managers (cable organizers) at the
top of each equipment rack/cabinet, with a minimum height of two (2) rack units each.
b. In addition, provide as minimum two (2) rack units (RU) of cable management:
1) per fiber optic patch panel.
c. Various solutions of horizontal rack cable managers shall be employed to keep rack
cables properly organized such as finger duct rack cable manager, D-ring horizontal
cable manager and horizontal cable manager with brush strip.

B. Patch Cords
1. Factory-made, dual-fiber optic cables in lengths that are appropriate for patching from
network equipment ports to the optical fiber patch panels ports within the telecom spaces;
plenum rated jacket.
2. Patch cords shall conform to the requirements of the TIA-568.3 for “Connecting Hardware
Requirements” for standard performance parameters and shall have the same manufacturer,
cable type, and connector and polish as noted above for the respective fiber optic cable
(single-mode/multi-mode).
3. Patch cords shall be identified to indicate the length, the core diameter, the Category of cable,
and the port-map status where a direct port to port relationship does not exist (i.e. cross-over
cords).

C. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of
the TIA-604 series and TIA-568.3 for “Connecting Hardware Requirements”.
2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type LC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75
dB at all wavelengths.

D. OSP Optical Fiber Splice Closure

1. The closures shall be suitable for aerial, manhole, underground duct and direct burial
applications.
2. The closures shall be designed for use with various types of optical fiber, Single-Mode and
Multimode, loose tube, central tube and ribbon cables, both armored (metallic) and all
dielectric.
3. The closures outer materials shall be made of Thermoplastic (hard that can withstand extreme
environmental elements.
4. The closures shall be sized as required for the maximum fiber count within the splice case
including distribution fibers. For this purpose, a line or family of OSP closures shall be
employed having different sizes to accommodate a range of fiber counts and cable sizes.
a. The closure shall have at least one oval port.
b. The closure shall have at least two drop ports

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 7 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. The closure shall have a grommet system that allows for more than one cable per drop
port, depending on cable size.
5. Tray (Cassette) system:
a. The closures shall be used with manufacturer’s specified multiple splice trays (cassettes)
(tray system). Tray count shall depend on the number of fibers to be spliced.
b. The splice trays shall be hinged to facilitate access to splices and slack storage.
c. The tray system shall allow for easy access to all trays: top, inner and bottom.
d. The tray system shall provide storage functionality for manufacturer’s recommended
slack within the closure to facilitate present and future fiber splicing and maintenance
activities.
6. The closures shall feature a re-useable/re-sealable, dome type / single-ended design.
a. Base and dome sealed with clamp and O-ring system.
b. A sealing technology shall be employed that enables ease of installation, re-entry and
repeated open/close including gasket-based sealing or gel-based sealing without
replacing the gel.
7. Optical fiber splice closures shall be compliant with IEC 61073-1, and tested in accordance
with IEC 61300.

2.7 OPTICAL FIBER FUSION SPLICING DEVICE

A. The fusion device shall be portable, fully automatic and compact.

B. Splicer electrodes shall contain an arc-stabilizing feature to prevent spontaneous position shift of
the arc emission zone to reduce the average splice loss by up to 50% and also the standard
deviation compared to standard electrodes. The splicer shall require minimal maintenance,
allowing up to 7000 splices between cleanings.

C. Procedures such as pre-alignment, cleaning, gap-setting, cleave angle monitoring, core-to-core

alignment and glass fusion shall be microprocessor-controlled. Multiple splice programs with
individual parameter settings shall be selectable, with seven pre-set single-mode and two multi-
mode programs.

D. Course pre-alignment shall be performed automatically; therefore, accurate manual pre-

alignment of the fibers shall not be necessary. Precise pre-alignment in z-axis shall be
automatically performed with two-step motors. Fine positioning and final alignment of the fibers
in three (x, y and z) directions shall be automatically performed with piezo-ceramic actuators,
which have a positioning resolution better than 0.1 m.

E. Splices shall be protected by heat shrink fusion splice protection sleeves installed by an integrated
heater within the same fusion splice machine.

F. Upon completion of the splice, the splice loss shall be evaluated automatically. The splice loss
value shall be displayed on the LCD display and shall not exceed 0.3 decibels (dB).

2.8 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with TIA-607.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM

A. For identification products, comply with Division 27 Section "Identification for Communications
Systems (TIA)."

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 8 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Comply with TIA-606 and UL 969.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by the
telecommunications Service Provider.

3.2 WIRING METHODS AND PATHWAYS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems."

C. Install plenum rated cables for life safety applications.

D. Install plenum rated cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

E. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

F. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal
points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide
and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

G. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in
Division 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)". Drawings indicate
general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

H. Comply with TIA-569 for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between
pull points.

I. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

J. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is
installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around
perimeter walls of room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.
4. Extend conduits 76 mm (3 inches <Insert dimension> above finished floor.
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to
grounding system.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. General Requirements for Fiber Optic Backbone Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568.0, TIA-568.1 and TIA-568.3
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices".
3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations
only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760 mm (30
inches) and not more than 150 mm (6 inches) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks,
frames, and terminals.
5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 9 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling
Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.
7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
8. In the communications equipment room, install a 3-m (10-foot) long service loop on each
end of cable.
9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable". Monitor cable pull
tensions.
10. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.
11. Install all patch cords with proper attention paid to bend radii.
12. Verify lengths and counts of optical fiber patch cords with the Engineer and/or Employer
prior to purchase.

B. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum rated cable only.
2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.
3. Coil cable 1800 mm (6 feet) long not less than 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter below each
feed point.

C. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

D. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
2. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569 recommendations for separating metallic
communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and
equipment outdoor aerial or underground installations.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

C. Comply with TIA-569, Annex A, "Firestopping" and BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems"
Chapter.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Refer to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.

B. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"
Chapter and comply with TIA-607.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 27 Section "Identification for
Communications Systems (TIA)".

B. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606.

3.7 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Identification for Communications Systems

(TIA)" for cable and asset management software.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 10 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.8 FUSION SPLICING DEVICE

A. Check actual site conditions prior to start of any work. Ensure all preceding trade works
associated with the telecommunications system are accurate and complete before proceeding with
installation or use of products specified in this Section.

B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions at all times when operating the optical fiber fusion splicing
device. Pay particular attention to cleanliness and axis alignment.

C. Utilize the integrated tensile testing function of the splicing device after each splice to analyze
the strength of the fiber optic joint. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for tensile
testing load to be applied. Any splice failing the tensile test shall be re-spliced immediately.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Division 27 Section "Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect balanced twisted pair cables and optical fiber cables jacket materials for
third party testing certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications
equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling
connections for compliance with TIA-568.0.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and
patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Test balanced twisted pair copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent
faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks.
Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.
a. Conduct the tests in accordance with TIA-568.2 for compliance with the relevant
specified limits or the applicable application- specific standard.
b. Ensure that test instruments meet the appropriate performance levels of TIA-1152 by a
qualified testing agency and that equipment has been calibrated at least once in the year
prior to the testing date. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test
equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
c. For shielded cables, include the shield integrity test.
4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
a. Conduct the tests in accordance with TIA-568.3 for compliance with the specified
relevant limits or the applicable application-specific standard, using approved testing
equipment (rated for testing the cable type in use and for particular tests (for example,
OLTS test set or OTDR)).
b. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for
channel or link test configuration.
c. Test for the following as a minimum:
1) Link End-to-End Attenuation.
2) Continuity and maintenance of polarity.
3) Length.
4) Propagation delay.
5) Optical attenuation of link, 2 x wavelengths, 2 x direction.
6) Where results exceed the power loss budget, the link shall be investigated with an
OTDR to determine the location of the faulty component

C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be transferred from
the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 11 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

END OF SECTION 271305

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING (TIA) 271305 - Page 12 of 12

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 271505 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)” except
where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Communications Horizontal
Cabling (TIA)” shall have precedence:
1. Division 27, Section 271005 “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Twisted Pair (Balanced) cabling.
2. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.
3. Telecommunications outlets/connectors.

B. Related Sections:
1. Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping.
2. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 260539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems.
7. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
8. Section 262726 – Wiring Devices.
9. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
10. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
11. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
12. Section 271305 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Standards relevant to cables mechanical and environmental requirements include:

1. TIA-492AAAD, Detail Specification for 850-nm Laser- Optimized, 50-µm Core
Diameter/125-µm Cladding Diameter Class la Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers;
Suitable for manufacturing OM4 Cabled Optical Fiber.
2. TIA-492CAAB, Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode
Optical Fibers with Low Water Peak.
3. TIA-492AAAE, Detail Specification for 50-μm Core Diameter/125-μm Cladding Diameter
Class 1a Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibers with Laser-Optimized Bandwidth
Characteristics Specified for Wavelength Division Multiplexing.
4. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596, ICEA Standard for Indoor Optical Fiber Cable.
5. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640, Standard for Optical Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable.
6. ICEA S-104-696, Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Fiber Cable.
7. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661, Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor
Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 1 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

8. ANSI/ICEA S-100-685, Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated and Jacketed

Telecommunications Station Wire For Indoor / Outdoor Use.
9. ANSI/NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732, Standard for Category 6 and 6A, 100 Ohm,
Individually Unshielded Twisted Pairs, Indoor Cables (With or Without an Overall Shield)
for Use in LAN Communication Wiring Systems
10. Telcordia GR-409-Core, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Optic Cable.
11. Telcordia GR-20-Core, Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber and Optical Fiber Cable.
12. ANSI/TIA-598-D + Addendum 1&2 , Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Definitions
1. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their
interconnection or cross-connection.
2. Work Area: building space where the occupants interact with terminal equipment.
3. Telecommunications outlet (TO): fixed connecting device where the horizontal cabling
terminates. The telecommunications outlet provides the interface to the Work Area cabling.

C. Abbreviations
1. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
2. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
3. LAN: Local area network.
4. LOMMF: Laser Optimized Multimode Fiber.
5. LSZH/LS0H: Low Smoke Zero Halogen.
6. MICE Mechanical, Ingress, Climatic/Chemical, Electromagnetic.
7. PVDF: Polyvinylidene Difluoride (insulation material).
8. SMF: Single Mode Fiber.
9. U/UTP: Unshielded twisted pair (also known as UTP).
10. F/UTP: Screened Unshielded twisted pair (also known as FTP).
11. U/FTP: Un-screened Shielded twisted pair (also known as STP).
12. S/FTP: Screened Shielded twisted pair (also known as S-STP).

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Employer’s

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

C. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with locations of power socket outlets

at each Work Area.

1.7 CONFIDENTIALITY

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.8 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between
the telecommunications outlets/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 2 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a
"permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.
1. TIA-568.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlets/connectors be
installed for each work area.
2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point
between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.
3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.

B. A Work Area is approximately 9.3 sq. m (100 sq. ft.), and includes the components that extend
from the telecommunications outlets/connectors to the station equipment.

C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 90 m (295 feet). This maximum allowable
length does not include an allowance for the length of 4.9 m (16 feet) to the workstation
equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.

1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Horizontal cabling system shall comply with both environmental and transmission performance
criteria stated in Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)” in
accordance with TIA-568 series, when tested according to test procedures of the relevant
Standards.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Cable Pulling Plan: The Contractor shall submit a cable pulling plan, as follows:
1. Indicate the installed conduit layout in schematic format, including junction boxes and
distances between junction boxes.
2. Indicate contents of each conduit.
3. Indicate the cable pulling calculations, conduit fill ratios and actual cable runs and tensions.
4. Include detail and schedule showing the construction sequence of communications rooms.
5. Installation of cabling shall not commence prior to approval of the pulling plan and
calculations by the Engineer.

C. Splice Plan: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the intended cable splice
points, mounting method and equipment list.

D. Cable Testing Plan: The Contractor shall provide a test plan for media testing as described in
"Field Quality Control" Article of this Section prior to beginning cable testing.

E. Cable Testing Reports: The Contractor shall submit cable test reports in accordance with "Field
Quality Control" Article of this Section.

1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Cable splicing personnel shall have a minimum of three years splicing experience and shall have
completed a minimum of three major splicing projects.

1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 3 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.13 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.14 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.15 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

1.16 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Furnish the following extra materials, as a minimum, (but not less than one from each type) that
match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified
with labels describing contents, irrespective of manufacturer’s recommendation:
1. Patch-Panel Units: 2% of each type.
2. Connecting Blocks: 2% of each type.
3. Device Plates: 2% of each type.
4. Patch Cords: 2% of each type.
5. Twisted Pair Cables: 2% of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

2.3 PATHWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections:

1. "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems”.
2. “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems".
3. “Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems”.

B. Comply with requirements of TIA-569.

2.4 TWISTED PAIRS (BALANCED) CABLE

A. General Requirements
1. Balanced twisted pair cables shall be rated per the installation environment as required by
the local Authority Having Jurisdiction, National Fire Codes and MICE classification. Select
an appropriate cable construction, including insulation, screen and external jacket properties,
when installing Twisted Pair cables in harsh and corrosive environments.
2. Horizontal cables that are exposed to moisture shall contain moisture-blocking materials to
prevent moisture damage to cable performance.
3. Accessory Products: Provide any accessory products related to the Twisted Pair copper
cabling required to provide a complete and functional infrastructure system.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 4 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Horizontal balanced cables shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions
to meet the electrical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification and
performance parameters of Category 6A balanced cables so as to support and exceed the
transmission performance of Category 6A cabling as specified in TIA-568.2.

B. Balanced S/FTP (S-STP) cable - Category 6A - for Indoor Use: 100-ohm, 23 AWG copper
conductor, four-pair S/FTP, Screened Shielded twisted pair Cable (braided screened overall,
individually foil shielded twisted pairs cable), foam skin PE insulation and covered with a blue
color, Thermoplastic jacket and provided with a drain wire.

C. Standards:
1. Comply with TIA-568.2.
2. Cable shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as
complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following type:
a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.
b. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666.

2.5 BALANCED CABLE HARDWARE

A. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA-568.2 for “Connecting
Hardware Requirements”, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools.
Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

B. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6A cables. Provide blocks for the number of
cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including
plugs and jacks where indicated.

C. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate backbone cables and
permit interconnection between cables.
1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables plus spares and
blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

D. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at
each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus
spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.
2. Patch Panels Cable Management:
a. Patch panels shall be provided with horizontal cable managers (cable organizers) at the
top of each equipment rack/cabinet, with a minimum height of two (2) rack units each.
b. In addition, provide as minimum two (2) rack units (RU) of cable management:
1) per 24 patch panel ports.
2) above and below each 48 port patch panel.
c. Various solutions of horizontal rack cable managers shall be employed to keep rack
cables properly organized such as finger duct rack cable manager, D-ring horizontal
cable manager and horizontal cable manager with brush strip.

E. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position RJ45 modular receptacle units
with integral IDC-type terminals.

F. Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair copper conductor cables in lengths to suit application and
routing requirements; thermoplastic jacket terminated with 8-position RJ45 modular plug at
each end.
1. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 5 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Patch cables shall be performance and impedance matched with respective horizontal cables
and provided by the same manufacturer of the horizontal cable.
3. Exceed 568.2 Category 6A transmission performance.
4. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots.

2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Optical Fiber Patch Bays

1. Optical fiber patch bay housings shall be provided for cross-connecting or inter-connecting
purposes between OSP, ISP, and/or distribution cables and the active network electronic
switches.
2. All optical fiber termination panels shall be complete factory-provided assemblies that
contain termination panels, factory-polished "pig tails", internal bend radius components and
splice shelves that are provided in a housing which includes an accessible rear access hatch.
3. Optical fiber termination panels shall be suitable for installation in EIA/ECA-310-E
standard, 19-inch (482.6-mm) racks.
4. All connections between the horizontal and backbone optical fibers to the factory-provided
"pig tails" within the termination shelves shall be made with either mechanical splicing or
fusion splicing, depending on Project scale and to the approval of the Engineer.
5. All optical fiber patch panel trays and associated bulkhead inserts shall have factory
numerical labeling included in the design and presentation to the user side of the panel.
6. The optical fiber patch panel bulkheads that house the terminating modules for the fiber optic
backbone cabling and any station optical fiber cabling shall accept connectors on the end of
each factory-terminated pigtail assembly
7. The connectors shall conform to the requirements of the TIA-568.3 standard performance
parameters and shall have the same manufacturer, cable type, connector and polish as noted
above for the respective fiber optic cable (single-mode/multi-mode).
8. Patch Panels Cable Management:
a. Patch panels shall be provided with horizontal cable managers (cable organizers) at the
top of each equipment rack/cabinet, with a minimum height of two (2) rack units each.
b. In addition, provide as minimum two (2) rack units (RU) of cable management:
1) per fiber optic patch panel.
2) above and below each fiber optic patch panel.
c. Various solutions of horizontal rack cable managers shall be employed to keep rack
cables properly organized such as finger duct rack cable manager, D-ring horizontal
cable manager and horizontal cable manager with brush strip.

B. Patch Cords
1. Factory-made, dual-fiber optic cables in lengths that are appropriate for patching from
network equipment ports to the optical fiber patch panels ports within the telecom
spaces; plenum rated jacket.
2. Patch cords shall conform to the requirements of the TIA-568.3 standard performance
parameters and shall have the same manufacturer, cable type, connector and polish as noted
above for the respective fiber optic cable (single-mode/multi-mode).
3. Patch cords shall be identified to indicate the length, the core diameter, the Category of cable,
and the port-map status where a direct port to port relationship does not exist (i.e. cross-over
cords).

C. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of
the TIA-604 series and TIA-568.3 for “Connecting Hardware Requirements”.
2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type LC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75
dB at all wavelengths.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 6 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.7 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position RJ45 modular

Category 6A components, wired to T568B pin assignments.

B. Workstation Outlets: Two -port-connector assemblies mounted in single or multi-gang

faceplate.
1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 26 Section "Wiring
Devices."
2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel , complying with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Wiring Devices."
3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of balanced and optical fiber,
Work Area cords.
a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.
4. Legend
a. Factory labeled by silk-screening or engraving for stainless steel faceplates.
b. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.
c. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.8 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with TIA-607.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM

A. For identification products , and cable and asset management system, comply with
requirements in Division 27, Section "Identification for Communications Systems (TIA)."

B. Comply with TIA-606 and UL 969.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate horizontal cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by the
telecommunications Service Provider.

3.2 WIRING METHODS AND PATHWAYS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems."

C. Install plenum rated cables for life safety applications.

D. Install plenum rated cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

E. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

F. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 7 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.

G. Comply with TIA-569 for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between
pull points.

H. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. General Requirements for Balanced Twisted Pair Horizontal Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568.0, TIA-568.1 and TIA-568.2.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, “Copper Structured Cabling Systems”, Section
“Cable Termination Practices".
3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
4. Do not untwist balanced twisted pair cables more than 12 mm (1/2 inch) from the point of
termination to maintain cable geometry.
5. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations
only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
6. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760 mm
(30 inches) and not more than 150 mm (6 inches) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets,
racks, frames, and terminals.
7. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
8. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.
9. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
10. In the communications equipment room, install a 3-m- (10-foot-) long service loop on each
end of cable.
11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, “Copper Structured Cabling Systems”,
Section "Pulling and Installing Cable". Monitor cable pull tensions.
12. Install all patch cords with proper attention paid to bend radii.
13. Verify lengths and counts of twisted pair copper patch cords with the Engineer and/or
Employer prior to purchase.

B. General Requirements for Fiber Optic Horizontal Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568.0, TIA-568.1 and TIA-568.3
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices".
3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations
only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760 mm (30
inches) and not more than 150 mm (6 inches) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks,
frames, and terminals.
5. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, Use lacing bars and distribution spools.
7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
8. In the communications equipment room, install a 3-m (10-foot) long service loop on each
end of cable.
9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable". Monitor cable pull
tensions as compared to manufacturer’s recommendations.
10. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.
11. Install all patch cords with proper attention paid to bend radii.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 8 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

12. Verify lengths and counts of optical fiber patch cords with the Engineer and/or Employer
prior to purchase.

C. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with
terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend balanced twisted pair copper cable which is not in a wireway or pathway a minimum
of 200 mm (8 inches) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 1524 mm (60 inches)
apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other
potentially damaging items.

D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

E. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.
2. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569 for separating metallic communication cable from
potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569, Annex A, "Firestopping" and BICSI TDMM, Article "Firestopping
Systems".

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, Chapter "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical
Protection" and TIA-607.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 27 Section "Identification for
Communications Systems (TIA)."

3.7 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Comply with requirements in Division 27, Section "Identification for Communications Systems"
for cable and asset management software.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect balanced and optical fiber cable jacket materials for third party testing
certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for
compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for
compliance with TIA-568.0.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 9 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Visually confirm component category marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors,

and patch panels.
3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and
patch cords, and labeling of all components.
4. Test balanced copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and
polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test
cables after termination but not cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568.2.
b. Perform tests with a tester that meets the appropriate performance Level of TIA-1152
by a qualified testing agency and that equipment has been calibrated at least once in the
year prior to the testing date.
c. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for
channel or link test configuration.
5. Balanced Twisted Pair Cables Performance Tests:
a. Test for each telecommunications outlet, CP and MUTOA.
b. Conduct the tests in accordance with TIA-568.1 and TIA-568.2
c. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for
channel or link test configuration.
d. Perform the following tests as a minimum:
1) Wire map.
2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).
3) Insertion loss.
4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
8) Return loss.
9) Propagation delay.
10) Delay skew.
11) Shield integrity test for shielded cables.
6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for balanced twisted pair copper
system after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are
installed.
a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to
the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and
receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance,
and digital subscription line telephone call.
b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network
installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device
at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the
network.

C. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be transferred from the
instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

END OF SECTION 271505

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING (TIA) 271505 - Page 10 of 10

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 272109 - DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Data Communications for Campus Network” except
where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Data Communications for
Campus Network” shall have precedence:
1. Division 27, Section 270501 “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Data Communications for “Campus Network” equipment and software required to
implement a fully operational data network:
a. Access (Edge node) Switches:
1) To connect edge devices and equipment to the network using 10/100/1000 Mbps ,
2.5 Gbps and 5 Gbps
2) Routers: To connect the LAN to external services and Wide-Area Network
(WAN).
b. Firewalls:
1) Web Application Firewall (WAF): Web application firewalls protect web servers
and hosted web applications against attacks in the application layer via HTTP(S)
by filtering, monitoring, and blocking HTTP traffic and against non-volumetric
attacks in the network layer.
2. The LAN shall include software and hardware components such as network equipment,
network management software and hardware, network services and shall interface to
electronic systems.
3. The proposed Wired equipment shall support a Software-Defined Network Architecture.
4. The LAN system shall be designed to meet the initial operation requirements with the
ultimate designed expansion capability to meet the requirements of future operational
growth (in terms of number of ports and offered services) at project completion.
5. The LAN system final design and construction shall comply with the design intent as well
as design specifications listed herein and associated drawings.

B. Related Sections
1. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
2. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
3. Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 263353 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.
7. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
8. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
9. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
10. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
11. Section 270501 - Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 1 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Definitions
1. “OFE”: shall refer to “Owner Furnished Equipment”, which will be provided by the
Owner/Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing this equipment from
the Owner’s premises and re-installing and integrating this equipment in good working
order where required and detailed in these Specifications.
2. "Turnkey System": a complete system of hardware and software delivered to the Employer
ready-to-run.
3. PUE: Power Usage Effectiveness is a metric used to determine the energy efficiency of a.
PUE is determined by dividing the amount of power entering a by the power used to run
the computer infrastructure within it.

C. Abbreviations
1. Unicast RPF: Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding.
2. SDN: Software Defined Network.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and miscellaneous
items that will be installed during the course of the installation process. Such items may not be
indicated in the documents. Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and his Suppliers
when considering:
1. Structured communications system cabling, termination, identification and testing.
2. Provision and installation of phone systems, computer hardware, racks/cabinets and related
networking software and equipment.
3. Copper and Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
4. Provision and installation of UPS in communications rooms.
5. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building
earth electrode system.
6. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility outlets.
7. Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
8. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental control sensors.
9. Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit sleeves, and
penetrations in walls and floors.

B. Accordingly, Contractor shall:

1. Meet jointly with representatives of above systems, Contractors, Operators, Engineer and
Employer to exchange information and agree on details of project implementation,
equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment in technical rooms to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and ensure necessary interface with other systems.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 2 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.7 CONFIDENTIALITY

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Overview of Current Environment and Requirements

B. General Features
1. The Data Network active infrastructure shall be used to provide:
a. data connection of the systems/users plugged within Project premises.
b. data communications between these systems/users and the associated applications
servers.
c. data connection of these systems/users to the external network (World Wide Web
WWW).
d. secure data communications.
2. The Data Network shall provide redundancy at designated levels thus eliminating the
presence of any single point of failure at these designated levels.
3. Coordinate the features of material and equipment so they form an integrated system.
Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
4. The software licensing shall be for the entire network with no limitation on the number of
workstations or standard end-users. In addition, the duration of licenses shall be
coordinated with the client early on in the project.
5. Comply with Division 27, Section "Common Clauses for IT and Security Systems", Article
“Proposed Solution” for licensing.
6. Service Life: The system should be designed, installed and programmed for a service life of
ten years from the date of Project Completion.

1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Network Redundancy, Reliability and Availability

1. Network design should be made to assure real time failure recovery. This is the reason why
redundancy, reliability, and availability are required throughout the network using load
balancing mechanisms and clustering techniques.
2. Since most Manufacturers have implemented proprietary optimizations for such purposes,
detailed information on system performance shall be given by the Contractor.

B. Network Performance and Quality Of Service

1. Performance and Quality of Service (QoS) should be maintained throughout the data
network using, but not limited to, traffic engineering along with efficient queuing,
scheduling, shaping and policing. In addition, the effective use of these tools allows
effective allocation and management of the bandwidth to meet the needs of different users
and applications.
2. Switches shall support the following features:
a. Capability of Queuing, Policing, Shaping and marking Wired and Wireless Traffic
based on Class of Service (CoS) or DSCP.
b. Auto QoS for certain device types and enable egress queue configurations.
c. IEEE 802.1p CoS and DSCP Field classification using marking and reclassification on
a per-packet basis by source and destination IP address, MAC address, or Layer 4
Transmission Control Protocol/User Datagram Protocol (TCP/UDP) port number.
d. Rate limiting based on source and destination IP address, source and destination MAC
address, Layer 4 TCP/UDP information, or any combination of these fields, using QoS
ACLs (IP ACLs or MAC ACLs), class maps, and policy maps.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 3 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. The solution should support intelligent network resiliency, signaling and routing protocols.
Strategic implementation of redundancies and diversity to avoid single point of failure is
also a key design consideration.

C. Network Security
1. Network security should be inherent/built-in at all levels of the network. Steps for securing
the network and providing reliable operations consist of, but are not limited to:
a. Physical Access: Limit and track physical access to all network and server elements.
b. Virtual Access: Limit, authenticate and track access to every network device and
server.
c. Encrypted passwords shall be set on all configuration levels (console, virtual terminals
and SSH).
d. Perimeter Security: Enforce a stringent perimeter security strategy, using network
filters and firewalls, to limit and track all traffic between the Internet, intranets and
user data networks, and the critical telephony and video networks.
e. Virus Scanning and Host Security: Use a comprehensive virus scanning and
server/application security policy.
1) The Anti‐virus software shall perform a device control to manage the
applications and services that can be accessed by users .
f. The system shall be able to use a software machine learning capabilities to
identify and take actions toward threats or anomalies in the network, including
malware detection in encrypted traffic (without decryption) and distributed
anomaly detection.
g. The switch shall have Port security to secure the access to an access or trunk port
based on MAC address to limit the number of learned MAC addresses to deny MAC
address flooding.
h. The switch shall support the following:
1) DHCP snooping to prevent malicious users from spoofing a DHCP server and
sending out rouge addresses.
2) Dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) to ensure user integrity by preventing malicious
users from exploiting the insecure nature of ARP.
3) IP source guard to prevent a malicious user from spoofing or taking over another
user's IP address by creating a binding table between the client's IP and MAC
address, port, and VLAN.
4) Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (Unicast RPF) feature to mitigate problems
caused by the introduction of malformed or forged (spoofed) IP source addresses
into a network by discarding IP packets that lack a verifiable IP source address.
5) Flexible and multiple authentication mechanism, including IEEE 802.1X, MAC
authentication bypass, and web authentication using a single, consistent
configuration.
6) The switch shall support Multidomain authentication to allow an IP phone and a
PC to authenticate on the same switch port while placing them on appropriate
voice and data VLAN.
7) MAC address notification to allow administrators to be notified of users added to
or removed from the network.
8) IGMP filtering to provide multicast authentication by filtering out nonsubscribers
and limits the number of concurrent multicast streams available per port.
9) Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol, Kerberos, and Simple Network Management
Protocol Version 3 (SNMPv3) to provide network security by encrypting
administrator traffic during Telnet and SNMP sessions.
10) TACACS and RADIUS authentication to facilitate centralized control of the
switch and restricts unauthorized users from altering the configuration.
11) Multilevel security on console access to prevent unauthorized users from altering
the switch configuration.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 4 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

12) Bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) Guard/Protection or any equivalent to shut
down Spanning Tree PortFast-enabled interfaces when BPDUs are received to
avoid accidental topology loops.
13) IPv6 RA Guard, DHCPv6 guard, IPv6 Snooping to prevent any Man-in-middle
attack
14) Dynamic VLAN, Downloadable ACLs, Multi-Auth VLAN Assignment, MAC
Based Filtering & Web Authentication security mechanism.

D. Equipment Connection
1. Standard Equipment Connection
a. Standard equipment is connected with no redundancy on a unique 10Mbps/100 Mbps
/1000Mbps/ 2.5Gbps/ 5Gbps/ 10Gbps Ethernet port of the Access Switch, according to
terminal equipment needs.
2. Important Equipment Connection
a. Important equipment is connected by two Ethernet ports to the Access Switch, to
achieve redundancy, load balancing and optimum speed according to terminal
equipment needs.
b. Connections are to be clustered and made, depending on switch technology type:
1) On two different switches in case of “stackable” equipment technology,
2) On two different boards of the same switch in case “chassis” switches are
installed.
3. Critical Equipment Connection
a. Critical equipment is connected by two Ethernet ports of the Access Switches, to
achieve redundancy, load balancing and optimum speed according to terminal
equipment needs and with each port being on a different switch for optimal
redundancy.
b. These critical connections to access switches must be redundant in all ways:
1) On power supply level,
2) In switching matrix,

E. Specific Requirements:
1. Contractor shall submit Manufacturer’s technical validation and endorsement of the design
documentation and implementation.
2. Manufacturer shall carry out risk analysis of the Network design showing advantages and
drawbacks.
3. Manufacturer shall carry out post deployment auditing.

F. The Data Network solution shall be designed to service real time IP telephony and real Time
Applications that can therefore be plugged into it. In particular Voice over IP shall be compliant
with the following features:
1. The implementation of Voice over IP services must be integrated in order to provide
cost/quality with high voice services level. External IP gateway based on PC or other
device will not be accepted. The services and characteristics needed are the following:
a. Compression algorithms: G723.1, G 729A, G711,
b. MF Q23 codes coded and regenerated,
c. Silence suppression and regeneration,
d. Lost frame interpolation,
e. Echo cancellation,
f. Fax modulation/demodulation at 4.8 Kbps, 9.6 Kbps and 14.4 Kbps throughput (fax
relay),
g. Automatic fax detection,
h. Dynamic jitters buffer per direction to be less than 20 ms,
i. Inter node transit,

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 5 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

j. Delay as ITU-T G.114 recommendation (< 150 ms one way delay) and total end to end
delay to support an acceptable quality voice conversation to be less than 200 ms.

G. Software Requirements
1. The availability performance shall be 99.99% on a monthly average combined for all
interdependent systems.
2. The maximum time between detection of an event and its display on a workstation shall be
3 seconds, under normal operating mode (for a mean load on network and on servers).
3. The MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The MTTR shall include the diagnostic time,
active repair/replacement time and the adjustment/testing time on site, but shall exclude the
response time.
4. The Contractor’s response time shall not exceed 1 hour. The response time is defined as the
time that elapses between reporting of a fault and arrival of maintenance personnel at
where the faulty equipment is located.
5. In order to reach the requested MTTR and MTBF, modular design and quick interchange of
modules are required for the Data Network components.
6. Redundancy: At all levels of the architecture, data redundancy shall be ensured. The
detailed design of the Contractor shall highlight the actions adopted to implement this
redundancy.
7. Software Availability (SA) is defined as the probability that the program is performing
successfully, according to specifications, at a given point in time. The Software
Availability shall be better than 99.99%.
8. Task Crash is defined as the unexpected termination of an executing task resulting in the
system not being able to perform the task functions successfully according to
specifications, for any reason. Task Crash is not allowed.
9. System Crash is defined as the unexpected system halt resulting in the system not being
able to continue the operation of the machine, for any reason. System Crash is not allowed.
10. The Contractor shall adhere to recognized structured analysis and design methods
throughout the design process.
11. All compilers and code generators shall be of the latest version and in compliance with
international standards. No undocumented or non-standard feature of the language or
operating system shall be used. Main and disk memory requirements shall be minimized.
12. The Contractor shall ensure that all software delivered to site shall be accompanied by
evidence that the media is free of viruses.
13. No software Beta version shall be used in the network unless specifically authorized by the
Employer.

H. Design Considerations
1. The Contractor shall use a suitable modular design method to enable the software to be
easily modified to cope with additional functionality providing I/O dialogues, billing
equipment and controlling equipment. These additional functionalities are to be proposed
as optional.
2. Network management software to be provided with, but not limited to, impact analysis,
event resolution, policy management, problem diagnosis, real time trending, service
monitoring, SLA compliance, and reporting and out-of-band management stress as per
community SLA reporting capabilities.
3. Network management software and hardware shall be capable of providing
automation and orchestration of the system where the user segmentation, policy and
access connection is monitored, managed and controlled through a centralized
controller thereby simplifying monitoring and management of the network and
assurance for monitoring network health, identifying issue root causes, evaluating
network configuration changes and remediating issues.
4. The expansion of software shall not cause any degradation of the performance of the
system.

I. System Expansion Capacity

1. General Requirements

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 6 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. 25% spare capacity is required at all levels of the system including all switches
(modules and ports), Firewalls (ports), etc.
2. Software Expansion Requirements
a. Software databases working in an off-line or an on-line mode of operation should be
designed to allow for ease of expansion. Where new database structures are
implemented with fixed sizes then at least 25% spare capacity of each entry type and
attribute shall be provided.
b. The Contractor should develop software with possible expansion provision of porting
to other hardware platforms, where practicable. To achieve this, a structured language
and compiler should be used, subject to the approval of the Employer.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.13 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. For system expansion and spare capacity, refer to Paragraph “System Expansion Capacity”,
Article “PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS “of Part 1 of this Specification Section.

1.14 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.15 COMMISSIONING

A. Generally accepted industry standards, as well as manufacturer's written installation

instructions, will be used as a basis for quality control and final acceptance of the works.

B. In-System Commissioning
1. Equipment commissioning shall be done through demonstration of product capability and
compliance with requirements when wired and configured in the system.
2. Test system and power supply redundancies by unplugging redundant links.
3. Check recovery times.
4. Perform CPU switchover tests in switches and routers.

C. When the Contractor has completed his own system tests and when the system record
documents, including drawings, operation and maintenance manuals are complete, the Engineer
and Employer are to be notified that the system fulfils the specifications and is ready for
acceptance testing.

D. The Contractor shall be required to perform a range of Site Acceptance Tests on site for each
individual sub-system to demonstrate that all items have been correctly installed and adjusted
on a location by location basis and that the sub-system operates in every respect in accordance
with the Specifications.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 7 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. During this commissioning phase, the equipment is powered and the automation and
networking are gradually integrated layer-by-layer.

F. The Site Acceptance tests shall be performed by the Contractor. Employer and Engineer reserve
the right to be present during any or all testing.

G. Any defects, which may become apparent during the course of these tests, shall be immediately
rectified by the Contractor at his expense.

H. The Contractor shall provide a test plan in a matrix format for the converged network system
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Layer 1 (physical) resilience testing.
2. Layer 2 re-convergence times (if required).
3. Layer 3 protocol re-convergence times.
4. Link Data Rates:10/100/1000Mbps, 2.5Gbps, 5Gbps, and 10Gbps full duplex
configurations.
5. Round trip delay.
6. Bandwidth utilization per backbone uplink.
7. Frame Errors: % of frames with errors passing through switch ports.
8. Frame Sizes: Check for runt and giant frames.
9. CRC Errors: Ensure frames have correct CRC figures.
10. Packet Loss: Amount of packets dropped during transmission.
11. VoIP Post Dial Delay:
a. Measures the response time to receive a ringback or answer to an outside telephone.
b. Measures call set-up time using SIP or H323.
12. CoS/ToS & QoS including:
a. Jitter, the amount of variance in the packet delay of voice packets.
b. Latency, the delay that components in a path add to the overall response time.
c. Per call bandwidth utilization.
13. Call set-up and release for the following:
a. IP phones connected to the same switch.
b. IP phones connected to different switches.
14. Speech quality evaluation (MOS).
15. WLAN AP coverage patterns, data rates and signal strength.
16. Any other tests deemed necessary by the manufacturer, systems integrator, Engineer or
Employer.

I. Site Acceptance test specifications shall be subjected to configuration management and change
control by the Contractor at every level.

J. If modification or reprogramming is required as a result of the tests, all affected parts of the Site
Acceptance Tests, as determined by the Employer, shall be re-tested.

K. The results of the Site Acceptance Tests, together with any re-testing as a result of failure, shall
be recorded and signed by the authorized personnel of the Contractor and the Employer.

L. Tests are divided into two phases.

1. Preliminary Testing:
a. Mechanical:
1) Mechanical tests,
2) Calibration of the components.
b. Automatism / Electrical:

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 8 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1) Powering Tests with electricity,

2) Control of Input/Output,
3) Control of the safety measure either personal or material,
4) Test of local mode operation.
c. Network / Software Tests:
1) Test of the Network,
2) Test of the Supervision Workstation user interface,
3) Test of the portable Terminal user interface.
2. System Testing:
a. The tests performed during this phase are performed with and without loading
conditions for:
1) the crippled mode (Safe shut down consecutive to loss of energy, etc.),
2) reliability/ease of maintenance tests in accordance with the results of the study
phase.
3) Stress Test.

M. A punch list for correction of defective components or operational failures shall be provided by
the Contractor after the testing procedure.

N. The Contractor shall correct any deficiencies noted on the punch list and shall take corrective
action to assure proper operation. Once corrected, re-testing of the system shall be scheduled.

O. Preliminary Acceptance
1. The system shall be accepted as complete when all base contract works have been
completed and all remedial works have been performed and all documentation has been
submitted and the Employer has received the specified training.
2. Complete records of the testing procedures shall be retained by the Contractor and upon
acceptance these records shall be submitted to the Employer.
1) As part of the acceptance test procedure, the Contractor shall provide hourly
traffic studies for the first four hours on the first business day following site
operation and hourly for one week commencing one week after site operation.
3. Thirty days after the system operational in-service date the Employer shall either accept
the system in writing or notify the Contractor in writing, specifying in reasonable detail
those particulars that the Employer deems unacceptable.
4. With respect to any such particulars that the Contractor reasonably agrees are unacceptable,
the Contractor shall provide in writing the methodology and time line to correct them and
after verification of correction thereof the Employer shall accept the system in writing.

1.16 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.17 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major components
in the system for two years fault-free operation.

C. However, a minimum of 2% peripherals of each type installed, but not less than one from each
type shall be included in the deliverables irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation.

D. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for equipment supplied.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 9 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems".

2.3 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS

A. The network topology to be recommended should be a hierarchical one. A hierarchical network

design has one layer. Each layer provides necessary functionality to the network. Some of the
main functionalities are described below:
1. The Access or Edge Layer provides workgroup/user access to the network.

2.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The system architecture shall support multi-manufacturer interoperability with other

manufacturer’s products and across any QoS infrastructure.

B. MLS (Multi-Layer Switch) Layer-3 Ethernet switches shall be utilized at the access (edge) layer
to connect all field equipment (using auto sensing 10/100/1000 Mbps, 2.5G, 5G, 10G Base-T).
Each MLS Layer-3 Access switch or stack of switches shall support multiple VLANs .

C. The Data Network active infrastructure shall be highly scalable, growing from a small amount
of users up to the ultimate designed expansion capability to meet the requirements of future
operational growth (in terms of number of ports and offered services) - at project completion.
Although implemented mainly for voice and data communications, the infrastructure shall be
capable of multiple means of real time communication (voice, video, instant messaging,
collaboration, etc.). The infrastructure shall provide high availability, redundancy, and
contingency. The infrastructure shall be able to integrate with many other devices and
applications, from existing voice infrastructure to new endpoints and applications.

D. The system architecture shall provide bandwidth management and call admission control to
guarantee at all times that the network and LAN/WAN links are not oversubscribed.

E. The system architecture shall support end-to-end QoS. This shall include, but not limited to,
traffic marking, enhanced queuing services, link fragmentation and interleaving, CRTP, low
latency queuing, link efficiency, traffic shaping, and call admission control.

F. Congestion management and multicast control, shall be implemented to manage real-time voice
and video traffic as well as priority network data traffic. Other LAN/WAN services such as
VLANs/VXLANs, Sub-netting, DNS, Proxies, Access Control Lists, DHCP and Routing
Protocols shall be configured and implemented as part of the LAN solution. WAN connectivity
to the internet and external services shall be secured using Firewalls and intrusion detection
system.

G. The LAN shall be resilient and redundant with automatic fail-over to ensure that performance
and high-availability objectives are met without manual intervention. Recovery mechanisms
must be deployed as part of the network implementation and must be tuned to achieve sub-
second recovery time. All switches shall be inter-connected and configured so that there is not
any single point of failure causing disruptions to LAN operations. Technologies to minimize
packet loss during Supervisor failure (such as Non Stop forwarding (NSF) and Stateful
Switchover (SSO)) and in-service software upgrades (ISSU) shall be part of the devices
specifications.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 10 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

H. All network equipment shall be both IPV4 and IPV6 capable. While the specifications are based
on IPV4, the Contractor , if directed by the Employer, shall implement IPV6 with backward
compatibility to IPV4. Notwithstanding, the Contractor shall define all IP addresses static
ranges and dynamic ranges as well as subnets and subnet masks.

I. Network routing protocols shall be used as recommended including OSPF for internal networks
and BGP for external networks.

J. A Network Management System (NMS) shall be provided as part of each Network to support
around the clock 24/7 operation monitoring and management of all network devices and
operations.

K. For Software Defined Network Installations:

1. The network devices shall support programmability for network management and
configuration.
2. The network shall be scalable to support other sites that will be rolled out in future phases.
3. The network shall support network as a sensor and enforcer (including encrypted traffic) by
addition of minimal hardware and software licenses.
4. The network shall enable network users to work from anywhere, anytime and on any
device throughout the network locally or remotely, while maintaining the same policy
across wired, WAN, Server Room and cloud.
5. The Software Defined Network Solution shall support multi-site deployment for future
expanding.
6. Users from one company shall not have any connection to other companies, unless
permitted.
7. The network shall provide secure multi-service and multi-tenant (wired) solution.

2.5 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance.

B. Even though the Employer may be interested in evaluating an outsourcing operation and
maintenance option for the IT Network, the Project shall still:
1. Have full real time visibility into the network components,
2. Configure hardware, software, and live software configuration files.

C. The Contractor's solution shall have to be redundant by having:

1. Extra availability in the Access layer as a redundancy measure for future expansion or
unexpected failure in this layer,
2. Redundant modules within devices,
3. Links redundancy,
4. Permitting the detection of failed components and allow their replacement while the system
is still in operation,

2.6 TECHNICAL STUDY

A. Preliminary study
1. A thorough study of the different possibilities shall be carried out by the Contractor to
achieve the Contract objectives. The study shall be checked and approved by the Employer
before any attempt by the Contractor to order and process the system.
2. The study shall take into consideration:
a. Types of zoning,
b. Types of data traffic,
c. Ways of carrying them through the dedicated technical rooms,
3. The objectives of the study would be to derive:

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 11 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. The number, position and type of Sub-System Servers

b. The number, position and type of links with other systems
4. Among others, the following possibilities shall be taken into account:
a. Principal Structured Cabling Network is out of order,
b. Principal power supply is out of order,

B. Final study
1. The technical study shall also define precisely the necessary dimensions for both common
network and dedicated network in order to determine the following features:
a. The software license – where applicable to this network - shall not be limited and shall
be opened for any number of users within the Project premises.
b. The software application shall be working on popular and user-friendly platform.
c. The maintenance stations shall be PC-based with GUI's featuring capabilities for
system configuring, annunciation, diagnosis etc.
d. The Contractor shall investigate flexibility of connecting (maintenance) workstations
to the common network as well.
e. The Contractor shall provide the revised list of number and locations of technical
rooms where Data Network equipment will be located based on the above.

2.7 GENERAL HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. Source Limitation
1. Single-Vendor Solution: To ensure compatibility among network devices, all hardware
equipment shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. Solutions which are based on
sourcing equipment from different manufacturers, are not acceptable. Accordingly, there
will be a single vendor for all designated Project areas.

B. All hardware requirements given are the minimum requirements. All Contractor’s proposed
products shall meet or exceed these requirements. Additionally, the hardware selected shall
meet the operational, functional, and performance requirements specified herein.

C. Due to the rapid advancement of hardware technology, the supplied hardware shall be the
“contemporary technical equivalent” of the specified hardware. “Contemporary technical
equivalent” shall be based on a comparison of technology at the time of publication of the
specifications to the technology at the time of ordering the equipment for each phase.

D. Hardware shall be ordered as close to the actual installation date for a given phase as possible.
Final hardware approval and scheduled order date shall be at the sole discretion of the
Employer.

E. Approved Equivalent Substitution: The Contractor may propose an Employer approved

equivalent device. Requests for hardware substitution shall be submitted in writing and include
the hardware cut sheet and the exact configuration being proposed.

F. Environmental Rating: Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under the ambient
environmental temperature, humidity, and vibration conditions encountered at the installed
location. For devices located in harsh environments such as interior uncontrolled or exterior
environments, the Contractor shall provide the necessary housings or enclosures to ensure
proper equipment operation and performance. Continuous operating ranges of temperature and
humidity within Communications Rooms shall be maintained as specified in Division 27,
Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.

G. The Contractor shall provide all termination components to the data outlet including patch cords
for a fully operational LAN, unless noted otherwise.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 12 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

H. Hardware Structures: Contractor shall review casework to ensure proper fit of equipment,
ventilation, etc. Contractor shall verify casework requirements.

I. Equipment racks: Equipment located in telecommunications rooms shall be rack mounted in

standard 19-inch (483 mm) racks complying with EIA/ECA-310-E. Contractor shall provide
the appropriate factory or custom rack mount adapters for all equipment installed in the
equipment racks, whether specifically itemized or not. Contractor shall cover unused slots using
blank panels. The equipment rack shall be approved by the related active component
manufacturer. Comply with Division 27, Section “Communications Equipment Room
Fittings(TIA).”

J. Enclosure Accessories: Contractor shall be responsible for providing fans, shelves, drawers,
special power wiring, ground connections, cables, connectors, appurtenances, and adapters of
any kind necessary to accommodate the system installation, operation, testing, or maintenance.

K. Arrangement: The overall equipment arrangement of servers and racks should be configured to
work in conjunction with the cooling system to provide a low PUE for low energy operation.
Coordinate with Mechanical Department for system requirements.

L. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”, Articles
“Proposed Solution” and “Network Equipment”.

2.8 GENERAL SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. Levels: system software shall provide different access right levels and passwords. To reach a
level, the Operator uses a password to access the system:
1. Level 0: no password is required: access to supervision,
2. Level 1: a password allows to modify a set of parameters,
3. Level 2: a password allows to enter criteria and parameters.

B. More complex user authentication methods (such as multiple-step verification) shall be applied
depending on system criticality level, manufacturer’s recommendation and Employer’s
requirements.

C. Features
1. Software shall provide the following reports as a minimum:
a. Alarm/event history consisting of alarm/event lists,
b. Operator history consisting of database changes and log-ins by Operator.
2. A query function shall allow selected data to be sorted on not less than 3 selection criteria.
3. Software shall allow for a backup function.
4. All servers and workstations shall be fitted with the latest virus protecting software.

D. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”, Articles
“Proposed Solution” and “Network Equipment”.

2.9 WAN SERVICES

A. WAN communication services into the Project networks shall be engineered to maximize
service availability by removing single points of failure.

B. Service availability shall be achieved by

1. Provision of Service Provider (SP) entrance equipment within the Project. Interconnection
and tie-in requirements (space, power supply, cooling, wiring, etc.) shall be fully
coordinated with the Service Provider for proper operation and services.
2. Implementation of WAN services utilizing fault tolerant transmission techniques and
equipment.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 13 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. All required services whether voice, data or video, shall be delivered over the Structured
Cabling Network cables and the resilient device/system configuration.

D. The applications and services shall be equally divided and load balanced across this solution,
thereby providing resilient logical and physical paths in the event of a failure. This solution will
ensure continued service to the networks should any one element of the WAN system fail.

E. The Contractor shall provide adequate number of circuits, or equivalent bandwidth via an
alternative technology, for the data bandwidth requirements for each building with proper
sizing submitted to the consultant. The data bandwidth requirements have been based upon the
availability of HSIA, off site and remote access.

F. Depending on the types of technologies available both VoIP telephony and data system
bandwidth requirements could be shared. The Contractor shall provide the most suitable option
available within their tender response. Alternative technologies may include:
1. Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS).
2. Metro Ethernet/Ethernet.

2.10 WAN DEVICES & NETWORK SECURITY

A. With the implementation of a converged network in pump station, incorporating LAN

accessibility, /interfaces to external resources and additional Third Party access, network
security is paramount.

B. The network security policies required for the converged network system in pump station shall
provide multiple levels of logical security to restrict and monitor access including:
1. Port Security to restrict access into a device by disabling the ports on a per port basis.
2. VLAN implementation requiring routing between VLAN networks.
3. Filtering by MAC address, IP address, Protocol, Port Number, role-based or Application.
4. Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA).
5. Remote Access Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers.
6. Terminal Access Controller-Access Control System.
7. Firewalls.
8. Proxy
9. Intrusion detection and prevention mechanisms.
10. Utilization of Access Control Lists (ACLs).
11. Encryption techniques.
12. Implementation of security protocols e.g. IPSec, IEEE 802.1X and SSL/TLS.
13. Virtual Private Network (VPN) capabilities.
14. Packet filtering.

C. To provide WAN connectivity and security converged network , the following functional areas
shall be implemented:
1. WAN Access devices.
2. WAN Routers.

D. The Software Defined Network Solution shall allow network operations to easily control the
WAN configuration.

E. Both sets of firewalls shall, as minimum, provide the following functionality:

1. Application inspection and control.
2. Protocol conformance checking.
3. Stateful packet inspection.
4. Alert notification and logging.
5. Application traffic rate and session control.
6. Telephony Application Layer Gateway (ALG) inspection.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 14 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

F. The WAN perimeter routers shall have the following specification:

1. Redundant route processors.
2. Dual power supplies.
3. Minimum forwarding performance shall accommodate all type/bandwidth of service
provider connectivity and employer requirements.
4. Multiprotocol support.
5. WAN connectivity shall be sized with accordance to the project/Operator requirements and
submitted to the engineer for approval.
6. SNMP, RMON & RMON II network management standards.

2.11 CONVERGED NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS

A. The converged network system shall meet the current and future strategic requirements. The
following criteria have been identified as being necessary to ensure a high performance, high
availability, logically resilient, scalable and manageable converged network system. The
converged network system shall provide:
1. Resilience, both physical and logical.
2. 99.99% availability.
3. Modularity, with the capability to support emerging technologies without major upgrades.
4. Support for business-quality voice and video traffic without any degradation in
performance.
5. Ethernet based technology interfaces.
6. Support for current IPv4 network addressing and future compatibility with IPv6 network
addressing schemes.
7. Dynamic and centralized support for Moves, Adds and Changes, thereby reducing
operational costs and facilitating network management.
8. A minimum product life cycle of five years after network commissioning and to be verified
by the network product vendor. Products are to be three years before end-of sale and five
years before end-of life after the network commissioning and to be verified by the network
product vendor
9. Converged network systems are increasing in complexity and criticality to an
organization’s business success, therefore industry recognized design guidelines and
standards based practices shall be followed and implemented.

2.12 CONVERGED NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONALITY

A. IP Addressing
1. Due to the size of the network, the requirement for the Data, Voice, AV, Security and BMS
systems, etc., to be converged, an IPv4 RFC 1918 IP Addressing scheme shall be
implemented.
2. The IP Addressing scheme shall reflect the type of device, system and its location within
the network.
3. The IP Address scheme shall be easily summarized for management and routing purposes.
4. The IP Addressing scheme shall provide growth capacity, allow for future network
topology changes and be easy to implement and maintain.
5. IP Addresses shall be both statically and dynamically configured. The Contractor shall
specify the types of devices and equipment that shall have static and dynamic IP addresses.
6. DHCP features shall be provided by the Contractor.
7. The Contractor shall provide details within their proposal, for review and approval, of their
recommended IP Addressing scheme.

B. IP Multicasts
1. The IP Multicast address allocation shall conform with administratively scoped IP
Multicast addressing (RFC2365) and be based on the geographical scope of the application,
the defined business groups and areas within the Project organizations.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 15 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. The IP Multicast boundaries shall be configured around either the edges of each building or
groups of buildings with a common function such that their multicast will not leave that
boundary.
3. An IP Multicast boundary shall be configured around the entire network so that all
multicast traffic is not permitted to leave the converged network.
4. To ensure that multicast traffic does not overwhelm the network, restrictions on bandwidth
within each multicast boundary shall be applied.

C. The Contractor shall provide details within their proposal, for review and approval, of their
recommended IP Multicast Addressing scheme.

D. Virtual LAN (VLANS)

1. To provide multiple groups of users’ access to secure services via a single converged
network system within the Project,
2. VLANs shall not be allowed to propagate beyond the Access layer devices.
3. Separate VLANs shall be provided for the following services carried over the converged
network system within the Project:
a. General administration applications per department or application.
b. Specialist applications, e.g. SAP.
c. Security systems.
d. Building Management systems.
e. Network management.
f. Out of band management (dependent on device).
g. Storage systems. (Separate VLAN/VXLAN to provide dedicated bandwidth and
increased throughput to users accessing the stored data).
h. Back-Up systems. (Separate VLAN to provide a dedicated channel to allow periodical
Back-Ups without causing any impact on the operational network).
i. Access to web-based e-learning and training facilities.
j. Staff and visitor access to the public internet (www).
k. Integration Systems.
4. Hosts per VLAN should not exceed the industry standard guidelines,
5. The Contractor shall provide details within their proposal, for review and approval of their
recommended VLAN Addressing scheme.

E. IP Virtual Private Networks (IP VPN’s)

1. The Infrastructure shall support multiple IP VPN’s including, but not limited to;
a. Data
b. Audio / Video
c.
d. SCADA
e. Internet Services
f. Data Backup
2. Each VPN shall be routed to areas requiring connectivity to the respective VPN only.
3. Within the Main Telecom Rooms, VLAN’s shall be assigned to their respective VPN.
4. Routing between VPN’s shall be controlled and permitted at designated devices.

F. IP Routing Protocol (OSPF)

1. Multi-protocol enterprise network with many routes, a robust, efficient and scalable routing
protocol shall be provided.
2. OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) shall be implemented as the routing protocol for of the
Project converged networks as it is a hierarchical, modular, standards based, rapid
converging and granular routing protocol.
3. The OSPF configurations shall provide load balancing between multiple equal cost paths
ensuring that traffic is efficiently forwarded.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 16 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. The hierarchical structure of OSPF shall allow the configuration to map directly onto the
Network.
5. The Contractor shall provide details within their proposal, for review and approval, of their
recommended layer 3 routing protocol configurations and convergence paths to achieve the
required logical resilience.

G. Service Delivery
1. To ensure the delivery of time sensitive traffic, e.g. voice and video, the converged network
within the Project, shall incorporate several technology mechanisms dedicated to traffic
service levels and prioritization.
2. To provide traffic prioritization for ‘time sensitive’ applications and services, the
converged network within the Project shall be configured to deliver Class of Service (CoS)
at Layer 2 and Quality of Service (QoS) at Layer 3.
3. Voice and video traffic shall be prioritized as critical, whereas data traffic shall be
prioritized as routine or best effort.
4. To ensure sufficient bandwidth is available within the LAN for the VoIP solution, the
Codec to be utilized shall be G711. G711 provides slightly better voice quality than G729
due to the additional payload and header information it carries.

H. Power Over Ethernet (POE)

1. When the terminal requires inline power supply, it is to be connected to a “POWERED
ETHERNET” port ( IEEE 802.3bt Type 3 Class 6 standard). "
2. The Ethernet, 10BASE-T/100BASE-T/1000BASE-T,/ 2.5GBASE-T/ 5GBASE-T/
10GBASE-T RJ45 interfaces providing connectivity to the end user devices shall be PoE
enabled, thereby utilizing the Power Source Equipment method for delivery of power to the
end user device.
3. The Contractor shall provide details within their proposal, for review and approval, of the
power consumption calculations ensuring that the proposed chassis power supplies are of
sufficient capacity for the systems PoE requirements.

2.13 CONVERGED NETWORK MANAGEMENT

A. General
1. After implementation of the converged network system, a network management platform
for monitoring, controlling and managing the operational requirements of the whole
converged network system within the Project shall be provided.
2. The Network Management System shall provide the capability to manage and monitor both
the devices connected to the network and the services delivered over the network.
3. Provide a single dashboard for Assurance Monitoring and Network and Policy Automation.
4. Provide software defined network automation and orchestration system where the
user segmentation, policy and access connection are monitored, managed and
controlled through a centralized controller thereby simplifying monitoring and
management of the network.

B. Standards
1. Applicable portions of the following IETF standards, issued as RFCs, for Network
Management shall be adhered to for each Network Management Systems (NMS):
RFC # Description
1157 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
1212 Concise MIB definitions.
1213 Management Information Base for Network Management of
TCP/IP based internets (MIB2).
1757 Remote Monitoring (RMON).
2021 Remote Monitoring 2 (RMON2).

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 17 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2578 Structure of Management Information v2 (SMIv2).

2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base.
3411 Architecture for describing SNMP management frameworks.
3412 Message processing and dispatching for SNMP.
3413 SNMP applications.
3414 User based Security Model (USM) for SNMPv3.
3415 View based Access Control Model (VACM) for SNMP.
3416 Version 3 of Protocol Operations for SNMP.
3417 Transport Mappings for SNMP.
3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for SNMP.
7426 Software-Defined Networking (SDN): Layers and Architecture
Terminology
7348 VXLAN

C. The NMS services shall be provided for:

1. Metro Ethernet Infrastructure and MPLS equipment
2. WAN Equipment
3. Third-Party integrated equipment and any other network service devices hosted by
the present network.
4. Active network equipment (switches, routers, etc…).

D. Network Management Capabilities

1. The Network Management System shall, as a minimum, provide the following features and
functionality:
a. Full compatibility with the proposed converged network equipment.
b. Automatic and manual device/system configuration and discovery using standards
based discovery mechanisms.
c. Automatic and manual Layer 2 & 3 topology configurations.
d. Separate VLAN /VXLAN for device management.
e. Individual services management of operational VLANs/VXLANs.
f. Capability to perform remote diagnostic tests on system resources and devices.
g. Raise alarms when set thresholds are reached.
h. Provide alarm history and device/fault management.
i. Back-up capability to allow for trend analysis.
j. Diagnose Quality of Service (QoS)/Class of Service (CoS) problems.
k. Provide packet, protocol and traffic/bandwidth analysis.
l. Call detail recording.
m. Provide remote access via the WAN to facilitate moves, adds and changes.
n. Provide dynamic functionality to Moves, Adds and Changes (MACs), allowing the
network administrators a visual, graphical user interface. It shall interpret changes as
they occur. As part of the network management system, this specifically details any
disconnected, failed or 3rd party devices being connected to the system.
o. Diagnostic testing, performance and connectivity details about different modules,
devices and configurations comprising the converged network within the Project.
p. WAN performance measurements including latency, jitter and node to node service
quality.
q. IP Service Level Agreement (SLA).

2.14 CONVERGED NETWORK SWITCHES

A. Device Hierarchy

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 18 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. The most important aspect of a converged network design is the implementation of the
hierarchical model incorporating the access layers, providing inter-connectivity at both the
physical and logical layers for a fault tolerant network.
2. Converged network design shall be based on the one tier being the access layer.

B. Device Functionality
1. To provide a fully converged and resilient network system within the Project ; at a
minimum the network devices shall provide functionality and support for the following
protocols and specifications:
a. Layer 2 bridging/switching supporting Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s) and
Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w) to remove bridging loops and provide redundant
fail over at Layer 2.
b. Multiple VLAN implementations (IEEE 802.1Q).
c. Multiple VXLAN implementations
d. Layer 2 Class of Service.
e. Layer 3 routing capabilities.
f. IP Multicast routing/IGMP snooping.
g. QoS prioritization (IEEE 802.1p). QoS implementation is to provide quality and
priority of voice and other time based transmissions whilst ensuring data delivery.
h. Power over Ethernet specification (IEEE 802.3bt).
i. IPSec and enhanced security specification (IEEE 802.1X).
j. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) & H323.
k. Network Time Protocol (NTP).
l. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) (IEEE 1588v2).
m. Wireless LANs (IEEE 802.11) (for Wireless LAN).
n. Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) (for Telephony).
o. SNMP, RMON, NETCONF (YANG) & RMON II network management standards.
p. Redundant Power Supply shall be provided for each networking device.
2. “Campus Network” Switches shall have the following provisions:
a. The Switch shall be based on a Modular OS Architecture capable of hosting
applications
b. The Switch shall have IPv6 support in hardware, providing wire-rate forwarding for
IPv6 networks.
c. The Switch shall have at least one 10/100/1000 Mbps dedicated Ethernet Management
Port.
d. The switch shall be able to be managed, controlled and monitored via centralized
controller, based on Software Defined architecture.
3. “Campus Network” Switches shall support the following features:
a. Redundant Power Supplies and power stacking capabilities.
b. AES-256 with MACsec 256-bit encryption algorithm available on all models.
c. A tamper-resistant, strong cryptographic, single-chip solution that provides hardware
authenticity assurance to uniquely identify the product so that its origin can be
confirmed to the equipment manufacturer. This provides assurance that the product is
genuine.
d. A modern operating system with support for model-driven programmability including
Netconf (YANG), on-box Python.
e. Container technology.
f. Zero Touch Provisioning and Plug and Play to ease the deployment.
g. Routing protocols such OSPF, BGPv4, IS-ISv4.
h. IPv6 Routing capable protocols such as OSPFv3 in hardware.
i. IP Multicast and PIM, PIM Sparse Mode, PIM Dense Mode, PIM Sparse-dense Mode
& Source-Specific Multicast for Wired Clients.
j. basic IP Unicast routing protocols (static, RIPv1 & RIPv2) should be supported.
k. VPN Routing.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 19 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

l. The Switch shall be able to discover (on both IPv4 & IPv6 Network) the neighboring
device giving the details about the platform, IP Address, Link connected through etc,
thus helping in troubleshooting connectivity problems.
m. Detection of Unidirectional Links (in case of fiber cut) and to disable them to avoid
problems such as spanning-tree loops.
n. Centralized VLAN Management, VLANs created on the switch should be propagated
automatically.
o. IEEE 802.1d, 802.1s, 802.1w Spanning-Tree & its Enhancement for fast convergence.
p. IEEE 802.1q VLAN encapsulation.
q. IEEE 802.1Q tunnelling (Q-in-Q).
r. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP).
s. IGMP.
t. IEEE 802.3ad (LACP) to combine multiple network links for increasing throughput
and providing redundancy.

C. Device Types
1. There is one types of device configuration that shall be implemented within each GH
converged network system: fixed:
a. Fixed: Typically used for deployment within the Access layer, providing a fixed
configuration regarding:
1) Port count 24 or 48.
2) RJ45, SFP, SFP+, QSFP, QSFP+, connectivity with data rates of 10Mbps,
100Mbps, 1000Mbps or 1Gbps, 2.5Gbps, 5Gbps, 10Gbps.
3) Power capacity for PoE ( IEEE 802.3bt ).
4) Module slots for backbone uplinks.
2. Access Switches Systems Requirements
a. Required Topology: Reliability of solution shall demonstrate equivalent performance
such as 50 ms recovery.
b. Switch Fabric Capacity: shall be selected to provide non-blocking wire-line speed.
c. The stacked access switches shall provide a minimum bandwidth of 480 Gbps.
d. Packet per Second Forwarding Rate: shall be selected to provide non-blocking wire-
line speed.
e. Supported Protocols and Standards (as a minimum): IEEE802.1s, IEEE802.1w,
IEEE802.1X, IEEE802.3ad, IEEE802.3af, IEEE802.3at, IEEE802.1D, IEEE802.3,
IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab, IEEE802.3ae, IEEE802.3z, IPv4 routing, IPv6 routing,
multicast routing, modular quality of service (QoS), Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) Snooping, DHCP Guard, Dynamic ARP Inspection, IP Source-
Guard, ACLs, Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding, IGMP snooping, broadcast storm
control.
f. Management Controls: SDN Controller, CLI, RMON I and II standards, SNMPv3.
g. Minimum Number of ports required:
1) The Contractor shall design and size the Data Network access/edge and top of
rack switches following the requirements and guidelines as described in this
Section and the referenced Sections of this Specification.
2) The Contractor shall design and size the Data Network access/edge switches based
on the selected network topology, level of redundancy required, the number of
uplinks each switch will connect to, and the number of users/ports that will be
served by each switch. This has to be evaluated and approved by the Client
Representative.
3) The Contractor shall account for 25% additional port capacity to accommodate
for future growth and expansion.
h. Traffic Management: The following features shall be supported as a minimum:
1) L2, L3 Classifications.
2) IEEE 802.1p COS.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 20 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3) Policing mechanism.
4) Shaping.
i. VLAN Support (as a minimum):
1) IEEE 802.1Q tagging.
2) Physical Ports.
3) MAC addresses.
j. Supported Redundancy: The following items shall be fully redundant:
1) Power Supply.
2) System shall be hot-swappable.
3) Fan.
4) The edge/access switches shall be stackable and support redundant stacking
configuration.
k. Power:
1) PoE (IEEE802.11af): Power over Ethernet support.
2) PoE+ (IEEE802.11at): Power over Ethernet plus support.
3) PoE++ (IEEE802.11bt): Power over Ethernet plus plus support.
l. Stacking for fixed configuration access switches: A typical Access layer “stack” shall
consist of up to 4 switches. The maximum acceptable number of switches connected
together in a stack is 6 depending on the overall bandwidth requirements.
3. Access Switch Systems Architecture
a. The edge/access switches shall support a stackable configuration that can be managed
as one logical switch.
b. The stacking architecture shall be hot swappable, such that a replacement of any unit
in the stack can be done without powering down the stack.
c. The general architecture of the switch shall guarantee full line-rate forwarding.
d. The network communication processors shall allow all types of packet filtering such as
acceptance, discarding and policing while maintaining the same full line-rate
forwarding.
e. The switch shall have high availability including, but not limited to, fully non-blocking
switch fabric, fully non-blocking back-plane switching.
4. Outdoor Industrial Switch Requirements (As Applicable)
a. Industrial grade ruggedized outdoor switch. Suitable for Din-rail mounting or built into
the equipment they serve
b. The switch shall be capable of operating in an extended temperature range. It shall also
have vibration, shock, surge, and noise immunity ratings complying to specifications
for outdoor environments.
c. Compact form factor.
d. Managed, non-blocking wire-line speed, four 10/100/1000 Mbps ports.
e. Supported Protocols and Standards (as a minimum): IEEE802.1s, IEEE802.1w,
IEEE802.1X, IEEE802.3af, IEEE802.3at, IEEE802.1D, IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u,
Dynamic ARP Inspection, IP Source-Guard, ACLs, IGMP snooping, MAC address
port locking, broadcast storm control.
f. Supports self-healing ring topology.
g. Management Controls: CLI, RMON I and II standards, SNMPv3.
5. Fixed configuration Access devices, shall be of the following specification:
a. 24 or 48 10/100/1000 Mbps ports.
b. 1 /2.5 /5 /10Gbps uplink ports.
c. PoE++ capabilities.
d. Redundant power supply via in-built power supply modules.
e. Switch fabric (backplane) capability of 480Gbps minimum.
f. Layer 3 forwarding performance 500mpps.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 21 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

6. Stacking for fixed configuration access switches: A typical Access layer “stack” shall
consist of up to 4 switches. The maximum acceptable number of switches connected
together in a stack is 6 depending on the overall bandwidth requirements.
7. Routers
a. Router is required to connect external networks and circuits to the LAN. A standalone
device shall be utilized. Routers shall provide redundant interfaces for all external
network circuits (e.g. where one interface is active the other interface shall be in
standby mode), as well as achieve adequate security requirements.
b. The WAN interface modules shall support E1, E3, High-Speed Serial Interface (HSSI),
T3/E3 ATM, OC-3 ATM, and OC-3/12/48 SDH. Actual interfaces shall be defined
during the system detailed design.
c. All routers shall support OSPF and BGP routing protocols.
d. They shall have the capability to provide the following at a minimum:
e. The following numbers for Router features were based on the following CISCO
products; (ASR 1002-X) (ISR 4461)

Capability
USB Ports: 2
Flash memory: 8GB
Memory (DRAM): 4 GB
10Gbps LAN Ethernet connectivity
Dual redundant power supplies
Connectivity options: T1/E1, T3/E3, xDSL, GE
Protocols: IPv4, IPv6, static routing, Open Shortest Path First (OSPF),
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), IPSec, IPv4-to-IPv6 Multicast, MPLS,
802.1ag, 802.3ah, L2 and L3 VPN, 802.1q VLAN, QoS, SNMP, RMON &
RMON II
Advanced Security (with all necessary licenses)
Stateful Firewall
Onboard hardware VPN acceleration (Digital Encryption Standard DES,
Triple DES3DES, and Advanced Encryption StandardAES)
Intrusion Prevention (if firewalls are not provided)
Content Filtering (if web-application filters are not provided)

8. Web Application Firewall:

a. WAF shall, at a minimum, protect the network from the following Security Risks:
1) Injection flaws, such as SQL, NoSQL, OS, and LDAP injection.
2) Broken Authentication.
3) Sensitive Data Exposure.
4) XML External Entities (XXE).
5) Broken Access Control.
6) Security Misconfiguration.
7) Cross-Site Scripting XSS.
8) Insecure Deserialization.
9) Using Components with Known Vulnerabilities. Components, such as libraries,
frameworks, and other software modules.
10) Insufficient Logging & Monitoring.
11) Cookies poisoning
b. The WAF shall have, at a minimum, the following Intelligent Traffic Processing
capabilities:
1) L7 requests per second: 10M
2) L4 connections per second: 4.2M
3) L4 HTTP requests per second: 35M

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 22 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4) Maximum L4 concurrent connections: 300M

5) Throughput: 20 Gbps/ 20Gbps L4/L7
c. The below sub-subparagraph might not be needed for small scale projects
d. Hardware DDoS Protection shall be a minimum of 50M SYN cookies per second
e. Memory shall be a minimum of 32 GB DDR4
f. Hard Drive shall be a minimum of 1x 500GB Enterprise Class HDD or SSD

D. System Configurations
1. Prior to configuration and installation, all converged network devices and components shall
be bench tested and checked to ensure functionality via:
a. Power-up self tests.
b. Software/firmware revisions for compatibility and integration.
2. Prior to installation on site, as much of the converged network system as possible, shall be
configured and bench tested in a ‘proof of concept’ scenario in order to remove any
inconsistencies or conflicts with the design or specified products.
3. All chassis based devices shall be fitted with their relevant modules prior to installation on
site.
4. Network device naming conventions and passwords shall be provided in the Project.

2.15 INTEGRATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The following systems shall be integrated and interfaced to the Data Communications Network
specified in this Section:
1. Data Communications for Data Center.
2. The Structured Cabling Network (SCN).
3. The Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).

B. The description of all of the above interfaces shall be defined into software requirements
specification such as:
1. The type of interface: databases queries/tables, shared flat files, messages, etc.,
2. The frequency: periodically or on-demand.

C. SCN
1. SCN shall be used for communication all over the Project network.

D. Time synchronization
1. Time synchronization is ensured by Project Master Clock broadcasting messages compliant
with Precision Time Protocol (PTP) and fall-back NTP/DT2. All equipment delivering
time-stamped data takes into account these messages.

E. Other Packages
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the integration of all data interfaces, requested by
any described Building Services System - as applicable to the Project, as well as any other
needed interface with general Communications and Security Systems, or other packages
etc.:
a. Security and Access Control System
b. Video Surveillance System (VSS)
2. The Contractor shall ensure the general coordination between the system equipment's and
any other systems under its scope of work, or to be coordinated with others, as to avoid any
technical mismatches which may prevent its proper long-term operation and maintenance.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 23 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.16 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Coordination
1. The Structured Cabling Network (SCN) installer shall be in charge of providing the patch
cords for the various data communications systems. Coordinate with the SCN installer on
quantities, lengths and specifications of patch cords to be delivered.
2. Wide Area Network WAN Interface: confirm that interconnection is done directly through
WAN devices. If such is the case, coordinate with WAN supplier to verify:
a. Common interfaces speeds and standards.
b. Redundancy consistence: interconnection through WAN should not lower any of the
data communications network SLA commitments.
c. Time signal synchronization: generally WAN equipment provides the master clock
signal source for the entire network.
3. Coordinate with the Engineer and/or Employer the following plans to be implemented in
the network:
a. Addressing plan.
b. Security plan.
c. Applications port designations.
d. Any other logical information that is not self-discovered by the system.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Installation shall be supervised and tested by the Contractor.

B. The works shall be performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced
engineers, all of whom shall be properly factory trained and qualified for this work.

C. Upon installation of network components, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance to verify that the data network
system is in proper working condition. Remove temporary connections when tests have been
satisfactorily completed.

D. Correct malfunctioning units at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.

E. Integrated Tests with other Contractors / Service Providers:

1. Make equipment available for testing and demonstrating various features specified.
2. Communication Tests: performed for the serial or LAN interface to ensure that proper
communication can be established between data network equipment and the interfacing
systems.
3. Point-to-Point Tests: performed on the data network equipment to the interfacing systems
in order to verify the functionality and correct animation of each I/O point/command
including alarm messages.
4. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest until total system meets requirements of the
Specifications and complies with applicable standards. Prepare written records of tests.
5. Schedule testing with at least seven days advance notice.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 24 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for training the Employer designated personnel in all
aspects of each system, as well as training Employer designated training personnel to allow the
Employer to provide future training without the aid of the Contractor. Training shall consist of
both classroom and hands-on course work. Topics will include instruction in the operations,
diagnostics and maintenance of hardware and software.

B. In order to provide a reliable training, Employer’s maintenance personnel who are involved in
the training program of this system, could be involved in the follow up of system installation as
well. The Contractor shall provide an installation agenda to the Employer and confirm with him
any coordination with assigned trainees.

C. Trainers
1. Engage factory authorized service representatives to explain programming and operation of
system and to train Employer's personnel on procedures and schedules for maintaining,
programming, operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, and servicing the system.
2. Credentials of the Trainers shall be approved by the Manufacturer and by the Employer.

D. The Contractor shall submit a training plan that describes the Contractor training methods and
techniques. The plan will maximize flexibility of the training schedule in terms of the course
structure and content, and the differing availability of students within each category and from
each agency. The Contractor shall support discussions and inputs from the Employer to the
Final Training Plan. The training plan shall include but shall not be limited to:
1. A brief description of training capabilities and Contractor planned facilities.
2. A description of training methodology and objectives.
3. The recommended amount and minimum amount of training necessary for User and
Administrator proficiency.
4. Training development team qualifications and experience.
5. The space or classroom requirements including computer and other equipment necessary to
conduct training; indicate what will be provided by the Contractor and what is expected
from the Employer.
6. Identification of training materials to be approved by the Employer.

E. The Contractor shall provide training products and present hands-on training at Employer
designated facilities including conference rooms or other training room on site, using
operational equipment as approved by the Employer.

F. Quantity of training sessions and number of personnel to be trained shall be as per the direction
of the Employer.

G. Four (4) categories of system training shall be provided:

1. Category 1 User training shall include all end-user functionality involved in the daily use
and operation of all Contractor supplied hardware and software. Target audience may
include any and all end users, help personnel, managers, and/or supervisors who will be
required to use Contractor equipment to accomplish job functions utilizing Contractor
deliverables. All user training shall cover the operation methods, procedures and processes
necessary to optimize utilization of the system(s).
2. Category 2 Field Technician training shall include all technical and functional activities
involved in the daily support, and operation(s) of all contractor supplied field hardware.
Target Audience will include Employer field support personnel, managers, supervisors
and/or technicians who will be required to support, modify, and maintain Contractor
provided field equipment to allow all end-users of Contractor system to accomplish job
functions utilizing Contractor deliverables. Field Technician training shall include typical
field hardware for each specific systems and other such technical areas as necessary to
manage and maintain the complete system(s).

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 25 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Category 3 Head End Hardware Administrator training shall include all high-level
technical and functional activities involved in the daily support, and operation(s) of all
Contractor supplied hardware. Target Audience will include Employer support personnel,
managers, supervisors and/or technical administrators who will be required to support,
modify, maintain and/or administer Contractor Head End Hardware equipment to allow all
end-users of Contractor system to accomplish job functions utilizing Contractor
deliverables. Head end Hardware Administrator training shall include server hardware,
SAN hardware, interface management/troubleshooting, and other such technical areas as
necessary to manage and maintain the system(s).
4. Category 4 System Administrator training shall include all high-level technical and
functional activities involved in the daily support, and operation(s) of all Contractor
supplied hardware and software. Target Audience will include Employer support
personnel, managers, supervisors and/or technical administrators who will be required to
support, modify, maintain and/or administer Contractor equipment to allow all end-users of
Contractor system to accomplish job functions utilizing Contractor deliverables. System
Administrator training shall include server operating systems, applications systems, system
security, granting of authorities, database & system backup procedures, database
management/administration, interface management/troubleshooting, and other such
technical areas as necessary to manage and maintain the system(s).

H. Quality and adequacy of training is of extreme importance to the Employer regardless of the
instructional methodology utilized. Contractor shall provide a method by which students will
be evaluated, prior to the start of a course; to ensure they have the basic skills necessary to
complete and utilize Contractor provided training. Upon course completion verify using
approved test procedure that students have acquired the skills from Contractor training to
optimally perform the tasks contained in the course(s) of instruction. Identify and provide
recommendations for remedial training of students failing to demonstrate required skills.
Training shall be deemed acceptable when 90% of the students demonstrate satisfactory
proficiency. Final training reports and proficiency testing shall be submitted to the Employer as
part of final project documentation.

I. An overall training schedule shall be submitted for review and approval. The Contractor shall
provide maximum flexibility in scheduling training and shall construct an approach that does
not require “bulk” availability of the student populations. Areas of flexibility shall include the
structure and timing of course elements, the shifts being trained, the availability of students, and
modularity of courses or subject streams in such a way as to minimize or eliminate sequential
dependencies between classes. For each time that training is provided, at least four (4) sessions
of each category of training shall be held. At least one (1) session shall be provided during
standard daytime working hours, and at least one (1) session shall be provided during evening
working hours. Specific days, work shifts, and hours for training must be approved by the
Employer.

J. Training materials shall be provided to the Employer a minimum of ten (10) working days in
advance of the training courses. Training must be in a modular format and shall provide
separate areas of training materials specific to administration, operation, and maintenance.

K. Training sessions and intervals shall be as follows:

1. System Pre-Acceptance training – shall be provided at least two (2) weeks before system
acceptance testing.
2. Follow-up Training Session – shall be provided between fifteen (15) and sixty (60) days
after pre-acceptance training, with times and dates to be selected by Employer.
3. Factory Certification Training – Manufacturer’s factory certification training shall be
provided for at least two (2) Employer designated technicians per individual system. If
performed at the manufacturers’ facilities, the Contractor shall provide transportation,
lodging, per diem, and all training materials associated with the factory certification
training. This training shall provision for the Employer approved staff to provide minor
service to the system during the warranty period (when required) without voiding the
conditions of the warranty.

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 26 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

L. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of factory produced training session on DVD or
other approved media for future system operation training. In addition, the Contractor shall
record one (1) training class session of all four (4) categories at each training interval and
provide three (3) copies of each session to Employer on DVD or other approved media.
Provide training materials for each attendee to use at each training session and to keep for
reference. Provide an additional five (5) hardcopies and two (2) electronic versions in Word or
PDF of each piece of training material used at each session at the completion of each training
session. Employer will have unrestricted, unlimited right to reproduce all training material as
necessary to conduct training by the Employer for Employer employees.

M. Should the Contractor update training material prior to any final System Acceptance, Contractor
shall provide a complete and fully integrated replacement copy of the training materials, both
hard and soft copy, to the Employer during the software maintenance period.

N. The Contractor shall provide a listing of recommended continuing education and professional
development course work that would be useful in order to assist personnel in maintaining the
system long-term including factory, classroom, user group, seminar course work and/or
professional certification courses.

END OF SECTION 272109

DATA COMMUNICATIONS FOR CAMPUS NETWORK 272109 - Page 27 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 272133 - WIRELESS DATA NETWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions, Project Requirements
and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Wireless Data Network” except where the latter calls for
otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Wireless Data Network” shall have precedence:
1. Division 27, Section 270501 “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Wireless Data Network active infrastructure and associated services based on
Wi-Fi 6 Standard consisting of:
1. Wireless Radio Access Points and Antennas.
2. Wireless Data Network System Administration Software.
3. Access and Security Control Software.

B. Related Sections
1. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
2. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
3. Section 260533 - Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
4. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems
5. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 263353 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.
7. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
8. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
9. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
10. Section 271305 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
11. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
12. Section 270501 – Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems.
13. Section 272109 - Data Communications for Campus Network.
14. Section 272111 - Data Communications for Data Center.
15. Section 272140 – Virtual Servers Environment (VSE).
16. Section 272231 – Computers & Related Peripherals.
17. Section 273123 – IP-Based Telephony Communications System.

C. Servers and related ancillaries shall comply with:

1. Division 27, Section “Virtual Servers Environment (VSE)”.
2. Division 27, Section “Computers & Related Peripherals”.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Comply with: PCI DSS, The Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 1 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Definitions
1. “OFE”: shall refer to “Owner Furnished Equipment”, which will be provided by the
Owner/Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing this equipment from the
Owner’s premises, and re-installing and integrating this equipment in good working order
where required and detailed in these Specifications.
2. Wireless Radio Access Point: equipment interfacing over the air between the data network
fixed network and the mobile end users.
3. Wireless Terminal Client: equipment integrated or connected to the end user terminal
equipment that enables data transmission over the air to the Wireless Data Network. This
terminal client can be a Wi-Fi enabled PC, PDA or specialized handset (e.g. scanner,
customized PDA), Wireless IP Phones, etc.
4. Antenna: equipment attached to the Radio Access Points in order to amplify the RF signal
to/from the Access Point, and to point the RF signals to specific coverage areas. These
antennas shall be omni-directional or directional.
5. Wireless Data Network System Administration Software: software installed on a dedicated
platform and enabling the operation and maintenance of the Radio Access Points.
6. Access Control Function Software: software installed on a dedicated platform and enabling:
a. The control of the users authorized on the Wireless Data Network.
b. The centralized management of the rights of the Wireless Data Network users.
c. The configuration of the security components of the network (authentication,
encryption, VLANs).

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and miscellaneous
items that will be installed during the course of the installation process. Such items may not be
indicated in the documents. Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and his suppliers
when considering:
1. Structured communications system cabling, termination, identification and testing.
2. Provision and installation of phone systems, computer hardware, and related networking
software and equipment.
3. Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
4. Provision and installation of a Virtualized Servers Environment.
5. Provision and installation of UPS in communications rooms.
6. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building
earth electrode system.
7. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility outlets.
8. Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
9. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental control sensors.
10. Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit sleeves, and
penetrations in walls and floors.

B. Accordingly, Contractor shall:

1. Meet jointly with representatives of above systems, Contractors, Operators, Engineer and
Employer to exchange information and agree on details of project implementation,
equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment in technical rooms to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and ensure necessary interface with other systems.

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 2 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.7 CONFIDENTIALITY

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Overview of Project Environment and Requirements

B. General Features
1. The purpose of the Wireless Data Network is to provide users with a complete radio system
allowing access to information systems within the Project premises. Users of the system are
individuals who will be authorized to access internet and other resources and applications
through the Wireless Data Network. The infrastructure shall support the various user
communities, and dedicated VLAN’s shall be assigned to each user community.
2. The Wireless Access Point shall have built-in IoT radios with onboard Bluetooth (BLE) 5,
NFC and Zigbee (802.15.4) (2.4GHz) capabilities. This will allow deploying and managing
IoT-based location services, asset tracking services, IoT sensors and security solutions.
3. In addition, the AP shall behave as a converged access point that allows customers to
seamlessly integrate any new wireless technologies through the on-board USB port.
4. The system shall be compatible with all IEEE 802.11 standards in use.
5. The system shall have minimum functionalities of IEEE 802.11d, IEEE 802.11e, IEEE
802.11f, and IEEE 802.11i.
6. The system shall support IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac standards simultaneously.
7. The system shall support IEEE 802.11ax standard.
8. The system shall be PCI DSS compliant.
9. The system shall support a seamless wireless coverage for the different services full
functionality of the Project including, data, voice and video.
10. 25% spare capacity is required at all levels of the system.
11. The software licensing shall be for the entire network with no limitation on the number of
workstations or standard end-users.

C. Data Network Performance and Software Requirements of the Project: Refer to Division 27,
Section “Data Communications for Campus Network” and Section “Data Communications for
Data Center”.

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Product Certificates: signed by manufacturers of equipment and /or software certifying that
furnished products comply with Contract requirements, defined by the standards IEEE
802.11a/b/g/n/ac and IEEE 802.11ax as applicable. Include Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™: a, b, g, n, ac,
ax, Wi-Fi Vantage™, and Passpoint® by Wi-Fi Alliance.

C. Operating License for the Outdoor Wireless Access System as required by local regulations and
Authorities Having Jurisdiction: Submit evidence of application for license to install, possess and
operate outdoor wireless networks prior to installing equipment. Furnish the license, or if the
license has not been received, a copy of the application for license, to the Employer prior to
installing the equipment. When license is received, deliver original license to Employer.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 3 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.14 COMMISSIONING

A. Generally accepted industry standards, as well as manufacturer's written installation instructions,

will be used as a basis for quality control and final acceptance of the work.

B. In-System Commissioning
1. Equipment commissioning shall be done through demonstration of product capability and
compliance with requirements when wired and configured in the system.
2. Test system and power supply redundancies by unplugging redundant links.
3. Check recovery times.

C. When the Contractor has completed his own system tests and when the system record documents,
including drawings, operation and maintenance manuals are complete, the Engineer and
Employer are to be notified that the system fulfills the specifications and is ready for acceptance
testing.

D. The Contractor shall be required to perform a range of Site Acceptance Tests on site for each
individual sub-system to demonstrate that all items have been correctly installed and adjusted on
a location by location basis and that the sub-system operates in every respect in accordance with
the Specifications.

E. During this commissioning phase, the equipment is powered and the automation and networking
are gradually integrated layer by layer.

F. The tests shall be performed by the Contractor. Employer and Engineer reserve the right to be
present during any or all testing.

G. Any defects, which may become apparent during the course of these tests, shall be immediately
rectified by the Contractor at his expense.

H. The Site Acceptance Test Specifications shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted for
Approval by Engineer and Employer.

I. The Site Acceptance Test Specifications shall be subjected to configuration management and
change control by the Contractor at every level.

J. If modification or reprogramming is required as a result of the tests, all affected parts of the Site
Acceptance Tests, as determined by the Employer, shall be re-tested.

K. The results of the Site Acceptance Tests, version of software and hardware tested, together with
any re-testing as a result of failure, shall be recorded and signed by the authorized personnel of
the Contractor and the Employer.

L. Tests are divided into two phases.

1. Preliminary Testing:
a. Mechanical:
1) Mechanical tests,
2) Calibration of the components.

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 4 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. Automatism / Electrical:
1) Powering Tests with electricity,
2) Control of Input/Output,
3) Control of the safety measure either personal or material,
4) Test of local mode operation.
c. Network / Software Tests:
1) Test of the Network,
2) Test of the Supervision Workstation user interface,
3) Test of the portable Terminal user interface.
2. System Testing:
a. The tests performed during this phase are performed with and without loading conditions
for the crippled mode (Safe shut down consecutive to loss of energy, etc.).

M. A punch list for correction of defective components or operational failures shall be provided by
the Contractor after the testing procedure.

N. The Contractor shall correct any deficiencies noted on the punch list and shall take corrective
action to assure proper operation. Once corrected, re-testing of the system shall be scheduled.

O. Preliminary Acceptance
1. The system shall be accepted as complete when all base Contract works have been completed
and all remedial works have been performed and all documentation has been submitted and
the Employer has received the specified training.
2. Complete records of the testing procedures shall be retained by the Contractor and upon
acceptance these records shall be submitted to the Employer.
3. As part of the acceptance test procedure, the Contractor shall provide hourly traffic studies
for the first four hours on the first business day following site operation and hourly for one
week commencing one week after site operation.
4. Thirty days after the system operational in-service date the Employer shall either accept the
system in writing or notify the Contractor in writing, specifying in reasonable detail those
particulars that the Employer deems unacceptable.
5. With respect to any such particulars that the Contractor reasonably agrees are unacceptable,
the Contractor shall provide in writing the methodology and time line to correct them and
after verification of correction thereof the Employer shall accept the system in writing.

1.15 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.16 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major components in
the system for two years fault-free operation.

C. However, a minimum of 2% peripherals of each type installed, but not less than one from each
type shall be included in the deliverable irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation.

D. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for equipment supplied.

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 5 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems".

2.3 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE AND REQUIREMENTS

A. The Wireless Data Network shall be conceived in such way as to allow for easy extensions.

B. Access Points shall be allocated in a manner that supports anticipated utilization patterns.

C. The system shall support IEEE 802.11i, WPA, WPA2, WPA3 (Enterprise and Personal (SAE)),
Enhanced Open (OWE), Advanced Encryption Standards (AES), Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol (TKIP) and IEEE 802.1X with multiple Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) types.
A set of RADIUS servers and management workstations shall be provided as part of the wireless
solution.

D. Wireless Access Point Controllers shall be provided as required to support and manage all WAPs
within the Project.

E. The system shall provide dynamic channel assignment based on changing RF conditions as well
as interference detection, recalibration, automatic adjustable power and load balancing.

F. In multi-floor facilities, the Contractor shall perform tests on the floor above and the floor below
the access point to mitigate interference.

G. The Contractor shall provide:

1. Plenum rated enclosures, antennas, patch cables and all other required hardware and software
for a fully functional Wireless LAN Service.
2. Radio Frequency (RF) survey maps, heat maps including any required test equipment prior
to and after the installation of the WLAN, subject the Engineer’s approval.
3. A post-installation RF Survey to verify access point performance including data rate,
received signal strength and quality of service. Monitor the site RF survey readings by
walking varying distances away from the access point to simulate roaming users' movement
patterns. Repeat the test with fully loaded Access Points to test performance of the system
during peak activities.
4. Based on the above studies, the variations to the final quantities, and locations of Access
Points will not be considered as a variation to the Tender submittal.
5. Access Points shall support multiple Service Set IDentifier (SSIDs) to segregate user groups.
All units shall support multicast to Unicast conversion to minimize impact to the wireless
network performance.
6. All required hardware, software and system configuration to support a wireless networking
environment with near zero delay and no re-authentication requirements as users roam freely
within the same floor and between two different floors.
7. Ancillary devices or specialized Access Points as required to support monitoring and
adjustment of radio signals to optimize wireless performance.
8. Dual-bands 2.4-2.5 GHz and 5.150-5.875 GHz omni-directional, directional patch, and
adaptive antennas as required to meet coverage and performance requirements for indoor and
- if required- outdoor Access Points.
9. The WLAN shall provide coverage mainly 'in-building', as indicated on the layout drawings,
but with the capability to be extended to serve the outdoor areas of the Project campus if/as
needed .

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 6 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

10. MESH technology shall be implemented to help extend the coverage area of Access Points
– if required.

H. The system shall allow users to associate to the access point only upon authentication with the
RADIUS server. All wireless management equipment shall be modular to support expansion of
spaces and users through simple addition of equipment or software licenses.

I. User Groups Access: Contractor shall coordinate the user groups’ access requirements with the
Employer and all involved stakeholders. The below paragraphs are examples and shall be
validated with the employer/stakeholders.
1. Employer’s Staff should be allowed full access to designated resources within the Local Area
Network and the internet.
2. Staff SSID shall utilize Wi-Fi Protected Access 3 (WPA3) for authentication and encryption.
Guests and visitors shall only be permitted to access the Internet using Hypertext Transfer
Protocol (HTTP) and HTTS Secure (HTTPS) protocols.
3. Guests SSID shall be open with a web based captive portal for authentication.

J. Mobile voice and video devices shall utilize WPA3 with a Pre-Shared Key for authentication and
encryption and shall be restricted to specific application server or service.
1. Adhoc WLAN network detection and containment.
2. Valid access point impersonation detection.
3. Frame floods, Fake access point and Airjack attack.
4. Death broadcast and null probe response detection.

K. The wireless networking solution shall support multiple authentication technique including, but
not limited to: IEEE 802.1X based user authentication with RADIUS server; Point-to Point
Protocol (PPP) based user authentication over Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) based Virtual
Private Networks (VPNs); Captive Portal based user authentication for Guests.

L. On a continuous scanning basis, the system shall identify rogue Access Points interfering with or
connected to the LAN and highlight approximate location for the source transmission on the
wireless management graphical user interface facility layout map.

M. The WLAN shall track unique “signatures” for every wireless client in the network, and deploy
defense mechanisms if a new station is illegitimately introduced (i.e. man-in-the-middle).

N. The WLAN shall protect against Denial of Service (DoS) including association and de-
authentication floods. The system shall drop illegal requests and generate alerts to notify
administrators of the attack.

O. The WLAN shall support IEEE 802.11e and Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) including Layer-2 and
Layer-3 Quality of Service (QoS) (for roaming). The system shall automatically take steps to
ensure voice and video transmissions receive uninterrupted service ensuring a consistent end-to-
end delay less than 160ms; jitter shall not exceed 1ms 99.9% of time, and packet loss shall not
exceed 0.1% at all times.

P. The WLAN shall inspect, track, tag, and dynamically prioritize traffic based on the application
flow - even when multiple types of traffics originate from the same device using the same MAC
address.

Q. The WLAN Management Software shall support planning, configuration, fault and performance
management, reporting, Mapping, RF visualization, and location tracking including a
consolidated view of all components and users on the network including visualized RF coverage
and performance measurements (e.g. Access Point actively connected users, transmission power,
status, etc.) in a single, flexible graphical user interface. The WLAN Management Software shall
facilitate network-wide configuration, advanced reporting, and trending.

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 7 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

R. The WLAN shall support WLAN Mesh to be able to create a wireless distribution system using
IEEE 802.11 MAC/PHY layers supporting broadcast/multicast and Unicast delivery over self-
configuring multi-hop topologies.

2.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS – WI-FI 6 (802.11ax) ACCESS POINTS

A. Minimum Performance Criteria: The following outlines the minimum performance criteria
required for the WLAN solution:
1. WLAN Architecture: Lightweight Access Points with Wireless Controllers.
2. WLAN Technology: Certified Wi-Fi IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac and IEEE 802.11ax.
3. Dual-radio concurrent 2.4 & 5 GHz, internal adaptive antenna.
4. Enhanced multi-user feature OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access)
5. Maximum built-in eight (8) spatial streams:
a. Single-User SU-MIMO: 4x4, and 4 spatial streams.
b. Multi-User MU-MIMO: 4x4 and 4 spatial streams.
6. Supported data rates:
a. 802.11ax: 4 to 4800 Mbps
b. 802.11ac: 6.5 to 1732 Mbps
c. 802.11n: 6.5 to 600 Mbps
d. 802.11a/g: 6 to 54 Mbps
e. 802.11b: 1 to 11 Mbps
7. Channelization:
a. 20, 40, 80, 160 MHz
8. Supported Channels, dependent on configured country regulatory domain:
a. 2.4GHz: (MCS0 to MCS11, NSS=1 to 4, HE20 to HE40)
b. 5GHz: (MCS0 to MCS11, NSS=1 to 8, HE20 to HE160)
9. Support up to 1024 client devices per AP.
10. Support up to 16 BSSID’s per radio.
11. Maximum number of resource units (concurrent client) (using OFDMA): 37 per 80 MHz
channel per radio.
12. WLAN Sensitivity at 80MHz bandwidth, MCS11 (HE80), 5GHz radio:
a. Minimum Guaranteed Rx Signal: -64 dBm
b. Maximum Guaranteed Tx Signal: 15 dBm.
13. WLAN Radio Management: Automatically adjustable in 0.5 dBm increments of transmit
power.
14. WLAN Minimum Service Set IDentifier (SSID) to be confirmed with Employer / Operator.
15. WLAN Security & Authentication: IEEE 802.11i, IEEE 802.1X with RADIUS Servers
16. WLAN Roaming: Near Zero downtime - Seamless transfer without re-authentication within
the same building
17. WLAN Quality of Service: IEEE 802.11 and Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM)
18. WLAN Other Requirements: IPv4/IPv6, IEEE 802.1Q VLAN enabled, VPN enabled,
Multicast to Unicast Support, IEEE 802.1P CoS, Windows 10 x64 and Mac OSX support or
latest.
19. Security:
a. 802.11i, WPA2, WPA3, Wi-Fi Enhanced Open (OWE)
b. 802.1X
c. Advanced Encryption Standards (AES)
d. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP)
20. Supported modulation types:
a. 802.11b: BPSK, QPSK, CCK
b. 802.11a/g/n: BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM
c. 802.11ac: BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM, 256-QAM

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 8 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

d. 802.11ax: BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM, 256-QAM, 1024-QAM

21. Other Wi-Fi Features:
a. Space-time block coding (STBC) for increased range and improved reception.
b. Low-density parity check (LDPC) for high-efficiency error correction and increased
throughput.
c. Target Wait Time (TWT) to support low power devices.
d. BSS coloring.
e. Transmit beam-forming (TxBF) for increased reliability in signal delivery.
f. 802.11n/ac packet aggregation: A-MPDU, A-MSDU.
g. Hotspot 2.0: seamless cellular-to-Wi-Fi carryover for guests.
22. Integral Antenna Peak Gain:
a. 2.4 GHz: Peak gain 4 dBi, integrated down-tilt omnidirectional antenna, in 4x4 MIMO.
b. 5 GHz: Peak gain 5.5 dBi, integrated down-tilt omnidirectional antenna, in 4x4 MIMO.

B. Interfaces:
1. WLAN Interfaces: 2 LAN ports with IEEE 802.3at/bt power-over-Ethernet (PoE) on both
ports with Category 5e/6/6A cables.
a. Either: 2 x (1000BASE-T, 2.5GBASE-T, 5GBASE-T) Ethernet (RJ-45) – IEEE
802.3bz, auto-sensing;
b. Or: 1 x (10/100/1000BASE-T) Ethernet (RJ-45) – IEEE 802.3ab, auto-sensing plus 1 x
(1000BASE-T, 2.5GBASE-T) Ethernet (RJ-45) – IEEE 802.3bz, auto-sensing;
2. Integrated IoT radios with onboard Bluetooth (BLE) 5 and Zigbee (802.15.4) (2.4GHz)
capabilities.
3. IoT ready: USB 2.0 host interface (Type A connector).
4. four RP-SMA type connectors, where required for external dual-band antennas based on the
RF environment.
5. Multiple status LED’s to indicate system and radio status.

C. Compliance:
1. EMC
a. EN 55032
b. EN 55035
c. FCC: 47 CFR Part 15.
2. Plenum Rating
a. UL 2043
3. Human Safety/RF Exposure
a. EN 62311
4. Safety
a. UL/IEC/EN 60950-1

2.5 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Wireless Data Network Controllers:

1. A redundant wireless controller system shall be deployed.
2. The controller system shall be composed of a single or multiple devices, as long as the system
behaves as a single entity.
3. The controller system shall allow mapping between SSIDs and VLANs.
4. The controller shall support the following radio management features:
a. Automatic channel and power settings for controlled AP’s.
b. Simultaneous air monitoring and end user services.

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 9 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. Self-healing coverage based on dynamic RF conditions.

d. AP load balancing based on number of users.
e. AP load balancing based on bandwidth utilization.
f. Coverage hole and RF interference detection.
g. 802.11h support for radar detection and avoidance.
5. The controller system shall support the following management features; in case these features
were not built-in, external systems which operate in conjunction with the controllers shall be
allowed; however, preference will be given to integrated systems:
a. RF Planning and AP Deployment tools.
b. Centralized AP provisioning and image management.
c. Live coverage visualization with RF heat maps.
d. Detailed statistics visualization for monitoring.
e. Remote packet capture for RF troubleshooting.
f. Interoperability with mainstream radio network analyzers.
g. Multi-controller configuration management.
h. Location visualization and device tracking.
i. System-wide event collection and reporting.

B. Wireless Radio Access Points

1. Description: this is the equipment, which interfaces the LAN cabling network to the Wireless
Data Network terminal clients.
2. Electrical Connection:
a. It is recommended to power the Access Point over the Ethernet. Two configurations
must be considered.
b. 1st case: The Access Point is located less than 90 meters away from the switch. In this
case, the Access Point can be directly connected to the switch with copper wires using
the Ethernet and the power is transported over this Ethernet connection.
c. 2nd case: The Access Point is located more than 90 meters away from the switch. In this
case, the losses due to the copper wire are too important and the Access Point cannot be
directly powered over Ethernet. Additional equipment must be introduced in the network
architecture. The switch and the Access Point, in this case, must be linked using an
optical fiber cable. RJ45/optical converters must be included as well as power injectors.
3. Data Connection:
a. Access on the Structured Cabling Network consists of two RJ45 outlets connected to the
nearest floor switch for connection of the Wireless Radio Access Point.

C. Antennas
1. The external antenna is optional since the AP will have an integrated antenna, and the need
for one depends on the local RF environment. Such antennas shall be connected to the radio
Access Point in order to amplify the emitted signal when needed and to amplify the received
signal when the level is too low. There are two types of antennas: directional and omni-
directional.
2. Directional antennas: A patch antenna, which provides more energy in one direction, and
less energy in all other directions. As the gain of a directional antenna increases, the angle of
radiation usually decreases, providing a greater coverage distance, but with a reduced
coverage angle.
3. Omni-directional antenna: An omni-directional antenna is designed to provide a 360°
radiation pattern. This type of antenna is used when coverage in all directions from the
antenna is required.

D. Wireless Data Network Administration Software System

1. This is a software installed on a dedicated platform and which enables:

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 10 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Configuration Management: Configuration of the Access Points, the VLANs and other
software functionalities such as the QoS levels assigned to different VLAN’s or
applications.
b. Fault Management: Centralization of all the alerts sent by the switches and the Access
Points using the SNMP protocol.
c. Performance Management: Generation of the statistics concerning the data traffic
carried by the Access Points.
2. It is not mandatory to separate the System Administration Software of the Wireless Data
Network from the global data network management tool. It would be better for the System
Administration Software of the Wireless Data Network to be a module of the management
tool.
3. The System Administration Software of the Wireless Data network shall be installed on a
platform equipped with proper disk and power backups in case of breakdowns.
4. The System Administration Software System shall be installed on two separate and identical
platforms.

E. Access and Security Control Software System

1. This is a software installed on a dedicated platform and which enables:
a. The control of the authorized Wireless Data Network users.
b. The centralized management of the rights of the Wireless Data Network users.
c. Access control configuration, administration and supervision of Wireless Data Network
system and its security components.
2. The software shall make it easy to add and/or remove users and rights.
3. Since the authentication process uses IEEE 802.11i standard, the Access Control Software
shall follow the RADIUS specifications.
4. The software shall be installed on a platform equipped with proper disk and power backups
in case of breakdowns. This system shall be installed on two separate and identical platforms
for redundancy.

F. Kensington security lock or similar physical security feature shall be provided for anti-theft
protection.

G. Enclosures
1. The Contractor shall provide enclosures for the external Wireless Radio Access Points to
meet the prevailing environmental requirements.
2. The Contractor shall size the enclosures to fit the housed Wireless Radio Access Points
components.
3. Enclosures shall be IP66 rated.

2.6 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

A. The network shall be partitioned among the different user populations and applications using
multiple VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network).

B. The user authentication process shall rely on IEEE 802.11i and 802.1X standard and shall follow
the Employer requirements, taking into account the expected security level of each network and
data package.

2.7 FREQUENCY PLANNING

A. Multi-cellular radio architecture shall be adapted to the local standards regulation with proper
frequency planning.

2.8 TECHNICAL STUDY

A. Preliminary Study

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 11 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. A thorough study of the different possibilities shall be done by the Contractor to achieve the
Contract objectives. The study shall be checked and approved by the Employer before any
attempt by the Contractor to order and process the system.
a. Such a study shall take into consideration:
1) Types of zoning,
2) Ways of implementing them through the dedicated technical rooms,
b. The objectives of the study would be to derive:
1) The number and position of the specific equipment in the Wireless Data Network
cabinet,
2) The adopted types of antennas,
3) The number, position and types of antennas in each area,
4) The number, position and type of links with other systems.
c. Among others, the following possibilities shall be taken into account:
1) Principal Wireless Data Network is out of order,
2) Principal power supply is out of order,

B. Final Study
1. The technical study shall also define precisely the necessary dimensions for both common
network and dedicated network in order to get the following features:
a. Redundant servers shall be operating in hot standby and any update shall be
automatically done on both servers.
b. The software license shall not be limited and shall be opened for any number of users
within the Project premises.
c. The software application shall be working on popular and user-friendly platform.
d. The maintenance stations shall be PC-based with GUI’s featuring capabilities for system
configuring, annunciation, diagnosis etc.
e. The Contractor shall investigate flexibility of connecting (maintenance) workstations to
the common network as well.
f. The Contractor shall provide the revised list of number and locations of technical rooms
where Wireless Data Network equipment will be located based on the above.

C. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”, Articles “Proposed
Solution” and “Network Equipment”.

2.9 GENERAL SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. Levels
1. Software shall provide different access right levels and passwords. To reach a level, the
operator uses a password to access the system:
a. Level 0: no password is required: access to supervision,
b. Level 1: a password allows to modify a set of parameters,
c. Level 2: a password allows to enter criteria and parameters.
2. More complex user authentication methods (such as multiple-step verification) shall be
applied depending on system criticality level, manufacturer's recommendation and
Employer's requirements.

B. Features
1. Software shall provide the following reports as a minimum:
a. Alarm/event history consisting of alarm/event lists,
b. Operator history consisting of database changes and log-ins by operator.
2. A query function shall allow selected data to be sorted on not less than 3 selection criteria.
3. Software shall allow for a backup function.

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 12 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. All servers and workstations shall be fitted with the latest virus protecting software.

C. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”, Articles “Proposed
Solution” and “Network Equipment”.

2.10 INTEGRATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Network Interfaces
1. The Wireless Data Network shall provide data to other systems through the network.
Interfaces to be developed shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
a. The Structured Cabling Network (SCN).
b. The Active Communication and Data Processing Equipment.
c. The Master Clock System.
d. The Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).
2. The description of all these interfaces shall be defined into software requirements
specification such as:
a. The type of interfaces: databases queries/tables, shared flat files, messages, etc.
b. The frequency: periodically or on-demand.
3. SCN Interface
a. SCN shall be used for communication all over the Project network.
4. Active Communication and Data Processing Equipment Interface
a. Wireless Data Network equipment linked to the SCN shall provide network monitoring
facilities to the Active Communication and Data Processing Equipment.
b. Active Communication and Data Processing Equipment ensure the security of the
interface with Wireless Data Network end users.
5. Time Synchronization
a. Time synchronization is ensured by Project Master Clock broadcasting messages
compliant with Precision Time Protocol (PTP) and fall-back NTP/DT2. All equipment
delivering time-stamped data take into account these messages.

2.11 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Installation of Wireless Access Points

1. The Contractor shall carry out a detailed site survey to finalize the locations of AP’s based
on actual coverage on site. Layout drawings marked up with the proposed locations of AP’s
and coverage area shall be submitted for Employer for approval. Installation shall proceed
only after the formal approval of the same.
2. A 5m loose length of data cable shall be left available at each Radio Access Point in order to
move these Radio Access Points in case of localized propagation constraints.
3. Radio Access Points shall be mounted on fixed support (wall, ceiling). If possible, in public
areas, Access Points shall be concealed.
4. Outdoor Access points shall be installed in enclosures to meet the environmental
requirements.

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 13 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. Installation of Antennas
1. Radio Access Point antennas shall be wall, mast or ceiling mounted depending on the model,
and connected to the proper dedicated interface.
2. Antennas shall be mounted following the Manufacturer’s specifications.
3. The Contractor shall identify the best location for antenna controlling SNR, signal and noise
level. If possible, in public areas, antennas shall be hidden or aesthetically integrated to the
building.
4. Plug cord shall be provided for each antenna. Low loss or extra low loss cable shall be used
to ensure the proper signal level. Access point RF power shall be adjusted to obtain the
coverage needed, but power shall never exceed the Country Regulations for RF power.

D. Installation of the Wireless Data Network System Administration Software

1. The Wireless Data Network System Administration Software shall be installed on two
separate platforms.
2. The two platforms shall be identical, shall be used for Wireless Data Network System
Administration Software, and shall function in redundant mode using the same database.
3. Wireless Data Network System Administration Software shall preferably be built as one
integrated module of the general LAN and WAN data equipment network administration
software.
4. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer to validate the different Wireless Data
Network administrators and to identify what equipment each administrator will be authorized
to manage.

E. Installation of the Wireless Data Network Access and Security Control Software
1. Wireless Data Network Access and Security Control Software shall be installed on two
separate platforms, preferably in two different buildings.
2. These two platforms shall be identical, and shall be used for the Wireless Data Network
Security Control and Access Servers.
3. These two platforms shall function in redundant mode using the same database.
4. The Access and Security Control Software platform shall be distinct from the management
platform.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

END OF SECTION 272133

WIRELESS DATA NETWORK 272133 - Page 14 of 14

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 272231 - COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions, Project Requirements
and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Computers & Related Peripherals” except where the latter
calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Computers & Related Peripherals” shall have
precedence:
1. Division 27, Section 270501 “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Computers and related peripherals including but not limited to computer workstations, laptop
computers and printers.
2. Servers and related ancillaries.
3. IT Software (Operating System, Office productivity, Antivirus, etc.)

B. Related Sections
1. Section 270501 - Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Definitions
1. PUE: Power Usage Effectiveness is a metric used to determine the energy efficiency of a
data center. PUE is determined by dividing the amount of power entering a data center by
the power used to run the computer infrastructure within it.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.
a. The scope shall include the following:
1) Provide workstations Type 1 with 2 monitors each for the fire alarm/access control
and CCTV systems
2) Provide servers for CCTV management
3) Provide local storage.

COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS 272231 - Page 1 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and miscellaneous
items that will be installed during the course of the installation process. Such items may not be
indicated in the documents. Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and his suppliers when
considering:
1. Structured communications system cabling, termination, identification and testing.
2. Provision and installation of phone systems, racks/cabinets and related networking software
and equipment.
3. Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
4. Provision and installation of a Virtualized Servers Environment.
5. Provision and installation of UPS in communications rooms.
6. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building
earth electrode system.
7. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility outlets.
8. Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
9. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental control sensors.
10. Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit sleeves, and
penetrations in walls and floors.

B. Accordingly, Contractor shall:

1. Meet jointly with representatives of above systems, Contractors, Operators, Engineer and
Employer to exchange information and agree on details of project implementation,
equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment in technical rooms to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and ensure necessary interface with other systems.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.9 MISCELLANEOUS QUALITY MANAGEMENT TOPICS

A. For the following quality management topics, refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses
for IT & Security Systems":
1. CONFIDENTIALITY
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
3. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
4. WARRANTY
5. COMMISSIONING
6. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
7. Warranty time shall be 2 years all components of the system since handover

1.10 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major components in
the system for two years fault-free operation.

C. However, a minimum of 2% peripherals of each type installed, but not less than one from each
type shall be included in the deliverables irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation.

COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS 272231 - Page 2 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for equipment supplied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems".

2.3 GENERAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. Source Limitation
1. Multi-Vendor Solution: A hybrid (Best of Breed) configuration. For each category of
(hardware) technology used, obtain system components from one leading manufacturer who
shall assume responsibility for the system components and for their compatibility.
2. Single-Vendor Solution: To ensure compatibility among network devices, all hardware
equipment shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. Solutions which are based on sourcing
equipment from different manufacturers, are not acceptable.

B. All hardware, software, firmware, and/or operating system requirements given are the minimum
requirements. All Contractor’s proposed products shall meet or exceed these requirements.
Additionally, the selected product shall meet the operational, functional, and performance
requirements specified herein.

C. Due to the rapid advancement of hardware technology, the supplied product shall be the
“contemporary technical equivalent” of the specified hardware. “Contemporary technical
equivalent” shall be based on a comparison of technology at the time of publication of the
specifications to the technology at the time of ordering the equipment for each phase.

D. Products shall be ordered as close to the actual installation date for a given phase as possible.
Final product approval and scheduled order date shall be at the sole discretion of the Employer.

E. Approved Equivalent Substitution: The Contractor may propose an Employer approved

equivalent device. Requests for product substitution shall be submitted in writing and include the
product cut sheet and the exact configuration being proposed.

F. Environmental Rating: Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation under the ambient
environmental temperature, humidity, and vibration conditions encountered at the installed
location. For devices located in harsh environments such as interior uncontrolled or exterior
environments, the Contractor shall provide the necessary housings or enclosures to ensure proper
equipment operation and performance. Continuous operating ranges of temperature and humidity
within Communications Rooms shall be maintained as specified in Division 27, Section
“Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.

G. The Contractor shall provide all termination components to the data outlet including patch cords
for a fully operational LAN, unless noted otherwise.

H. Hardware Structures: Contractor shall review casework to ensure proper fit of equipment,
ventilation, etc. Contractor shall verify casework requirements.

I. Equipment racks: Equipment located in telecommunications rooms shall be rack mounted in

standard 19-inch (483 mm) racks complying with EIA/ECA-310-E. Contractor shall provide the
appropriate factory or custom rack mount adapters for all equipment installed in the equipment

COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS 272231 - Page 3 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

racks, whether specifically itemized or not. Contractor shall cover unused slots using blank
panels. The equipment rack shall be approved by the related active component manufacturer.
Comply with Division 27, Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.

J. Enclosure Accessories: Contractor shall be responsible for providing fans, shelves, drawers,
special power wiring, ground connections, cables, connectors, appurtenances, and adapters of any
kind necessary to accommodate the system installation, operation, testing, or maintenance.

K. Arrangement: The overall equipment arrangement of servers and racks should be configured to
work in conjunction with the cooling system to provide a low PUE for low energy operation.
Coordinate with Mechanical Department for system requirements.

L. Thermal Management Systems including “Air Containment Systems” should be well integrated
into the HVAC system design. Coordinate with Mechanical Department for system requirements.

M. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”, Articles “Proposed
Solution” and “Network Equipment”.

N. The Contractor's implementation methodology shall follow the best commercial and industry
practices when such practices are not mentioned.

O. The Contractor shall guarantee that the implementation of all products complies with the
governmental rules and regulations.

P. All systems shall have a rollback procedure for any action or transaction committed.

Q. All active data network hardware devices shall include all software as required for
interconnectivity. All active devices shall have fully functional software platform as specified by
the Contract documents:
1. IT Software’s (Operating System, Office productivity, Antivirus, etc.) shall have the
following minimum requirements:

Software Vendor / application

Operating System Windows 10 With downgrade option to lower version
Office productivity Microsoft Office professional – latest version
Antivirus Kaspersky, Symantec, or equivalent
Other Adobe Acrobat Reader

2.4 WORKSTATION EQUIPMENT

A. Computer Workstation - Type 1

1. Workstation ATX form factor
2. Processor: 3.4GHz latest generation of octa core xeon processor AMD Equivalent
3. Memory: 32GB 3200MHz or 2666 MHz DDR4 quad-channel SDRAM
4. Disk: 1TB SSD and 4TB HDD
5. PCI Express 3.0 x16
6. BluRay.
7. Minimum 6 USB 3.0 ports
8. 10/100/1000 Ethernet Port
9. Ergonomic 104 keys keyboard
10. 100-240 VAC, 50/60Hz Power Supply.
11. Video Card(s)
a. 4 monitor support
b. PCI Express 3.0 x16 compatible

COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS 272231 - Page 4 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. Minimum 8 GB GDDR5 graphics memory

d. HDMIV2.0b connectors supporting 3840 x 2160 resolution per display
e. RoHS, RoHS2 and WEEE compliant, support 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratio
f. Supports configuration of four screen arranged horizontally
g. Vertically or combination of both orientations.

The local monitoring room shall be equipped with FR and QR based access control system.
The solution shall be integrated with the existing system in physical security operation center(PSOC) to
provide common operations. The contractor shall be responsible to integrate the proposed System with the
PSOC

2.5 SERVERS

A. Rack Mount Server: the servers shall support as a minimum the following features – subject to
manufacturer’s recommendations for the particular served telecommunications system:
1. Both two and four processors.
2. Intel E5 (or latest and equivalent) processors as well as the 5600, 7500 and 7600 series.
3. High memory densities. As a minimum the blades shall be scalable to 768 GB RAM and
shall support 4, 8, 16 and 32 GB DIMMs System have integrated RAID 0,1 with an on board
RAID controllers.
4. Onboard NIC with dual Gigabit Ethernet ports with TOE 2 x Converged Network Adapters
(10GE) and (FcoE).
5. Converged network (multiple traffic classes over a lossless Ethernet fabric, thus enabling
consolidation of LAN, SAN, and cluster environments.).

2.6 INTEGRATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The following systems shall be integrated and interfaced to miscellaneous Computer Hardware
specified in this Section:
1. The Structured Cabling Network (SCN).
2. The Wireless Data Equipment.
3. The Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).
4. The Master Clock System.
5. The IP-Based Telephony Communications System

B. The description of all of the above interfaces shall be defined into software requirements
specification such as:
1. The type of interface: databases queries/tables, shared flat files, messages, etc.,
2. The frequency: periodically or on-demand.

C. SCN
1. SCN shall be used for communication all over the Project network.

D. Wireless Data Network

1. Wireless Data Network equipment linked to the SCN shall provide network monitoring
facilities to the Active Communication and Data Processing Equipment.
2. Active Communication and Data Processing Equipment ensure the security of the interface
with Wireless Data Network end users.

E. Time synchronization
1. Time synchronization is ensured by Project Master Clock broadcasting messages compliant
with Precision Time Protocol (PTP) and fall-back NTP/DT2. All equipment delivering time-
stamped data takes into account these messages.

COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS 272231 - Page 5 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.7 STORAGE REQUIREMENTS

a. General-purpose hybrid scale-out NAS solutions to enable a wide range of high-
performance computing (HPC) file workloads on a single platform.
b. The following NAS solutions shall be provided:
1) One main NAS solution shall be provided as part of the Security network.
c. The solutions should be designed for high-throughput and high-performance demanding
applications like the CCTV applications.
d. Storage system IOPS (read/write), read/write ratio, and throughput requirements shall
be sized to match the IOPS and throughput requirements of the servers and applications.
1) Management, Reporting and Alerting Features:
a) Single GUI for Administering and configuring the storage system
b) Performance Monitoring and Reporting feature(s) that monitors and reports on
how resources (disk drives, storage networking ports, cache, LUNs, etc…)
within the array are being utilized and how well they are performing
c) Utilization and performance metrics live and historical data reports (including
but not limited to: IOPS per LUN, IOPS per host, throughput MB/s, disk queue
length, disk response time…), capacity utilization, array health information
d) Detailed reporting on the capacity, performance and health of the all array
components
e) Alerting in any case of warning or error situations (e.g. failed drive, port link
down, temperature warning, predictive disk failures…)
f) Notifications Channels: SMTP , SNMP
g) Advanced Diagnostics and troubleshooting Tools
e. All Software Licenses which are required to support the above mentioned features
including the Data Optimization section shall be included covering unlimited capacity.
f. Capacities required:
1) Security storage solution: the capacity shall be calculated by the Contractor and
submitted for the Engineer’s approval, but should not be less than 0.5 PB of usable
storage capacity after applying RAID, while complying with MOI requirements.
2) Backup Security storage solution: 0.3 PB of usable storage capacity after applying
RAID6.
g. Each storage chassis shall have the following minimum specifications:
1) Capable of housing at least 60 SSD drives.
2) 10GbE interfaces.
3) Dual-redundant, hot-swappable power supplies.
h. High-availability including back-end and intra-cluster failover.
i. Each storage solution should be capable of scaling up to 200%.
j. The solution shall provide schemes for data protection, data replication, and data
retention.

2.8 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Coordination
1. All the data network hardware shall utilize the building structured cabling infrastructure
located throughout the Project premises.

COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS 272231 - Page 6 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. The Structured Cabling Network (SCN) installer shall be in charge of providing the patch
cords for the various data communications systems. Coordinate with the SCN installer on
quantities, lengths and specifications of patch cords to be delivered.
3. Coordinate with the Engineer/Employer the following plans to be implemented in the
network:
a. Addressing plan.
b. Security plan.
c. Applications port designations.
d. Any other logical information that is not self-discovered by the system.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

END OF SECTION 272231

COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS 272231 - Page 7 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 273123 - IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions, Project Requirements
and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “IP-Based Telephony Communications System” except
where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “IP-Based Telephony
Communications System” shall have precedence:
1. Division 27 Section 270501 “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a carrier grade IP-based Telephony Communications System consisting of

central switching equipment and telephone instruments as such:
1. Call Processing Unit and software.
2. Gateways.
3. Signaling Servers.
4. IP terminals and client devices.
5. Applications and network management.
6. Operator Console.

B. Related Sections:
1. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
2. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
3. Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 263353 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.
6. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
7. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
8. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
9. Section 271305 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
10. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
11. Section 270501 – Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems.
12. Section 272109 - Data Communications for Campus Network.
13. Section 272111 - Data Communications for Data Center.
14. Section 272133 - Wireless Data Network.
15. Section 272140 – Virtual Servers Environment (VSE).
16. Section 272231 - Computers & Related Peripherals.
17. Section 273245 – Radio Paging System.
18. Section 275117 - IP-Based Public Address System.

C. Servers and related ancillaries shall comply with:

1. Division 27, Section “Virtual Servers Environment (VSE)”.
2. Division 27, Section “Computers & Related Peripherals”.

D. Workstations and related ancillaries shall comply with:

1. Division 27, Section “Computers & Related Peripherals”.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 1 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Definitions
1. "Turnkey System": a complete system of hardware and software delivered to the Employer
ready-to-run.

C. Abbreviations

1. AAR:
Automatic Alternate Routing.
2. ACD: Automatic Call Distributor.
3. ACL: Access Control List.
4. AD: Active Directory.
5. AIOD: Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing.
6. AMIS: Audio Messaging Interchange Specification.
7. ASR: Automated Speech Recognition.
8. ATA: Analog Telephone Adapter.
9. ALI: Automatic Location Identifier.
10. BHCA: Busy Hour Call Attempts.
11. CAM: Centralized Automated Message (CAM).
12. CCR: Custom Call Routing.
13. CDR: Call Data Recording.
14. CLI: Command Line Interface.
15. CLID: Calling Line ID.
16. CPND: Calling Party Name Display.
17. CRTP: Compressed Real-Time Transport Protocol.
18. CSU: Channel Service Unit.
19. CTI: Computer Telephony Integration.
20. DAR: Digital Audio Recording.
21. DID: Direct Inward Dialing.
22. DN: Directory Number.
23. DSCP: Differentiated Services .
24. DTMF: Dual Tone Multi-Frequency.
25. ISDN: Integrated Digital Services Network.
26. EDR: Enhanced Data Rate.
27. EWS: Exchange Web Services.
28. IVR: Interactive Voice Response.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 2 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

29. JTAPI: Java Telephony Application Programming Interface.

30. LADP: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.
31. PRI: Primary Rate Interface.
32. PSAP: Public Safety Answering Point.
33. SCP: Secure Copy Protocol.
34. SCCP: Skinny Client Control Protocol.
35. SIP: Session Initiated Protocol.
36. SSH: Secure Shell Protocol.
37. STS: Shared Tenant Services.
38. ToIP: Telephone over Internet Protocol.
39. TAPI: Telephony Application Programming Interface.
40. TDD: Telephone Device for the Deaf.
41. TDM: Time Division Multiplexing.
42. TFTP: Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
43. UM: Unified Messaging.
44. VPIM: Voice Profile for Internet Mail.
45. VoIP: Voice over Internet Protocol.
46. VXML: Voice Extensible Markup Language

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and miscellaneous
items that will be installed during the course of the installation process. Such items may not be
indicated in the documents. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and his suppliers
when considering:
1. Structured communications system cabling, termination, identification and testing.
2. Provision and installation of computer hardware, and related networking software and
equipment.
3. Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
4. Provision and installation of a Virtualized Servers Environment.
5. Provision and installation of UPS in communications rooms.
6. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building
earth electrode system.
7. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility outlets.
8. Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
9. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental control sensors.
10. Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit sleeves, and
penetrations in walls and floors.

B. Accordingly, the Contractor shall:

1. Meet jointly with representatives of above systems, Contractors, Operators, Engineer and
Employer to exchange information and agree on details of project implementation,
equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to participants.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 3 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment in technical rooms to accommodate and

optimize arrangement and ensure necessary interface with other systems.

1.7 CONFIDENTIALITY

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Overview of Current Environment and Requirements

B. General Features
1. 25% spare capacity is required at all levels of the system.
2. Coordinate the features of material and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
3. The software licensing shall be for the entire network with no limitation on the number of
workstations or standard end-users.

1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Data Communications for Campus Network” and Section] [“Data
Communications for Data Center”.

B. Software Requirements
1. The availability performance shall be 99.999% on a monthly average combined for all
interdependent systems.
2. The maximum time between detection of an event and its display on a workstation shall not
exceed 3 seconds, under normal operating mode (for a mean load on network and on servers).
3. In order to reach the requested MTTR and MTBF, modular design and quick interchange of
modules are required for the system components.
4. Redundancy: At all levels of the architecture, data redundancy shall be ensured. The detailed
design of the Contractor shall highlight the actions adopted to implement this redundancy.
5. Software Availability (SA) is defined as the probability that the program is performing
successfully, according to specifications, at a given point in time. The Software Availability
shall be better than 99.999%.
6. Task Crash is defined as the unexpected termination of an executing task resulting in the
system not being able to perform the task functions successfully according to specifications,
for any reason.. Task Crash is not allowed.
7. System Crash is defined as the unexpected system halt resulting in the system not being able
to continue the operation of the machine, for any reason. System Crash is not allowed.
8. The Contractor shall adhere to recognized structured analysis and design methods throughout
the design process.
9. All compilers and code generators shall be of the latest version and in compliance with
international standards. No undocumented or non-standard features of the language or
operating system shall be used.
10. The Contractor shall ensure that all software delivered to site shall be accompanied by
evidence that the media is free of viruses.
11. No software Beta versions shall be used in the network unless specifically authorized by the
Employer.

C. Design Considerations
1. The Contractor shall use a suitable modular design method to enable the software to be easily
modified to cope with additional functionality providing I/O dialogues, billing equipment
and controlling equipment. These additional functionalities are to be proposed as optional.
2. Network management software to be provided with, but not limited to, impact analysis, event
resolution, policy management, problem diagnosis, real time trending, service monitoring,

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 4 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SLA compliance, and reporting and out-of-band management stress as per community SLA
reporting capabilities.
3. The expansion of software shall not cause any degradation of the performance of the system.

D. Software Expansion Requirements

1. Software databases working in an off-line or an on-line mode of operation should be designed
to allow for ease of expansion. Where new database structures are implemented with fixed
sizes, then at least 25% spare capacity of each entry type and attribute shall be provided.
2. The Contractor should develop software with possible expansion provision of porting to
other hardware platforms, where practicable. To achieve this, a structured language and
compiler should be used, subject to the approval of the Employer.

E. Hardware Expansion Requirements

1. The hardware shall meet performance requirements considering that at least 25% spare
capacity shall be provided.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: Prepare and submit to Authorities Having

Jurisdiction as per applicable regulations. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as
needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make
clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from Authorities Having
Jurisdiction, submit them to the Engineer for review.

C. Operating License for the VOIP System as required by local regulations and Authorities Having
Jurisdiction: Submit evidence of application for operating license prior to installing equipment.
Furnish the license, or if the license has not been received, a copy of the application for the
license, to the Employer prior to operating the equipment. When license is received, deliver
original license to Employer.

D. Technical Submittal: Technical submittal shall include the following:

1. Complete point by point comply sheet with highlighted cross reference on related data sheets,
indicating deviations - if any - reasons for such deviations, also indicate any extra features /
specifications.
2. Manufacturer's technical product data sheets, including quantities and specifications of every
module, specifications of every device, system components, quantities, software and
installations for each unit of equipment. (Pin to pin riser diagram showing all system
components and interconnection between hybrid telephone system and related systems).
3. Plans indicating exact location of system components. Provide calculations to support the
traffic of the network, required storage capacity, required number of telephone lines and
required bandwidth for data (LAN / WAN connection).
4. Complete sequence of operations and functions of the system.
5. Contractor shall submit a list of the Manufacturer's authorized, local representative
responsible for installation coordination and service, pre-qualification for the system
provider and installer.

1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Licensing Requirements
1. Licensee's Responsibility: The installation and operation of the equipment is subject to the
issue of a license by local Authorities, except that equipment which have been exempted
from licensing. Under the conditions of the license, it is the responsibility of the licensee to

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 5 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

ensure that the equipment provided conforms with, and is maintained to, the requirements of
this specification. The licensee shall also ensure that the equipment is used in a safe manner.
2. The licensing authority shall not be liable to the licensee or to any third party for any damage,
loss or injury, whether to persons or properties, howsoever arising out of any defect in the
equipment or interference caused by other signals.
3. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

C. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.14 COMMISSIONING

A. Generally accepted industry standards, as well as manufacturer's written installation instructions,

will be used as a basis for quality control and final acceptance of the works.

B. In-System Commissioning
1. Equipment commissioning shall be done through demonstration of product capability and
compliance with requirements when wired and configured in the system.
2. Test system and power supply redundancies by unplugging redundant links.
3. Check recovery times.

C. When the Contractor has completed his own system tests and when the system record documents,
including drawings, operation and maintenance manuals are complete, the Engineer and
Employer are to be notified that the system fulfills the specifications and is ready for acceptance
testing.

D. The Contractor shall be required to perform a range of Site Acceptance Tests on site for each
individual sub-system to demonstrate that all items have been correctly installed and adjusted on
a location by location basis and that the sub-system operates in every respect in accordance with
the Specifications.

E. During this commissioning phase, the equipment are powered and the automation and networking
are gradually integrated layer by layer.

F. The tests shall be performed by the Contractor. Employer and Engineer reserve the right to be
present during any or all testing.

G. Any defects, which may become apparent during the course of these tests, shall be immediately
rectified by the Contractor at his expense.

H. The Contractor shall provide a test plan in a matrix format for the IP-Based Telephony
Communications system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Preliminary Testing:
a. Mechanical:
1) Mechanical tests,
2) Calibration of the components.
b. Automatism / Electrical:
1) Powering Tests with electricity,

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 6 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2) Control of Input/Output,
3) Control of the safety measure either personal or material,
4) Test of local mode operation.
c. System / Software Tests:
1) Test of the System,
2) Test of the Supervision Workstation user interface,
3) Test of the portable Terminal user interface.
2. System Test:
a. The tests performed during this phase are performed with and without loading
conditions.
1) Testing the crippled mode (Safe shut down consecutive to loss of energy, etc.),
3. VoIP Post Dial Delay:
a. Measures the response time to receive a ring back or answer to an outside telephone.
b. Measures call set-up time using SIP or H.323.
4. CoS/ToS & QoS including:
a. Jitter, the amount of variance in the packet delay of voice packets.
b. Latency, the delay that components in a path add to the overall response time.
c. Per call bandwidth utilization.
5. Call set-up and release for the following:
a. IP phones connected to the same switch.
b. IP phones connected to different switches.
c. IP phone to Wireless IP phone.
d. Wireless IP phone to Wireless IP phone.
6. Speech quality evaluation (MOS).
7. Any other tests deemed necessary by the manufacturer, systems integrator, Engineer or
Employer.

I. A punch list for correction of defective components or operational failures shall be provided by
the Contractor after the testing procedure.

J. The Contractor shall correct any deficiencies noted on the punch list and take corrective action
to assure proper operation. Once corrected, re-testing of the system shall be scheduled.

K. Preliminary Acceptance
1. The system shall be accepted as complete when all base Contract works have been completed
and all remedial works have been performed and all documentation has been submitted and
the Employer has received the specified training.
2. Complete records of the testing procedures shall be retained by the Contractor and upon
acceptance these records shall be submitted to the Employer.
3. As part of the acceptance test procedure, the Contractor shall provide hourly traffic studies
for the first four on the first business day following site operation and hourly for one week
commencing oneweek after site operation.
4. Thirty days after the system operational in-service date the Employer shall either accept the
system in writing or notify the Contractor in writing, specifying in reasonable detail those
particulars that the Employer deems unacceptable.
5. With respect to any such particulars that the Contractor reasonably agrees are unacceptable,
the Contractor shall provide in writing the methodology and time line to correct them and
after verification of correction thereof the Employer shall accept the system in writing.

1.15 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 7 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.16 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major components in
the system for two years fault-free operation.

C. However, a minimum of 2% peripherals of each type installed, but not less than one from each
type shall be included in the deliverables irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation.

D. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for equipment supplied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

B. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Adjunct Systems
1. Where adjunct systems are not available directly from the selected Telephony System
manufacturer, adjunct manufactures must be certified or otherwise approved for use by the
selected Telephony System manufacturer.

D. End Point Devices

1. Where endpoint devices are not available directly from the selected Telephony System
manufacturer, end point devices must be certified or otherwise approved for use by the
selected Telephony System manufacturer.

2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The Contractor shall provide a full description of the proposed system architecture.

B. The Contractor shall include diagrams explaining system architecture and shall specify the model
names and version numbers of all relevant components of the system.

C. The solution shall:

1. be able to integrate with radio trunking, public access, and paging systems and any other
system, e.g. DECT, GSM, WiFi, etc.
2. be centralized into Main Telecom Rooms from a call processing and signaling perspectives.
All VoIP/TDM conversion devices (Media Gateways) shall be located within
telecommunication spaces.
3. support multi-Manufacturer interoperability with other Manufacturer’s products and across
any QoS infrastructure.
4. support end-to-end QoS, including but not limited to traffic marking, enhanced queuing
services, link fragmentation and interleaving, CRTP, low latency queuing, link efficiency,
traffic shaping, and call admission control.
5. provide bandwidth management and call admission control to guarantee at all times that the
network and LAN/WAN links are not over-subscribed.
6. be able to support open industry standard devices such as H.323, SIP, etc., including the
support of analog and digital phones.
7. support remote office phones from a centralized phone system. The Contractor shall state
any additional equipment that maybe required at the remote site.
8. have local survivability capabilities provided for remote sites during a WAN outage (for
remote sites hosted off of a central server).

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 8 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

9. be able to provide easy addressing scheme of the IP phones, such as Dynamic Host Control
Protocol (DHCP), without having to change the addressing scheme of the existing IP data
network.

D. The Telephony system shall provide redundant server based call processing, Internet Protocol /
Time Division Multiplexing (IP/TDM) media gateways, redundant server based multi-media
UM, auto attendant, Automatic Call Distributor (ACD), VoIP telephones, analog telephones,
wireless Local Area Network (LAN) telephones, thin client software telephones, dedicated
network switches, other end devices, hardware, software, programming, configuration, wire,
system patch panels, terminations, patch cords and including all accessories required for a
complete and operating system.

E. The Telephony System shall include High-Availability platform with built in self diagnostics and
self-healing capabilities to provide 99.999% reliability for all call processing and all call routing
systems.

F. The Telephony System shall utilize redundant distributed call processors, with redundant power
supplies, redundant connectivity and automatic load balancing.

G. The Telephony System shall be capable of non-blocking VoIP operation, peer-to-peer IP

connectivity, with active monitoring and control for the duration of all calls.

H. Telephony System ports, licenses and configurations shall be provided for each end device and
connection as applicable.

I. Re-homing of VoIP Telephones subsequent to loss of any component shall be automatic and not
impact the dial plan, features, or capabilities. All services shall be automatically restored, without
intervention when the failed condition has been corrected.

J. System Administration shall be Graphical User Interface (GUI) based and integrated to allow
basic telephone system Moves, Adds and Changes (MACs) including UM to be automatically
configured in each other system to eliminate the need for duplicate manual updating of other
systems. A scheduling feature is to be provided for telephone MACs and software backup
processing.

K. The Telephony System shall be equipped with basic ACD capabilities and reporting with the
following basic functions.
1. Automatic routing of calls based on caller menu choices and agent availability.
2. Interface with Interactive Voice Response (IVR) system.

L. The Telephony System shall provide capability to send immediate audio page to groupings of
telephone sets by building.

M. The Telephony System shall provide encryption capability and be secured from hacking attempts
and unauthorized access.

N. The system shall support all relevant industry standards listed below.
1. Class Based Weighted Fair Queuing (CBWFQ).
2. Committed Access Rate.
3. Compressed Real Time Protocol (CRTP).
4. DCL.
5. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
6. Differentiated Services.
7. Domain Name Service (DNS).
8. FAX - Group 3 (ITU-T recommendation T.4 Fax group 3 is the most common type of fax
machine transmitting on A4 paper. The machine scanning format is digital and operates at
rates between 9.6 and 14.4 Kbps).

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 9 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

9. FAX - Group 4 (IUT-T recommendation T.6 and supports two-dimensional image

compression, compressing the line width as well as the line length).
10. G.711 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) of Voice Frequencies.
11. G.726 Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM).
12. G.728 Coding of Speech at 16 Kbps using Low-Delay Algebraic Code Excited Linear
Prediction (LD-ACELP).
13. G.729 Coding of Speech at 8 Kbps using Conjugate Structure Algebraic Code Excited Linear
Prediction (CS-ACELP).
14. G.729a Annex A Reduced Complexity 8 Kbps CS-ACELP Speech Codec.
15. H.225 Call Signaling Protocols and Media Stream Packetization for Packet based
Multimedia.
16. H.245 Control Protocol for Multimedia Communications.
17. H.323 Packet Based Multimedia Communication Systems.
18. IP Precedence.
19. Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6).
20. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).
21. Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP).
22. Policy Based Routing.
23. Q.931 Manages Call Setup and Termination.
24. Priority Queue Weighted fair Queuing (PQWFQ).
25. Random Early Discard (RED).
26. Resource ReSerVation setup Protocol (RSVP).
27. RTP Control Protocol (RTCP).
28. Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP).
29. Real-time Streaming Protocol (RTSP).
30. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP).
31. T.120 Data Protocols for Multimedia Conferencing.
32. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
33. Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
34. T.37.
35. T.38 IP Based Fax Service Maps.
36. User Datagram Protocol / Internet Protocol (UDP/IP).
37. Voice Profile for Internet Mail (VPIM).
38. Weighted Queuing.
39. Weighted RED.
40. IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol.
41. IEEE 802.1p Prioritization Technique/Layer 2 QoS.
42. IEEE 802.1q VLAN Tagging.
43. IEEE 802.3 Ethernet (CSMA/CD).
44. IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet.
45. IEEE 802.1x.

2.3 SYSTEM RELIABILITY, SECURITY AND AVAILABILITY

A. The system shall be capable of providing high availability, redundancy and fault tolerance. The
Contractor shall specify the components that can be duplicated in the system. In addition, a full
description of the system’s redundancy capabilities shall be provided.

B. The system shall include all components, features and facilities to deliver 99.999% uptime. This
shall address as a minimum bandwidth, packet loss, round trip delay and jitter.

C. The IP-based Telephony Communications System shall provide as a minimum password

protection, session encryption, IP address filters, log information about failed password attempts,
etc. to prevent un-authorized modifications to the system servers, to the system gateways, and to
the system IP phones.

D. The system shall have advanced built-in security features such as external firewalls/Network
Address Translation (NAT), personal firewalls, VPN, etc. The system shall also be able to accept
third party monitoring software that can be used to detect system status.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 10 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. The system shall be able to track failed password entries in a single session and across multiple
sessions. The system shall also automatically disconnect the caller and/or lock out the user after
a configurable number of failed attempts.

F. The system architecture shall support operator system and server clustering for redundancy. The
Contractor shall specify the maximum number of clusters his system can support and the
maximum number of active users supported per cluster.

G. The Contractor shall specify the highest number of IP devices currently supported under a single
instance of the software and the number of IP devices supported by a cluster.

H. The system shall have a web-based or GUI-based administration tool. This administration tool
shall have the capability to manage all systems within an enterprise simultaneously using a single
interface.

I. In case of hardware and/or software failure, the switchover in a redundant system should
smoothly occur without interruptions of users. The system should also be able to synchronize the
database in a manner that would guarantee correct operation and transfer of data after switchover.

J. The system shall have protection mechanisms against viruses and other attacks. It shall have
intrusion detection to insure the proper operation of all components.

K. The system shall have toll fraud protection capabilities.

L. The Contractor shall guarantee the continuous operation of the system through the use of UPS
power supply.

M. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”, Articles “Proposed
Solution” and “Network Equipment”.

2.4 TELEPHONY SYSTEM CAPABILITIES

A. The following performance parameters shall not be exceeded for end to end communications.
1. Crosstalk Attenuation: More than 70dB at 1 kHz
2. Insertion Loss (Relative to 1 kHz @ -10 dBm)
a. Station-to-Station 5 dB ±1.0 dB
b. Station-to-Trunk 0 dB ±0.7 dB
c. Trunk-to-Trunk 2W 0 dB ±0.7 dB
d. Trunk-to-Trunk 4W 0 dB ±0.8 dB
3. Echo Path Delay (Round Trip Delay)
a. Station-to-Station 3.0ms
b. Station-to-Analog Trunk 3.0ms
c. Trunk-to-Trunk (Analog) 3.0ms
d. Station-to-Digital Interface 2.4ms
e. Digital Interface-to-Digital Interface 2.4ms
4. Relative Envelope Delay
a. 500 to 800 Hz 300 microsec
b. 800 to 1,000 Hz 150 microsec
c. 1,000 to 2,300 Hz 75 microsec
d. 2,300 to 2,700 Hz 150 microsec
e. 2,700 to 3,000 Hz 300 microsec
5. Quantization Distortion
a. Analog-to-Analog Connection
1) 0 to -30dBmO Input >37dB

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 11 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2) -40dBmO >31dB
3) -45dBmO >26dB
b. Digital-to-Analog Connection
1) 0 to -30dBmO Input >35dB
2) -40dBmO >29dB
3) -45dBmO >25dB
6. Return Loss > 20dB (300-3,400 Hz, 600 ohm termination)
7. Loop Resistance 600 ohm or 1,200 ohm including instrument
8. Ringing Signal
a. Signal Voltage 90 Vrms (±10Vrms)
b. Frequency 20Hz (±1.3Hz)

B. The Telephony System shall include network Web alerts and audible alarm reporting and
notification for outages, service affecting and potential service affecting conditions.

C. The Telephony System shall support Quality of Service (QoS), Differentiated Services (DSCP),
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN), advanced security features, SIP trunking, SSH/SCP and
SMNP v3 and Codec G.711a, G.711u, G.722, G.729a, G.729ab and G.726.

D. The Telephony System shall support Video Codecs: H.261, H.263, and H.264.

E. The Telephony System shall support ring down telephone configurations with a forced
conference bridge.

F. The Telephony System shall provide seamless roaming and handoff of wireless IP phones with
wired phones; and seamless roaming and handoff of dual-band WiFi/GSM IP phones with GSM
and wired phones.

G. The Telephone System shall support soft phones of various types installed on desktop, laptop or
PDA devices, and support remote access from the PSTN or Internet.

H. The Telephony System shall support H.320 and H.323 video communications. If implemented,
the Contractor shall coordinate bandwidth requirements with the Network Contractor.

I. Analog trunking capabilities: Loop or Ground Start CO, FX, WATS, 2 or 4 wire E&M or 4-wire
DX, DID, TIE, RAN, Paging.

J. Digital trunking capabilities: E-Carrier, ISDN-PRI, ISDN-BRI,. Provide Channel Service Unit
(CSU) functionality as required.

K. Provide rack mounted keyboard, monitor and KVM switch to allow direct Telephony System
Administration and maintenance activities for each server.

L. The Telephony System shall be equipped with analog station ports and with trunk ports for audio
paging interfaces.

2.5 TELEPHONY SYSTEM CAPACITY

A. Equipment Quantity Definitions

1. Installed: The quantity or capacity of an item required to be operational at cut over.
2. Equipped: The quantity or capacity of an item required to be resident in the system at cut
over for immediate activation.
3. Wired: The capability or quantity of an item that can be realized by adding plug-in
components (e.g., line cards, trunk cards, and station equipment) at any time in the future
without installing additional cabinets, modules, shelves, common equipment or memory.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 12 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Spare Capacity
1. The Equipped quantity shall be at least 15% more than the Installed Quantity, based on
individual count, ports, channels or bandwidth, as applicable.
2. The Wired quantity shall allow for a minimum of 25% more than the Equipped quantity.

C. Installed Quantity Sizing for End Devices

1. The system shall be provided to serve all endpoints initially.
2. The system shall be designed such that approximately 40% of the initial endpoints installed
will be provided by Direct Dial Inwards (DDI) telephone numbers.
3. The Contractor shall provide Gateways to serve an adequate trunk line capacity of trunk lines
initially using E1 digital trunk technology or SIP protocol as coordinated with the Employer
and Local Service provider.

D. Installed Quantity Sizing for Service Provider Connections

1. Provide Installed quantities for connection to Service Providers for PSTN access channels
based on minimum 15% of end device quantities.
2. Provide Installed trunk circuit quantities for connection to Interexchange Carriers for
dedicated Long Distance access based on minimum 15% of end device quantities and spread
across a minimum of two Interexchange Carriers.
3. Alternatively, SIP PSTN minimum access bandwidth may be based on end device quantities
and maximum compression of minimum 32bps per conversation.
4. Contractor shall submit the sizing calculation for approval.

2.6 TELEPHONY SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

A. The IP-based Telephony Communications System shall provide the following features. The
Contractor shall specify any features that the system does not support and/or any additional
features supported by his proposal:
1. Abbreviated ring.
2. Answer / answer release.
3. Analog Devices
4. Application sharing.
5. English Localization
6. Attendant console.
7. Audio message waiting indicator
8. Audio volume adjustment.
9. Authorization codes.
10. Auto echo cancellation.
11. Automated call-by-call bandwidth selection.
12. Automated phone installation configuration.
13. Automatic Alternate Routing (AAR)
14. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Groups
15. Automatic Callback
16. Automatic line selection.
17. Automatic phone moves
18. Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD)
19. Automatic Ringdown Lines
20. Basic telephony features; call forward, transfer, conference, hold
21. Busy / direct line selection.
22. Busy indicator.
23. Call back / ring again.
24. Call block.
25. Call coverage.
26. Call detail records.
27. Call forwarding (busy).
28. Call forwarding (off premise).
29. Call forwarding (ring and/or no answer).

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 13 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

30. Call forwarding (self directed / programmable).

31. Call hold / release.
32. Caller Identification
33. Call park / pickup.
34. Call Privacy.
35. Call routing.
36. Call transfer.
37. Call waiting.
38. Calling line ID (line and name).
39. Camp-on.
40. Chat.
41. Conference (uni-cast).
42. Conference (multi-cast).
43. Console queuing.
44. Custom Call Routing (CCR)
45. Date & time.
46. Directory.
47. Direct inward dialing (DID).
48. Direct outward dialing (DOD).
49. Dial Plan Partitioning
50. Digit Insertion and Deletion
51. Distinctive ringing (internal vs external call).
52. Distinctive station ringing pitch.
53. Do not disturb.
54. Drop.
55. DTMF delivery.
56. Event logging and reports.
57. Event viewer interface.
58. External SMDI interface.
59. Fax Messaging
60. Feature access.
61. File transfer.
62. Group Call Pickup
63. Headset options.
64. Hold
65. Hunt groups.
66. H.323 RAS support.
67. Idle line preference.
68. Inspect.
69. Integrated Digital Services Network (ISDN)
70. Intercom.
71. IP phones set / IP precedence bit.
72. IP routable.
73. IP-based integration messaging.
74. JTAPI.
75. Language support for client-user interfaces (languages specified separately)
76. Last number redial.
77. License management.
78. Line pools.
79. Line status monitor.
80. Microphone disable.
81. Multiple calls per line appearance.
82. Multiple line appearance.
83. Music on hold.
84. Multi-Protocol Label Service (MPLS)
85. Night service.
86. Number portability.
87. Paging & Group Paging
88. Performance monitor interface.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 14 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

89. Personal extension.

90. PRI protocol support (NI-2 and EuroISDN).
91. Privacy (prevent barge in on bridged extension).
92. Programmable Soft Keys
93. Recall / timed flash.
94. Redundant call processors.
95. Remote access
96. Remote Maintenance
97. Remote Monitoring
98. Remote process control.
99. Remote Web Administration
100. Ringer-pitch Adjustment.
101. Ringer volume adjustment.
102. Ringing option by line / station.
103. Shared extensions on multiple phones.
104. Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) 2
105. Simultaneous ring.
106. Single button collaboration computing / virtual meetings.
107. Soft phone features to match wired telephone features
108. Speakerphone mute.
109. Speed-dial (auto-dial).
110. System Announcements
111. System events on Windows NT event viewer.
112. TAPI 2.1.
113. Tenant partitioning
114. Three way calling.
115. Time of day/week/year routing and restrictions
116. Toll and nuisance number (900, 976, 970, 550, 540, exchanges) restriction.
117. Tone on hold.
118. Transfer - blind and announced
119. Uniform dial plan
120. Video.
121. Visual message displays (all digital telephones) (name, extension, etc.).
122. Voice announces to busy.
123. Voice Mail Light Indicator
124. Voice over VPN
125. Web administration.
126. Web documentation.
127. Web-based dial (auto-dial) directory.
128. Whiteboard.
129. XML Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) application programming interface

B. The system shall provide means for disposition of blocked calls such as announcements, reorder,
queuing, etc.

2.7 TELEPHONE REQUIREMENTS

A. As a minimum, the VoIP devices/server, software and handsets shall be required to support the
following industry based, standard protocols and specifications:
1. 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet.
2. IEEE 802.1p QoS prioritization.
3. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN configuration.
4. G.711a, G711u, G.722, G.729a, G.729ab codec/compression methods.
5. Voice encryption using industry standard AES encryption.
6. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) signaling.
7. H.323 suite of signaling specifications.
8. Q.SIG suite of specifications, including Q.931 for call connection and control for ISDN
services.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 15 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

9. Dual Tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) relay capabilities.

10. Network Time Protocol (NTP).
11. Precision Time Protocol (PTP).
12. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).
13. Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP).
14. Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP).
15. Real-time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP).
16. Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP).
17. Video Conferencing (ITU-T.120).
18. Computer Telephony Integration (CTI).
19. Support for Telephone system adjunct systems including emergency call locating, and call
accounting / call logging.

2.8 CALL PROCESSING SYSTEM

A. The IP-based Telephony Communications System shall be scalable and able to provide service
using a single system.

B. The system shall be non-blocking and shall be able to process, as a minimum (Typically 10-15%
of the total subscribers number), simultaneous conversations.

C. The system shall have the most recent software release at the time of delivery. The Contractor
shall provide a timetable of all scheduled software releases and upgrades.

D. All system changes and software upgrades shall be capable of being performed on-line with
minimal interruption and/or disturbance of the running system.

E. The system shall have a back-up procedure for the operating software, which includes up-to-date
moves and changes.

F. The system shall support Computer Telephony Integration (CTI), Telephony Application
Programming Interface (TAPI) and Java Telephony Application Programming Interface (JTAPI)
applications.

G. The Contractor shall list all partner programs for third-party applications development.

H. The call processing system shall be based on open standards (H.323, H.248 and SIP) and shall
have an open architecture operating system.

I. The system shall be scalable and modular and capable of supporting a variety of distributed
configurations.

2.9 PUBLIC MEDIA GATEWAYS

A. The system shall be able to provide transparent connectivity to legacy TDM equipment and the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). This shall include all options available for analog
station and trunk and digital trunk connectivity.

B. The media gateways shall, as a minimum, support the following types of PSTN trunk interfaces:
1. Analog CO trunks: DID, DOD, Loop Start and Ground Start.
2. Analog tie trunks: E&M, Loop Dial Repeating, Immediate Start and Wink Start.
3. Digital trunks: T1/E1 and PRI/BRI.

C. Media gateways shall use standardized codecs to provide voice compression and packetize voice
traffic so it can be carried over an IP network such as G.711, G723.1, G.729a, etc.

D. The system shall support all the PRI services and features and signaling options including, but
not limited to, the following: ANI (caller ID), Call-by-Call, Dialed-Number Identification String

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 16 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

(DNIS), DID, DOD, Advice of Charge, Non-Facility-Associated Signaling (NFAS), Calling

Number Identification (CNI) and all other supplementary services (forward, transfer, conference,
hold).

E. The media gateways shall be able to provide set of reports to manage and change the parameters
of the PSTN interface as required such as a detailed view of traffic on PSTN interfaces, a view
of the status of these interfaces (enabled/disabled), etc.

F. The Contractor shall provide a list of PBXs and Central Office switches to which his PRI trunk
has been successfully connected, tested and operated.

G. In case of SIP connectivity Session Border Controller shall be installed and coordinated with the
Service Provider.

2.10 IP TERMINALS AND CLIENT DEVICES

A. Station Hardware and IP Softphone

1. The Contractor shall provide detailed description of each IP telephone available with the
system listing features, capabilities, limitations, and purpose of use.
2. The IP phones, industry standard devices, shall be able to work over LAN equipment other
than the original Manufacturer LAN equipment.
3. The system shall support in-line power for IP phones.
4. IP phones shall be able to share existing Ethernet ports with data devices. It shall not be
required by the Employer to add additional Ethernet ports to support voice.
5. The phones shall have a built-in switch to support automatic VLAN.
6. The system shall include IP soft-phone operable without additional physical IP phone. The
Contractor shall provide detailed description of the IP soft-phone and its features and
capabilities.
7. The soft-phone shall be operable on normal PC operating system environment such as
Microsoft Windows. The end user shall require no special arrangements.
8. The IP soft-phone shall support all related open industry standards such as Telephony
Application Programming Interface (TAPI), T1.20, NetMeeting, H.323, SIP, G.711, G.
723.1, and G.729a codec.
9. The IP soft-phone shall be equipped with user friendly Graphical User Interface (GUI) with
easy manipulation features such as setting up conference calls by just dragging and dropping
the participants from a list on the display or from a directory or placing a call by just dragging
and dropping the party to be called from a directory.
10. The Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall be provided with programming capabilities to
allow the users to configure and customize certain features on the IP soft-phone.
11. The IP phone shall support various QoS techniques such that it prioritizes the voice traffic
directly.
12. The IP soft-phone shall include an integrated help function.
13. The IP phones shall maintain a call history log (separate from the system CDR).
14. The IP phones shall support shared extensions.
15. The IP phones shall support pushing of URL content.
16. The IP phones shall be able to be configured, as a minimum, to point to a primary and backup
server for redundancy. The fail-over in case of main server failure shall be automatic,
immediate and unattended.
17. The IP phones shall have a “log-in” feature to allow users to use another person’s phone and
have his calls directed to that phone.
18. The station equipment shall provide, as a minimum, the following features:
a. Application sharing.
b. Audio volume adjustment.
c. Auto echo cancellation.
d. Call forward busy.
e. Call forward no answer.
f. Call forward all calls.
g. Call hold / release.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 17 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

h. Call park / pickup.

i. Call transfer.
j. Call waiting.
k. Calling line ID (line and name).
l. Chat.
m. Conference (uni-cast).
n. Direct line termination.
o. Do not disturb.
p. File transfer.
q. Flexible hot line.
r. Last number re-dial.
s. Make set busy.
t. Meet me conference (multi-cast).
u. Multiple calls per line appearance.
v. Multiple line appearance.
w. Prime line select.
x. Privacy.
y. Ringer pitch adjustment.
z. Ringer volume adjustment.
aa. Single button collaboration computing / virtual meetings.
bb. Single button retrieve.
cc. Speakerphone mute.
dd. Speed dial (auto-dial).
ee. Video.
ff. Whiteboard.
19. The IEEE 802.3 Ethernet ports shall be auto-sensing and auto-negotiable.
20. The IP-based Telephony Communications System solution shall be able to be configured for
VLANs and secondary VLANs.
21. The system shall support VLAN trunking and multiple VLANs on a single interface.

B. Indoor telephone sets shall comply with the following unless otherwise noted:
1. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) standards for hearing aid compatibility
2. Modular construction at the wall (modular jack) and at the set (modular station cable and
handset cord)
3. Wall mounting kits for desk telephones shall be provided as required with 5% spare brackets.
4. Equipped with RJ45 jacks, Either T568A or T568B shall be used, but not both, to match
Horizontal telecommunications port wiring.
5. Manufactured in accordance with FCC hearing aid compatible technical standards contained
in Section 68.316, and the Telecommunications Act of 1996 (47 CFR § 68.316).
6. Equipped for push-button alphanumeric Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) calling.
7. Equipped with ringer volume control, receiver volume control, call/message indicator lamp
and Hook flash/redial key
8. Contractor shall provide minimum 2.15 meter (7 foot) modular cord lengths and as required
to properly located desk telephones and provide line cord lengths as required for routing
along walls with no open spans.
9. Wall-mounted sets shall be mounted with switch hook exactly 1200mm (48 inches) above
the floor.
10. Each station shall have a Calling Party Name Display (CPND) associated with the directory
number (DN). The CPND shall identify the location or end user of the station. Coordinate
naming convention with the Employer. Analog modem and fax lines shall be identified as
“modem” or “fax”, in addition to the location or end user agency.
11. Telephones shall be line-powered. Use of separate transformers at the wired telephone set
base is not permitted.
12. IP devices shall utilize power from PoE sources located within telecommunication spaces.
13. ATA devices shall provide line power for analog devices and be located only within
telecommunication spaces.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 18 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

14. Telephones shall be black in color, unless noted otherwise. Coordinate with the interior
architect.
15. Telephone devices shall comply with the Employer requirements and shall follow the latest
technology specifications for each application. Accordingly, the below specifications
indicate only the minimum required features.

C. Type 1 - Wall mounted IP telephones shall have the following additional characteristics:
1. Navigation keys and Interactive soft keys
2. 10/100/1000 Mbps built-in switch port
3. Multi-line display with intuitive features and calling information
4. Support of Extensible Markup Language (XML)

D. Type 2 - Standard IP telephones shall have the following characteristics:

1. 6 Programmable line keys
2. Interactive soft keys
3. 10/100/1000 Mbps built-in switch port
4. Large, high resolution grayscale pixel-based Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
5. Support of Extensible Markup Language (XML)
6. Hands-free duplex speakerphone operation
7. Built-in headset jack.

E. Type 3 - Enhanced IP telephones shall have the following characteristics:

1. 8 Programmable line keys
2. Interactive soft keys
3. 10/100/1000 Mbps built-in switch port
4. Large backlit color touch screen display
5. Support of Extensible Markup Language (XML)
6. Hands-free duplex speakerphone operation
7. Built-in headset jack
8. Support of Codecs G.711a, G711u, G.722, G.729a, G729ab
9. Support of DSCP and IEEE 802.1Q/p
10. May be utilized to provide attendant console functionality.
11. Modules for additional line/feature buttons, as required.

2.11 APPLICATIONS

A. Voice Mail and Unified Messaging System

1. Description and Support Options: The Contractor shall give a detailed description of his
voice mail/unified messaging product offering. Include an overview of the hardware,
software, architecture, and components of the equipment to meet Employer requirements.
2. Specifications
a. The voice messages shall be stored in an industry standard format.
b. The Unified Messaging System shall provide advanced multi-media messaging features,
including auto attendant with multi-level voice mail menus, announcements, call routing
and optionally, text to speech conversion.
c. Provide diverse redundant Server configurations.
d. Access to the Unified Messaging System shall be available by telephone or email and
allow full user administration capability, proper message light operation, and eliminate
need for duplicate administration between the telephone and email systems.
e. Message storage shall reside on the Unified Messaging System.
f. The Unified Messaging System shall provide no more than maximum P.01 blocking for
interconnections with the call processors to effectively eliminate unavailable conditions
for messaging service access.
g. Once a voice mail is left, the user shall be able to forward it to another user. The user
shall also be able to append comments before forwarding the message to another user.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 19 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

h. The voice mail / unified messaging system shall be remotely accessible for both
subscribers and administrators, e.g. from a standard touch-tone phone or any other types
of clients and points of access (IP phone, Mobile Phone, Web Browser, Email Client, or
a Desktop Client). The application should allow voice messages to be transcribed and
delivered to an email inbox.
i. Fax Messaging shall be provided at a quantity equal to 5% of the Equipped VoIP
Telephones. Configuration shall be provided to allow use of network printers
j. The system shall support analog and/or digital interface ports. If analog, the Contractor
shall include the specific interface card required for the IP communication system. If
ports are digital, the Contractor shall provide all specifications that the telephone system
must meet for proper operation.
k. The Unified Communications Solution shall offer a complete integration of the
Voicemail / Unified Messaging Platform l Application with the existing Microsoft
Active Directory & Exchange and enhance the user experience by offering multiple
ways to retrieve their critical voicemail. The Voicemail / Unified Messaging Platform
should support scalability to 20,000 Users.
l. The proposed Voicemail / Unified Messaging Platform shall support as a minimum the
following features or equivalent:
1) VMware vSphere (ESXi) Virtualization.
2) Unified Computing System (UCS) Rack Mount Servers.
3) OS based on Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 5.5 and above.
m. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements with the Employer.
n. The Contractor shall coordinate integration with the Project Data Network.
3. System Capabilities: The proposed Voice Mail and Unified Messaging System shall have
the below capabilities as a minimum:
a. E.164 formatted Phone Numbers.
b. Alternate Extensions.
c. Alternate key mappings for Message Retrieval.
d. Custom Keypad.
e. Automatic Gain Control for Voicemail volume playback levels.
f. Caller ID (CLID).
g. Call Screening.
h. Class of Service (CoS).
i. Bulk User Administration.
j. Integration with Call Control Platform.
k. Day & Time Stamp of Messages
l. Directory Search.
m. Unified Messaging with Microsoft Office 365.
n. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Versions 1, 2, and 3.
o. Event Logging & Audit Logging.
p. Full Mailbox Warning
q. Creating folders within a Mailbox for Inbox, Deleted Items, Sent items, and Draft Items.
r. Creating Unified (single Inbox) or Integrated (IMAP) Messaging.
s. Holiday Schedule
t. Music on Hold
u. Self-enrollment to set password, record voice name, and specify directory listing.
v. Status Monitor for Real Time Administration
w. System Broadcast Messages
x. System Greetings Customization
y. 12- and 24-hour Clock Support for Time Stamps.
z. Security-Enhanced Linux (SELinux) access-control policies for enhanced Security.
aa. Password and PIN security policy options to enforce expiration, complexity, reuse, and
lockout.
bb. Call-restriction tables to prevent Toll Fraud.
cc. Secure RTP and Signaling Encryption for Secure Communication between Voicemail /
Unified Messaging Platform and Call Control Platform.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 20 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

dd. A user telephone PIN reset feature in Voicemail / Unified Messaging Platform Assistant
to reduce help-desk calls and operating expenses.
ee. Secure HTTP (HTTPS) for secure web access to Voicemail / Unified Messaging
Platform and allows for playback of secure messages within Microsoft Outlook.
ff. G.722 and Internet Low Bitrate Codec (iLBC), G.711 mu-law, G.711 a-law, and G.729
Codecs to avoid the use of Transcoding Resources.
gg. Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)
6.10, G.711 mu-law, G.711 a-law, G.729a, and G.726 through system-based transcoding
resources.
hh. Reports for:
1) Call Handler Traffic
2) Distribution Lists
3) Events
4) Outcall Billing
5) Port Usage
6) Users
7) User Message Activity
8) System Configuration
9) Transfer Call Billing
10) User Access Activity
11) User Lockout
12) Message Traffic
13) Port Activity
14) Mailbox Store
15) Dial Plan
16) Dial Search Scope
4. System Features
a. The system shall have a voice digitization technique. The voice digitization rate used for
recording users’ speech shall be as a minimum 64kb/s for G.711 and 8kb/s for G.729a.
b. The system shall provide a notification message that these limits have almost been
reached.
c. The system shall provide an “end of recording” warning and user adjustable playback
speed control (with full pitch preservation).
d. The unified messaging system shall provide text to speech capabilities to support email-
by-phone features.
e. The unified messaging system shall provide Automatic Speech Recognition (ASR) and
speech recognition features.
f. If a caller does not know a particular subscriber’s extension number, the system shall
provide him the ability to “look up” the subscriber by “spelling” the name via touch-
tone input.
g. The voice mail system shall support multiple greeting.
h. The voice mail system shall support a “zero out” to the attendant feature. This feature
shall be configurable by class of service. The “zero out” destination could be a station
rather than the attendant. The call shall be re-directed if the “zero out” destination is
busy, or rings unanswered.
i. Users should be required to enter a password to access their voice mailbox.
j. The system shall track failed password entries in a single session. The system shall also
automatically disconnect the caller after a configurable number of failed attempts.
k. The system shall track failed password entries across multiple sessions. The system shall
also automatically lock out the user after a configurable number of failed attempts.
l. The system shall log information about failed password attempts.
m. The system shall require a system administrator password.
5. User Features: The system subscribers shall be able to conduct as a minimum the following
actions:
a. Pause and replay messages.
b. Record messages; send and mark “urgent”, “private”, etc.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 21 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. Transfer messages to other users and append them with their own comments.
d. Create their own distribution lists.
e. Edit/Modify their own distribution lists.
f. Dial internally by name / company directory.
g. Obtain user instruction through system prompts.
h. Record personal greetings.
i. Modify own passwords.
j. Set business days and hours for alternate greetings.
6. System Administration: The system administration shall be done through a standard web-
enabled GUI which can perform the below listed actions through a standard web-enabled
GUI:
a. Add or modify a class of service. State what user permissions or characteristics within
a class of service can be created or modified.
b. Set the minimum and maximum password length for a user.
c. Set the maximum length of voice messages.
d. Set the maximum failed login attempts before a user lockout from the mailbox.
e. Assign default passwords for users, and reset passwords for users that have been locked
out of their mailboxes.
f. Set the “disk space remaining” warning level.
g. Add, delete, or modify a user.
h. Provide reports concerning storage and call information.

B. IP Contact Center
1. System Features
a. The Contact Center System shall interface with ACD, IVR and CTI as required.
b. Inbound, outbound, multi-media capabilities, skills based routing, universal queuing and
self-service options as required.
c. Real time,on demand call routing change capabilities.
d. The Contact Center System shall record and store detailed call information, provide real
time status, metrics and management reporting. Reporting shall include preconfigured
and customized reporting available on a scheduled and on-demand basis.
e. Telephones designed for contact center agents shall be provided.
f. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements with the Employer.
g. Provide for printing of detailed bills.
2. Hardware Configuration
a. The Contractor shall provide a detailed description of the integrated IVR functionalities,
as well as “media” on hold capabilities.
b. The system shall support e-mail integration.
c. The system shall provide web collaboration features (e.g. co-browse, text chat, web
callback).
d. The system shall support voice mail integration.
3. System Software
a. The system shall have the most recent software release at the time of delivery. The
Contractor shall provide a timetable of all scheduled software releases and upgrades.
b. All system changes and software upgrades shall be able to be performed on-line with
minimal interruption and/or disturbance of the running system.
c. The system shall have a back-up procedure for the operating software, which includes
up-to-date moves and changes.
d. The system shall support Computer Telephony Integration (CTI), Telephony
Application Programming Interface (TAPI) and Java Telephony Application
Programming Interface (JTAPI) applications.
e. The Contractor shall list all partner programs for third-party applications development.
4. Agent Station Hardware and Software
a. The IP agent phones shall operate using a standard Ethernet port.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 22 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. The IP phone shall use a single directory that is common for the data network and allow
display of name, extension browsing and dialing by press of a button.
c. No “hard phone” shall be required for the agent desktop to be VoIP enabled.
d. The agent IP phones shall support as a minimum the following features:
1) Audio volume adjustment.
2) Auto echo cancellation.
3) Call forward busy.
4) Call forward no answer.
5) Call forward all calls.
6) Call hold / release.
7) Call park / pickup.
8) Call transfer.
9) Call waiting.
10) Calling line ID (line and name).
11) Chat.
12) Conference (uni-cast).
13) Last number re-dial.
14) Ringer pitch adjustment.
15) Ringer volume adjustment.
16) Speakerphone mute.
17) Speed dial (auto-dial).
e. The callers shall have the ability to be presented with the option of leaving a message.
This message shall be able to be routed accordingly.
f. The agent shall have a tool available for pre-defined responses.
g. The solution shall be able to support remote agents or satellite offices.

C. Conferencing
1. The system shall support conferencing features On demand and scheduled conferences.
2. The system shall support password protection and entry and exit tones with conference
connections.
3. The system shall have a scheduling package for managing defined capacities with conference
connections.
4. The system shall provide VPN connection facilities to enable employees from non-company
telecommuting locations (a) to gain authorized access to the IP-based Telephony
Communications System to make calls to (b) local or (c) long distance calls.
5. Interface with various audio conference systems.
6. Password protected access and use of meeting numbers.
7. Collaborative Web sharing capabilities.
8. Administrative conference management tools, including list of attendees, identification of
noisy endpoints and selective end-point mute.
9. Administrative reporting shall include on-demand and scheduled reports of conference
bridge scheduling and utilization.
10. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements with the Employer.

D. Web Collaboration Functionality

1. Provide a comprehensive collaboration experience with on-premises audio and video
conferencing, and integration with WebEx Meeting Applications.
2. The Contractor shall design the Collaboration and Media Platform as per the below listed
minimum criteria based on the High Level Solution Architecture approved by the Employer.
3. The capabilities and deployment options should help deliver an improved user experience,
with greater flexibility and scalability.
4. Reduce total cost of ownership for WebEx meeting applications and integrating with Unified
Communications.
5. The Collaboration Platform shall:
a. Offer additional scalability, supporting up to 1200 Concurrent Attendees System Wide

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 23 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. Support improved deployment flexibility with support for virtualization on the UCS
platform and High Availability.
6. The proposed Collaborations and Media Server Platform shall support the following features
as a minimum or equivalent:
a. VMware vSphere (ESXi) Virtualization.
b. Unified Computing System (UCS) Rack Mount Servers.
c. OS based on Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 5.5 and above.
7. System Capabilities: The proposed Collaborations and Media Server Platform shall have the
below capabilities as a minimum:
a. On-Premises Conferencing for WebEx Meeting Applications
b. Advanced Audio Conferencing
c. Encrypted audio conferencing (Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol SRTP)
d. Native or WebEx Video
e. WebEx Integration for Scheduling
f. Impromptu & Multiparty Conferencing
g. Rich-Media Conference Recordings
h. Enterprise-Scale Conferencing Solution
i. It supports G.711, G.722, and G.729 audio compression using the Express Media Server.
j. Native SIP with Unified Communications
k. In-session audio meeting features.
l. Scheduled or Reservation less meetings are supported.
m. Callback from WebEx
n. Announce Meeting entries and Departures
o. Meeting hosts can mute individual users or all participants.
p. Meeting hosts can dial out to an individual.
q. Meeting hosts can lock meetings.
r. Video encoding standards include H.263 and H.264 with active speaker switching.
s. Video endpoint devices in H.323/SIP or Skinny Client Control Protocol (SCCP)
protocols.
t. Common Intermediate Format (CIF) and 720p high definition (HD) for Services
Framework (CSF) HD devices.
u. Video automatically connects with video-enabled endpoints; no scheduling is required.
v. Text Overlay allows for user identification.
w. Quality of service (QoS) with Differentiated Services (DiffServ).
x. Microsoft Outlook Integration
y. Calendar or email invitations are automatically distributed to invited participants.
z. Single click to attend voice, video, and web conferences directly from the calendar,
email notification, URL link, IM, or browser.
aa. Able to initiate immediate meetings from Unified Client.

2.12 CALL ROUTING AND REPORTING SOFTWARE FUNCTIONALITY

A. The system shall manage call routing from a single application.

B. The system shall provide as a minimum the following routing strategies:

1. Application based routing and reporting.
2. Automatic call distribution.
3. Call-by-call routing.
4. Call re-routing based on wait time.
5. Call re-routing based on non-answer.
6. Conditional routing based on time of day, day of week and holidays.
7. Conditional routing based on calls in queue.
8. Conditional routing based on caller origin.
9. Conditional routing based on dialed number.
10. Conditional routing based on caller-entered digits (CED).
11. Directed agent routing (single agent selection).

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 24 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

12. Database call handling.

13. Look ahead queuing.
14. Look back queuing.
15. Overflow (retains queue position).
16. Priorities.
17. Skill-based routing.
18. Build your own strategy routing.

C. The system shall provide agent proficiency setup.

D. All contacts shall be “queued” in the same fashion regardless of media type.

E. The system shall provide routing priorities.

F. The software shall provide reports for all agents across all locations.

G. The software shall collect information through the entire life of the complete Employer
interaction and provide not only real time, but also historical reporting.

H. The application shall support a web-view monitoring tool for read-only access to real time contact
center performance reports and call routing scripts.

I. The system shall offer the ability for an agent to record a conversation with a customer (for
instance if a customer was being abusive).

2.13 DIAL PLAN AND ADVANCED ROUTING FEATURES

A. The Contractor shall be responsible of the system Dial Plan design and configuration and the
advanced routing features including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Amount and type of routing plans.
2. Type of trunks supported in routing scheme.
3. Queuing and overflow capabilities.
4. Use of authorization codes on individual routes.
5. Handling digit deletion and insertion regarding the North American Dialing Plan.
6. Route filtering method.

B. The Contractor shall submit the system Dial Plan structure for approval.

C. The system shall be compliant with the North American Numbering Plan (NANP).

2.14 INTERACTIVE VOICE RESPONSE (IVR) AND COMPUTER TELEPHONY INTEGRATION

(CTI)

A. The system shall be able to provide screen-pop integration capability.

B. The system shall be able to access database information for call routing decisions or screen pop
data.

C. The system shall be able to deliver third party call control from a CTI-enabled desktop.

D. The system shall provide the following features:

1. Accept DTMF caller input for menu selection.
2. Multilingual support for IVR prompts.
3. Multilingual Automated Speech Recognition (ASR).
4. Multilingual text to speech conversion.
5. Multi-level Auto Attendant.
6. Estimated time to answer – provide caller with estimated wait time.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 25 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

7. Customized announcements.
8. Interface with operational Database and Systems Integration Platform to provide
requested information as required.
9. Deliver notification of requested information through e-mail, fax, pager, and short message
service (SMS).
10. Enable rapid development and deployment of IVR applications with a Web-based service
creation and scripting environment.
11. Allow HTTP requests to trigger application execution.
12. Support Voice Extensible Markup Language (VXML), allowing creation of voice portals
and voice-enabling Web sites using HTTP, XML, and Web or application servers.
13. Customizable Reports.
14. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements with the Employer.

2.15 DIGITAL AUDIO RECORDING

A. The Digital Audio Recording (DAR) system (also referred to as IP-Based Voice Recording) shall
be equipped with the following minimum capacity:
1. Record 40% of all telephone lines, trunks and device communications.
2. Record all public numbers: Police, Fire, Emergency and urgent care department numbers.
3. Comply with all legally required internal and external call recording.
4. The system shall have an expansion capacity of at least 50%.

B. The DAR system shall have capability to record the following:

1. IP Telephone handset.
2. Analog Telephone handset.
3. Wireless LAN Telephone handset and wireless LAN PDA devices.
4. Incoming, outgoing and station to station calling.
5. ANI/ALI Data.
6. Two-wire and four-wire analog audio input signals from various devices.

C. The DAR solution shall be capable of being integrated with the proposed IVR and ACD
Applications. Hence the below features shall be required as a minimum:
1. Quality and Performance Management.
2. Scheduling evaluations
3. Dashboard & Reporting
4. Export data to Excel
5. Dashboard Widgets
6. Staying Objective Through Calibration
7. Feedback
8. Agent Screen Capture

D. The proposed product shall support SIP based recording. The applications should visualize the
whole conversation on one time line. It should be able to Relocate, Synchronize, Archive, Delete,
Backup and Restore. It should also capture important information with the push of a button. Be
able to access anywhere in the organization from a Secure Desktop / Laptop using the Browser
Interface. It should support G.711 (u & a law) G.729 (a & b) Decoding without manual
intervention.
1. Flexible Recording Rules
2. Full Auditing
3. Fine grained hierarchical security and privileges
4. Call Encryption
5. Pause and Resume support
6. Redirection, Conferences, Transfers
7. Parked and picked-up calls, barged calls
8. Shared lines & Extension Mobility

E. The DAR system shall comply with the following:

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 26 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. The system shall be equipped with instant recall as follows:

a. Instant recall buffer hard drive capacity for 30 days call activity with 100% spare
capacity.
b. Allow users to playback any part of a call while it is still being recorded
c. Dynamic resource allocation
d. Provide incident playback that accurately plays back all telephone voice
communications over the channel being recorded.
2. The system shall automatically archive recordings to DVD-RAM for long-term storage.
System shall differentiate between record and playback media.
a. Each recording unit shall be equipped with dual DVD-RAM drives
3. The system shall have the ability to interface with analog telephones, VoIP telephones,
wireless LAN telephones and two-wire analog voice and audio systems.
4. The system shall have the ability to interface to E1, PRI, and telephone trunks by adding
appropriate hardware to the system.
5. The system shall be capable of simultaneous record and playback, i.e. recordings on the
current or archival media shall be accessed while recording continues.
6. Reporting capabilities shall include:
a. User reports indicating user action, media activity and system changes by user name,
date and description
b. System warnings and errors
c. Traffic data across channels, lines or extensions
d. ANI/ALI, Telephony system Name, location, calling number, called number, duration,
date, and time of day.
7. The system shall be capable of remote maintenance through LAN connections
8. Redundancy: The system shall be equipped with hot swappable power supplies, and Raid-5
Disk Array
9. Interface to Master Clock to obtain date/time stamp.

F. Network Playback Software

1. Network playback software shall be Windows compatible and allow authorized users to
manage, monitor and playback communications from PC workstations across a local area
network.
2. Network Playback software shall be password protected with access levels configured on a
user or group basis. Access levels shall include system management, channel monitoring
and instant recall/playback, at a minimum.
3. Provide Ten (10) software licenses for network playback software.

2.16 OPERATOR CONSOLE

A. Operator Console shall comply with operator requirements and the following general features
unless otherwise noted:
1. Transfer of Incoming Call: Operator is to be able to connect any internal station or outside
trunk line with any other internal station with or without announcement of the call to the
recipient extension.
2. Calling Number Display: Visual display of the station seeking attendant service the station
dialed by the operator.
3. Serial Call: Operator is to be able to complete an incoming trunk call to two or more station
lines in succession without requiring the outside party to recall operator.
4. Timer Reminder: Operator is to be automatically alerted after 30 seconds when an internal
or outside call on the console is waiting.
5. Alarm Reporting: Alarms shall be delivered to all operator consoles.
6. Priority Break-in: Operator is to be able to interfere in an established communication for
special announcements or transfer of incoming calls; warning tone is to be sent for both
conversing parties.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 27 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

7. Night Assistance: When all operators have gone home, it shall be possible to provide service
to internal or external callers. The night assistance facilities shall allow a specially nominated
extension to provide the services. A group of extensions can be allocated as a night extension.
Group facilities such as call pick up can then add assistance to the night extensions.
8. Busy Lamp Field.

2.17 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS

A. A system administration tool(s) shall be available to meet the following requirements:

1. The system administration application shall be accessible from any workstation on the LAN
/ WAN.
2. The system administration application shall be accessed through a standard web browser.
3. The system administration tool shall be capable of making block copy changes to a number
of subscribers or class of service simultaneously.
4. The administration of multiple remote sites shall be able to be done through a centralized
workstation.
5. The administration tool(s) shall have security features to prevent unauthorized access to the
administration application. A minimum of four security levels shall be defined. Permission
levels shall be customizable and cannot be set to a certain limit.
6. The administrative application system shall have an alternate form of access if the primary
access is unavailable.
7. The administrative application shall have on-line help.
8. A database shall be used to administer the IP call-processing unit and populate telephone
tables. This database shall be capable of being integrated with e-mail, and HR databases.

2.18 SYSTEM MONITORING AND DIAGNOSTICS

A. The system shall have diagnostic tools that support the Windows 2000 Event Log. These
diagnostic tools shall be able to produce diagnostic reports to aid in isolating faults. The
diagnostic tools shall be remotely accessed and SNMP compliant.

B. Remote diagnostics should be supported. The administrators shall be able to see and access any
alarms or alerts on the system from remote terminals.

C. The system shall be capable of producing monitoring report(s) including but not limited to the
following:
1. Performance monitoring.
2. Quality monitoring.
3. Events monitoring.

D. The system shall support the system monitoring items listed below:
1. Trunking status.
2. Real time traffic.
3. Status of all routing components.
4. Status of all remote components.
5. Status of individual stations.
6. Status of gateway ports.
7. Provide call trace capability.
8. Monitor for Toll Fraud.
9. Telephone system analysis.

E. The system shall provide system alarms and alarm notifications from the IP call-processing unit.

2.19 CALL ACCOUNTING / CALL LOGGING

A. The IP-based Telephony Communications System shall have full features CDR reporting
applications.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 28 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Provide a server based billing system utilizing telephone call statistics and flexible cost detail to
provide billing reporting for accurate chargeback of services, and real time call logging for
immediate call history analysis, with the following capabilities and features:
1. Web based administration
2. Open Standards compliant
3. Simplified and easy to use with minimal training required
4. Multi-system, multi-tenant support
5. Call statistics to include all calls processed by the Telephony System
6. Call log data updated automatically in real time and include automated telephone MAC input.
7. Flexible call costing, and Tariff manipulation with user programmable rate plans and rate
groups
8. Import & Export capabilities to multiple formats such as Excel, xml and CSV
9. Standard and customizable reporting including graphical statistics and records query with
wildcard searches for remote, single and consolidated site reporting.
10. Scheduling to allow automatic periodic reporting.
11. Alerts on defined trigger patterns
12. Traffic analysis & capacity planning
13. Active storage shall be provided to retain all incoming, outgoing and intra call log data over
the most recent 12 month period.
14. The Call Accounting / Call Logging System shall include all hardware and software
processing as necessary for a complete system and include software backup /restore
processes.
15. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements with the Employer.

C. The system shall have the capability to report by location and on a consolidated enterprise level.
The following minimum standard reporting capabilities shall be available:
1. Directory Number Allocation.
2. Trace Log Files.
3. Real Time Monitoring.

D. The system shall have the capability to generate customized reports.

2.20 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. The Network Management System shall be a PC based system configured and installed to monitor
and manage the IP-based Telephony Communications System.

B. IP-based Telephony Communications System components shall use SNMP, SNMPII or RMON
to communicate to the network management station.

C. The Network Management System shall provide the following monitoring capabilities:
1. Configuration Management - The installation, initialization, modification and tracking of the
system configuration parameters (hardware and software) to enable the continuous operation
of services.
2. Performance Management: The generation of reports and displays to collect performance
data based on performance parameter values. This module shall generate visual and audio
alarms to alert operators when the performance falls below defined thresholds.
3. Security Management - The protection of the system components and addressing those
aspects of security essential to the operation of the network.
4. Accounting Management - The establishment and implementation of a mechanism allowing
charges to be made for the use of IP telephony system components.
5. Fault Management - The detection, isolation and correction of abnormal network conditions.

D. Network Management System Software

1. Levels
a. Software shall provide different access right levels and passwords:

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 29 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1) Level 0: no password is required: access to supervision,

2) Level 1: a password allows modifying a set of parameters,
3) Level 2: a password allows entering criteria and parameters.
b. To reach a level, the operator uses a password to be allowed to enter the system.
2. Features
a. Software shall provide reporting:
1) Alarm/event history consisting of alarm/event lists,
2) Operator history consisting of database changes and log-ins by operator.
b. A query function shall allow selected data to be sorted on not less than 3 selection
criteria.
c. Software shall allow a backup function.
d. All servers and workstations shall be fitted with the latest virus protecting software.

E. For more detailed specifications, refer to Division 27, Section Data Communications for Campus
Network”] and Section [“Data Communications for Data Center.

2.21 INTERCONNECTION AND THIRD PARTY NETWORK SERVICES

A. External and third party communication services shall be engineered to maximize service
availability by removing single points of failure.

B. Service availability shall be achieved by:

1. Diverse routing of the Service Provider owned cable infrastructure up to the Project site.
2. Implementation of WAN services utilizing fault tolerant transmission techniques and
equipment.
3. The Main Telecom Rooms shall be provided with diverse cables from two different Ingress
Telecom Nodes, thereby providing cable and WAN system resilience.

C. Applications and services shall be equally divided and load balanced across this solution, thereby
providing resilient logical and physical paths in the event of a failure. This solution shall ensure
continued service should any one element of the WAN system fail.

D. The Ultimate DDI (Direct Inward Dialing) requirement shall be insert number of lines lines.
System shall be designed to accommodate such a requirement from [the national service
provider]. Additional <insert number of lines> lines shall be held in reserve to accommodate any
future expansion.

2.22 OTHER CAPABILITIES

A. Provide the following capabilities:

1. Web enabled tools for contact management, click to dial, call log and presence enabled
directory.
2. Audio conferencing and Web based publishing.
3. Send and receive messages utilizing VoIP telephone display.
4. Mobility management.
5. Auto discovery of the complete network environment and generation of hierarchic topology
diagrams, including core voice servers and gateways and continuous node monitoring with
alert tools.
6. Call traffic simulation to allow confirmation of proper device operation.
7. Automatic inventory listings of SIP and SCCP telephones.
8. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements with the Employer.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 30 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.23 INTEGRATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The following systems shall be integrated and interfaced to the IP-Based Telephony
Communications System:
1. The Data Communications Network.
2. PSTN telecommunication network.
3. The Master Clock System (MCS).
4. The Structured Cabling Network (SCN).
5. The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).

B. The description of all these interfaces shall be defined into software requirements specification
such as:
1. The type of interfaces: databases queries/tables, shared flat files, messages, etc.,
2. The frequency: periodically or on-demand.

C. Data Communications Network

1. Telephone Equipment linked to the SCN shall provide network monitoring facilities to the
Data Communications Network.
2. The Data Communications Network shall ensure the security of the interface with Telephone
Equipment Standard End-Users.

D. Master Clock System (MCS)

1. Time synchronization shall be ensured by Master Clock broadcasting messages compliant
with Precision Time Protocol (PTP) and fall-back NTP/DT2. All equipment delivering time-
stamped data shall take into account these messages.

E. SCN
1. The SCN shall be used for communication all over the Project network.

F. Internal interface
1. The Telephone Equipment system shall ensure interfaces between the Telephone Equipment
sub-systems, such as:
a. The Servers Units
b. The Billing System

G. Other Packages
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the integration of all data interfaces, requested by
any described Building Services System or Special Airport System (SAS) - as applicable to
the Project, as well as any other needed interface with general Communications and Security
Systems, or other packages etc.:
a. Public Address System
1) User shall be able to make announcement on PAS system from a Telephone Device
based on user access rights.
2) Priority of emergency calls shall be managed by PAS system according to the
adopted life safety rules.
3) User shall be able to choose zones for announcement based on user access rights
and zones codes.
b. Radio Paging System
1) It shall be possible to transfer radio paging calls from an intercom station to the
telephone system.
2) The Radio Paging System shall support standard VoIP telephones using SIP.

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 31 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. The Contractor shall ensure the general coordination between the system equipment's and
any other systems under its scope of work, or to be coordinated with others, as to avoid any
technical mismatches which may prevent its proper long term operation and maintenance.

2.24 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. The works shall be performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced engineers,
all of whom shall be properly factory trained and qualified for this work.

C. Upon installation of network components, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance to verify that the Telephony
system is in proper working condition. Remove temporary connections when tests have been
satisfactorily completed.

D. Correct malfunctioning units at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.

E. Perform station reviews, data base preparation, and original program initializations.

F. Coordinate ordering and installation of circuits, outside business lines, Direct Inward Dialing
(DID) number blocks and configurations with the Employer and Service Provider.

G. Install, configure and test the components of the IP-based Telephony Communications System
including the Network Management System.

H. Coordinate with the Employer and prepare an approved Telephone Configuration Plan to
document class of service, class of restrictions, call pickup, dial plan, trunk group assignments,
alternate trunk routing load balancing, emergency caller location, emergency responder access,
Night Service, ACD groups/routing, IT Help Desk, backup telephones, assignment of long
handset cords, and any other configurations necessary to integrate Telephony System features
and capabilities with the Employer’s business processes.

I. As an extension of the Telephone Configuration Plan, coordinate with the Employer and prepare
approved configuration plans as necessary for each deployed adjunct system to ensure proper
integration with the Employer’s business processes.

J. User capability to perform self Telephone Moves Adds and Changes (MAC) shall not be
deployed.

K. Configure basic traffic management for all individual trunks and trunk groups, maintenance
reporting for held trunks, and alarm notification for outages and service affecting conditions.

L. Connect and configure Telephony System interfaces to other systems: Paging, Mass Notification,
Music on Hold, Digital Audio Recording (DAR), and other systems, as required

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 32 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

M. Coordinate configuration dependencies with related systems as required for proper Telephony
System and adjunct system operation.

N. Coordinate installation and configuration of the following items with the Project Data Network
Contractor and the Employer:
1. Configuration Plan dependencies
2. Remote software application telephone access.
3. Remote telephone system administrative access.
4. Unified Messaging System administrative access.
5. Backup data network storage for the telephone system, Unified Messaging, Call
Accounting/Call Logging and any other adjunct systems.
6. Restoration network access for data retrieval.
7. Ongoing software patching and update process for the telephone system, Unified Messaging,
Call Accounting/Call Logging and any other adjunct systems.

O. Provide a Network Readiness Audit and certify the network configurations will support IP
Telephony. Any deficiencies shall be provided to the Network Contractor for resolution.

P. Provide a Security Audit and coordinate with the Employer to address and reduce risk exposure
to telephone fraud and unauthorized system access.

Q. Carry out any site works under direct supervision of qualified technicians who are to be well
trained with qualified Manufacturer experience.

R. Connect the required data circuits from the system to the end user station. Cabling shall account
for redundancy, disaster recovery, and protection against single points of failure.

S. Comply as a minimum with standard Ethernet distance limitations.

T. Coordinate the ordering of all long-distance and local communications facilities and services as
deemed necessary by the Employer, Ensure that WAN circuits are in place as required. Test the
services to ensure functionality.

U. Site workmanship of any network component has to be limited to layout and fixation, and inter-
wiring of various items of the ready made equipment.

V. Coordinate with the Employer to develop a detailed written Customer Acceptance and Testing
Plan and obtain Employer’s approval. The Customer Acceptance and Testing Plan shall include
the following minimum requirements:
1. Verify completion of all manufacture recommended systems testing.
2. Verify resolution of any and all outstanding items resulting from the Network Readiness
Audit.
3. Verify completion of the Telephone Configuration Plan requirements.
4. Verify all standard features, capabilities and call operations function properly and to user
expectation.
5. Verify each end point for proper location, type of telephone device, out-calling capability,
correct extension number labeling, and confirm CPND function.
6. Verify resolution of any and all outstanding items resulting from the Security Audit.
7. Verify all leased circuits are operational and programmed correctly from the Service
Provider.
8. Verify Backup and Restore processes are for each system.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for training the Employer designated personnel in all aspects
of each system, as well as training Employer designated training personnel to allow the Employer
to provide future training without the aid of the Contractor. Training shall consist of both

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 33 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

classroom and hands-on course work. Topics will include instruction in the operations,
diagnostics and maintenance of hardware and software.

B. The Contractor shall submit a training plan that describes the Contractor training methods and
techniques. The plan will maximize flexibility of the training schedule in terms of the course
structure and content, and the differing availability of students within each category and from
each agency. The Contractor shall support discussions and inputs from the Employer to the Final
Training Plan. The training plan shall include but not be limited to:
1. A brief description of training capabilities and Contractor planned facilities.
2. A description of training methodology and objectives.
3. The recommended amount and minimum amount of training necessary for User and
Administrator proficiency.
4. Training development team qualifications and experience.
5. The space or classroom requirements including computer and other equipment necessary to
conduct training; indicate what will be provided by the Contractor and what is expected from
the Employer.
6. Identification of training materials to be approved by the Employer.

C. The Contractor shall provide training products and present hands-on training at Employer
designated facilities including conference rooms or other training room on site, using operational
equipment as approved by the Employer.

D. Quantity of training sessions and number of personnel to be trained shall be as per the direction
of the Employer.

E. The Contractor shall conduct up to 24 hourstotal hands-on administrator site training for up to 3
(three) administrators covering: telephone, unified messaging and call logging administration for
moves adds and changes; trunk group call measurements; call logging reporting; software update
procedures, software backup procedures, identification of basic repair issues, maintenance alarm
set up, and trouble reporting procedures.

F. Quality and adequacy of training is of extreme importance to the Employer regardless of the
instructional methodology utilized. Contractor shall provide a method by which students will be
evaluated, prior to the start of a course; to ensure they have the basic skills necessary to complete
and utilize Contractor provided training. Upon course completion verify using approved test
procedure that students have acquired the skills from Contractor training to optimally perform
the tasks contained in the course(s) of instruction. Identify and provide recommendations for
remedial training of students failing to demonstrate required skills. Training shall be deemed
acceptable when 90% of the students demonstrate satisfactory proficiency. Final training reports
and proficiency testing shall be submitted to the Employer as part of final project documentation.

G. An overall training schedule shall be submitted for review and approval. The Contractor shall
provide maximum flexibility in scheduling training and shall construct an approach that does not
require “bulk” availability of the student populations. Areas of flexibility shall include the
structure and timing of course elements, the shifts being trained, the availability of students, and
modularity of courses or subject streams in such a way as to minimize or eliminate sequential
dependencies between classes. For each time that training is provided, at least four (4) sessions
of each category of training shall be held. At least one (1) session shall be provided during
standard daytime working hours, and at least one (1) session shall be provided during evening
working hours. Specific days, work shifts, and hours for training must be approved by the
Employer.

H. Training materials shall be provided to the Employer a minimum of ten (10) working days in
advance of the training courses. Training must be in a modular format and shall provide separate
areas of training materials specific to administration, operation, and maintenance.

I. Training sessions and intervals shall be as follows:

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 34 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. System Pre-Acceptance training – shall be provided at least two (2) weeks before system
acceptance testing.
2. Follow-up Training Session – shall be provided between fifteen (15) and sixty (60) days after
pre-acceptance training, with times and dates to be selected by Employer.
3. Factory Certification Training – Manufacturer’s factory certification training shall be
provided for at least two (2) Employer designated technicians per individual system. If
performed at the manufacturers’ facilities, the Contractor shall provide transportation,
lodging, per diem, and all training materials associated with the factory certification training.
This training shall provision for the Employer approved staff to provide minor service to the
system during the warranty period (when required) without voiding the conditions of the
warranty.

J. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of factory produced training session on DVD or
other approved media for future system operation training. In addition, the Contractor shall
record one (1) training class session at each training interval and provide three (3) copies of each
session to Employer on DVD or other approved media. Provide training materials for each
attendee to use at each training session and to keep for reference. Provide an additional five (5)
hardcopies and two (2) electronic versions in Word or PDF of each piece of training material used
at each session at the completion of each training session. Employer will have unrestricted,
unlimited right to reproduce all training material as necessary to conduct training by the Employer
for Employer employees.

K. Should the Contractor update training material prior to any final System Acceptance, Contractor
shall provide a complete and fully integrated replacement copy of the training materials, both
hard and soft copy, to the Employer during the software maintenance period.

L. The Contractor shall provide a listing of recommended continuing education and professional
development course work that would be useful in order to assist personnel in maintaining the
system long-term including factory, classroom, user group, seminar course work and/or
professional certification courses.

END OF SECTION 273123

IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 273123 - Page 35 of 35

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 281300 - ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Access Control Software and Database Management”
except where the latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Access Control
Software and Database Management” shall have precedence:
1. Division 27 Section 270501 “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

C. Related Requirements:

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes state-of-the-art, electronic Access Control system that enables access control,
monitoring and protection of all pertinent areas of the Project facilities, consisting of:
1. Security access central-control station.
2. One or more security access networked workstations.
3. Security access operating system and application software.
4. Security access controllers connected to high-speed electronic-data transmission network.

B. Access Control System shall interface with the Fire Alarm System and other Security . These
interfaces shall be hardwired where required by code.

C. Related Sections:
1. Section 111200 - Parking Control Equipment.
2. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 260519 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
4. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
7. Section 263353 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.
8. Section 264313 – Surge Protective Devices.
9. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
10. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
11. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
12. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
13. Section 270501 - Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems.
14. Section 272109 - Data Communications for Campus Network.
15. Section 275123.15 – IP-Based Intercom System.
16. Section 281500 – Access Control Hardware Devices.
17. Section 282000 - Video Surveillance System (VSS).
1. Section 284621.11 - Addressable Fire Alarm System.
18.

D. Servers and related ancillaries shall comply with:

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 1 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Regulations and Standards: All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the
applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:
1. IEC Standards
a. IEC 60839-5-1: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 5-1: Alarm transmission
systems - General requirements
b. IEC 60839-5-2: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 5-2: Alarm transmission
systems - Requirements for supervised premises transceiver (SPT)
c. IEC 60839-5-3: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 5-3: Alarm transmission
systems - Requirements for receiving centre transceiver (RCT)
d. IEC 60839-11-1: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 11-1: Electronic access
control systems - System and components requirements
e. IEC 60839-11-2: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 11-2: Electronic access
control systems - Application guidelines
2. EN Standards
a. EN 50130-4: Alarm systems - Part 4: Electromagnetic compatibility - Product family
standard: Immunity requirements for components of fire, intruder, hold up, CCTV,
access control and social alarm systems

C. Identification Cards shall conform to the following standards:

1. International Organization for Standardization /International Electro-technical Commission
(ISO/IEC)
a. ISO/IEC 7810: Identification Cards - Physical Characteristics
b. ISO/IEC 7811-1: Identification Cards - Recording Technique Part 1: Embossing
c. ISO/IEC 7811-2: Identification Cards - Recording Technique Part 2: Magnetic Stripe -
Low Coercivity
d. ISO/IEC 7811-6: Identification Cards - Recording Technique Part 6: Magnetic Stripe -
High Coercivity
e. ISO/IEC 7811-7: Identification Cards - Recording Technique Part 7: Magnetic Stripe -
High Coercivity, High Density
f. ISO/IEC 7816: (Parts 1 through 15): Identification Cards - Integrated Circuit Cards
g. ISO/IEC 14443: (Parts 1 through 4): Identification cards - Contactless integrated circuit
cards - Proximity cards.
h. ISO/IEC 15693: (Parts 1 through 3): Identification cards - Contactless integrated circuit
cards - Vicinity cards.

D. American National Standards Institute / Telecommunications Industry Association / Electronic

Industries Alliance (ANSI/TIA/EIA)
1. TIA-232-F: Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating
Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange
2. TIA-485-A: Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use in Balanced
Digital Multipoint Systems

E. The system functions in public areas such as elevators, lobbies and parking areas shall comply
with the Accessibility Guidelines by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Definitions

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 2 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity.

2. DTS: Digital Termination Service. A microwave-based, line-of-sight communication
provided directly to the end user.
3. Identifier: A credential card; or code, characteristic, or other unique identification entered
as data into the entry-control database for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where
this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.
4. Location: A Location on the network having a workstation-to-controller communications
link, with additional controllers at the Location connected to the workstation-to-controller
link with a TIA-485-A communications loop. Where this term is presented with an initial
capital letter, this definition applies.
5. Workstation: Personal computer. Applies to the central station, workstations, and file
servers.
6. PCI Bus: Peripheral Component Interconnect. A peripheral bus providing a high-speed data
path between the CPU and the peripheral devices such as a monitor, disk drive, or network.
7. RAS: Remote access services.
8. ROM: Read-only memory. ROM data are maintained through losses of power.
9. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.
10. TWAIN: Technology without an Interesting Name. A programming interface that lets a
graphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program,
activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image-capturing device.
11. WAV: The digital audio format used in Microsoft Windows.
12. Wiegand: Patented magnetic principle that uses specially treated wires embedded in the
credential card.
13. Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation.
14. WMP: Windows Media Player
15. Workstation: A personal computer with software that is configured for specific, limited
security-system functions. Applies to the central station, workstations, and file servers.
16. WYSIWYG: What You See Is What You Get. Text and graphics appear on the screen the
same as they will in print.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide controller to control the pump station

B. Provide proximity reader

C. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

D. Other Clarifications Related to The Scope of Work

1. The Access Control shall utilize the Project Structured Cabling Network and Data
Communications Network Installations. This connectivity shall form part of the Structured
Cabling Network and Data Communications Network as applicable. It shall not form part of
the Access Control system.
2. Inter-wiring, conduits and related accessories, network connectivity and any other material
which is specific to the Access Control central equipment and which is required to provide a
complete operational system, shall form part of the Access Control system.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and miscellaneous
items that will be installed during the course of the installation process. Such items may not be
indicated in the documents. Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and his Suppliers
when considering:
1. Structured communications system cabling, termination, identification and testing.
2. Provision and installation of computer hardware, racks/cabinets and related networking
software and equipment.
3. Active communication and data processing equipment.
4. Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 3 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

5. Provision and installation of UPS in communications rooms.

6. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building
earth electrode system.
7. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility outlets.
8. Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
9. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental control sensors.
10. Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit sleeves, and
penetrations in walls and floors.

B. Accordingly, Contractor shall:

1. Meet jointly with representatives of the above systems, Contractors, Operators, Engineer and
Employer to exchange information and agree on details of project implementation,
equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment in technical rooms to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and ensure necessary interface with other systems.
4. Coordinate with the other Contractors whose deliveries are necessary for the correct
operation of the Access Control including but not limited to the Data Network, Video
Surveillance, etc.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Additional Requirements for Submittals:

1. Product data shall also include:
a. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
Reference each product to a location on Drawings.
2. Shop Drawings shall also include:
a. Diagrams showing schematic diagrams, wiring diagrams, layout of central station,
workstations, controllers, network components, etc.
b. Data on electrical and physical characteristics of central stations, network components,
network management system, etc.
c. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules.
d. Battery and charger calculations for central station, workstations, and controllers.
3. Product Schedules.
4. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, and faceplates. For each exposed
product and for each color and texture specified.
5. Constraints to be studied by the Contractor as part of shop drawings development:
a. The classification of Access Control Crossing Points does not take into account any
materials or specific manufacturing. It refers only to functionalities and equipment to be
installed on each side of the crossing point.
b. The Contractor shall ensure the full coordination between the Access Control constraints
and other Systems such as Fire Alarm and Detection System and VSS (CCTV), or any
other interfaced System.
6. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall also include:
a. Interface Control Document – ICD: The Contractor shall submit the Interface Control
Document (ICD) which will include details of interface protocols and details on
communication between the Access Control and other Building Services systems and
how there is direct interaction between the Access Control and the FAS through dry
contacts.
b. Workstation operating system documentation.
c. Workstation installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the
workstation and all installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore,

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 4 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for
each workstation.
d. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design
guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on approved storage
media of the hard-copy submittal.
e. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and
setup decisions.

1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.9 MISCELLANEOUS QUALITY MANAGEMENT TOPICS

A. For the following quality management topics, refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses
for IT & Security Systems":
1. CONFIDENTIALITY
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
3. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
4. WARRANTY
5. COMMISSIONING
6. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

1.10 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major components
in the system for two years fault-free operation.

C. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for equipment supplied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems".

2.3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Network(s) connecting controllers shall consist of one or more of the following:

1. Local area, IEEE 802.3 Fast Ethernet Gigabit-Ethernet, star topology network based on
TCP/IP.
2. Local area, IEEE 802.11 compatible wireless mesh network, based on TCP/IP.
3. Direct-connected, RS-232 cable from the COM port of the central station to the first
controller, then RS-485 cable to interconnect the remaining controllers at that Location.

2.4 OPERATION

A. Security access system shall use a single database for access-control and credential-creation
functions.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 5 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Distributed Processing: A fully distributed processing system.

1. Access-control information, including time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data,
shall be downloaded to controllers so each controller can make access-control decisions.
2. Intermediate controllers for access control are prohibited.
3. In the event that communications with the central controller are lost, controllers shall
automatically buffer event transactions until communications are restored, at which time
buffered events shall be uploaded to the central station.

C. Number of Locations:
1. Support at least 50 separate Locations using a single Workstation with combinations of
direct-connect or TCP/IP LAN connections to each Location.
2. Each Location shall have its own database and history in the central station.
3. Locations may be combined to share a common database.

D. Data Capacity:
1. 130 different card-reader formats.
2. 999 comments.
3. 48 graphic file types for importing maps.

E. Location Capacity:
1. 100 gate barriers.
2. 2048 supervised alarm inputs.
3. 2048 programmable outputs.

F. System Network Requirements:

1. System components shall be interconnected and shall provide automatic communication of
status changes, commands, field-initiated interrupts, and other communications required for
proper system operation.
2. Communication shall not require operator initiation or response and shall return to normal
after partial- or total-network interruption such as power loss or transient upset.
3. System shall automatically annunciate communication failures to the operator and shall
identify the communications link that has experienced a partial or total failure.
4. Communications controller may be used as an interface between the central-station display
systems and the field device network. Communications controller shall provide functions
required to attain the specified network communications performance.

G. Central station shall provide operator interface, interaction, display, control, and dynamic and
real-time monitoring. Central station shall control system networks to interconnect all system
components, including workstations and field-installed controllers.

H. Field equipment shall include controllers, sensors, and controls.

1. Controllers shall serve as an interface between the central station and sensors and controls.
2. Data exchange between the central station and the controllers shall include down-line
transmission of commands, software, and databases to controllers.
3. The up-line data exchange from the controller to the central station shall include status data
such as intrusion alarms, status reports, and entry-control records.
4. Controllers are classified as alarm-annunciation or entry-control type.

I. System Response to Alarms:

1. Field device network shall provide a system end-to-end response time of one second(s) or
less for every device connected to the system.
2. Alarms shall be annunciated at the central station within one second of the alarm occurring
at a controller or at a device controlled by a local controller, and within 100 ms if the alarm
occurs at the central station.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 6 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Alarm and status changes shall be displayed within 100 ms after receipt of data by the central
station.
4. All graphics shall be displayed, including graphics-generated map displays, on the console
monitor within five seconds of alarm receipt at the security console.
5. This response time shall be maintained during system heavy load.

J. False-Alarm Reduction: The design of the central station and controllers shall contain features
to reduce false alarms.

K. Error Detection:
1. Use a cyclic code method to detect single- and double-bit errors, burst errors of eight bits or
fewer, and at least 99 percent of all other multi-bit and burst errors between controllers and
the central station.
2. Interactive or product error-detection codes alone will not be acceptable.
3. A message shall be in error if one bit is received incorrectly.
4. Retransmit messages with detected errors.
5. Allow for an operator-assigned two-digit decimal number to each communications link
representing the number of retransmission attempts.
6. Central station shall print a communication failure alarm message when the number of
consecutive retransmission attempts equals the assigned quantity.
7. Monitor the frequency of data transmission failure for display and logging.

L. Data Line Supervision: System shall initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting,
or grounding of data transmission lines.

2.5 APPLICATION SOFTWARE

A. System Software: Based on 32 -bit, Microsoft Windows application software.

1. Multiuser multitasking shall allow independent activities and monitoring to occur
simultaneously at different workstations.
2. Graphical user interface shall show pull-down menus and a menu-tree format.
3. Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits.
4. Open architecture that allows importing and exporting of data and interfacing with other
systems that are compatible with operating system.
5. Password-protected operator login and access.

B. Peer Computer Control Software: Detect a failure of a central computer and cause the other
central computer to assume control of all system functions without interruption of operation.
Both central computers shall have drivers to support this mode of operation.

C. Controller Software:
1. Controllers shall operate as autonomous, intelligent processing units.
a. Controllers shall make decisions about access control, alarm monitoring, linking
functions, independent of other system components.
b. Controllers shall be part of a fully distributed processing-control network.
c. The portion of the database associated with a controller, and consisting of parameters,
constraints, and the latest value or status of points connected to that controller, shall be
maintained in the controller.
2. The following functions shall be fully implemented and operational within each controller:
a. Monitoring inputs.
b. Controlling outputs.
c. Automatically reporting alarms to the central station.
d. Reporting of sensor and output status to the central station on request.
e. Maintaining real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a day.
f. Communicating with the central station.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 7 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

g. Executing controller resident programs.

h. Diagnosing.
i. Downloading and uploading data to and from the central station.
3. Controller Operations at a Location:
4. Individual Controller Operation:
a. Controllers shall transmit alarms, status changes, and other data to the central station
when communications circuits are operable. If communications are not available,
controllers shall function in a stand-alone mode; operational data, including the status
and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station, shall be stored for later
transmission to the central station. Storage capacity for the latest 1024 events shall be
provided at each controller.
b. Controllers that are reset, or powered up from a non-powered state, shall automatically
request a parameter download and reboot to their proper working state. This shall
happen without any operator intervention.
c. Initial Startup: When controllers are brought on-line, database parameters shall be
automatically downloaded to them. After initial download is completed, only database
changes shall be downloaded to each controller.
d. On failure for any reason, controllers shall perform an orderly shutdown and force
controller outputs to a predetermined failure-mode state, consistent with the failure
modes shown and the associated control device.
e. After power is restored, following a power failure, startup software shall initiate self-
test diagnostic routines, after which controllers shall resume normal operation.
f. After controller failure, if the database and application software are no longer resident,
controllers shall not restart but shall remain in the failure mode until repaired. If
database and application programs are resident, controllers shall immediately resume
operation. If not, software shall be restored automatically from the central station.
5. Communications Monitoring:
a. System shall monitor and report status of TIA-485-A communications loop of each
Location.
b. Communication status window shall display which controllers are currently
communicating, a total count of missed polls since midnight, and which controller last
missed a poll.
c. Communication status window shall show the type of CPU, the type of I/O board, and
the amount of RAM for each controller.
6. Operating systems shall include a real-time clock function that maintains seconds, minutes,
hours, day, date, and month. The real-time clock shall be automatically synchronized with
the central station at least once a day to plus or minus 10 seconds. The time synchronization
shall be automatic, without operator action and without requiring system shutdown.

D. Direct Serial or TCP/IP Workstation-to-Controller Communications:

1. Communication software on the Workstation shall supervise the Workstation-to-controller
communications link.
2. Loss of communications to any controller shall result in an alarm at all workstations running
the communication software.
3. When communications are restored, all buffered events shall automatically upload to the
Workstation, and any database changes shall be automatically sent to the controller.

E. Broadband workstation -to-Controller Communications:

1. Communication software on the workstation shall supervise the workstation-to-controller
communications link during dial-up modem connect times.
2. Communication software shall be programmable to routinely poll each of the remote dial-up
or cable modem Locations, collecting event logs and verifying phone lines at operator-
selectable time intervals for each Location.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 8 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. System shall be programmable for dialing and connecting to all dial-up or cable modem
Locations and for retrieving the accrued history transactions on an automatic basis as often
as once every 10 minutes and up to once every 9999 minutes.
4. Failure to communicate to a dial-up Location three times in a row shall result in an alarm at
the workstation.
5. Time offset capabilities shall be present so that Locations in a different geographical time
zone than the host workstation will be set to, and maintained at, the proper local time. This
feature shall allow for geographical time zones that are ahead of or behind the host
workstation.
6. The controller connected to a dial-up or cable modem shall automatically buffer all normal
transactions until its buffer reaches 80 percent of capacity. When the transaction buffer
reaches 80 percent, the controller shall automatically initiate a call to the central station and
upload all transactions.
7. Alarms shall be reported immediately.
8. Dial-up or cable modems shall be provided by manufacturer of the system. Modems used at
the controller shall be powered by the controller. Power to the modem shall include battery
backup if the controller is so equipped.

F. Controller-to-Controller Communications:
1. TIA-485-A, four-wire, point-to-point, regenerative (repeater) communications network
methodology.
2. TIA-485-A communications signal shall be regenerated at each controller.

G. Database Downloads:
1. All data transmissions from workstations to a Location, and between controllers at a
Location, shall include a complete database checksum to check the integrity of the
transmission. If the data checksum does not match, a full data download shall be
automatically retransmitted.
2. If a controller is reset for any reason, it shall automatically request and receive a database
download from the Workstation. The download shall restore data stored at the controller to
their normal working state and shall take place with no operator intervention.

H. Operator Interface:
1. Inputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the normal state and one for the
abnormal state.
2. When viewing and controlling inputs, displayed icons shall automatically change to the
proper icon to display the current system state in real time. Icons shall also display the input's
state, whether armed or bypassed, and if the input is in the armed or bypassed state due to a
time zone or a manual command.
3. Outputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the secure (locked) state and
one for the open (unlocked) state.
4. Icons displaying status of the I/O points shall be constantly updated to show their current
real-time condition without prompting by the operator.
5. The operator shall be able to scroll the list of I/Os and press the appropriate toolbar button,
or right click, to command the system to perform the desired function.
6. Graphic maps or drawings containing inputs, outputs, and override groups shall include the
following:
a. Database to import and store full-color maps or drawings and allow for input, output,
and override group icons to be placed on maps.
b. Maps to provide real-time display animation and allow for control of points assigned to
them.
c. System to allow inputs, outputs, and override groups to be placed on different maps.
d. Software to allow changing the order or priority in which maps will be displayed.
7. Override Groups Containing I/Os:
a. System shall incorporate override groups that provide the operator with the status and
control over user-defined "sets" of I/Os with a single icon.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 9 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. Icon shall change automatically to show the live summary status of points in that group.
c. Override group icon shall provide a method to manually control or set to time-zone
points in the group.
d. Override group icon shall allow the expanding of the group to show icons representing
the live status for each point in the group, individual control over each point, and the
ability to compress the individual icons back into one summary icon.
8. Schedule Overrides of I/Os and Override Groups:
a. To accommodate temporary schedule changes that do not fall within the holiday
parameters, the operator shall have the ability to override schedules individually for each
input, output, or override group.
b. Each schedule shall be composed of a minimum of two dates with separate times for
each date.
c. The first time and date shall be assigned the override state that the point shall advance
to when the time and date become current.
d. The second time and date shall be assigned the state that the point shall return to when
the time and date become current.
9. Copy command in database shall allow for like data to be copied and then edited for specific
requirements, to reduce redundant data entry.

I. Operator Access Control:

1. Control operator access to system controls through three password-protected operator
levels. System operators and managers with appropriate password clearances shall be able
to change operator levels for operators.
2. Three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions beyond their defined level
during a 24-hour period shall initiate a software tamper alarm.
3. A minimum of 1024 unique user accounts shall be available with the system software.
System shall display the operator's name or initials in the console's first field. System shall
print the operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on the system printer at login and
logoff.
4. The password shall not be displayed or printed.
5. Each password shall be definable and assignable for the following:
a. Selected commands to be usable.
b. Access to system software.
c. Access to application software.
d. Individual zones that are to be accessed.
e. Access to database.

J. Operator Commands:
1. Command Input: Plain-language words and acronyms shall allow operators to use the system
without extensive training or data-processing backgrounds. System prompts shall be a word,
a phrase, or an acronym.
2. Command inputs shall be acknowledged and processing shall start in not less than one
second(s).
3. Tasks that are executed by operator's commands shall include the following:
a. Acknowledge Alarms: Used to acknowledge that the operator has observed the alarm
message.
b. Place Zone in Access: Used to remotely disable intrusion-alarm circuits emanating from
a specific zone. System shall be structured so that console operator cannot disable
tamper circuits.
c. Place Zone in Secure: Used to remotely activate intrusion-alarm circuits emanating
from a specific zone.
d. System Test: Allows the operator to initiate a system-wide operational test.
e. Zone Test: Allows the operator to initiate an operational test for a specific zone.
f. Print reports.
g. Change Operator: Used for changing operators.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 10 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

h. Security Lighting Controls: Allows the operator to remotely turn on or turn off security
lights.
i. Display Graphics: Used to show any graphic displays implemented in the system.
Graphic displays shall be completed within 20 seconds from time of operator command.
j. Run system tests.
k. Generate and format reports.
l. Request help with the system operation.
1) Include in main menus.
2) Provide unique, descriptive, context-sensitive help for selections and functions with
the press of one function key.
3) Provide navigation to specific topic from within the first help window.
4) Help shall be accessible outside the application program.
m. Entry-Control Commands:
1) Lock (secure) or unlock (open) each controlled entry and exit up to four times a
day through time-zone programming.
2) Arm or disarm each monitored input up to four times a day through time-zone
programming.
3) Enable or disable readers up to two times a day through time-zone programming.
4) Enable or disable cards or codes up to four times a day per entry point through
access-level programming.
4. Command Input Errors: Show operator input assistance when a command cannot be
executed because of operator input errors. Assistance screen shall use plain-language words
and phrases to explain why the command cannot be executed. Error responses that require
an operator to look up a code in a manual or other document are not acceptable. Conditions
causing operator assistance messages include the following:
a. Command entered is incorrect or incomplete.
b. Operator is restricted from using that command.
c. Command addresses a point that is disabled or out of service.
d. Command addresses a point that does not exist.
e. Command is outside the system's capacity.

K. Alarms:
1. System Setup:
a. Assign manual and automatic responses to incoming-point status change or alarms.
b. Automatically respond to input with a link to other inputs, outputs, or operator-response
plans; unique sound with use of WAV or MP3 or similar file format files; and maps or
images that graphically represent the point location.
c. Sixty-character message field for each alarm.
d. Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for printing to provide further
information and shall be editable by the operator.
e. Allow 25 secondary messages with a field of four lines of 60 characters each.
f. Store the most recent 1000 alarms for recall by the operator using the report generator.
2. Software Tamper:
a. Annunciate a tamper alarm when unauthorized changes to system database files are
attempted. Three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to log onto system shall generate a
software tamper alarm.
b. Annunciate a software tamper alarm when an operator or other individual makes three
consecutive unsuccessful attempts to invoke functions beyond the authorization level.
c. Maintain a transcript file of the last 5000 commands entered at each central station to
serve as an audit trail. System shall not allow write access to system transcript files by
any person, regardless of their authorization level.
d. Allow only acknowledgment of software tamper alarms.
3. Read access to system transcript files shall be reserved for operators with the highest
password authorization level available in system.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 11 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

4. Animated Response Graphics: Highlight alarms with flashing icons on graphic maps;
display and constantly update the current status of alarm inputs and outputs in real time
through animated icons.
5. Multimedia Alarm Annunciation: WAV or MP3 or similar file format files to be associated
with alarm events for audio annunciation or instructions.
6. Alarm Handling: Each input may be configured so that an alarm cannot be cleared unless it
has returned to normal, with options of requiring the operator to enter a comment about
disposition of alarm. Allow operator to silence alarm sound when alarm is acknowledged.
7. Alarm Automation Interface: High-level interface to central-station alarm automation
software systems. Allows input alarms to be passed to and handled by automation systems
in the same manner as burglar alarms, using a TIA-232-F ASCII interface.
8. VSS (CCTV) Alarm Interface: Allow commands to be sent to video surveillance systems
during alarms (or input change of state).
9. Camera Control: Provides operator ability to select and control cameras from graphic maps.

L. Alarm Monitoring: Monitor sensors, controllers, and DTS circuits and notify operators of an
alarm condition. Display higher-priority alarms first and, within alarm priorities, display the
oldest unacknowledged alarm first. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm shall not be
considered acknowledgment of other alarms nor shall it inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms.
1. Displayed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, and secondary alarm
messages.
2. Printed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, date and time (to nearest
second) of occurrence, and operator responses.
3. Maps shall automatically display the alarm condition for each input assigned to that map if
that option is selected for that input location.
4. Alarms initiate a status of "pending" and require the following two handling steps by
operators:
a. First Operator Step: "Acknowledged." This action shall silence sounds associated with
the alarm. The alarm remains in the system "Acknowledged" but "Un-Resolved."
b. Second Operator Step: Operators enter the resolution or operator comment, giving the
disposition of the alarm event. The alarm shall then clear.
5. Each workstation shall display the total pending alarms and total unresolved alarms.
6. Each alarm point shall be programmable to disallow the resolution of alarms until the alarm
point has returned to its normal state.
7. Alarms shall transmit to the central station in real time.
8. Alarms shall be displayed and managed from a minimum of four different windows.
a. Input Status Window: Overlay status icon with a large red blinking icon. Selecting the
icon will acknowledge the alarm.
b. History Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red text. Selecting
red text will acknowledge the alarm.
c. Alarm Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red. Selecting red
text will acknowledge the alarm.
d. Graphic Map Display: Display a steady colored icon representing each alarm input
location. Change icon to flashing red when the alarm occurs. Change icon from flashing
red to steady red when the alarm is acknowledged.
9. Once an alarm is acknowledged, the operator shall be prompted to enter comments about the
nature of the alarm and actions taken. Operator's comments may be manually entered or
selected from a programmed predefined list, or a combination of both.
10. For locations where there are regular alarm occurrences, provide programmed comments.
Selecting that comment shall clear the alarm.
11. The time and name of the operator who acknowledged and resolved the alarm shall be
recorded in the database.
12. Identical alarms from the same alarm point shall be acknowledged at the same time the
operator acknowledges the first alarm. Identical alarms shall be resolved when the first alarm
is resolved.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 12 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

13. Alarm functions shall have priority over downloading, retrieving, and updating database
from workstations and controllers.
14. When a reader-controlled output (relay) is opened, the corresponding alarm point shall be
automatically bypassed.

M. Monitor Display: Display text and graphic maps that include zone status integrated into the
display. Colors are used for the various components and current data. Colors shall be uniform
throughout the system.
1. Color Code:
a. FLASHING RED: Alerts operator that a zone has gone into an alarm or that primary
power has failed.
b. STEADY RED: Alerts operator that a zone is in alarm and alarm has been
acknowledged.
c. YELLOW: Advises operator that a zone is in access.
d. GREEN: Indicates that a zone is secure and that power is on.
2. Graphics:
a. Support graphic display maps and allow import of maps from a minimum of 16 standard
formats from another drawing or graphics program.
b. Allow I/O to be placed on graphic maps by the drag-and-drop method.
c. Operators shall be able to view the inputs, outputs, and the point's name by moving the
mouse cursor over the point on the graphic map.
d. Inputs or outputs may be placed on multiple graphic maps. The operator shall be able
to toggle to view graphic maps associated with I/Os.
e. Each graphic map shall have a display-order sequence number associated with it to
provide a predetermined order when toggled to different views.
f. Camera icons shall have the ability to be placed on graphic maps that, when selected by
an operator, will open a video window, display the camera associated with that icon, and
provide pan-tilt-zoom control.
g. Input, output, or camera placed on a map shall allow the ability to arm or bypass an
input, open or secure an output, or control the pan-tilt-zoom function of the selected
camera.

N. System test software enables operators to initiate a test of the entire system or of a particular
portion of the system.
1. Test Report: The results of each test shall be stored for future display or printout. The report
shall document the operational status of system components.

O. Visitor Assignment:
1. Provide for and allow an operator to be restricted to only working with visitors. The visitor
badging subsystem shall assign credentials and enroll visitors. Allow only those access
levels that have been designated as approved for visitors.
2. Provide an automated log of visitor name, time and gate accessed, and name of person
contacted.
3. Allow a visitor designation to be assigned to a credential holder.
4. Security access system shall be able to restrict the access levels that may be assigned to
credentials issued to visitors.
5. Allow operator to recall visitors' credential-holder file once a visitor is enrolled in the system.
6. The operator may designate any reader as one that deactivates the credential after use at that
reader. The history log shall show the return of the credential.
7. System shall have the ability to use the visitor designation in searches and reports. Reports
shall be able to print all or any visitor activity.

P. Entry-Control Enrollment Software: Database management functions that allow operators to add,
delete, and modify access data as needed.
1. The enrollment station shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 13 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Provide multiple, password-protected access levels. Database management and modification

functions shall require a higher operator access level than personnel enrollment functions.
3. The program shall provide means to disable the enrollment station when it is unattended, to
prevent unauthorized use.
4. The program shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entry-
control database files through enrollment stations. In the case of personnel identity-
verification subsystems, this shall include biometric data. Allow entry of personnel
identifying information into the system database using menu selections and data fields. The
data field names shall be customized during setup to suit user and site needs. Personnel
identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully support the
enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-control database files.
5. Cardholder Data: Provide 99 user-defined fields. System shall have the ability to run
searches and reports using any combination of these fields. Each user-defined field shall be
configurable, using any combination of the following features:
a. MASK: Determines a specific format with which data must comply.
b. REQUIRED: Operator is required to enter data into field before saving.
c. UNIQUE: Data entered must be unique.
d. DEACTIVATE DATE: Data entered will be evaluated as an additional deactivate date
for all cards assigned to this cardholder.
e. NAME ID: Data entered will be considered a unique ID for the cardholder.
6. Personnel Search Engine: A report generator with capabilities such as search by last name,
first name, group, or any predetermined user-defined data field; by codes not used in
definable number of days; by skills; or by seven other methods.
7. Multiple Deactivate Dates for Cards: User-defined fields to be configured as additional stop
dates to deactivate any cards assigned to the cardholder.
8. Batch card printing.
9. Default card data can be programmed to speed data entry for sites where most card data are
similar.
10. Enhanced ASCII File Import Utility: Allows the importing of cardholder data and images.
11. Card Expire Function: Allows readers to be configured to deactivate cards when a card is
used at selected devices.

2.6 SYSTEM DATABASE

A. Database and database management software shall define and modify each point in database using
operator commands. Definition shall include parameters and constraints associated with each
system device.

B. Database Operations:
1. System data management shall be in a hierarchical menu-tree format, with navigation
through expandable menu branches and manipulated with use of menus and icons in a main
menu and system toolbar.
2. Navigational Aids:
a. Toolbar icons for add, delete, copy, print, capture image, activate, deactivate, and
assemble report.
b. Point and click feature to facilitate data manipulation.
c. Next and previous command buttons visible when editing database fields to facilitate
navigation from one record to the next.
d. Copy command and copy tool in the toolbar to copy data from one record to create a
new similar record.
3. Data entry shall be automatically checked for duplicate and illegal data and shall be verified
for valid format.
4. System shall generate a memo or note field for each item that is stored in database, allowing
the storing of information about any defining characteristics of the item. Memo field is used
for noting the purpose for which the item was entered, reasons for changes that were made,
and the like.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 14 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. File Management:
1. File management shall include database backup and restoration system, allowing selection
of storage media, including approved storage media and designated network resources.
2. Operations shall be both manual and automatic modes. The number of automatic sequential
backups before the oldest backup will be overwritten; FIFO mode shall be operator
selectable.
3. Backup program shall provide manual operation from any Workstation on the LAN and shall
operate while system remains operational.

D. Facility Codes: System shall accommodate up to 2048 facility codes per Location, with the
option of allowing facility codes to work at all gates or only at particular gate.

E. User-Defined Fields:
1. System shall provide a minimum of 99 user-defined fields, each with up to 50 characters, for
specific information about each credential holder.
2. System shall accommodate a title for each field; field length shall be 20 characters.
3. A "Required" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected, forces
the operator to enter data in the user-defined field before the credential can be saved.
4. A "Unique" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected, will not
allow duplicate data from different credential holders to be entered.
5. Data format option may be assigned to each user-defined field that will require the data to be
entered with certain character types in specific spots in the field entry window.
6. A user-defined field, if selected, will define the field as a deactivate date. The selection shall
automatically cause the data to be formatted with the windows DD/MM/YYYY date format.
The credential of the holder will be deactivated on that date.
7. A search function shall allow any one user-defined field or combination of user-defined
fields to be searched to find the appropriate cardholder. The search function shall include a
search for a character string.
8. System shall have the ability to print cardholders based on and organized by the user-defined
fields.

F. Code Tracing:
1. System shall perform code tracing selectable by cardholder and by reader.
2. Any code may be designated as a "traced code" with no limit to how many codes can be
traced.
3. Any reader may be designated as a "trace reader" with no limit to which or how many readers
can be used for code tracing.
4. When a traced code is used at a trace reader, the access-granted message that usually appears
on the monitor window of the central station shall be highlighted with a different color than
regular messages. A short singular beep shall occur at the same time the highlighted message
is displayed on the window.
5. The traced cardholder image (if image exists) shall appear on workstations when used at a
trace reader.

2.7 CENTRAL-STATION HARDWARE

A. Central-Station Computer Workstations

1. Operator Workstation: In order to provide the best up-to date equipment at the lowest price
and to manage the maintenance at the best level, the Contractor shall specify system
requirements to the Employer.
2. Real Time Functions:
a. The color monitor and keyboard for each workstation shall display real-time data, allow
operator's commands, and report system activity. Monitor shall be at least 21" LCD
screen. It shall be designed to work 24 hours a day.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 15 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

b. The host workstation shall function as the system programmer's and system operator's
workstation, for entering and editing the system database, entering operating software,
and monitoring the operation of all system functions.
3. Alarm Output:
a. The output of alarm displays shall depend upon the relative priority of each alarm.
b. The system shall automatically prioritize alarm displays.
4. Format: The format shall include a dedicated and protected area of the viewing screen for
the current date and time.
5. Video Recall Facility: All workstations shall have video recall facility, and the graphics shall
allow viewing live video and controlling the alarmed cameras.
6. Advisory Messages: Each workstation monitor shall display system advisory messages upon
hardware malfunction or restoration in a dedicated and protected area of the viewing screen.
7. Access Rights: The usage of workstation for any function shall be based on access rights of
the user defined by his password.
8. Flexibility: Workstations shall be fully flexible. Their function can be adapted at any time
depending on the authorization password.
9. Communication: Communication between servers and workstations shall use the latest
secured encryption mechanism and allow for use of HTTP protocol.
10. Monitor shall be at least 21" LCD screen. It shall be deigned to work 24 hours a day
11. Alarm Printers
a. The alarm printer shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:
1) Dot matrix technology.
2) Minimum print speed of 400 characters/second.
3) Selectable character sizes.
4) Sprocket paper feed.
5) Top-of-page, skip and tab control.
6) The printers shall accept continuous fan-fold paper with a width equivalent to A3
size (297 mm by 420 mm).
7) Constructed for heavy duty-cycle environment.
8) 24-pin.
9) 136-columns.
10) Connectivity: USB 2.0, parallel, Ethernet through a print server.

2.8 FIXED MAP DISPLAY

A. A fixed map display shall show layout of the protected facilities. Zones corresponding to those
monitored by the system shall be highlighted on the display. Status of each zone shall be
displayed using digital displays as required within each designated zone. A digital display test
switch shall be provided on the map display.

2.9 CONTROLLERS

A. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit that stores time, date, valid codes, access levels,
and similar data downloaded from the central station or workstation for controlling its operation.

B. Subject to compliance with requirements in this article, manufacturers may use multipurpose
controllers.

C. Battery Backup: Sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of 90
minutes.

D. Alarm Annunciation Controller:

1. The controller shall automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an
interruption with the field device network, with dc line supervision on each of its alarm
inputs.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 16 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Inputs: Monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. Provides
at least eight alarm inputs, which are suitable for wiring as normally open or normally
closed contacts for alarm conditions.
b. Alarm-Line Supervision:
1) Supervise the alarm lines by monitoring each circuit for changes or disturbances in
the signal by monitoring for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions
using dc change measurements. System shall initiate an alarm in response to an
abnormal current, which is a dc change of 5 percent or more for longer than 500 ms.
2) Transmit alarm-line-supervision alarm to the central station during the next
interrogation cycle after the abnormal current condition.
c. Outputs: Managed by central-station software.

E. Entry-Control Controller:
1. Function: Provide local entry-control functions including one- and two-way
communications with access-control devices such as card readers, verification devices, gate
and gate operators, and push buttons.
a. Operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded database during periods
of communication loss between the controller and the field-device network.
b. Accept information generated by the entry-control devices; automatically process this
information to determine valid identification of the individual present at the portal:
1) On authentication of the credentials or information presented, check privileges of
the identified individual, allowing only those actions granted as privileges.
2) Privileges shall include, but are not limited to, time of day control, day of week
control, group control, and visitor escort control.
c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction. A transaction
is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a controlled
portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information.
2. Inputs:
a. Data from entry-control devices; use this input to change modes between access and
secure.
b. Database downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and
privilege information.
3. Outputs:
a. Indicate success or failure of attempts to use entry-control devices and make
comparisons of presented information with stored identification information.
b. Grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal-control devices and mask
intrusion-alarm annunciation from sensors stimulated by authorized entries.
c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction and transmit
transaction records to the central station.
d. Barrier Prop Alarm: If a barrier is held open for longer than 20 seconds, alarm sounds.
4. With power supplies sufficient to power at voltage and frequency required for field devices
and portal-control devices.
5. Data Line Problems: For periods of loss of communication with the central station, or when
data transmission is degraded and generating continuous checksum errors, the controller
shall continue to control entry by accepting identifying information, making authentication
decisions, checking privileges, and controlling portal-control devices.
a. Store up to 1000 transactions during periods of communication loss between the
controller and access-control devices for subsequent upload to the central station on
restoration of communication.
6. Controller Power: Control transformer, with 12- or 24-V ac secondary, backup battery and
charger.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 17 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Backup Battery: Premium, valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-calcium battery;

spill proof; with a full one-year warranty and a pro rata 9-year warranty. With single-
stage, constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with battery
manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current
recommendations for maximum battery life.
b. Backup Battery: Valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-acid battery; spill proof.
With single-stage, constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with
battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging
current recommendations for maximum battery life.
c. Backup Power-Supply Capacity: 90 minutes of battery supply. Submit battery and
charger calculations.
d. Power Monitoring: Provide manual, dynamic battery-load test, initiated and monitored
at the control center; with automatic disconnection of the controller when battery voltage
drops below controller limits. Report by using local controller-mounted digital displays
and by communicating status to central station. Indicate normal power on and battery
charger on trickle charge. Indicate and report the following:
1) Trouble Alarm: Normal power-off load assumed by battery.
2) Trouble Alarm: Low battery.
3) Alarm: Power off.

2.10 ENROLLMENT CENTER

A. Equipment for enrolling personnel into, and removing personnel from, system database, using a
dedicated workstation.
1. Include equipment to enroll selected biometric credentials.

B. Enrollment equipment shall support encoding of credential cards including cryptographic and
other internal security checks as required for system.
1. Allow only authorized entry-control enrollment personnel to access the enrollment
equipment using passwords.
2. Include enrollment-subsystem configuration controls and electronic diagnostic aids for
subsystem setup and troubleshooting with the central station.
3. Enrollment-station records printer shall meet requirements of the report printer.

C. Entry-Control Enrollment Software:

1. Shall include database management functions for the system, and shall allow an operator to
change and modify the data entered in the system as needed.
2. Software shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions as a programmable
function.
3. Multiple, password-protected access levels shall be provided at the enrollment station.
4. Database management and modification functions shall require a higher operator-access
level than personnel enrollment functions.
5. Software shall provide a means for disabling the enrollment station when it is unattended, to
prevent unauthorized use.
6. Software shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entry-
control database files through enrollment stations to include a credential unit in use at the
installation.
7. In the case of personnel identity-verification subsystems, this data shall include biometric
data.
8. Software shall allow entry of this data into the system database files through the use of simple
menu selections and data fields. The data field names shall be customized to suit user and
site needs.
9. Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully
support the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-control database files.

D. Accessories:

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 18 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Control room furniture – in accordance with Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT
& Security Systems”.

E. System Capacity: Number of badges shall be limited only by hard disk space. Badge templates
and images shall be in color, supporting the maximum color capability of workstation operating
system .

F. Badge Configuration:
1. Software for badge template creation shall include a template consisting of background and
predetermined locations of photographs, text objects and data fields for text, and bar-code.
Include automatic sizing of data fields placed on a badge to compensate for names, which
may otherwise be too large to fit in the area designated.
2. Allow different badge templates to be used for each department, tenant, or visitor.
3. As a setup option, templates shall be automatically selected for the badge, based on the group
to which the credential holder is assigned. Allow the operator to override the automatic
template selection and use a template chosen by the operator for creating a badge.
4. Setup shall determine which graphics and credential-holder information will be displayed
and where on the card it will be placed. All data in the security access system, such as name,
code, group, access level, and any of the 99 user-defined fields, shall be selectable, with the
ability to place them anywhere on the card.
5. System shall include an importing, filing, and recall system of stored images and shapes that
can be placed on the badge.
6. Allow multiple images on the same badge, including, but not limited to, bar codes, digital
photos, and signatures.
7. Support transparent backgrounds so that image is only surrounded by the intended
background and not by its immediate background.

G. Photo Imaging: Integral to security access.

1. Import images from bitmap file formats, digital cameras, TWAIN cameras, or scanners.
Allow image cropping and editing, WYSIWYG badge-building application, and badge print-
preview and printing capabilities.
2. System shall support multiple images stored for each credential holder, including signatures,
portrait views, and profile views.

H. Text Objects: Badge configuration shall provide for creation of custom text as an object, allowing
font selection, typing, scaling, and formatting of the text object. Formatting options shall include
changing font, font size, text flow, and text alignment; bending or curving the text object into a
circle or semicircle; applying 3-D effects; and applying predefined effects such as tilt, extrusion,
or beveling. Text shall be placed and optionally automatically centered within any region of the
badge layout.

I. Badges and Credential Cards:

1. Badges are credential cards that do not contain data to be read by card readers.
2. Credential cards shall store uniquely coded data used by card readers as an Identifier.
a. Magnetic-Stripe Cards: Comply with ISO 14443 A/B and ISO 15693, ISO/IEC 7810,
ISO/IEC 7811-1, ISO/IEC 7811-2, ISO/IEC 7811-6, and ISO/IEC 7811-7. Use single-
layer magnetic tape material that is coated with a plastic, slick protective coat and affixed
to the back of the credential card near the top.
b. Wiegand Wire-Effect Cards: Ferromagnetic wires laminated into the credential card
using binary digits specified for Wiegand readers to generate a unique credential card
identification code.
c. Proximity Cards: Use proximity detection without physical contact with the reader for
proper operation.
3. Allow entry-control card to be modified by lamination or direct print process during the
enrollment process for use as a picture and identification badge without reduction of
readability. The design shall allow for the addition of at least one slot or hole to

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 19 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

accommodate the attachment of a clip for affixing the credential card to the type of badge
holder used at the site.
a. Card Size and Dimensional Stability: Standard size, 54 by 86 mm (2-1/8 by 3-3/8
inches); dimensionally stable so that an undamaged card with deformations resulting
from normal use shall be readable by the card reader.
b. Card Material: Abrasion resistant, nonflammable, and nontoxic; and impervious to solar
radiation and effects of ultraviolet light.
c. Card Construction: Core and laminate or monolithic construction. Lettering, logos, and
other markings shall be hot stamped into the credential material or direct printed.
1) Incorporate holographic images or phosphorous ink as a security enhancement.
2) Furnish equipment for on-site assembly and lamination of credential cards.
d. Card Durability and Maintainability: Designed and constructed to yield a useful lifetime
of at least five years or 5000 insertions or swipes, whichever results in a longer period
of time. Allow credential cards to be cleaned by wiping with a sponge or cloth wetted
with soap and water.

J. Card-Making Equipment: Consisting of a workstation, video camera, video-imaging equipment,

and a printer.
1. Camera: NTSC color standard, RGB video output, 470 lines minimum horizontal resolution,
and automatic white balance with full rated output under illumination of 5 lux (0.5 fc).
2. Video Imaging: Live-image capture software and hardware and a digital signature capture
pad.
3. Standard workstation, modified as follows:
a. Redundant workstation is not required.
b. Printer is not required.
c. UPS is not required.
d. Sound card is not required.
4. Printer: Dye-sublimation resin thermal transfer, 300 dpi resolution, 16.7 million colors,
accepting cards ranging in size from 53 by 76 mm to 66 by 94 mm (2.1 by 3 inches to 2.6 by
3.7 inches) and having card thickness ranging from 0.5 to 1.5 mm (0.020 to 0.060 inch) .
Printer shall have options for encoding magnetic stripe using tracks 1, 2, and 3. Throughput
shall be not less than 60 seconds per card.

2.11 GATE HARDWARE INTERFACE

A. Vehicle Gate Operator: Interface electrical operation of gate with controls in this Section.
Vehicle gate operators shall be connected, monitored, and controlled by the security access
controllers. Vehicle gate and accessories are specified in:
1. Division 11, Section “Parking Control Equipment”.

B. Access Hardware Specifications

1. General
a. Provide all equipment related to Access Control such as: CR, and other accessory parts
necessary to complete the installation,
b. Provide all necessary components to supply power to system devices from building
power distribution system.
c. All types of access represented in the Drawings shall be monitored by the Access
Control system.
d. All the wiring and Equipment surrounding the access shall be concealed and
implemented in the most secured Area or side. They shall also be integrated in the design
as per Architectural specifications.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 20 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.12 FIELD-PROCESSING SOFTWARE

A. Operating System:
1. Local processors shall contain an operating system that controls and schedules that local
processor's activities in real time.
2. Local processor shall maintain a point database in its memory that includes parameters,
constraints, and the latest value or status of all points connected to that local processor.
3. Execution of local processor application programs shall utilize the data in memory resident
files.
4. Operating system shall include a real-time clock function that maintains the seconds,
minutes, hours, date, and month, including day of the week.
5. Local processor real-time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the central station
at least once per day to plus or minus 10 seconds (the time synchronization shall be
accomplished automatically, without operator action and without requiring system
shutdown).

B. Startup Software:
1. Causes automatic commencement of operation without human intervention, including
startup of all connected I/O functions.
2. Local processor restart program based on detection of power failure at the local processor
shall be included in the local processor software.
3. Initiates operation of self-test diagnostic routines.
4. Upon failure of the local processor, if the database and application software are no longer
resident, the local processor shall not restart and systems shall remain in the failure mode
indicated until the necessary repairs are made.
5. If the database and application programs are resident, the local processor shall immediately
resume operation.

C. Operating Mode:
1. Local processors shall control and monitor inputs and outputs as specified, independent of
communications with the central station or designated workstations.
2. Alarms, status changes, and other data shall be transmitted to the central station or designated
workstations when communications circuits are operable.
3. If communications are not available, each local processor shall function in a stand-alone
mode and operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the
central station or designated workstations, shall be stored for later transmission to the central
station or designated workstations.
4. Storage for the latest 4000 events shall be provided at local processors, as a minimum.
5. Local processors shall accept software downloaded from the central station.
6. Panel shall support flash ROM technology to accomplish firmware downloads from a central
location.

D. Failure Mode: Upon failure for any reason, each local processor shall perform an orderly
shutdown and force all local processor outputs to a predetermined (failure-mode) state, consistent
with the failure modes shown and the associated control device.

E. Functions:
1. Monitoring of inputs.
2. Control of outputs.
3. Reporting of alarms automatically to the central station.
4. Reporting of sensor and output status to central station upon request.
5. Maintenance of real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a day.
6. Communication with the central station.
7. Execution of local processor resident programs.
8. Diagnostics.
9. Download and upload data to and from the central station.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 21 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.13 FIELD-PROCESSING HARDWARE

A. Alarm Annunciation Local Processor:

1. Respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status
inputs until they are transmitted to the central station, and change outputs based on
commands received from the central station.
2. Local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an
interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its
alarm inputs.
3. Local processor shall have at least eight alarm inputs which allow wiring contacts as
normally open or normally closed for alarm conditions; and shall provide line supervision
for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions
using dc current change measurements.
4. Local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station.
5. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains abnormal at an input for longer than
500 milliseconds.
6. Alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central computer during the next interrogation
cycle.
7. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station.
8. Outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed
contacts.
9. Local processor shall have at least four command outputs.
10. Local processor shall be able to communicate with the central station via RS-485 or TCP/IP
as a minimum.

B. Processor Power Supply:

1. Local processor and sensors shall be powered from an uninterruptible power source.
2. Uninterruptible power source shall provide eight hours of battery back-up power in the event
of primary power failure and shall automatically fully recharge the batteries within 12 hours
after primary power is restored.
3. If the facility is without an emergency generator, the uninterruptible power source shall
provide 24 hours of battery backup power.
4. There shall be no equipment malfunctions or perturbations or loss of data during the switch
from primary to battery power and vice versa.
5. Batteries shall be sealed, non-outgassing type.
6. Power supply shall be equipped with an indicator for ac input power and an indicator for dc
output power.
7. Loss of primary power shall be reported to the central station as an alarm.

C. Auxiliary Equipment Power: An electrical socket outlet shall be furnished inside the local
processor's enclosure.

D. Entry-Control Local Processor:

1. Entry-control local processor shall respond to interrogations from the field device network,
recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station, and
change outputs based on commands received from the central station.
2. Local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an
interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its
alarm inputs.
3. Entry-control local processor shall provide local entry-control functions including
communicating with field devices such as card readers, identity-verification devices, gate
and gate operators, and exit push buttons.
4. Processor shall also accept data from entry-control field devices as well as database
downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and privilege
information.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 22 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

5. Processor shall send indications of successful or failed attempts to use entry-control field
devices and shall make comparisons of presented information with stored identification
information.
6. Processor shall grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal-control devices and
mask intrusion-alarm annunciation from sensors stimulated by authorized entries.
7. Entry-control local processor shall use inputs from entry-control devices to change modes
between access and secure.
8. Local processor shall maintain a date-time- and location-stamped record of each transaction
and transmit transaction records to the central station.
9. Processor shall operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded database
during periods of communication loss between the local processor and the central station.
10. Processor shall store a minimum of 4000 transactions during periods of communication loss
between the local processor and the central station for subsequent upload to the central station
upon restoration of communication.
11. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm
conditions.
12. Local processor shall have at least eight alarm inputs which allow wiring contacts as
normally open or normally closed for alarm conditions; and shall also provide line
supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted
conditions using dc current change measurements.
13. Local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station.
14. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains abnormal at an input for longer than
500 ms.
15. Alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central station during the next interrogation cycle.
16. Entry-control local processor shall include the necessary software drivers to communicate
with entry-control field devices. Information generated by the entry-control field devices
shall be accepted by the local processor and automatically processed to determine valid
identification of the individual present at the portal.
17. Upon authentication of the credentials or information presented, the local processor shall
automatically check privileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actions
granted as privileges.
18. Privileges shall include, but are not limited to, time of day control, day of week control,
group control, and visitor escort control. The local processor shall maintain a date-time- and
location-stamped record of each transaction.
19. Transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a
controlled portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information.
20. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station.
21. Outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed
contacts.
22. Local processor shall have at least four addressable outputs.
23. The entry-control local processor shall also provide control outputs to portal-control devices.
24. Local processor shall be able to communicate with the central station via RS-485 or TCP/IP
as a minimum.
25. The system manufacturer shall provide strategies for downloading database information for
panel configurations and cardholder data to minimize the required download time when using
IP connectivity.

2.14 TIA-232-F ASCII INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

A. ASCII interface shall allow TIA-232-F connections to be made between the control station
operating as the host Workstation and any equipment that will accept TIA-232-F ASCII command
strings, such as VSS switches, intercom and paging systems.
1. Alarm inputs in system shall allow for individual programming to output up to four unique
ASCII character strings through two different COM ports on the host Workstation.
2. Inputs shall have the ability to be defined to transmit a unique ASCII string for alarm and
one for restore through one COM port, and a unique ASCII string for a non-alarm, abnormal
condition and one for a normal condition through the same or different COM port.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 23 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Predefined ASCII character strings shall have the ability to be up to 420 characters long with
full use of all the ASCII control characters, such as return or line feed. Character strings
shall be defined in the system database and then assigned to the appropriate inputs.
4. COM ports of the host Workstation used to interface with external equipment shall be defined
in the setup portion of the software. COM port's baud rate, word length, stop bits, and parity
shall be definable in the software to match that of the external equipment.

B. Pager-System Interface: Alarms shall be able to activate a pager system with customized message
for each input alarm.
1. TIA-232-F output shall be capable of connection to a pager interface that can be used to call
a paging system or service and send a signal to a portable pager. System shall allow an
individual alphanumeric message per alarm input to be sent to the paging system. This
interface shall support both numeric and alphanumeric pagers.

C. Alarm-System Interface:
1. TIA-232-F output shall be capable of transmitting alarms from other monitoring and alarm
systems to central-station automation software.
2. Alternatively, alarms that are received by this access-control system are to be transferred to
the alarm automation system as if they were sent through a digital alarm receiver.
a. System shall be able to transmit an individual message from any alarm input to a burglar-
alarm automation monitoring system.
b. System shall be able to append to each message a predefined set of character strings as
a prefix and a suffix.

2.15 VIDEO AND CAMERA CONTROL

A. Control station or designated workstation displays live video from a CCTV source.
1. Control Buttons: On the display window, with separate control buttons to represent Left,
Right, Up, Down, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Scan, and a minimum of two custom-command
auxiliary controls.
2. Provide at least seven icons to represent different types of cameras, with ability to import
custom icons. Provide option for display of icons on graphic maps to represent their physical
location.
3. Provide the alarm-handling window with a command button that will display the camera
associated with the alarm point.

B. Display mouse-selectable icons representing each camera source, to select source to be displayed.
For CCTV sources that are connected to a video switcher, control station shall automatically send
control commands through a COM port to display the requested camera when the camera icon is
selected.

C. Allow cameras with preset positioning to be defined by displaying a different icon for each of the
presets. Provide control with Next and Previous buttons to allow operator to cycle quickly
through the preset positions.

2.16 SURGE AND TAMPER PROTECTION

A. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment
housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include
surge protection for external wiring of each conductor-entry connection to components.
1. Comply with Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices" and as recommended by
manufacturer for type of line being protected.

B. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes,
cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 24 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

or partially disassembled. Control-station control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms
and indicate locations.

2.17 PROPOSED SOLUTION

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Data Transmission:
1. The data transmission rate between the workstations and the servers shall be bi-directional
using TCP/IP VLAN Network.
2. Coordinate IP addressing, Ethernet switch port counts and assignments, long-term storage
requirements and bandwidth utilization with the Contractor providing and configuring the
dedicated security VLAN.

2.18 NETWORK EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

2.19 INTEGRATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The Access Control shall be integrated and interfaced to the following systems:
1. Structured Cabling Network (SCN) and Data Communications Network
a. The Access Control shall be interfaced with the Structured Cabling Network and the
Data Communications Network to allow for communication between the System
workstations, servers, and controllers and all other interfaced systems through the
network backbone.
b. Clients shall communicate with the system applications utilizing the TCP/IP network
protocol over the Project LAN.
2. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
a. All Access Control equipment shall be powered by UPS. Coordinate with the Electrical
Contractor to ensure UPS power supply for Access Control equipment.
b. A UPS failure shall be communicated to the Access Control workstations (where
provided).
3. Parking Control Equipment
a. The Access Control devices and associated cards that are integrated in the Parking
Control Equipment shall be furnished by the Access Control Contractor. The latter
shall extend the necessary cables from Access Control equipment racks up to the
respective Parking Control Equipment.
b. When an authorized access card is presented and validated by the Access Control, the
barrier gates will open.
4.

2.20 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

2.21 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Refer to Division 28, Section “Access Control Hardware Devices”, Appendix A for a guide to
specifications of commonly used cables in the industry.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 25 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.22 CONDUITS, TRUNKING, ENCLOSURES AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements
for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and
other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs (workstations),
controllers, card readers, and other cable-connected devices to verify actual locations of conduit
and back boxes before device installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Product Schedules: Obtain detailed product schedules from manufacturer of access-control

system; develop product schedules to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans
and specifications and publish as “product schedules” for review and approval.
1. Record setup data for control station and workstations.
2. For each Location, record setup of controller features and access requirements.
3. Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up access levels for
gates.
4. Set up groups, facility codes, linking, and list inputs and outputs for each controller.
5. Assign action message names and compose messages.
6. Set up alarms. Establish interlocks between alarms, intruder detection, and video surveillance
features.
7. Prepare and install alarm graphic maps.
8. Develop user-defined fields.
9. Develop screen layout formats.
10. Propose setups for guard tours and key control.
11. Discuss badge layout options; design badges.
12. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification.
13. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration.
14. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of the test.
15. Develop cable and asset-management system details; input data from construction
documents. Include system schematics and Visio Technical Drawings in electronic format .

B. In meetings with Engineer and Employer, present “product schedules” and review, adjust, and
prepare final setup documents. Use approved product schedules to set up system software.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 27, section “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).

B. Using software designated for "Cable and Asset Management", develop cable administration
drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric
designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it
connects with the same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's
architectural arrangement.

C. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 26 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each
cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device
shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the
device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered
within the panel or cabinet.

D. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE

A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform database tests for the complete and
proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Employer.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation
requirements.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS

A. When requested within 12 months of date of Taking Over of the System, provide on-site
assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to
Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Maintain strict security during the installation of equipment and software. Rooms housing the
control station, and workstations that have been powered up shall be locked and secured with an
activated burglar alarm and access-control system reporting to a central station during periods
when a qualified operator in the employment of Contractor is not present.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Develop separate training modules for the following:

1. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN and databases and
to update and maintain software.
2. Operators who prepare and input credentials to man the control station and workstations and
to enroll personnel.
3. Security personnel.
4. Hardware maintenance personnel.
5. Corporate management.

END OF SECTION 281300

ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT 281300 - Page 27 of 27

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 281500 - ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions, Project Requirements
and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Access Control Hardware Devices” except where the
latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Access Control Hardware Devices” shall
have precedence:
1. Division 27 Section 270501 “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 281300 - Access Control System Software and Database Management, for control
and monitoring applications, workstations, and interfaces.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Card readers, credential cards, and keypads
2. Biometric identity-verification equipment
3. Cables
4. Transformers

B. Access Control System shall interface with the Fire Alarm System and other Security and
Building Services Systems. These interfaces shall be hardwired where required by code.

C. Related Sections:
1. Section 087111 - Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products).
2. Section 111200 - Parking Control Equipment.
3. Section 260500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
4. Section 260519 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
5. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
7. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
8. Section 263353 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.
9. Section 264313 – Surge Protective Devices.
10. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
11. Section 270555 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
12. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
13. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
14. Section 270501 - Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems.
15. Section 272109 - Data Communications for Campus Network.
16. Section 281300 – Access Control software and Database Management.
17. Section 282000 - Video Surveillance System (VSS).
18. Section 284621.11 - Addressable Fire Alarm System.

D. Servers and related ancillaries shall comply with:

1. Division 27, Section “Computers & Related Peripherals”.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 1 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. Workstations and related ancillaries shall comply with:

1. Division 27, Section “Computers & Related Peripherals”.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Regulations and Standards: All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the
applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:
1. IEC Standards
a. IEC 60839-5-1: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 5-1: Alarm transmission
systems - General requirements
b. IEC 60839-5-2: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 5-2: Alarm transmission
systems - Requirements for supervised premises transceiver (SPT)
c. IEC 60839-5-3: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 5-3: Alarm transmission
systems - Requirements for receiving centre transceiver (RCT)
d. IEC 60839-11-1: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 11-1: Electronic access
control systems - System and components requirements
e. IEC 60839-11-2: Alarm and electronic security systems - Part 11-2: Electronic access
control systems - Application guidelines
2. EN Standards
a. EN 50130-4: Alarm systems - Part 4: Electromagnetic compatibility - Product family
standard: Immunity requirements for components of fire, intruder, hold up, CCTV,
access control and social alarm systems

C. Identification Cards shall conform to the following standards:

1. International Organization for Standardization /International Electro-technical Commission
(ISO/IEC)
a. ISO/IEC 7810: Identification Cards - Physical Characteristics
b. ISO/IEC 7811-1: Identification Cards - Recording Technique Part 1: Embossing
c. ISO/IEC 7811-2: Identification Cards - Recording Technique Part 2: Magnetic Stripe -
Low Coercivity
d. ISO/IEC 7811-6: Identification Cards - Recording Technique Part 6: Magnetic Stripe -
High Coercivity
e. ISO/IEC 7811-7: Identification Cards - Recording Technique Part 7: Magnetic Stripe -
High Coercivity, High Density
f. ISO/IEC 7816: (Parts 1 through 15): Identification Cards - Integrated Circuit Cards
g. ISO/IEC 14443: (Parts 1 through 4): Identification cards - Contactless integrated circuit
cards - Proximity cards.
h. ISO/IEC 15693: (Parts 1 through 3): Identification cards - Contactless integrated circuit
cards - Vicinity cards.

D. American National Standards Institute / Telecommunications Industry Association / Electronic

Industries Alliance (ANSI/TIA/EIA)
1. TIA-232-F: Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating
Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange
2. TIA-485-A: Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use in Balanced
Digital Multipoint Systems

E. The system functions in public areas such as elevators, lobbies and parking areas shall comply
with the Accessibility Guidelines by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 2 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Definitions
1. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity.
2. DTS: Digital Termination Service. A microwave-based, line-of-sight communication
provided directly to the end user.
3. Identifier: A credential card; keypad personal identification number; or code, biometric
characteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry-control database
for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented with an initial
capital letter, this definition applies.
4. Location: A Location on the network having a workstation-to-controller communications
link, with additional controllers at the Location connected to the workstation-to-controller
link with a TIA-485-A communications loop. Where this term is presented with an initial
capital letter, this definition applies.
5. PC: Personal computer. Applies to the central station, workstations, and file servers.
6. RAS: Remote access services.
7. ROM: Read-only memory. ROM data are maintained through losses of power.
8. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.
9. TWAIN: Technology without an Interesting Name. A programming interface that lets a
graphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program,
activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image-capturing device.
10. WAV: The digital audio format used in Microsoft Windows.
11. Wiegand: Patented magnetic principle that uses specially treated wires embedded in the
credential card.
12. Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation.
13. WMP: Windows Media Player
14. Workstation: A PC (personal computer) with software that is configured for specific, limited
security-system functions.
15. WYSIWYG: What You See Is What You Get. Text and graphics appear on the screen the
same as they will in print.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Other Clarifications Related to The Scope of Work

1. The Access Control shall utilize the Project Structured Cabling Network and Data
Communications Network Installations. This connectivity shall form part of the Structured
Cabling Network and Data Communications Network as applicable. It shall not form part of
the Access Control system.
2. Network switches and other similar devices which are strictly dedicated and configured for
the Access Control System, but installed remotely from the Access Control headend, shall
form part of the works for the Access Control System.
3. Inter-wiring, conduits and related accessories, network connectivity and any other material
which is specific to the Access Control central equipment and which is required to provide a
complete operational system, shall form part of the Access Control system.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and miscellaneous
items that will be installed during the course of the installation process. Such items may not be
indicated in the documents. Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and his Suppliers
when considering:
1. Structured communications system cabling, termination, identification and testing.
2. Provision and installation of computer hardware, racks/cabinets and related networking
software and equipment.
3. Active communication and data processing equipment.
4. Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
5. Provision and installation of a Virtualized Servers Environment.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 3 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

6. Provision and installation of UPS in communications rooms.

7. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building
earth electrode system.
8. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility outlets.
9. Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
10. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental control sensors.
11. Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit sleeves, and
penetrations in walls and floors.

B. Accordingly, Contractor shall:

1. Meet jointly with representatives of the above systems, Contractors, Operators, Engineer and
Employer to exchange information and agree on details of project implementation,
equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment in technical rooms to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and ensure necessary interface with other systems.
4. Coordinate with the other Contractors whose deliveries are necessary for the correct
operation of the Access Control including but not limited to the Data Network, Video
Surveillance, etc.
5. The Access Control Hardware Devices shall be coordinated with the Architectural Design in
order to implement:
a. Interface Box (IB) close to the controlled or monitored crossing Point,
b. AC/DC converter close to the controlled or monitored crossing Point,
c. All equipment related to the Access Control such as CR, BIO reader, Integrated Alarm
(IA), etc.
d. The location of Access Control peripheral devices shall be in coordination with and to
the approval of the Employer.
6. The methodology related to the integration of conduits, IB and AC/DC converter, conduits
and any Access Control equipment within walls, floors, facades and ceilings should be
closely coordinated with the Interior Designer and/or Engineer.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Additional Requirements for Submittals:

1. Product data shall also include:
a. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
Reference each product to a location on Drawings.
2. Shop Drawings shall also include:
a. Diagrams showing schematic diagrams, wiring diagrams, etc.
b. Typical installation details of doors hardwiring scheme.
c. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules.
d. Battery and charger calculations.
3. Product Schedules.
4. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, and faceplates. For each exposed
product and for each color and texture specified.
5. Constraints to be studied by the Contractor as part of shop drawings development:
a. The classification of Access Control Crossing Points does not take into account any
materials or specific manufacturing. It refers only to functionalities and equipment to be
installed on each side of the crossing point.
b. The integration of the Access Control hardware (Equipment, Cables and cable routing),
for each case of door manufacturing, shall be studied in such way to deliver on site a
package ready for installation.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 4 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. The Contractor shall coordinate door hardware specifications and installation details
with the Door Hardware Contractor.
d. The Contractor shall ensure the full coordination between the Access Control constraints
and other Systems such as Fire Alarm and Detection System and video surveillance
system (VSS) (CCTV) or any other interfaced System.
6. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall also include:
a. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design
guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on approved storage
media of the hard-copy submittal.
b. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and
setup decisions.

1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.9 MISCELLANEOUS QUALITY MANAGEMENT TOPICS

A. For the following quality management topics, refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses
for IT & Security Systems":
1. CONFIDENTIALITY
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
3. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
4. WARRANTY
5. COMMISSIONING
6. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

1.10 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major components in
the system for two years fault-free operation.

C. However furnish the following extra materials, as a minimum, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents, irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation:
1. Credential card blanks, ready for printing. Include enough credential cards for all personnel
to be enrolled at the site plus an extra 50 percent for future use.
2. Fuses of all kinds, power and electronic, equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size
used, but no fewer than three units.

D. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for equipment supplied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems".

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 5 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.3 OPERATION

A. Security access system hardware shall use a single database for access-control and credential-
creation functions.

2.4 CARD READERS, CREDENTIAL CARDS, AND KEYPADS

A. Card-Reader Power: Powered from its associated controller, including its standby power source,
and shall not dissipate more than 5 W.

B. Response Time: Card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal that is sent
to the controller. Response time shall be 800 ms or less, from the time the card reader finishes
reading the credential card until a response signal is generated.

C. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting. Mounting types
shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:
1. Indoors, controlled environment.
2. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.
3. Outdoors, with built-in heaters or other cold-weather equipment to extend the operating
temperature range as needed for operation at the site.

D. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible and audible status indications and user
prompts. Indicate power on or off, whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected,
and whether the door is locked or unlocked.

E. Proximity Readers:
1. Active-detection proximity card readers shall provide power to compatible credential cards
through magnetic induction, and shall receive and decode a unique identification code
number transmitted from the credential card.
2. Passive-detection proximity card readers shall use a swept-frequency, RF field generator to
read the resonant frequencies of tuned circuits laminated into compatible credential cards.
The resonant frequencies read shall constitute a unique identification code number.
3. The card reader shall read proximity cards in a range from direct contact to at least 150 mm
(6 inches) from the reader.

F. Keypad and Proximity-Reader Combination: Designed to require an entry on the keypad before
presenting the credential card.
1. Keypad: Allow the entry of four numeric digits that are associated with a specific credential.
Keypads shall contain an integral alphanumeric/special symbol keyboard with symbols
arranged in ascending ASCII-code ordinal sequence. Keypad display or enclosure shall limit
viewing angles of the keypad as follows:
a. Maximum Horizontal Viewing Angle: Plus or minus 5 degrees or less off a vertical
plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display.
b. Maximum Vertical Viewing Angle: Plus or minus 15 degrees or less off a horizontal
plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display.
2. Proximity Reader: as specified in this section.

G. Communication Protocol: Compatible with local processor.

H. Credential Card Modification: Entry-control cards shall be able to be modified by lamination

direct print process during the enrollment process without reduction of readability. The design
of the credential cards shall allow for the addition of at least one slot or hole to accommodate the
attachment of a clip for affixing the credential card to the badge holder used at the site.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 6 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

I. Card Size and Dimensional Stability: Credential cards shall be 54 by 86 mm (2-1/8 by 3-3/8
inches). The credential card material shall be dimensionally stable so that an undamaged card
with deformations resulting from normal use shall be readable by the card reader.

J. Card Material: Abrasion resistant, nonflammable, nontoxic, and impervious to solar radiation
and effects of ultraviolet light.

K. Card Construction:
1. Core and laminate or monolithic construction.
2. Lettering, logos, and other markings shall be hot stamped into the credential material or direct
printed.
3. Incorporate holographic images as a security enhancement.
4. Furnish equipment for on-site assembly and lamination of credential cards.

2.5 BIOMETRIC IDENTITY-VERIFICATION EQUIPMENT

A. Biometric identity-verification templates shall be stored as part of system database files and used
as a comparative base by the identity-verification equipment to generate an appropriate signal to
the associated controller.

B. QR code reader shall also be specified for the QR read and interpretation

C. Eye Retina Scanner: Designed to incorporate positive measures to establish that the eye retina
being scanned by the device belongs to a living human being.
1. Retina scan device shall provide a means that does not require facial contact with the device
for enrollees to align their eye for identification. A manual push button shall be provided to
initiate the scan process when the enrollee's eye is aligned in front of the device.
2. The efficiency and accuracy of scanner shall not be affected by contact lenses.
3. Storage space for each eye template shall not exceed 512 8-bit bytes.
4. Light-emitting source used for retina scans may not use light levels exceeding 20 percent of
the maximum safe level established in the American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists limit values.
5. Template Update: Eye scanner shall not automatically update an enrollee's template.
Significant changes in an individual's eye shall require re-enrollment.
6. Scan acceptance tolerance or template match criteria shall be under system manager/operator
control. Eye scanner shall determine when multiple attempts are needed for retina
verification and shall automatically prompt the enrollee for additional attempts up to a
maximum of three. Three failed attempts shall generate an entry-control alarm.
7. Average Verification Time: Eye scanner shall respond to passage requests by generating an
entry request signal to the controller. The verification time shall be 1.5 seconds or less from
the moment eye scanner initiates the scan process until eye scanner generates a response
signal.
8. Modes: Eye scanner shall provide an enrollment mode, a recognition mode, and a
code/credential verification mode.
a. In the enrollment mode, eye scanner shall create an eye template for new personnel and
enter the template into the system database file created for that person. Template
information shall be compatible with system application software.
b. In the recognition mode, eye scanner shall allow passage when the eye scan data from
the verification attempt match an eye template stored in database files.
c. In the code/credential verification mode, eye scanner shall allow passage when the eye
scan data from the verification attempt match the eye scan template associated with the
identification code entered into a keypad, or they match the eye scan template associated
with credential card data read by a card reader.
9. Reports: Eye scanner shall create and store template match scores for all transactions
involving eye retinal scans. Template match scores shall be stored in the matching personnel
data file used for report generation.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 7 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

10. Power: Scanner shall be powered from its associated controller, requiring not more than 45
W.
11. Enclosure: Eye scanners shall be available with enclosures that are suitable for surface,
semiflush, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for
installation in the following locations:
a. Indoors, controlled environment.
b. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.
12. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visibleand audible status indications and user
prompts. Indicate power on or off and whether user passage requests have been accepted or
rejected.

D. Hand Geometry: Use unique human hand measurements to identify authorized, enrolled
personnel. The design of this device shall incorporate positive measures to establish that the hand
being measured by the device belongs to a living human being.
1. The user's hand shall remain in full view of the user at all times. The scan process of the
hand geometry device shall make three-dimensional measurements of the size and shape of
the subject's hand. Scanning shall start automatically once the user's hand is properly
positioned by the alignment system.
2. Hand geometry device shall be able to use either left or right hand for enrollment and
verification.
3. Storage space for each hand template shall not exceed 508-bit bytes.
4. Template Update and Acceptance Tolerances: Hand geometry devices shall not
automatically update a user's profile. Significant changes in an individual's hand geometry
shall require re-enrollment. Hand geometry devices shall provide an adjustable acceptance
tolerance or template match criteria under system manager/operator control. Hand geometry
device shall determine when multiple attempts are needed for hand geometry verification
and shall automatically prompt the user for additional attempts up to a maximum of three.
Three failed attempts shall generate an entry-control alarm.
5. Average Verification Time: Hand geometry device shall respond to passage requests by
generating an entry request signal to the controller. The verification time shall be 1.5 seconds
or less from the moment hand geometry device initiates the scan process until hand geometry
device generates a response signal.
6. Modes: Hand geometry device shall provide an enrollment mode, a recognition mode, and
a code/credential verification mode.
a. In the enrollment mode, hand geometry device shall create a hand template for new
personnel and enter the template into the system database file created for that person.
Template information shall be compatible with system application software.
b. In the recognition mode, hand geometry device shall allow passage when the hand scan
data from the verification attempt match a hand geometry template stored in database
files.
c. In the code/credential verification mode, hand geometry device shall allow passage
when the hand scan data from the verification attempt match the hand geometry template
associated with the identification code entered into a keypad, or they match the hand
geometry template associated with credential card data read by a card reader.
7. Reports: Hand geometry device shall create and store template match scores for all
transactions involving hand geometry scans. Template match scores shall be stored in the
matching personnel data file used for report generation.
8. Power: Hand geometry device shall be powered from its associated controller, requiring not
more than 45W.
9. Enclosure: Geometry readers shall be available with enclosures that are suitable for surface,
semiflush, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for
installation in the following locations:
a. Indoors, controlled environment.
b. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.
c. Outdoors.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 8 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

10. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visibleand audible status indications and user
prompts. Indicate power on or off and whether user passage requests have been accepted or
rejected.

E. Fingerprint Analysis Scanner: Use a unique human fingerprint pattern to identify authorized,
enrolled personnel. The design of this device shall incorporate positive measures to establish that
the hand or fingers being scanned by the device belong to a living human being.
1. The user's hand shall remain in full view of the user at all times. The scan process of the
fingerprint analysis scanner shall perform an optical or other type of scan of the enrollee's
fingers. Scanning shall start automatically when the user's fingers are properly positioned.
2. Storage space for each fingerprint template shall not exceed 1250 8-bit bytes.
3. Template Update and Acceptance Tolerances: Fingerprint analysis scanners shall not
automatically update an enrollee's profile. Significant changes in an individual's fingerprints
shall require re-enrollment. Fingerprint analysis scanners shall provide an adjustable
acceptance tolerance or template match criteria under system manager/operator control.
Fingerprint analysis scanner shall determine when multiple attempts are needed for
fingerprint verification and shall automatically prompt the user for additional attempts up to
a maximum of three. Three failed attempts shall generate an entry-control alarm.
4. Average Verification Time: Fingerprint analysis scanner shall respond to passage requests
by generating an entry request signal to the controller. The verification time shall be two
seconds or less from the moment fingerprint analysis scanner initiates the scan process until
fingerprint analysis scanner generates a response signal.
5. Modes: Fingerprint analysis scanner shall provide an enrollment mode, a recognition mode,
and a code/credential verification mode.
a. In the enrollment mode, fingerprint analysis scanner shall create a fingerprint template
for new personnel and enter the template into the system database file created for that
person.
b. In the recognition mode, fingerprint analysis scanner shall allow passage when the
fingerprint data from the verification attempt match a fingerprint template stored in
database files.
c. In the code/credential verification mode, fingerprint analysis scanner shall allow passage
when the fingerprint data from the verification attempt match the fingerprint template
associated with the identification code entered into a keypad, or they match the
fingerprint template associated with credential card data read by a card reader.
6. Reports: Fingerprint analysis device shall create and store pattern match scores for all
transactions involving fingerprint scans. Template match scores shall be stored in the
matching personnel data file used for report generation.
7. Power: Fingerprint analysis scanner shall be powered from its associated controller,
requiring not more than 45 W.
8. Enclosure: Scanners shall be available with enclosures that are suitable for surface,
semiflush, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for
installation in the following locations:
a. Indoors, controlled environment.
b. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.
c. Outdoors.
9. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible and audible status indications and user
prompts. Indicate power on or off and whether user passage requests have been accepted or
rejected.

F. Iris Scan Device: Use the unique patterns found in the iris of the human eye to identify
authorized, enrolled personnel. The device shall use ambient light to capture an image of the iris
of a person for identification. The resulting video image shall be compared against a stored
template that was captured during the enrollment process. When the presented image is
sufficiently similar to the stored image template, then the device shall authenticate the presenting
individual as identified. The threshold of similarity shall be adjustable.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 9 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. The efficiency and accuracy of the device shall not be affected by contact lenses or
eyeglasses.
2. Iris scan device shall provide a means that does not require facial contact with the device for
enrollees to align their eye for identification. A manual push button shall be provided to
initiate the scan process when the user's eye is aligned in front of the device.
3. The device shall include adjustments to accommodate differences in enrollee height.
4. Template Update: Iris scanners shall not automatically update an enrollee's template.
Significant changes in an individual's eye shall require re-enrollment.
5. Scan acceptance tolerance or template match criteria shall be under system manager/operator
control. Iris scanner shall determine when multiple attempts are needed for iris verification
and shall automatically prompt the user for additional attempts up to a maximum of three.
Three failed attempts shall generate an entry-control alarm.
6. Average Verification Time: Iris scanner shall respond to passage requests by generating an
entry request signal to the controller. The verification time shall be [1.5] <Insert number>
seconds or less from the moment iris scanner initiates the scan process until iris scanner
generates a response signal.
7. Modes: Iris scanner shall provide an enrollment mode, a recognition mode, and a
code/credential verification mode.
a. In the enrollment mode, iris scanner shall create an iris template for new personnel and
enter the template into the system database file created for that person. Template
information shall be compatible with system application software.
b. In the recognition mode, iris scanner shall allow passage when the iris scan data from
the verification attempt match an iris template stored in database files.
c. In the code/credential verification mode, iris scanner shall allow passage when the iris
scan data from the verification attempt match the iris scan template associated with the
identification code entered into a keypad, or they match the iris scan template associated
with credential card data read by a card reader.
8. Reports: Iris imaging shall create and store template match scores for all transactions
involving iris scans. Template match scores shall be stored in the matching personnel data
file used for report generation.
9. Power: Iris scanner shall be powered from its associated controller, requiring not more than
45W.
10. Enclosure: Eye scanners shall be available with enclosures that are suitable for surface,
semiflush, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for
installation in the following locations:
a. Indoors, controlled environment.
b. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.
11. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible and audible status indications and
user prompts. Indicate power on or off and whether user passage requests have been accepted
or rejected.

2.6 ACCESS HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS

A. General
1. The Contractor shall provide suitable devices for each door type for Access Control and
Security systems.
2. Coordinate with doors, frames, and hardware specified in other sections,
3. Provide all equipment related to Access Control such as: CR, BIO Reader, REX and other
accessory parts necessary to complete the installation,
4. Provide all necessary components to supply power to system devices from building power
distribution system.
5. All types of access represented in the Drawings shall be monitored by the Access Control
system.
6. In case of double leaf door, the electromagnetic lock shall be adapted for this type of door.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 10 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

7. All the wiring and Equipment surrounding the access shall be concealed and implemented in
the most secured Area or side. They shall also be integrated in the design as per Architectural
specifications.

B. Detail Specifications
1. Door Hardware.
a. The following components shall form part of works for Door Hardware Equipment
1) Electrified Locks and latches
2) Door Bolts,
3) Electric and mechanical Exit Devices
4) Door Contact Switches:
5) Strikes,
6) Magnetic Lock,
7) Hold Open Magnet,
8) Key contactor,
9) Transfer Hinge (shall be invisible and implemented in the mullion),
10) Door power supply units
2. Integrated Alarm (IA)
a. Sound and Light period and duration shall be configured.
b. Sound level shall be configurable.
c. IA shall be as small as possible to cope with the Architectural Design of the door.
d. Coordination with Door Design and manufacturer shall be provided.
e. Light and Buzzer: MTBF > 50000Hours.
3. Interface Box (IB)
a. Dimensions: As small as possible.
b. In a box with a built-in tamper switch.
c. The Interface Box shall be either a Dry Contact connector or Software I/O module. To
be defined upon agreement with the Employer.

C. Wire and cable technical functionalities

1. Functionalities:
a. The Contractor shall supply all power and communications cables and wires for the
access control equipment:
b. Power cables shall be provided by the AC/DC converters fed from UPS Outlets in the
Technical Rooms.

2.7 SURGE AND TAMPER PROTECTION

A. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment
housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include
surge protection for external wiring of each conductor-entry connection to components.
1. Comply with Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices" and as recommended by
manufacturer for type of line being protected.

B. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes,
cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened
or partially disassembled. Control-station control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms
and indicate locations.

2.8 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES

A. Push-Button Switches: Momentary-contact back-lighted push buttons with stainless-steel switch

enclosures.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 11 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Electrical Ratings:
1. Minimum continuous current rating of 5 A at 240-V ac.
2. Contacts that will make 720 VA at 60 A and that will break at 720 VA at 10 A.

C. Enclosures: Flush or surface mounting. Push buttons shall be suitable for flush mounting in the
switch enclosures.

D. Enclosures shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:

1. Indoors, controlled environment.
2. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.
3. Outdoors.

E. Power: Push-button switches shall be powered from their associated controller, using dc control.

2.9 PANIC ALARM BUTTONS

A. Panic Alarm Buttons: shall be linked with ACS, comprising two finger double push devices.

B. Enclosures: Flush or surface mounting.

2.10 INTEGRATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The Access Control shall be integrated and interfaced to the following systems:
1. Structured Cabling Network (SCN) and Data Communications Network
a. The Access Control shall be interfaced with the Structured Cabling Network and the
Data Communications Network to allow for communication between the System
workstations, servers, and controllers and all other interfaced systems through the
network backbone.
b. Clients shall communicate with the system applications utilizing the TCP/IP network
protocol over the Project LAN.
2. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
a. All Access Control equipment shall be powered by UPS. Coordinate with the Electrical
Contractor to ensure UPS power supply for Access Control equipment.
b. A UPS failure shall be communicated to the Access Control workstations (where
provided).
3. Master Clock Interface
a. The real time clock of the Access Control shall be synchronized to the Project Master
Clock. The Access Control Contractor shall coordinate this work with the Master Clock
System Contractor such that the real time clocks are updated every 24 hours, at
minimum.
4. Elevators
a. The Access Control Contractor shall extend cables from the equipment racks up to the
elevators control panel located in the lift machine room. From there onwards, the
Elevator Contractor shall extend the cables up to the Access Card Reader located inside
the elevator car. The Access Card Readers themselves shall be supplied by the Access
Control Contractor.
5. Fire Alarm System
a. The Fire Alarm System shall control directly the Access Control controlled doors in
accordance with the approved Cause and Effect Matrix via hardwired interlocks.
6. Parking Control Equipment

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 12 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. The Access Control devices and associated cards that are integrated in the Parking
Control Equipment shall be furnished by the Access Control Contractor. The latter shall
extend the necessary cables from Access Control equipment racks up to the respective
Parking Control Equipment.
b. When an authorized access card is presented and validated by the Access Control, the
barrier gates will open.

2.11 TRANSFORMERS

A. Control transformers listed for security access-control systems: shall not be shared with any other
system.

2.12 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

2.13 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Refer to Appendix A of this Specification Section for a guide to specifications of commonly used
cables in the industry.

2.14 CONDUITS, TRUNKING, ENCLOSURES AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements
for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and
other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs (workstations),
controllers, card readers, and other cable-connected devices to verify actual locations of conduit
and back boxes before device installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Product Schedules: Obtain detailed product schedules from manufacturer of access-control

system or develop product schedules to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans
and specifications and publish as Product Schedules for review and approval.

B. In meetings with Engineer and Employer, present Product Schedules and review, adjust, and
prepare final setup documents. Use approved, product schedules to set up system software.

3.3 CABLING

A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks,
and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

B. Use plenum rated cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway
and cables except in unfinished spaces.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 13 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with the adopted
Category rating of components and optical fiber rating of components, and that ensure the adopted
copper and optical fiber performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

D. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are easily
accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level
in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small
device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be
covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

E. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel location.

3.4 CABLE APPLICATION

A. Comply with Division 26, Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”.

B. Comply with Division 27 Sections for structured cabling:

1. Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
2. Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
3. Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).

C. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded if

recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware.

D. TIA 232-F Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 50 ft. (15 m) between terminations.

E. TIA 485-A Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 4000 ft. (1220 m) between terminations.

F. Card Readers and Keypads:

1. Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for the functions specified.
2. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, install No. 22 AWG wire if maximum
distance from controller to the reader is 250 ft. (75 m), and install No. 20 AWG wire if
maximum distance is 500 ft. (150 m).
3. For greater distances, install "extender" or "repeater" modules recommended by
manufacturer of the controller.
4. Install minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and keypads that draw 50 mA or
more.

G. Install minimum No. 16 AWG cable from controller to electrically powered locks. Do not exceed
250 ft. (75 m) between terminations.

H. Install minimum No. 18 AWG ac power wire from transformer to controller, with a maximum
distance of 25 ft. (8 m) between terminations.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Division 26, Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic
Equipment."

C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize
ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

E. Signal Ground:

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 14 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from power system and
equipment grounding.
2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.
3. Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each equipment
room and wiring closet.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Coordinate mounting heights and mounting details of card readers, Touch Screen Access
Terminals, push buttons, and biometric readers.

C. Push Buttons
1. Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be
stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with 6.4 mm (1/4-inch) high text and
symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the controller associated
with the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike,
electric bolt, or other facility release device.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 27, section “Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).

B. Using software designated for "Cable and Asset Management", develop cable administration
drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric
designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it
connects with the same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's
architectural arrangement.

C. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each
cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device
shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the
device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered
within the panel or cabinet.

D. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.8 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE

A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform database tests for the complete and
proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Employer.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections to ensure
minimum requirements are met.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 15 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. LAN Cable Procedures: test in accordance with Division 27, Section “Communications
Horizontal Cabling (TIA)”.
2. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to,
measurements of power-supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and
leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be
operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery
operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special or
dedicated equipment.
3. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability
and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from
each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been
satisfactorily completed.

D. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service.

B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation
requirements.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were developed
in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Employer’s operators, management, and security
personnel.

3.11 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS

A. When requested within 12 months of date of Taking Over of the System, provide on-site
assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to
Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Visits for this purpose shall
be in addition to any required by warranty.

B. Warranty time shall be 2 years all components of the system since handover

3.12 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

configure, program, adjust, operate, and maintain the security access system. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training Closeout Procedures."

B. Develop separate training modules for the following:

1. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN and databases and
to update and maintain software.
2. Operators who prepare and input credentials to man the control station and workstations and
to enroll personnel.
3. Security personnel.
4. Hardware maintenance personnel.
5. Corporate management.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 16 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.13 APPENDIX A – Miscellaneous Cable Specifications associated with Access Control

A. Cable Selection: Signal type shall be indicated on system schematic diagram.

B. Cables for Access Control have been specified in accordance with North American Standards
since these cables are widely available and specified as such in this field in the industry.
Contractor may propose materials and systems that comply with alternative International
Standards: for example European Standards (rather than North American Standards and UL listed
products).

C. Alternative Standards may be considered when proposed in writing, complete with

manufacturers’ specifications and associated revised Drawings.

D. PVC-Jacketed, TIA 232-F.

1. Nine, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. Polypropylene insulation.
3. Aluminum foil-polyester tape shield with 100 percent shield coverage.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Conductors are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper
drain wire.
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

E. Plenum-Rated TIA 232-F Cables:

1. Nine, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. PE insulation.
3. Aluminum foil-polyester tape shield with 100 percent shield coverage.
4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.
5. Conductors are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper
drain wire.
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

F. PVC-Jacketed, TIA 485-A Cables:

1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. NFPA 70 Type: Type CM or Type CMG.
6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

G. Plenum-Rated TIA 485-A Cables:

1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.
2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.
5. NFPA 70 Type: Type CMP
6. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

H. Multiconductor, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. No. 22 AWG, paired and twisted multiple conductors, stranded (7x30) tinned copper
conductors, semirigid PVC insulation, overall aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield with 100
percent shield coverage, plus tinned copper braid shield with 65 percent shield coverage, and
PVC jacket.
2. NFPA 70, Type CMG.
3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray.
4. For TIA-232-F applications.

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 17 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

I. Paired, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. Three pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, polypropylene
insulation, individual aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG,
stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket.
2. NFPA 70, Type CM.
3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray.

J. Paired, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. Three pairs, twisted, No. 20 AWG, stranded (7x28) tinned copper conductors, polyethylene
(polyolefin) insulation, individual aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shielded pairs each with
No. 22 AWG, stranded (19x34) tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and
PVC jacket.
2. NFPA 70, Type CM.
3. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray.

K. Paired, Plenum-Type, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. Three pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, plastic insulation,
individual aluminum-foil/polypropylene-tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG,
stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and fluorinated-ethylene-
propylene jacket.
2. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
3. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test.

L. Multiconductor, Plenum-Type, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables:

1. Six conductors, No. 20 AWG, stranded (7x28) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-
ethylene-propylene insulation, overall aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield with 100 percent
shield coverage plus tinned copper braid shield with 85 percent shield coverage, and
fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket.
2. NFPA 70, Type CMP.
3. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test.

M. LAN Cabling:
1. Comply with Division 27, Section “Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).”

END OF SECTION 281500

ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES 281500 - Page 18 of 18

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 282000 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (VSS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All the requirements presented in the below listed Specification Section shall be complimentary
to and shall apply to this Specification “Video Surveillance System (VSS)” except where the
latter calls for otherwise. In this case, this Specification “Video Surveillance System (VSS)” shall
have precedence:
1. Division 27, Section 270501 “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes an IP Video Surveillance System consisting of but not limited to:
1. IP CCTV Cameras
2. Software and servers.
3. Workstation.
4. Local Data Storage System.
5. Ancillary equipment.

B. This system shall provide for:

1. The transport of video signals to the video recorders via the Project Data Communications
Network.
2. The display of live camera video.
3. The archiving of all camera video onto a long term storage facility located at pump station.

C. The Video Surveillance System (VSS) shall interface with Access Control System, and other
Building Services Systems.

D. Related Sections:
1. Section 260500 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
2. Section 260519 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
3. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 260536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 260543 - Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.
7. Section 260548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
8. Section 263353 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.
9. Section 264313 - Surge Protective Devices.
10. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
11. Section 271055 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
12. Section 271105 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA).
13. Section 271305 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
14. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).
15. Section 270501 - Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems.
16. Section 272109 – Data Communications for Campus Network.
17. Section 275123.15 – IP-Based Intercom System.
18. Section 281300 – Access Control Software and Database Management.
19. Section 284621.11 - Addressable Fire Alarm System.
20.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 1 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

E. Servers and related ancillaries shall comply with:

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Regulations and Standards: All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the
applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:
1. IEC Standards
a. IEC 62676-1-1: Video surveillance systems for use in security applications – Part 1-1:
System requirements. General
b. IEC 62676-1-2: Video surveillance systems for use in security applications - Part 1-2:
System requirements. Performance requirements for video transmission
c. IEC 62676-2-1: Video surveillance systems for use in security applications. Video
transmission protocols. General requirements.
d. IEC 62676-2-2: Video surveillance systems for use in security applications - Part 2-2:
Video transmission protocols - IP interoperability implementation based on HTTP and
REST services
e. IEC 62676-2-31: Video surveillance systems for use in security applications - Part 2-
31: Live streaming and control based on web services
f. IEC 62676-2-32: Video surveillance systems for use in security applications - Part 2-
32: Recording control and replay based on web services
g. IEC 62676 -3: Video surveillance systems for use in security applications - Part 3:
Analog and digital video interfaces
h. IEC 62676 -4: Video Surveillance Systems for Use in Security Applications. Part 4:
Application Guideline
2. EN Standards
a. EN 50130-4: Alarm systems - Part 4: Electromagnetic compatibility - Product family
standard: Immunity requirements for components of fire, intruder, hold up, CCTV,
access control and social alarm systems
3. Comply with the latest issues of the ONVIF Specifications.
4. Retain Sub-paragraph below if the control room design is included in scope of CCTV
Contractor.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Definitions
1. “OFE”: shall refer to “Owner Furnished Equipment”, which will be provided by the
Owner/Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing this equipment from the
Owner’s premises, and re-installing and integrating this equipment in good working order
where required and detailed in these Specifications.
2. "Turnkey System": a complete system of hardware and software delivered to the customer
ready-to-run.
3. ONVIF™: Open Network Video Interface Forum, an open standard developed to allow the
management of IP cameras and other network video devices via a unified, open platform
standard. ONVIF is an organization started in 2008 by Axis Communications, Bosch
Security and Sony. The aim of the ONVIF™ standards is to achieve interoperability between
IP cameras and other network video devices regardless of manufacturer.
4. Frame rate, is the measurement of how quickly a camera produces unique, consecutive
images called frames. Frame rate is most often expressed in frames per second (fps).
Depending on how a given scene is captured in terms of motion, typical frame rates are 4,
12 and 25 fps for PAL-based systems and 5, 15 and 30 fps for NTSC-based systems
respectively.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 2 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. Abbreviations
1. AVC: Advanced Video Coding, H.264.
2. HEVC: High Efficiency Video Coding, H.265.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Scope shall be to provide new Cameras inside the pump station

B. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

C. Other Clarifications Related to the Scope of Work:

1. Specific Requirements:
a. Integration with existing network elements, if any, with full responsibility to the
Contractor in order to make a coherent Video Surveillance System. This work shall be
carried out in close coordination with the Employer.
b. Manufacturer technical validation and endorsement of the design documentation and
implementation shall be provided.
c. Risk analysis on the design with advantages and drawbacks shall be provided by the
Manufacturer.
d. Post deployment auditing by Manufacturer shall be specified in the documents,
e. Submission of credentials of the trainers shall be approved by the Manufacturer and by
the Employer.
2. The Video Surveillance System shall utilize the Project Structured Cabling Network and
Data Communications Network Installations. This connectivity shall form part of the
Structured Cabling Network and Data Communications Network as applicable. It shall not
form part of the Video Surveillance System.
3. Network switches and other similar devices which are strictly dedicated and configured for
the Video Surveillance System, but installed remotely from the Video Surveillance System
headend, shall form part of the work for the Video Surveillance System.
4. Inter-wiring, conduits and related accessories, network connectivity and any other material
which is specific to the Video Surveillance System central equipment and which is required
to provide a complete operational system, shall form part of the Video Surveillance System.

1.6 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS / COORDINATION

A. The Employer may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and miscellaneous
items that will be installed during the course of the installation process. Such items may not be
indicated in the documents. Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and his Suppliers
when considering:
1. Structured communications system cabling, termination, identification and testing.
2. Provision and installation of phone systems, computer hardware, racks/cabinets and related
networking software and equipment.
3. Active communication and data processing equipment.
4. Fiber optic cabling infrastructure.
5. Provision and installation of a Virtualized Servers Environment.
6. Provision and installation of UPS in communications rooms.
7. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building
earth electrode system.
8. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, floor boxes and utility outlets.
9. Installation and finishing of plywood backboards.
10. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system and environmental control sensors.
11. Communications pathway devices such as cable trays, conduits, conduit sleeves, and
penetrations in walls and floors.

B. Accordingly, Contractor shall:

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 3 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Meet jointly with representatives of above systems, Contractors, Operators, Engineer and
Employer to exchange information and agree on details of project implementation,
equipment arrangements and interface, etc.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment in technical rooms to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and ensure necessary interface with other systems.
4. Coordinate with the other Contractors whose deliveries are necessary for the correct
operation of the Video Surveillance System including but not limited to the Data
Communications Network, Fire Alarm System, Access Control, etc.

1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Video Surveillance System (VSS) shall provide digital video capture, transportation,
management, recording, live viewing, playback, and storage of the video. The VSS shall be based
on capturing and processing Ethernet transmission of video signals from cameras. The entire VSS
system shall be capable of being partitioned and allow sharing of selected video signals between
Security personnel and other operational personnel as required.

B. The Video Surveillance IP/Ethernet based system shall consist of video management and
archiving software, Power over Ethernet (PoE) IP fixed cameras and IP cameras with pan, tilt
zoom (PTZ) features, camera housings and mounting hardware, and power supplies required to
form a fully functional and operational network based virtual matrix surveillance system and
network based digital video recording system.

C. The system shall operate on a digital IP/Ethernet network. The Contractor shall coordinate for
the provision of network switches as part of this Project as required to accommodate the VSS.

D. The system shall have the capability to allow live video monitoring via web browsers or wireless
devices. Access shall be restricted by two-factor authentication and encryption as directed by
Employer. The cameras and video accessible via web browser or wireless devices shall be limited
based upon user and shall be configurable by the System Administrator to limit access by person
and by device or by access method.

E. The system shall include a combination of fixed and pan tilt zoom cameras, video recording and
archiving servers, as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. The camera management
and recording servers shall be connected to the network.

F. The VSS shall include an Intelligent Video Analysis System (IVAS). The IVAS shall apply
automatic, persistent artificial intelligence to video signals in an effort to improve the efficiency
of Operators by directing them immediately to events that need attention and provide them an
easy way to determine the appropriate action.

G. The VSS shall provide cameras as necessary to provide the required coverage. The system shall
include IVAS video analytics specifically for the Perimeter. Detections shall cause an alarm event
in the Access Control system and provide camera call-up in

H. For security grade 4, all Data communications within the VSS shall be encrypted. The Contractor
shall configure all the security and access credentials of the VSS including all software and
hardware, and shall under no circumstances maintain the manufacturer’s default access
credentials (usernames/passwords...etc.). The security and access credentials configuration shall
be subject to the Employer’s security strategy and requirements. The final configuration shall be
thoroughly documented and submitted to the end user.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Additional Requirements for Submittals:

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 4 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Examination reports documenting inspections of substrates, areas, and conditions (Site

Survey Requirements), Security Systems installation shall be based on approved shop
drawings prepared by the Contractor based on a site survey to determine the specific
installation parameters including the perimeter length, alarm zone layouts, sensor cable
route, cable spacing, type of sensor cable, existing CCTV cameras and poles, optimal
location of CCTV cameras and the location for the electronic components. The shop
drawings shall highlight the below:
a. Buildings and other structures (such as perimeter walls)
b. Roads, driveways, sidewalks, paths, parking areas, storage compounds

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.
Retain below All system components such as cameras, storage systems, etc. shall be ONVIF compliant.

C. Video Surveillance shall comply with Police or Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements
and regulations:
1. Video surveillance system specifications and drawings shall be submitted by an
approved/certified security Consultant.

1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Environmental Conditions: Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project environmental

conditions specified under Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”
encountered at the installed location without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
operating capability:
1. System components installed indoors: Conditioned air is provided into buildings and
communication rooms, but the Contractor shall take into account specific location
conditions, for example, direct sunlight behind windows.
2. System components installed outdoors: Install outdoor system components in enclosures that
meet the environmental conditions.
3. Security Environment: Provide camera housing for use in high-risk areas where surveillance
equipment may be subject to physical violence.
4. Enclosures
a. Screw Covers: Where enclosures are readily accessible, secure with security fasteners
of type appropriate for enclosure.

1.11 MISCELLANEOUS QUALITY MANAGEMENT TOPICS

A. For the following quality management topics, refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses
for IT & Security Systems":
1. CONFIDENTIALITY
2. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
3. WARRANTY
4. COMMISSIONING
5. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

1.12 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major components
in the system for two years fault-free operation.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 5 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. However, a minimum of 2% peripherals of each type installed, but not less than one from each
type shall be included in the deliverables irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation.

D. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for equipment supplied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section "Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems".

2.3 GENERAL FEATURES

A. The IP surveillance system shall provide digital capture, transportation, management, recording,
live viewing, playback, and storage for the video surveillance system.

B. 25% spare capacity shall be required at all levels of the system.

C. The software licensing shall be provided for the entire network with no limitation on the number
of workstations or standard end-users.

D. The Video Surveillance System shall be used by agents mainly for operation management and
for access control of staff and passengers, inside the Project.

E. A graphical user interface shall be provided at the system workstations and at the following
workstations located at the following offices:
1. At each Guard house at each zone.

F. The Video Surveillance system shall be used for:

1. License plate recognition

G. The functions of the CCTV shall consist of:

1. Facilitating the coordination of the operations.
2. Supplying staff with video information.
3. Managing the flow of passengers and access for maintenance staff.
4. Monitoring of gates for the access control system and Security Audio Communication
system (Intercom).
5. Recording and storage images.

2.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE AND COMPONENTS

A. The VSS shall consist of IP compatible cameras, both fixed and PTZ, connections to the LAN
via Cat 6A cabling or fiber, LAN switches, Video and Archiving Servers, system workstations,
and all associated software and hardware required for a complete and operational system.

B. Provide all software licenses required for the specified monitoring and control.

C. Provide all equipment as shown on the Drawings or described in the Specifications including, but
not limited to, cables, conduit, lightning and surge protection, mounting bracket fabrication,
connection to mains power supply and Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), and all equipment
necessary to provide a complete and operational system.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 6 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. All servers, both video and archiving, shall be connected to the system via network switches.
Refer to Division 27, Section “Data Communications” for the LAN equipment specifications.
This connection shall be secured by an IP access list, and firewalls and shall be provided and
configured to prevent unauthorized access to and from the VSS VLAN, as directed by the
Employer.

2.5 MATERIAL

A. General:
1. Provide material of types, sizes, capacities and electrical characteristics indicated. Except as
otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's VSS components as indicated by their published
product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer

B. Color
1. All visible camera housings shall be painted to match the surrounding structure or finishes.
This contract shall include all cost with custom painting as needed, and no change orders
will be considered for additional costs associated with painting. Only the visible window or
‘bubble’ shall be the exception to color stated above. All associated brackets, outlets, or
other required devices visible to the public shall be painted to match the camera housings
including fasteners used.

C. Cameras
1. Cameras shall fulfill the following minimum requirements:
a. Cameras located in unconditioned areas shall be installed within an environmental dome
enclosure, equipped with a thermostatically controlled heater and blower. Provide
power supply as required.
b. Cameras located in areas with changing light conditions shall be equipped with Wide
Dynamic Range (WDR) functionality for automatic adjustment to compensate for
changing lighting (sunlight) conditions.
c. Cameras shall provide three (3) video streams including configurable unicast and
multicast simultaneous streams as a minimum.
d. Cameras shall be equipped with motion detection functionality and alarms input/output.
2. The camera representation of a person shall be as follows, based on the size of an object
(target) on the display screen in relation to the required functionality (purpose):
a. To monitor or crowd control, the target shall represent not less than 5 % for PAL and
NTSC resolution of screen height (or shall represent more than 80 mm per pixel).
b. To detect, the target shall represent not less than 10 % for PAL and NTSC resolution of
screen height (or shall represent more than 40 mm per pixel).
c. To observe, the target shall represent 25 % for PAL and 30 % for NTSC resolution of
screen height (or shall represent more than 16 mm per pixel).
d. To recognise, the target shall represent not less than 50 % for PAL and 60 % for NTSC
resolution of screen height (or shall represent more than 8 mm per pixel).
e. To identify, the target shall represent not less than 100 % for PAL and 120 % for NTSC
resolution of screen height (or shall represent more than 4 mm per pixel).
f. To inspect, the target shall represent not less than 400 % for PAL and 450 % for NTSC
resolution of screen height (or shall represent more than 1 mm per pixel).
3. Megapixel Resolution Fixed Cameras: Cameras shall be fixed Network IP megapixel
cameras. In locations where a drop ceiling is available with sufficient clearance above the
ceiling, the camera shall be flush ceiling mounted in a mini-dome enclosure. In locations
where no drop ceiling is available or the depth is not sufficient, the camera shall be ceiling
pendant mounted in a standard enclosure. For drywall ceilings, provide pendant or surface
mount type camera. For linear metal ceiling provide pendant mount type camera. The fixed
Megapixel Network IP camera shall be furnished with a vari-focal auto-iris lens as required
for the desired field-of-view. Verify field-of-view requirements for each camera location

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 7 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

with the Employer prior to ordering camera. The fixed Megapixel IP camera shall be
powered via POE. As a minimum, the fixed camera shall comply with the following:
a. Cameras shall be similar in appearance to the PTZ cameras (dome type) specified below
and have a manual 3-axis position adjustment for pan, tilt and rotation about the lens
axis for any angle of view required.
b. The camera shall be provided with automatic Gain Control, automatic exposure control,
and automatic Backlight Compensation.
c. The Video Compression shall be H.264; the communication port shall be based on
10/100/1000 Based-T RJ-45.
d. The Megapixel+ Resolution Fixed Cameras shall be installed within but not be limited
to:
1) Pedestrian Entry and Exit Points,
2) Vehicle Entry and Exit Points,
3) Loading Dock Areas, Parking Entrances,
4) Gates, Receptions, Security Desks,
5) Main Technical Rooms,
6) Entrances to Main Technical and Equipment Rooms,
7) Clinic Critical Areas, etc.
e. The Megapixel+ Fixed Cameras distribution shall be coordinated and confirmed with
the Employer and/or Operator.
f. Where installed outdoors, cameras shall be furnished with an IP-66 rated enclosure and
shall be provided with special arrangement to minimize reflection from side windows.
g. The following Types of cameras shall be provided or as required by local authority:
1) Type 4: The imaging device shall be a 1/2.8-inch color pixel based imager
providing a minimum resolution of 2MP. The minimum light sensitivity shall be
0.1 lux in color mode and 0.01 lux in black and white mode. The camera shall
accept standard "C" and "CS" mount auto iris lenses with the ability for the camera
to control the iris automatically.
h. Camera Type selection for each scene, shall be based on the resolution which is required
to achieve the camera representation purpose (Identification, Recognition, Observation,
Detection, etc. - defined above).
4. PTZ Cameras: Camera shall be a Network IP camera with PTZ capabilities, and shall be
installed within a dome enclosure. The camera shall be flush ceiling mounted or ceiling
pedestal mounted, as required. In locations where a drop ceiling is available with sufficient
clearance above the ceiling, the camera shall be flush ceiling mounted. In locations where
no drop ceiling is available or the depth is not sufficient, the camera shall be ceiling pendant
mounted. For drywall ceilings, provide pendant or surface mount type camera. For linear
metal ceiling provide pendant mount type camera. It is preferable that PTZ cameras be
provided with Power over Ethernet (PoE) or Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+) capability,
but cameras shall be capable of PoE/PoE+ and 24/28 VAC. If not available, provide centrally
located power supplies, as specified herein. As a minimum, the PTZ camera shall comply
with the following:
a. PTZ control shall be via full duplex data communication via the RJ-45 communication
Port with electronics integral to the drive housing. Configuration of dome functions
shall be via on screen menu available remotely. The camera shall be powered with Power
over Ethernet where available or by 24/28 volts AC from a multi-output rack mounted
power supply provided under this Contract and located in the communications room
associated with the camera.
b. All PTZ cameras shall be IP network security cameras.
c. Minimum 20-character user-defined on screen titling for each camera, preset and sector.
d. Minimum 64 preset PTZ positions and 16 sectors defined by user.
e. Minimum eight 32-step user programmable tours with an additional two user defined
360 step dynamic “auto-tour” functions.
f. Imaging device shall be a color 1/4-inch CCD and shall have a lens with a variable focal
length included in the range of 3.6 to 95 mm with a minimum optical zoom of 30 X

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 8 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

maximum aperture size of F1.6 and providing a minimum resolution of 2MP . Minimum
light sensitivity shall be 0.01 lux or less. The lens shall have an auto-iris function and
auto-focus function that can be placed in override by the Operator. The camera shall
automatically switch between color and monochrome modes to enhance viewing in low
light conditions. Low light viewing conditions shall be further enhanced by frame
integration, automatic gain control and slow shutter speeds being activated
automatically when conditions require them. The camera shall have an adjustable
backlight compensation feature.
g. Panning: Continuous 360 degrees rotation at user controlled variable speeds between
0.25 and 250 degrees per second without image interruption. Tilt: –2.5 degrees through
92.5 at user controlled variable speeds between 0.25 and 110 degrees per second. The
drive shall perform an auto-flip function to track objects passing directly below the dome
in an upright position. Zoom speed shall be user-controlled varying between 0 to 200
degrees per second. Focus speed shall be no less than 1.8 from near to far stops. Preset
seek time shall not exceed 1.8 second.
h. Video Compression shall be HEVC/H.265 (preferred if available), H.264 (preferred if
HEVC/H.265 is not available), MPEG-4 (preferred if H.264 not available).
i. Housing shall be Aluminum.
j. Lower dome shall be Optical grade acrylic, smoked for interior, clear for exterior.
k. The PTZ Cameras shall be installed within but not be limited to Public Areas, Corridors,
Elevator Lobbies, Vertical Circulation (i.e. on each floor monitoring the entrances
to the floor from elevators and staircases), Parking Areas, etc. The PTZ Cameras
distribution shall be coordinated and confirmed with the Employer and/or Operator.
l. Camera Type selection for each scene, shall be based on the resolution which is required
to achieve the camera representation purpose (Identification, Recognition, Observation,
Detection, etc. - defined above).
5. Exterior PTZ dome cameras shall be equipped with a mount, a sunshield and integral
heater/blower to accommodate for environmental changes. Provide power supply as
required.
6. PTZ cameras to be utilized for assessment of IVAS motion detection alarms along fence
lines and boundary zones shall be equipped with infrared illuminators to provide detection
regardless of lighting conditions in the detection areas.

D. Lenses
1. Provide vari-focal lenses for all fixed IP cameras. Field verify lensing requirements to
provide for the defined desired angle of view, and high quality, glare-free, clear pictures at
the video monitors.
2. All camera lenses shall incorporate “C” or “CS” mounts and shall be specifically designed
for color applications.
3. All camera lenses shall incorporate auto iris control.

E. PTZ Camera Power Supply

1. Although IP cameras with PoE/PoE+ capability are preferred, [ if necessary,] 24/28 VAC
output individually fused camera power supplies shall be provided for Network IP cameras
with PTZ capabilities. Camera power supplies shall comply with IEC 62676-4 and shall be
24/28 VAC units.
a. Low voltage outputs shall have automatically resetting over current protection devices.
Each output shall be electrically isolated from other outputs on the supply.
b. Each camera power supply shall be connected to a UPS branch circuit.
c. Provide 4, 8 and 16 output power supplies as required for each location. Individual,
plug-in type power supplies shall not be acceptable.
d. The power supplies shall also contain Surge Protection Devices in accordance with
Division 26 Section “Surge Protective Devices”; failure of surge protection capabilities
will result in open circuit to indicate module needs replacement.

F. Media Converters

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 9 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Media converters shall be used for cameras in areas where direct copper connectivity is not
feasible.
2. Media converters shall be provided by the Video Surveillance System Contractor in
coordination with the Structured Cabling Network Contractor.
3. Media Converters for outdoor CCTV cameras mounted on High Mast Lighting Poles shall
be located within the same connection unit of the lighting mast. Contractor shall coordinate
as necessary for number and size of media converters with the High mast construction.

2.6 VSS PROCESSING SERVER

A. The processing server receives camera IP streams from cameras, converts the video stream into
a compressed video format, and then writes the video to the long term storage device. The
processing server shall be able to provide compression of all cameras received by the server at
thirty (30) frames per second) at the native resolution of each camera Type. The processing
server shall be able to interface with large network storage arrays or drives with a minimum
partition size of 500 Terabytes. The use of a system that is limited to less than the noted size
shall not be allowed. Each server shall be able to log multiple drives or partitions, but the intent
is that each server will log only a single partition for storage of all camera video for cameras
assigned to that server. The intent is that the storage size and cameras per partition shall not be
limited by the system software. Each server shall have the capability of logging multiple partitions
or drives, but only one partition is expected at this time. A storage solution shall be provided for
the CCTV system as described under “Storage Considerations” Article of this Specification.

2.7 APPLICATION/CONTROL SERVER

A. The application/control server tracks all live video clips and stored video. The application/control
server shall be a dual, fully redundant configuration which is comprised of two identical servers
located in physically diverse locations.

2.8 VSS SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. The system shall be based on open architecture software and shall allow the use of any industry
standard computer hardware, LAN hardware, and data storage equipment (non-proprietary
hardware). Systems requiring the use of proprietary hardware shall not be acceptable.

B. The system shall be an entirely plug-and-play IP/Ethernet based system which shall allow the
display of live video streams, the recording and playback of digital video streams from multiple
video surveillance IP cameras simultaneously on the System’s Operator console and/or on clients.
Clients may include selected workstations, laptops, or other devices.

C. The system shall provide the capability to integrate IP fixed and PTZ cameras, video encoders,
and management and storage servers on a standard IP/Ethernet network.

D. The system shall operate Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS) hardware and on industry standard
server operating system with all the controls done via keyboard and mouse

E. The software installed in both servers and workstations shall be similar in Graphical User
Interface, therefore, an Operator shall need to learn only one interface for both control and
programming of the system and functions, offering the ability to remotely configure most system
components from any recorder or workstation.

F. The recorder shall also offer a full multi-user authorization logon application. This application
shall offer levels of authorization based on defined sites and functions. In addition, a full setup
utility shall be available for the Administrator to configure authorizations. The login window
shall consist of a User Name and Password field. The software shall offer a full multi-user
authorization process as follows:
1. User groups shall be created once globally and shall appear in all recorders and workstations
connected to the network.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 10 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Users shall be created once globally and shall be given rights to particular groups.
3. Groups shall be authorized and given specific access to each unit, permitting “function-
specific” profiles.
4. Users created and authorized for each machine shall be able to login to any recorder and
workstation and automatically have their group rights for that machine follow them.
5. There shall be no virtual limit on the amount of Groups and Users that can be authorized in
the software.
6. The recorder shall allow for each group to be authorized or denied access, per component,
to: Login, Logout, Setup: Network & Site Name, User and Group Management, Site
Authorization, Auto Login, Macro Create-Edit, Alarm Setup, Authentication Settings,
Device Setup, Pre & Post Alarm Times, Storage Database Utilities, Auto Record, Exit to OS,
RS-232 Setup, Priority Setup, Registration Setup, Manual Record Setup, Scheduler for
Macros(multiple actions), Reports, Scheduler/Macro, Shutdown/Close, Record, Stop,
Change Quality, Picture Export and Print, Control PTZ, Live View, Playback Recorded
Images, Edit Camera titles, Define Alarm conditions, System reports, Relay Operation, and
Alarms Functions.

G. Workstation Graphical User Interface Software

1. The Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall provide a multi-channel display area containing
access to a listing of all connected cameras, Site and terminal maps and device tree, a
navigator window, a control dialog display area, a toolbar, a display mode control area, a
function control area, a video display controls area and other image controls area. Each area
shall contain the necessary controls to operate and setup the system.
a. The Main Window shall provide the following:
1) Site and Device Tree depicting each recorder with all connected cameras, visually
differentiating between PTZ and fixed cameras by either icons or camera tags.
2) A multi-screen display area that allows for screen displays of a Single camera,
Quad, 3x3, 4x4, and Full screen of any of the above selected multi-screen displays.
The main window shall be capable of spanning multiple monitors through the use
of multiple display cards per workstation.
2. Shall have the ability to view, record, playback and archive video from cameras located at
remote locations over the IP network. (Multi-location recordings).
3. Shall provide the capability to record audio with the associated camera, when audio recording
is necessary and the camera has audio feature supported by the software.
4. Shall allow time synchronized multiple cameras view/playback.
5. Shall provide a tamper-proof log file on user’s activity in the system using encryption and
integrity check.
6. Shall be scalable to support an unlimited number of cameras with multiple servers.
7. Shall provide 24 hours scheduler to activate and deactivate the following features on a per
camera basis:
a. Bring cameras on/off line.
b. Sound audible alarm on motion detection in camera’s field of view.
c. Send e-mail/text, pager notification on motion detection events with/without video
image attachment.
d. Start/stop and change patrolling sequence for PTZ cameras.

H. Software shall have an advanced motion detection capabilities with the functions as described
below. The administrator shall have the ability to use one, several or any non-conflicting
combinations of the following functions, on a per camera basis:
1. Pre-recording images up to 999 seconds (User defined) before a motion is detected in the
cameras field of view and continue recording for up to 999 seconds (user defined) after the
motion stopped in the cameras field of view.
2. Adjustments of motion level sensitivity from 0 –10,000 units in 1 unit increments.
3. Up to 1024 inclusion / exclusion motion detection zones per camera.
4. Change recorded frame rate when motion is detected.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 11 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

5. Annunciate motion as an event or alarm on the Operator’s workstation on a time schedule

basis.

I. The system shall monitor camera video and provide alerts for the following malicious acts:
1. Camera masking – attempts to ‘cover up’ the camera view either by painting the lens or
covering the camera fixture with a bag or blanket
2. Blinding – use of a bright light source or laser aimed directly into the camera lens
3. Signal cut – interruption of the camera signal cable
4. Power cut – interruption of AC or DC power to the camera
5. Redirecting or tampering the camera from the area it is monitoring.

J. The System shall:

1. simultaneously record, playback and display live video (Triplex), and shall provide the
capability to include audio.
2. have the ability to record and store images at rates between 1 frame per hour to 25 frames
per second on a per camera basis, dynamically configurable based upon user parameters.
3. have the ability to store the recorded images on Storage Area Network (SAN) and shall not
be limited by partition or drive size.
4. be able to perform multiple archiving per day.
5. have the option to start recording on an event setup by the Operator/administrator.
6. have the option to increase the recording FPS on motion detection, on event detection or
Operator command.
7. have the ability to adjust image resolution to 1.3MP or up to 3MP on a per camera basis.
All cameras shall be able to be recorded at 25 fps but the frame rate and recording duration
shall be individually adjustable for each camera.
8. have the ability to adjust the compression level of the video image data size, to save on
storage size, when needed.
9. allow Operator to select the controlled display monitor by mouse click or touch screen.
10. allow the Operator to switch a camera between live view and playback in less than half of a
second.
11. allow Operator to pause live video.
12. allow Operator to rewind or forward video on a frame-by-frame basis.
13. allow Operator to play video back and forth by using a slider button for ease of video
investigation.
14. allow Operator to continuously play forward and backward a recorded video and increase or
decrease the playback speed.
15. allow the Operator to select time and date for playback and be able to retrieve this video
within less than [5 seconds].
16. allow Operator to digitally zoom in and out of pre-recorded video in paused, playback or live
video mode and adjust the zoomed area up, down, left or right.
17. allow Operator to control PTZ cameras using mouse control.
18. allow Administrator/Operator to write (copy) archived video to CD/DVD, as email
attachment, external hard drive (thumb drive), etc. if allowed by user rights.

2.9 REMOTE WEB ACCESS

A. Remote web access shall provide web server service to allow authorized users to view live video,
playback of recorded video and search the archive to view video using their Internet Explorer
web browser from any PC on the Intranet or Internet. Web browser functionality shall include the
following features based on user profiles:
1. Provide username and password for access control into the System.
2. Define remote user profile and user rights in relation to viewing certain cameras and the use
of PTZ and Output relays. This feature is limited to Administrator level users.
3. Navigate to cameras and sites using an integrated Project System map.
4. Control all PTZ Presets per camera for fast and accurate remote positioning control.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 12 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

5. Access any recorded video of the current day and the archive for past days, search by
time/date or activity/alarm and playback the video as a stream, frame by frame or jump to
motion detected sequences.
6. Provide thumbnail images for each new event for easy search.
7. Provide a view of live video from 4 cameras, simultaneously.

2.10 VIRTUAL MATRIX APPLICATION SOFTWARE

A. Virtual matrix application shall be part of the VSS and shall provide the functionality of a
traditional full cross point matrix CCTV switch without the use of analog cross point switching
circuits. Any camera shall be capable of being viewed on any monitor or one camera on all
monitors without limitations. IP streams from the IP cameras may be decoded to analog where
required for use by typical analog display monitors/devices, but it is the design intent to
display/record video information in its native digital format from the cameras and on Operator
workstations.

B. The virtual matrix software shall support sequential switching on all monitors. Sequencing shall
be a user configurable pattern with dwelling times user selectable per camera. The software shall
also support salvo switching where a selected group of cameras will be simultaneously switched
on to a selected group of monitors.

C. A web browser interface shall be provided allowing viewing and PTZ control from any location
with proper authentication.

D. The software shall provide the Operator with a GUI interface for control and selection of the
cameras on the system. The GUI shall offer the Operator the ability to select a camera for control
and viewing via Map based multiple level floor plans that can be drilled down from an overall
site view through each terminal and terminal level. The Operator shall have the option of using
an expandable device tree for dragging and dropping selected cameras to view and control on
selected monitors. The Operator shall be able to select a monitor by monitor number or by
selecting the specific camera icon on the display and select a camera by camera number or by
selecting the specific monitor icon on the display. Upon camera selection by number, the
software shall allow the ability to bring the map/floor plan of that camera to the Operator’s
desktop. The quantity of maps shall not be limited by the software. The bid shall include all
software and programming time required to implement this feature.

E. Virtual matrix software shall provide user configurable camera and monitor titles of up to 20
characters per instance. All camera titles and text shall be controlled via the VSS software.
System shall also provide up to an additional 20 characters of user configurable alarm text
displayed in red during an alarm event as defined by the Access Control System.

F. Software shall provide for Operator notification on loss of image from an IP camera as an alarm
event. Loss of image shall be interpreted to mean a loss of image due to power failure of a camera,
masking or blinding the camera field of view or loss of communication with the camera.

G. Software shall provide an unlimited number of individually identifiable Operators. Each Operator
shall be by unique user name and password and configured by the system administrators to allow
or restrict access to system features on a per user basis and per feature basis.

H. The software shall provide user configurable partitioning of cameras and monitors to permit only
selected cameras to be viewed on selected monitors by selected Operators. Coordination with
the Employer is required to properly configure the system.

I. Shall provide the Operator with up to 64 presets position per PTZ camera.

J. Shall have the ability to move a PTZ camera to any of the preset positions upon receiving software
command from the Access Control system (or other devices interfaced via RS232). The quantity
of cameras per alarm shall not be limited, and the quantity of alarms that may call a specific

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 13 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

camera or preset shall not be limited. The intent is that different Access Control System alarms
be allowed to call the same or different presets on a specific camera.

K. Shall have the ability to provide PTZ camera tour feature between preset positions.

L. Shall be able to program unlimited number of continuous tours for each camera with each tour
utilizing up to 16 presets in the camera.

M. Shall be able to control the tour sequences using a 24/7 scheduler.

N. Shall be able to resume tour when Operator manual control times out.

O. Shall have the ability to return to a designated preset after a pre-determined period of no Operator
activity or manual commands. Shall have the option not to record while moving between presets
and shall stay in a preset position if motion was detected in the camera field of view at that preset
position, and shall continue touring once motion stopped.

P. Latency between system control (whether manual or software driven) and viewing of camera
movement on system monitors shall not exceed 0.25 seconds
1. Shall display overlay information on each camera window with video time and date, video
status: live, rewind, forward and pause, and display camera name. These features are to be
configurable by the administrator.
2. Shall be able to display incoming live video upon alert using the Matrix Event-driven Push
Live Video with Alert-Live message on the screen.

Q. Software shall have a real-time system clock to display time and date information on selected
monitors. The clock shall be synchronized with an external time server, with the time updates not
to exceed 60 minutes between updates. The time shall be synchronized with the network time.
Coordinate with the Employer for the Network Time Protocol source.

2.11 VIRTUAL MATRIX

A. The Virtual Matrix shall be an IP Network based Virtual Video Matrix capable of display of live,
recorded and playback of digital video images from any camera or the Storage platform on any
IP based monitor or workstation on the network.

B. The Virtual Matrix shall have multiple modes for pushing live video to the Operator workstations:
1. Manual – Operator initiated calling of live video
2. Automatic – Triggered by internal motion detection from the specific camera or another
associated camera.
3. 3rd Party – Triggered by a URL command from another system or serial data exchange via
TCP/IP socket or RS232.

C. The Virtual Matrix shall enable system to issue disconnect of video stream to Operator
workstations.

D. The Virtual Matrix shall be able to communicate and receive image streams from unlimited
number of local and remote Video Servers.

E. The Virtual Matrix shall support cameras using video compression HEVC/H.265 (preferred if
available), H.264 (preferred if HEVC/H.265 is not available), MPEG-4 (preferred if H.264 is not
available), or M-JPEG (not preferred).

2.12 WORKSTATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The PCs or system workstations shall be used for surveillance and alarm viewing as well as for
data storage. The PCs shall be installed in a console

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 14 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Computer Workstation – Type 1

1. Small Form Factor (Maximum dimension 300mm x 90mm x 350mm)
2. Processor: 2.8GHz latest generation of quad core intel i7 processor or AMD Equivalent
3. Memory: 16GB 1666MHz DDR4 SDRAM
4. Disk: 512 GB SSD and 1TB HDD
5. PCI Express 3.0 x16
6. DVDRW Optical Drive or BluRay
7. Minimum 4 USB 3.0 ports
8. 10/100/1000 Ethernet Port
9. Ergonomic 104 keys keyboard
10. 100-240 VAC, 50/60Hz Power Supply.
11. Video Card(s)
a. PCI Express 3.0 x16 compatible
b. 4GB GDDR5 graphics memory
c. HDMI V2.0b connectors supporting 3840 x 2160 resolution per display
d. RoHS, RoHS2 and WEEE compliant, support 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratio
e. Supports configuration of horizontal and vertical orientations.

C. The PC or system workstation and associated peripherals shall be confirmed by relevant

manufacturer/supplier, including but not limited to
1. Display Screens, 24-inch suitable for extended use for CCTV and control room applications.
2. The final monitor configuration and display of cameras will be determined in liaison with
the Employer and may be subject to change.

D. Include a USB or Ethernet Keyboard controller.

E. The exact location of the workstations, and number of monitor at each location, shall be
coordinated with the Employer and shall be reflected on the Shop Drawings.

F. PC’s shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be sourced from a recognized
manufacturer. Purchase of the PC’s shall be delayed until the latest time possible without causing
a delay in the construction schedule to ensure that they will be state-of-the-art, based on the latest
proven technology.

G. The system shall support two (2) three (3) or four (4) display screens per Operator workstation
for live view of cameras, and alarm video monitoring, playback, search, video clips productions,
evidence printout and more (viewer screens). Playback and searching shall not interfere with or
eliminate the continuous and simultaneous view of the live streaming videos.

2.13 VIDEO SERVER REQUIREMENTS

A. The Video Server software shall be a package that shall be installed on a Server running a
database server software platform, and combined with the hardware, shall function as an IP based
digital video surveillance and recording server.

B. The system shall communicate, receive and record video image streams from IP addressable
cameras.

C. Rack Mount Server: the servers shall support as a minimum the following features – subject to
manufacturer’s recommendations for the particular served telecommunications system:
1. Both two and four processors.
2. Intel E5 (or latest and equivalent) processors as well as the 5600, 7500 and 7600 series.
3. High memory densities. As a minimum the blades shall be scalable to 768 GB RAM and
shall support 4, 8, 16 and 32 GB DIMMs System have integrated RAID 0,1 with an on board
RAID controllers.
4. Onboard NIC with dual Gigabit Ethernet ports with TOE 2 x Converged Network Adapters
(10GE) and (FcoE) .

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 15 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

5. Converged network (multiple traffic classes over a lossless Ethernet fabric, thus enabling
consolidation of LAN, SAN, and cluster environments.).

D. The system shall record and communicate simultaneously with mixed format IP cameras and
encoders, if utilized (including M-JPEG, MPEG-4, H.264 and H.265 compression) on the
same server.

E. All System configurations, changes, setups and operation shall be password protected and always
available to the System administrator for access and use.

F. The system shall support an Application Programming Interface (API), and shall provide a
Software Development Kit (SDK), for integration with 3rd party software systems.

G. The system shall support DNS entries for camera naming of IP addresses from network DHCP
server.

H. Minimum requirements of VSS Servers shall be confirmed by relevant manufacturer/supplier.

2.14 STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS

A. The system shall support a wide range of automated video storage options ranging from as little
as a few hours of online storage capacity to keep long-term storage using hard drives, digital tape
or other cost-effective long-term storage media. The system shall be capable of supporting
unlimited video storage capacity by enabling system Operators to periodically remove and
replace hard drives, tape cartridge, or other removable storage media.

B. The system shall allow flexible storage architecture (centralized, local, and remote storage) for
enabling best storage utilization.

C. The system shall provide sufficient storage for all camera recordings for a period of 90, in H.265,
H.264 or MPEG-4 format or better quality compression techniques. The recording frame rate and
resolution must be programmable at user level. It shall be possible to customize the quality of the
video output based on the viewing needs and storing capacity.

D. Recording period shall be coordinated with the Employer, Police and related Operators.

E. The storage system shall be equipped with a database mirroring and distributed video storage
features, which shall allow the system to sequentially distribute recorded video among the
installed hard disks. And therefore, in case of a hard disk failure, the user shall be able to receive
a relatively reduced frame rate, but shall not lose the complete video sequences.

F. Recorded and stored images shall be accessible from any workstation PCs connected directly to
the LAN or via remote connections.

G. The Contractor shall submit design calculations to justify the selection of the hard disk or other
storage media and the capacity and type of the storage library.

H. The Storage shall be designed for high speed, high capacity digital video storage and high
performance playback applications.

I. The Contractor shall accommodate any changes in Specifications from the Authorities Having
Jurisdiction before final approval.

J. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide sufficient storage.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 16 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

K. The Contractor shall provide all supporting calculations including network bandwidth
calculations and all other parameters used in the assessment of Storage requirements - for review
and approval by the Employer.

L. The storage must support redundancy or recording scheme with RAID 6 features.

2.15 LAN INFRASTRUCTURE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. LAN equipment are not part of this Specification; however, in order for the IP Surveillance
system to function properly the LAN infrastructure shall have as a minimum the features listed
below.
1. Protocols: TCP/IP.
2. Traffic Management and Quality of Service Mechanisms.
3. VLAN/VLAN tagging (802.1q) support.
4. Hardware Redundancy.
5. Security Features.
6. Network Resiliency Features.
7. Power: Power over Ethernet support (IEEE 802.3at).

2.16 ALARMS AND EVENTS

A. Overview: For the purpose of these Specifications, an “alarm” is any event that can be received
or detected by an external equipment (access control for example) or internal (failure for example)
and responded to in real time. Many types of events are not “alarms” in the traditional sense of
an immediate problem such as a fire or intruder. An event can be any type of activity that may be
the subject of future investigation and video review. The two basic requirements for an event are
time and location:
1. Time: A signal or data that can be detected or received in real time.
2. Location: A physical location associated with the signal or data that can be related to cameras
and camera presets.

B. All the pictures shall be recorded and stored, continuously or on event.

1. The “operation cameras” output shall be recorded all the time at the resolution of the of the
respective CCTV cameras
2. The “security cameras” output shall be recorded on event with pre and post alarm.

C. Alarm Recording: The system shall be equipped with Alarm Recording function that:
1. Enables the system administrator to define alarm responses including instructions to trigger
recording of specified cameras at specified frame rates and quality settings.
2. Enables system administrator to determine the pre-alarm duration.
3. Record cost-effective low frame rate video during non-alarm periods, and then start
recording at high frame rate (real-time) in response to alarm events.
4. Enables system administrator to determine whether video will be retained on long-term
storage media for each continuous or scheduled recording instruction and automatically
retain video on long-term storage media when video is recorded as part of a defined response
to an alarm event.

D. Tasks Related to Alarms: The system shall be able to perform the following tasks:
1. Execute video image analysis algorithms (video sensor), including activity detection and
video loss detection and generate alarm messages.
2. Receive signals from alarm inputs and generate alarm messages.
3. Send alarm messages to the server or program that manages alarm responses.
4. Process alarm response instructions, change recording modes and control alarm relay
outputs.
5. Forward alarms from a remote node to a central alarm monitoring site.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 17 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

6. Motion detection feature shall be provided for fixed cameras looking at sensitive areas, in
order to initiate alarm when unauthorized movement is detected. The Contractor shall
coordinate and check precise location.

E. Event recording mode shall be used in relation with the Security System for access controlled
doors.

F. The system shall perform the following tasks in response to requests from one or more
workstations:
1. Supply one or more live video streams.
2. Enable one or more users to playback previously recorded video, including “instant replay”
of video recorded within the last few seconds.

2.17 PROPOSED SOLUTION

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Data Transmission:
1. The data transmission rate between the workstations and the servers shall be bi-directional
using TCP/IP VLAN Network.
2. Coordinate IP addressing, Ethernet switch port counts and assignments, long-term storage
requirements and bandwidth utilization with the Contractor providing and configuring a
dedicated security VLAN.

2.18 NETWORK EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

2.19 INTEGRATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The IP Surveillance System shall be integrated and interfaced to the following systems:
1. The integration with the Storage devices shall allow the storage of CCTV video for all the
cameras for the required storage duration continuously.
2. Fire Alarm System
a. The interface with the Fire Alarm System shall allow the control and the local
surveillance of each fire alarm zone. The system shall be able to display images as pop
up window from the zone in alarm on the screen of the Fire Alarm System Operator.
The interface shall be compliant with applicable life safety and fire alarm requirements.
b. This interface shall be implemented given the following:
1) The Access Control interface with the Fire Alarm System.
2) Integration of Security Systems (including Access Control) with the VSS (CCTV
system).
3. Structured Cabling Network and Data Communications Network
a. The system shall be interfaced with the Structured Cabling Network and the Data
Communications Network to allow the communication between the Security and Access
Control System, workstations, recording and storage servers, Network Management
System, and all other interfaced systems through the network backbone.
4. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
a. All CCTV equipment shall be powered by UPS. Coordinate with the Electrical
Contractor to ensure UPS power supply for CCTV equipment.
b. A UPS failure shall be communicated to the CCTV workstations.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 18 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.20 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

2.21 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

2.22 CONDUITS, TRUNKING, ENCLOSURES AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Additional Installation Requirements:

1. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb.
2. Install cameras with 2134-mm- (84-inch-) minimum clear space below cameras and their
mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance.
3. Set pan unit and pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of
view required for camera. Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust.
4. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches, arranged to
detect unauthorized entry into system-component enclosures and mounted in self-protected,
inconspicuous positions.
6. Ensure that CCTV columns/poles are free of any source of vibration before installing the
cameras.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

B. Tests and Inspections – Additional Requirements:

1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and
that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
2. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify
that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels,
including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video-surveillance equipment for
acceptance and operational testing as follows:
a. Prepare equipment list described in "Submittals" Article.
b. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses.
c. Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime
lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image.
Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter.
d. Set and name all preset positions; consult Employer's personnel.
e. Set sensitivity of motion detection.
f. Connect and verify responses to alarms.
g. Verify operation of control-station equipment.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 19 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Clean video-surveillance-system components, including camera-housing windows, lenses, and

monitor screens.

3.4 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS

A. When requested within 12 months of date of System Taking Over, provide on-site assistance in
adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during
other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Refer to Division 27, Section “Common Clauses for IT & Security Systems”.

END OF SECTION 282000

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 282000 - Page 20 of 20

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a microprocessor based, non-coded, addressable fire alarm system with manual
and automatic alarm initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and
multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only including but not limited to:

1. Fire-alarm control panels.

2. Manual fire-alarm stations.
3. System smoke detectors.
4. Heat detectors.
5. Notification appliances.
6. Device guards.
7. Addressable interface devices.
8. Network communications.
9. System printer.

B. Section includes Fire Alarm System interface with fire suppression systems, Emergency Lighting
System, etc.. These interfaces shall be hardwired where required by code.

C. Related Sections:
1. Section 087111 - Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products).
2. Section 260500 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 260543 - Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 271005 – Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA).
5. Section 271055 - Identification for Communications Systems (TIA).
6. Section 271305 - Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).
7. Section 271505 - Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a
specific edition date.

B. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in
the text by basic designation only.

C. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s

instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean reference to the latest printed
edition of each.

D. Conflicts

1. Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which material or

construction methods called for is less than minimum requirement of the reference

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 1 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

standards, immediately inform the Engineer in writing. Consequent to Engineer's approval,

supply the materials and perform the work as though called for to minimum code
standards.

E. Codes and Standards: System design, operation, installation and workmanship shall comply with
the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references:

1. Local regulations and codes.

a. UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice.

2. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.

3. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.

F. Codes and Standards: System components shall comply with the applicable requirements and
standards addressed within the following references:

1. UL 38: Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems

2. UL 217: Single and Multiple Station Smoke Alarms
3. UL 228: Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling systems.
4. UL 268: Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm System
5. UL 268A: Smoke Detectors for Duct Application
6. UL 464: Audible Signal Appliances
7. UL 521: Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
8. UL 632: Electrically-Actuated Transmitters
9. UL 864: Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems
10. UL 1887: Safety Fire Test of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible Flame and Smoke
Characteristics
11. UL 1971: Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired
12. NFPA 1221: Standard for the Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Emergency Services
Communications Systems
13. 47 CFR 90

G. System components, design, operation, installation and workmanship shall comply with the
applicable local regulations and code requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction including
the Civil Defense or AHJ. These shall have precedence over other codes and standards indicated,
unless otherwise approved by the Employer, in writing.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Definitions

1. Alarm Verification Feature: A feature of automatic fire detection and alarm systems to
reduce unwanted alarms wherein smoke detectors report alarm conditions for a minimum
period of time, or confirm alarm conditions within a given time period after being reset, in
order to be accepted as a valid alarm initiation signal.

2. A “/ “used throughout the text between two consecutive words is equivalent to and shall be
used interchangeably with “and “.

3. Alarm: A warning of fire danger.

4. Signal: A status indication communicated by electrical or other means.

a. Alarm Signal: A signal indicating an emergency that requires immediate action,

such as a signal indicative of fire.
b. Evacuation Signal: A distinctive signal intended to be recognized by the occupants
as requiring evacuation of the building.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 2 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

c. Fire Alarm Signal: A signal initiated by a fire alarm-initiating device such as a

manual fire alarm box, automatic fire detector, water-flow switch, or other device in
which activation is indicative of the presence of a fire.
d. Supervisory Signal: A signal indicating the need for action in connection with the
supervision of the fire suppression systems or equipment, or the maintenance
features of related systems.
e. Trouble Signal: A signal initiated by the fire alarm system or device indicative of a
fault in a monitored circuit or component.

5. Conveying systems: this includes horizontal and vertical transportation systems (HVTS)
such as elevators, moving walks, escalators and dumbwaiters.

6. Positive Alarm Sequence. An automatic sequence that results in an alarm signal, even when
manually delayed for investigation, unless the system is reset. It provides a timed delay of a
general alarm signal in a building and at a supervising station. This gives a trained
responder up to 3 minutes to investigate the cause of an alarm signal. The time limits to
acknowledge the alarm signal and reset the system are designed to assure all alarm system
functions are actuated in the event personnel are not available to acknowledge, investigate
and reset the alarm. A positive alarm sequence feature can only be used with the specific
approval of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

B. Abbreviations

1. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

2. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
3. FAS: Fire Alarm System.
4. FCC: Fire command center.
5. GUI: Graphical User Interface
6. HLI: High Level Interface.
7. LED: Light-emitting diode.
8. MFACP: Main Fire Alarm Control Panel.
9. PA / PAS Public Address System.
10. PC: Personal computer.
11. UL: Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1.5 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide the following:

1. MFACP/FACP, manual stations, automatic fire detectors, notification appliances, wiring,

wire-ways and all accessories to cover the missing coverage areas of the existing fire alarm
system.
2. Remote annunciator(s).
3. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.
4. System printer.
5. Interface with other building services systems and with the BMS if needed

1.6 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Employer and other Contractors for interfaces with the
existing systems. The Contractor shall provide in the shop drawings the final solution for those
interfaces for Engineer’s review and approval.

B. Fire alarm zoning shall be coordinated with Architectural Fire Zoning, HVAC, smoke manage-
ment, and fire-fighting systems.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 3 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

C. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Building Services Contractors as specified in this
Specification Section and the relevant system Specifications.

1. All controls in case of fire shall remain with the fire alarm system in accordance with the
applicable NFPA codes.

1.7 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.
3. Name and address of the manufacturer and country of origin of the product.
4. Name and address of the authorized local representative and/or dealer.
5. Compliance statement to specification, with necessary supporting documents.
6. Complete catalog pages of proposed equipment.
7. Detectors characteristic curves of coverage area against ceiling height and air movement
speed.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the

"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes,
indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field
wiring.
4. Basic system architecture indicating tie-in points with existing services.
5. Detail assembly and support requirements.
6. Include voltage drop and cable sizing calculations for notification-appliance circuits.
7. Include battery-size calculations.
8. Include input/output (Cause/Effect) matrix. Show in a matrix format, the effect of every
initiating device on the MFACP/FACP, notification devices, system peripherals, and
auxiliary systems interfaced with it.
9. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested
as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72 (system
endorsement).
10. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.
11. Verify that each duct detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature,
and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
12. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances
pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector.
13. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,
drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes,
detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.
b. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm and
override by firefighters' control system.
c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

14. Include alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic,
and single-line connection diagram.
15. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.
16. Include coordination drawings with other systems that interface with the fire alarm system
as listed under Article “Scope Of Work” of this Specification.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 4 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

17. Coordination drawings on reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale shall include, but not
limited to fire alarm detectors and notification appliances, light fixtures, PAS speakers,
sprinkler heads, AC grills, access panels etc.

C. Sound Levels: Measure and submit audible sound levels. Verify that 15 decibels (dB) above
ambient noise levels or 5 dB above the maximum sound level that occurs at the location for 60
seconds or more, but not greater than 120 dB, are achieved.

D. System Graphics: Provide system schematics in AutoCAD format indicating the location of
monitoring and control points. Coordinate with the BMS Contractor.

E. Submit suitably framed Fire Zone drawings of proper size to be located in the Control room.

F. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction prior to submitting them to

Engineer.

a. In addition to distribution requirements for Submittals specified in Division 01

Section "Submittal Procedures", prepare an identical submission to authorities
having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to
depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make
clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from
Authorities Having Jurisdiction, submit them to the Engineer for review.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.

b. Licensed or certified by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

G. For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above,
indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector,
ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the
device.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of
detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals
and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.
3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.

H. Coordination Drawings:

1. Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating installation of smoke
detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each duct smoke detector
installation:
a. Size and location of supply and return ducts, including lining.
b. Size and location of piping.
c. Size and arrangement of structural elements.
d. Size and location of duct smoke detector, including air-sampling elements.
2. Location of detectors and notification devices in ceilings and reflected ceilings.
3. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances
pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector.

I. Contractor shall submit Manufacturer’s technical validation and endorsement of the design
documentation and implementation.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 5 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and Installer/Contractor as outlined in “QUALITY

ASSURANCE” article.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates

1. For fire alarm control Panel, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

a. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation.
b. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
c. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Signed warranty: As specified.

1.9 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Division 01, Section "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
include the following and deliver copies to Authorities Having Jurisdiction:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
chapter in NFPA 72.
b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of
Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the
"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.
c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment.
Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of
origination and termination points.
d. Riser diagram.
e. Device addresses. Coordinate with final system programming and labeling.
f. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including
method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of
operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.
Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
g. Record copy of site-specific software.
h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:
1) Equipment tested.
2) Frequency of testing of installed components.
3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.
4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.

j. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire alarm control panel and each
annunciator panel.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 6 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials and equipment shall comply with applicable local regulations and code requirements of
Authorities Having Jurisdiction. These shall have precedence over other codes and standards
indicated, unless otherwise approved by the Employer, in writing.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is an authorized and certified representative

of the fire alarm system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for
this Project.

1. Experience: Minimum 5 years.

2. Demonstrate that Installer has satisfactorily completed at least 2 system installations
similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and with a record of
successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through a single source from a single
manufacturer.

E. Certification

1. All components of the fire alarm system including system hardware and software shall be
UL listed and Approved and Registered by the Civil Defense Material Approval
Department.
2. The entire fire alarm system including integration arrangement with the BMS, the Access
Control, PAS and other Building Services Systems shall be UL listed and suitable for life
safety and fire alarm applications.

A. Equipment Country of Origin

1. Equipment Country of Origin (manufacturing country) shall be indicated in the proposal at

time of bid submission.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Division 01, Section “Product Requirements”.

1.12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project environmental

conditions specified under Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”
encountered at the installed location without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
operating capability.

B. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed
in service to protect the facility during construction.

C. Power Supply

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 7 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Power supply for all products shall be supplied or derived from the voltage system
described below, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
2. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution system (AC voltage / No. of
Phases / Frequency / Earthing system) shall be as per local country standard. For details,
refer to Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty

1. The Fire Alarm System (comprising any associated hardware and software) shall be
warranted by the Manufacturer to be free from defects in equipment, software and
workmanship for a period defined below in paragraph “Warranty Period”.
2. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the Manufacturer and the
Installer agreeing to replace system devices and equipment that fail in materials or
workmanship and to provide software patch support and updates within specified warranty
period.
3. To maintain the manufacturer’s warranties, equipment shall be installed, commissioned and
serviced by those installers authorized by said manufacturer to perform those duties. If the
Contractor is not authorized, by the said manufacturer, it is his sole responsibility to make
the appropriate arrangements and bear all cost and consequences thereof.
4. All manufacturers’ equipment warranties shall be activated in the Employer’s name and
shall commence on the date indicated in paragraph “Warranty Period” below.

B. Experimental Period

1. There shall be an Experimental Period during which the Contractor shall undertake
supervision and responsibility for operation of the Fire Alarm System under actual site
conditions. If any malfunction or degradation in the performance is noted on the system
during this period, it shall be attended to immediately.
2. During this period, the Contractor shall fully demonstrate the system performance under
actual operation conditions. This demonstration is to confirm, to the satisfaction of the
Employer / Engineer that the Fire Alarm System is free of remarks and is ready for taking
over.
3. The Experimental Period shall extend over one month(s) and shall start following the
certification by the Engineer of the successful testing and commissioning of the system.
The Experimental Period shall, each time a malfunction is detected, be extended by one
month(s) starting from the certification by the Engineer of the successful testing of the
system following the rectification of the malfunction.

C. Taking Over of the System

1. The system shall be considered ready for taking over by the Employer following:
a. The expiry, with no malfunctions being detected during the last one month(s), of the
Experimental Period (as may be extended), and
b. The submission by the Contractor, and approval by the Engineer, of the documents
and information required from the Contractor for the use, occupation and
maintenance of the system in accordance with the Contract (updated as necessary to
reflect any rectification(s) introduced during the Experimental Period).

D. Warranty Period

1. The Contractor shall include a statement of warranty on the entire system and on the
individual pieces of equipment for two years from the date of taking over of the system.
2. During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall undertake Maintenance actions as defined
in the “MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD” Article
below.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 8 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. During the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall provide all equipment, material, software
and labor needed to replace or repair defective products without any additional cost to the
Contract.
4. Warranty period shall be revised in accordance with Division 01, Section “Product
Requirements” depending on Equipment Country of Origin.

1.14 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at system Taking Over, maintenance service shall include
full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization.

B. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,

lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be
manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the
"Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection,
Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

C. During the Warranty Period, Manufacturer or factory-authorized agency shall maintain a service
center capable of providing spare parts and emergency maintenance and repairs for the overall
system at Project site 7 days a week and 24 hours a day. Competent personnel shall be dispatched
to rectify system failures at any time during the day or night when being called on by the
Employer.

D. The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to the Employer immediately following every
call out, indicating the time of call out visit, cause, remedial action taken and the time that the
service was restored.

E. A Maintenance Manpower Plan shall demonstrate the Contractor’s committed resource level
available for all types of activities to be carried out within the Warranty Period. Such a plan shall
be submitted for Approval six months before commencement of the Warranty Period.

F. The Contractor’s response time, during the Warranty Period, shall not exceed 1 hour. The
response time is defined as the time that elapses between the reporting of a fault and the
maintenance personnel arriving at where the faulty equipment is located.

G. During the Warranty Period, the MTTR shall not exceed 30 minutes. The MTTR shall include the
diagnostic time, active repair/replacement time and the adjustment/testing time on site, but shall
exclude the response time.

H. During the Warranty Period, the monthly average of the Repair Time shall be lower than or equal
to 6 minutes for each device. This performance will be monitored.

I. The Contractor shall provide at least four inspection visits at six-month interval during the
Warranty Period. The Contractor shall submit a Service-Call Report to be sent to the Employer
immediately following every inspection visit, indicating the time of call out visit, cause, remedial
action taken – if any - and the time that the service was restored.

J. The Contractor shall be responsible to clear away from the Site all surplus materials, rubbish,
temporary works of every kind and leave the whole of the Site and installation clean and in a
workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of the Employer, upon completion of each item of the
repair, and maintenance works.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 9 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

K. Software Service Agreement

1. Technical Support: Beginning at Taking Over, service agreement shall include software
support for two years.
2. Upgrade Service: At Taking Over, update software to latest version. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Taking Over.
Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using
software.

a. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Employer to schedule access to system

and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

1.15 SPARE PARTS AND EXTRA MATERIAL

A. Contractor shall handover manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all major components in
the system for two years fault-free operation.

B. However furnish the following extra materials, as a minimum, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents, irrespective of Manufacturer’s recommendation:

1. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than
one unit.
2. Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer
than one unit of each type.
3. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 1 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer
than one unit of each type.
4. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamper-proofed components.
5. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
6. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with
compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.
7. Linear heat detectors: Quantity equal to 2 of amount installed but no fewer than 100m.
8. Manual stations: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer
than one unit of each type.
9. Printer paper: 10 packets.
10. FACP LCD display screen/module: 5 percent with a minimum of one piece.
11. Loop cards: 2 percent with a minimum of one piece.
12. FACP power supply: 5 percent with a minimum of two.

C. The manufacturer shall guarantee the flow and availability of the spare parts without a major
design change for at least ten years’ period from date of System Acceptance by the Employer.

D. Handover manufacturer’s test equipment and tools required for normal routine inspection and
maintenance and testing of system components as appropriate for equipment supplied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers of Fire Alarm System: Subject to compliance with requirements,

available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are
not limited to, the following:

1. Honeywell

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 10 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Edwards.

3. Notifier(USA)

4. Siemens (Germany)

2.2 SEISMIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Fire alarm control panel and raceways shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and as per the local authorities codes
and regulations.

1. The term "withstand" means "the panel will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the panel will be fully
operational after the seismic event."

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Control of System: By the MFACP/FACP.

B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuit, short circuit, and ground fault
of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits. System shall
detect ground fault by panel, loop circuit, and group of devices.

C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from one
zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An alarm
signal has the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level
priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the
lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble
signals regardless of priority or order received.

D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other zones.

E. System Reset: All zones are manually re-settable from the MFACP/FACP after initiating devices
are restored to normal.

F. System shall continually monitor any changes in the sensitivity of individual smoke or heat
sensors due to environmental effects.

G. All operations shall be according to the approved Cause & Effect Matrix.

H. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring, including peer-to-peer
loop, and circuit arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or
wire-to-wire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in Initiating-
Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits.

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class A for initiating-devices and notification-
appliance circuits; NFPA 72, Class X for signaling-line circuits.

2. Pathway Survivability: NFPA 72 Level 2.

3. Install no more than 100 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit.

4. Serial Interfaces: type and quantity as recommended by manufacturer to suit Project

requirements for interface with:

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 11 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

a. Panel.
b. Remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-interface module (printer port).
c. PC configuration.

5. Provide addressable fault isolator circuit modules not less than one isolator for a group of
20 devices. The module shall be capable of isolating and removing a fault from a Class A
data circuit while allowing the remaining data loop to continue operating.

I. Loss of primary power at the MFACP/FACP initiates a trouble signal at the MFACP/FACP. The
MFACP/FACP indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on the secondary power supply.

J. Source Limitations for Fire alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with,
and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that
all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

K. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations.
2. Smoke detectors.
3. Laser detectors.
4. Projected beam detectors
5. Multi-criteria detectors.
6. Heat detectors.
7. Duct smoke detectors.

L. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions if applicable:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire alarm control panel.
3. Flashing of the device location-indicating-light for the device that has operated
4. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
5. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
6. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm mode in
accordance with Mechanical Specifications.
8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management):
a. Activate smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
b. Operate smoke curtains.

9. Activate pre-action sprinkler system (if applicable).

10. Activate emergency lighting control.
11. Record events in the system memory.
12. Record events by the system printer.
13. Indicate device in alarm on the graphic annunciator.
14. Transmit system status to building management system (BMS).

M. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances.

2. Flashing of the device location-indicating-light for the device that has operated.
3. Identify specific device initiating the event at MFACP/FACP.
4. Record the event in system memory.
5. Record the event on system printer.
6. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote
alarm receiving station.
7. Transmit system status to building management system (BMS).
8. Display system status on graphic annunciator.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 12 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

N. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the MFACP/FACP.

1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activate an

"alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals, from other devices or zones, shall reactivate notification
appliances, until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating do not return to normal and system reset switch is operated,
notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
4. When fire alarm system is reset, all auxiliary systems shall be released from fire mode.

A. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire alarm control
panel.
2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire alarm control panel and
detector.
3. Record events by the system printer.
4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
5. Cancel fire alarm control panel indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

B. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72.
2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be a
520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5
dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at
the pillow.
3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the
same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

C. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke-
barrier walls shall be connected to fire alarm system.

D. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke
detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those
settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes
in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment
schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

E. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and
trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

F. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify
zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and
time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print
system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands
initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system
and a historical log of events.

G. Power Supply: Refer to Article “System Power Supply” of this Specification Section.

H. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass
cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under
normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

I. System shall support English language as coordinated with the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 13 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

J. Communication of Events(if applicable): On receipt of the signal, communicate alarm,

supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal
(alarm, supervisory, or trouble), and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from
all other indications. Also communicate system-reset event, including the same information for
device, location, date, and time.

K. If applicable, The Fire Alarm System shall control directly the HVAC units in accordance with the
approved Cause and Effect Matrix via hardwired interlocks.

L. The Fire Alarm System shall carry out handshaking (if applicable) with the smoke management
exhaust fans by receiving a feedback on the fire alarm system to confirm that the requested action
has taken place, otherwise a trouble signal shall be indicated and reported on the corresponding
firefighter’s smoke control station (FSCS).

M. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain English language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and
trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or supervisory devices originating
the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system commands,
programming information, and data from the system's historical memory.

N. System shall be able to report a map of all initiating devices connected to the system for
confirmation of As-Built drawings, and it shall show physical wiring of T-type by device type and
number. Other proposed alternatives shall be considered.

O. Expansion Capability: Increase number of devices in the future by 25 percent above those
indicated without adding any internal or external components or cable conductors.

2.4 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (MFACP) and FACP

A. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange interior components so operations required for testing
or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more
than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with matching modular unit
enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter space for field wiring and
interconnecting panels. MFACP shall be of modular design and shall not have single point of
failure.

1. Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate with
lettering not less than 25 mm high. Identify individual components and modules within
cabinets with permanent labels.
2. Mounting: Surface.
3. Comply with UL 864.

B. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the MFACP/FACP. Alarm-
initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for
module replacement is unacceptable.

C. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire alarm
systems.

D. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound.

E. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the alarm
or trouble condition still exists.

F. History log: The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in
chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. A minimum of 1200
chronological events shall be provided.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 14 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

G. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire alarm control panel and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands.

H. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire alarm control panel and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three line(s) of 80 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of
smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

I. Interface with other systems: Provide standard software protocol and required hardware to
communicate and interface all information to the CCTV PAS, etc. as detailed in this Specification
and in the Specifications of the interfaced systems.

J. Provide necessary hardware provisions to be connected to SCADA/PLC system (If applicable)

according to the requirements indicated in the Mechanical-Instrumentation and Control ( I&C)
Drawings

2.5 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire Alarm Stations (Boxes): finished in red with molded,
raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation;
and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide
manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with
integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to fire alarm control panel.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to
permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-
powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.
4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
5. Comply with UL 38.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire alarm control panel.
4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a
twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for
connection to building wiring.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 15 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore

them to normal operation.
6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on
status.
7. Comply with UL 268.
8. Detector shall be addressed through soft-addressing mechanism.
9. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type,
individually monitored at fire alarm control panel for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm
condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire alarm control panel.

a. Multi-sensor: Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and

heat-detection units shall be selectable at fire alarm control panel for 8 or 11 deg C
(15 or 20 deg F) per minute.
b. Multi-sensor: Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and
heat-detection units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable
at fire alarm control panel to operate at 57 or 68 deg C (135 or 155 deg F).
c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire alarm control panel and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire alarm control panel, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type.

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire alarm control panel and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2. An operator at fire alarm control panel, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.
b. Device type.
c. Present average value.
d. Present sensitivity selected.
e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: IP 66; listed for use with the supplied detector for
smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.
4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific
duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
7. Comply with UL 268A.

8.

2.7 MULTICRITERIA DETECTORS

A. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 16 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble)
to fire alarm control panel.

C. Automatically adjusts its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms.
The detector shall send trouble alarm if it is incapable of compensating for existing conditions.

D. Test button tests all sensors in the detector.

E. An operator at fire alarm control panel, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:

1. Primary status.
2. Device type.
3. Present sensitivity selected.
4. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

F. Sensors: The detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements including a smoke sensor, a
carbon monoxide sensor, an infrared sensor, and a heat sensor.

1. Smoke sensor shall be photoelectric type as described in "System Smoke Detectors"

Article.
2. Carbon monoxide sensor shall be as described in "Carbon Monoxide Detectors" Article.
3. Heat sensor shall be as described in "Heat Detectors" Article.
4. Each sensor shall be separately listed according to requirements for its detector type.

2.8 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors:

1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.
2. Comply with UL 521.
3. Detector shall be addressed through soft-addressing mechanism

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57 deg C (135 deg F)
or a rate of rise that exceeds 8 deg C (15 deg F) per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire alarm control panel.

C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 88 deg C (190 deg F).

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire alarm control panel.

A. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: consisting of detector cable and control unit

1. Analog Type: Detector Cable: Shall be flexible in installation and recoverable after
operation. It shall have high sensitivity to small temperature variations and shall monitor
the precise point of risk. The analog sensor shall consist of a 4-core cable. Two of the four
color-coded conductors shall be insulated with a negative temperature coefficient material.
The other two conductors shall have normal PVC insulation. The cores shall be twisted
together and protected by an outer sheath of high temperature, flame-retardant PVC
insulation. The analogue sensor senses temperature variations by continuously monitoring

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 17 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

the resistance such that a change in temperature produces a relative change in resistance
between the two loops within the sensor cable.

2. Control Panel: Microprocessor controlled that can automatically detect the length and the
ambient temperature of the attached sensor cable. The control unit shall continuously
monitor the sensor cable and shall have the following minimum features:
a. Several programmable levels
b. Short circuit monitoring of analog type sensor cable.
c. Open circuit monitoring of analog and digital type sensor cable.
d. History and event log storage that can be downloaded using a PC.
e. Relay outputs for alarms and faults.
f. Detecting hot spots.
g. Providing advanced notification of temperature increase.

3. Signals to the MFACP/FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the
MFACP/FACP as a composite "trouble" signal.

4. Provide Addressable Monitoring modules for monitoring the Linear Heat Detection system
Zone and provide two-way communication with MFACP/FACP. One module shall be used
for each zone to report Alarm information to MFACP/FACP.

2.9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal

circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for
system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting

assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system
connections.

B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind the bell. When operating, bells provide a sound-pressure level of 94 dB,
measured 1 m from the bell. 254-mm (10-inch) size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are
weatherproof where indicated.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate
lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 25-mm- (1-
inch-) high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. (S1=30cd; S2=75cd; S3=110cd)

2. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific
strobe.
3. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
4. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined
with guards in place.
5. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
6. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
7. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.
8. Comply with UL 1971.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 18 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.10 FIRE ALARM NETWORK

A. Connect to civil defense through telephony network of the building

B. The network reporting terminal (GUI) shall form part of the fire alarm network, as shown on the
drawings, with all information from the MFACP/FACP relayed to this workstation. Provide one
GUI in the Control room for monitoring and control of fire alarm system.

C. If Applicable, the fire alarm system Contractor shall provide the appropriate zoning and drawings
to the BMS Contractor in AutoCAD format for display at the BMS GUI. The graphics shall
indicate the zones to which all monitored points belong. Refer to Division 23 Section “Building
Management System (BMS)” for details:

1. Alarm messages sent to the BMS shall carry, at minimum, the following information:
a. Time and date.
b. Type and origin.
c. Description of affected alarm location/zone.
d. Counter-action to be taken.

2. Graphical Information: The GUI, to be developed by others, shall include the ability to
display system information in a graphical (floor plan and elevations) form. The fire alarm
system Contractor shall provide all necessary graphics and communicate all necessary
points to the BMS to achieve, at minimum, the following:
a. Each view of the facility, created in a CAD environment, shall include icons created
for intelligent devices. Each device in the graphic display shall support a text memo
file where pertinent information about the fire alarm zone location may be stored.
The fire alarm system Contractor shall provide this information to the BMS
Contractor.
b. Graphics presentation shall have a minimum of 4 hierarchical levels. Provide, at
minimum, the following hierarchical levels in AutoCAD format to the BMS
Contractor:
1) Area overview.
2) Building overview.
3) Floor overview.
4) Room overview.

D. Network Media (if applicable): The network shall communicate via wire or fiber optic medium.
The network shall also support the use of both copper wire and fiber optic in the same network
(hybrid network). Contractor to properly select and install either type of cable depending on the
distances between nodes and as recommended by manufacturers, to ensure proper system
operation. The network shall include a fail-safe means of isolating the nodes in the unlikely event
of complete power loss to a node. The fail safe design shall allow the network communications
signal to bypass the failed node, which allows the continuation of normal communications activity
if specified wiring distances are maintained.
1. Network Cards: Provide cards in all FACPs and at the MFACP to enable a loop data
network. Cards shall support twisted pair copper or fiber optic cables depending on
distance limitations and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. System application programs shall be able to access the system software of FACP’s from any
single point on the newly installed network, for the purpose of downloading and uploading.

F. Provide integration gateway using BACnet or Modbus for connection to building management
system (BMS).

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 19 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2.11 SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY

A. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from Project AC mains power supply service and a power-
supply module in the MFACP/FACP. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines,
trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-
V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 50 percent of the power-
supply module rating.

B. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic
transfer switch in the MFACP/FACP.

1. Batteries: Vented, wet-cell pocket, plate nickel cadmium.

2. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide
capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full
charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within 4
hours. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision.
3. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of
signals or status indications when normal power fails.
4. Capacity: 24 hours under standby and 1/2 hour under full alarm load conditions at the end
of the 24 hours.
5. Magnetic door holders shall not be served by emergency power. Magnetic door holders
shall be released when normal power fails.

C. Remote power supply for devices is not recommended. However, if provided under inevitable
circumstances, the remote power supply shall be fully supervised by the control panel and backed-
up by battery as part of system power supply supervision.

2.12 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module.

2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.
3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices
for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to any device requiring activation.

1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.

2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for
field wiring.

D. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices.

2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service (if applicable).

2.13 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER (DACT)

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 20 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire alarm
control panel and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a
remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If
service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local
trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm
receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service
restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate
the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the
following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.

2. Programming device.
3. LED display.
4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.
5. Communications failure with the central station or fire alarm control panel.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.

2. Address of the supervisory signal.
3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.
4. Loss of ac supply.
5. Loss of power.
6. Low battery.
7. Abnormal test signal.
8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

G. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall comply with UL 632.

2.14 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Printer shall be listed and labeled as an integral part of fire alarm system.

2.15 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or
other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer.

2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

2.16 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations and the following Specifications Sections – as

applicable to power, control and data signal transmission cables:

1. Division 27 Section “Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA).”

2. Division 27 Section “Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA).”

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 21 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Fire Resistant Cables: As per adopted Standards for the Project for life safety installations.

1. Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR4 on the drawings, similar to

Prysmian - Type FP Plus, or approved equal) : Multi core plain annealed copper
conductors to IEC 60228 (in sizes up to 4 mm2), fire resistant insulation,
galvanized steel wire armored, category CWZ to BS 6387, PH 120 classified to BS
EN 50200, and 120 minutes rating when tested in accordance with BS 8434-2 and
complying with BS EN 50363, laminated aluminum screen bonded to the sheath
and LS0H composite sheath with tinned earth continuity conductor/drain wire to
IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC
60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame retardant properties. Cable shall be rated
300/500 V, capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor
temperature of 70 deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited
and marked by embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall be used for fire alarm,
voice evacuation installations, emergency voice communication systems, branch
circuits in central battery system and other loads requiring category 2&3 circuits in
accordance with BS 8519.

C. Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in DOT – Standard Construction

Specifications – First edition 2014

2.17 CONDUITS, TRUNKING AND FITTINGS

A. Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated, equipment shall be designed to mount in a
19-inch (483-mm) housing complying with ECA TIA/ECA-310-E and Division 27 Section
“Communications Equipment Room Fittings (TIA)”.

B. General Requirements for Conduits, Trunking, Boxes and Similar Fittings:

1. Comply with the following:

a. Division 26 section “Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems”.
b. DOT – Standard Construction Specifications – First edition 2014

2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet
locations and shall carry the appropriate Degree of Protection (IP) as per IEC 60529 and
Degree of Mechanical Shock Protection (IK) as per IEC 62262.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Connect the MFACP/FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.

B. Manual Stations: Mount semi flush in recessed back boxes.

C. The center point of a manual pull station should be mounted at 1200mm from floor level.

D. If Applicable-Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler
valve station required to be supervised.

E. Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 100 mm from a sidewall to the near edge. For
exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings,
install not more than 9 m apart in any direction.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 22 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

F. Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 100 mm, but not more than 300 mm, below the ceiling.

G. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Locate detectors not closer than 910 mm (36 inches) from
air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

H. The selection and placement of smoke detectors shall take into account the performance
characteristics of the detector and the characteristics of areas into which the detectors are to be
installed to prevent nuisance alarms or improper operation after installation. Smoke detectors
shall not be installed in areas where air velocity is greater than 1.5m/sec, and shall not be located
in a direct airflow. If siting of detectors in such areas is unavoidable, use detectors specifically
designed for use in such conditions.

I. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and
humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
2. Install sampling tubes so that they extend the full width of the duct.

J. Audible Alarm Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on
flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.
Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location into a single unit.

K. Visible Alarm Devices: Install at least 150 mm below the ceiling.

L. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

M. MFACP/FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the finished
floor.

N. Annunciator: Install with the top of the panel not more than 1800 mm above the finished floor.

O. The center point of a fire fighter telephone should be mounted at 1200mm from floor level.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Sections:

1. “Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems”.

B. Comply with Division 27 Sections:

1. “Common Clauses for Structured Cabling (TIA)”.

2. “Communications Backbone Cabling (TIA)”.
3. “Communications Horizontal Cabling (TIA)”.

C. Conceal fire alarm system wiring in raceway.

1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall
be installed in a dedicated raceway system.
2. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated
with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and
back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with
the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 23 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type
terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors in red differently from the normal building power
wiring. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. No joints are allowed in the fire alarm cabling.

H. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in
close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not
prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Install framed instructions and zone layout in a location visible from the MFACP/FACP.

C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."

D. Fire alarm zone numbering scheme shall be in numbers not letters reflecting the floor number.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire alarm control panel and associated circuits; Install a ground wire from main service
ground to fire alarm control panel.

B. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions to
eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-
mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory trained and authorized service representative to
inspect field-assembled components and connections and to supervise installation, pre-testing,
testing, and adjustment of the system. Report results in writing.

B. Pre-testing: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete pre-
testing. Determine, through pre-testing, the compliance of the system with requirements of the
Drawings and Specification. Correct deficiencies observed in pre-testing. Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory performance and
conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.

C. Report of Pre-testing: After pre-testing is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is
complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.

D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready for
final acceptance testing.

E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum
required tests are as follows:

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 24 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on Record (As-
Built) Drawings.
4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's
operation and maintenance manual.
5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit
conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating
and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring
used.
6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the
control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and
maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at
each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all
communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices
required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights,
displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications.
8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system
is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.

F. Re-testing: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest works affected by such
deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets specified requirements and
complies with applicable standards.

G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test
results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of tests.

H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.

I. Contractor shall be responsible to replace and make operational all damaged

equipment/accessories, if any, which are part of existing, while connecting to existing system.

J. Experimental Period: as described under “WARRANTY” Article. Demonstrate successful

operation to confirm, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that the system is free of remarks and is
ready for taking-over.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and
marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS

A. When requested within 12 months of date of Taking Over, provide on-site assistance in adjusting
sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits
to Project site during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Visits for this purpose
shall be in addition to any required by warranty.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 25 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.8 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Engage a factory-authorized and trained service representative to train the Employer's

maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, and
servicing system. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

1. Training shall be provided for a minimum of 3 levels of maintenance staff; engineer,

supervisor and technician.
2. Training shall also be provided for fire service personnel: supervisors watch room/FCC
attendants.
3. Each category of trainees shall be provided with training for a minimum period of 6 hours
per day for 3 days and shall include all personnel on the rolls who are required to operate
and maintain this system.

B. Training manuals and technology training for all systems shall be in English only, except for
operator’s familiarization training, which shall be provided in English and Arabic.

C. Demonstrate full functionality of the system as specified to the acceptance of the Engineer,
Employer, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 283111

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - Page 26 of 26

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The requirements of Abu Dhabi Quality and Conformity Council (AD QCC) standards apply to this
Section.

C. In case of conflicting requirements between these specifications and with AD QCC standards, AD
QCC standards shall be adopted unless otherwise advised by the Employer / Engineer.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.

2. Removing existing vegetation.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities that are to be relocated.
7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In
undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban
environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-
place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place
surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious,
and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of
subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 50 mm in diameter; and free of subsoil and
weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other non-soil materials.

E. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other
vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

F. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during
construction, and indicated on Drawings.

G. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

SITE CLEARING 311000 - Page 1 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

H. Utilities: Underground pipes, conduits, ducts and cables, including manholes, chambers, tanks and
other underground appurtenances: above ground utility structures, poles lines, services and the likes.

I. Erosion: The wearing away of the ground surface as a result of the movement of wind or water.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to site clearing including, but not limited to, the
following:

a. Review geotechnical report.

b. Discuss existing utilities and subsurface conditions.
c. Review coordination with temporary controls and protections.

1.5 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated or directed to be stockpiled or otherwise
remain the Employer’s property, cleared materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall
be removed from Project site.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and
site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage
caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.

2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree
or other plants designated to remain.

B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other
subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.

C. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling program.

D. Rock stockpiling program.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically

demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and
equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of
stockpiles.

B. Rock Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of
personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work.
Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of stockpiles.

SITE CLEARING 311000 - Page 2 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.8 FIELD/PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or
used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from the Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by the Engineer
or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property
adjoining the Employer’s property will be obtained by the Employer before award of Contract.

C. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing

improvements indicated or directed to remain in place. Restore damaged improvements to their
original condition, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

D. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by the Engineer.

E. A No Objection Certificate (N.O.C) shall be obtained from the concerned authorities prior to the
start of any clearing and grubbing works.

F. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on the Employer
premises where indicated.

G. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control
measures are in place.

H. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones specified by the Engineer, if any:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
5. Impoundment of water.
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.

I. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones specified by the Engineer, if
any.

J. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones
specified by the Engineer, if any.

K. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.

L. Retain paragraph below to suit Project.

M. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.
Stumps and roots shall be removed from the soil to a depth of not less than 300 mm below the
surface of the ground in the area to be occupied by the building.

N. Wood forms that have been used in placing concrete, if within the ground or between foundation
fills and the ground, shall be removed before a building is occupied or used for any purpose.

O. Before completion, loose or casual wood shall be removed from direct contact with the ground under
the building.

SITE CLEARING 311000 - Page 3 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in AD QCC
standards.

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available
on-site.

B. Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd

primer complying with MPI #79, Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer or SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-
Paint 29 zinc-rich coating>.

1. Use coating with a VOC content of 420 Kg/m3 or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated or directed to be stockpiled or otherwise
remain the Employer’s property, cleared materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall
be removed from Project site.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Wrap a
25-mm blue vinyl tie tape flag around each tree trunk at 1400 mm above the ground.

C. Protect existing structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities on or adjacent to the
site, including existing site improvements and features to remain from damage during construction.

1. Promptly repair and restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable
to the Engineer.

D. The ground surface shall be prepared to receive fill by removing vegetation, noncomplying fill,
topsoil and other unsuitable materials, and scarifying the ground to provide a bond with the fill
material.

3.3 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge
of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to
erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity
do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

SITE CLEARING 311000 - Page 4 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

D. Remove temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures and restore and stabilize areas
disturbed during removal.

E. The faces of cut and fill slopes shall be prepared and maintained to control erosion. This control
shall be permitted to consist of effective planting.

F. Erosion control measures need not be provided on cut slopes not subject to erosion due to the
erosion-resistant character of the materials.

G. Erosion control for the slopes shall be installed as soon as practicable and prior to calling for final
inspection.

3.4 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site.

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated that are
damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by the Engineer.

1. Submit details of proposed repairs.

2. Replace trees and shrubs that cannot, as determined by the Engineer, be repaired and restored
to full-growth status.

3.5 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap existing utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place. Use proper scanning
machine to detect utilities locations and excavate trial pits as needed using manual tool only so as
not to disturb or damage any underground utilities.

C. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt or interfere with utilities serving facilities on the
site or on adjoining properties unless permitted by the Engineer under the following conditions and
then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the Engineer’s written permission.

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

E. Temporarily or permanently re-route or re-locate existing utilities as necessary to facilitate new

construction.

3.6 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.
Removal includes digging out and disposal of stumps and roots.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Completely remove stumps, roots and other debris.

SITE CLEARING 311000 - Page 5 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 450 mm below
exposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones.
5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Cleared and grubbed material shall not be left in or under embankments or other constructed facility.
All removed materials shall be disposed of at locations outside the right-of-way and not visible from
the roadway.

C. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless
further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 200 mm, and compact
each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.7 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth of 150 mm in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or
other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other
objects more than 50 mm in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape
stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 1800 mm.

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones.
3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be
stockpiled or reused.
4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.8 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new
construction.

B. Remove any artificial hard material and existing foundations as indicated.

C. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line
of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces
vertically.
2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating,
following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will
remain exposed.

3.9 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off to ADM approved dump sites.
The Contractor is responsible of:

SITE CLEARING 311000 - Page 6 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1. Coordination with ADM in order to obtain approval.

2. Hauling and disposal expenses.

A. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other unrecyclable materials. Store
or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do
not interfere with another Project work.

B. Waste materials shall be removed in a manner that prevents injury or damage to persons, adjoining
properties and public rights-of-way.

C. Disposal of removed materials at public and private sites away from the right of way shall be done
at the Contractors sole expense, in accordance with all laws and regulations, after an agreement with
the property owner or public agency has been fully executed

END OF SECTION 311000

SITE CLEARING 311000 - Page 7 of 7

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

1.1 The requirements of Abu Dhabi Quality and Conformity Council (AD QCC) standards apply to this
Section.

1.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

The following clauses amend, add on or replace the corresponding referenced clauses of Abu Dhabi Standard
Construction Specifications – Part 1 - Roads - Document No: ADQCC TR-542-1, or are additional clauses, as
appropriate.

Chapter 2 “Earthworks”

Amend the first sentence of the first paragraph to Clause 2.4.2 “Construction Requirements”, Subclause
2.4.2.5 “Subexcavation” as follows:

- Unsuitable material, including soft, muck, or vegetative material, or sand with organic content, peat,
high salt content, high fine content and plasticity, sand with high shell content, or Sabkha found below
the road/pavement/embankment or any structure, shall be fully excavated by the Contractor.

Add the following point to Clause 2.5.2 “Materials”, Subclause 2.5.2.1 “Unsuitable Material”:

- Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction.

Amend Bullet 1 in Clause 2.5.2 “Materials”, Subclause 2.5.2.2 “Embankment Material” as follows:

- Maximum particle size: not to exceed one-third of placement layer thickness or 75mm.

Amend Bullet 2 in Clause 2.5.2 “Materials”, Subclause 2.5.2.2 “Embankment Material” as follows:

- A-3 material can be used when confined. All materials shall have fines content of less than 15%.

Add to Bullet 4 in Clause 2.5.2 “Materials”, Subclause 2.5.2.2 “Embankment Material” the following:

- The corresponding liquid limit (LL), if applicable, shall not exceed 30%.

Add the following bullets to Clause 2.5.2 “Materials”, Subclause 2.5.2.2 “Embankment Material”:

- Maximum Dry Density: Not less than 1.7; AASHTO T-180 (Method D).

- The top 150 mm subgrade material should not contain more than 0.1% water soluble sulphates (SO3)
and 0.05% water soluble Chloride content and pH between 6.5 and 8, when tested according to BS
1377-3 standard.

- For graded suitable fill material, the sum of the organic matters’ content and the salt content as a total
shall not exceed 1% in the imported soil/material, and 2% in the native soil.

Add the following point to Clause 2.5.2 “Materials”, Subclause 2.5.2.4 “Structural Backfill”:

EARTH MOVING 312000 - Page 1 of 2

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

- The material shall be non-aggressive with water soluble Chlorides less than 0.05% and water soluble
Sulphates (SO3) content less than 0.1% and pH between 6.5 and 8, when tested according to BS 1377
Part 3 standards.

Clause 2.5.2.6 Capillary Break Layer (Drainage Blanket) defined according to the requirements of AD QCC
specifications Clause 2.5.2.6, identified as material for free draining blankets.

Add the following section on GEOGRIDS

A. Geogrid for ground stabilization in zones where cavities exist in the subsurface: shall consist of the
biaxial type (UV resistant), made from polypropylene, with the following properties:

Specifications Geogrid (biaxial type)

Tensile Strength (KN/m) 40

CBR Puncture Resistance (N) 14

Water Permeability (l/m2/sec) 28

Pore Size (µm) 33x33

Weight (g/m2) 0.45

END OF SECTION 312000

EARTH MOVING 312000 - Page 2 of 2

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 312319 – DEWATERING

The requirements of AD QCC standards, Abu Dhabi City Municipality Dewatering Guidelines and
Requirements, Abu Dhabi City Municipality and Abu Dhabi Environment agency regarding the dewatering
and discharging activities (Dewatering Guidelines No. 13-5015 issued by ADM) apply to this Section.

END OF SECTION 312319

DEWATERING 312319 - Page 1 of 1

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

All works shall be carried out in accordance with Abu Dhabi Quality and Conformity Council
(QCC) requirements. The requirements of AD QCC standards apply to this Section. In case of any
contradiction between this section and QCC documents, QCC specifications shall be followed un-
less otherwise advised by the Employer / Engineer.

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of
supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and
construction loads.

1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings,
structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation.
4. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements.
5. Removal of excavation support and protection systems

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Excavation support and protection system design and calculations shall be
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and should include:
1. Shop drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
2. Calculations for excavation support and protection, including but not limited to the
following:
a. Soil parameters used and their substantiation
b. Codes, standards and methods followed
c. Principle underlying selection of system
3. Layout, mark and number: type, dimensions, location and details of each support and
protection system and its components.

B. Method Statement: Provide a detailed narrative describing means, methods and techniques to be
implemented for construction of excavation support and protection systems. The Method Statement
shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Details of equipment and monitoring instrumentation, quality control, testing and reporting
procedures, work program, and any other information required by the Engineer.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - Page 1 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

2. Contingency plan outlining procedures to be adopted in the event that problems arise during
construction work

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply
with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified land surveyor and professional engineer.

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that material and product components
comply with specified requirements

F. Field Records: Survey data

G. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site

improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the
installation of, or the performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit
before Work begins.
2. Record Drawings: Identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural,
electrical, or mechanical conditions.

a. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer specialized in installing excavation support

and protection system similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful
performance.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare or

supervise the preparation of data for the excavation support and protection system including
drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis that shows the system’s compliance with
specified requirements

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site prior to commencing the installation
of the excavation support and protection system.

1. Review methods and procedures related to excavation support and protection system
including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Geotechnical report.
b. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions.
c. Proposed excavations.
d. Proposed equipment.
e. Monitoring of excavation support and protection system.
f. Working area location and stability.
g. Coordination with waterproofing.
h. Abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system.
i. Safety requirements.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - Page 2 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Notify utilities companies and authorities having jurisdiction before commencing excavation
support and protection system operations.

B. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities on the Project site or
on adjoining properties unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify the Engineer no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without the Engineer’s written permission.

C. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available
for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and
represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by
geotechnical engineer. The Employer will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions
drawn from the data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for
excavation support and protection.
2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.

D. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing
buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as
benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey

benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for
comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify the Engineer if changes
in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent
construction.

2. Before starting excavation support work, survey conditions of adjoining properties, including
foundation level and type. Take photographs to record their existing conditions

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M.

C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with
continuous interlocks.

1. Corners: Site-fabricated mechanical interlock] [Roll-formed corner shape with continuous

interlock.

D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of 100 mm.

E. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.

F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 420, deformed.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - Page 3 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

G. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M.

H. Tiebacks: Steel strand, ASTM A 416/A 416M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during
excavation support and protection system operations.

1. Shore, support, and protect utilities, sidewalks, pavements and structures encountered.

B. Install and construct excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference
with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks, pavements, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from the Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by the Engineer
or authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming
and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded.

D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long
as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to
ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable.

E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and
protection systems.

3.2 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING

A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade
level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to
exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to
vary not more than 50 mm from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.

B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as
required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.

C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.

3.3 SHEET PILING

A. Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a
continuous barrier. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise
recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet
piling to (1500 mm). Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 50 mm
from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to
uniform elevation at top of excavation.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - Page 4 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.4 TIEBACKS

A. Prior to drilling for tiebacks, investigate to ensure that installation of tiebacks will not interfere with
or cause damage to underground utilities or structures adjacent to the site.

B. Drilling: Drill to required length for each tieback. Maintain accurate work records and produce a log
for each drill hole in a form acceptable to the Engineer, including the following data:
1. Project name and number,
2. Location and identity of drill hole
3. Diameter of drill hole
4. Date and time of starting and completing drilling,
5. Overall length of drill hole,
6. Description of soil materials recovered,
7. Description and location of obstructions encountered,
8. Ground-water conditions,
9. Remarks, including conditions encountered.

C. Tiebacks: Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and
replace and retest deficient tiebacks at no extra cost.

1. Test loading shall be observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of
excavation support and protection system.
2. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral soil and
hydrostatic pressures.

3.5 BRACING

A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work.
If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.

1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.
3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent
construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.

3.6 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS

A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently
to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing
underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.

1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 1200 mm below
overlaying construction and abandon remainder.
2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. Repair or replace, as approved by the Engineer, adjacent work damaged or displaced by
removing excavation support and protection systems.

B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place.

END OF SECTION 315000

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - Page 5 of 5

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division
01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. All works related to the irrigation water shall conform to all the requirements of Abu Dhabi
Municipality as specified in the QCC Irrigation Manual (Volume III), Technical Specifications of
the latest QCC Specifications version.
C. All works related to the recycled water network shall be carried out in accordance with Abu Dhabi
Quality and Conformity Council (QCC) requirements included in WA-704 and all referenced
documents including specifications and general details. In case of any contradiction between this
section and QCC documents, QCC specifications shall be followed.
D. Earthworks and ground improvement shall be carried out as specified in QCC specifications and
the following sections included in the particular specifications:

• 312000 Earth Moving

• 312319 Dewatering
• 314500 Ground Improvement
• 315000 Excavation Support and Protection

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. The scope of works under this contract includes the supply, construction, testing and
commissioning of the following:
1. Irrigation mains, submains and all related appurtenances.
2. Recycled Water Mains and all related appurtenances, including isolation valves and flow meters
3. Rehabilitation of the Irrigation Reservoir and Pumping Station. Mains
4. Installation of water filters, fertilization system and pressure tanks including interconnection
piping as shown on drawing.
B. All works shall be carried out in accordance with QCC Standard Specifications.
C. The irrigation system comprises of a piped distribution network that shall service all planted areas
within Masdar City. The Irrigation system shall convey the water from the above ground reservoir
as well as the below ground reservoir and pump station to the irrigation system at specific interface
points as shown on the drawings.
D. The supply of recycled water to the underground reservoir shall be from connection point to
existing recycled water pipeline located within the site boundary and from above ground tank . The
Contractor shall be responsible for all works related to this supply main including coordination
with Authorities as required, obtaining the necessary construction NOCs (corridor and route)
construction permit, etc.
E. Installation of an irrigation central control system and connecting all existing irrigation controllers
to it.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for all works related to the rehabilitation works including
coordination with Authorities as required, obtaining the necessary construction NOCs, permit, etc.

1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping and specialties for irrigation network including irrigation risers as
shown on drawings.

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 1 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. This section specifies briefly the requirements for infrastructure development of the irrigation
network. The details of the materials and the supply, installation testing and commissioning shall
comply with QCC Standard Specifications.
C. This document shall be read in conjunction with all related sections of the specifications and the
Contract drawings.
D. Any clauses included within this particular specification or on the contract drawings shall take
precedence over the QCC Standard Specifications.
E. The design complies with the standard specification and design guidelines issued by QCC. The
Contractor shall obtain the latest edition for execution of the project.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. The Contractor shall refer to the latest sections of the QCC Standard Specifications for the key
components of the irrigation system. The Contractor shall be responsible to collect the latest
revisions.

PART 2 APPLICABLE QCC STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 LIST OF APPLICABLE QCC STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

The Contractor shall be responsible to collect the latest revisions and shall not rely on the revisions listed in
the following Table.
TAB Document Title Document No. Rev.
General Items
1.01 Specification For General Technical Requirements W-G-SS-001 0
1.02 Specification For Design, Shop & As-Built Drawings W-G-SS-002 0
1.03 Specification For Quality Control And Assurance W-G-SS-003 1
1.04 Specification For Requirements Of Spare Parts, Tools, Test W-G-SS-004 0
Equipment and Consumables
1.06 Specification For Planning & Scheduling W-G-SS-006 0
1.07 Specification For Operation & Maintenance Manuals W-G-SS-007 0
1.08 Specification For Training ADWEA Staff W-G-SS-008 0
1.09 Specification For Site Facilities For ADWEA / Engineer W-G-SS-009 0
1.10 Specification For Project Commissioning W-G-SS-010 0
1.11 Preamble to Bill of Quantities / Schedule of Prices W-G-SS-011 0
Civil Works
2.01 Specification For Topographic Surveys W-C-SS-001 0
2.02 Specification For Geotechnical Surveys W-C-SS-002 0
2.03 Specification For Civil / Structural General Requirements For W-C-SS-003 0
Water Works
2.04 Specification For Earth Works W-C-SS-004 1
2.05 Specification For Concrete W-C-SS-005 1
2.06 Specification For General Civil Construction W-C-SS-006 0
2.07 Specification For Concrete Reservoirs W-C-SS-007 0
2.08 Specification For Architectural Works W-C-SS-008 0
2.09 Specification For Structural Steel Works W-C-SS-009 0
2.10 Specification For Roads & External Finishes W-C-SS-010 0
2.11 Specification For Water Drainage Systems W-C-SS-011 0
2.12 Specification For Water Supply Systems W-C-SS-012 0
2.13 Specification For Fencing W-C-SS-013 0
2.14 Specification For Painting And External Coating Of Metal W-C-SS-014 0
Pipes And Structures
2.15 Specification For Non Toxicity Requirements For Paints And W-C-SS-015 0
Coatings

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 2 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

TAB Document Title Document No. Rev.

2.17 Specification for Kiosks and Shelters for Control, Metering W-C-SS-017 0
and Electrical Systems along Pipeline
Electrical Works
3.03 Specification For LV Switchboards / Motor Control Centers W-E-SS-002 0
3.04 Data Sheet For LV Switchboards / Motor Control Centers W-E-SD-002 0
3.15 Specification For Electrical Cables For 415 / 240V System W-E-SS-008 0
3.16 Data Sheet For Electrical Cables For Low Voltage System W-E-SD-008 0
3.17 Specification For Uninterruptable Ac Power Supply System W-E-SS-009 1
(Ac-Ups)
3.18 Data Sheet For Uninterruptable Power Supply System (Ac- W-E-SD-009 0
Ups)
3.19 Specification For Direct Current (Dc) Supply System W-E-SS-010 1
3.20 Data Sheet For Direct Current (Dc) Supply System W-E-SD-010 0
3.21 Specification For Standby Diesel Generator W-E-SS-011 0
3.22 Data Sheet For Standby Diesel Generator W-E-SD-011 0
3.23 Specification For LV Electrical Variable Speed Drive System W-E-SS-012 1
(EVSDS)
3.24 Data Sheet For LV Electrical Variable Speed Drive System W-E-SD-012 1
(EVSDS)
3.25 Specification For Electrical Installations W-E-SS-013 1
Mechanical Works
Pumps
4A.01 Specification For Transmission And Distribution Pumps W-M-SS-001 2
4A.02 Data Sheet For Transmission And Distribution Pumps W-M-SD-001 1
4A.03 Specification For Drain / Sump Pumps And Reservoir Scour W-M-SS-002 0
Pumps
4A.04 Data Sheet For Drain / Sump Pumps And Reservoir Scour W-M-SD-002 0
Pumps
Surge System
4B.01 Specification For Surge Vessels W-M-SS-006 2
4B.02 Data Sheet For Surge Vessels W-M-SD-006 0
Fire Protection Systems
4D.01 Specification For Fire Protection Systems W-M-SS-010 0
4D.02 Data Sheet For Fire Protection Systems W-M-SD-014 0
4D.03 Data Sheet For Fire Protection Foam Systems W-M-SD-015 0
4D.04 Data Sheet For Portable & Mobile Fire Extinguisher Units W-M-SD-016 0
Lifting Equipment
4F.01 Specification For Lifting Equipment W-M-SS-014 0
4F.02 Data Sheet For Electrical Overhead Crane W-M-SD-020 0
Mechanical Systems Installations
4H.01 Specification For Pump sets Installation W-M-SS-017 0
4H.02 Specification For Surge Systems Installation W-M-SS-018 0
Air-conditioning and Ventilation Systems
4I.01 Specification For Air-conditioning And Ventilation Systems W-H-SS-001 0
4I.03 Data Sheet For Ducted Split A/C Unit W-H-SD-002 0
4I.04 Data Sheet For Decorative Type Split A/C Unit W-H-SD-003 0
4I.05 Data Sheet For Ventilation Fans W-H-SD-004 0
4I.06 Specification For Ductwork And Ductwork Insulation W-H-SS-002 0
4I.07 Data Sheet For Ductwork And Ductwork Insulation W-H-SD-005 0
Instrumentation and Control
5.01 Specification For Field Instrumentation W-I-SS-001 4
5.02 Specification For Control Systems W-I-SS-002 2
5.04 Specification For Instrument Cables And Wires W-I-SS-004 0
5.08 Specification For Instrumentation & Control Systems W-I-SS-008 1
Installation
5.10 Data Sheet For Magnetic Flow Meter W-I-SD-001 0

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 3 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

TAB Document Title Document No. Rev.

5.14 Data Sheet for Pressure Transmitter W-I-SD-005 0
5.15 Data Sheet for Pressure Switch W-I-SD-006 0
5.16 Data Sheet for Pressure Gauge W-I-SD-007 0
5.18 Data Sheet for Level Switch W-I-SD-009 0
5.20 Data Sheet for Temperature Switch W-I-SD-011 0
5.22 Data Sheet For Vibration Transducer W-I-SD-013 0
5.28 Data Sheet For Programmable Logic Controllers W-I-SD-019 0
5.32 Data Sheet For Instrument Cables And Wires W-I-SD-023 0
Pipelines
Pipes, Fittings and Accessories
6A.01 Specification For Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings And Accessories W-P-SS-001 6
6A.02 Data Sheet For Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings And Accessories W-P-SD-001 3
6A.07 Specification For GRP Pipes, Fittings And Accessories W-P-SS-004 0
6A.08 Data Sheet For GRP Pipes And Fittings W-P-SD-004 0
6A.09 Specification For High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes, W-P-SS-005 3
Fittings And Accessories
6A.10 Data Sheet For High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes And W-P-SD-005 2
Fittings
6A.11 Specification For UPVC Pipes, Fittings And Accessories W-P-SS-006 0
6A.12 Data Sheet For UPVC Pipes, Fittings And Accessories W-P-SD-006 0
6A.15 Specification For Water Service Connection Materials & W-P-SS-008 0
Installation
6A.16 Data Sheet For Water Service Connection Materials W-P-SD-001 0
6A.17 ADWEA Standard Quality Control Plan (SQCP) Pipes – W-P-OCP-001 0
Ductile Iron
6A.18 ADWEA Standard Quality Control Plan (SQCP) Fittings – W-P-OCP-011 0
Ductile Iron
6A.18 ADWEA Standard Quality Control Plan (SQCP) – Gate W-P-OCP-016 0
Valves
6A.18 ADWEA Standard Quality Control Plan (SQCP) – Butterfly W-P-OCP-017 0
Valves
Valves
6B.01 Specification For Valves W-P-SS-009 2
6B.02 Data Sheet For Butterfly Valves W-P-SD-009 1
6B.03 Data Sheet For Gate Valves W-P-SD-010 1
6B.05 Data Sheet For Control Valves W-P-SD-012 0
6B.08 Data Sheet For Air Release Valves W-P-SD-015 0
6B.09 Data Sheet For Fire Hydrant Valves W-P-SD-016 0
Pipelines Installation
6C.01 Specification For Construction, Testing & Commissioning Of W-P-SS-010 4
Ductile Iron Pipe System
6C.02 Specification For Welding And Welding Inspection Of Shop W-P-SS-011 0
And Field Fabricated Piping
6C.06 Specification For Construction, Testing & Commissioning Of W-P-SS-015 0
GRP Pipe Systems
6C.07 Specification For Construction, Testing & Commissioning Of W-P-SS-016 0
uPVC Pipe Systems
6C.08 Specification For Construction, Testing & Commissioning Of W-P-SS-017 1
HDPE Pipe Systems

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 4 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

PART 3 ANNEX A: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR RECYCLED WATER SYSTEM,

RECYCLED/IRRIGATION RESERVOIR AND PUMPING STATION

3.1 CIVIL WORKS

A. PIPELINE SETTING OUT

The CONTRACTOR shall set out the route of the pipelines in accordance with the Drawings. The route shall
be marked by 75 x 75 x 1000 mm wooden poles set into the ground in a concrete surround or in case of
pipelines along rigid surface, the route shall be marked by roof nails. The poles shall be set along the centerline
of the pipeline at intervals of 50m. chainage, at every bend, air valve, washout or valve chambers and at all
physical obstructions (existing chambers, excavations, tips, etc.). The chainage of the pipeline shall be marked
on every pole. All poles and nails shall be painted as follows:

Red - Centerline of pipe or pair of pipes

Red with White stripe - Horizontal bend, washout or air valve chamber

White marker - Outer limits of the working width

Yellow marker - Foreign service

From the results of this survey, the CONTRACTOR shall draw up Pipeline Alignment Drawings (PADs).
PADs shall be presented at a horizontal scale 1:1250 and a vertical scale of 1:125. All drawings shall be
submitted to the ENGINEER on ISO size Al paper print.

The CONTRACTOR shall plot on these drawings the detailed routes and profiles of the pipelines. The profile
shall comply with the requirements for minimum cover, minimum gradient and spacing of air valves, washouts
and valve chambers all as shown on the Drawings. The route profile shall be plotted under the relevant section
of the pipeline route plan. The route plan shall show a strip of land 100 m wide, centered on the pipeline route
with contours at 0.5 m intervals.

The profile shall also show the chainage of the pipeline at the points of ground level measurement and at any
change in profile. The CONTRACTOR shall determine the invert level of the pipeline at the points of level
measurement and mark these levels on the drawings. The diameter and details of the pipeline and cover to the
pipeline shall also be shown.

The ENGINEER shall approve or otherwise amend the route profile of the pipelines and the CONTRACTOR
shall revise the PADs accordingly. The revised, approved drawings shall be marked 'Released for Construction'
and thereafter shall become the Contract Drawings for the pipeline construction. These Drawings may also
then be used by the CONTRACTOR for finalizing his pipeline material orders.

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 5 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

3.2 PIPELINE WORKS

A. PIPE AND APPURTENANCES

Pipelines Ductile iron with internal cement lining and external zinc coating
plus bituminous coating, polyethylene sleeve. Additional tape
wrapping protection shall be provided in accordance to the results
of the resistivity survey and as directed by the ENGINEER.
HDPE Class PE 100, SDR 11

Connections to existing ADDC HDPE Class PE 100, SDR 11

Recycled Water mains

Piping works inside chambers and Ductile iron with internal and external protection in fusion bonded
pump house epoxy

Pipe internal coating shall comply with the requirements of ADWEA Circular 5/2000 contained in QCC
Standard Specifications No. W-C-SS-015.

B. VALVES
Gate valves will be used for pipeline sizes of dia. 300 mm and smaller.

Butterfly valves will be used for pipeline sizes of dia. 350 mm and larger.

Axial flow type Control Valves with provision for Electrical actuator in the future will be used at Area/Sector
connections. Basket type strainers will be installed at the upstream side of control valves.

Electromagnetic Flow Meter with provision of RTU installed at the tie in point to ADDC transmission pipe
and on the recirculation pipe.

All valves will be rated PN16

C. PRESSURE RATING
All valves, D.I. pipes, D.I. fittings, adapters, collars and flanges shall be rated PN16 unless otherwise specified
in the drawings and BOQ.

D. PRESSURE TEST
The test pressures for the various pipeline sections shall be 16 bars

E. NONPRESSURE TESTING
Fill non pressure water storage tanks to water operating level to ensure structural integrity and freedom from
leaks. Hold water level for 2 hours with no drop in water level.

3.3 IRRIGATION CENTRAL CONTROL CENTER

A. General

Irrigation control systems shall comply with ISO/TR 8059 and integrate with DMAT SCADA system.

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 6 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

B. Central Control

The central control station shall be available to satisfy the system requirements and shall be user friendly. The
central computer shall communicate with the field controller’s directly. Central Control and Monitoring
Program shall use a strong protocol to exchange. This communication shall be direct real time without any
field interface unit.

The central control software shall allow remote access from different locations by means of dial-up telephone
line for control and monitoring. Central controller software shall be easy to use and utilizes pointer mouse and
single screen user programming functionality. That is, user definable selections for each area of operation are
performed on a single “at-a-glance” windows screen and can be navigated using only the mouse and not the
keyboard. For example, each controller’s watering schedule program i.e. Water days, Start times, Station run
times, Station flow rates, budgets etc. can be viewed and changed by viewing a single screen.

The software screens mimic the user screens on the touch screen panel of each controller. Terminology and
screen thought layouts in both the software and controllers make it much easier for an irrigation technician to
operate both because of the consistency of design.

The central control system Software shall have the following minimum capabilities:
i. Support more than one project
ii. True windows User Interface
iii. Allows printing of any report
iv. Allow Uploading of data and programs from Field Units
v. Support moisture sensor
vi. Paging Facility shall be supported and engineered by the system manufacturer, sending
alphanumeric messages
vii. Flow prediction: To analyze the demand on the Hydraulic design
viii. Complete Flow management by enabling flow sensor
ix. Water Network protection
x. Effective Water management using ET sensor
xi. Sensor Measurements
xii. Comprehensive and User-friendly irrigation programming screens (Time based, quantity based
and irrigation depth
xiii. Define multiple landscape coefficients and adjust water factor for each type.
xiv. Off-Line programming for Field Units

Central controllers shall contain full data processing, program intelligence and communication capability and
do not require added hardware or modification to “link” field controllers to the central base. The basic central
system architecture communicates to and from the base PC via point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, point-to-
point repeater or point-to multipoint repeater with total functionality being available in each standard controller
unit. A multitude of communication options exist that minimize cost yet increase range potential.
C. Field Controller

The central control system shall be responsible for the monitoring of the equipment’s under contract scope of
work and override local control with manual commands locally from controller or central. All field controllers
shall be field programmable. The Controllers shall be modular units capable of processing local control. It
shall control and monitor the pumps, valves and flow and pressure sensors connected to it.

The Controller shall be smart and have the intelligence to accumulate data and make decision locally.
Comprehensive standard application development and diagnostic program shall be used for programming the
controller locally or remotely. The Irrigation Central Control System shall use a communication protocol,
compatible with DMAT SCADA, allowing real time, two-way communication between the central and
controller. The communication shall be direct with central without any field interface unit.

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 7 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

The Controller shall be installed in a weatherproof enclosure equivalent to IP55 standards. The controller shall
have solid-state design utilizing touch screen/ liquid screen display. The processor module (CPU) shall be real
time process controller and shall support the Data transfer with I/O modules, system memory allocation, and
communication port protocol. The CPU shall allow LAN capabilities. The Controller shall be supplied with
required number of Input / Output points and shall include the following minimum configuration:
i. Mother Board
ii. ii. Input /Output (I/O modules or Boards.
iii. iii. Power supply
iv. iv. Radio Communication Interface, if specified.
v. v. Combination of radio, telephone & hardwire board. The field controller shall have
independent control over each station start time, duration of irrigation (maximum 99 hours, 59
minutes, 59 seconds), days of operation and cycle length (1 to 30 days), and exempt station
operation by day of week or by date. .A “mimic” function shall provide the ability to copy
station timing to any other station. The Controller must operate at ambient temperature range of
30 to 60 °C with relative and humidity up to 95 %. The Controller shall carry irrigation
programs with the following minimum capabilities and requirements:
i. Control Irrigation system based on time and quantity.
ii. Control Irrigation system based on climate and/or soil moisture.
iii. Initiate alarms based on high flow, low flow, main line leak.
iv. Flexible programming to change valve set combinations.
v. Possibility to create programs based on conditions.
vi. Run/Stop main line.
vii. Local or host control may be initiated at the keypad along with satellite address.
viii. Universal water budget may be modified from 1% to 300% in one percent steps.
ix. Individual station programs or all programming may be erased through a two-step process.
x. A security code can be entered allowing only authorized access to programming functions.
xi. Four windows of irrigation for more flexible operation.

D. Surge Protection and Grounding

The controllers shall have a surge protection unit (SPU) to protect components from electrical
surges. Refer to Section 16670.

E. ETO Sensor
The ETO Sensor shall be compatible with the Irrigation Central Control System and
automatically provide data to the central computer to analyses the current irrigation requirements
for optimal water management. The ETO Sensor shall automatically monitor meteorological
conditions that affect water consumption. The central computer shall calculate the Reference
Evapotranspiration (ETO by modified Penman equation relevant climate sensors and then adjusts
the irrigation schedule of each program.

F. Flow Meters
Flow meters (up to two shall automatically shut down and bypass any station in the event of a flow
variance (either excess or sub normal as defined by the user). The satellite shall shutdown the master
valve in the event that flow variance cannot be corrected by an individual station shutdown. Controller
shall have local override capability.

G. Other Sensors
Other types of sensing (up to eight) such as rain, wind speed and direction, temperature,
Evapotranspiration/humidity, etc. shall be connected to the satellite via a two wire path (one sensor
per path and shall automatically modify or skip any station. The user shall be able to assign any station
to any sensor.

The controller shall have local override capability. The controller shall have the ability to
automatically calculate and adjust watering times based on Evapotranspiration. The controller shall
be able to detect leaks and report to the main controller and shut the system if the leak is continuous.
The central controller shall display projected flow by program using graphics. The graph will

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 8 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

calculate and display the maximum instantaneous flow as well as the total volume. Maximum flow
and volume will be displayed in user-selected units. Graphs may be displayed for a flow source, for
all selected programs or for an individual field controller.

3.4 PUMPING STATION ELECTRICAL WORKS

A. Electrical rehabilitation and renovation works of the existing pump station shall be carried out as
detailed in Specification section 011000 and Electrical Bill of Quantities (BOQ).

B. All electrical works shall be carried out in accordance with relevant local authority requirements
and Abu Dhabi City Municipality (ADM).

C. TELECOM SERVICE

Telecom rehabilitation and renovation works of the existing pump station shall be carried out as detailed
in Specification section 011000 and Telecom Bill of Quantities (BOQ).

All Telecom works shall be carried out in accordance with relevant provided telecom specifications.

a) CABLING NETWORK

The cabling network covers all the cabling and containment methods which are adopted in the buildings
and outside. The cabling varies between the different spaces and equipment within the technical buildings.
For instance:
• The cabling from the public telephone operator(s) to the electrical room will be SM FO cable and is
to be provided by the public telecom operator.

• The IDF cabinet provided in covers the pumping station. It houses cable termination patch panels,
operator interface router, etc. Each data/telephone outlet in the pumping station shall connect to the
IDF over CAT6a cable. IDF/cabling and containment for Telecom and security to be separate.

• All telecom/security equipment shall have UPS.

b) ACTIVE NETWORK EQUIPMENT

The active network equipment is designed to provide a data platform for all data.
The Ethernet switch provides connectivity to the Wide Area Network through 1GEs. From the switch,
CAT 6 cables will be distributed to each IP device or data/telephone outlet.

c) PROVISIONS FOR TELEPHONY SERVICES

For telephony services, outlets and cabling were provided within the buildings: the outlets are connected
over CAT6A cables to the IDF closets and terminated on the CAT6A patch panels.

Services for telephony will be provided:

• Either with direct connection to the Service provider for individual lines: in such Client to apply
directly for subscription to the Service Provider (ETISALAT/du)

• Or with a PABX system, to be procured at later stage if needed.

Spaces and cabling to be provisioned to cater for either of the two options detailed above.

d) PROVISIONS FOR SECURITY SYSTEMS:

The security systems are designed to provide a CCTV and access control system for the pump station.

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 9 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

The Ethernet switch provides connectivity to the Wide Area Network through 1GEs. From the switch, CAT 6
cables will be distributed to each security device.

e) PROVISIONS FOR WIRELESS SYSTEM:

The wireless system is designed to provide a wireless connectivity system for the pump station.
The Ethernet switch provides connectivity to the Wide Area Network through 1GEs. From the switch,
CAT 6 cables will be distributed to each wireless device.

f) PROVISIONS FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM:

To provide a functional fire alarm system with a local fire alarm control panel in the pump station to
connect all the fire alarm elements and to be connected to fire brigade over the telephone line.

g) OTHER REFERENCES

For further detail, contractor to refer and comply with the following:

• SPC_01_SEC-283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM_REV01

• SPC_01_SEC-282000-VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (VSS)_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-281500-ACCESS CONTROL HARDWARE DEVICES_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-281300-ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE AND DATABASE
MANAGEMENT_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-273123-IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-272231-COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-272133-WIRELESS DATA NETWORK_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-272109-DATA COMM FOR CAMPUS NETWORK_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-271505-COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING(TIA)_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-271305-COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING(TIA)_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-271105-COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS(TIA)_
REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-271005-COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING(TIA)_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-270555-IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS(TIA)_
REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-270501-COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS_REV01
• SPC_01_SEC-260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS_REV01

3.5 PUMPING STATION MECHANICAL WORKS

The contractor shall survey and inspect the existing piping and mechanical installations in the pump station
building including all components not limited, to pumps, pipes, crane, valves…etc. the contractor shall report
the site survey findings and recommendations to the client and engineer for their approval. All required
modification works as result of the site survey shall be reported and described in a method statement and
rehabilitation work procedure. In addition, the contractor shall install the additional equipment, filters, pressure
tanks, control valves, flowmeter, piping and valves in accordance to the requirements and as shown on the
drawings that in order to grant compliance with ADDC requirements.

A. PUMPS
Contractor shall arrange to carry out pump testing not limited to pump performance, motor temperature,
vibration, mounting, installation, leakages and unusual sounds. Based on the testing results, the contractor
shall arrange to replace or rehabilitate the pumps in order to grant the accepted performance and satisfy
the safe and proper operational requirement. this task shall be coordinated with the client representative

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 10 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

and grant engineer approval. any rehabilitation tasks shall be carried out by the manufacturer maintenance
team and only original spare parts are approved to be used.

B. PIPING SYSTEM
Replace the defected parts of the piping system for satisfactory and proper operation according to the
testing survey report, including replacement of damaged and malfunction items and accessories such as
valves, supports, fittings, gaskets, bolts and nuts, paints etc.

C. HVAC SYSTEM
Replace the defected parts of the HVAC system for satisfactory and proper operation according to the
recommendations of the survey report, including replacement of damaged and malfunction items and
accessories such as fans, AC units, ducts, dampers, etc.

D. PLUMBING SYSTEM
Replace the defected parts of the plumbing system for satisfactory and proper operation according to the
survey report, including replacement of damaged and malfunction items and accessories such as sump
pump set, storm drainage components, piping, toilet fixtures. etc.

E. FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

Replace or rehabilitated the defected parts of the fire protection system for satisfactory and proper
operation in accordance to the survey report and approved codes, including replacement of damaged and
malfunction items and accessories or maintenance of the existing FE .... etc.

F. CRANEAGE SYSTEM
Rehabilitated the defected parts of the craneage system for satisfactory and proper operation in accordance
to the survey report, safety requirement and engineer approval.

G. AUTOMATIC WATER SCREEN FILTERS

Contractor shall supply, install and put into satisfactory operation 3 automatic Self-cleaning Screen filters each
can handle a flow of 156 LPS, including all related components and accessories not limited to isolation valves,
dismantling joint, fittings and supports in accordance to specifications, scope of work and manufacturer
recommendations. Filters shall comply with ISO 9912 – Part 3. Automatic self-cleaning screen filter shall be
provided at the pump head. Cleaning shall be effected by hydraulically powered suction scanner automatically
activated when the pressure across the filter reaches 0.2 bar.

Automatic self-cleaning filter shall be specifically suitable for use with organic contaminants. The
maximum velocity through the net screen area (excluding sieve wire area shall be 0.3 m/s. In any
case the maximum velocity through the total screen area (including sieve wire area shall be 0.9 m/s.
The filter body and internal parts including flanges shall be stainless steel. Flushing line shall be
connected to the nearest surface water drainage. If it is not possible, connection has to be made to a
soak pit.

The control system shall feature a fail-safe timer to prevent continuous flushing due to malfunction.
Filter should not flush when the irrigation system or pumps are not working.

Primary stage filtration shall be performed by a one piece perforated PVC coarse screen. Secondary
stage filtration shall be provided by a stainless steel grade 316 screen with 65 – 140 micron mesh
size, according to the requirements of the emitters downstream. Only flat screens are allowed.

Filter shall be equipped with electrical control system contained in a Nema 4X enclosure, which
shall regulate the filter rinse cycles and prevent the filter from engaging in a continuous rinse. The
control system shall be microprocessor based and shall be suitable for control of up to ten (10)
filters. The system shall provide for rinse cycle activation by one of four options: differential

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 11 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

pressure, timer external signal or manually, and shall include an integral rinse cycle counter which
shall record the rinse cycles activated by each method. The system shall include local alarm and
remote contacts to indicate filter malfunction.

Filter shall have flush valve actuator of a heavy duty construction threaded into a brass valve body.

The filter shall clean itself automatically at 2.5 bars without the need for an external energy source.

The filter shall provide uninterrupted flow and also provide filtration during the flushing cycle.

Fine screen elements shall be easily replaceable without requiring any changes to be made in the
construction of the elements of the cleaning system or the need to remove the filter from the pipeline.

Installation shall be vertical.

Filter shall have isolation valves in the suction as well on delivery side for easy maintenance. The
controller for the filters shall be equipped with timer and pressure differential control unit.

Pressure gauges shall be connected to suction and delivery side of each filter.

H. FERTILIZING SYSTEM

Contractor shall supply, install and put into satisfactory operation a fertilizer system that is capable
of dispersing liquid or water-soluble fertilizers into irrigation water with a capacity varying between
50 to 200 liters per hour.

The system shall comprise of the following:

1. Fertilizer mixing polypropylene tank capacity with a minimum capacity as installed subject
to engineer approval.
2. Fertilize mixer, with stainless steel shaft and agitator, dismountable turbine without edges.
Agitator shall have six spouts, three of them radial with a centrifugal movement to produce
a rotation of liquid, and three of them axial to stir the bottom. The fertilizer mixer shall be
equipped with IP55 electric motor. The motor rating shall be determined by the vendor.
3. Injector pump: shall be a hydraulic pump suitable for injecting liquid or water-soluble
fertilizers, with a working pressure up to 10 bars. Pump parts in contact with fertilizer shall
be made of polypropylene. Pump water consumption shall be two times the quantity of
dispersed fertilizer.
4. Flow meter (analogue - mechanical type) shall be inserted in the delivery line of the pump
to get the chemical flow rate.
5. Accessories including PVC isolating valves, mesh filters, and anti-siphon valve, control
panel connectable to main control system (SCADA), cabling…etc.

I. SURGE ANALYSIS

The Contactor shall recheck and supply suitable pumping plant and surge suppression equipment
(if any) to ensure that transient pressure surges do not exceed the acceptable limits as per ADDC-
Water requirements.

The surge analysis shall be carried out by a highly qualified expert with a least 10 years of practice
and experience in projects of equivalent nature and proportion.

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 12 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

The Contractor shall submit the C.V. of the surge specialist for ADDC-Water approval.

The Contractor shall perform his own assessment of the pressure transients as per ADDC-Water
requirements and instruction, and shall submit three copies of a report and calculations on the surge
in the system within 3 months of contract commencement to enable surge suppression equipment
(if any) to be manufactured in time for delivery and installation if found necessary.

The Contractor shall use the software requested by ADDC-Water to conduct the surge analysis
study.

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining ADDC-Water approval on the surge analysis
study.

The Contractor shall include for all necessary surge suppression equipment. The equipment (if any)
should be compatible with the characteristics of the pumping plant proposed.

3.6 PUMPING STATION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. GENERAL
Where needed, a new PLC/RTU shall be provided in replacement of existing control cabinet (under
control section), therefore the below are applicable:

• PLC/RTU cabinet for the pumping station shall be used for monitoring and controlling the irrigation
pumps and all the above-mentioned instruments and interfaces as indicated in the system architecture.
The PLC/RTU cabinet will have its power supply fed from UPS and should have permission for
connecting to remote control station. Operator access for monitoring and control shall be via suitable
sized touch screen HMI.

• Included herein are functional descriptions of the process instrumentation and control system which
will specify the responsibility of I&C System Supplier. These descriptions are to supplement the
Instrumentation Drawings and neither is complete without the other. If devices other than shown on
the Drawings and/or specified herein are required to achieve the result required by the system
description these devices shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost.

• The instrumentation and control equipment are based on providing automatic operation in a
continuous process, real-time monitoring, control and alarming through a PLC system. The control
system shall provide a safe and stable pump station operation through a user-friendly interface.

• The control philosophy here described will provide the PLC programmer with the basic control logic
requirements. The control logic shall reside in the dual redundant hot standby fault tolerant
configuration PLC and shall have the facility for programming via a software configuration package.

• The PLC control logic shall be programmed with an engineering station compatible with the PLC and
the program shall be downloaded to each PLC.

B. Pumping Station
The final and detailed operation and control philosophy of the irrigation pumping station shall be prepared by
the Contractor based on the installed pumps and based on QCC design guidelines requirements.

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 13 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

Motor Operated Valves

- The motorized isolation valve shall be furnished with limit switches and local indicators. The isolation
valve status (open/close) shall be transmitted to the PLC. The motorized valve shall also have integral
Open/Close (OC) and Local/Off/Remote (LOR) selector switches mounted on the motor actuator.
The OC switch shall be activated when the LOR switch is in Local position only. The isolation valve
shall not operate when the LOR switch is in OFF position. When the LOR switch is in Remote
position, the motorized isolation valve shall be controlled by the PLC output.

- The motorized control valve shall be furnished with position transmitter and local position indicator
(0 to 100% opening position). The valves opening position shall be transmitted to the PLC. The valves
opening position will be transmitted to the PLC. The motorized control valves shall also have an
integral Open/Close/Stop (OCS) and Local/Off/Remote (LOR) selector switches mounted on the
actuator. The OCS switch shall be activated when the LOR switch is in the Local position. The
motorized control valve shall not operate when the LOR switch is in OFF position. When the LOR
switch is in Remote position, the motorized control valve shall be controlled by the PLC output.

- The status of the motorized control valves shall include Opened/Throttling/Closed. An alarm for the
motorized isolation valves and motorized control valves failure shall be also included. Failure of
motorized isolation and control valves shall be determined by the PLC when the valve response is not
matching with the PLC commands. On valve failure, the PLC output to open/close the valve will be
de-energized. Failure alarm shall be latched until reset by the operator.

- All motorized valves shall be interfaced to PLC and consequently have provision to be interfaced to
remote SCADA system.

Surge Vessels

- Two surge vessels, will be installed on the pumping station discharge header. Level indicating
transmitters (LIT’s), level switches and solenoid valves will be provided for each surge vessel
considering that the indicated instruments are for guidance purposes, to be updated by the pressure
vessel specialist based on procured equipment All instruments for the two vessels will be monitored
by the PLC HMI/ SCADA workstation as indicated in the related P&ID.

C. PLC System Requirements

QCC Standard Specifications for Control Systems (W-I-SS-002 – Latest revision) shall be followed.

D. Fertilizer System
The fertilizer mixer and pump are controlled and monitored from the MCC, and shall have provision to send
the monitored points to a remote system..

The fertilizer mixer and pump shall be controlled automatically or manually via local switches from the MCC.
When the irrigation system is OFF, the fertilizer mixer and pump are not idle. An alarm shall be indicated on
the PLC HMI/ SCADA system for any of the following:

• Mixer Fault

• Fertilizer Fault

• Low Level alarm in the fertilizer tank

E. Automatic Screen Filters

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 14 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
Upgrade of the Irrigation System and Rehabilitation
of Existing TSE Water Tanks and Pumping Station Specifications

Three automatic screens filters (2 duty / 1standby) shall be provided. The automatic screen filters shall be
controlled from their own dedicated factory control panel. Activation of the automatic screen filter shall be
performed by the operator. In case of unit failure an alarm shall be activated at the PLC HMI and SCADA
control Center.

F. Installation of Outdoor Instruments

Outdoor remotely mounted instruments (transmitters, local indicators, etc.) will be contained in well-
engineered weather proof NEMA 4X (IP 65) GRP boxes complying with the following minimum
requirements:

• The internal dimensions of the GRP box shall be at least three times the transmitter dimensions to
allow proper ventilation and access for maintenance.

• The GRP box shall have a small window for meter reading and its orientation shall be to the north to
minimize direct sunlight.

• The GRP box shall have one opening for ventilation with mesh to prevent increase of temperature
inside the box. The ventilation opening shall be designed to prevent dust to enter inside the box.

• The box shall be protected by canopy mounted on the top of box.

END OF SECTION 328400

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - Page 15 of 15

UIN-DAR-PW-PM-SP-00003-REV00
VISUAL INSPECTION OF TSE TANK
VISUAL INSPECTION OF TSE TANK (INTERNAL FACE)
MASDAR CITY
Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.

Submitted to: ENGIE Solutions

Dec 13th, 2021

2021 © SIMCO Technologies Inc. - All Rights Reserved

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 3

2 DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................................................................... 3

2.1 DOCUMENTS OBTAINED FROM THE CLIENT ...................................................................................................... 3

2.2 CODES, STANDARDS AND GUIDES ................................................................................................................... 3

3 PROJECT BACKGROUND .......................................................................................................................... 3

4 OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................................................................. 4

5 FIELD INVESTIGATION .............................................................................................................................. 4

5.1 VISUAL SURVEY AND ACOUSTIC HAMMER SOUNDING ......................................................................................... 5

Walls .............................................................................................................................................................. 6
Columns & Partition wall between chambers ................................................................................................ 7
Soffit Slab ....................................................................................................................................................... 9
External Face ................................................................................................................................................ 11

6 FINDINGS............................................................................................................................................... 12

6.1 EXTERNAL FACE ....................................................................................................................................... 12

6.2 INTERNAL FACE ........................................................................................................................................ 12
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 2 of 12
 1 INTRODUCTION
SIMCO Technologies Inc. (SIMCO) was approached by ENGIE Solutions to carry out a Visual Inspection
of the internal faces of elevated Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE) Tank in Masdar City, Abu Dhabi.

The study focused on defects observed on the internal faces of the tank. This report presents the
complete findings of the visual inspection at internal walls & soffit of the tank structure.

2 DOCUMENTATION
2.1 DOCUMENTS OBTAINED FROM THE CLIENT
No as built drawings or other related documents to the project were provided by the client during the
inspection.

2.2 CODES, STANDARDS AND GUIDES

▪ ACI 201.1R-08 Guide for Conducting a Visual Inspection of Concrete in Service.
▪ ACI 311.4R-05 Guide for Concrete Inspection.
▪ ACI 364.1R-07 Guide for Evaluation of Concrete Structures before Rehabilitation.

3 PROJECT BACKGROUND
The Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE) tank is located in Masdar City, Abu Dhabi, UAE. Figure 1 shows the
general view of TSE tank. The 8-year old structure is mainly used for the storage of water which is used
for irrigation of plantation inside Masdar City.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 1: TSE Tank – Masdar City

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 3 of 12
 The structure is 46.8m in length x 46.8m wide and 5.5m high with two internal compartments having
supported by 8 columns in each chamber. The structure is made of concrete walls and rested over the
concrete base. The base of concrete has 900mm offset from the outside wall face. The tank is built
over the earth retained structure and elevated from the ground level.

4 OBJECTIVES
The specific objectives of the investigation were to visually identify any observable defects or
deterioration (cracking, delamination, concrete spalling, corrosion, etc.) on the internal faces of the
water tank. inside

5 FIELD INVESTIGATION
Field investigative efforts were performed by SIMCO’s team on Dec 10th, 2021. Field activities
consisted of visual inspection on all internal faces and with acoustic sounding on random accessible
areas. The tank was filled with water for upto 0.8m high during the inspection hence, tank floor slab
was not inspected. All necessary arrangements related to health & safety were done prior to entering
the confined space.

Figure 2: Confined Space Entry

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 3: Photos during inspection

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 4 of 12
 5.1 VISUAL SURVEY AND ACOUSTIC HAMMER SOUNDING
A visual survey and hammer sounding were carried on accessible external surfaces of the tank. The
visual survey mainly consisted of close inspection of all accessible elements of wall and soffit recording
observed defects. The acoustic (hammer) sounding survey was performed on random areas with a
hammer to detect any sign of hollow sounding surfaces which generally indicate presence of concrete
delamination.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 4: General View of tank from the inside

During this process, signs of deterioration and anomalies such as cracks, efflorescence, delamination,
spalls, rust stains, or other forms of distress were meant to be recorded. However, there were no such
major concrete deterioration found. Photographs were taken during the inspection to record the
observed condition.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 5 of 12
 WALLS

Figure 5: General Appearance of tank inner wall

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 6: photos showing water level (left) and closer view of the existing coating (right)

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 6 of 12
 Figure 7: photos showing inlet/outlet pipe penetrations on wall

COLUMNS & PARTITION WALL BETWEEN CHAMBERS

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 8: Signs of leakage and stains on partition wall

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 7 of 12
 Figure 9: Closer view of damaged waterproof coating on partition wall
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 10: Closer view of damaged waterproof coating

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 8 of 12
 Figure 11: photos showing columns

SOFFIT SLAB
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 12: General view of the soffit slab

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 9 of 12
 Figure 13: photo showing water droplets on soffit due to moisture
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 14: Gaps observed on soffit slab panels on one location

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 10 of 12
 EXTERNAL FACE

Figure 15: Photos showing defects identified previously on external face of wall
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 16: Photos showing defects identified previously on external face of wall

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 11 of 12
 6 FINDINGS
6.1 EXTERNAL FACE
In General, the TSE tank external wall was observed to have delamination, spalling, exposed corroded
rebar with section loss, corrosion stains and sign of previous injection work. The perimeter tank base
was found to be fully delaminated and spalled with most of exposed rebars presents corrosion with
section loss. These defects were identified previously during the external inspection.

6.2 INTERNAL FACE

The following observations were made on the internal face:

• The tank has 2 chambers and each chamber has 8 columns within to support the structure.
• The tank was filled with almost 0.8 m water during inspection and hence no inspection for the
floor could be carried out.
• The tank has a waterproof coating on the inside and is found to be bonded with the surface
but looks very poorly finished as per industry standards. There are chances of numerous
pinholes eventually causing failure of waterproofing which can affect the structure.
• Ares where random hammer sounding is done shows no delamination sign.
• There were few minor leakage spots observed on the partition wall between chambers on the
coating.
• At one location the soffit panel had a small gap between the joints.
• It is understood that no waterproofing has been done on the columns and soffit slab.

7 RECOMMENDATIONS
Based on the existing conditions, the following recommendations are done to ensure the longer
life of the structure:
• Since the waterproofing is poor condition, the entire coating has to be removed and reinstated
with new waterproofing system.
• The waterproofing shall be applied to all surfaces (floor, columns and soffit slabs) and utmost
care taken shall be taken for the terminations and joints.
• After removal of existing waterproofing, condition of the substrate concrete shall be
thoroughly checked for any signs of delamination, spall, cracks etc.
• All the cracks and other deterioration shall be repaired accordingly.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

• Cathodic Protection system installed on external should be design to provide protection to

internal steel if deemed necessary.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 12 of 12
CONDITION ASSESSMENT
CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.

O/Ref: IN589759-00

Submitted to: ENGIE Solutions

August 05th , 2021

2021 © SIMCO Technologies Inc. - All Rights Reserved

 O/Ref: IN589759

PREPARED BY
VERSION AUTHOR REVIEWED BY APPROVED BY

REV-00
Ilangovan Nallasamy Patrich Zapanta Dr. Mohsen Mazraeh

VERSION CONTROL
REASON FOR ISSUE, SUMMARY OF REVISIONS BETWEEN THIS VERSION AND
VERSION
THE PREVIOUS VERSION
Draft Report Complete report issued for approval
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 2 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

LIMITED LIABILITY STATEMENT

THIS REPORT IS FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE OF SIMCO TECHNOLOGIES INC. (“SIMCO”)’S CLIENT AND IS
PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” BASIS WITH NO WARRANTIES, IMPLIED OR EXPRESSED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
WITH RESPECT TO THE SERVICES PROVIDED. SIMCO ASSUMES NO LIABILITY TO ANY PARTY FOR ANY
LOSS, EXPENSE OR DAMAGE OCCASIONED BY THE USE OF THIS REPORT. ONLY THE CLIENT IS
AUTHORIZED TO COPY OR DISTRIBUTE THIS REPORT AND THEN ONLY IN ITS ENTIRETY. THE REPORT’S
OBSERVATIONS AND TEST RESULTS ARE RELEVANT ONLY TO THE SAMPLES TESTED AND ARE BASED
ON IDENTICAL TESTING CONDITIONS. FURTHERMORE, THIS REPORT IS INTENDED FOR THE USE OF
INDIVIDUALS WHO ARE COMPETENT TO EVALUATE THE SIGNIFICANCE AND LIMITATIONS OF ITS
CONTENT AND RECOMMENDATIONS AND WHO ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE APPLICATION OF
THE MATERIAL IT CONTAINS.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 3 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 6

2 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................. 6

2.1 DOCUMENTS OBTAINED FROM THE CLIENT .........................................................................................................6

2.2 CODES, STANDARDS AND GUIDES ......................................................................................................................6
3 PROJECT BACKGROUND .......................................................................................................................... 7

4 OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................................... 9

4.1 SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES ......................................................................................................................................9
4.2 SCOPE OF WORK ...........................................................................................................................................9
4.2.1 Field investigation ................................................................................................................................9
4.2.2 Laboratory testing ............................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.3 Test Locations .................................................................................................................................... 10

5 EXISTING DOCUMENT REVIEW .............................................................................................................. 11

6 FIELD INVESTIGATION ........................................................................................................................... 11
6.1 VISUAL SURVEY AND ACOUSTIC HAMMER SOUNDING ........................................................................................ 11
Walls ............................................................................................................................................................... 12
Tank Base:....................................................................................................................................................... 18
Tank Roof: ....................................................................................................................................................... 20
Other Elements: .............................................................................................................................................. 21
6.2 TESTING LOCATIONS.................................................................................................................................... 21
6.3 CONCRETE COVER AND REINFORCEMENT LAYOUT (USING GPR) ........................................................................ 22
6.4 BREAKOUT WINDOW OBSERVATIONS ............................................................................................................ 23
6.5 CARBONATION DEPTH ................................................................................................................................. 25
6.6 HALF CELL POTENTIAL MEASUREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 26
6.7 LINEAR POLARIZATION RESISTANCE................................................................................................................ 32

7 LABORATORY TESTING ON CONCRETE .................................................................................................. 34

7.1 CONCRETE CORE DIMENSIONS AND OBSERVATIONS ........................................................................................... 34
7.2 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ............................................................................................................................. 34
7.3 CHLORIDE ION CONTAMINATION PROFILES ...................................................................................................... 36
7.4 SULPHATE CONTENT ANALYSIS...................................................................................................................... 37
8 FINDINGS .............................................................................................................................................. 39
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

8.1 VISUAL INSPECTION..................................................................................................................................... 39

8.2 FIELD TESTING AND LABORATORY RESULTS ..................................................................................................... 39

9 INTERPRETATIONS & DISCUSSIONS ....................................................................................................... 40

9.1 CHLORIDE INDUCED CORROSION .................................................................................................................... 40
9.2 CARBONATION INDUCED CORROSION ............................................................................................................. 41

10 CONCLUSION ......................................................................................................................................... 42

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 4 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

11 RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 43
12 REPAIR OPTIONS ................................................................................................................................... 44
12.1 CONCRETE REPAIR ...................................................................................................................................... 44
12.2 MOISTURE OR OXYGEN RESTRICTION - PROTECTIVE COATINGS............................................................................ 44
12.3 PRESERVING OR RESTORING PASSIVITY ........................................................................................................... 44
12.3.1 Cathodic Protection (CP)............................................................................................................... 45

APPENDICES

APPENDIX A – DEFECT MAPPING

APPENDIX B – TESTING LOCATION

APPENDIX C – GPR SURVEY

APPENDIX D – BREAKOUT WINDOW

APPENDIX E – HCP

APPENDIX F – LPR

APPENDIX G – CORE LOG

APPENDIX H – LAB RESULTS

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 5 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

1 INTRODUCTION
SIMCO Technologies Inc. (SIMCO) was hired by ENGIE Solutions to carry out a condition assessment
of elevated Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE) Tank in Masdar City, Abu Dhabi. As per the Contract
Agreement TRN: 100044498200003/Purchase Order: PD00011299 dated 16th of June 2021.

The study focused on investigating the causes of the defects observed on the external faces of the
tank. This report presents the complete findings of the field work including sampling and testing
performed at selected locations of tank walls and top slab and provide recommendation for
rehabilitation of the structure.

2 DOCUMENTATION

2.1 DOCUMENTS OBTAINED FROM THE CLIENT

No as built drawings or other related documents to the project were provided by the client during the
course of this study.

2.2 CODES, STANDARDS AND GUIDES

▪ ACI 117-10 – Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
▪ ACI 201.1R-08 Guide for Conducting a Visual Inspection of Concrete in Service.
▪ ACI 228.2R-13 Report on Nondestructive Test Methods for Evaluation of Concrete in Structures.
▪ ACI 224.1R-07 Causes, Evaluation, and Repair of Cracks in Concrete Structures.
▪ ACI 231R-10 Report on Early-Age Cracking: Causes, Measurement, and Mitigation.
▪ ACI 311.4R-05 Guide for Concrete Inspection.
▪ ACI 364.1R-07 Guide for Evaluation of Concrete Structures before Rehabilitation.
▪ ACI 562-13 – Code Requirements for Evaluation, Repair, and Rehabilitation of Concrete Buildings.
▪ BS 8500-1 :2006, Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1.
▪ ISO 16311-2:2014: Maintenance and repair of concrete structures – Part 2: Assessment of existing
concrete structure.
▪ International Standard Organization (ISO) documents:
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

▪ ISO 16311-2014 – Maintenance and repair of concrete structures – Part 2: Assessment of

existing concrete structures.
▪ ISO 16311-2014 – Maintenance and repair of concrete structures – Part 3: Design of repairs and
prevention.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 6 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

3 PROJECT BACKGROUND
The Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE) tank is located in Masdar City, Abu Dhabi, UAE. Figure 1 shows the
aerial view of TSE tank. The 8-year old structure is mainly used for the storage of water which is used
for irrigation of plantation inside Masdar City.

Figure 1: Aerial View of TSE Tank – Masdar City

The structure is 46.8m in length x 46.8m wide and 5.5m high with two internal compartments. The
structure is made of concrete walls and rested over the concrete base. The base of concrete has
900mm offset from the outside wall face. The tank is built over the earth retained structure and
elevated from the ground level. Figure 2 shows the general view of TSE tank.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 7 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 2: TSE Tank – Masdar City

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 8 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

4 OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE OF WORK

4.1 SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES
The specific objectives of the investigation were to:

▪ Determine the nature and extent of any deterioration (cracking, delamination, concrete spalling,
corrosion, etc.) of the structure.
▪ Determine probable root cause(s) of observed deterioration.
▪ Determine the likelihood and risk of future deterioration of the structure.
▪ Develop options for repair and preventative maintenance

4.2 SCOPE OF WORK

The condition assessment would be mainly non-destructive and relatively unobtrusive. The focus of
this assessment will be on the selected external reinforced concrete elements of the TSE tank.

The scope of work will be,

▪ Perform a desk study of all available data.

▪ Perform Non-destructive testing (NDT) and Semi-destructive testing (SDT) on concrete structural
elements (top and soffit).
▪ Material sampling and testing to confirm extend of deterioration.
▪ Assessment of probable failure scenarios (root cause analysis).
▪ Provide recommendation for rehabilitation including provisions of repair options.
It should be noted that the scope of this proposal is based on the condition/quality of reinforced
concrete and does not constitute in any way a structural analysis of the elements.
This report summarizes the findings of the visual inspection, the laboratory test results obtained from
the concrete testing program, discussion and conclusions on root cause and deterioration mechanisms
along with the recommendations for repair of the subject areas.

4.2.1 FIELD INVESTIGATION

A testing program was established, and condition assessment activities were planned. Non-
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

destructive testing and semi-destructive testing including concrete sampling was carried out on
structural elements supplemented by laboratory testing. The following field tasks were performed
during the field work:

▪ Visual Survey including determination of incidence of cracks, delamination, spalls, rust stains.
▪ Acoustic Sounding in accordance with ASTM D4580 - Standard Practice for Measuring
Delamination in Concrete Bridge Decks by Sounding.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 9 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

▪ Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) in accordance with ASTM D6432 – Standard Guide for Using the
Surface Ground Penetrating Radar Method for Subsurface Investigation.
▪ Window Break-Out (BW) for determining reinforcement bar size, concrete cover and to check
condition of rebar along with depth of carbonation.
▪ Half-Cell Potential (HCP) in accordance with ASTM C876 – Standard test Method for Corrosion
Potentials of Uncoated Reinforcing Steel in Concrete.
▪ Linear Polarization Resistance (LPR) in accordance with ASTM G59 – Standard test Method for
LPR of Uncoated Reinforcing Steel in Concrete.
▪ Extraction of cores for determination of compressive strength and to determine extent of
contamination by chloride and sulphate ions.

4.2.2 LABORATORY TESTING

Laboratory tests will be conducted on concrete cores extracted during the field operations. The
laboratory test results complement the field observations in terms of qualification and quantification
(properties and/or current contamination). The laboratory investigation includes the following tests:

▪ Determination of compressive strength by concrete core testing in accordance with BS EN 12504

- Testing concrete in structures. Cored specimens. Taking, examining and testing in compression.
▪ Extent of contamination by chloride and sulphate ions in accordance with BS 1881 part 124 –
Testing Concrete, Methods for analysis of hardened concrete

4.2.3 TEST LOCATIONS

The investigation was performed at selected representative locations using diverse types of
non-destructive and semi-destructive testing. The test locations were distributed at various areas so
that all the different elements of the structure were taken into consideration.

The Test Locations layout is provided in the figure below.

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 10 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

5 EXISTING DOCUMENT REVIEW

It is understood that there is no existing civil drawings & calculations available in any format.

6 FIELD INVESTIGATION
Field investigative efforts were performed by SIMCO’s team from June 29th to July 6th, 2021. Field
activities consisted of visual inspection with acoustic sounding, non-destructive testing and semi
Visual inspection and Acoustic Sounding.

6.1 VISUAL SURVEY AND ACOUSTIC HAMMER SOUNDING

A visual survey and hammer sounding was carried on accessible external surfaces of the tank. The
visual survey mainly consisted of close inspection of all accessible elements and recording observed
defects. The acoustic (hammer) sounding survey was performed on all concrete surfaces with a
hammer to detect any sign of hollow sounding surfaces which generally indicate presence of concrete
delamination.

During this process, signs of deterioration and anomalies such as cracks, efflorescence, delamination,
spalls, rust stains, or other forms of distress were recorded. The condition of the elements was marked
on drawings as shown in Figure 3. Full markup drawing is presented at Appendix B.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Wall - 04

Figure 3: Typical Defect Mapping

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 11 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Below figure presents the key plan for the wall

Figure 4: TSE Tank – Key Plan

WALLS
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

▪ Concrete spalling
▪ Concrete delamination / hollow sound areas
▪ Sign of previous injection works
▪ Exposed corroded rebar
▪ Corrosion stains

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 12 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 5: Wall 1 – Defect Area 1

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 6: Wall 1 – Defect Area 2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 13 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 7: Wall 1 – Defect Area 3

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 8: Wall 1 – Defect Area 4

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 14 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 9: Wall 2 – Defect Area 1

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 10: Wall 2 – Defect Area 2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 15 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 11: Wall 2 – Defect Area 3

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 12: Wall 2 – Defect Area 4

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 16 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 13: Wall 3 – Defect Area 1

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 14: Wall 3 – Defect Area 2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 17 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 15: Wall 4 – Defect Area 1

TANK BASE:
The Base of the tank extends one meter perpendicular to the face of the TSE tank wall. Delamination
and spalling was observed in most of the visible portion of the tank base as shown in the defect
mapping. Severe section loss was observed on the exposed bars.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 18 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 16: Tank Base – Defect Area 1

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 17: Tank Base – Defect Area 2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 19 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

TANK ROOF:
Top of the tank appears to be constructed with hollow core slabs with asphalt weathering finish which
appeared to in good condition. There are water ponds observed in the mid span of the roof slab. The
manhole were found to be delaminated on the external surfaces. Below Figure 18 and Figure 19
illustrates the condition of tank roof.

Figure 18: Tank Roof – Defect Area 1

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 19: Inside Tank – Defect Area 1

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 20 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

OTHER ELEMENTS:
The sump adjacent to the main TSE tank is fully delaminated and spalling of concrete. Figure 20
illustrates defects in the other elements of the TSE Tank.

Figure 20: Sump – Defect Area 1

6.2 TESTING LOCATIONS

Based on the visual observations and investigations, the accessible locations were chosen to perform
the testing activities to understand condition of elements and extent of defects. The summary of the
testing locations is listed in the below Figure 21.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 21: Defect Mapping – Wall Elevations

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 21 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

6.3 CONCRETE COVER AND REINFORCEMENT LAYOUT (USING GPR)

The concrete cover and reinforcement layout were measured onsite using the portable Ground
Penetrating Radar (GPR) – Proceq GPR Live. The data generated during the survey was analyzed to
interpret the position of the steel reinforcement and the concrete cover over the reinforcement in
surveyed areas.

A visual representation of the data processed is shown in Figure 22. The white parabolas indicate the
location of the steel reinforcement. The position of the bars corresponds to the center of the parabola,
while the depth of the bars corresponds to the peak of the parabolas where the signal is the strongest
(white).

Figure 22: Typical GPR Data from Cover Survey Showing Rebars

Table 1 present the summary of recorded. The details of the GPR scan with images are presented in
Appendix C.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 22 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Table 1 – Summary of Data from GPR Survey

Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar Concrete Cover

GPR No Location
Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) Min/Max (mm)

GPR#1 Tank Top 200 200 25 / 65

Wall -04
GPR#2 150 135 60 / 90
(5m-8m)
Wall -01
GPR#3 (45m to 46m; 150 140 60 / 105
8m)
Wall -04
GPR#4 150 150 60 / 125
Loc -01

Wall -02
GPR#5 150 145 35 / 70
Loc -01
Wall -02
GPR#6 Loc -02 150 150 70
Bottom
Wall -02
GPR#7 150 145 30 / 50
Loc -02
Wall -01
GPR#8 150 150 20 / 65
Loc -02
Wall -03
GPR#9 145 145 20
Loc -01
Wall -02
GPR#10 150 150 30 / 60
Loc -01

Out of 10 location, GPR 6 shows concrete cover from 20mm to 35mm while the remaining 4 locations
shows concrete cover of 60mm to 70mm. No design details were provided during the study to relate
the data gathered against the design parameters.

6.4 BREAKOUT WINDOW OBSERVATIONS

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Break-out windows are openings made within the structure to validate the reinforcement location,
diameter, and condition. Breakout windows were made at test locations and were also done on
delaminated/hollow sounding areas to verify the extent of corrosion. The GPR was used to locate the
rebar to enable both vertical and horizontal steel to be exposed. Reinforcement configurations
obtained from breakout windows are detailed in Appendix F and summarized in Table 2. Figure 23
shows a typical break out window.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 23 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 23: Typical Breakout Window and Recordings

Table 2 – Summary of Breakout Window Observations

Original Measured Calculated Measured

BW ID Open From Dia. Dia. section Cover
(mm) (mm) Loss (%) (mm)
WALL-03 1st: 14 1st: 13.41 1st: 0
BW#01 Good Area 25
(LOC-01) 2nd: 14 2nd: 13.42 2nd: 0

WALL-01 1st: 14 1st: 13.17 1st: 11.5

BW#02 Delamination 25
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

(LOC#02) 2nd: 14 2nd: 13.50 2nd: 7

1st: 14 1st: 13.76 1st: 3

WALL-01 BW#3
Delamination 25
(LOC#02)
2nd: 14 2nd: 13.69 2nd: 4

WALL-02 1st: 12 1st: 10.8

1st: 11.33
BW#02 Delamination 20
2nd: 12.14
(LOC#02) 2nd: 12 2nd: 0

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 24 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Original Measured Calculated Measured

BW ID Open From Dia. Dia. section Cover
(mm) (mm) Loss (%) (mm)
WALL-02 1st: 14 1st: 13.28 1st: 10
BW#01 Delamination 25
(LOC#01) 2nd: 14 2nd: 13.79 2nd: 0

WALL-04 1st: 12 1st: 11.44 1st: 9

BW#01 Delamination 33
(LOC#01) 2nd: 12 2nd: 12.35 2nd: 0

It can be observed through break out windows that the reinforcement in delaminated area are
corroding with section loss. It can also observe that the concrete covers varies from 20mm to 33mm.

6.5 CARBONATION DEPTH

Concrete is a highly alkaline material. It is because of this high alkalinity that embedded steel in
concrete is naturally protected from corrosion. The high concentration of hydroxide ions in the cement
paste provides a natural protective passive oxide layer with high pH. If the pH decreases below a
certain value, the oxides layer composition is modified. The protective layer at the surface of the
reinforcement is dissolved, which leads to corrosion initiation. The normal pH of concrete is around
13 in normal conditions, but can decrease when exposed to carbon dioxide, or contaminants. A pH
reduction can be caused by anything that disturbs the chemical equilibrium in the concrete pore
solution. Carbonation is one of these mechanisms. It occurs when carbon dioxide (CO2) contained in
the atmosphere diffuses through the porous network and reacts with calcium hydroxide, creating
calcium carbonate (CaCO3). This reaction consumes hydroxide ions and decreases the pH.
Carbonation is however a slow process and its rate is normally expressed as a function of the square
root of time.

The pH of the concrete was determined with a phenolphthalein indicator. The test is carried out by
spraying the indicator on freshly broken concrete surfaces. A pink color indicates that the concrete is
not carbonated. This test was carried out while performing the breakout openings presented in
Appendix D. Table 3 summarized the carbonation depth measured from breakout windows.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 25 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Table 3 – Summary of Carbonation Depth Testing

Depth Of Carbonation
Location Element
(mm)

WALL-03 BW#01 (LOC-01) Wall 4

WALL-01 BW#02 (LOC#02) Wall 10

WALL-01 BW#03 (LOC#02) Wall 12

WALL-02 BW#02 (LOC#02) Wall 20

WALL-02 BW#01 (LOC#01) Wall 7

WALL-04 BW#01 (LOC#01) Wall 0

In general carbonation is present within cover zone and still didn’t reach the rebar zone.

6.6 HALF CELL POTENTIAL MEASUREMENTS

Half-Cell potential measurements were performed following the procedure outlined in ASTM C876.
This test allows to evaluate the potential difference between the embedded steel reinforcement and
a reference electrode. Since there is continuity in the reinforcement layout of a structure, the potential
can be measured from the porous concrete surface when a connection is made with the
reinforcement.

A connection with the reinforcement is created through an opening and the continuity of the
reinforcement system is verified by checking the connectivity between two distinct openings. The test
thus creates a connection between a reference electrode and the reinforcement. A multimeter is used
to measure the difference in potential between the electrode laid at the concrete surface and the
underlying reinforcement.

The measurements are recorded on grids to produce half-cell potential mappings. Figure 24 presents
the test principle behind ASTM C876.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 26 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 24: Half-Cell Potential Principle (Image from ASTM C876)

The readings obtained by performing this test are interpreted to evaluate the probability of active
corrosion in the embedded reinforcement. Usually, more negative potentials indicate a higher
probability of active corrosion. The relationship between the probability of corrosion and the
measured potential depends on the type of reference electrode used for the measurement. For this
project, a silver/silver-chloride electrode was used to assess the corrosion activity. The ASTM C876
provides interpretative guidelines for the evaluation of corrosion probability for reinforcing steel in
concrete as a function of the corrosion potential. Table 4 presents the corrosion probability associated
with these electrodes.

Table 4: Risk of Corrosion as a Function of the Corrosion Potential (ASTM C876)

CORROSION PROBABILITY CORROSION POTENTIAL (E) WRT CORROSION POTENTIAL (E) WRT
(P) % CU/CUSO4 REFERENCE ELECTRODE AG/AGCL REFERENCE ELECTRODE
P < 10% E >-200 E > -100
10 > P < 90 -350 < E < -200 -250 < E < -100
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

P > 90% E < -350 E < -250

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 27 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Table 5 presents the summary of the measured potentials and the corrosion risk for tested areas. All
the data tables and contour maps are provided in Appendix F.

Table 5: Summary of Half-cell test Data

Min Steel Max Steel

Risk of
BW ID Element Potential Potential
Corrosion
(mV) (mV)
WALL-03
HCP#01 Wall -346 114 Low to High
(LOC-01)

WALL-01
HCP#02 Wall -296 117 Low to High
(LOC#02)

WALL-01
Medium to
HCP#03 Wall -452 -160
High
(LOC#02)

WALL-02
HCP#04 Wall -379 126 Low to High
(LOC#02)

WALL-02
Medium to
HCP#05 Wall -427 -277
High
(LOC#01)

WALL-04
Medium to
HCP#06 Wall -364 -158
High
(LOC#01)

Whilst absolute potentials are useful and provide an indication of the probability of corrosion, ASTM
C876 also requires that color contour maps are produced to enable assessment of potential
differences across a testing area and locate the corrosion hotspots. Figure 25 to Figure 30 shows
contour map of steel potentials with respect to silver/silver chloride (Ag/AgCl) reference electrode for
superimpose over the test locations.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 28 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 25: Half-Cell Potential Contour Map (HCP#1)

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 26: Half-Cell Potential Contour Map (HCP#2)

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 29 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 27: Half-Cell Potential Contour Map (HCP#2)

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 28: Half-Cell Potential Contour Map (HCP#2)

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 30 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 29: Half-Cell Potential Contour Map (HCP#2)

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Figure 30: Half-Cell Potential Contour Map (HCP#2)

The above readings and images show high risk of corrosion potential. The same was validated though
the breakout windows performed on these locations.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 31 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

6.7 LINEAR POLARIZATION RESISTANCE

After measuring half-cell potentials, the most anodic points of each grid were used to determine the
corrosion rates. Corrosion rates are evaluated using linear polarization resistance (LPR), which is an
advanced non-destructive testing (NDT) technique that enables the actual corrosion rate of the
reinforcing steel to be measured. This method accurately determines the corrosion related
deterioration process occurring inside the concrete by polarizing the steel with a DC current and
evaluating the relationship between the amount of current and the level of polarization of the anodes
and cathodes within the steel.

The steel area underneath the concrete surface, determined using break-out windows and GPR
readings. The corrosion rates were measured using Linear Polarization Resistance (LPR) in μm/yr. LPR
was carried out at the most anodic (high negative potential) areas identified by half-cell.

Corrosion rates were measured using BAC Linear Polarization Resistance meter. The results are
summarized below and presented in detail within Appendix G. Table 6 presents a qualitative
interpretation of LPR readings in accordance with RILEM TC-EMC.

Table 6: Interpretation of Corrosion Rates as per RILEM TC-EMC

CORROSION RATE (µM/YR) CORROSION PROBABILITY P (%)

<1 Negligible
BETWEEN 1 & 5 Low
BETWEEN 5 & 10 Moderate

>10 High

The corrosion rates measured for each location are presented in Table 7 and categorized into bands
of corrosion activity. The results show that the corrosion rates range from negligible to high.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 32 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Table 7: Summary of Corrosion Rates

Corrosion Rate (µm/year) Risk of

BW ID Element
Minimum Maximum Corrosion

WALL-03 BW#01 Negligible to

Wall 0.55 7.88
(LOC-01) Moderate

WALL-01 BW#02 Negligible to

Wall 0.48 8.34
(LOC#02) Moderate

WALL-01 BW#3 Moderate to

Wall 9.78 18.19
(LOC#02) High

WALL-02 BW#02 Low to

Wall 4.35 7.29
(LOC#02) Moderate

WALL-02 BW#01
Wall 28.88 30.92 High
(LOC#01)

WALL-04 BW#01 Negligible to

Wall 0.66 1.59
(LOC#01) Moderate
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 33 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

7 LABORATORY TESTING ON CONCRETE

7.1 CONCRETE CORE DIMENSIONS AND OBSERVATIONS

Upon reception of the cores, they were examined, and photo documented; dimensions and visual
observations were noted. Photographs of the cores, observations and measurements are presented
in Appendix G.

Figure 31 shows a typical sheet with the observations and the pictures from all the cores extracted
including cores for Compressive Strength (6 cores), Chloride and Sulphate analysis (1 cores & 8 dusts)
and a total of 9 samples.

Figure 31: Typical Record of Core Samples

7.2 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

Concrete cores were tested for compressive strength in accordance with BS EN 12504-1 (Testing
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

concrete in structures. Cored specimens. Taking, examining and testing in compression). The data
obtained is summarized below and the third-party laboratory report is presented in Appendix H.

The results of any tests carried out on the core specimens will give an in-situ compressive strength of
the concrete that, for assessment purposes, needs to be converted into an equivalent in-situ cube or
cylinder strength. If an estimate of the characteristic compressive strength of standard test specimens

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 34 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

as used in the original structural design is needed, further corrections shall be applied, and
consultation with BS EN 13791 and BS 6089 is needed.

In order to express the in-situ compressive strength as in-situ cylinder strength, adjustments are
applied for the length/diameter ratio (λ) by using following equation from BS EN 12504-1. Correction
factors (Kis) for the core dimensions are given by:

Table 8 shows the summary of the compressive results for the 6 cores taken on site.

Table 8 – Summary of Compressive Strength Testing

Core Core Corrected

Max.
Dia./ Density Comp. Comp.
Core ID Location Load
Length (Kg/m3) Strength Strength
(KN)
(mm) (N/mm2) (N/mm2)
CC#1 WALL-03 (LOC-01) 74/187 2280 174 40.6 40.8

CC#2 WALL-01 (LOC-02) 74/157 2330 200 46.5 46.7

CC#3 WALL-01 (LOC-01) 74/192 2330 153 35.6 35.8

CC#4 WALL-02 (LOC-02) 74/174 2270 114 26.5 26.7

CC#5 WALL-02 (LOC-01) 74/175 2310 233 54.1 54.4

CC#6 WALL-04 (LOC-01) 74/153 2330 237 55.1 55.7

Minimum Compressive Strength (N/mm2) 26.7

Maximum Compressive Strength (N/mm2) 55.7

Average Compressive Strength (N/mm2) 43.35

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Equivalent cube compressive strength from core samples extracted from TSE tank walls varies from
26.7 to 55.7 MPa. The density of concrete varies from 2270 kg/m3 to 2330 kg/m3.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 35 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

7.3 CHLORIDE ION CONTAMINATION PROFILES

The chloride content was determined in accordance with a procedure adapted from BS 1881 -124 -
Testing concrete. Methods for analysis of hardened concrete. The contamination was evaluated by
measuring the total chloride content at various depth increments. The data obtained is summarized
below and the third-party laboratory report is presented in Appendix H.

The generally accepted threshold is between 0.2% and 0.4% of chloride per weight of cement. A
threshold value of 0.3% of Chloride per weight of cement was used for analysis in this report. This can
be calculated into a threshold per weight of sample, the calculation and assumptions are presented
below.

Assumed weight of cement (kg/m3) = 400

Avg. Unit Weight of Concrete (kg/m3) = 2,308
Ratio - Cement: Concrete = 0.173
Threshold per Weight of Sample = Threshold per Weight of Cement x 0.173
Threshold per Weight of Sample = 0.30 x 0.173 = 0.0516

The data obtained for chloride contamination is presented in the Table 9 below and Chloride profile
graphs are presented in the following pages.

Table 9 – Summary of Chloride Contaminations

Results %
Core ID Location
0-20 25-45 50-75
CH#1 WALL-03 (LOC-01) 0.007 0.007 0.004
CH#2 WALL-01 (LOC-02) 0.092 0.071 0.057
CH#3 WALL-01 (LOC-01) 0.035 0.028 0.021
CH#4 WALL-02 (LOC-02) 0.142 0.142 0.028
CH#5 WALL-02 (LOC-02a) 0.163 0.128 0.050
CH#6 WALL-02 (LOC-01) 0.035 0.021 0.021
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

CH#7 WALL-02 (LOC-01a) 0.170 0.106 0.071

CH#8 WALL-04 (LOC-01) 0.078 0.057 0.043
CH#9 Footing Base 0.092 0.078 0.050

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 36 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 32: Chloride Content Profiles

In general, the chloride content in the concrete is above than the threshold value and exists beyond
the reinforcement cover region.

7.4 SULPHATE CONTENT ANALYSIS

The sulphate content was determined in accordance with a procedure adapted from BS 1881 -124 -
Testing concrete. Methods for analysis of hardened concrete. The contamination was evaluated by
measuring the total sulphate content at depth increments of 0 to 20mm. The data obtained is
summarized below and the third-party laboratory report is presented in Appendix H.

Generally, guides in the Arabian Gulf region limit the maximum allowable total sulphate (SO3) content
of concrete mix from all ingredients including cement to 4% by weight of cement. This can be
calculated per weight of sample; the calculation and assumptions are presented below.

Assumed weight of cement (kg/m3) = 400

Unit Weight of Concrete (kg/m3) = 2,308

Ratio - Cement: Concrete = 0.173

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

Threshold per Weight of Sample = Threshold per Weight of Cement x 0.173= 4.00 x 0.173 = 0.692

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 37 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Table 10 – Summary of Sulphate Contaminations

Results %
Core ID Location
0-20 25-45 50-75
CH#1 WALL-03 (LOC-01) 0.47 0.43 0.37
CH#2 WALL-01 (LOC-02) 0.41 0.38 0.33
CH#3 WALL-01 (LOC-01) 0.37 0.35 0.35
CH#4 WALL-02 (LOC-02) 0.37 0.34 0.29
CH#5 WALL-02 (LOC-02a) 0.45 0.43 0.42
CH#6 WALL-02 (LOC-01) 0.56 0.47 0.45
CH#7 WALL-02 (LOC-01a) 0.50 0.44 0.40
CH#8 WALL-04 (LOC-01) 0.44 0.38 0.37
CH#9 Footing Base 0.52 0.40 0.36

Figure 33: Sulphate Content Profiles

In general, the sulphate content in the concrete is less than the threshold.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 38 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

8 FINDINGS
8.1 VISUAL INSPECTION
Visual Inspection provided the following main findings:

In General, the TSE tank external wall is observed to have delamination, spalling, exposed corroded
rebar with section loss, corrosion stains and sign of previous injection work. The perimeter tank base
was found to be fully delaminated and spalled with most of exposed rebars presents corrosion with
section loss.

8.2 FIELD TESTING AND LABORATORY RESULTS

The findings from field tests and laboratory results are as follows.

▪ GPR Results: The GPR analysis showed that the concrete cover range from 20mm to 35mm.
▪ Breakout Window: In general, reinforcements were found to be corroded in the delaminated
section of the wall with reduction in actual rebar size. It also shows that concrete cover ranges
from 20mm to 33mm
▪ Carbonation Depth: In general, depth of carbonation is observed in all the breakout window
inspection within cover zone only.
▪ HCP & LPR: HCP readings show high risk of corrosion potential and LPR readings shows that the
corrosion rates range from negligible to high.
▪ Compressive Strength: Equivalent cube compressive strength from core samples extracted from
TSE tank walls varies from 26.7 to 55.7 MPa. The density of concrete varies from 2270 kg/m3 to
2330 kg/m3.
▪ Chloride Test: In general, the chloride content in the concrete is found to be above the threshold
limits and reached the rebar zone.
▪ Sulphate Test: In general, the sulphate content in the concrete is less than the threshold.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 39 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

9 INTERPRETATIONS & DISCUSSIONS

Based on the data obtained through field work and subsequent laboratory testing, below sections
describe causes and implication of main defects observed across the tank.

9.1 CHLORIDE INDUCED CORROSION

Corrosion of reinforcing steel in concrete often occurs due to ingress of chloride ions from ground
water or airborne chloride. The chloride ions penetrate through the concrete cover and cause
breakdown of the protective passive layer which forms on the steel surface due to the alkalinity of
concrete.

Chlorides can be highly detrimental to reinforced concrete structures. Continuous exposure of

reinforced concrete to chloride with an abundant supply of oxygen, greatly increases the risk of
localized corrosion of the embedded steel resulting in cracking and spalling of concrete and section
loss of the steel. The mechanism by which chloride ions disrupt the passive layer is unclear but
empirical testing has allowed a threshold contamination level to be defined with a high degree of
confidence. the threshold is typically referenced as 0.3% of total (acid soluble) chlorides by weight of
cement in a standard concrete sample. Once the passive layer on the steel has been disrupted, an
electrochemical cell can be formed in the presence of oxygen and moisture. The concrete provides
the electrolyte in the cell, with the steel rebar completing the circuit and transmitting electrons from
anode to cathode.

The moisture content of the concrete has a significant impact on the efficiency of the cell, since it
affects both the electrical resistance to the circuit and the chemical reactions.

As presented by the test results, the chloride content is above threshold value at the depth of the
steel zone causing corrosion to initiate resulting in delamination and spalling of concrete.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 40 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Figure 34. Schematic of corrosion induced spalling in concrete

9.2 CARBONATION INDUCED CORROSION

A slower process that also causes steel passivity breakdown is carbonation of the concrete due to
chemical reaction with atmospheric carbon dioxide. At low pH, reacted layer of concrete forms at the
surface and penetrates inward. When carbonation depth is equal to the rebar cover depth, steel de-
passivation takes place and corrosion begins. This process does not require chloride ions and may
cause steel corrosion. Progress in preventing chloride-induced corrosion has now significantly
extended the design service life of new structures, and slower forms of deterioration such as
carbonation-induced corrosion merit serious consideration when attempting to achieve a long service
life goal.

Carbonation depth was seen on the openings performed were within the cover zone. When the
carbonation reaches the steel rebar with low cover the steel corrosion is inevitable.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 41 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

10 CONCLUSION
▪ Deterioration was evident across the tank external walls and perimeter slab, predominantly the
defects were associated with chloride contamination reaching beyond the rebar, with subsequent
corrosion of the reinforcement and spalling of concrete. Hence the long-term durability has
already been compromised and remedial measures are required in the near term.
▪ Carbonation depths were found to be ranging from negligible to 20mm, indicative of high risk of
carbonation induced corrosion in future if sufficient oxygen and water are present in the vicinity
of the rebar.
▪ The causes of corrosion should be treated rather than only treating the symptoms such as cracking
and delamination.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 42 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

11 RECOMMENDATIONS
The recommendations for rehabilitation provided in this report are aimed at restoring the integrity
and passivity of the affected structural elements. It may be noted here that these recommendations
address the concrete deterioration issues and do not address shortcomings (if any) in the original
design of the structure.

Recommendations for rehabilitation are as below:

REPAIR RECOMMENDATIONS
ELEMENT DETERIORATION
Short Term Long Term
Cathodic Protection
- Concrete repair for a. Impressed Current Cathodic
EXTERNAL Chloride induced delaminated and spalled Protection (ICCP) – Mesh
WALL corrosion areas Overlay System
- Protective Coating b. Galvanic Anode System –
Zinc Mesh and Overlay
Cathodic Protection
- Full skin repair
a. Impressed Current Cathodic
- Protective Coating and
Chloride induced Protection (ICCP) – Mesh
BASE SLAB maintenance
corrosion Overlay System
- Waterproofing of below
b. Galvanic Anode System –
ground section
Zinc Mesh and Overlay
Cathodic Protection
- Full skin repair
c. Impressed Current Cathodic
- Protective Coating and
Chloride induced Protection (ICCP) – Mesh
SUMP PIT maintenance
corrosion Overlay System
- Waterproofing of below
d. Galvanic Anode System –
ground section
Zinc Mesh and Overlay

To prevent continued repair cycles, prevent increase in life cycle cost of the asset and to prevent any
structural failure or breach in safety we recommend a long term solution is implemented which would
include installation of a cathodic protection system in combination with concrete repairs.

Once the approach to repair has been agreed with the client SIMCO will provide a performance
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

specification which can be sued as part of the tender package.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 43 of 54
12 REPAIR OPTIONS
This section discusses repair solution that are considered for reinforced concrete elements in relation
to chloride and carbonation induced corrosion.

12.1 CONCRETE REPAIR

This conventional repair of deteriorated concrete involves patch repair through removal of defective
concrete and reinstatement with repair material. Patch repairs serve to remove chlorides residing near
the reinforcement by breaking out chloride contaminated concrete, and protect the underlying steel,
through application of sound repair material.

A major side effect of patch repairing chloride contaminated concrete is the advent of incipient anodes
resulting in corrosion occurring in areas immediately adjacent to repaired patches. This is due to the
availability of chlorides in areas that were previously protected by the freely corroding steel. Once
repairs are carried out, corrosion initiation of the reinforcement occurs in areas adjacent to the repair
that are highly contaminated with chlorides.

This option is not recommended.

12.2 MOISTURE OR OXYGEN RESTRICTION - PROTECTIVE COATINGS

Protective coatings can be utilized, after conventional patch repairs have been carried to protect the
steel reinforcement from corrosion or reduce the rate of corrosion. The main purpose of a coating in
the scenario would be to (i) reduce the oxygen availability at the steel to reduce that rate of reaction
and (ii) prevent ingress of moisture.

A coating system may be a feasible option where the corrosion has not initiated and hence this option
can be applicable for the part of wall where corrosion has not yet initiated, and coating could arrest
the deterioration by slow downing corrosion rate. The selection of performance coating must take
into consideration the service life, properties of the concrete, properties of the environment and the
purpose of the coating. It should, however, be noted that coatings have a finite life and will require
regular maintenance.

Given the extent of chloride contamination and corrosion of reinforcement this option is not
recommended.

12.3 PRESERVING OR RESTORING PASSIVITY

This involves creating a chemical condition in which the surface of the reinforcement is maintained or
is restored to a passive condition. (Passivity refers to the steel state where corrosion is maintained at
a minimal level due to the formation of a protective oxide layer on its surface). This repair is applicable
to concrete containing with high levels of chlorides at the reinforcement where:

2021 © SIMCO Technologies Inc. - All Rights Reserved

 O/Ref: IN589759

1. The underlying reinforcement is freely corroding, and restoration of passivity is required.

2. Reinforcement is not corroding; however, maintenance of passivity is necessary due to
the high levels of chlorides at the steel that will cause corrosion initiation in the future.

There are different methods of achieving this, the most common and relevant in the present scenario
being cathodic protection are discussed in detail in below section.

12.3.1 CATHODIC PROTECTION (CP)

This involves the application of a current to corroding steel, which will either halt or reduce the
corrosion process to a very low level. Application of a current to non-corroding steel embedded in
chloride contaminated concrete will prevent corrosion initiation in the future. Therefore, cathodic
protection is suitable for reinforced members where chloride contamination is high, and the steel is
either suffering from corrosion or corrosion is predicted to occur in the future. The process of passing
the current causes the steel to polarize to more negative potential or cathodic direction. The main
chemical reaction that occurs at the cathode is formation of hydroxide ions, which locally increase the
alkalinity of the concrete around the reinforcement. In addition, chloride ions migrate away from the
reinforcement under the electric field. These effects combine in the long term to enable the steel to
revert to its passive state, thus preventing corrosion.

The main advantage of cathodic protection is that chloride contaminated sound concrete does not
need to be broken out. Another advantage is that protection will still be maintained even where there
is additional subsequent chloride ingress. Methods for application of cathodic protection to
embedded steel are given below:

Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (ICC)

This method involves the application of a current to the steel from an external DC power source. The
anodes have much longer service life (50 years) and can be operated even in high resistivity concrete.

Due to the low concrete cover, the recommended ICCP system would comprise of an expanded mesh
anode which is pinned to a prepared concrete surface and encapsulated in a formed or pneumatically
placed concrete. The anode is connected to the positive side of a DC power supply via cables which
are connected to the anode via titanium conductor bars. The side of the of the DC power supply is
connected to the steel reinforcement by means of welded or other mechanical connections. The
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

system is typically monitored by permanently installed reference electrodes and can be design for up
to 50 years.

A performance specification for this type of system can be provided by SIMCO if required by the client.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 45 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

Sacrificial Anode Cathodic Protection (SACP)

This method involves the application of sacrificial anodes to chloride contaminated concrete. These
anodes prevent corrosion of the underlying reinforcement by sacrificially corroding with respect to
the steel over an extended period of time. These anodes are consumable. The quantity of anode
required is dependent on the area of steel protected, the concrete resistivity and service life required.

The recommended galvanic system comprises of a surface mounted Zinc mesh anode encapsulated in
a proprietary mortar. The anode can be directly connected to the reinforcement or via a junction box
to allow for monitoring. The system is typically monitored by permanently installed reference
electrodes and can be design for up to 25 years.
A performance specification for this type of system can be provided by SIMCO if required by the client.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO TECHNOLOGIES INC DUBAI BRANCH

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 46 of 54
 O/Ref: IN589759

APPENDIX A – DEFECT MAPPING

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 46 of 53
46800

46800
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT

Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC

Office 304, 3rd Floor,
GE RENEWABLE ENERGY
Sheikha Jameela Tower,
PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

DEFECT MAPPING DRAWING

TANK PLAN

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:

IN589759-1001 REV. : 00
 46800

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46.8 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
1000
OTHERWISE NOTED
500

200
900
1600
1900

230

400

400
700
10400 700 250

350
3300 200

500
350

800
900

350
LEGENDS:-

400
700

500
2000

400

600
350
500

200
1100 1960 1200 900 600 850

250
3 600 500 550

1600
5500

400
400

500

400
1270
800

200
700

700

700
800

800

1100
1500

900
1000

700
960
400
500

300
2200

DELAMINATION
600 900

200
500

350
2200 2740 200

900
700

2400
600

400

400
200 1200

250
300
1400 600

1100
800

500
1700
2 300

400
300
200

600
500 300 800 250 1000 800
900

500

950
500
1000

1620
1400
400 2300
CRACK

1360
300

300

2600
1800

1400
500 600 500

300
640 800
300
500

500

2000

2000
1200
1

500
600
1160

900

750

1500
200

700
1000
600

800 500 300 350 400 2600

INJECTION

1100

1100
400

400
2000 300
400

200

700
1000 1500 1000

300
400

400
800

300
1100
0 1800 1100 800 3800 9600
3500

WALL-01 ELEVATION

46800

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46.8
1000
500

5 700

200
400
1700
3700 1400
1400

600

600
500

1750
4

1100
750 4750

900
400

1200
1800
3900
700 300 300 1400
900 2350 700 300

200
300 2300 900
300

300

300
1400
3

600

300
400 1200

700
400

600
300

900
1000

650
5500

650

2700 300

750
1500

1200
250
86
400

400

0 700

300
800 1000

2650
1650
500

250
500

400

2200
1900 1100 500

300
1800
600

900 300
1000

1250
500
600

1800
60

2700
200

300

1600
300

12
1200
550 1000
1750 1700
1500

400 600

350

400
1200

2100
450

300

200

250

2000

400
400

1000

1100
850

200

1000
400 2000

1300
1150 900 1800
1
300

450
400

300
400

2000
350 600 900

1150
1200
30

800
11

600
1800

500
1500

300
1100
0 1200

600
WALL-02 ELEVATION

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

46800
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46.8 THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
1000
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
500

300
1100
5 FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
300
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS

600

300
800
1300
1400 STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
600

1000
4
1200 800
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
600

200
700
700 1900
300

800
600

300

600

500
950
400

700

700
1300

600
1400
1000

400
900
400

400
2400 1500
3 900 600

250

400

400

300
5500

800
700

1200

1600
1800 500 900 500

300
400
600

900
2 400 AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021
2400

1000 1500

400
1400
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
1700

600

1000

1 REVISIONS

3000 PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
WALL-03 ELEVATION ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT

46800 Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC

Office 304, 3rd Floor,
Sheikha Jameela Tower,
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46.8 PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
1000
500

5 DURABILITY ENGINEERING:

1000
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
700

1600 2400
1000

4 3300 750 P.O BOX : 122650

300

1000 400 300

Dubai Investment Park 1
300
350

800

1000
300

1000

Dubai United Arab Emirates

350

700 350 700

700

2100
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
1000
350

350

1000
1500

1850 3100
3 FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307
500
5500

1200
1550

1700
DRAWING TITLE :
800

1750
1100
2 600
2400

1000
300

500
3400

2000
800

1300
400
DEFECT MAPPING
500

900
1
900
WALL-01 , 02 , 03 & 04
500

600
1600

1000
500
1300

2400 900
ELEVATIONS
1000

1200
700

700
600

0 2750 1050 3900 5000

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
WALL-04 ELEVATION REV. : 00
IN589759-1002
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1000
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE

500
5 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

4
LEGENDS:-

230
10400
3300
900
DELAMINATION

400
1100
3
CRACK
5500

400

1270

700

960
400
2200

2200
600 INJECTION

900

2400
600

400

400
1400
2 500
300
300 800 250

900

500
500

1000

1620
400

1360
300

300
1800

1400
500 600

300
300
500

500

2000

1200
1 1160

900
200
600
800 500 300 350

400

400
2000
1000 1500

400
800
0
3500

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

200
1600
700
700

350
350

800
350

500
2000
400

350
1960 1200 900 600 850

250
600

1600
500

400

700

700
800

800

1500

900
500
900 PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
2740 200 SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
200

300
600

1100
800 RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND

500
300
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
600

1000
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
950

WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT

1400 FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
2300

2600
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
640 800 500 STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
1200

500

600 PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

750

1500
700
1000

400 2600
1100

1100
300
200

700
1000
300

400
1100
AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021
1800 1100 800 3800
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46.8
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT
900
1900 Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC
400

400

Office 304, 3rd Floor,

250
350

200 Sheikha Jameela Tower,

500

400

700 PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE

600

500
200

DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
500 550
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
400

Dubai Branch
800
200

CEO Building, Office No. 513

1100
700

1000 P.O BOX : 122650

300

Dubai Investment Park 1

200

500
350

1200 700 Dubai United Arab Emirates

250

TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306

1700 FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307
400

200
800 DRAWING TITLE :

DEFECT MAPPING
WALL-01
2000

ELEVATION

400 WALL - 01 ELEVATION SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

700

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

300

DRAWING NUMBER:
9600 IN589759-1003 REV. : 00
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1000
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE

500
5 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

500
4

400
LEGENDS:-
700 300 300 1400
900 2350 DELAMINATION

300

300

300
1400
3

600

300
400

700
400
CRACK

300

900
1000
5500

650
1500 2700 300

250
86

400

400
0

300
800 1000

500
250

500
1900 1100 INJECTION

600
900 300

1000
2

1250
600

200
300

1200
550
1750 1700

1500
400
1200

450

300

200

250

2000
400
850
400 200
1150 900
1

300

450
400
300

400
350 600

30
11
1100
0
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

700

200
400
1700
3700 1400

600

600
1750

1100
750

1800
2350 700 300

200
300 2300
1200
600

1000

650
750

1200
250

700

1650
250
400 500

300
1800
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
1250

500
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
1800
60

1600
300 SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
12

THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN

350
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT

2100
400 FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
1000 TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
2000 PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
900
1200

600

500
1500

300
1200
AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021
600

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS

36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46.8
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
ABU DHABI (UAE)

1400
CLIENT

Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC

4750
900

Office 304, 3rd Floor,

1200

Sheikha Jameela Tower,

3900 PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
900
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
2650

Dubai United Arab Emirates

2200

TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306

FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :
2700

1000
600
DEFECT MAPPING
400

WALL-02
1100

1000

2000
1300

1800 ELEVATION

WALL - 02 ELEVATION SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

1150

800
DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ
1800 DRAWING NUMBER:
300

REV. : 00
IN589759-1004
1200
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1000
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE

500
5 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED
1300
1000 1200
4

600
300
800
LEGENDS:-

600
1300
DELAMINATION

1000
2400
3
CRACK
5500

700
1800
600 INJECTION
2

2400
1000 1500

1700

600

1000
1

3000

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

300
1100

300

600

300
800
1400
600

800

200
700
700 1900
300

600

500
950

700

700
600
1400 900
400

400
900 600

250

400

400
800
1200

500 900

300
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
400

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY

RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
400 SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN

400
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46.8
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT

Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC

Office 304, 3rd Floor,
400 Sheikha Jameela Tower,
PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
400

1500 DURABILITY ENGINEERING:

SIMCO Technologies Inc.
300

Dubai Branch
1600

500 CEO Building, Office No. 513

P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
900

TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306

FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :
1400

DEFECT MAPPING
WALL-03
ELEVATION

WALL - 03 ELEVATION SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN589759-1005
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1000
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE

500
5 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

4
1000 400
LEGENDS:-

350
300
350
700 350 700

700
DELAMINATION

350

350
1850 3100
3
CRACK
5500

INJECTION
2

2400

3400
2000

1600
2400
1200

700
600
0 2750 1050

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

1000

700
1600 2400
1000

3300 750

300
300
300
350

800
1000

1000
2100

1000
1000
1500

500
1200
1550

1700
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

800
1750 SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
1100 RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
600 SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
1000

THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN

300

500
2000 WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
800

400
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
1300 TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
500

900 STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN

900 PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
500

600
1000
500
1300

900
1000
700

AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021

3900 5000
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 46.8
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT

Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC

Office 304, 3rd Floor,
Sheikha Jameela Tower,
PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

DEFECT MAPPING
WALL-04
ELEVATION

WALL - 04 ELEVATION SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN589759-1006
 O/Ref: IN589759

APPENDIX B – TESTING LOCATION

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 47 of 53
 46800

1000
500

Wall-01 - Loc # 2
HCP # 2 & LPR2 Wall-01 - Loc # 1
HCP # 3 & LPR3
5500

400
46800

1000
500

Wall-02 - Loc # 1 Wall-02 - Loc # 2

HCP # 5 & LPR5 HCP # 4 & LPR4
5500

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

46800 SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
1000
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
500

FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR

Wall-03 - Loc # 1 TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
HCP # 1 & LPR1
5500

AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
500

TSE TANK MASDAR CITY

ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT

46800
Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC
Office 304, 3rd Floor,
Sheikha Jameela Tower,
PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
1000
500

DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.

Wall-04 - Loc # 1 Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
HCP # 6 & LPR6 Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307
5500

DRAWING TITLE :

DEFECT MAPPING
WALL-01 , 02 , 03 & 04
ELEVATION

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:

IN589759-1007 REV. : 00
 1000

500
5500

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

400
AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT

Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC

Office 304, 3rd Floor,
Sheikha Jameela Tower,
PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

TEST LOCATIONS
WALL-01
ELEVATION

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:

IN589759-1008 REV. : 00
 1000

500
5500

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT

Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC

Office 304, 3rd Floor,
Sheikha Jameela Tower,
PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

TEST LOCATIONS
WALL-02
ELEVATION

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:

IN589759-1009 REV. : 00
 1000

500
5500

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
500

AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT

Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC

Office 304, 3rd Floor,
Sheikha Jameela Tower,
PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

TEST LOCATIONS
WALL-03
ELEVATION

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:

IN589759-1010 REV. : 00
 1000

500
5500

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

AB ISSUE FOR APPROVAL 15-07-2021

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT
TSE TANK MASDAR CITY
ABU DHABI (UAE)

CLIENT

Engie Cofely Energy Services LLC

Office 304, 3rd Floor,
Sheikha Jameela Tower,
PO Box: 43139, Abu Dhabi, UAE
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

TEST LOCATIONS
WALL-04
ELEVATION

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 15-07-2021

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : ILA APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:

IN589759-1011 REV. : 00
 O/Ref: IN589759

APPENDIX C – GPR
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 48 of 53
 Project No. IN589759

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 11 07 2021

Sheet GPR 1
1111
1 PROJECT INFORMATION
1.1 Client Name: ENGIE Solutions
Location: Masdar City Abu Dhabi U.A.E.
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

1.2 Process Unit/Structure Name: TSE Tank Masdar City – Condition Assessment

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.2 Test Equipment: Proceq GPR
2.3 Inspector(s) Name(s): SK
2.4 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days 06-30-21 through 07-04-21
MM-DD-YY MM-DD-YY MM-DD-YY

2.5 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No

2.6 Reference Standards: ASTM D-6432

3 GPR DATA

Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar Concrete Cover

Sl. Length of Scan
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing(mm) (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm)
ON SITE ON SITE SCAN

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 7500 200 -
01

1 Tank Top 25 to 65

Y-Direction /
Vertical Scan 3200 - 200
02
 Project No. IN589759

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 11 07 2021

Sheet GPR 2
1111
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar Concrete Cover
Sl. Length of Scan
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing(mm) (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm)
ON SITE ON SITE SCAN

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 3300 150 -
01

Wall -04
2 60 to 90
(5m-8m)

Y-Direction / 135 till 1.22m and

Vertical Scan 1900 - 75 from 1.22m to
02 1.9m

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 3400 150 -
01

Wall -01
3 (45m to 46m; 8m)
60 to 105

Y-Direction / 140 till 1.22m and

Vertical Scan 1800 - 75 from 1.22m to
02 1.9m
 Project No. IN589759

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 11 07 2021

Sheet GPR 3
1111
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar Concrete Cover
Sl. Length of Scan
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing(mm) (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm)
ON SITE ON SITE SCAN

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 2400 150 -
01

Wall -04
4 Loc -01
60 to 125

Y-Direction /
Vertical Scan 1800 - 150
02

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 2100 150 -
01

Wall -02
5 Loc -01
35 to 70

Y-Direction /
Vertical Scan 3500 - 145
02
 Project No. IN589759

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 11 07 2021

Sheet GPR 4
1111
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar Concrete Cover
Sl. Length of Scan
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing(mm) (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm)
ON SITE ON SITE SCAN

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 1200 150 -
01

Wall -02
6 Loc -02 70
Bottom

Y-Direction /
Vertical Scan 1200 - 150
02

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 1500 150 -
02

Wall -02
7 Loc -02
30 to 50

Y-Direction /
Vertical Scan 900 - 145
03
 Project No. IN589759

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 11 07 2021

Sheet GPR 5
1111
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar Concrete Cover
Sl. Length of Scan
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing(mm) (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm)
ON SITE ON SITE SCAN

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 1500 150 -
01

Wall -01
8 Loc -02
20 to 65

Y-Direction /
Vertical Scan 1500 - 150
02

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 2000 145 -
01

Wall -03
9 Loc -01
20

Y-Direction /
Vertical Scan 1500 - 145
02
 Project No. IN589759

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 11 07 2021

Sheet GPR 6
1111
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar Concrete Cover
Sl. Length of Scan
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing(mm) (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm)
ON SITE ON SITE SCAN

X-Direction /
Horizontal Scan 1800 150 -
01

Wall -02
10 Loc -01
30 to 60

Y-Direction /
Vertical Scan 1400 - 150
02
 O/Ref: IN589759

APPENDIX D – BREAKOUT WINDOW

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 49 of 53
 O/Ref: IN589303

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW ID:- WALL-03 BW#01 (LOC#01)

Project ID: IN589759_ TSE Tank Masdar City Client: Masdar

Structure: Tank Location: Abu Dhabi

Element : Wall - 03 Opening Date: 30-06-2021

Window Photograph:

Concrete cover (mm): 25

Depth of Carbonation (mm): 4

Measured Dia
Orignal Dia Calculated Section
Rebar Diameter : After Cleaning
(mm) Loss (%)
(mm)
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

1st Rebar. 14 13.41 0

2nd Rebar. 14 13.42 0

Reinforcement 1st Rebars – Rebar in reasonable condition with rust stains

condition: 2nd Rebars – Rebar in reasonable condition with rust stains.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 1 of 6
 O/Ref: IN589303

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW ID:- WALL-01 BW#02 (LOC#02)

Project ID: IN589759_ TSE Tank Masdar City Client: Masdar

Structure: Tank Location: Abu Dhabi

Element : Wall – 01 Opening Date: 01-07-2021

Window Photograph:

Concrete cover (mm): 25

Depth of Carbonation (mm): 10

Measured Dia
Orignal Dia Calculated Section
Rebar Diameter : After Cleaning
(mm) Loss (%)
(mm)
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

1st Rebar. 14 13.17 11.5

2nd Rebar. 14 13.5 7

Reinforcement 1st Rebars – Severely corroded rebar

condition: 2nd Rebars – Corroded rebar

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 2 of 6
 O/Ref: IN589303

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW ID:- WALL-01 BW#3 (LOC#02)

Project ID: IN589759_ TSE Tank Masdar City Client: Masdar

Structure: Tank Location: Abu Dhabi

Element : Wall – 01 Opening Date: 01-07-2021

Window Photograph:

Concrete cover (mm): 25

Depth of Carbonation (mm): 12

Measured Dia
Orignal Dia Calculated Section
Rebar Diameter : After Cleaning
(mm) Loss (%)
(mm)
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

1st Rebar. 14 13.76 3

2nd Rebar. 14 13.69 4

Reinforcement 1st Rebars – Severely corroded rebar with section loss

condition: 2nd Rebars – Severely corroded rebar with section loss

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 3 of 6
 O/Ref: IN589303

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW ID:- WALL-02 BW#02 (LOC#02)

Project ID: IN589759_ TSE Tank Masdar City Client: Masdar

Structure: Tank Location: Abu Dhabi

Element : Wall – 02 Opening Date: 03-07-2021

Window Photograph:

Concrete cover (mm): 20

Depth of Carbonation (mm): 20 (12mm at Non delaminated area)

Measured Dia
Orignal Dia Calculated Section
Rebar Diameter : After Cleaning
(mm) Loss (%)
(mm)
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

1st Rebar. 12 11.33 10.8

2nd Rebar. 12 12.14 0

Reinforcement 1st Rebars – Severely corroded rebar with section loss

condition: 2nd Rebars – Severely corroded rebar

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 4 of 6
 O/Ref: IN589303

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW ID:- WALL-02 BW#01 (LOC#01)

Project ID: IN589759_ TSE Tank Masdar City Client: Masdar

Structure: Tank Location: Abu Dhabi

Element : Wall – 02 Opening Date: 03-07-2021

Window Photograph:

Concrete cover (mm): 25

Depth of Carbonation (mm): 7

Measured Dia
Orignal Dia Calculated Section
Rebar Diameter : After Cleaning
(mm) Loss (%)
(mm)
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

1st Rebar. 14 13.28 10

2nd Rebar. 14 13.79 0

Reinforcement 1st Rebars – Severely corroded rebar with section loss

condition: 2nd Rebars – Rebar in reasonable condition with rust stains.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 5 of 6
 O/Ref: IN589303

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW ID:- WALL-04 BW#01 (LOC#01)

Project ID: IN589759_ TSE Tank Masdar City Client: Masdar

Structure: Tank Location: Abu Dhabi

Element : Wall – 04 Opening Date: 04-07-2021

Window Photograph:

Concrete cover (mm): 33

Depth of Carbonation (mm): 0

Measured Dia
Orignal Dia Calculated Section
Rebar Diameter : After Cleaning
(mm) Loss (%)
(mm)
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

1st Rebar. 12 11.44 9

2nd Rebar. 12 12.35 0

Reinforcement 1st Rebars – Severely corroded rebar with section loss

condition: 2nd Rebars – Severely corroded rebar

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 6 of 6
 O/Ref: IN589759

APPENDIX E – HCP
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 50 of 53
 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 TSE Water Tank
Name:
Location Masdar City AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 TSE Water Tank - Outer Wall
Unit/Structure Name:
]
2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: HCP # 1 Wall 3 Loc-1
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): IN
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 9/6/2021 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Point
A 29 108 54 40 -92 -145 -261 -260 -340 -328 -290
B 58 45 22 -144 -215 -215 -251 -280 -342 -346 -263
C 47 100 43 -163 -176 -203 -250 -292 -331 -337 -241
D 51 51 66 -16 -170 -260 -258 -306 -326 -333 -237
E 61 114 49 -14 -96 -174 -240 -288 -305 -329 -283

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS
 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Client
1.1 TSE Water Tank
Name:
Location Masdar City UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 TSE Water Tank - Outer Wall
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: HCP # 2 Wall 1 Loc-2
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): IN
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 9/6/2021 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Point
A -155 62 63 -29 102 40 -70 -78 -251 -265 -251
B -6 76 75 65 55 -15 -100 -255 -240 -296 -250
C 64 63 93 64 -55 -25 -204 -258 -248 -288 -150
D 20 117 36 44 -111 -50 -88 -144 -200 -246 -251
E 36 46 109 -27 -90 -16 6 -114 -246 -196 -278

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS
 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Client
1.1 TSE Water Tank
Name:
Location Masdar City UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 TSE Water Tank - Outer Wall
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: HCP # 3 Wall 1 Loc-1
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): IN
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 9/6/2021 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Point
A -195 -160 -250 -269 -230 -289 -289 -284 -345
B -259 -322 -345 -344 -306 -328 -344 -386 -393
C -314 -335 -355 -389 -354 -339 -285 -403 -452
D -388 -381 -418 -391 -385 -350 -359 -421 -450
E -308 -391 -350 -413 -376 -346 -330 -374 -377

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS
 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Client
1.1 TSE Water Tank
Name:
Location Masdar City UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 TSE Water Tank - Outer Wall
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: HCP # 4 Wall 2 Loc-2
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): IN
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 9/6/2021 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Point
A 126 63 51 40 -117 -112 -127 -105 -155 -275 -360
B 89 63 64 80 -91 -130 -130 -264 -262 -286 -288
C 73 100 49 47 -60 -140 -227 -268 -300 -282 -279
D 24 45 50 56 -72 -178 -249 -303 -299 -327 -290
E 33 44 59 35 -128 -212 -261 -379 -344 -353 -331

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS
 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Client
1.1 TSE Water Tank
Name:
Location Masdar City UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 TSE Water Tank - Outer Wall
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: HCP # 5 Wall 2 Loc-1
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): IN
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 9/6/2021 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Point
A -361 -300 -330 -300 -350 -380 -290 -277
B -312 -360 -380 -340 -370 -370 -350 -318
C -392 -359 -380 -350 -415 -379 -316 -380
D -408 -360 -400 -400 -396 -380 -340 -280
E -427 -387 -384 -400 -410 -408 -413 -412

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS
 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Client
1.1 TSE Water Tank
Name:
Location Masdar City UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 TSE Water Tank - Outer Wall
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: HCP # 6 Wall 4 Loc-1
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): IN
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 9/6/2021 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Point
A -315 -277 -305 -345 -352 -239 -205 -208 -190 -199
B -302 -287 -317 -341 -348 -204 -178 -205 -205 -218
C -272 -284 -292 -317 -327 -176 -158 -195 -250 -217
D -284 -303 -324 -364 -343 -304 -218 -350 -240 -312
E -299 -243 -296 -328 -296 -238 -281 -326 -277 -259

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS
 O/Ref: IN589759

APPENDIX F – LPR
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 51 of 53
 Corrosion Activity
Background
Corrosion Rate µm/Yr Condition
Color
Less than 1 Negligable Green
Between 1 5 Low Yellow
Between 5 10 Moderate Orange
Greater than 10 High Red
LINEAR POLARIZATION RESISTANCE
Project Name: TSE Water Tank - Masdar City, Abu Dhabi
Project Ref: IN589759
Test Date: Jul-21
Report Date: 8-Jul-21

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP#1 x/y 6 7 9 10 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. SS C -365.00 7.88 -352.00 1.99
Date: 7/1/2021 D Min -365 0.55
E -178.00 0.55 -264.00 4.32 Max -178 7.88

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP#2 x/y 1 2 3 10 Ecorr Icorr
A -301 0.48
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. SS C -331 8.34
Date: 7/1/2021 0 Min -331 0.48
E Max -301 8.34

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP#3 x/y 1 2 8 9 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. SS C -463 18.19
Date: 7/1/2021 D -459 9.78 -482 10.35 Min -482 9.78
E Max -459 18.19
F

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP#4 x/y 1 3 10 11 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. SS C
Date: 7/1/2021 D -337 4.35 Min -350 4.35
-298 5.17 -350 7.29 Max -298 7.29

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP#5 x/y 1 2 7 8 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. SS C
Date: 7/1/2021 D Min -471 28.88
E -471 28.88 -468 30.92 Max -468 30.92
0

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP#6 x/y 1 4 5 4 Ecorr Icorr
A -417.21 1.06 -371
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B -369 0.66
Tech. SS C
Date: 7/1/2021 D -364 1.06 -374 1.59 Min -417.213315 0.66
0 Max -364 1.59
 O/Ref: IN589759

APPENDIX G – CORELOG
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 52 of 53
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN589759
CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC#1
WALL 3 –
LOC 1

CC#1– Compressive Strength Length: 187 mm Dia. 74 mm

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office No. 513, Dubai Investment Park Phase-1,PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com Page 1 of 6
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN589759
CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC#2
WALL 1 –
LOC 2

CC#2– Compressive Strength Length: 157 mm Dia. 74 mm

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office No. 513, Dubai Investment Park Phase-1,PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com Page 2 of 6
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN589759
CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC#3
WALL 1 –
LOC 1

CC#3– Compressive Strength Length: 192 mm Dia. 74 mm

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office No. 513, Dubai Investment Park Phase-1,PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com Page 3 of 6
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN589759
CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC#4
WALL 2 – LOC
2

CC#4– Compressive Strength Length: 174 mm Dia. 74 mm

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office No. 513, Dubai Investment Park Phase-1,PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com Page 4 of 6
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN589759
CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC#5
WALL 2 –
LOC 1

CC#5– Compressive Strength Length: 175 mm Dia. 74 mm

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office No. 513, Dubai Investment Park Phase-1,PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com Page 5 of 6
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN589759
CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC#6
WALL 4 –
LOC 1

CC#6– Compressive Strength Length: 153 mm Dia. 74 mm

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office No. 513, Dubai Investment Park Phase-1,PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com Page 6 of 6
 O/Ref: IN589759

APPENDIX H – LAB RESULTS

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2021

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch SIMCO Technologies Inc. Head Office
CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE 2666, boul. du Parc-Technologique, Suite 100, Quebec (QC)
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com G1P 4S6 CANADA | T: 418 656-1003 |www.simcotechnologies.com

Page 53 of 53
SYSTEM DESIGN & INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
 System Design
& Installation Specification
MASDAR TSE TANK

Concrete Repair, Impressed Current Cathodic Protection,

Coating and Waterproofing

System Design & Installation Specification Page 1 of 66

1 Purpose

A specialist consultant was hired by MASDAR to carry out a condition assessment of elevated
Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE) Tank in Masdar City, Abu Dhabi.

The study focused on investigating the causes of the defects observed on the external faces of the
tank. This report presents the complete findings of the field work including sampling and testing
performed at selected locations of tank walls and top slab and provide recommendation for
rehabilitation of the structure.

Figure 1: TSE Tank – Masdar City

1.1 Visual Survey and acoustic hammer sounding

A visual survey and hammer sounding was carried on accessible external surfaces of the tank. The
visual survey mainly consisted of close inspection of all accessible elements and recording observed
defects. The acoustic (hammer) sounding survey was performed on all concrete surfaces with a
hammer to detect any sign of hollow sounding surfaces which generally indicate presence of
concrete delamination.
During this process, signs of deterioration and anomalies such as cracks, efflorescence,
delamination, spalls, rust stains, or other forms of distress were recorded. The condition of the
elements was marked on drawings as shown in Figure 2. Full markup drawing is presented at
Appendix B.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 2 of 66

 Wall - 04

Figure 2: Typical Defect Mapping

Below figure presents the key plan for the wall

System Design & Installation Specification Page 3 of 66

 Figure 3: TSE Tank – Key Plan

1.1.1 Walls
▪ Concrete spalling
▪ Concrete delamination / hollow sound areas
▪ Sign of previous injection works
▪ Exposed corroded rebar
▪ Corrosion stains

System Design & Installation Specification Page 4 of 66

 Figure 4: Wall 1 – Defect Area 1

Figure 5: Wall 1 – Defect Area 2

System Design & Installation Specification Page 5 of 66

 Figure 6: Wall 1 – Defect Area 3

Figure 7: Wall 1 – Defect Area 4

System Design & Installation Specification Page 6 of 66

 Figure 8: Wall 2 – Defect Area 1

Figure 9: Wall 2 – Defect Area 2

System Design & Installation Specification Page 7 of 66

 Figure 10: Wall 2 – Defect Area 3

Figure 11: Wall 2 – Defect Area 4

System Design & Installation Specification Page 8 of 66

 Figure 12: Wall 3 – Defect Area 1

Figure 13: Wall 3 – Defect Area 2

System Design & Installation Specification Page 9 of 66

 Figure 14: Wall 4 – Defect Area 1
1.1.2 Tank Base:
The Base of the tank extends one meter perpendicular to the face of the TSE tank wall. Delamination
and spalling was observed in most of the visible portion of the tank base as shown in the defect
mapping. Severe section loss was observed on the exposed bars.

Figure 15: Tank Base – Defect Area 1

System Design & Installation Specification Page 10 of 66

 Figure 16: Tank Base – Defect Area 2

The sump adjacent to the main TSE tank is fully delaminated and spalling of concrete. Figure 17
illustrates defects in the other elements of the TSE Tank.

Figure 17: Sump – Defect Area 1

System Design & Installation Specification Page 11 of 66

2 Summary of Scope of Works

1. Concrete repairs to TSE Tank, Sump Structure and surrounding foundation / walkway;
2. Impressed Current Cathodic Protection;
3. Acrylic based anti-carbonation coating;

The purpose of this specification is to specify the technical requirements for design, supply,
installation and commissioning of the cathodic protection system(s) for the TSE Tank in Masdar City,
Abu Dhabi, UAE.

3 Scope of the Specification

This specification covers the requirements for the design, supply, installation, pre-commissioning,
and commissioning of cathodic protection systems to protect the atmospherically exposed concrete
steel reinforcement and embedded metallic elements from marine corrosion.

SECTION 1: Concrete Repair and Impressed Current Cathodic Protection

SECTION 2: Coating

SECTION 3: Crack Injection

SECTION 4: Internal Waterproofing

System Design & Installation Specification Page 12 of 66

SECTION 1: Concrete Repair and Impressed Current Cathodic Protection

System Design & Installation Specification Page 13 of 66

1 Definitions
For the purposes of this Specification, the following definitions apply.

a. Anode:
The electrode at which oxidation reactions (i.e. corrosion reactions) occur. For cathodic
protection of reinforced concrete, the anode is an inert material, such as catalyzed
titanium mesh, which is used to distribute protective current to the reinforcing steel.
b. Cathode
The electrode of an electrochemical cell at which reduction reaction occurs. For cathodic
protection of reinforced concrete, the cathode is the steel reinforcement. Electrons flow
toward the cathode in the external circuit.
c. Cathodic Protection
A technique to reduce or control the corrosion of a metal surface by making that surface
the cathode of an electrochemical cell.
d. Cement
Cement used as a component in the concrete repair and anode overlay / shotcrete
material.

e. Continuity Bond
A connection, usually metallic, that provides electrical continuity between discontinuous
reinforcements and embedded metallic elements that can conduct electricity.
f. Corrosion
The deterioration of a material, usually a metal, that results from a reaction with its
environment. It is an electrochemical process.
g. Corrosion Rate:
The rate that corrosion proceeds.
h. Current Density
The current flowing to or from a unit area of an electrode surface.
i. Current Distributor
An uncoated strip of titanium which is used to feed current to the anode system and
connect adjacent lengths of anode mesh together electrically. The current distributor is
welded to the anode mesh in the field with a portable resistance welder.
j. Depolarisation Test
This is an acceptance test used for cathodic protection of reinforced concrete structures.
Depolarisation is determined by interrupting the protective current and measuring the
change in potential of the reinforcing steel with time. The depolarisation is the difference
between the final potential and the instant off potential.
k. Electrical discontinuity
The condition that a steel reinforcement or embedded metallic element is being electrically
separated from rest of the steel reinforcement or the environment.
l. Electrolyte

System Design & Installation Specification Page 14 of 66

 An environment containing ions that migrate in an electric field such as soil, liquid or
concrete adjacent to and in contact with a buried, submerged or embedded metallic
structure.

m. Foreign Structure
Any metallic structure that is not intended as part of cathodic protection system such as
electrically discontinuous reinforcement.
n. Impressed Current
Direct current supplied to a CP system by an external power source such as
transformer/rectified commercial AC, batteries or electric power generators.
o. Instant-Off Potential:
The polarized half-cell potential of an electrode taken immediately after the cathodic
protection current is stopped, which closely approximates the potential without IR drop
(i.e. the polarized potential) when the current was on and before any significant
depolarisation has occurred. Instant off potentials are taken between 0.1 and 1 second
after current interruption.
p. Interference
Any electrical disturbance on a metallic structure including embedded reinforcement and
metallic elements results of stray current.
q. Interference Bond
An intentional metallic connection between metallic systems in contact with common
electrolyte, designed to control electrical current interchange between metallic systems.
r. IR Drop
The voltage across a resistance in accordance with Ohm’s Law.
s. Junction Box
Various types of junction box are used as the termination points of the cables connected to
the anode system, reference electrodes, steel reinforcement (anode feeder cables,
reference electrode cables, system and test negative cables) and positive and negative
header cables from the transformer rectifier.
t. Native State Potential:
The potential with zero groundbed current. This is the measured potential of the metal (i.e.
rebar cage) with respect to its environment without the application of cathodic protection.
It is a thermodynamic function and provides information on whether corrosion is possible,
but does not provide any information on corrosion rates.
u. Negative Return:
A point connection between the cathodic protection negative cable and the protected
structures. See “System Negative Connection”
v. “ON” Potential
This is the potential of the reinforcing steel measured by the reference electrode when the
cathodic protection system is operation, i.e., with cathodic protection current flowing. This
potential includes the polarisation potential and any other voltage drops resulting from the
flow of current (IR drop).
w. Polarization:
The charge from the open-circuit potential as a result of current across the
electrode/electrolyte interface. When the cathodic protection system is operating, there is

System Design & Installation Specification Page 15 of 66

 a net flow of electrical current between the anodes and the reinforcing steel. As a result, a
thin film forms on the surface of the reinforcing steel, commonly known as the polarisation
film. This film results in a degree of corrosion protection. There is a measurable potential
drop (polarisation potential) across this film, which is in opposition to the corrosion cell
potential that caused the corrosion current to flow in the first place. This polarisation
potential can be varied by varying the current flow in the cathodic protection system.
Accordingly, a desired level of corrosion protection can be achieved.
x. Rectifier:
A device to convert AC power to DC power.
y. Reference Electrode
An electrode whose open-circuit potential is constant under similar conditions of
measurement which is used for measuring the relative potentials of other electrodes. The
reference electrode generates a standard potential against which potentials of other
electrodes such as the steel in the concrete can be measured or compared. Reference
electrodes may be portable or permanently installed in the concrete structure.
z. Shunt:
A precise resistor with known resistance in an electrical circuit used to measure a voltage
(IR) drop, which is used to calculate the amount of current in amperes.
aa. Stray Current:
Corrosion results from flow of Current through paths other than the intended path. Where
the current flows off the intended cathode into the electrolyte corrosion occurs.
bb. Stray-Current Corrosion
Corrosion results from flow of current through paths other than the intended circuit, e.g.,
by any extraneous current in the earth.
cc. Structure -to-Electrolyte Potential
The potential difference between the steel reinforcement and the electrolyte that is
measured with reference to an electrode in contact with the electrolyte.
dd. System Negative Connection
Cables electrically connected to the steel reinforcement in the concrete. These cables are
connected to the negative terminal in the rectifier.
ee. Tafel Slope
The slope of the straight-line portion of the E log I curve on a Tafel Plot.
ff. Local Rectifier Unit (LRU):
A device used to convert alternating current to the direct current which is required for
cathodic protection. In a cathodic protection system, the transformer rectifier is used to
control the voltage, current or potential to each anode zone. Local Rectifier Units can be
simple stand-alone units with local control and monitoring or can be controlled and
monitored remotely by computer
gg. Voltage
An electromotive force or a difference in electrode potentials expressed in volts.
hh. Zone
An area of the cathodic protection system, which can be independently powered and
controlled. All the anode cables, and the systems negative cables, from each zone are
connected to positive and negative terminals in the rectifier respectively (commonly
referred to as a rectifier or power “output”).

System Design & Installation Specification Page 16 of 66

2 Cross References
In the event of conflicts between this Specification and the standards / codes referenced
herein, or other contractual requirements, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
Masdar’s Project Department/Contractor shall contact Operations Technical Department –
Corrosion Engineering to resolve any technical queries or deviations.

The Cathodic Protection systems shall comply with applicable codes, standards, laws and
ordinances of local bodies having jurisdiction. The latest edition of the codes and standards
at the time of application or implementation shall be utilized:

a. International Standards:

NACE INTERNATIONAL
NACE SP0187 Design Considerations for Corrosion Control of Reinforcing Steel in
Concrete.
NACE SP0390 Maintenance and Rehabilitation Considerations for Corrosion Control
of Atmospherically Exposed Existing Steel-Reinforced Concrete
Structures.
NACE SP0290 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection of Reinforcing Steel in
Atmospherically Exposed Concrete Structures.
NACE SP0408 Cathodic Protection of Reinforcing Steel in Buried or Submerged
Concrete Structures
NACE Report Use of Reference Electrodes for Atmospherically Exposed
11100 Reinforced Concrete Structures
NACE SP0572 Design, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Impressed
Current Deep Anode Beds
NACE SP0177 Mitigation of Alternating Current and Lightning Effects on Metallic
Structures and Corrosion Control System.
NACE RP0104 The Use of Coupons for Cathodic Protection Monitoring Applications
NACE Report Impressed Current Anodes for Underground Cathodic
10A196 Protection Systems
NACE SP0308 Inspection Methods for Corrosion Evaluation of Conventionally
Reinforced Concrete Structure.

BRITISH STANDARDS
BS EN 12696 Cathodic Protection of Steel in Concrete
BS 7361 Part 1 Cathodic Protection, Code of Practice for Land and Marine
Applications.
BS EN 13509 Cathodic Protection Measurement Techniques
BS EN 15257 Competence levels and certification of Cathodic Protection
personnel.

AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE STANDARDS

System Design & Installation Specification Page 17 of 66

 ACI 506.2-95 Specification for Shotcrete
ACI 201.1R-08: Guide for Conducting a Visual Inspection of Concrete in Service

AMERICAN STANDARD FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS

ASTM C 876 Standard Test Method for Half-Cell Potentials of Uncoated Reinforcing
Steel in Concrete
ASTM D 4580 Standard Test Method for Measuring Delaminations in Concrete
Bridge Decks By Sounding
ASTM C 900 Standard Test Method for Pullout Strength of Hardened Concrete
ASTM G57 Test Method for Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity using the
Wenner Four Electrode Method
ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM G3 Practice for Conventions Applicable to Electrochemical
Measurements in Corrosion Testing.

ii. Compliance with this specification shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to supply
equipment suited to meet the specified service conditions and applicable regulations.
jj. Where conflicts exist between this specification and other drawings, standards, codes and
specifications, the most stringent shall be applied.

3 Abbreviations

CP Cathodic Protection
ICCP Impressed Current Cathodic Protection
JB Junction Box
BB Bonding Box
AF Anode Feeder
ZB Zone Boundary
RE Reference Electrode
IN Instrument Negative
SN System Negative
MMO Mixed Metal Oxide
T/R Local Rectifier Unit.
ITP Inspection Test Plan
QAP Quality Assurance Plan
MASDAR Operations Technical Department

4 Pre-Qualification Requirements
4.1 Contractor shall have proven experience of at least 10 years in rehabilitation of Middle East
Exposure exposed concrete structures which shall include reinforcement corrosion study,
design, installation and commissioning of CP systems using anode overlay, slotted anode and
other types of systems.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 18 of 66

4.2 Contractor shall have proven experience of design, installation and commissioning of at least
10 concrete structures in GCC region. Contractor shall have an experience of rehabilitating
(repair and Cathodic Protection) at least one structure in UAE. (Experience of installation
alone is not acceptable).

4.3 Contractor shall agree to depute a suitably qualified and experienced person which shall be
NACE or ICorr certified Cathodic Protection Specialist.

4.4 Contractor shall provide track record / documentary evidence to support above experiences
along with certificate of completion, client references, resume etc.

4.5 CONTRACTOR shall propose their shotcrete mix design for Company approval as part of their
technical submittal.

4.6 The shotcrete overlay material to be used shall have a proven track record in applications for
concrete repair and cathodic protection. Refer to section 11.2 & 14.5 of this specification for
detailed requirements of overlay.

4.7 Shotcrete Applicator / Contractor shall have experience in sprayed concrete which shall
conform to the requirements (latest revision) of ACI 506.2 -77 “Specification for materials
proportioning and application of Shotcrete” and ACI 506R-85 “Guide to shotcrete”.
CONTRACTOR is required to install a test panel of his proposed mix and procedure to ensure
compliance with this specification. Test panel shall be subjected to Pulloff Strength test of
Hardened Concrete as per ASTM C 900. Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement
& ITP for Company approval.

4.8 Only those applicators who successfully complete this testing are qualified to apply shotcrete
overlay. Sufficient applicators shall be tested for approval to meet the project schedule and
plan. All tests are to be performed on site as per approved method statement, ITP as per the
direction of CP designer and witnessed by Company.

4.9 Scaffolding designer shall be a competent engineer or Company approved scaffolding

contractor who shall design scaffolding in accordance with National Authority for
Occupational Safety & Health’s “Code of Practice for Access and Working Scaffolds”.

4.10 All welding procedures and welders shall be prequalified prior to actual work as per applicable
international codes and standards.

4.11 Any other pre-qualification requirements of any other project specifications.

5 Cathodic Protection Designer & Supervisor:

5.1 The design of cathodic protection systems and qualification of the shotcrete applicator shall
be carried out by a suitable qualified and experienced person with CV approved by Masdar.

5.2 In addition, a CP Engineer, suitably qualified and experienced person with CV approved by
Masdar shall supervise the installation. All pre-commissioning and commissioning of all parts
of the cathodic protection system shall be performed by NACE or ICorr certified CP Specialist.

5.3 The cathodic protection designer and technician shall have at least fifteen years of experience
in the design, installation and commissioning of cathodic protection systems for Middle East
exposed concrete structures. The contractor shall submit at least 2 resumes for each position

System Design & Installation Specification Page 19 of 66

 and evidence of their qualifications and experience in installing similar CP systems for Masdar
review and approval.

5.4 The suitably qualified and experienced Cathodic Protection Specialist with CV approved by
Masdar shall be available to visit the site, at 24 hours of notice, on an as needed basis. The
Specialist shall, as a minimum, visit the site for 1 day per week to review the quality of the
works and sign all quality control hold points. In addition, he shall be available in the site prior
to start and completion of each phase of the work namely; prequalification of shotcrete
material / applicators, reinforcement corrosion survey, embedded component installation /
anode mesh placement, during shotcrete application, pre-commissioning and commission.

5.5 The cathodic protection project engineer shall be provided on a full time basis for the duration
of the Contract. He shall have had a minimum of 10 years field experience as a section
manager on a similar cathodic protection project. As a section manager, he will have
responsibility for the day to day direction of staff and labour in all aspects of construction
related to the installation of cathodic protection and shall have reported directly to the site
manager or project manager.

6 Technical Requirements:
6.1 General:

6.1.1 The corrosion control of marine exposed concrete structure shall be achieved by cathodic
protection. Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (ICCP) systems shall be used to achieve
the cathodic protection.

6.1.2 The Contractor shall try and ensure that the integrity of the existing impressed current
Cathodic Protection (CP) systems for the nearby structures including pipelines and other
buried metallic assets are intact and zero interference in either ways after the installation of
the new CP systems for concrete structures.

6.1.3 Environmental Conditions

6.1.3.1 All enclosures for CP system components such as Transformer rectifiers, Junction Boxes,
test stations, bonding boxes etc shall be designed and constructed to meet minimum IP
rating and the following environmental conditions:

Relative Humidity : Minimum 0%

Maximum 100% (condensing)
Ambient Temperature: Minimum 0°C (32°F)
Maximum 55°C (131°F)

6.1.3.2 Onshore Offsite Environment

Concrete structures in offsite area are exposed to high humid marine environment. Some portion of
the structures are exposed to seawater salt spray during normal operational conditions which shall
be treated the same as that of a splash area. Buried portions of the concrete are usually exposed to
moist wet soil containing chlorides.

The CP components such as transformer rectifier, junction boxes and test boxes shall have minimum
degree of protection for enclosures in accordance with IEC 60529 shall be as follows:

• Indoor equipment - IP55

• Outdoor equipment - IP65

System Design & Installation Specification Page 20 of 66

6.2 Design Considerations
Contractor shall consider the following during the design stage:

6.2.1 Each structure shall be divided into multiple zones depending on the exposure to
environmental regimes. Sections of concrete structure that may be combined together into
a single zone shall have similar environmental exposure regimes. Combinations of sub-zones
shall also be restricted to those areas which experience similar conditions of rebar density
and concrete quality.

6.2.2 All reinforcements shall be electrically continuous within each structure. If not, electrical
bonding shall be facilitated as per this specification.

6.2.3 Sections of concrete structures which may be protected by different anode systems shall not
be combined together into a single common zone. Different anode grades can be combined
into the same zone.

6.2.4 Anode zones shall have at least two positive and negative connections. If a zone contains
any discontinuous sections (construction or expansion joint) then each section shall meet
above criteria.

6.2.5 At no circumstances, shall more than 5% of anode within a zone be made inoperative.
Design shall consider conditions such as failure of a power feeder, random breaks in the
anode panel, any specific constraints on anode design and no anode materials across any
physical structural joint.

6.2.6 Site visit shall be performed prior to forwarding their proposals to determine the work
involved including probable location for CP components, AC power supply cable routing,
feeders etc.

6.2.7 Where possible, existing or reserved feeders shall be used for AC power supply to the CP
systems.

6.2.8 The LRU, JB, test stations and scaffolding shall be designed in accordance with this
Specification and International Standards referred in this scope of work.

6.2.9 Contractor shall design the CP components so that they are easily accessible for periodic
maintenance & monitoring.

6.2.10 Design shall consider the distance of AC power supply feeders.

6.2.11 Design shall also consider other cathodic protection systems operating near the structure.

6.2.12 Interference of proposed CP systems installation on other nearby structures with or without
cathodic protection systems shall also be considered. Verification and mitigation of
interference shall be clearly addressed in the design concept and shall be detailed in design
methodology.

6.2.13 Design life as per Clause 9.3 of this specification

System Design & Installation Specification Page 21 of 66

6.2.14 Current requirements as per Clause 9.5 of this specification.

6.2.15 The CP design shall be performed for each structure using minimum power sources to limit
the interference.

6.2.16 All cables shall be terminated inside junction boxes for anode cables, negative cables and
bonding cables. It shall utilize shunts and resistors as required by several sections in this
specification. Splicing of cables by any method shall be avoided if possible.

6.2.17 Any other requirements specified in the contract scope of work.

6.2.18 Contractor shall submit the design documents including calculations, drawings, and
installation and commissioning procedures as required.

6.2.19 Contractor shall prepare all the drawings in submit in size A3 or A1, where appropriate.

6.2.20 Contractor shall prepare all the rest of the documents in Microsoft Office Word/Excel
format.

6.3 Design Life:

6.3.1 The minimum design life of the cathodic protection system is 25 years.

6.4 Cathodic Protection Potential Range:

For the system to be accepted, each reference electrode must achieve either criteria 9.4.1 or 9.4.2,
in addition each reference electrode should be compliant with 9.4.3.

6.4.1 The minimum accepted value at any point of the protection potential for steel (IR corrected,
instant off) shall be –0.720 V, with reference to Silver / Silver Chloride (Ag/AgCl) reference
electrode.

6.4.2 A minimum shift of 100 mV (decay) from instant off to depolarized potential.

6.4.3 The maximum potential value permissible (IR corrected, instant off) shall not exceed –1.1 V
with reference to Ag/AgCl.

6.4.4 Designer/Contractor shall consider above requirements and ensure the CP systems are
designed, installed and commissioned to Company satisfaction.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 22 of 66

6.5 Current Requirement and Density:

6.5.1 Design cathode current density for embedded steel reinforcement shall be a minimum of
20mA/m2.

6.5.2 Surface area of all embedded steel reinforcement and other metallic structures shall be
calculated and considered.

6.5.3 Surface area and design current requirement shall be calculated for each zone.

6.5.4 Maximum allowable current density at the anode-concrete interface shall be 110mA/m2.

6.5.5 Anode type, rating, quantity and distribution shall ensure sufficient uniform current
distribution to protect the intended reinforcing steels.

6.5.6 Maximum spacing between the anode mesh panels shall not be more than 100mm.

6.5.7 For mesh systems, voltage drop between power supply terminals and the furthest point in
the circuit of any anode zone shall not be more than 300mV.

6.5.8 Any other requirements specified in the contract scope of work.

7 Materials

7.1 Anode Systems

7.1.1 General
• MMO/Ti expanded mesh anodes will be utilized. No other anode type shall be considered.
• The anode systems to be used are the most essential component of the system and are
specific to the application of cathodic protection to reinforced concrete. Systems used
shall have a proven track record.
• The anode system shall be capable of supplying the performance required by the cathodic
protection design. It’s calculated or anticipated life shall be sufficient for the design life of
the cathodic protection system with no maintenance requirement or replacement of
anode system during this period.

7.1.2 Anode Materials

• Approved anode types are determined by structure specific considerations and shall
conform to the following categories. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient data so as
Company to enable the performance capability of the anode system proposed to be
assessed and approved.
• This applies to all structures or parts of structures, in contact with seawater, subject to
marine vapour action, coastal structures and structures subject to chloride contaminated
groundwater either by design or as a result of leakage.
• The anode approved for use in these applications is a mixed metal oxide coated titanium
mesh type anode system
• The complete system shall include current distributors, positive cable connection devices
and non-metallic fasteners, which are designed to hold the anode securely to the

System Design & Installation Specification Page 23 of 66

 concrete surface.
• Anode shall meet the minimum requirements of section 10.2 & 10.3 and the relevant
material specification.

7.2 Anode Overlay

7.2.1 This requirement is specific to embedded anode systems applied to existing concrete
structures.

7.2.2 For vertical surfaces, the overlay shall consist of shotcrete.

7.2.3 The exact nature of the overlay shall be determined by CONTRACTOR with the approval of
Company subject to fulfilling the following requirements:

7.2.4 The cementitious overlay shall totally encapsulate the anode material, to provide physical
protection and to provide an ionic current path between the anode material and the
reinforcement. Maximum electrical resistivity of the overlay material shall be less than
50,000 ohm-cm after twenty eight days of curing (to be measured with pre-calibrated
instruments using the Wenner four pin method or equivalent). The overlay material shall be
applied in accordance with guidelines detailed in this specification.

7.2.5 CONTRACTOR shall propose their design mix for Company approval as part of their technical
submittal.

7.2.6 The overlay material to be used shall have a proven track record in applications for concrete
repair and cathodic protection.

7.2.7 CONTRACTOR shall be free to design an overlay, which will satisfy the requirements of this
section or may use a proprietary material, which is compatible with cathodic protection.

7.2.8 The overlay material shall be applied as soon as possible after fixing and testing of anodes,
conductor bars, reference electrodes, etc.

7.2.9 All cementitious material shall be stored in a clean, dry and well ventilated environment.

7.2.10 The specific components of the overlay shall conform to the following:

Cement : ASTM C-150 Type I1 or Type III

One brand of cement shall be used for the entire project.

Aggregate : For sprayed concrete this shall be double washed Sand shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C33. It shall contain not less than 3% and not more than 5%
moisture by weight.

Water : All mixing water shall be fresh, clean and of potable quality. It shall be kept free from
oil, vegetable matter, alkalis and other contaminants, which may be injurious to the
concrete or reinforcement.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 24 of 66

Admixtures : Admixtures shall not be used without the prior approval of Company. Where utilised
they shall conform to the relevant BS or ASTM standard.

Curing : For shotcrete and concrete as described, the curing shall be moist curing with potable
water for a period of minimum 14 to 28 days.

7.2.11 Shotcrete Material Standards:

For correct durability the proposed material shall meet the following standards:

• Compressive Strength
BS 1881 Pt. 120 - A mean value of 28 MPa at 7 days with no single value less than 25 MPa.
• Bond Strength
By direct pull-off testing a mean value of 1.25 MPa at 7 days with no single value less than
1.0 MPa.
• Chloride Content
Less than 0.2% by weight of cement.
• Cement Content
Greater than 350 kg/m3
• Water/Cement Ratio
Between 0.3 and 0.45
• Alkali Content
Less than 3 kg/m3
• Water Soluble Sulphate
Less than 4% SO3 by weight of cement

7.3 Negative Connections

7.3.1 The negative connections are the return power feed connections for the cathodic protection
system, as shown in the design drawings. The connection shall be constructed as follows:
• A 30 mm deep hole shall be drilled in the end of a 10mm diameter section of steel
reinforcement which is 100 mm long
• The pre-stripped copper core of the negative cable shall be placed inside the hole and
braze welded to the rebar.
• The connection shall be encapsulated with a suitable, mechanically strong, adhesive lined
heat shrink tube extending 50 mm either side of the connection point.
• The bare portion of the reinforcement bar shall be suitably welded to the designated steel
reinforcement of the structure to be protected.

7.4 Reference Electrodes

7.4.1 To establish the effectiveness of the cathodic protection system, permanent reference
electrodes shall be installed to perform potential measurements. Reference Electrode
calibration certificates shall be provided to Company.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 25 of 66

7.4.2 These electrodes shall be commercially available devices, with a proven track record of their
use in concrete. Details of previous applications of the cells proposed by CONTRACTOR shall
be included as part of the technical submittal for Company approval.

7.4.3 The electrodes shall be Magnesium Dioxide supplied by Force Technologies.

7.4.4 In each case, the reference electrode shall be supplied with a test certificate, clearly
indicating its calibration value as recorded in a 3% sodium chloride solution at 25°C 1°C
against a laboratory standard calomel reference electrode. For an electrode to be
acceptable, the measured potential must be within 5 mV of the anticipated value.

7.4.5 Reference electrodes shall have a life expectancy of 25 years. They shall have a predicted
accuracy of ± 30 mV for the 25 year electrode life expectancy and shall have a tested
accuracy of ± 3 mV over any 24 hour period.

7.4.6 The temperature coefficient and its temperature range shall also be provided by the
manufacturer. The reference electrode shall be designed to operate in an environment
between 0°C and 60°C.

7.4.7 Each reference electrode shall be fitted with a suitable length of cable, such that no splices
are required. Lead cables shall be as specified in section 11.5.

7.4.8 The connection between the cable and the electrode shall be completely sealed and capable
of total immersion without leakage with a water head of one meter.

7.4.9 All reference electrodes shall be clearly and discretely marked with a serial number on the
electrode case and at the cable termination point. This number shall be recorded on the QC
test certificate and shall be recorded against its location on the ‘As-Built’ drawings.

7.4.10 Prior to installation, all electrodes shall be stored on site in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. A copy of this procedure shall be submitted to Company
for approval prior to shipment to site.

7.4.11 Each reference electrode shall be pre-cast into concrete of similar constituents to the anode
encapsulation material in such a manner that the complete cell is fully encapsulated to a
depth of 20 mm all round. The encapsulation shall be carried out at least three days prior to
placement and the surface of this encapsulation shall be roughened prior to placement to
prevent a shrinkage interface being formed. A copy of the exact procedure to be adopted by
CONTRACTOR shall be submitted to Company for approval prior to embedding the cells.

7.5 DC and Instrument Cables

7.5.1 DC cables shall conform to BS6004 600/1000V or approved equivalent grade cables. Cable
sizes shall be as per the design drawings. Cables shall be procured only from Company
approved vendors.

7.5.2 Positive and negative cables shall be colour coded. Colour coding shall be the same for all
areas. Colours are RED for positive and BLACK for negative in single core cables. Reference
cell and instrument negative cables shall have separate colours, NOT Black or Red. Proposed
colour scheme shall be submitted to Company for approval.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 26 of 66

7.5.3 Anode power feeder cables shall be of HMWPE. Cables from junction box shall be HMWPE.
The cable sizes shall be determined to suit the current rating and voltage drop requirements
of the CP design,

7.5.4 There shall be a discrete numbering code for each of the cable types, which shall be
submitted to Company for approval. Cable coding/ labeling shall be by means of
permanently engraved markers or other method approved by Company prior to use.

7.5.5 All cabling shall be of sufficient length to run from its point of origin through the concrete
and then in conduit, where appropriate, to the junction box without a splice.

7.5.6 All cables shall be clearly identified, tagged and numbered such that no confusion exists as
to their purpose or point of origin or termination.

7.5.7 All cables such as anode feeders, system negative drain, and instrument negative, reference
electrodes cables entering and exiting the junction boxes shall be tagged. Contractor shall
provide details of tagging as per section 16 of this specification.

7.5.8 The cable and all connections are critical. Complete electrical isolation between the anode
cable/splice/connection and the environment is essential. Water ingress or soil contact must
not occur.

7.5.9 All cable connections such as for power feeder, system and instrument negative shall have a
moisture seal which shall withstand the hydrostatic pressure and resist degradation from
oxidizing gases released at the anode.

7.5.10 All cables shall be laid in single runs. No cable to cable splicing connections shall be made,
where possible.

7.5.11 AC supply cable shall be suitably sized & rated for buried applications where high water
table and contaminated with chlorides. Contractor shall propose the type of cable along
with required technical information which shall include voltage drop calculations to
substantiate cable sizing for Company approval. AC supply cable shall be designed, supplied
and installed in accordance with RG Specification RG6-S-91-1382-005 for Low Voltage Cables
and also taking into consideration of above mentioned chloride contamination water.

7.5.12 Above ground cables shall be routed through steel/plastic conduit and / or cable trays as
required.

7.5.13 When cables routed through conduit, the conduit size shall confirm to percentage cross
section as per NEC Chapter 9 Table 1.

7.5.14 Cables which will be buried shall be inspected for insulation damage just before installation
by pulse type holiday detection set at 12,000V DC.

7.6 Junction Boxes

7.6.1 Junction boxes shall be of the following type:

▪ Distribution boxes

System Design & Installation Specification Page 27 of 66

 ▪ Positive anode junction boxes

▪ System Negative junction boxes

▪ Instrument Negative junction boxes

▪ Test Station junction boxes

7.6.2 All the above Junction Boxes shall meet this specification, design documents, contract scope
of work.

7.6.3 Junction boxes shall comprise:

a) Hinged door boxes
b) Cable entry gland plate
c) Terminals of the type and arrangement to suit the cable size and purpose.
d) All Junction Boxes shall meet the Hazardous Classification of the area where it is installed.
e) Junction boxes shall be identified by nameplate which shall be in line with existing tagging
system.
f) Labeling to identify the junction box name, tag number and internal labeling of terminals and
equipment in accordance with junction boxes termination drawings.
g) Junction boxes shall be suitable sized to house shunts if required by design and subject to
approval of Company. Resistors shall not be used on the anode or negative feed circuits.
h) Junction boxes shall have suitable heat dissipation rating for the heat generated. Cathode
control resistors shall not be used, to prevent the temperature rise within the junction box
under maximum outside ambient temperature conditions exceeding the continuous ambient
temperature rating of the equipment and cabling with the junction box.
i) Junction boxes shall not be equipped with variable resistors or fixed type resistors.
j) Cables terminated inside the junction box shall not have individual shunts and resistors.
k) Junction boxes shall comply with the relevant IP rating for the location as specified in BS
4752:1971, Appendix D. Minimum levels shall be IP55 for indoor use, IP66 for outdoor locations
subject to marine or coastal exposure and IP 65 for outdoor locations not subject to marine or
coastal exposure.
l) All doors shall be gasketed, lockable and stiffened. All locks shall be capable of being opened
with the same key. Cable entry shall be by suitable compression gland or in sealed conduits.
Appropriate precautions shall be taken to ensure that the cable entry system in no way
compromises the junction box IP rating.
m) The terminals shall be clearly marked with the zone/sub-zone, component type and number as
appropriate and shall also be marked with suitable identification corresponding to each
particular unit. The typical wiring layout for the panel shall be shown in the relevant internal
wiring drawings. All terminals shall be clearly labeled with their correct function, using white
engraved background on black surface. Material shall be traffolyte or equivalent.
n) Cable connectors shall be by DIN rail mounted terminals. Only one conductor per terminal shall
be permitted. Circuit expansion shall be achieved by standard bridging strips, barrels and
screws.
o) The required junction box layout and terminations shall be in accordance with the design
drawings. The Contractor should submit shop drawings showing the proposed junction box
layout based on the design drawings for Company approval prior to fabrication.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 28 of 66

 p) The junction box installation shall conform to NEC articles 500 through 517.
q) The junction box shall be securely and rigidly fastened in place in accordance with NEC article
370-23 (a & b).
r) The junction box shall be grounded in accordance with the provisions of NEC article 250.

7.7 Local Rectifier Units (LRU’s)

7.7.1 The Local Rectifier Units (LRUs) shall be modular and configurable multichannel single board
power converters specifically designed for industrial cathodic protection applications and
have the following capabilities

a) LRUs shall have rated continuous output capacity of a maximum of 15V/3A per channel
b) LRUs shall be capable of capturing all Reference electrode readings with a single interruption
for the entire system. Sequential Instant Off measurements one cabinet or zone at a time
will not be permitted.
c) Reference electrodes must be left in open circuit mode when not being measured by the
LRU.
d) The LRU shall be capable of operating in both Constant Current and Constant Voltage mode
e) Auto-Potential mode is not permitted.
f) The LRU shall have internal doors on which all Human Machine Interface is mounted. No
external keypads or LCD screens is permitted.
g) LRUs enclosures shall be powder coated carbon steel and to a rating of at least IP55
h) The LRU shall have a minimum of 4 Reference electrode inputs per channel.
i) User interface shall be via a hermetically sealed Keypad and a 16X2 Line LCD Screen.
j) Each LRU shall be capable of operating both as a standalone unit and under the control of a
Main Control Unit.
k) Zone voltage and current output shall have the following resolution
a. Voltage : 100mV accuracy for both set point and read points
b. Current : 1 mA accuracy for both set point and read points
l) Difference between zone current output set point and read value shall not exceed 2mA
m) LRU units shall incorporate a built-in RS485 communications port to enable direct network
connection and enable local users to remotely access, log, monitor, and adjust LRU
operation
n) The LRU shall be capable of operation with 85 to 265 VAC / 50 to 60Hz input power with a
conversion efficiency of 78 to 85%
o) LRUs shall be rated to operate over an ambient temperature range of -20C to +55C
p) LRUs shall have the capability of performing daily logs, depolarization logs over a period of
maximum 14 days. The data shall be retained on a removable memory SD card in excel
friendly format.
q) All daily log and depolarization log parameters shall be user changeable via the Keypad and
LCD screen locally and/or via the Main Control Unit.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 29 of 66

8 Testing prior to CP installation:
8.1 Prior to installation of CP components, perform following inspections.
a. Visual Inspection
• Purpose of visual inspection to identify with dimensions all the visible
damages such as cracks, delaminations, spalling, rust stains and other
defects.
• Review maintenance records and identify the status of the repairs accessible
and visible during the inspection.
• General condition of the structure shall be established from the visual
inspection results incorporating the effects of environmental conditions,
integrity of maintenance repairs and maintenance practices.
b. Concrete Cover Thickness Survey
• Contractor shall carryout depth or thickness measurements of concrete
cover using portable cover meters and verify with physical measurements.
• No of locations at which concrete cover shall be measured are:
• 5 locations per 100m2 or on each wall / section. Measurement
locations shall be distributed uniformly across the surface such
corners and center of the section.
• at locations where concrete cover varies as per as-built information.
• Concrete cover shall also be measured physically at locations where rebar
will be exposed for performing electrical continuity checks or delaminated
areas.
c. Delamination Survey
• Purpose to establish concrete damages which need to repaired during CP
component installation and may be used to install some of the CP
components. Cathodic protection current cannot penetrate a delamination
unless the delamination is removed and repaired or permanently
submerged and therefore full of water. Thus a delamination survey of the
entire concrete surface is required and all delamination shall be repaired
prior to application of cathodic protection.
• Delamination survey shall be carried out as per ASTM D 4580 using hammer
over the entire section.
• Purpose of this survey is to identify and measure the amount of cracking in
the plane of the reinforcement.
• Survey shall identify the locations which are visually delaminated.
d. Electrical continuity between rebars
• Purpose to establish electrical continuity of rebar which is a prerequisite to
ensure the successful operation for performance of cathodic protection
• It is necessary for the embedded steelwork to behave as a homogeneous
cathode. To be assured of this requirement, it shall be necessary to perform
a continuity survey between reinforcement cage and all externally mounted
steelwork and between different sections of reinforcement.
• CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring that all the steel
reinforcement layers, including links, tie bars saddles, etc. and any other
embedded metallic fixtures within the structure to be protected are
electrically continuous. At a minimum of five locations per 100 m² of
concrete surface area or each section of concrete surface, the DC resistance
of the reinforcement shall be measured. The method of measurement shall
be as described below.
o Step 1 : A DC ohm meter capable of resolving 0.1 ohm or less shall be
used for all continuity testing.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 30 of 66

 oStep 2 : The reinforcement steel to be used as a contact point must be
cleaned to a bright steel surface.
o Step 3 : The resistance between rebar test locations must be recorded
with the ohm meter lead wires connected in one way, then the leads
reversed and the resistance measurements repeated. The resistance
should not change if the bars are continuous.
• Discontinuous steel shall be indicated by one of the following:
o Resistance readings that change more than 0.5 ohms in 15 seconds.
o Unstable resistance readings on the test meter.
o Resistance readings greater than 1 ohm (cable resistance may be
deleted).
o Any resistance reading that changes by more than 1 ohm when the leads
are reversed.
• The locations selected should represent the most exacting geometric
configurations possible, e.g. change of section, change of plane of concrete,
diametric opposition, etc.
• All resistance readings shall be recorded on a plan sheet designating each
location needed. If discontinuous steel shall be located, as defined
previously, it shall be bonded to the continuous section of the
reinforcement.
• Any such established discontinuous steel must be bonded to the main
reinforcement or connected into the cathode circuit using external cabling
materials and procedures, which duplicate those for negative connections.
Bonding methodology will be as follows: make breakout to expose
discontinuous rebar and spot weld to make sure rebar is now continuous.
Resistance measurements will then be conducted to make sure that the
measurements comply with the electrical continuity assessment as
explained above in Steps 1, 2 and 3.
• Following bonding at these locations, the new reinforcement resistance shall
be recorded on the plan sheet. An original of the plan sheet, upon
completion of this stage, shall be given to the Resident Engineer.
e. Potential mapping
• Half-cell potential measurement to establish the probability of corrosion of
rebar. Results of the potential map will provide base line comparison data
and assist in determining most anodic areas for embedded reference
electrode placement.
• Potential mapping of the deteriorated condition shall be carried out prior to
any works after continuity of reinforcement is confirmed.
f. Structural Assessment
• The breakouts required to repair damaged areas will result in a loss of
structural capacity during repair. Each breakout area should be assessed
from a structural standpoint to ensure that sufficient structural capacity
remains during repair. If capacities are deemed inadequate the repairs
should either be carried out in a phased manner so that the extent of
breakout at any one time is limited or by providing structural support.

9 Repair prior to CP installation

9.1 Repair shall be undertaken on all areas where cathodic protection is to be installed.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 31 of 66

9.2 All unsound concrete shall be removed and repaired using materials approved as per this
specification. The term “unsound concrete” includes spalled, delaminated, deteriorated and
honeycombed concrete as well as cracks of width greater than 0.5 mm.

9.3 The exterior surfaces of the designated concrete area shall be broken out it is necessary to
break out behind the reinforcing layer unless steel is to be replaced. The breakout shall be
accomplished by either chipping hammers or by use of high pressure water blasting. Care
shall be taken to ensure that damage to the existing reinforcement does not occur during
concrete removal.

9.4 The breakout shall continue in all directions until the delaminated material has been
completely removed. It is not necessary to remove mechanically sound but chloride
contaminated concrete. The breakout shall be terminated at a sawn edge, which shall be at
least 20 mm deep. All debris generated by this concrete removal shall be continuously
stockpiled at a single point and shall be disposed in accordance with Company Waste
Management Procedures. This may not be applicable in areas where overlay will be installed.

9.5 Concrete shall be broken out to allow for at least 25mm behind the steel reinforcement.
Removal of cover only is not permitted as this will not allow for non tightly bonded rust to be
removed or the cross section loss to be determined.

9.6 To ensure a good bond between the repair material and the reinforcement steel (existing and
replacement as required), the surface of the steel needs to be cleaned to remove all traces of
loosely adherent corrosion product only. It is not necessary to clean to a bright metal finish.

9.7 The chipped surface of the base concrete shall be cleaned to remove all dust, dirt, loose
particles and any other surface contaminants leaving a visually clean surface, showing
exposed aggregate particles and a peak to trough depth of at least 8 mm between aggregate
particles. Cleaning shall be through vapor blasting; no other means will be accepted.

9.8 After all cleaning, the reinforcement shall be inspected. If the cross-section area has been
sufficiently reduced to cause structural concern, then additional reinforcement shall be
added. This may necessitate additional breakout and cleaning to allow sufficient lap length
between new and existing steel.

9.9 All exposed reinforcement, original and additional shall be coated within sixty minutes of
achieving the surface condition specified above. The only material which may be considered
as coating for the reinforcement is a cement wash. Polymer modified / based materials are
not acceptable.

9.10 Prior to placement of repair materials the based concrete surface shall be thoroughly soaked
with sweet water for a twenty four (12 to 24) hour period. Immediately prior to material
placement the concrete shall be allowed to surface dry such that no free-standing surface
water exists.

9.11 Materials that shall be used to re-profile the concrete breakout areas are as follows:-
a) Shotcrete for vertical and overhead applications.
b) Concrete for horizontal applications.
c) Hand placed mortar or shotcrete for patches less than 0.1 square meters in area.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 32 of 66

9.12 The materials properties and installation procedures shall be the same as those specified for
the overlay.

9.13 Contractor shall ensure that the shotcrete/repair material shall be compatible with existing
concrete. Contractor can obtain relevant documents for the concrete structure from Company

9.14 Contractor shall check if any junction box or distribution box or instrumentation box fixed on
the concrete structure and verify whether it requires relocation due to the shotcrete overlay.
If relocation not possible then, address the way by which overlay shall be applied taking into
consideration of access, operation, monitoring and maintenance of the subject box.

9.15 Electrical Continuity Bonding:

a) Contractor shall establish continuity bond, if any of the embedded metallic
elements including reinforcement steel found to be electrically discontinuous.
b) Any discontinuous steel established during the electrical continuity test must be
bonded to the main reinforcement or connected into the cathode circuit using
external cabling materials and procedures, which duplicate those for negative
connections. Bonding methodology shall be as follows:
• Make breakout to expose discontinuous rebar and arc weld additional steel
to make sure rebar is now continuous. Resistance measurements shall then
be conducted to make sure that the measurements comply with the
electrical continuity assessment as explained above in Steps 1, 2 and 3 of
electrical continuity test.
• Following bonding at these locations, the new reinforcement resistance shall
be recorded on the plan sheet. An original of the plan sheet, upon
completion of this stage, shall be given to the Resident Engineer.

9.16 Stray Current Interference

a) In areas where interference / stray currents are suspected, appropriate tests
shall be conducted.
b) All metallic structures embedded in or mounted on the concrete surface will be
affected by the passage of CP currents and shall therefore be part of the
cathode system by bonding to the reinforcement to prevent stray current
corrosion.
c) If stray current corrosion is suspected in any area sometime after installation
and commissioning, the contractor should be instructed to remove the concrete
and verify if reinforcement is continuous with the system negative. Any
discontinuous sections shall be bonded.

10 Installation of CP components
10.1 Embedded Anodes
a) Prior to anode placement the surface shall be adequately cleaned and prepared
according to the requirements of the cementitious overlay.
b) Anode mesh panels shall be placed according to the design drawings and shall
be interconnected with a current distributor system. This current / conductor
distributor bar shall be installed on the concrete surface and the anode mesh
placed on top. The bar shall be welded to the mesh at every mesh strand
crossing. The maximum distance between adjacent anode mesh panels shall be

System Design & Installation Specification Page 33 of 66

 100 mm. Mesh shall be securely fastened to the concrete surface using non-
metallic fasteners to ensure a tensioned installation, which will not be displaced
during overlay placement.
c) The grades of mesh applied in each zone / sub-zone shall be strictly in
accordance with the design drawings.

10.2 Positive Connections

Positive connections (anode feeder cable) shall be made to each conductor bar in
the following manner:
a) A 150 mm long, 3.175-mm diameter titanium rod shall be used.
b) Positive cable of the specified rating, colour and size shall be prepared in
sufficient length to run from the positive connection to the appropriate junction
box by the specified route without a cable splice.
c) The pre-stripped copper core of the positive cable shall be compression crimped
to the titanium rod.
d) The assembly shall be encapsulated with a suitable, mechanically strong
adhesive lined heat shrink tube, which extends 50mm either side of the crimp.
Care shall be taken during the heat shrink operation to ensure no damage
results to the cable insulation.
e) The anode feeder cable shall then be connected to the conductor bar at the
locations shown on the design drawings and as described below: (the exact
positions to be agreed on site).
f) The connection shall be positioned in the correct orientation and secured to the
conductor bar.
g) The connection shall be made by metallurgical welding (a minimum of 4 welds),
taking care to ensure that the process in no way damages conductor bar or the
cable connection system.
h) Prequalification of the spot welding shall be done prior to start of work.
Contractor shall propose tests to qualify the welder as well as the welding
procedure in accordance with applicable international code/standards. It is
understood however that spot welding does not require a qualified conventional
welder.
i)
Further the approved welding procedure shall include routine tests on the
production welds. Such tests shall be applicable for every shift or whenever
there is a stoppage of work for more than 4 hours.
10.3 Negative Connections
a) Negative connection shall be installed at the locations within each zone, as
shown in the relevant drawings (the exact positions to be agreed on site). The
reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned to expose clean bright steel around
its full circumference. The system negative cable shall then be connected to the
reinforcing steel as described in section 11.3.
b) Following installation of the system negative cables to each zone, the DC
resistance between each shall be recorded. Provided the DC resistance is less
than 1 ohm, the system negative connection shall be deemed acceptable. If the
recorded resistance is greater than 1 ohm, an additional system negative
connection shall be installed at an approved location. The DC resistance shall
again be re-measured; with the process repeated until a value less than 1 ohm

System Design & Installation Specification Page 34 of 66

 resistance is achieved. The resistance shall be recorded between any one single
cable and the remaining cables joined. The values so recorded upon achieving
the required resistance, shall be included as part of the commissioning report.
Cable resistance can be deducted from the measurements.
c) It is important that the approval of these connections by Company shall be
obtained prior to overlay placement.
d) All results shall be presented on a plan sheet. Final results after continuity
bonding shall be submitted as part of final documentation.

10.4 Reference Electrodes

a) The reference electrodes shall be installed at the locations shown on the design
drawings. The reference electrode shall be placed at the level of, and parallel to
the reinforcing steel. An instrument negative connection shall also be provided
next to the reference electrode and connected to the steel. This connection shall
be same as that of negative connection as described in section 14.3.

10.5 Application of Overlay

a) General
• The overlay shall extend over the whole area covered by cathodic protection
anodes.
• Care shall be taken to ensure that application of overlay does not damage
any anode, cables, etc. either within the pouring / shotcreted panel or on
adjacent panels.
• Any fixtures mounted on the concrete surface (such as existing JBs,
Instrument boxes etc.) which are not to be covered in overlay shall be
adequately protected during installation.
b) Surface Preparation
• Prior to anode and overlay application, the entire concrete surface shall be
prepared to the following level: All traces of laitance shall be removed to
expose clean aggregate by scabbling, chipping or abrasive blasting.
Whichever shall be the case, the prepared profile shall be a minimum of 50%
max. Aggregate size or 8 mm peak to trough between aggregate particles,
whichever is greater.
• Surface preparation shall be carried out to all surfaces to which anode is to
be installed irrespective of whether the substrate is original concrete or
repair material. Care shall be taken to ensure that the surface preparation
activities do not cause surface damage such as fracture of aggregate which
could weaken the interface once the overlay is applied. In the event that
this occurs further surface preparation by grit blasting or water blasting only
shall occur until a sound concrete surface is achieved.
c) Application
• Following preparation and anode installation, the surfaces shall be pre-
wetted with potable water for twelve (12) to twenty four (24) hours
immediately prior to overlay application, in order to reduce absorption of
curing water by the substrate concrete. Where considered necessary,
additional precautions shall be taken such as shading or polythene sheeting,
in order to assist the saturation of the existing concrete before application.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 35 of 66

 • The maximum time between mixing and application of overlay shall be
twenty (20) minutes.
• Where overlay is poured onto the deck areas on top of the anodes, only
external surface vibrators shall be permitted to compact the concrete. The
concrete shall be poured in a checkerboard pattern so as to minimize
shrinkage cracking.
• The poured overlay shall be applied in a single layer of nominal thickness as
required by design & drawings. Attention shall be given to provision of
designated falls to drains, etc. If staged lifts are adopted, the time between
pours shall be carefully controlled to avoid cold joints.
• Formwork shall be fixed securely to the base substrate and shall be rigid and
watertight. They shall be sufficiently strong to prevent bulging and sagging
during pouring. Form oil shall be used to prevent surface blemishes being
created by removal of the formwork. If such blemishes do arise they shall
be repaired by hand application of a similar mix to the pour with due
consideration for aggregate size.
• Where sprayed concrete shall be applied, the application shall conform to
the requirements of latest revisions of ACI 506.2 -77 “Specification for
materials proportioning and application of Shotcrete” and ACI 506R-85
“Guide to shotcrete”. CONTRACTOR is required to prequalify both the
material and the applicators as per section 8.0 of this specification i.e. by
install a test panel of his proposed mix and procedure to ensure compliance
with this specification.
• During the application of overlay, all the connections i.e. power feeders,
system/instrument negatives; reference electrodes shall be continuously
monitored to check their integrity. In case of any threat observed, then the
application of overlay shall be immediately stopped, investigated and
corrective actions taken. Any material which may expire during this stage
shall be discarded.
• All concrete overlays are to be cured with potable water for minimum of 14
days. Shading shall also be provided for surfaces in direct sunlight. Curing
agents shall not be used.
• Contractor shall submit an installation procedure covering each step in
details.
d) Hot Weather Precautions
• Normal concrete placement work and curing as outlined in this specification
shall be carried out when ambient or sub-surface temperature during
application and curing falls between 10°C (50°F) and 30°C (86°F). If the
temperature rises above 30°C (86°F) the following hot weather precautions
shall apply.
o Cement and sand shall be stored in a shaded area until needed for
application.
o Water used for mixing shall be maintained at less than 29°C in insulated
containers. If necessary, ice shall be added to the water to maintain the
temperature within the limits given.
o The temperatures of both the substrate prior to application and the
freshly placed concrete shall not exceed 30°C.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 36 of 66

 e) Suspension of concrete operations shall be effected under the following
conditions:-
• High wind and dust conditions that effect either proper application or
protection of fresh concrete.
• Rain
f) Repair of Defects
• Any overlay which lacks uniformity, exhibits segregation, honeycombing,
lamination or which contains dry patches, voids or sand pockets shall be
removed from the works and discarded. Such areas shall be repaired by
CONTRACTOR after approval of the CONTRACTOR method statement for
repair. If CONTRACTOR fails to repair to the satisfaction of the Company,
then it is required total removal and replacement of the entire section cast
in the same session as the defective area.

11 Areas where Existing Reinforced Concrete Joins to New Reinforced Concrete

Refer to the Cathodic Protection Specification for New Concrete Structures.

11.1 Target Steel for Cathodic Protection

Where the new concrete forms a jacket around the existing pile caps or dolphins the reinforcing
steel in the existing concrete can be protected by anode ribbon mesh installed on to the new
reinforcing steel.

11.2 Current Density and Anode Capacity

The anode spacing and anode rating shall be sufficient to ensure the required current density can be
achieved for both the new steel installed in the new concrete and the existing steel in the existing
concrete.

11.3 Continuity
All reinforcing steel should be made continuous. The new reinforcing steel must be electrically
continuous with the existing reinforcing steel. Continuity shall be achieved inside the concrete, i.e.
not only at the Junction Box. Continuity shall be achieved by means of a continuity bonds and welds
as described above.

11.4 Interface Preparation

The existing concrete should be prepared as per the structural requirements of the job with the
additional consideration that the bond must be sound over the full area to allow protection current
to flow across the interface.

11.5 Bond Coats

Bonding materials shall not be used between the substrate and new concrete.

11.6 Concrete Types

The new concrete shall be compatible with the existing concrete. The existing concrete type shall be
determined by petrographic analysis. A separate petrographic analysis shall be done for each
different structure or different part of structure, i.e. slab and columns. If recent petrographic data is
available this may be used.

12 Identification of CP Equipment

System Design & Installation Specification Page 37 of 66

12.1 All the equipment and components shall be tagged in line with the tagging system of the
existing CP systems.
12.2 CP components such as TRs, JBs, power feeders, negative and instrument cables, and
reference electrodes and any anode groundbeds shall be tagged. It shall include the existing
CP components if they are modified or part of the project.
12.3 Contractor shall tag these components as below
XX- CP-ZZ#
Where XX – LRU for Local Rectifier Unit
JBP for Positive Junction Box
JBN for Negative Junction Box
BJB for Bonding Box
T for Test Station
GB for Anode Groundbed
PF for Anode Power Feeder
SN for System Negative
IN for Instrument Negative
RE for Reference Electrodes
CP - common for all
ZZ - Numeric values continuous from existing tags/Nos.
# - Sequential No.

12.4 Company will provide the values for ZZ during the review of the design drawings.

12.5 Anode cables shall be tagged as CP-AN- ZZ-MA# where MA# is anode No.

12.6 Positive Header cables shall be tagged as CP-AN-R- ZZ$ where $ is A, B, C……….

12.7 Negative header cables shall be tagged as CP-DN-R- ZZ$ where $ is A, B. C………..

12.8 Bonding cables shall be tagged as CP-BB-STRUC@- STRUC@ where @ is a relevant bonded
structure.

12.9 All buried cables in trench shall be tagged as mentioned above every 50m using Stainless steel
316 material. Contractor shall propose the tagging system for Company approval.

12.10 All the tags shall be labeled as per Drawing D-90-1387-001 Sheet 4.

12.11 Contractor shall provide the list of CP Equipment and their relevant tags in line with above
required format for Company approval.

12.12 Design drawings shall reflect these tags for respective component.

13 Pre-commissioning
Pre-commissioning shall be carried out by a suitably qualified and experienced CP Specialist with CV
approved by Masdar to ensure high quality performance.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 38 of 66

13.1 Contractor shall carry out pre-commissioning as per T27-X07-006 “Cathodic Protection
Installation and Commissioning Requirement”. Pre-commissioning shall be carried out after
completion of installation of the system, including all pre-commissioning checks, setting of all
items of equipment, including control and protective devices, etc. The Contractor shall carry
out all site tests, reliability and performance tests.

13.2 Before the electrical facilities are placed in operation, Contractor shall carryout suitable tests
to establish the satisfaction of Company that all equipment, devices, wiring and connection
have been correctly installed, connected and are in good working condition as required for
intended operation.

13.3 It is mandatory that all the CP components are inspected prior to installation including those
requiring Factory Acceptance Tests. Review of all the documents for their validity and
approval status is mandatory prior to pre-commissioning.

13.4 Company shall witness all tests. At least two (2) weeks’ notice shall be given before
commencing the testing.

13.5 Contractor shall perform required tests of the electrical systems as per Company Specification
RG6-S-91-1548-001 Testing and Commissioning of Electrical Systems.

13.6 Copies of all test results shall be submitted as specified and as approved by Company in
respective formats.

13.7 Further contractor shall verify and confirm that all installations are in line with the approved
drawings, procedures, company specifications, codes, standards & practices

13.8 The contractor shall ensure that all cathodic protection system components such as T/Rs, Test
Stations and cables including Junction boxes, Bonding, etc. are installed, cables terminated,
tagged and working satisfactorily and fit for their purpose by undertaking detail testing &
commissioning. Any minor / major maintenance or adjustments carried out during the
commissioning stage shall be indicated in the final commissioning report.

13.9 The pre-commissioning checks and inspections of the Local Rectifier Unit shall be carried out
as per T27-X03-005 “Cathodic Protection Local Rectifier Unit Inspection procedure”. Some of
the requirements may be not required depending on the type of the LRU to be commissioned.

14 Commissioning

Following are the guidelines for commissioning the CP systems for general guidance.
Contractor shall refer to T27-X07-006 “Cathodic Protection Installation and Commissioning
Requirement” in addition to the below requirements and submit a separate procedure in
line with the design documents including verification of interference and mitigation
measures for Company approval. Unless the Commissioning procedure is approved,
Contractor shall not commence Commissioning of the CP systems.

14.1 Contractor shall perform tests required as per Company Specification RG6-S-91-1548-001
Testing and Commissioning of Electrical Systems.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 39 of 66

 14.2 On completion of installation of Transformer/Rectifier and other items of the CP system, they
shall be individually checked, tested and compared against the agreed specifications and
procedures.

14.3 CP systems shall be commissioned by a suitable qualified and experienced CP specialist

including all pre-commissioning checkups.

14.4 The commissioning shall be conducted following a suitable period of time to allow curing of
the surrounding concrete to be substantially complete (i.e., at least twenty eight days), using
the following procedure:

14.4.1 A complete visual examination and system walk down to be performed prior to energisation.
The inspection shall include all major CP equipment, conduits, cable connections, etc.

14.4.2 Resistance measurements shall be taken between system negative output and all anode
connections within each anode zone at the junction boxes using a DC resistance meter.
Stable resistance readings of less than 1ohm will indicate continuity of the cathode circuit.

14.4.3 Resistance measurements shall be taken between system positive output and all anode
connections within each anode zone at the junction boxes using a DC resistance meter.
Stable resistance readings of less than 1ohm will indicate continuity of the cathode circuit.

14.4.4 All rebar/concrete natural potentials shall be measured relative to the embedded
silver/silver chloride and other reference electrodes (natural potentials) and/or suitable
surface contact electrodes using a grid pattern of 1m by 1m where applicable prior to
energising the transformer rectifiers. This shall be done is access is available.

14.4.5 Check correct wiring polarity in transformer rectifier.

14.4.6 With controls at zero - power each transformer rectifier output channel separately and in
turn as described below.

14.4.7 TRs shall be initially energized to 10% of its capacity or 20% of design current requirement.

14.4.8 Observe and record ‘ON’ potentials after 5 minutes- these should more negative than the
natural potentials. Increase LRU output to 50% of design current.

14.4.9 If not, increase the current up to 50% and check potential. LRU output may be increased to
75% of design current if required.

14.4.10 Following energising of units as above, interference testing shall be carried out where
applicable.

14.4.11 The structure shall be allowed to polarize and stabilize for minimum twenty four (24) hours.

14.4.12 Record volts, amps, back EMF to each channel, also the ‘ON’ and instantaneous ‘OFF’
potentials (instantaneous ‘OFF’ potentials are defined as the potential measured at not less
than 0.1 seconds and not more than 1.0 seconds following interruption of current output).

14.4.13 Instant ‘OFF’ potentials should be 100 mV shifted from natural. If this requirement is not
achieved, increase the output current as stated above. The current shall not be increased

System Design & Installation Specification Page 40 of 66

 beyond the design current without approval from the CP specialist. The CP Specialist is
entitled to use a current higher than the design current if required subject to demonstrating
to Company that the proposed current does not exceed the recommended operating
current of the anode and all system cables. Such recommendation shall also include the
status of the LRU/circuit.

14.4.14 Once 100 mV has been achieved, the systems shall be allowed to polarise for a period of
twenty eight days.

14.5 The output settings shall be checked and maintained at these initial settings each day. After
twenty eight days, the ‘ON’ and instantaneous ‘OFF’ potentials shall be recorded and the
transformer rectifier left off and depolarized potentials shall be recorded after 4, 24, 48, 72
and 168 hours, after current interruption.

14.6 Each system shall be considered to be operating satisfactorily when both the following criteria
are met at all locations associated with that system:

14.6.1 Depolarisation measured from instantaneous ‘OFF’ shall be greater than 100mV

14.6.2 The absolute values of instantaneous ‘OFF’ are less than -1.05V vs. Ag/AgCl.

14.7 The above depolarisation test shall be repeated 1, 3, 6 and 12 months after first satisfactory
operation.

14.7.1 If the lower limit (100 mV) shall not be achieved at all locations or for any one transformer
rectifier, then the output of the relevant transformer rectifier channel shall be increased by
increments of not greater than 20% of present current output and the depolarisation tests
repeated until the criteria is met. If the upper limit shall be exceeded then reductions of
20% shall apply.

14.7.2 If for any structure, satisfactory commissioning shall be not achieved within three months of
initial energizing of the particular system, CONTRACTOR shall make a further survey of the
installed system.

14.8 CONTRACTOR shall include the above as a minimum for monitoring of the cathodic protection
system for a minimum period of twelve months after commissioning. Should any element or
part element of the internal cathodic protection system come under category (section 18.7.2)
above then the monitoring period shall be extended and any necessary repair work instigated
until the system is commissioned to the satisfaction of Company.

14.9 Report all the finding in the commissioning report.

14.10 All commissioning data shall be submitted as part of the as-built documentation prior to final
acceptance.

14.11 Separate commissioning report shall be submitted for each structure.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 41 of 66

14.12 Care shall be exercised that power supply remains uninterrupted during the period of
commissioning. Otherwise, in case of an interruption in power supply, the test in progress
shall be repeated. More sets of observations may be advised to be taken by the Company in
any of the above mentioned steps.

14.13 Finished records of testing and commissioning, including graphical representation of the final
step of structure to RE potential readings (both ON and instantaneous OFF), shall be
submitted with interpretation by the CP specialist. The detail status of the system including
analysis and recommendations with respect to future operation and maintenance
requirements shall clearly bring out in final commissioning report.

15 Calculations and Documentation

The following minimum documentation, drawings, inspection and test plans and check lists
shall be submitted for approval during different Phases of rehabilitation of existing concrete
structures as required by this specification.

15.1 Final design documents including reinforcement steel density, cathode current requirement,
anode size and positioning, zone size and current requirement, circuit resistance and power
supply rating.

15.2 All tests and inspection reports

15.3 Schematic of the entire CP systems

15.4 Embedded components detail drawings

15.5 LRU unit electrical schematic diagrams

15.6 LRU unit detailed wiring diagrams

15.7 LRU unit general arrangement and mounting detail drawings

15.8 CP equipment layout drawing

15.9 CP cable layout drawing & schedule

15.10 Test facility detail drawings

15.11 Junction boxes and support stands construction drawings.

15.12 Junction boxes termination drawings

15.13 Negative cable connection detail drawings

15.14 CP electrical installation specification

15.15 Installation procedures, ITP and QAP.

15.16 Pre-commissioning & commissioning procedures

System Design & Installation Specification Page 42 of 66

15.17 Operation and maintenance procedures / manual

16 Final Documentation

Contractor shall note that the documentation shall be submitted as per Company Requirements and
handover the following documents within 4 weeks of commissioning CP systems to the Company.
The document shall contain the following:

16.1 Final design calculations

16.2 Sub-vendor list with equipment or component supplied

16.3 Schematic diagrams of the entire CP system

16.4 Embedded components detail drawings

16.5 LRU unit electrical schematic, detailed wiring diagrams, general arrangement and mounting
detail drawings

16.6 T/R Operation & Maintenance Manual / Load certificates

16.7 Certificate of conformity to approved material supply document.

16.8 Test certificates.

16.9 T/R Cooling system/Type & Quantity of Oil required as per manufacturer.

16.10 List of CP components with Part Nos as BOM

16.11 List of spares parts with Part Nos

16.12 CP equipment other than T/R & cable layout drawing

16.13 CP cable layout drawing & schedule

16.14 Test facility detail drawings

16.15 Junction boxes and support stands construction drawings.

16.16 Junction boxes termination drawings

16.17 As built drawing

16.18 Test results in tabular as well as graphical form

16.19 All other documents and submittals specified in several sections of this specification.

17 As Built Drawing
17.1 Construction design drawings shall be updated to reflect field modifications to the original
design to show the as-built cathodic protection system and its components. The as-built

System Design & Installation Specification Page 43 of 66

 drawings shall show the type, location and all the details of each of the cathodic protection
equipment and cables. Drawings shall be in compliance to the Company’s standard format
and shall be prepared and submitted in A3 or A1, where appropriate.

17.2 Contractor shall submit all the drawings for Company approval.

17.3 Contractor shall modify the existing drawings if affected to reflect the new changes.

18 Training and Support

Contractor shall submit Operations and Maintenance Manual for the CP systems installed and
commissioned for each project. This manual shall also include the baseline data established during
the final commissioning of the CP systems, trouble shooting of various components of the CP
systems and recommendations such as routine monitoring philosophy. The manual shall include the
following as a minimum:

18.1 Operation
a) A description of the system, what it does, how it works and when it was installed.
b) Description of the transformer rectifiers and all its components.
c) System operation - A description of how to monitor the system, interpret results and
make adjustments to the system.
18.2 Maintenance
a) Preventive Maintenance – provide full details of how to carry out routine planned
maintenance operations intended to maximize the life of equipment.

b) Manufacturer contact details for each component and guidance in ordering spare
parts.

19 Verification and Measurement

19.1 All the installation shall be supervised by contractor’s sufficiently qualified and experienced CP
Technician with CV approved by MASDAR.

19.2 All pre-design survey, designs, pre-commissioning and commissioning shall be verified and
approved by Contractor’s sufficiently qualified and experienced CP Specialist with CV
approved by MASDAR.

19.3 All recommendation shall be provided by the Contractor’s sufficiently qualified and
experienced CP Specialist with CV approved by MASDAR.

19.4 MASDAR-Corrosion shall witness the installation & commissioning & review and approve the
commissioning reports. Further all the recommendations shall be verified by the Company’s
SME for Cathodic Protection and ensure that all the approved recommendations are
implemented.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 44 of 66

SECTION 2: External Coating

System Design & Installation Specification Page 45 of 66

1 Protective Coating
1.1 Scope of Works
1. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor and equipment and in performing all operations in
connection with the application of a protective coating to all the exposed concrete surfaces of the TSE
Tank and Sump Pit.
2. The color of the coating to be applied will be decided by the Employer upon inspection of site trials by the
Contractor.
3. Any site trials requested by the Engineer irrespective of their numbers and size shall be made at the full
expense of the Contractor.
4. The work shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner with special care taken to prevent
damage to existing structures and utility lines. Damage caused by improper work procedures or failure to
maintain drains, lines, equipment or structures shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
5. Where the surface preparation or painting application requirements of this specification differ from those
of the approved paint manufacturer, the paint manufacturer's requirements shall take precedence,
subject to the approval of the Engineer.

6. Whilst the contents of this specification define the essential requirements of surface preparation and
painting, they in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to carry out the work in accordance
with good practice, such as is laid down in the publications listed in Sub-clause 1.2 below.
1.2 References
1.2.1 BS EN 1504 relevant applicable parts.
1.2.2 ACI RAP Bulletin - Field Guide to Concrete Repair Application Procedures.
1.2.3 BS EN 1504: Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures Submittals

1.2.4 Prequalification
1. The Contractor shall provide the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor with evidence that the
Contractor is qualified to perform coating application. The data shall show that the Contractor has a
minimum of 5 years of experience in performing works similar to that detailed in the drawings and
specifications.
2. The Contractor shall submit a list of 5 projects in which resin injection was successfully completed. The list
shall contain the following information for each project:
a) Project name and location.
b) Owner of project.
c) Brief description of work.
d) Date of completion of resin injection work.
3. If the repair work is performed by the Contractor's personnel under the supervision of the manufacturer's
representative, the data shall show that the resin manufacturer has a minimum of 3 years' experience
providing resin materials similar to those specified.
1.2.5 Material Approvals
1. In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall submit information for all
products and materials used in the Works to the Client's Representative / Client's Works Supervisor's
approval at least 3 weeks in advance of their mock-up trials /use. Track records of successful application,
use in this region and availability of materials as per proposed schedules must be checked before
proposing the materials. For each proposed product / material the following should be submitted.
a) Manufacturer’s name.
b) Product data sheets showing compliance with specification requirements.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 46 of 66

 c) Manufacturer’s technical data.
d) Test results or certificates.
e) Storage instructions.
f) Application instructions.
g) List of projects with similar application in this region
h) Any other information/critical details as required.
2. The Contractor shall supply test results to the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor for
materials to be used to demonstrate compliance with the specifications and international standards
including BS EN 1504 for specification works.
1.2.6 Method Statements
1. The Contractor shall submit detailed method statements for the protective coating works. The submittal
shall include technical data sheets, evidence of quality assurance system compliance and material safety
data sheets (MSDS) for all products proposed to be used for the works.
2. Method statements shall also include applicable health, safety and environmental procedures. Special
considerations for work under confined spaces shall be given.
1.2.7 Inspection and Test Plan
1. The Contractor shall submit an Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) that details quality controls and inspections
for all stages of the works including surface preparation, materials preparation and application as detailed
in the method statements Hold points /witness points for all the stages of work, Acceptance/Rejection
criteria and proposed testing with frequency of tests etc. shall be identified.
2. The Contractor shall allow the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor a minimum period of 3
hours of unhindered access to each area before work commences to allow time to inspect and test the
concrete, identify the crack injection areas and inspect the quality and integrity of injection. The
Contractor shall give at least 24 hours’ notice before inspection is required.
1.2.8 Drawings
1. Length of cracks required to be injected will be recorded on drawings and submitted for Client’s
Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor for his approval.
2. As built drawing showing the location of crack repair and size shall be prepared after the completion of
crack repair by the Contractor and shall be submitted to the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works
Supervisor.
1.2.9 Mock-ups & Trials
1. Provide mock up samples of each type of injection and joint repair system for critical areas for the
Engineers approval at no additional cost.
2. Once a satisfactory standard of work has been reached, the trials shall be used as a standard sample for
the approval of the subsequent works.
1.2.10 Warranties
1. The Contractor shall supply a warranty for the materials and workmanship of not less than 5 years on the
works undertaken.
1.2.11 Standard of Work
1. The personnel assigned to undertake the work shall be approved by the Client’s Representative / Client’s
Works Supervisor and hold relevant certificates of competence issued by the Contractor and evidence of
previous experience and satisfactory work indicating compliance with national standards to the approval
of the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor
2. All the works shall be carried out in accordance with international standards including but not limited to
BS EN 1504 relevant part and best industry practice.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 47 of 66

1.3 Quality Assurance & Control
1. A total quality management approach is required of the Contractor at every stage of the project.
Contractor must hold current registration for quality assurance and quality control in accordance with ISO
9001 and suppliers must have ISO 9002 registration for materials used in concrete construction. The
Contractor shall retain accurate records at all stages of repairs.
2. The crack injection shall be performed by the Contractor's personnel trained under the supervision of the
resin manufacturer's representative on the proper techniques of injecting resin with an injection system
approved by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide a full-time, onsite, manufacturer-certified
injection supervisor throughout the duration of the resin injection work.
3. The Contractor shall carry out the test procedures required by this Section and any other tests and test
procedures as directed by the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor from time to time. The
test procedures shall be carried out using the facilities of an approved independent testing laboratory to
the approval of the Client.
4. Supply, storage, sampling and testing of all materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, unless
the Contract specifies otherwise.
1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1. The Contractor shall supply samples and test results to the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works
Supervisor for materials to be used to demonstrate compliance with the international standards including
BS EN 1504 relevant part.
2. Deliver materials in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperature and construction operations.
Remove and dispose of damaged material in accordance with applicable regulations. All materials
delivered to site shall be recorded, stored and handled in accordance with this specification.
3. Records shall be kept of each batch of material delivered to Site and shall include:
a) Formulator’s name and address;
b) Formulator’s agent's name and address where applicable;
c) Material identification;
d) Batch reference number, size of batch and number of containers in the delivery;
e) Date of manufacture and shelf life at the prevailing storage conditions;
4. Materials shall be stored in accordance with this Specification and Material Manufactures
recommendations. All proprietary materials shall be stored in a dry, weatherproof lock-up store in a
sheltered location that is free from extremes of cold or heat, in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
5. A temperature and humidity monitoring station shall be provided in the lock-up and records kept
confirming compliance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
6. The materials shall not be removed from the store for use until immediately before mixing.
1.5 Health & Safety Requirements
1. This document to be read in conjunction with the Specification for Works to be carried out in accordance
with the municipalities and Client’s Health and Safety requirements, and OSHA (Occupational Safety and
Health Administration) requirements.
2. Protective clothing, including rubber or plastic gloves, safety boots and protective glasses, shall be worn
by all persons handling polyurethane resins.
3. If necessary, respirators that filter isocyanate vapors and mists shall also be worn.
4. Resin spillage shall be immediately to the Client and thoroughly cleaned up.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 48 of 66

5. All materials, tools, and containers contaminated with injection resin, surface sealers, or other
contaminants shall be removed from the site for disposal in accordance with appropriate local or Federal
regulations.
6. Consult the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of all the materials used before handling them.
2 Materials
2.1 Anti-Carbonation – Wall and Soffit
1. Provide coating materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one another and able to
develop bond to substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the coating
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. The protective coating system shall be an elastomeric and anti-carbonation coating for concrete based on
acrylic copolymer resin.
3. The coating material shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 1504: Products and systems for the
protection and repair of concrete structures, except where modified by this Specification or as agreed
with the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor.
4. All materials used in the works shall be obtained from a single manufacturer.
5. Approval from the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor shall be obtained before supplying
materials from alternative manufacturers. Agreement by the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works
Supervisor will follow an approval process.
6. The protective coating system shall meet the following properties:

Property Requirements
Relative density 1.38 at 25°C
Solids content by volume 42
Reduction in chloride ion penetration 95%
Chemical resistance Resistant to spillage of gasoline, diesel,
sewage, weak acids and alkalis
Pull Off Strength >1N/mm²
Protective paint system Nominal thickness
Dry Film Thickness (DFT):

Primer - as per manufacturer

Intermediate Coat - D.F.T. of 200 microns
Finish Coat -. D.F.T. of 200 microns
Total DFT 400 microns

3 Workmanship
3.1 Phasing of the work
1. All injection works need to be carried out considering the usage of carpark. The Contractor shall liaise with
the client to confirm the proposed utilization of structure prior to providing a detailed programme for the
works.
3.2 Health & Safety
1. Considering the work site to be a berth in service contractor should carry out risk assessment of the
activities involved under present scope of work.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 49 of 66

3.3 Access Provision
1. Scaffolds and working platforms shall be designed, erected, operated, maintained and dismantled so as to
ensure that safe working conditions are provided for all site personnel. In addition, complete protection
shall be provided to the structure, its occupants and the general public.
2. Scaffolds and working platforms (the “access provision”) shall be erected, altered and dismantled by
experienced operatives who shall be under competent supervision.
3. Scaffold shall be boarded out to the face of the structure in working areas to prevent material or
equipment falling to lower levels or the ground. Kick-boards shall be provided on the outside edges of the
scaffold to prevent material or equipment falling to lower levels or the ground.
4. Proper entry, exit and ventilation etc. shall be checked, managed and adjusted to suit the required
working environment at all the time during the progress of works.
3.4 Concrete Surface Preparation
1. All existing coating shall be removed by suitable means as per manufacturer requirement and as agreed
with the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor.
2. All existing surfaces shall be free from soluble salts, oil, grease, loose particles, decayed matter moss or
algae growth and general curing compounds. All surface contamination and surface laitance must be
removed through the use of high pressure water jetting or sweep blasting. The surface preparation should
be in accordance with guidelines given in BS 8221: Part 1.
3. Blow holes, surface cracks shall then be filled with a proprietary two-part polymer modified cementitious
fairing coat as recommended by the coating manufacturer. The mixing and application of the fairing coat
must be carried out in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.5 Application of Coating
1. The Contractor shall ensure that works preparation is restricted to the concrete areas as detailed on the
contract only. All other areas, such as steelwork, are to be protected against contact by water or moisture
during the execution of work. The surface shall be protected against grit blasting also.
2. Coating application shall be performed by competent and experienced personnel under close supervision
to ensure that coatings are not applied until the specified standard of surface preparation has been
achieved, weather conditions are suitable for coating application and curing, and the coating application
and film thickness requirements are strictly followed.
3. The applied coating shall be uniform in thickness and appearance and shall be free of defects such as runs,
blisters, pinholes, holidays, overspray, inclusions, etc.; using application equipment (or a combination of
equipment), a sequence of coating various surfaces and techniques that produce the required coverage,
DFT, standard of finish and film integrity implied by this Specification and the product data sheets for the
coating products employed. All overspray shall be removed by sanding from the surface of primer or
intermediate coats before overcoating commences.
4. Coating application should only be carried out when good atmospheric conditions and clement weather
prevail. Painting should not be undertaken;
• When the air temperature falls below the lower drying or curing limit of the coating,
• The relative humidity is above 85 percent,
• When the surface to be painted is wet with condensation or when condensation can occur during the
initial drying period of the paint.
5. Coating shall be applied by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to manufacturer’s written
instruction. All application tools should be cleaned and undamaged.
6. The number of coat and film thickness required is the same regardless of application method.
7. Complete work shall match approved samples, for colour texture and coverage.
8. Work that does not comply with the specified requirements shall be removed, refinished or recoated.
9. Testing for Dry Film Thickness (DFT) should be done according to BS EN ISO 2808.
System Design & Installation Specification Page 50 of 66
3.6 Final Inspection & Acceptance of Work
1. When all coating works, or portion of works has been completed, the Contractor shall arrange for final
inspection of works and shall obtain signature of the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor
on

System Design & Installation Specification Page 51 of 66

SECTION 3: Crack Injection

System Design & Installation Specification Page 52 of 66

1 Crack Injection
1.1 Scope
7. The work shall include the furnishing by the Contractor, of all supervision, training, labor, materials,
tools and equipment and the performance of all operations necessary for the resin injection work
indicated in the Crack Maps, specified herein, and/or as directed by the Engineer onsite.
8. The work consists of the injection of resin into concrete cracks for B3 raft to P3 Slab, locations as
shown on the Crack Maps and in other areas designated by the Engineer and located within the
limits of the Contract.
9. The Contractor shall undertake a joint inspection with the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works
Supervisor in order to verify the scope for the concrete crack injection works prior to
commencement of the Works on site with adequate notice to the Client’s Representative / Client’s
Works Supervisor.
10. The work shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner with special care taken to prevent
damage to existing structures and utility lines. Damage caused by improper work procedures or
failure to maintain drains, lines, equipment or structures shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
11. Documentation of the work performed shall be submitted by the Contractor, including both daily
work Reports and injection locations marked neatly on the drawings.
1.2 References
1.2.1 BS EN 1504 relevant applicable parts.
1.2.2 ACI RAP Bulletin - Field Guide to Concrete Repair Application Procedures.
1.2.3 ACI 224.1R – Causes, Evaluation and Repair of Cracks in Concrete

1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Prequalification
4. The Contractor shall provide the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor with evidence
that the Contractor is qualified to perform resin injection / crack repairs. The data shall show that
the Contractor has a minimum of 5 years of experience in performing works similar to that detailed
in the drawings and specifications.
5. The Contractor shall submit a list of 5 projects in which resin injection was successfully completed.
The list shall contain the following information for each project:
e) Project name and location.
f) Owner of project.
g) Brief description of work.
h) Date of completion of resin injection work.

6. If the repair work is performed by the Contractor's personnel under the supervision of the
manufacturer's representative, the data shall show that the resin manufacturer has a minimum of 3
years' experience providing resin materials similar to those specified.
1.3.2 Material Approvals
3. In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall submit information for all
products and materials used in the Works to the Client's Representative / Client's Works Supervisor's
approval at least 3 weeks in advance of their mock-up trials /use. Track records of successful
application, use in this region and availability of materials as per proposed schedules must be
checked before proposing the materials. For each proposed product / material the following should
be submitted.
i) Manufacturer’s name.
j) Product data sheets showing compliance with specification requirements.
k) Manufacturer’s technical data.
l) Test results or certificates.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 53 of 66

 m) Storage instructions.
n) Application instructions.
o) List of projects with similar application in this region
p) Any other information/critical details as required.

4. The Contractor shall supply test results to the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor for
materials to be used to demonstrate compliance with the specifications and international standards
including BS EN 1504 for injection and joint repair works.
1.3.3 Method Statements
3. The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval in advance of
commencing the site activity. These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
a) Procedures for resin injection to cracks.
b) Hold points /witness points for all the stages of work, Acceptance/Rejection criteria and proposed testing with frequency of tests etc.
shall be identified.

1.3.4 Inspection and Test Plan

3. The Contractor shall submit an Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) that details quality controls and
inspections for all stages of the works including surface preparation, materials preparation and
application as detailed in the method statements.
4. The Contractor shall allow the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor a minimum period
of 3 hours of unhindered access to each area before work commences to allow time to inspect and
test the concrete, identify the crack injection areas and inspect the quality and integrity of injection.
The Contractor shall give at least 24 hours’ notice before inspection is required.
1.3.5 Drawings
3. Length of cracks required to be injected will be recorded on drawings and submitted for Client’s
Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor for his approval.
4. As built drawing showing the location of crack repair and size shall be prepared after the completion
of crack repair by the Contractor and shall be submitted to the Client’s Representative / Client’s
Works Supervisor.
1.3.6 Mock-ups & Trials
3. Provide mock up samples of each type of injection and joint repair system for critical areas for the
Engineers approval at no additional cost.
4. Once a satisfactory standard of work has been reached, the trials shall be used as a standard sample
for the approval of the subsequent works.
1.3.7 Warranties
2. The Contractor shall supply a warranty for the materials and workmanship of not less than 10 years
on the works undertaken.
1.3.8 Standard of Work
3. The personnel assigned to undertake the work shall be approved by the Client’s Representative /
Client’s Works Supervisor and hold relevant certificates of competence issued by the Contractor and
evidence of previous experience and satisfactory work indicating compliance with national standards
to the approval of the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor
4. All the works shall be carried out in accordance with international standards including but not
limited to BS EN 1504 relevant part and best industry practice.
1.4 Quality Assurance & Control
5. A total quality management approach is required of the Contractor at every stage of the project.
Contractor must hold current registration for quality assurance and quality control in accordance
with ISO 9001 and suppliers must have ISO 9002 registration for materials used in concrete
construction. The Contractor shall retain accurate records at all stages of repairs.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 54 of 66

6. The crack injection shall be performed by the Contractor's personnel trained under the supervision
of the resin manufacturer's representative on the proper techniques of injecting resin with an
injection system approved by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide a full-time, onsite,
manufacturer-certified injection supervisor throughout the duration of the resin injection work.
7. The Contractor shall carry out the test procedures required by this Section and any other tests and
test procedures as directed by the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor from time to
time. The test procedures shall be carried out using the facilities of an approved independent testing
laboratory to the approval of the Client.
8. Supply, storage, sampling and testing of all materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor,
unless the Contract specifies otherwise.
1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling
7. The Contractor shall supply samples and test results to the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works
Supervisor for materials to be used to demonstrate compliance with the international standards
including BS EN 1504-part 5 Concrete Injection and other relevant part.
8. Deliver materials in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperature and construction
operations. Remove and dispose of damaged material in accordance with applicable regulations. All
materials delivered to site shall be recorded, stored and handled in accordance with this
specification.
9. Records shall be kept of each batch of material delivered to Site and shall include:
f) Formulator’s name and address;
g) Formulator’s agent's name and address where applicable;
h) Material identification;
i) Batch reference number, size of batch and number of containers in the delivery;
j) Date of manufacture and shelf life at the prevailing storage conditions;

10. Crack injection materials shall be stored in accordance with this Specification and Material
Manufactures recommendations. All proprietary materials shall be stored in a dry, weatherproof
lock-up store in a sheltered location that is free from extremes of cold or heat, in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
11. A temperature and humidity monitoring station shall be provided in the lock-up and records kept
confirming compliance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
12. The materials shall not be removed from the store for use until immediately before mixing.
1.6 Health & Safety Requirements
7. This document to be read in conjunction with the Specification for Works to be carried out in
accordance with the municipalities and Client’s Health and Safety requirements, and OSHA
(Occupational Safety and Health Administration) requirements.
8. Protective clothing, including rubber or plastic gloves, safety boots and protective glasses, shall be
worn by all persons handling polyurethane resins.
9. If necessary, respirators that filter isocyanate vapors and mists shall also be worn.
10. Resin spillage shall be immediately to the Client and thoroughly cleaned up.
11. All materials, tools, and containers contaminated with injection resin, surface sealers, or other
contaminants shall be removed from the site for disposal in accordance with appropriate local or
Federal regulations.
12. Consult the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of all the materials used before handling them.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 55 of 66

 2 Materials
7. A chemical resin shall be used for sealing concrete cracks. The selection of a resin for application at
specific locations shall be based on the nature of the crack in relation to the resin's properties. All
resin used shall have a successful history of application for at least five years under conditions similar
to the current conditions of the project.
2.1 Material Manufacturer
1. All materials used in the works shall be obtained from a single manufacturer.
2. Approval from the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor shall be obtained before
supplying materials from alternative manufacturers. Agreement by the Client’s Representative /
Client’s Works Supervisor will follow an approval process.
3. Resin for crack and joint injections shall be one of the following as approved by the Engineer.
2.2 Polyurethane based resin
1. Injection resin shall be low viscous, elastic and solvent free polyurethane injection resin. In contact
with water, a uniform, closed and therefore watertight pore structure forms, which is elastic and
flexible. It shall be suitable in application in both dry and damp condition.
2. The injection resin material shall meet the following properties:

TABLE 1
Polymer Modified Acrylic Resin
Property Test Method Requirements

Viscosity at 25°C (mPas) EN ISO 3219 ~100

Expansion (%) DIN EN 14406 ~1.3

Elongation% ISO 527 ~35

3 Workmanship
3.1 Phasing of the work
2. All injection works need to be carried out considering the usage of carpark. The Contractor shall liaise with
the client to confirm the proposed utilization of structure prior to providing a detailed programme for the
works.
3.2 Health & Safety
2. Considering the work site to be a berth in service contractor should carry out risk assessment of the
activities involved under present scope of work.
3.3 Access Provision
5. Scaffolds and working platforms shall be designed, erected, operated, maintained and dismantled so as to
ensure that safe working conditions are provided for all site personnel. In addition, complete protection
shall be provided to the structure, its occupants and the general public.
6. Scaffolds and working platforms (the “access provision”) shall be erected, altered and dismantled by
experienced operatives who shall be under competent supervision.
7. Scaffold shall be boarded out to the face of the structure in working areas to prevent material or
equipment falling to lower levels or the ground. Kick-boards shall be provided on the outside edges of the
scaffold to prevent material or equipment falling to lower levels or the ground.
8. Proper entry, exit and ventilation etc. shall be checked, managed and adjusted to suit the required
working environment at all the time during the progress of works.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 56 of 66

3.4 Survey and Location of Crack
1. The cracks lengths to be injected shall be identified by the Contractor, and these areas shall be marked out
by the Contractor for inspection and approval by the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor
prior to the commencement of work. Upon approval the location and length of joint shall be entered into
record sheets in duplicate and signed by the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor, prior to
the removal of existing sealant.
2. The personnel to be employed in surveying, sampling work and marking up of cracks shall be suitably
trained and competent. Operatives found to be unsatisfactory shall be barred from the work of surveying,
sampling and marking up.
3. During the course of the survey work photographs shall be taken at locations agreed by the Client’s
Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor. Photographs shall be supplied in digital format on CD. Two
copies shall be provided for the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor.
3.5 Concrete Surface Preparation
1. The concrete surface to be repaired by resin injection shall be thoroughly cleaned of all deteriorated
concrete, efflorescence, and all other loose material.
2. The area to be injected shall then be thoroughly inspected and an injection port drilling and pumping
pattern established.
3.6 Application of Resin (Injection)
10. The process used for injection of cracks shall consist of the following basic steps. Contractor can propose
alternate method of resin injection subject to approval of Client’s Representative / Client’s Works
Supervisor.
a) Clean along the lengths of the cracks to remove all surface deposits, in order that the full extent of the crack can be seen.
b) Mark out positions spaced 200 to 300mm apart, staggered either side of the cracks.
c) Drill 14 mm diameter holes for the 13mm dia x 70mm long screw packers at an angle on either side of the crack at an interval of about 220-30
cm so as to intercept the joint somewhere near the center of the member.
d) Prior to the installation of packers, blow clean the holes by oil free compressed air or by using a rubber bulb dust blower
e) Install the 13mm dia by 70mm long metal screw packers in the drilled holes and tighten them so it can withstand the maximum injection
pressure.
f) Mix the polyurethane based injection system as per manufacturer recommendation.
g) Start the injection from one end of the crack and continued from one port to another. For vertical crack, injection starts from the lowest
injection packer. The injection pressure shall be maintained at 5 bars. If there is blockage or resistance, maximum allowable pressure is 20
bars.
h) Do the injection until the injection material flows out of the adjoining packer or on the refuse. Stop the injection, detach the whip hose, tighten
the second packer, attach the whip hose and loosen the adjoining packer.
i) Repeat the injection procedure from packer to packer until crack is completely filled and sealed.
j) Once resin is cured, remove the packer and grind off the excess injection material. The full length of injection packer shall be removed, cutting
the protruding part of the packer and leaving portion of it inside the drilled hole is not acceptable
k) Fill the packer hole with approved epoxy repair mortar

11. The pump used to inject the resin system shall be a single-component electric injection machine with
mixing head and pressure regulator necessary to control injection pressures while pumping low volumes.
The equipment will be subject to approval by the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor.
12. Resin injection methods shall be in accordance with the approved, detailed proposal for injection repair
and shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the resin manufacturer’s recommendations.
13. Records shall be kept of the injection process. The records shall include an indication of whether or not
flow of resin is achieved at adjacent holes before injection at a particular port is terminated. The total
quantity of resin injected into each crack system shall be recorded.
3.7 Sampling & Testing
1. Unless agreed otherwise by the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor, the testing shall be
carried in accordance with this Specification/ BS EN 1504 part 5.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 57 of 66

2. The Contractor may propose alternative compliance testing and compliance testing regimes for approval
by the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor, as considered to be necessary for any
equivalent work, goods or materials proposed by the Contractor.
3. As crack the injection repairs proceeds, the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor will
continue to carry out inspections and may undertake further testing to establish the integrity of injection.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for drilling and removing three, a minimum of 25mm-diameter cores
from the injected concrete at locations determined by the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works
Supervisor to determine the completeness of the injection repair.
3.8 Final Inspection & Acceptance of Work
2. When all injection works, or portion of works has been completed, the Contractor shall arrange for final
inspection of works and shall obtain signature of the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor
on completion document for the work complete

System Design & Installation Specification Page 58 of 66

SECTION 4: Internal Waterproofing

System Design & Installation Specification Page 59 of 66

1 Internal Coating

1.1 Scope of work

1. The work shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor and equipment and in performing all
operations in connection with the application of coating to all internal walls and floor of the
TSE water tank .
2. Site trials requested by the Engineer irrespective of their numbers and size shall be made at
the full expense of the Contractor.
3. The work shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner with special care taken to
prevent damage to existing structures and utility lines. Damage caused by improper work
procedures or failure to maintain drains, lines, equipment or structures shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
4. Where the surface preparation or coating application requirements of this specification
differ from those of the approved paint manufacturer, the paint manufacturer's
requirements shall take precedence, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
5. Whilst the contents of this specification define the essential requirements of surface
preparation and coating, they in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to
carry out the work in accordance with good practice, such as is laid down in the publications
listed below.

I. BS EN 1504 relevant applicable parts.

II. ACI RAP Bulletin - Field Guide to Concrete Repair Application Procedures.
III. BS EN 1504: Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures
Submittals

1.2 Material

Spray-applied, 100% solids, flexible, two-component, rapid curing pure Polyurea system –
Internal walls and floor of the tank.
The protective coating system shall meet the following properties:

Property Requirements
Solid by Volume 100%
Tensile strength ASTM D412 >14 MPs
Tera Resistance ASTM D624C >55 N/mm
Elongation ASTMD412 >300%
Shore A ASTM D2240 88
Shore D ASTM D2240 24
Abrasion (I kg. CS10 Wheels) 28 mg/1000 Cycles
ASTM D4060
Abrasion (I kg. CS17 Wheels) 40 mg/1000 cycles
DIN EN ISO 5470
Static Crack Bridging, 8mm 10 cycles, Pass
ASTM C836

System Design & Installation Specification Page 60 of 66

1.3 Prequalification

1. The Contractor shall provide the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor with
evidence that the Contractor is qualified to perform coating application. The data shall show
that the Contractor has a minimum of 5 years of experience in performing works similar to
that detailed in the drawings and specifications.
2. The Contractor shall submit a list of 5 projects in which resin injection was successfully
completed. The list shall contain the following information for each project:
I. Project name and location.
II. Owner of project.
III. Brief description of work.
IV. Date of completion of Polyurea coating works.
3. If the repair work is performed by the Contractor's personnel under the supervision of the
manufacturer's representative, the data shall show that the resin manufacturer has a
minimum of 3 years' experience providing resin materials similar to those specified.

1.4 Material Approvals

1. In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall submit information
for all products and materials used in the Works to the Client's Representative / Client's
Works Supervisor's approval at least 3 weeks in advance of their mock-up trials /use. Track
records of successful application use in this region and availability of materials as per
proposed schedules must be checked before proposing the materials. For each proposed
product / material the following should be submitted.
I. Manufacturer’s name.
II. Product data sheets showing compliance with specification requirements.
III. Manufacturer’s technical data.
IV. Test results or certificates.
V. Storage instructions.
VI. Application instructions.
VII. List of projects with similar application in this region
VIII. Any other information/critical details as required.
2. The Contractor shall supply test results to the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works
Supervisor for materials to be used to demonstrate compliance with the specifications and
international standards including BS EN 1504 for specification works.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 61 of 66

1.5 Method Statements

1. The Contractor shall submit detailed method statements for the protective coating works.
The submittal shall include technical data sheets, evidence of quality assurance system
compliance and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for all products proposed to be used for
the works.
2. Method statements shall also include applicable health, safety and environmental
procedures. Special considerations for work under confined spaces shall be given.

1.6 Inspection and Test Plan

1. The Contractor shall submit an Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) that details quality controls
and inspections for all stages of the works including surface preparation, materials
preparation and application as detailed in the method statements Hold points /witness
points for all the stages of work, Acceptance/Rejection criteria and proposed testing with
frequency of tests etc. shall be identified.
2. The Contractor shall allow the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor a
minimum period of 3 hours of unhindered access to each area before work commences to
allow time to inspect and test the concrete, identify the crack injection areas and inspect the
quality and integrity of injection. The Contractor shall give at least 24 hours’ notice before
inspection is required.

1.7 Warranties

1. The Contractor shall supply a warranty for the materials and workmanship of not less than 5
years on the works undertaken.
1.8 Standard of Work

1. The personnel assigned to undertake the work shall be approved by the Client’s
Representative / Client’s Works Supervisor and hold relevant certificates of competence
issued by the Contractor and evidence of previous experience and satisfactory work
indicating compliance with national standards to the approval of the Client’s Representative
/ Client’s Works Supervisor
2. All the works shall be carried out in accordance with international standards including but
not limited to BS EN 1504 relevant part and best industry practice.

1.9 Quality Assurance and Control

1. A sample panel must be prepared for guidance and as reference panel for the project. The
sample panel must be step down to show each coat /procedure. All work standards will be

System Design & Installation Specification Page 62 of 66

 measured against this approved sample. Product batch numbers must be recorded on
delivery along with the compilation of certificates of conformity.

2. A Daily Project Log must be maintained throughout the course of the project. See Sections
B2 to B5 below for Project Log requirements and see the end of the document – Daily
Project Log Template which should be used.

1.10 Health and Safety Requirement

1. Observe the site owner’s Health, Safety and Environment policy at all times and obey all
written and verbal instructions from site managers and representatives.

2. 1Wear Personal Protective Equipment at all times including hard hat, safety glasses, boots,
gloves, air hood and masks as required.

3. When using high-pressure plural component spray equipment, all personnel working in the
application area must wear double-filter breathers with Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) ratings.

1.11 Storage and handling

1. The Contractor shall supply samples and test results to the Client’s Representative / Client’s
Works Supervisor for materials to be used to demonstrate compliance with the international
standards including BS EN 1504 relevant part.
2. Deliver materials in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperature
and construction operations. Remove and dispose of damaged material in accordance with
applicable regulations. All materials delivered to site shall be recorded, stored and handled
in accordance with this specification.
3. Records shall be kept of each batch of material delivered to Site and shall include:
I. Formulator’s name and address;
II. Formulator’s agent's name and address where applicable;
III. Material identification;
IV. Batch reference number, size of batch and number of containers in the delivery;
V. Date of manufacture and shelf life at the prevailing storage conditions;
4. Materials shall be stored in accordance with this Specification and Material Manufactures
recommendations. All proprietary materials shall be stored in a dry, weatherproof lock-up
store in a sheltered location that is free from extremes of cold or heat, in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.

System Design & Installation Specification Page 63 of 66

 5. A temperature and humidity monitoring station shall be provided in the lock-up and records
kept confirming compliance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
6. The materials shall not be removed from the store for use until immediately before mixing.

1.12 Workmanship

1. Phasing of the work

I. All coating works need to be carried out considering the usage of the tank. The Contractor
shall liaise with the client to confirm the proposed utilization of structure prior to
providing a detailed programme for the works.
2. Health & Safety
I. Considering the work site to be a tank/confined space, contractor should carry out risk
assessment of the activities involved under present scope of work.

3. Access Provision
I. Scaffolds and working platforms shall be designed, erected, operated, maintained and
dismantled so as to ensure that safe working conditions are provided for all site personnel.
In addition, complete protection shall be provided to the structure, its occupants and the
general public.
II. Scaffolds and working platforms (the “access provision”) shall be erected, altered and
dismantled by experienced operatives who shall be under competent supervision.
III. Scaffold shall be boarded out to the face of the structure in working areas to prevent
material or equipment falling to lower levels or the ground. Kick-boards shall be provided on
the outside edges of the scaffold to prevent material or equipment falling to lower levels or
the ground.
IV. Proper entry, exit and ventilation etc. shall be checked, managed and adjusted to suit the
required working environment at all the time during the progress of works.
4. Concrete Surface Preparation

All surfaces must be clean and free from debris, loose or flaking material, standing water, oil,
grease
and organic and or marine growth.

1. Concrete surfaces must be free from laitance and any traces of shuttering, release oils and
curing compounds.
2. Marine surfaces must be checked for soluble salts; Test with Chlor*Test. If the level of
soluble salts exceeds recommended limits, jetwash the surface and then retest. If the level
of soluble salts still exceeds recommended limits, treat with Chlor*Rid as a 0.1% solution in
warm water.
I. Repeat the process until acceptable limits are reached.
II. Maximum amounts of soluble salts (micrograms per cm2 ):

System Design & Installation Specification Page 64 of 66

 III. Chlorides 3 immersion, 7 non-immersion
IV. Nitrates 5 immersion, 10 non-immersion
V. Sulfates 10 immersion, 20 non-immersion 2.4

3. Blasting is highly recommended as an effective method of surface preparation and to

provide a suitable key for Polyurea coating. Abrasive blast per ICRI Technical Guideline No.
03732 or SSPC SP13. Achieve a concrete surface profile of ICRI CSP-3 to CSP-5. The minimum
blast profile must be 75 - 100 microns.
4. Following the above preparation, care must be taken to ensure that any surface
irregularities are filled with appropriate mortar.
5.
6. The Contractor shall ensure that works preparation is restricted to the concrete areas as
detailed on the contract only. All other areas, such as steelwork, are to be protected against
contact by water or moisture during the execution of work. The surface shall be protected
against grit blasting also.
7. Coating application shall be performed by competent and experienced personnel under
close supervision to ensure that coatings are not applied until the specified standard of
surface preparation has been achieved, weather conditions are suitable for coating
application and curing, and the coating application and film thickness requirements are
strictly followed.
8. The applied coating shall be uniform in thickness and appearance and shall be free of defects
such as runs, blisters, pinholes, holidays, overspray, inclusions, etc.; using application
equipment (or a combination of equipment), a sequence of coating various surfaces and
techniques that produce the required coverage, DFT, standard of finish and film integrity
implied by this Specification and the product data sheets for the coating products employed.
All overspray shall be removed by sanding from the surface of primer or intermediate coats
before overcoating commences.
9. Coating application should only be carried out when good atmospheric conditions and
clement weather prevail. Painting should not be undertaken;
o When the air temperature falls below the lower drying or curing limit of the coating,
o The relative humidity is above 85 percent,
o When the surface to be painted is wet with condensation or when condensation can
occur during the initial drying period of the paint.
10. The number of coat and coating thickness required is the same regardless of application
method.
11. Complete work shall match approved samples, for colour texture and coverage.
12. Work that does not comply with the specified requirements shall be removed, refinished or
recoated.
13. Testing for Dry Film Thickness (DFT) should be done according to BS EN ISO 2808.

1.13 Final Inspection & Acceptance of Work

System Design & Installation Specification Page 65 of 66

 1. When all the coating works has been completed, the Contractor shall arrange for final
inspection of works and shall obtain signature of the Client’s Representative / Client’s Works
Supervisor on

System Design & Installation Specification Page 66 of 66

 UNDERGROUND TSE TANK & PUMP STATION
CONDITION ASSESSMENT REPORT
Masdar City, Abu Dhabi

O/Ref: IN632293-00

Submitted:
Nov 7th, 2022
 O/Ref: 632293_00

PREPARED BY
VERSION AUTHOR REVIEWED BY APPROVED BY

DRAFT Mohamed Shafi Patrich Zapanta Dr. Mohsen Mazraeh

VERSION CONTROL
REASON FOR ISSUE, SUMMARY OF REVISIONS BETWEEN THIS
VERSION DATE OF ISSUE
VERSION AND THE PREVIOUS VERSION
th
R-00 7 Nov 2022 Complete Draft report issued for Client’s review
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 2 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

LIMITED LIABILITY STATEMENT

THIS REPORT IS FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE OF SIMCO TECHNOLOGIES INC. (“SIMCO”)’S CLIENT AND IS
PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” BASIS WITH NO WARRANTIES, IMPLIED OR EXPRESSED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
WITH RESPECT TO THE SERVICES PROVIDED. SIMCO ASSUMES NO LIABILITY TO ANY PARTY FOR ANY
LOSS, EXPENSE OR DAMAGE OCCASIONED BY THE USE OF THIS REPORT. ONLY THE CLIENT IS
AUTHORIZED TO COPY OR DISTRIBUTE THIS REPORT AND THEN ONLY IN ITS ENTIRETY. THE REPORT’S
OBSERVATIONS AND TEST RESULTS ARE RELEVANT ONLY TO THE SAMPLES TESTED AND ARE BASED
ON IDENTICAL TESTING CONDITIONS. FURTHERMORE, THIS REPORT IS INTENDED FOR THE USE OF
INDIVIDUALS WHO ARE COMPETENT TO EVALUATE THE SIGNIFICANCE AND LIMITATIONS OF ITS
CONTENT AND RECOMMENDATIONS AND WHO ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE APPLICATION OF
THE MATERIAL IT CONTAINS.

ALL ANALYSES IN THIS REPORT ARE BASED STRICTLY ON THE CORROSION PROTECTION AND
CONDITION OF THE REINFORCED CONCRETE MATERIALS OF THE STRUCTURE UNDER REVIEW. THE
CONCRETE CONDITION APPRAISAL AND ANALYSIS BY NO MEANS CONSTITUTES A STRUCTURAL
ENGINEERING CONDITION APPRAISAL OR ANALYSIS. ANY AND ALL OBSERVATIONS OR COMMENTS
PRESENTED IN THIS REPORT THAT MAY RELATE TO THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN OR ASSESSMENT
SHOULD BE VERIFIED AND VALIDATED BY A COMPETENT STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 3 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 6

2 DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 DOCUMENTS OBTAINED FROM THE CLIENT ...................................................................................................... 6
2.2 CODES, STANDARDS AND GUIDES ................................................................................................................... 6

3 BACKGROUND/CONTEXT......................................................................................................................... 6

4 OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................................... 8

4.1 SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES ................................................................................................................................... 8

4.2 SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................................................ 8
4.2.1 Field investigation ............................................................................................................................. 9
4.2.2 Laboratory testing ............................................................................................................................ 9

5 FIELD INVESTIGATION ............................................................................................................................ 10

5.1 VISUAL INSPECTION .................................................................................................................................. 10

Pump Station................................................................................................................................................ 11
Underground TSE Tank (Internal)................................................................................................................. 14
Underground TSE Tank (External) ................................................................................................................ 17
5.2 SAMPLING AND TEST LOCATIONS................................................................................................................. 19
5.3 CONCRETE COVER AND REINFORCEMENT LAYOUT (USING GPR) ......................................................................... 22
5.4 HALF – CELL POTENTIAL ............................................................................................................................ 24
5.5 LINEAR POLARIZATION RESISTANCE .............................................................................................................. 29
5.6 BREAK-OUT WINDOWS .............................................................................................................................. 31
5.7 DEPTH OF CARBONATION .......................................................................................................................... 32
5.8 CONCRETE CORE SAMPLING ....................................................................................................................... 34

6 LABORATORY TESTING ON CONCRETE SAMPLES ................................................................................... 35

6.1 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ........................................................................................................................... 35

6.2 CHLORIDE ION CONTAMINATION PROFILES ..................................................................................................... 36
6.3 SULPHATE CONTENT ANALYSIS.................................................................................................................... 38
6.4 TENSILE PROPERTIES OF REINFORCEMENT ..................................................................................................... 40

7 FINDINGS............................................................................................................................................... 41

7.1 VISUAL INSPECTION .................................................................................................................................. 41

Pump Station................................................................................................................................................ 41
Underground TSE tank (Internal) ................................................................................................................. 41
TSE Tank (External) ...................................................................................................................................... 41
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

7.2 FIELD TESTING & LABORATORY RESULT ........................................................................................................ 41

8 DISCUSSIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 42

8.1 LEAKAGES IN FLOOR JOINTS ........................................................................................................................ 42

8.2 CHLORIDE INDUCED CORROSION .................................................................................................................. 42
8.3 CARBONATION INDUCED REINFORCEMENT CORROSION .................................................................................... 43

9 CONCLUSIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 44

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 4 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

9.1 CONCLUSIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 44

9.2 ROOT CAUSE OF OBSERVED DETERIORATION ................................................................................................. 44

10 REPAIR STRATEGY ................................................................................................................................. 45

10.1 CONCRETE REPAIR .................................................................................................................................... 45

Patch repair.................................................................................................................................................. 45
Repair of Dry Cracks ..................................................................................................................................... 45
10.2 CORROSION CONTROL ............................................................................................................................... 46
Replacement of chloride contaminated concrete ........................................................................................ 46
Cathodic protection (cp)............................................................................................................................... 46
Migrating corrosion inhibitors ..................................................................................................................... 47
Application of protective coating ................................................................................................................. 47
11 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REHABILITATION ......................................................................................... 48

11.1 DURABILITY RELATED ISSUES: ...................................................................................................................... 48

11.2 GENERAL NOTES ...................................................................................................................................... 49

LIST OF APPENDICES:
APPENDIX A - DIMENSIONAL SURVEY DRAWINGS
APPENDIX B - DEFECT MAP & TEST LOCATIONS LAYOUT
APPENDIX C - GPR DATA
APPENDIX D - BREAK OUT WINDOWS
APPENDIX E - HCP & LPR
APPENDIX F - CONCRETE CORE LOG
APPENDIX G - LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 5 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

1 INTRODUCTION
SIMCO Technologies Inc. was engaged by Dar Al Handasah for the condition assessment of selected
reinforced concrete structural elements of the existing underground tank & pump station located at
Masdar City, Abu Dhabi.

The study focused on investigating the causes of the observed defects across the structures. This
report presents the methodology used to perform the study, the complete findings of the field work
including sampling and testing performed at selected locations and recommendation for intervention
to repair all observed defects and to return full serviceability of the structure.

2 DOCUMENTATION
2.1 DOCUMENTS OBTAINED FROM THE CLIENT
There were no specific structural/architectural drawings received from the client pertaining to the
structure which is under investigation.

2.2 CODES, STANDARDS AND GUIDES

The inspection and testing on concrete were performed following guidelines of codes, standards and
guides presented below:

 ACI 201.1R-08 Guide for Conducting a Visual Inspection of Concrete in Service.

 ACI 228.2R-13 Report on Nondestructive Test Methods for Evaluation of Concrete in Structures.
 ACI 224.1R-07 Causes, Evaluation, and Repair of Cracks in Concrete Structures.
 ACI 231R-10 Report on Early-Age Cracking: Causes, Measurement, and Mitigation.
 ACI 311.4R-05 Guide for Concrete Inspection.
 ACI 364.1R-07 Guide for Evaluation of Concrete Structures before Rehabilitation.
 ACI 562-13 – Code Requirements for Evaluation, Repair, and Rehabilitation of Concrete Buildings.
 BS 8500-1 :2006, Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1.
 ISO 16311-2:2014: Maintenance and repair of concrete structures – Part 2: Assessment of existing
concrete structure.

3 BACKGROUND/CONTEXT
As per information provided to SIMCO, DAR Al Handasah has been commissioned by Masdar City to
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

undertake the design and consultancy services for upgrading the existing irrigation system and
rehabilitation of existing Treated Sewage Effluent (TSE) water tank located at Masdar City Abu Dhabi.
DAR Al Handash appointed SIMCO for carrying out condition assessment for the TSE tank and its
associated pump station. The study focused on investigating the causes of any observed defects on
the TSE tank. Also, to provide complete findings of the field work including sampling and testing that

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 6 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

will be performed at agreed locations of tank walls and top/bottom slab and provide recommendation
for rehabilitation of the structures. Figure 1 shows the location of the TSE Tank at Masdar City.

Figure 1 - Site location map

The following information was provided to SIMCO by the client.

 Underground tank: one compartment 40m x 40m and depth of 4m (storage capacity is
4500m3)
 The tank is not use for about 10 years and there was about 30 cm of water in the tank
 Existing Pump station has footprint of 16m x 14m
 The visual inspection indicated that both tanks and PS are in good condition
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 2 – photo showing view of Pump station & underground TSE Tank

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 7 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 3 – General view of underground TSE Tank

4 OBJECTIVES AND SCOPE OF WORK

4.1 SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES
The specific objectives of the investigation were to:

 Determine the nature and extent of any deterioration (cracking, delamination, concrete spalling,
corrosion, etc.) of the structure.
 Determine probable root cause(s) of observed deterioration.
 Determine the likelihood and risk of future deterioration of the structure.
 Develop options for repair and preventive maintenance.
This report summarizes the findings of the visual inspection, the laboratory test results obtained from
the concrete testing program, discussion and conclusions on root cause and deterioration mechanisms
along with the recommendations for repair of the subject areas.

4.2 SCOPE OF WORK

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

The investigation for condition assessment was mainly non-destructive and relatively unobtrusive. The
focus of this assessment was on the reinforced concrete element of the structures which included the
following tasks:

 Review of existing documentation.

 Non-intrusive visual inspection and hammer sounding.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 8 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

 Material sampling and testing to confirm extent of deterioration (on selected locations).
 Assessment of probable failure scenarios (root cause analysis).
 Production of a condition assessment and repair recommendations report.
It should be noted that the scope of this work was based on the condition / quality of reinforced
concrete and did not constitute in any way a structural analysis of the structure.

4.2.1 FIELD INVESTIGATION

A testing program was established, and condition assessment activities were planned. Non-
destructive testing and semi-destructive testing including concrete sampling was carried out on
structural elements supplemented by laboratory testing. The following field tasks were performed
during the field work:

 Visual Survey including determination of incidence of cracks, delamination, spalls, rust stains.
 Acoustic Sounding in accordance with ASTM D4580 - Standard Practice for Measuring
Delamination in Concrete Bridge Decks by Sounding.
 Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) in accordance with ASTM D6432 – Standard Guide for Using the
Surface Ground Penetrating Radar Method for Subsurface Investigation.
 Window Break-Out (BW) for determining reinforcement bar size, concrete cover and to check
condition of rebar along with depth of carbonation.
 Half-Cell Potential (HCP) in accordance with ASTM C876 – Standard test Method for Corrosion
Potentials of Uncoated Reinforcing Steel in Concrete.
 Linear Polarization Resistance (LPR) in accordance with ASTM G59 – Standard test Method for
LPR of Uncoated Reinforcing Steel in Concrete.
 Extraction of cores for determination of compressive strength and to determine extent of
contamination by chloride and sulphate ions.
 Extraction of samples for verifying reinforcement mechanical properties.

4.2.2 LABORATORY TESTING

Laboratory tests will be conducted on concrete cores extracted during the field operations. The
laboratory test results complement the field observations in terms of qualification and quantification
(properties and/or current contamination). The laboratory investigation includes the following tests:
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

 Determination of compressive strength by concrete core testing in accordance with BS EN 12504

- Testing concrete in structures. Cored specimens. Taking, examining, and testing in compression.
 Extent of contamination by chloride and sulphate ions in accordance with BS 1881 part 124 –
Testing Concrete, Methods for analysis of hardened concrete

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 9 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

 Determination of Tensile strength and elongation test of steel rebars in accordance with BS 4449:
1997- Steel for the reinforcement and prestressing of concrete. Test methods. Reinforcing bars, wire
rod and wire.

5 FIELD INVESTIGATION
Field investigative efforts were performed by SIMCO’s team of engineer and technicians, from Sep 5th
to Oct 20th, 2022. Field activities consisted of visual inspection with acoustic sounding, non-destructive
testing, and semi destructive testing on concrete.

5.1 VISUAL INSPECTION

The visual inspection as well as the acoustic sounding were performed on all accessible surfaces of the
basement wall & floor in order to evaluate the overall condition of the reinforced concrete elements.
The visual survey was carried out by close inspection of all accessible elements and recording all the
observed defects. For the underground TSE Tank internal walls, the hammer tapping was limited only
to the windows where the lining was removed.

The hammer sounding survey were carried out by gently tapping the concrete surfaces with a hammer
in order to detect any sign of hollow sounding surfaces which generally indicate presence of concrete
delamination. During this process, signs of deterioration and anomalies such as cracks, efflorescence,
delamination, spalls, rust stains, leakages, or other forms of distress were recorded. The condition of
the elements was marked on drawings as shown in figure 4. Full markup drawing is presented in
appendix B.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 4 – Defect Map for Pump Station floor Slab

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 10 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 5. Typical Defect Mapping of Floor Slab – TSE Tank

PUMP STATION
 Delaminated concrete and coating peel off observed on the floor slab at many locations.
 Dry cracks, peel off & efflorescence observed on the internal walls & soffit of pump station.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 6. Overall inside view of the Pump Station

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 11 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 7. Delaminated Surface on the floor slab

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 8. Delaminated surface along the cable trench near the wall

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 12 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 9. Typical Dry cracks on the pump station internal wall

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 10. Efflorescence and dampness on the pump station wall

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 13 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 11. Coating Peel off on the pump station floor slab

UNDERGROUND TSE TANK (INTERNAL)

 Minor delaminated surface on few columns near the beam level in compartment B.
 Damaged sealants on the Soffit, floor & wall expansion joints in both compartments.
 Signs of active leakage & dampness on the floor joints at few locations.
 Coating Peel off on the soffit hollow core precast slabs.
 Spalled concrete around the manholes on soffit.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 12. Delaminated concrete observed on Few Columns

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 14 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 13. Damaged Sealants on Soffit

Figure 14. Damaged joint Sealant system on the floor showing bubbles
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 15. Damaged sealant on floor-wall joint

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 15 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 16. Active leakage observed on floor joints

Figure 17. Coating peel off observed on soffit panels

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 18. Spalled concrete around the manholes on soffit

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 16 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

UNDERGROUND TSE TANK (EXTERNAL)

 Delaminated & spalled concrete on all the access manholes & openings from top of slab.
 Cracked & Spalled screed layer on top of slab.
 Presence of waterproofing membrane below the screed layer.

Figure 19. Spalled concrete with exposed reinforcements on Manhole structures

Figure 20. Cracks and delamination on Manhole structures

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 21. Delaminated & spalling of concrete on the internal face of manholes

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 17 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 22. Corroded rebars observed on the soffit joints at manholes

Figure 23. General view of Top of slab (TSE Tank)

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 24. Cracked & delaminated screed layer on top slab

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 18 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 25. Presence of waterproofing below the screed layer on top slab

5.2 SAMPLING AND TEST LOCATIONS

Sampling locations were identified by SIMCO’s Engineer to get the representative information from
the typical structural elements based on proximity to deteriorated areas and general orientation of
the structure and typical environmental exposure. Sampling and testing locations are provided in the
appendix B. Figures below shows the test locations layout for TSE Tank & Pump Station.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 26. Test Locations Layout for Pump Station

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 19 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 27. Test Locations Layout TSE Tank

Table 1: Summary of Testing Matrix

HCP/ LPR

Sulphate
Chloride

(Comp.)

TEST Tensile
Core
GPR
BW

Area description
LOCATION

Loc # 1 Pump Station-Wall 1 2 1 1 1 1 -

Loc # 2 Pump Station-Floor 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
Loc # 3 Pump Station-Wall 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
Loc # 4 Pump Station-Beam 1 2 1 1 1 1 -
Loc # 5 Pump Station-Column - 2 - - - 1 -
Loc # 6 Tank A - Wall 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
Loc # 7 Tank A - Beam 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Loc # 8 Tank A - Wall 1 3 1 1 1 1 1

Loc # 9 Tank A - Floor 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
Loc # 10 Tank A - Wall 1 2 1 1 - 1 -
Loc # 11 Tank A - Wall 1 1 1 1 - 1 -
Loc # 12 Tank A - Column 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
Loc # 13 Tank A - Floor 1 1 1 1 - 1 1

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 20 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

HCP/ LPR

Sulphate
Chloride

(Comp.)

Tensile
TEST

Core
GPR
BW
Area description
LOCATION

Loc # 14 Tank B - Wall 1 3 1 1 - 1 -

Loc # 15 Tank B - Beam 1 2 1 1 1 1 -
Loc # 16 Tank B - Wall - 1 - 1 1 1 -
Loc # 17 Tank B - Wall 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Loc # 18 Tank B - Floor 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
Loc # 19 Tank B - Column 2 1 1 1 - 1 -
Loc # 20 Tank B - Wall - 1 - 1 1 1 -
Loc # 21 Tank B - Soffit - - - 1 - - -
Loc # 22 Tank B – Top of slab - 1 - 1 1 - -
Loc # 23 Tank B - Floor - - - - 1 1 -
Total 18 30 17 21 6 21 4
BW- Breakout Window; GPR – Ground Penetrating Radar; HCP – Half-cell Potential; LPR- Linear Polarization Resistance

Typical photographs of the test locations are presented below:

Figure 28. Typical test location for Wall in Pump Station (Internal)
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 29. Typical test location for Wall & Floor Slab in underground TSE Tank

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 21 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 30. Typical test location for Column & Beam in Underground TSE Tank

5.3 CONCRETE COVER AND REINFORCEMENT LAYOUT (USING GPR)

Concrete cover and reinforcement layout values were measured onsite using Ground Penetrating
Radar (GPR) manufactured by GSSI. This data was analyzed through Radan7 software to interpret the
position of the steel reinforcement as well as the concrete cover over the reinforcement along the
path of the surveyed area.

A sample of visual representation of the data processed is shown in Figure 31. The white parabolas
indicate the location of the steel reinforcement. The position of the bars corresponds to the center of
the parabola, while the depth of the reinforcement bars corresponds to the peak of the parabolas
where the signal is the strongest (white).

Figure 31. Typical Radar Data from Cover Survey Showing the Steel Reinforcement
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Table 2 present the summary of recorded data. The details of the GPR scan with images are presented
in Appendix C.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 22 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Table 2: Concrete Cover Values from Radar Survey from Basement

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL CONCRETE
LOCATION / ELEMENT SPACING SPACING COVER
(MM) (MM) (MM)
LOC #1, WALL PUMP STATION 200 200 45
LOC #3, WALL PUMP STATION 200 200 35
LOC #1, FLOOR PUMP STATION 150 150 35
LOC #2, FLOOR PUMP STATION 150 150 30
LOC #5, FLOOR PUMP STATION 150 150 40
LOC #4, COLUMN PUMP STATION 150 200 30
LOC #5, COLUMN PUMP STATION 200 200 30
LOC #5, BEAM PUMP STATION 200 200 55
LOC #6, WALL A1_TSE TANK 200 200 42
LOC #8, WALL A2_TSE TANK 200 200 50
LOC #10, WALL A3_TSE TANK 200 200 60
LOC #11, WALL A4_TSE TANK 200 200 60
LOC #14, WALL B1_TSE TANK 200 200 50
LOC #17, WALL B4_TSE TANK 200 200 60
LOC #16, WALL B3_TSE TANK 200 200 70
LOC #20, WALL B2_TSE TANK 200 200 60
LOC #8, FLOOR SLAB_TSE TANK 150 150 35
LOC #9, FLOOR SLAB_TSE TANK 150 150 70
LOC #10, FLOOR SLAB_TSE TANK 150 150 60
LOC #13, FLOOR SLAB_TSE TANK 150 150 50
LOC #14, FLOOR SLAB_TSE TANK 150 150 50
LOC #18, FLOOR SLAB_TSE TANK 150 150 50
LOC #7, BEAM_TSE TANK 200 200 25
LOC #15, BEAM_TSE TANK 200 100 30
LOC #15, BEAM_TSE TANK 150 100 30
LOC #12, COLUMN_TSE TANK 150 200 30
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

LOC #19, COLUMN_TSE TANK 100 200 50

LOC #8, SOFFIT_TSE TANK 150 - 25
LOC #14, SOFFIT_TSE TANK 150 - 30
LOC #22, TOP OF SLAB_TSE TANK 150 150 25

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 23 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

For pump Station, the concrete cover ranges from 35-45 mm for wall and floor slab. For Column and
external beam, it is 30mm & 55 mm respectively.

In the underground TSE Tank, the concrete cover ranges from 42-70 mm on the wall, 35-70mm for
floor slab, 25-30mm for beam & 30-50 mm for the column. The soffit and the top of slab has a cover
in the range of 25-30mm. No data were provided at the time of study for the comparison of design
cover for the structural elements.

5.4 HALF – CELL POTENTIAL

Half-Cell Potential measurements were performed following the procedure outlined in ASTM C876.
This test allows to evaluate the potential difference between the embedded steel reinforcement and
a reference electrode. Since there is continuity in the reinforcement layout of a structure, the potential
can be measured from the porous concrete surface when a connection is made with the
reinforcement.

A connection with the reinforcement is created through an opening and the continuity of the
reinforcement system is verified by checking the connectivity between two distinct openings. The test
thus creates a connection between a reference electrode and the reinforcement. A multimeter is used
to measure the difference in potential between the electrode laid at the concrete surface and the
underlying reinforcement.

The measurements are recorded on grids to produce half-cell potential mappings. Figure 32 presents
the test principle behind ASTM C876.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 32 – Half-Cell Potential Principle (Image from ASTM C876)

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 24 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

A half-cell potential mapping was conducted with a maximum spacing of 0.5m x 0.5m using a
Silver/Silver-Chloride (Ag/AgCl) reference electrode. The ASTM C876 provides interpretative
guidelines for the evaluation of corrosion probability for reinforcing steel in concrete as a function of
the corrosion potential with reference to a Silver/Silver-Chloride half-cell (Ag/AgCl), as presented in
Table 3.

Table 3: Risk of Corrosion Damage as a Function of the Corrosion Potential (ASTM C876)

CORROSION PROBABILITY CORROSION POTENTIAL (E) WRT CORROSION POTENTIAL (E) WRT
(P) % CU/CUSO4 REFERENCE ELECTRODE AG/AGCL REFERENCE ELECTRODE
P < 10% E >-200 E > -100
10 > P < 90 -350 < E < -200 -250 < E < -100
P > 90% E < -350 E < -250

Whilst absolute potentials are useful and provide an indication of the probability of corrosion, ASTM
C876 also requires that color contour maps are produced to enable assessment of potential
differences across a testing area as presented in Figure 33- 40. Potential Difference Technique can
provide a sense of the magnitude of the corrosion problem and the presence of localized corrosion,
which may not be identifiable by traditional techniques like sounding. Localized corrosion typically
manifests considerable change in potential over relatively short distances (hundreds of millivolts over
a few hundred millimeters).

Table 4 presents the summary of the measured potentials and the corrosion risk for tested areas. All
the data tables and contour maps are provided in Appendix E.

Table 4: HCP Data Summary

RISK OF RISK OF
CORROSION POTENTIAL
CORROSION CORROSION CORROSION
MV AG/AGCL
LOCATION/ELEMENT PROBABILITY BASED ON BASED ON
MAX. STEEL MIN. STEEL (P) % ABSOLUTE POTENTIAL
POTENTIAL POTENTIAL POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE

HCP 1 @WALL_PUMP STATION -309 35 P > 90% High High

HCP 2 @FLOOR_PUMP STATION -474 -268 P > 90% High High

HCP 3 @WALL_PUMP STATION -335 -1 P > 90% High High

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

HCP 4 @BEAM_PUMP STATION -121 39 10 > P < 90 Moderate Moderate

HCP 5 @WALL_TANK A -378 -204 P > 90% High High

HCP 6 @WALL_TANK A -175 -128 10 > P < 90 Moderate Moderate

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 25 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

RISK OF RISK OF
CORROSION POTENTIAL
CORROSION CORROSION CORROSION
MV AG/AGCL
LOCATION/ELEMENT PROBABILITY BASED ON BASED ON
MAX. STEEL MIN. STEEL (P) % ABSOLUTE POTENTIAL
POTENTIAL POTENTIAL POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE

HCP 7 @WALL_TANK A -436 -132 P > 90% High High

HCP 8 @FLOOR_TANK A -292 -195 P > 90% High High

HCP 9 @WALL_TANK A -405 -246 P > 90% High High

HCP 10 @WALL_TANK A -390 -221 P > 90% High High

HCP 11 @COLUMN_TANK A -193 -22 10 > P < 90 Moderate Moderate

HCP 12 @WALL_TANK B -351 -318 P > 90% High High

HCP 13 @WALL_TANK B -487 -256 P > 90% High High

HCP 14 @BEAM_TANK B -190 -135 10 > P < 90 Moderate Moderate

HCP 15 @COLUMN_TANK B -325 -224 P > 90% High High

HCP 16 @WALL_TANK B -464 -345 P > 90% High High

HCP 17 @FLOOR_TANK B -436 -390 P > 90% High High

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 33. Half-cell potential contour map at Loc 1 & Loc 3 (Pump Station Wall)

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 26 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 34. Half-cell potential contour map for Floor at Loc 2 & External Beam at Loc 4 in Pump station

Figure 35. Half-cell potential contour map for Wall at loc 6 & Loc 10 in Tank A
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 36. Half-cell potential contour map for wall in Loc 11 (Tank A) & Loc 17 (Tank B)

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 27 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 37. Half-cell potential contour map for Soffit-Wall-Floor in Loc 8 & Loc 14

Figure 38. Half-cell potential contour map for Floor in Loc 13 (Tank A) & Loc 18 (Tank B)
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 39. Half-cell potential contour map for columns in Loc 12 (Tank A) & Loc 19 (Tank B)

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 28 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 40. Half-cell potential contour map for beam in Loc 6 (Tank A) & Loc 15 (Tank B)

The above images show high risk of corrosion potential on all the tested areas mostly due to saturation
of concrete. But the breakout windows indicated that there are no corrosion signs on the Tank
reinforcements. This may be due to the waterproof lining above the concrete thus removing the
supply of oxygen. Hence, the risk due to corrosion potential is generally very low or negligible in this
case until an effective waterproofing layer is in place.

5.5 LINEAR POLARIZATION RESISTANCE

After measuring half-cell potentials, the most anodic points of each grid were used to determine the
corrosion rates. Corrosion rates are evaluated using linear polarization resistance (LPR), which is a
non-destructive testing (NDT) technique that enables the actual corrosion rate of the reinforcing steel
to be measured. This method accurately determines the corrosion related deterioration process
occurring inside the concrete by polarizing the steel with a DC current and evaluating the relationship
between the amount of current and the level of polarization of the anodes and cathodes within the
steel.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 41. Linear Polarization Resistance (LPR) survey on floor

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 29 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

LPR involves the monitoring of the existing relationship between the current from charged electrons
and the electrochemical potential, allowing the calculation of linear polarization resistance and the
corrosion rates. The steel area underneath the concrete surface, determined using break-out windows
and GPR scan, was used to evaluate the corrosion rate in μm/yr. Corrosion rate expressed in mm/year
is obtained from the corrosion current, in μA/cm2 through Faraday’s law and the density of the metal.

Table 5 presents a qualitative interpretation of LPR readings based on RILEM TC154-EMC and Figure
41 shows how data is collected. The corrosion rates obtained at each location are presented in Table
6.

Table 5: Interpretation of Corrosion Rates as per RILEM TC-EMC

CORROSION RATE (µM/YR) RISK OF CORROSION

<1 Negligible
BETWEEN 1 & 5 Low
BETWEEN 5 & 10 Moderate
>10 High

Table 6: Summary of Corrosion Rates Measured

MIN CORROSION MAX CORROSION

TEST LOCATION RISK OF CORROSION
RATE (µM/YR) RATE (µM/YR)
HCP 1 @WALL_PUMP STATION 1.49 1.58 Low
HCP 2 @FLOOR_PUMP STATION 2.98 4.58 Low
HCP 3 @WALL_PUMP STATION 5.17 7.06 moderate
HCP 4 @BEAM_PUMP STATION 0.26 1.09 Negligible to Low
HCP 5 @WALL_TANK A 1.79 2.98 Low
HCP 6 @WALL_TANK A 2.86 3.82 Low
HCP 7 @WALL_TANK A 0.35 0.74 Negligible
HCP 8 @FLOOR_TANK A 0.54 0.68 Negligible
HCP 9 @WALL_TANK A 0.40 0.99 Negligible
HCP 10 @WALL_TANK A 0.42 1.07 Negligible to Low
HCP 11 @COLUMN_TANK A 0.18 1.11 Negligible to Low
HCP 12 @WALL_TANK B 0.15 0.18 Negligible
HCP 13 @WALL_TANK B 0.41 0.92 Negligible
HCP 14 @BEAM_TANK B 0.16 16.87 Negligible to High
HCP 15 @COLUMN_TANK B 0.44 1.07 Negligible to Low
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

HCP 16 @WALL_TANK B 0.86 1.39 Negligible to Low

HCP 17 @FLOOR_TANK B 0.67 0.85 Negligible

Corrosion rates obtained from LPR readings taken on HCP test points with more negative potentials
shows mostly negligible to low corrosion probability on most of the tested points of TSE tank. This was
evident through the breakout windows. On the Pump Station, low to moderate corrosion probability
is observed.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 30 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

5.6 BREAK-OUT WINDOWS

The breakout windows are openings made within the structure to validate the reinforcement diameter
and condition. The window locations were selected to enable both vertical and horizontal steel to be
exposed. The reinforcement bars were located using GPR and openings for visual inspection were
performed by chipping of the concrete cover. Figure 42 shows typical break out windows taken on
floor and wall of TSE tank. Table 7 summarizes findings from the breakout windows Detailed records
including photographs are presented in Appendix D.

Figure 42. Typical Breakout Window observations on retaining wall (right) and floor (left)

Table 7: Break-Out Windows Measurements and Observations in Test Locations

DEPTH OF MINIMUM
SAMPLE REBAR
BW LOCATION CARBONATION CONCRETE
ID. CONDITION
(MM) COVER (MM)

BW1 Loc #1, Wall_Pump station 0 Corroded 40

BW2 Loc #2, Floor_Pump station 0 Good 35
BW3 Loc #3, Wall_Pump station 0 Good 42
BW4 Loc #4, Column_Pump station 0 Good 46
BW5 Loc #6, Wall A1_Tank A 0 Good 35
BW7 Loc #8, Wall A2_Tank A 0 Good 40
BW9 Loc #10, Wall A3_Tank A 0 Good 50
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

BW10 Loc #11, Wall A4_Tank A 0 Good 60

BW13 Loc #14 Wall B1_Tank B 0 Good 45
BW16 Loc #17 Wall B3_Tank B 0 Good 48
BW8 Loc #9, Floor_Tank A 0 Good 65
BW12 Loc #13, Floor_Tank A 0 Good 50

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 31 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

DEPTH OF MINIMUM
SAMPLE REBAR
BW LOCATION CARBONATION CONCRETE
ID. CONDITION
(MM) COVER (MM)

BW17 Loc #18, Floor_Tank B 0 Good 49

BW6 Loc #7, Beam_Tank A 0 Good 27
BW14 Loc #15, Beam_Tank B 0 Good 28
BW11 Loc #12, Column_Tank A 0 Good 48
BW15 Loc #19, Column_Tank B 0 Good 55
BW18A Loc #19, Column_Tank B 0 Corroded 12

The breakout window in TSE tank indicates the cover varies in different elements. Generally, rebar
concrete cover was observed to be around 35-60 mm for wall, 50-65 mm for floor & 48-55 mm for
columns. For beam the cover was around 28 mm. For the pump station elements, it is in the range of
35-45mm average.

Observation records indicate, corrosion is initiated in only in 2 windows where there is delamination
(one in the pump room and other in the TSE Tank column). But in general, it could be observed that
all the reinforcements are in good condition without corrosion.

5.7 DEPTH OF CARBONATION

Concrete is a highly alkaline material. It is because of this high alkalinity that embedded steel in
concrete is naturally protected from corrosion. The high concentration of hydroxide ions in the cement
paste provides a natural protective passive oxide layer with high pH. If the pH decreases below a
certain value, the oxides layer composition is modified. The protective layer at the surface of the
reinforcement is dissolved, which leads to corrosion initiation. The normal pH of concrete is around
12 to 13 in normal conditions, but can decrease when exposed to carbon dioxide, water, or
contaminants. A pH reduction can be caused by anything that disturbs the chemical equilibrium in the
concrete pore solution. Carbonation is one of these mechanisms. It occurs when carbon dioxide (CO2)
contained in the atmosphere diffuses through the porous network and reacts with calcium hydroxide,
creating calcium carbonate (CaCO3). This reaction consumes hydroxide ions and decreases the pH.
Carbonation is however a slow process. Corrosion of rebars is expected when the carbonation depth
is equal or greater than rebar concrete cover.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

The carbonation depth was measured using a solution of phenolphthalein indicator that appears pink
in contact with alkaline concrete with pH values in excess of 9 and colorless at lower levels of pH. The
test was carried out by spraying the indicator on freshly exposed surfaces of concrete in according to
BS EN 14630 & RILEM CPC-18. Figure 43 presents selected photograph of breakout windows tested
for carbonation depth test. Table 8 presents the summary of carbonation depth testing.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 32 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 43. Typical carbonation depth photo from Loc #11

Table 8: Carbonation Depth Measurements and Observations in Test Locations

SAMPLE ID. BW LOCATION DEPTH OF CARBONATION (MM)

BW1 Loc #1, Wall_Pump station 0

BW2 Loc #2, Floor_Pump station 0
BW3 Loc #3, Wall_Pump station 0
BW4 Loc #4, Column_Pump station 0
BW5 Loc #6, Wall A1_Tank A 0
BW7 Loc #8, Wall A2_Tank A 0
BW9 Loc #10, Wall A3_Tank A 0
BW10 Loc #11, Wall A4_Tank A 0
BW13 Loc #14 Wall B1_Tank B 0
BW16 Loc #17 Wall B3_Tank B 0
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

BW8 Loc #9, Floor_Tank A 0

BW12 Loc #13, Floor_Tank A 0
BW17 Loc #18, Floor_Tank B 0
BW6 Loc #7, Beam_Tank A 0
BW14 Loc #15, Beam_Tank B 0
BW11 Loc #12, Column_Tank A 0

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 33 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

SAMPLE ID. BW LOCATION DEPTH OF CARBONATION (MM)

BW15 Loc #19, Column_Tank B 0

BW18A Loc #19, Column_Tank B 0

Measured depth of carbonation is observed to be negligible on Walls, Columns & floor of all the TSE
tank structures indicating no risk of carbonation-induced corrosion.

5.8 CONCRETE CORE SAMPLING

Coring operations were conducted on the different elements of the wall for collecting concrete
samples for compressive strength testing and chloride/sulphate content analysis. A total of 21 core
samples were extracted for compressive strength analysis and for chloride/sulphate testing. GPR scans
were performed to protect the reinforcements from being damaged and to obtain the longest samples
as possible. Figure 44 shows the core sample from wall in Loc #1 while Figure 45 presents typical coring
operation. Exact locations and sketches of each core are presented on drawings and the core details
are provided in Appendix F.

Figure 44. Typical extracted core (from wall in Loc #11)

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Figure 45. Typical coring operations (from wall of TSE tank)

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 34 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

6 LABORATORY TESTING ON CONCRETE SAMPLES

Following test were performed by a third-party laboratory (Arab Center for Engineering Studies (ACES)
on samples extracted from site.

6.1 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

Concrete cores were tested for compressive strength in accordance with BS EN 12504:1 2009 – Testing
concrete in structures. Cored specimens. Taking, examining, and testing in compression. The data
obtained is summarized in Table 9 and the third-party laboratory report is presented in Appendix G.

Table 9: Summary of Compressive Strength Testing

ESTIMATED
CORE CORE
MAX. IN SITU
CORE DIA./ DENSITY COMP.
CORE LOCATION LOAD CUBE.
ELEMENT ID LENGTH (KG/M3) STRENGTH
(KN) STRENGTH
(MM) (N/MM2)
(N/MM2)
Wall Loc 1_Pump St. CC1 74/76 2400 266 61.8 62.5
Wall Loc 3_Pump St. CC3 74/74 2340 158 36.7 36.7
Wall Loc 6_Tank A CC6 94/95 2400 458 66.0 66.3
Wall Loc 8_Tank A CC8 94/94 2390 489 70.5 70.5
Wall Loc 10_Tank A CC10 94/95 2400 445 64.1 64.4
Wall Loc 11_Tank A CC11 94/94 2410 540 77.8 77.8
Wall Loc 14_Tank B CC14 95/96 2400 503 70.9 71.2
Wall Loc 16_Tank B CC16 95/95 2390 527 74.4 74.4
Wall Loc 16_Tank B CC17 95/95 2380 434 61.2 61.2
Wall Loc 20_Tank B CC20 95/96 2370 493 69.5 69.8
Floor Loc 2_Pump St. CC2 74/76 2410 256 59.4 60.1
Floor Loc 9_Tank A CC9 94/94 2360 412 59.4 59.4
Floor Loc 13_Tank A CC13 94/94 2380 440 63.4 63.4
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Floor Loc 18_Tank B CC18 95/95 2410 438 61.9 61.9

Floor Loc 21_Tank B CC21 95/95 2350 337 47.6 47.6
Column Loc 5_Pump St. CC5 74/76 2330 158 36.8 37.2
Column Loc 12_Tank A CC12 94/96 2400 461 66.4 66.9

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 35 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

ESTIMATED
CORE CORE
MAX. IN SITU
CORE DIA./ DENSITY COMP.
CORE LOCATION LOAD CUBE.
ELEMENT ID LENGTH (KG/M3) STRENGTH
(KN) STRENGTH
(MM) (N/MM2)
(N/MM2)
Column Loc 19_Tank B CC19 95/95 2390 540 76.2 76.2
Beam Loc 4_Pump St. CC4 74/75 2370 150 35.0 35.2
Beam Loc 7_Tank A CC7 94/99 2530 429 61.8 63.0
Beam Loc 15_Tank B CC15 95/96 2450 558 78.8 79.1

The average compressive strength for samples taken from TSE Tank walls is 69.30 N/mm2, and for
floor slab is 58.34 N/mm2. For the beams the average compressive strength is 71.05 N/mm2 and 71.55
N/mm2 for the columns. Construction details were not available to compare in-situ core compressive
strength (equivalent cylinder strength) with the designed strength.

6.2 CHLORIDE ION CONTAMINATION PROFILES

The (acid-soluble) chloride content was determined in accordance with a procedure adapted from BS
1881 -124 – (Testing concrete. Methods for analysis of hardened concrete) from core samples.
The contamination was evaluated by measuring the total chloride content at various depth increments
as illustrated in Figure 46. The data obtained is summarized in Table 10 and the third-party laboratory
report is presented in Appendix G.

The generally accepted threshold is between 0.2% and 0.4% of chloride per weight of cement. A
threshold value of 0.3% of Chloride per weight of sample will be used for analysis for this report. This
can be calculated into a threshold per weight of sample, the calculation and assumptions are
presented below. A conservative approach has been adopted.

Assumed weight of cement (kg/m3) = 400

Avg. Unit Weight of Concrete (kg/m3) = 2395
Ratio - Cement: Concrete = 0.167
Threshold per Weight of Sample = Threshold per Weight of Cement x 0.167
Threshold per Weight of Sample = 0.30 x 0.167 = 0.05
Therefore, the threshold value of 0.05% is used for chloride contamination.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 36 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

0-25 25- 50-75 75-

mm 50 mm 100
mm mm

Figure 46. Typical Core sample showing test increments

Table 10: Chloride values on core & dust samples

SAMPLE FROM TOP FROM TOP FROM TOP

LOCATION ELEMENT/STRUCTURE
ID 0-25MM 25-50MM 50-75 MM
CH-1 Loc 1 Pump Station Wall 0.028 0.014 0.007
CH-3 Loc 3 Pump Station Wall 0.007 0.004 0.004
CH-5 Loc 6 Tank A Wall 0.007 0.007 0.004
CH-7 Loc 8 Tank A Wall 0.007 0.004 0.004
CH-9 Loc 10 Tank A Wall 0.014 0.007 0.007
CH-10 Loc 11 Tank A Wall 0.007 0.004 0.004
CH-13 Loc 14 Tank B Wall 0.004 0.004 0.004
CH-15 Loc 16 Tank B Wall 0.007 0.004 0.004
CH-16 Loc 17 Tank B Wall 0.007 0.004 0.004
CH-19 Loc 20 Tank B Wall 0.004 0.004 0.004
CH-2 Loc 2 Pump Station Floor 0.291 0.106 0.071
CH-8 Loc 9 Tank A Floor 0.007 0.004 0.004
CH-12 Loc 13 Tank A Floor 0.007 0.007 0.004
CH-17 Loc 18 Tank B Floor 0.014 0.007 0.007
CH-11 Loc 12 Tank A Column 0.007 0.007 0.004
CH-18 Loc 18 Tank B Column 0.011 0.007 0.004
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

CH-4 Loc 4 Pump Station Beam 0.035 0.004 0.004

CH-6 Loc 7 Tank A Beam 0.004 0.007 0.004
CH-14 Loc 15 Tank B Beam 0.007 0.004 0.004
CH-20 Loc 22 Tank B Soffit 0.004 0.004 0.004
CH-21 Loc 23 Tank B Top of Slab 0.028 0.014 0.004

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 37 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Figure 47. Chloride profile chart showing Pump station Floor vs other samples

The samples taken on the retaining walls, Soffit, Floor Slabs & columns of both TSE tank & pump
station shows that chloride levels are below the threshold limit except for 1 location on pump station
floor where penetration is up to a depth of 75 mm. Hence there is no risk of chloride induced corrosion
to the structures, except for pump station floor.

6.3 SULPHATE CONTENT ANALYSIS

The sulphate content was determined in accordance with a procedure adapted from BS 1881 -124
(Testing concrete. Methods for analysis of hardened concrete). The contamination was evaluated by
measuring the total sulphate content at different depths i.e., 0 to 25mm and 25 to 50mm. The data
obtained is summarized in Table 11 and the third-party laboratory report is presented in Appendix G.

Sulphate attack occurs mainly in soils or ground water where the sulphate ions react with two of the
components of cement, calcium hydroxide and calcium aluminate hydrates. The solid products have
larger volumes than the initial compounds, so disruption of the paste occurs. Generally, guides in the
Arabian Gulf region limit the maximum allowable total sulphate content of the design mix from all
ingredients including cement to 4% by weight of cement.

This can be calculated into a threshold per weight of sample, the calculation and assumptions are
presented below.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Assumed weight of cement (kg/m3) = 400

3
Unit Weight of Concrete (kg/m ) = 2,395
Ratio - Cement: Concrete = 0.167
Threshold per Weight of Sample = Threshold per Weight of Cement x 0.167

Threshold per Weight of Sample = 4.00 x 0.167 = 0.66

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 38 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Table 11: Sulphate contamination profile chart

SULPHATE CONTENT % WEIGHT

OF CONCRETE
SAMPLE ID. LOCATION ELEMENT
0 TO 25MM 25 TO 50MM

CH-1 Loc 1 Pump Station Wall 0.65 0.40

CH-2 Loc 2 Pump Station Floor 0.47 0.37
CH-3 Loc 3 Pump Station Wall 0.49 0.41
CH-4 Loc 4 Pump Station Beam 0.51 0.45
CH-5 Loc 6 Tank A Wall 0.42 0.37
CH-6 Loc 7 Tank A Beam 0.28 0.25
CH-7 Loc 8 Tank A Wall 0.30 0.27
CH-8 Loc 9 Tank A Floor 0.40 0.36
CH-11 Loc 12 Tank A Column 0.39 0.35
CH-14 Loc 15 Tank B Beam 0.26 0.24
CH-15 Loc 16 Tank B Wall 0.43 0.38
CH-16 Loc 17 Tank B Wall 0.42 0.36
CH-17 Loc 18 Tank B Floor 0.38 0.34
CH-18 Loc 18 Tank B Column 0.41 0.35

CH-19 Loc 20 Tank B Wall 0.30 0.27

CH-20 Loc 22 Tank B Soffit 0.36 0.27

CH-21 Loc 23 Tank B Top of Slab 0.33 0.27

Sulphate content observed are within generally specified limit for concrete, indicative of low risk of
sulphate attack.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 39 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

6.4 TENSILE PROPERTIES OF REINFORCEMENT

Rebar samples from TSE Tank Wall & floor were extracted and submitted to laboratory for the
determination of tensile strength, yield strength and elongation in accordance with BS 4449.The
summary of the results is provided in Table 12.

Table 12 – Summary of Steel reinforcement test results

TOTAL
NOMINAL YIELD TENSILE
SAMPLE ID. & STRESS ELONGATION @
DIAMETER STRENGTH STRENGTH
TEST LOCATION RATIO MAX. FORCE (AGT
(MM) (MPA) (MPA)
%) (%)
ST_01 (LOC 13, FLOOR, TANK A) 16 523 646 1.24 9.9
ST_02 (LOC 8, WALL, TANK A) 16 566 683 1.21 9.3
ST_03 (LOC 17, WALL, TANK B) 16 520 641 1.23 8.7
ST_04 (LOC 18, FLOOR, TANK B) 16 548 659 1.20 9.0

Rebar was found to be incompliance with grade BS4449-2005+A3:2016 Cl.7.2.3 & 7.3 when tensile
properties are compared.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 40 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

7 FINDINGS
The findings in terms of observed main defects from the field inspection and testing are summarized
below.

7.1 VISUAL INSPECTION

PUMP STATION
 Delaminated concrete and coating peel off observed on the floor slab at many locations.
 Dry cracks, peel off & efflorescence observed on the internal walls & soffit of pump station.

UNDERGROUND TSE TANK (INTERNAL)

 Minor delaminated surface on few columns near the beam level in compartment B.
 Damaged sealants on the Soffit, floor & wall expansion joints in both compartments.
 Signs of active leakage & dampness on the floor joints at few locations.
 Coating Peel off on the soffit hollow core precast slabs.
 Spalled concrete around the manholes on soffit.

TSE TANK (EXTERNAL)

 Delaminated & spalled concrete on all the access manholes & openings from top of slab.
 Cracked & Spalled screed layer on top of slab.
 Presence of waterproofing membrane below the screed layer.

7.2 FIELD TESTING & LABORATORY RESULT

 For pump Station, the concrete cover ranges from 35-45 mm for retaining and floor slab. For
Column and external beam, it is 30mm & 55 mm respectively. In the underground TSE Tank, the
concrete cover ranges from 42-70 mm on the wall, 35-70mm for floor slab, 25-30mm for beam &
30-50 mm for the column. The soffit and the top of slab had a cover in the range of 25-30mm. No
data were provided at the time of study for the comparison of design cover for the structural
elements.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

 The breakout window in TSE tank indicates the cover varies in different elements. Generally, rebar
concrete cover was observed to be around 35-60 mm for wall, 50-65 mm for floor & 48-55 mm
for columns. For beam the cover was around 28 mm. For the pump station elements, it is in the
range of 35-45mm average.
 Breakout windows indicate, corrosion is initiated only in 2 windows where there is delamination
(one in the pump room and other in the column). But in general, it could be observed that all the
reinforcements are in good condition without corrosion.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 41 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

 Measured depth of carbonation is observed to be negligible on Walls, Columns & floor of all the
TSE tank structures indicating no risk of carbonation-induced corrosion.
 HCP test on various elements indicates high risk of corrosion potential on all the tested areas
mostly due to saturation of concrete. But the breakout windows indicated that there are no
corrosion signs on the Tank reinforcements. This may be due to the waterproof lining above the
concrete thus removing the supply of oxygen. The risk of corrosion potential is generally very low
or negligible.
 Corrosion rates obtained from LPR readings taken on HCP test points with more negative
potentials shows mostly negligible to low corrosion probability on most of the tested points of TSE
tank. This was evident through the breakout windows. On the Pump Station, low to moderate
corrosion probability is observed.
 The average compressive strength for samples taken from TSE Tank walls is 69.30 N/mm2, and for
floor slab is 58.34 N/mm2. For the beams the average compressive strength is 71.05 N/mm2 and
71.55 N/mm2 for the columns. Construction details were not available to compare in-situ core
compressive strength (equivalent cylinder strength) with the designed strength.
 The chloride samples taken on the retaining walls, Soffit, Floor Slabs & columns of both TSE tank
& pump station shows that chloride levels are below the threshold limit except for 1 location on
pump station floor where penetration is up to a depth of 75 mm. Hence there is no risk of chloride
induced corrosion to the structures.
 Sulphate content observed are within generally specified limit for concrete, indicative of low risk
of sulphate attack.
 Rebar was found to be incompliance with grade BS4449-2005+A3:2016 Cl.7.2.3 & 7.3 when tensile
properties are compared.

8 DISCUSSIONS
8.1 LEAKAGES IN FLOOR JOINTS
The visual inspection highlighted the observation of water leakage and dampness on the floor joints
in tank B. Evidence of water ingress through construction joints were observed. However, the TSE tank
in general was observed to be having no leakage of ground water from the concrete structure directly.

8.2 CHLORIDE INDUCED CORROSION

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Corrosion of reinforcing steel in concrete often occurs in the concrete as a result of chloride ions from
ground water. The chloride ions penetrate through the concrete cover and cause breakdown of the
otherwise protective passive layer on the steel surface.

Chlorides can be highly detrimental to reinforced concrete structures. Continuous exposure of

reinforced concrete in chloride contaminated groundwater, and other sources of chloride with an
abundant supply of oxygen, greatly increases the risk of localized corrosion of the embedded steel

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 42 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

resulting in cracking and spalling of concrete and section loss of the steel. The mechanism by which
chloride ions disrupt the passive layer is unclear but empirical testing has allowed a threshold
contamination level to be defined with a high degree of confidence. It may be represented
approximately as 0.3% of total (acid soluble) chlorides by weight of cement in a standard concrete
sample. Once the passive layer on the steel has been disrupted, an electrochemical cell can be formed
in the presence of oxygen and moisture. The concrete provides the electrolyte in the cell, with the
steel rebar completing the circuit and transmitting electrons from anode to cathode.

The moisture content of the concrete has a significant impact on the efficiency of the cell since it
affects both the electrical resistance to the circuit and the chemical reactions.

Figure 48. Schematic of corrosion induced spalling in concrete

8.3 CARBONATION INDUCED REINFORCEMENT CORROSION

Carbonation is the result of the interaction of carbon dioxide gas from the atmosphere with calcium
hydroxide (a cement hydration product in the cement paste). The reaction produces calcium
carbonate (Ca(OH)2 + CO2 =CaCO3 + H2O). This reduces the alkalinity of the concrete to a level where
the cement paste no longer provides a passive environment for embedded steel, this is said to occur
when the pH of concrete falls to approximately 8.6. Steel reinforcement is then though to be
susceptible to corrosion. The reaction of carbon dioxide and calcium hydroxide only occurs in solution
and so in very dry concrete carbonation will be slow. In saturated concrete the moisture presents a
barrier to the penetration of carbon dioxide and again carbonation will be slow. The most favorable
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

condition for the carbonation reaction is when there is sufficient moisture for the reaction but not
enough to act as a barrier (Humidity level 60 to 75%).

Carbonation of the concrete does not in itself lead to a loss of structural adequacy, but when the zone
of carbonation extends to the steel the protective action of the concrete is largely lost, primarily
because the calcium carbonate has a reduced PH value. This then allows positive Fe+2 ions to form
which join with dissolved oxygen in water to produce Fe2O3 (iron oxide or rust) and the process of

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 43 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

corrosion of the reinforcing steel commences. The process of corrosion is greatly accelerated if
chloride ions (from salt) are present. The chloride is not used in the chemical reaction to form rust but
seems to assist in the formation of anodic and cathode regions in the metal.

Carbonation damage occurs most rapidly when there is little concrete cover of the reinforcing steel.
It can also occur when the cover is high, but the pore structure is open, pores are well connected
together and allow rapid CO2 ingress and when alkaline reserves in the pores are low. This occurs
when there is a low cement content, high water cement ratio and poor curing of the concrete.

9 CONCLUSIONS
9.1 CONCLUSIONS
Based on the visual survey findings and interpretation of field and laboratory test data below are the
conclusions related to overall condition of basement:

 Water ingress is taking place through joints mildly due to defective joint sealants. Water leakage
tends to track along the path of least resistance and hence may be evident in areas remote from
the point of ingress. Intervention and repair of the joints is required immediately to prevent
further water ingress, mitigate corrosion, and remove the risk of accelerated corrosion related
damage.
 Spalled concrete observed on the Manhole structures on top of slab.
 Coating peel off observed on the soffit of the TSE tank.
 For the pump station, delaminated concrete is observed at many locations on the floor with
coating peel off.
 The causes of corrosion should be treated rather than only treating the symptoms such as cracking
and delamination.
 In general, it could be observed that the TSE tank is not affected by corrosion yet due to effective
waterproofing membrane that was in place. It is recommended to reinstate or replace the existing
waterproofing inside the TSE tank.

9.2 ROOT CAUSE OF OBSERVED DETERIORATION

Based on the above discussion, overall, the main root causes of observed deterioration in the structure
are as follows:
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

1- Chloride laden ground water penetration into the structure through cracks and construction
joint causing reinforcement corrosion and risk of subsequent delamination.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 44 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

10 REPAIR STRATEGY
This section discusses repair solution that are considered for reinforced concrete elements in relation
to leakage issues and associated risk of reinforcement corrosion. To generalize, there are 2 main issues
to address:

 Concrete repairs
 Corrosion Control

10.1 CONCRETE REPAIR

PATCH REPAIR
Patch repair involves removal of loose, spalled, and delaminated concrete, cleaning of rebar, and filling
the area with a patch repairing material.

Figure 49- Typical Patch Repair

Concrete repairs are required in all areas of delaminated or spalled concrete. The repairs should follow
the procedures set in ACI RAP 5 and ACI RAP 6 for Form and Pour and Form and Pump repairs. As the
repairs result from corrosion, concrete should be removed to 20mm behind the steel reinforcement.
The referenced ACI manuals are attached to this report.

REPAIR OF DRY CRACKS

Dry Crack repair shall be done by pressurized epoxy resin injection. This type of repair is done to
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

restore the resistance to moisture penetration of the affected concrete element. The procedure
includes injection port installation; either surface mounted, or socket mounted through drilled holes
and injecting the resin injection system using injection pump machine.

Surface crack shall be repair by epoxy filler. The surface crack is prepared by V groove cutting and to
be filled with epoxy filler.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 45 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

10.2 CORROSION CONTROL

Extensive corrosion activity will increase exponentially with time and result in continuous and
extensive damage to the structure if it is not addressed. The following options are discussed for
corrosion control.

 Removal and replacement of contaminated concrete

 Cathodic protection
 Membranes and sealers

REPLACEMENT OF CHLORIDE CONTAMINATED CONCRETE

Concrete structures that generally have high levels of chloride contamination may be successfully
treated by removing all concrete contaminated with chloride above the threshold for corrosion
initiation. The removed contaminated concrete can be replaced with a repair concrete.

This option is most suitable in areas observed to have severe delamination in scattered patches and
by removing contaminated concrete around rebar for entire stretch of that section and casting back
with new concrete will not only restore alkalinity around rebar also ensure integrity of section.

If rehabilitation contractor selects this option of protection, feasibility of this option of corrosion
protection needs to be validated by demonstrating through modelling based on finite-element that
the corrosion and subsequent loss of rebar cross section will be within the limit during the intended
design life, and the structure shall meet code specified minimum levels of structural safety for strength
as well as serviceability.

As this methodology is invasive in nature and there is risk of introducing microfractures and cracks
into the concrete, this approach is rarely recommended but depending on the extent of the
delamination.

CATHODIC PROTECTION (CP)

Depending on the desired service life of the structure, durability enhancement measures could be
adopted in addition to the conventional patch repairs to extend the service life of the structure. The
methods and materials to achieve this could include cathodic protection.

To provide full corrosion protection of the reinforcing steel, cathodic protection is also an option.
Cathodic protection is the most effective method of preventing reinforcement corrosion and can
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

provide service life extension of up to 25 years (depending upon type of system used along with
monitoring).

The main advantage of cathodic protection is that chloride contaminated sound concrete does not
need to be broken out. Another advantage is that protection will still be maintained even where there
is additional subsequent chloride ingress. This type of system can easily be monitored to enable the
protection status to be assessed.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 46 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Cathodic Protection is an electrochemical method which can be used to mitigate corrosion of a metal
surrounded by an electrolyte. An electrical current is passed from an introduced anode (installed
within the concrete) to the target cathode (steel reinforcement). The new anode is positively charged,
and the steel reinforcement (cathode) is negatively charged. Current flows from the anode to the
cathode and this forms a reducing environment at the steel (cathode), and the reduction reaction
occurs. The production of OH- ions helps to re-alkalize the areas around the steel which will reinstate
the passive layer. In addition, since the OH- is negatively charged, it will repel the negatively charged
Cl- ions away from the steel surface.

There are several cathodic protection systems available including varieties of impressed current and
galvanic systems. The selection of which system to implement usually includes an assessment of the
risk of corrosion and corrosion environment, service life requirements of the structure, willingness of
the owner to perform maintenance and the available budget.

Impressed Current Cathodic Protection Systems

This method involves the application of a current to the steel from an outside power source. The
current renders the embedded steel cathodic with respect to an applied anode on the concrete
surface, thereby thermodynamically preventing corrosion. These systems typically use a Ti/mmo
anode, or a surface applied conductive paint.

Galvanic Cathodic Protection (Sacrificial)

This method involves the application of sacrificial anodes to chloride contaminated concrete. These
anodes prevent corrosion of the underlying reinforcement by sacrificially corroding with respect to
the steel over an extended period of time. These anodes are consumable. The quantity of anode
required is dependent on the area of steel protected and service life required. For concrete structures
the anode usually comprises of expanded zine mesh or thermal spray applied zinc.

MIGRATING CORROSION INHIBITORS

The application of migrating corrosion inhibitors (MCI) is one possible corrosion mitigation technique
for reinforced concrete structures. This technique reduces the corrosion rate by hindering the anodic
reaction, the cathodic reaction, or both. Migrating type corrosion inhibitor technology is relatively
new and does not have a long track record. Currently, inhibitors designed for application to the
external surface of existing structures are being evaluated for their use in revitalizing corroding
structures.
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATING

Another method of limiting corrosion is limiting oxygen level at rebar to significantly reduce steel
corrosion rates by application of coating. This method restricts oxygen penetration into concrete and
can increase saturation which can reduce corrosion rates and can reduce further ingress of chlorides
or carbonation fronts.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 47 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Protective coatings can be utilized, after conventional patch repairs have been carried out to protect
the steel reinforcement from corrosion or reduce the rate of corrosion. The main purpose of a coating
in such a scenario would be to (i) reduce the oxygen availability at the steel to reduce that rate of
reaction and (ii) prevent ingress of moisture and future chlorides.

A coating system may be a feasible option where the contamination levels are low, and corrosion has
not initiated. This option works by preventing additional contamination. It should, however, be noted
that coatings have a finite life and will require regular maintenance.

Over time this surface chloride would be expected to penetrate deeper into the structure and cause
an increase in levels of chloride contamination to the concrete surrounding the reinforcement. A well-
maintained coating system would prevent significant additional contamination but would not prevent
corrosion due to chloride that is already in the concrete.

11 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REHABILITATION

11.1 DURABILITY RELATED ISSUES:
In terms of the durability related issues of the Structures, we recommend the following:

 Concrete Repair works: Where the concrete delamination has occurred with separation of the
surface layer of concrete, the concrete shall be rectified to ensure adequate cover is continually
applied to all layers of reinforcement a specialist contractor is recommended to implement the
repair work with adequate quality control.
 Prevention of Water Ingress (Waterproofing repair): Repair of waterproofing to the entire TSE
tank along with construction joints, cracks, or other sources of water entry through suitable
methodology to be develop by the competent contractor to mitigate any effects of dampness and
efflorescence to eliminate requirement of regular maintenance.
It is recommended that all kicker joints and construction joints and cracks, whether showing signs
of leakage or not, shall be treated using suitable injection materials.
 Long term Corrosion Protection: Besides the works related to leakage prevention, future
corrosion protection of steel should also be considered to maintain the expected service life of
structure considering the present high chloride levels in the concrete cover.
Below options could be considered for long term corrosion protection.
 Cathodic Protection (CP)
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

 Application of Protective Coatings

The recommendations for rehabilitation provided in this report are aimed at restoring the durability
of the affected structural elements. It may be noted here that these recommendations address the
concrete deterioration issues and do not address shortcomings (if any) in the original design of the
structure which should be evaluated through structural analysis check.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 48 of 49
 O/Ref: 632293_00

Recommendations for rehabilitation are summarized below:

Table 13: Repair Recommendations summary

ELEMENT / LOCATION DETERIORATION REPAIR RECOMMENDATIONS

PUMP STATION FLOOR &

Delaminated /
TSE TANK COLUMNS/ Concrete Patch Repairs
deteriorated concrete
MANHOLES

Chloride contaminated Design & installation of CP system to have long term

PUMP STATION FLOOR
concrete corrosion protection

PUMP STATION WALLS Dry Cracks Inject all cracks using acrylic based injection system

PUMP STATION RETAINING Inject all kicker joints whether showing sign of
Waterproofing failure
WALL KICKER JOINT / water seepage or not, using acrylic based injection
Leakage
CONSTRUCTION JOINT system.

Application and maintenance of anti-carbonation

PUMP STATION FLOOR & Coating Peel off /
coating for walls, columns and soffit, and
WALLS efflorescence
epoxy/polyurethane protective coating for floor

TSE TANK CONSTRUCTION Removal & reinstatement of existing joint sealants

Damaged Sealants
JOINTS throughout the TSE tank

TSE TANK
Replacement of Application and maintenance of new waterproofing
WATERPROOFING
Existing waterproofing membrane on the internal faces of TSE tank
(INTERNAL)

Removal and reinstatement of screed layer on top

of slab. Waterproofing membrane to be checked
TOP OF SLAB (TSE TANK) Delaminated Screed
prior to reinstatement and shall be repaired if
found damaged.

11.2 GENERAL NOTES

Structural check shall be done for the stability of the structure prior to any chipping works. This is
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

to ensure that the removed structural element section has no effect on the structural stability of
the structure and to understand the phasing of works and requirement of propping. Propping and
phasing of works shall be provided prior to any repair works. Any temporary propping shall be
designed and installed by competent personnel and securely placed before any concrete is
removed and shall be remain in place until the member has fully repaired.

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 49 of 49
 O/Ref: IN632293_00

Appendix A – Dimensional Survey Drawings

 21600 24000 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
Wall A3 Wall B3 OTHERWISE NOTED

LEGENDS:-

5000

5000
MARK UP NAME

COLUMN

600

600
EXPANSION JOINT
300mm wall Thk.

4900

4900
Assumption

600

600
4900

4900
600

600
Wall A2

4900

4900

Wall B4
Joint
600 1800 600

600 1800 600

Joint
46600
46000

46000
950 850

950 850
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

Wall A4 (Partition Wall)

Wall B2 (Partition Wall)

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
4900

4900
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
600

600
00 FOR REVIEW 28-09-2022
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
4900

4900
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)
600

600
CLIENT
4900

4900
1000 DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
5100 400 5100 400 5100 400 5100 2000 5100 400 5100 400 5100 400 5100 CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
600

600
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :
5000

5000
2000
2000 Pit UNDERGROUND TSE TANK
DIMENSIONAL FLOOR PLAN
2000

1650

Wall A1 Wall B1
SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022
2300
DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

Tank A FLOOR PLAN Tank B DRAWING NUMBER:

REV. : 00
IN632293-DIM-1001 / 1-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS

740

740 750
OTHERWISE NOTED

1600
750

300

300
750 750
300 300 LEGENDS:-
600 1400
MARK UP NAME

SLAB OPENING

HOLLOW CORE
SLAB JOINT

EXPANSION JOINT

Screed
Waterproofing
X X
Concrete Slab

400
Hollow Core Slab
Y 400 Beam
Typical Section X-X

Screed

46000
Waterproofing
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
Concrete Slab SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
Beam (400x400mm)

Beam (400x400mm)

Beam (400x400mm)

Beam (400x400mm)

Beam (400x400mm)

Beam (400x400mm)

Beam (400x400mm)
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
1200

FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR

TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
Hollow Core Slab
Partition Wall

STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN

PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
Typical Section Y-Y

00 FOR REVIEW 28-09-2022

REV. DATE
Hollow Core Slab Hollow Core Slab
DESCRIPTION

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

CLIENT
1200

DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

1200 3700
300 300
800 800 UNDERGROUND TSE TANK
300

300

DIMENSIONAL SOFFIT PLAN

750 740
750

1600

1600
700

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

Tank A SOFFIT PLAN Tank B DRAWING NUMBER:

REV. : 00
IN632293-DIM-1002 / 2-9
 46500 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
2000 OTHERWISE NOTED

LEGENDS:-

MARK UP NAME

SLAB OPENING
46600

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

00 FOR REVIEW 28-09-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

CLIENT

DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

Wall Height 0.8 m height

Wall Height 0.8 m height
without slab Thickness
DRAWING TITLE :

without slab Thickness 5000

UNDERGROUND TSE TANK
DIMENSIONAL SLAB TOP PLAN

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

Tank A TANK SLAB TOP PLAN Tank B DRAWING NUMBER:

REV. : 00
IN632293-DIM-1003 / 3-9
 21600 G.Lvl + 0
Ø150
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE

450
3350 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS

Partition Wall
Ø
OTHERWISE NOTED

2900
30

2450
0
2400
LEGENDS:-

600
400 Lvl - 3.1m

Ø4
Wall A1 MARK UP NAME
1000 00 Pit
46000 STEEL PIPE

EXPANSION JOINT

2900
Wall A2 Ø
2800 25
0 725
300 250

Partition Wall
Ø3
0 0

2400

2375
Wall A3
46000

2900
Partition Wall A4

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

G.Lvl + 0 24000
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN

Partition Wall
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
2900

Ø3 TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS

00 300 STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
2000 2300

500
Lvl - 3.1m
400
Wall B1 Ø400

46000 00 FOR REVIEW 28-09-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)
Partition Wall B2
CLIENT
1325 2800
250 300
Ø250
Partition Wall

Ø
30

2900
0
2375

2375
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Wall B3 Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
46000 FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

UNDERGROUND TSE TANK

DIMENSIONAL WALL ELEVATIONS

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

Wall B4 DRAWN BY : KHA

DRAWING NUMBER:
CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

REV. : 00
IN632293-DIM-1004 / 4-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
15600 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

4000
600

13420
Motor Motor Motor Motor PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

5200
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
Ladder

Ladder

Ladder PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

DN DN DN
00 FOR REVIEW 28-10-2022

Platform UP
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS

DN
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
Ladder

600
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

2740 400 2840 400 2840 400 2840 400 2740 CLIENT

3020
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306

Cable Duct Cable Duct FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

PUMP STATION PLAN

BELOW GROUND LEVEL
DIMENSIONAL LAYOUT

Pump Station Plan Below Ground Level

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-DIM-1005 / 5-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
15600 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

Beam

Beam

Beam

Beam
13420

13420
Height 10.0 m Height 10.0 m Height 10.0 m Height 10.0 m Height 4.4 m PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
Soffit of Slab Soffit of Slab Soffit of Slab Soffit of Slab Soffit of Mezzanine SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
Platform SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

00 FOR REVIEW 28-10-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

CLIENT

Height 4.4 m
Soffit of Mezzanine
Platform DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

PUMP STATION
SOFFIT SLAB PLAN
DIMENSIONAL LAYOUT

Pump Station Soffit Slab Plan

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-DIM-1006 / 6-9
 Elevation D

250

250
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

600
250

3020
250

600
Lvl + 5.9m

5200
13420
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY

Elevation A
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
Elevation C

SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON

THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

600
00 FOR REVIEW 28-10-2022
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

Lvl + 4.5m CLIENT

250

4000
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306

15600 FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

400 2640 600 2640 600 2640 600 2640 600 2640 400
PUMP STATION PLAN
ABOVE GROUND LEVEL
600

600
DIMENSIONAL LAYOUT

Pump Station Plan Above Ground Level

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

Elevation B
DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-DIM-1007 / 7-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
Lvl + 5.9m IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
11000 OTHERWISE NOTED

Lvl + 4.5m 3620 600 5200 600 4000

5300
3900

Door

G.Lvl + 0 Plinth Beam

Elevation A

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS

Lvl + 4.5m 400 2640 600 2640 600 2640 600 2640 600 2640 400
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

00 FOR REVIEW 28-10-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
Ventilator Ventilator Ventilator UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)
3900

3300

CLIENT

Door
Door

DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

G.Lvl + 0 Plinth Beam

DRAWING TITLE :

WALL A & B ELEVATION

PUMP STATION

Elevation B ABOVE GROUND LEVEL

DIMENSIONAL LAYOUT

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-DIM-1008 / 8-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
Lvl + 5.9m IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
11000 OTHERWISE NOTED

4000 600 5200 600 3620 Lvl + 4.5m

5300

4700

3900
G.Lvl + 0 Plinth Beam

Elevation C

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND

Lvl + 5.9m SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON

THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN

400 2640 600 2640 600 2640 600 2640 600 2640 400 WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
600 600

PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

Ventilator Ventilator Ventilator Ventilator Ventilator

00 FOR REVIEW 28-10-2022
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
1900

UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &

PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)
5300

CLIENT

DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
2000

SIMCO Technologies Inc.

Window Window Window Window Window Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307
200

DRAWING TITLE :

WALL C & D ELEVATION

PUMP STATION
G.Lvl + 0 Plinth Beam ABOVE GROUND LEVEL
DIMENSIONAL LAYOUT

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

Elevation D
DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ
DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-DIM-1009 / 9-9
 O/Ref: IN632293_00

Appendix B - Defect Map & Test Location Layout

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 21600 24000 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
Wall A3 Wall B3 OTHERWISE NOTED

LEGENDS:-

MARK UP CODE DEFECT

D DELAMINATION

600
LEJ DAMAGED JOINT
LEAKAGE /
AL

400
D Beam
DAMPNESS

Column
ELEVATION

600

400
D Beam

AL

Column
ELEVATION

LEJ
Wall A2

Wall B4
46000

LEJ LEJ PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

AL
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
600 SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT

400
D Beam FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN

Column
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

ELEVATION 00 FOR REVIEW 03-11-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)
600

400
D Beam CLIENT

Column
LEJ DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
ELEVATION CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
600 FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

400
D Beam DRAWING TITLE :

Column
DEFECT MAPPING
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK
FLOOR PLAN
Wall A1 Wall B1
SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 03-11-2022
2300 ELEVATION DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

Tank A FLOOR PLAN Tank B DRAWING NUMBER:

REV. : 00
IN632293-DM-3001 / 1-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

LEGENDS:-

MARK UP CODE DEFECT

PP
LEJ DAMAGED JOINT

PP PAINT PEEL OFF

PP PP

PP

PP

LEJ
PP

PP

PP

LEJ LEJ PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
PP WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

00 FOR REVIEW 03-11-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

CLIENT

LEJ DURABILITY ENGINEERING:

SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
PP FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

PP
DRAWING TITLE :

PP PP
DEFECT MAPPING
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK
SOFFIT PLAN

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 03-11-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

Tank A SOFFIT PLAN Tank B DRAWING NUMBER:

REV. : 00
IN632293-DM-3002 / 2-9
 46500
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
2000 OTHERWISE NOTED

LEGENDS:-
Delamination & Spall on both MARK UP CODE DEFECT
Internal & External Opening walls
D DELAMINATION
DAMAGED /
SS SPALLED SCREED

OPENING

46600
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

00 FOR REVIEW 03-11-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

CLIENT

DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307
Delamination & Spall on both
Delamination & Spall on both
Internal & External Opening walls DRAWING TITLE :

Internal & External Opening walls 5000

DEFECT MAPPING
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK
SLAB TOP PLAN

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 03-11-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

Tank A TANK SLAB TOP PLAN Tank B DRAWING NUMBER:

REV. : 00
IN632293-DM-3003 / 3-9
 21600 G.Lvl + 0
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS

Partition Wall
OTHERWISE NOTED

2900
LEGENDS:-
Lvl - 3.1m
Wall A1 MARK UP CODE DEFECT
Pit
LEJ DAMAGED JOINT
46000
LEAKAGE /
AL
DAMPNESS

2900
Wall A2

Partition Wall
Wall A3
46000

2900
Partition Wall A4

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

G.Lvl + 0 24000
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN

Partition Wall
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
LEJ FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
2900

TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS

STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
AL PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

Lvl - 3.1m
Wall B1

46000 00 FOR REVIEW 03-11-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)
Partition Wall B2
CLIENT
Partition Wall

2900
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Wall B3 Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
46000 FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

DEFECT MAPPING
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK
WALL ELEVATIONS

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 03-11-2022

Wall B4 DRAWN BY : KHA

DRAWING NUMBER:
CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

REV. : 00
IN632293-DM-3004 / 4-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
15600 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

Drainage LEGENDS:-

MARK UP CODE DEFECT

300
400
PP 1200

1000
D PP PP D DELAMINATION
PP PAINT PEEL OFF

1250
D
1300
PP
610
350

2500
480
400
600

300 1700
1050

700
D
300

1500
1800

1900

550
PP
550

150

13420
Motor Motor Motor Motor PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
Cable Duct

Cable Duct

Cable Duct

Cable Duct
00 FOR REVIEW 03-11-2022
PP REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

CLIENT

1000 PP
570

DURABILITY ENGINEERING:

250 SIMCO Technologies Inc.

D Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
450

Dubai Investment Park 1

Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306

Cable Duct 10200 Cable Duct 1200

FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

D D

600
550

DEFECT MAPPING
UNDERGROUND PUMP
STATION RAFT PLAN

Pump Station Raft Plan

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 03-11-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-DM-3005 / 5-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
15600 IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

4000
600

13420
Motor Motor Motor Motor PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY

5200
C A
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
Ladder

Ladder

Ladder
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

DN DN DN
00 FOR REVIEW 03-11-2022
Platform UP REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS

DN
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
Ladder

UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &

600
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

2740 400 2840 400 2840 400 2840 400 3180 CLIENT

DURABILITY ENGINEERING:

3020
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1

B
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306

Cable Duct Cable Duct FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

DRAWING TITLE :

DEFECT MAPPING
UNDERGROUND PUMP STATION
MEZZANINE PLAN

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 03-11-2022

Pump Station Mezzanine Plan DRAWN BY : KHA

DRAWING NUMBER:
CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

REV. : 00
IN632293-DM-3006 / 6-9
 15600 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

LEGENDS:-

MARK UP CODE DEFECT

DC DRY CRACK
E EFFLORESCENCE
AL ACTIVE LEAK
PP PAINT PEEL OFF
13420

13420
Beam

Beam

Beam

Beam
Height 10.0 m Height 10.0 m Height 10.0 m Height 10.0 m Height 4.4 m
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
Soffit of Slab Soffit of Slab Soffit of Slab Soffit of Slab Soffit of Mezzanine SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
Platform RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

00 FOR REVIEW 03-11-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
E UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
E E PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)
PP
E PP PP PP E CLIENT

PP
PP Height 4.4 m
PP
DC Soffit of Mezzanine
Platform E
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306

DC E DC
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307
DC
DC E E
DC
DRAWING TITLE :

E DC DC
DC DC DEFECT MAPPING
UNDERGROUND PUMP STATION
SOFFIT SLAB PLAN

Soffit Slab Plan

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 03-11-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-DM-3007 / 7-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

LEGENDS:-

MARK UP CODE DEFECT

G.Lvl + 0 13420
DC DRY CRACK
E EFFLORESCENCE
PP PAINT PEEL OFF

E
0.25 0.50 E E
E E
DC
DC

4400
DC
PP

DC

PP PP
PP E
PP
Lvl - 4.4m

Wall Elevation A (Inner Face)

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

15600
G.Lvl + 0
00 FOR REVIEW 03-11-2022
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
DC DC DC DC UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
DC
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

CLIENT

4400
DC
0.50 0.50
0.50 DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
PP Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates

E
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

E E PP
PP PP PP DRAWING TITLE :

Lvl - 4.4m
DEFECT MAPPING

Wall Elevation B (Inner Face) UNDERGROUND PUMP STATION

WALL A & B ELEVATION

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 03-11-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-DM-3008 / 8-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

LEGENDS:-

MARK UP CODE DEFECT

G.Lvl + 0 13420
DC DRY CRACK
E EFFLORESCENCE
PP PAINT PEEL OFF

DC

4400
DC DC
0.50

0.50
DC
PP E
E PP E
Lvl - 4.4m

Wall Elevation C (Inner Face)

PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

15600

G.Lvl + 0
Door Door Door Door Door 00 FOR REVIEW 03-11-2022
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)
DC DC
CLIENT

4400
DC
PP 0.25
DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
PP PP Dubai Branch
0.75 CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
PP Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

PP PP E PP DRAWING TITLE :

Lvl - 4.4m
DEFECT MAPPING

Wall Elevation D (Inner Face) UNDERGROUND PUMP STATION

WALL C & D ELEVATION

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 03-11-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-DM-3009 / 9-9
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED
LOC # 4
15600
Ext. Wall
LEGENDS:-
HCP - 4
Drainage Mark up Code Defect
GPR - 5 & 6
LOC # Test Location
CC - 4
Half Cell
CH - 4
LOC # 1
HCP Potential Test / LPR

BW - 4 GPR
Ground Penetration
Radar
Wall
CC Compressive Core
HCP - 1
GPR - 1 & 2 CH Chloride / Sulphate

CC - 1 BW Breakout Window
LOC # 2 CH - 1

Floor BW - 1

HCP - 2
GPR - 3
CC - 2
CH - 2
BW - 2

13420
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
Motor Motor Motor Motor SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT
FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.
Cable Duct

Cable Duct

Cable Duct

Cable Duct
00 FOR REVIEW 28-10-2022
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)
LOC # 3 CLIENT

Wall
HCP - 3
GPR - 4
LOC # 5 DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch
CC - 3 CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650

CH - 3
Cable Duct Cable Duct Column Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307
CC - 5
BW - 3 DRAWING TITLE :

GPR - 7 & 8
TEST LOCATIONS LAYOUT
PUMP STATION

Raft Floor Plan

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-TL-2001 / 1-3
 21600 24000 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
Wall A3 Wall B3 OTHERWISE NOTED

LOC # 16
LOC # 10
Wall LEGENDS:-
Wall
Mark up Code Defect

LOC # Test Location

LOC # 9 LOC # 17
Floor Wall

LOC # 18
Floor
LOC # 11
Floor + Wall LOC # 19
Column

LOC # 21
Slab Soffit

Wall B4
Wall A2

LOC # 20

Joint
Wall
Joint
LOC # 22
PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
Slab Top

Wall A4 (Partition Wall)

Wall B2 (Partition Wall)

SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN

LOC # 12 LOC # 15 WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT

FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR
TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
Column Beam PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

00 FOR REVIEW 28-10-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

REVISIONS
PROJECT TITLE

LOC # 13 CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF

UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
Floor PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

CLIENT

LOC # 8
Floor +Wall + Soffit
LOC # 23 DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.

LOC # 7 Floor
Dubai Branch
CEO Building, Office No. 513
P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1

Beam Dubai United Arab Emirates

TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

LOC # 6
DRAWING TITLE :

LOC # 14 TEST LOCATIONS LAYOUT

Wall Pit
Floor + Wall + Soffit UNDERGROUND TSE TANK

Wall A1 Wall B1
SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

Tank A FLOOR PLAN Tank B DRAWING NUMBER:

REV. : 00
IN632293-TL-2002 / 2-3
 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED

LEGENDS:-

LOC # 6 LOC # 7 LOC # 8 LOC # 9 LOC # 10 LOC # 11 Mark up Code Defect

LOC # Test Location

Wall Beam Floor Wall Soffit Floor Wall Floor Wall Half Cell
HCP Potential Test / LPR
HCP - 5 HCP - 6 HCP - 7 HCP - 7 HCP - 7 HCP - 8 HCP - 9 HCP - 10 HCP - 10 Ground Penetration
GPR
Radar
GPR - 9 GPR - 10 GPR - 13 GPR - 12 GPR - 11 GPR - 14 GPR - 15 & 16 GPR - 17
CC Compressive Core
CC - 6 CC - 7 CC - 8 CC - 9 CC - 10 CC - 11
CH Chloride / Sulphate
CH - 5 CH - 6 CH - 7 CH - 8 CH - 9 CH - 10
BW Breakout Window
BW - 5 BW - 6 BW - 7 BW - 8 BW - 9 BW - 10

LOC # 12 LOC # 13 LOC # 14 LOC # 15 LOC # 16 LOC # 17

Column Floor Floor Wall Soffit Beam Wall Wall
HCP - 11 HCP - 12 HCP - 13 HCP - 13 HCP - 13 HCP - 14 HCP - 16
GPR - 18 GPR - 19 GPR - 22 GPR - 20 GPR - 21 GPR - 23 & 24 GPR - 27 GPR - 26 PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL
SIMCO MIDDLE EAST CLAIMS A STRICT PROPRIETARY
RIGHT IN ALL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, AND
CC - 12 CC - 13 CC - 14 CC - 15 CC - 16 CC - 17 SPECIFICATIONS ("INFORMATION") SET FORTH ON
THIS SHEET. THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION IN
WHOLE OR IN PART IS RESTRICTED TO THE PROJECT

CH - 11 CH - 12 CH - 13 CH - 14 CH - 15 CH - 16 FOR WHICH IT WAS PREPARED. ANY USE OR

TRANSFER OF INFORMATION GIVEN IN THIS SHEET IS
STRICTLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A WRITTEN
PERMISSION FROM SIMCO.

BW - 11 BW - 12 BW - 13 BW - 14 BW - 16

00 FOR REVIEW 28-10-2022

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE

LOC # 21 LOC # 22
REVISIONS

LOC # 18 LOC # 19 LOC # 20 LOC # 23

PROJECT TITLE

CONDITION ASSESSMENT OF
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK &
Floor Column Wall Slab Soffit Slab Top Floor PUMP ROOM (MASDAR)

HCP - 17 HCP - 15 CLIENT

GPR - 29 GPR - 25 GPR - 28 GPR - 30

CC - 18 CC - 19 CC - 20 CC - 21 DURABILITY ENGINEERING:
SIMCO Technologies Inc.
Dubai Branch

CH - 17 CH - 18 CH - 19 CH - 20 CH - 21 CEO Building, Office No. 513

P.O BOX : 122650
Dubai Investment Park 1
Dubai United Arab Emirates

BW - 15
TEL : (+971 4) 887 8306

BW - 17
FAX : (+971 4) 887 8307

BW - 18A
DRAWING TITLE :

TEST LOCATIONS
UNDERGROUND TSE TANK

SCALE: NTS DRAWING SIZE : A3 DATE: 28-10-2022

DRAWN BY : KHA CHECKED : MOS APPROVED : MMZ

DRAWING NUMBER:
REV. : 00
IN632293-TL-2003 / 3-3
 O/Ref: IN632293_00

Appendix C – GPR Data

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
1 PROJECT INFORMATION
1.1 Client Name: Dar Al Handasah
Location: Abu Dhabi U.A.E.
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

1.2 Process Unit/Structure Name: Masdar Underground TSE Tank

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.2 Test Equipment: Geophysical Survey Systems, Inc. (GSSI) Structure Scan Mini
2.3 Inspector(s) Name(s): SS
2.4 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days through
MM-DD-YY MM-DD-YY MM-DD-YY

2.5 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No

2.6 Reference Standards: ASTM D-6432

3 GPR DATA

Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

002

X-direction/ 2100 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 1
1 45
Internal Wall
Pump Station
001

Y-direction/
1800 - 200
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

004

X-direction/
1920 150 -
Horizontal Scan

Loc # 1
2 Floor Slab
35
Pump Station
003

Y-direction/
Vertical 1920 - 150
Scan

005

X-direction/ 2480 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 2
3 Floor Slab
30
Pump Station
006

Y-direction/
1920 - 150
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

08

X-direction/ 2280 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 3
4 Internal Wall
35
Pump Station
07

Y-direction/
2000 - 200
Vertical
Scan

010

X-direction/ 720 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 5
5 Internal Column
30
Pump Station
009

Y-direction/
1920 - 200
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

11

X-direction/ 2120 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 5
6 Floor Slab
40
Pump Station
12

Y-direction/
2480 - 150
Vertical
Scan

14

X-direction/ 720 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 4

7 30
External Column
Pump Station
13

Y-direction/
1800 - 200
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

16

X-direction/ 1800 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 4

8 55
External Tie Beam
Pump Station
15

Y-direction/
440 - 200
Vertical
Scan

02

X-direction/ 1680 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 6

9 Wall A1 (Internal) 42
Underground TSE
Tank
01

Y-direction/
1480 - 200
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

04

X-direction/ 2880 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 7

10 Beam (Internal)
25
Underground TSE
Tank 03

Y-direction/
400 - 200
Vertical
Scan

05

X-direction/ 880 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 8

11 Soffit 25
Underground TSE
Tank 06

Y-direction/
920 - -
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

08

X-direction/ 1480 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 8

12 Wall A2 (Internal) 50
Underground TSE
Tank
07

Y-direction/
1800 - 200
Vertical
Scan

10

X-direction/ 2600 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 8

13 Floor Slab 35
Underground TSE
Tank
09

Y-direction/
1400 - 150
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

11

X-direction/ 2500 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 9

14 Floor 70
Underground TSE
Tank 12

Y-direction/
2500 - 100
Vertical
Scan

14

X-direction/ 1600 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 10

15 Wall A3 (Internal) 60
Underground TSE
Tank
13

Y-direction/
1600 - 200
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

15

X-direction/ 1240 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 10

16 Floor 60
Underground TSE
Tank
16

Y-direction/
1800 - 150
Vertical
Scan

18

X-direction/ 1640 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 11

17 Wall A4 (Internal) 60
Underground TSE
Tank
17

Y-direction/
1800 - 200
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

22

X-direction/ 600 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 12

18 Column 30
Underground TSE
Tank 21

Y-direction/
1800 - 200
Vertical
Scan

23

X-direction/ 2040 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 13

19 Floor 50
Underground TSE
Tank
24

Y-direction/
2480 - 150
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

29

X-direction/ 1800 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 14

20 Wall B1 (Internal) 50
Underground TSE
Tank
28

Y-direction/
2300 - 200
Vertical
Scan

31

X-direction/ 1080 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 14

21 Soffit 30
Underground TSE
Tank
30

Y-direction/
1600 - -
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

32

X-direction/ 1480 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 14

22 Floor Slab 50
Underground TSE
Tank
33

Y-direction/
2280 - 150
Vertical
Scan

34

X-direction/ 2080 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 15

23 Beam Bottom 30
Underground TSE
Tank
35

Y-direction/
680 - 100
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

36

X-direction/ 1300 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 15

24 Beam Side Face 30

Underground TSE
Tank
37

Y-direction/
440 - 100
Vertical
Scan

39

X-direction/ 640 100 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 19

25 Column 50
Underground TSE
Tank
38

Y-direction/
2080 - 200
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

43

X-direction/ 1800 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 17

26 Wall B4 (Internal) 60
Underground TSE
Tank
42

Y-direction/
1800 - 200
Vertical
Scan

45

X-direction/ 1680 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 16

27 Wall B3 (Internal) 70
Underground TSE
Tank
44

Y-direction/
1680 - 200
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

47

X-direction/ 2680 200 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc # 20

28 Wall B2 (Internal) 60
Underground TSE
Tank
46

Y-direction/
1600 - 200
Vertical
Scan

48

X-direction/ 1500 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc #18

29 Floor 50
Underground TSE
Tank
49

Y-direction/
2400 - 150
Vertical
Scan
 Project No. IN632293

GROUND PENETRATING RADAR(GPR) DATA Date 21 10 2022

Sheet GPR 1-16

1111
Min. Cover
Vertical Rebar Horizontal Rebar
Sl. Length of Scan (Concrete )
Location Direction of Scan Spacing(mm) Spacing (mm) GPR Image
No. (mm) (mm)

51

X-direction/ 1880 150 -

Horizontal Scan

Loc #22

30 Top Of Slab 25
Underground TSE
Tank
52

Y-direction/
2600 - 150
Vertical
Scan
 O/Ref: IN632293_00

Appendix D – Breakout Windows

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 BREAKOUT WINDOWS
O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 1

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Pump Station Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Ret. Wall Opening Date: 08/09/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC #1

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 40 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm
© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Actual After Cleaning

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition
(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 15.46 Corroded

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 15.25 Corroded

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 2

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Pump Station Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Floor Slab Opening Date: 09/09/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC #2

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 35mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 16.00 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.00 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 2 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 3

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Pump Station Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Retaining Wall Opening Date: 09/09/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC #3

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 42 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 16.00 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.00 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 3 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 4

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Pump Station Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Column (External) Opening Date: 10/09/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC #4
10 mm

25 mm

Concrete cover 46 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T10 9.64 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T25 24.65 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 4 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 5

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank A Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Wall A1 (Internal) Opening Date: 13/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC #6

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 35 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 15.87 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 15.85 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 5 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 6

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank A Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Beam Bottom (Internal) Opening Date: 13/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC #7

10 mm

Concrete cover 27 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T10 9.91 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T10 9.89 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 6 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 7

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank A Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Wall A2 (Internal) Opening Date: 13/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC #8

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 40 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 15.94 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 7 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 8

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank A Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Floor Slab (Internal) Opening Date: 14/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC #9

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 65 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 16.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 8 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 9

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank A Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Wall A3 (Internal) Opening Date: 14/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 10

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 50 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 16.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 9 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 10

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank A Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Wall A4 (Internal) Opening Date: 14/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 11

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 60 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 16.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 10 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 11

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank A Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Column (Internal) Opening Date: 14/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 12

10 mm

20 mm

Concrete cover 48 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T10 10.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T20 20.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 11 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 12

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank A Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Floor Slab (Internal) Opening Date: 14/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 13

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 50 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 16.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 12 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 13

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank B Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Wall B1 (Internal) Opening Date: 18/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 14

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 45 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 16.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 13 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 14

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank B Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Beam Bottom (Internal) Opening Date: 19/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 15

10 mm

Concrete cover 28 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction 2 X T10 10.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction - - -

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 14 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 15

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank B Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Column (Internal) Opening Date: 19/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 19

10 mm

20 mm

Concrete cover 55 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T10 10.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T20 20.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 15 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW-16

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank B Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Wall B3 (Internal) Opening Date: 19/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 17

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 48 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 16.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 16 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 17

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank B Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Floor Slab (Internal) Opening Date: 19/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 18

16 mm

16 mm

Concrete cover 49 mm

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T16 16.0 Good

Vertical/ Y Direction T16 16.0 Good

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 17 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293

VISUAL OBSERVATIONS ON BREAKOUT WINDOWS WINDOW: BW- 18A

Project ID: IN632293_ Masdar TSE Tank Client: Dar Al Handasah

Structure: Underground Tank B Location: Abu Dhabi
Element : Column (Internal) Opening Date: 19/10/2022
Formed by: SS Test Area: LOC # 19

12 mm

Concrete cover 12 mm (Delaminated)

Depth of Carbonation 0 mm

Actual After Cleaning

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

Rebar Diameter Reinforcement Condition

(mm) (mm)

Horizontal / X Direction T12 12.0 Corroded

Vertical/ Y Direction - - -

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | T +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com

Page 18 of 18
 O/Ref: IN632293_00

Appendix E – HCP & LPR

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Pump Station
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 1 - HCP # 1 - Wall
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 8/9/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6
Point
A -10 2 -1 12 18 31
B 14 18 14 20 20 35
C -2 -20 -15 -5 -2 14
D -87 -69 -73 -81 -65 -54 Wall
E -295 -290 -295 -309 -270 -279

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

Coating peel off on Floor-wall joint

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Pump Station
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 2 - HCP # 2 - Floor
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 8/9/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5
Point
A -282 -268 -424 -450 -440
B -412 -381 -424 -468 -418
C -420 -442 -462 -463 -412
D -413 -393 -470 -460 -440
E -400 -462 -471 -474 -401
F -406 -460 -400 -418 -421

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

Delamination on floor near to test location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Pump Station
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 3 - HCP # 3 - Wall
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 9/9/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6
Point
A -11 -1 -4 -12 -28 -74
B -12 -13 -10 -10 -22 -35
C -48 -35 -52 -42 -40 -56
D -171 -128 -143 -113 -124 -178
E -275 -292 -335 -289 -286 -318

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

Delamination on Floor close to test location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Pump Station
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 4 - HCP # 4 - Beam (External)
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 10/9/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Point
A -12 -40 39 26 -18 -5 -10 -19 -55
B -36 -59 -96 -105 -114 -121 -109 -95 -107

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No deterioration
 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 6 - HCP # 5 - Wall Tank A
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 13/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4
Point
A -373 -357 -372 -331
B -377 -355 -359 -333
C -345 -342 -336 -354
D -352 -374 -378 -335
E -204 -214 -255 -265

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Deterioration on Wall
 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 7 - HCP # 6 - Beam Tank A
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 13/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4
Point
A -157 -166 -160 -168
B -144 -175 -175 -171
C -150 -145 -142 -165
D -150 -150 -140 -160
E -141 -126 -141 -136
F -128 -168 -135 -148

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 8 - HCP # 7 - (Soffit+Wall+Floor) Tank A
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 8/9/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4
Point
A -197 -132 -187 -256
B -255 -266 -273 -288 Soffit
C -306 -281 -207 -265
D -331 -332 -336 -376
E -406 -381 -383 -436
F -415 -411 -400 -408 Wall
G -292 -370 -385 -375
H -375 -361 -372 -371
I -335 -335 -344 -275
J -344 -253 -339 -355
K -347 -352 -348 -350 Floor
L -355 -346 -360 -356

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 9 - HCP # 8 - Floor Tank A
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 14/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5
Point
A -287 -292 -275 -292 -275
B -251 -231 -262 -275 -331
C -275 -224 -222 -267 -208
D -291 -237 -195 -198 -274
E -271 -226 -261 -181 -241

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Background
Ag/Ag Cl mV Condition
Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 10 - HCP # 9 - Wall Tank A
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 14/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4
Point
A -405 -392 -403 -319
B -371 -380 -366 -397
C -356 -368 -370 -382
D -364 -374 -360 -340
E -290 -246 -297 -287

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 11 - HCP # 10 - Wall) Tank A
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 14/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4
Point
A -334 -302 -224 -221
B -300 -299 -290 -312
C -324 -304 -311 -300
D -336 -310 -314 -306
E -335 -326 -304 -295
F -335 -344 -390 -335
G -301 -354 -337 -305
H -326 -320 -263 -277
I -339 -324 -293 -310

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 12 - HCP # 11 - Column Tank A
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 14/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5
Point
A -181 -193 -151 -127 -135
B -181 -192 -193 -187 -180
C -143 -183 -175 -151 -127
D -161 -135 -156 -93 -102
E -123 -105 -54 -75 -22
F -75 -71 -51 -41 -37

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Background
Ag/Ag Cl mV Condition
Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 13 - HCP # 12 - Floor Tank A
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 14/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5
Point
A -324 -351 -344 -327 -330
B -321 -324 -327 -306 -353
C -340 -327 -315 -340 -311
D -340 -342 -308 -318 -315
E -318 -341 -347 -344 -318

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Background
Ag/Ag Cl mV Condition
Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 14 - HCP # 13 - (Soffit+Wall+Floor) Tank B
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 19/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5
Point
A -256 -294 -271 -268 -264
B -264 -296 -318 -309 -288 Soffit
C -347 -256 -388 -381 -367
D -398 -405 -403 -433 -398
E -460 -470 -481 -463 -417
F -454 -456 -457 -470 -475 Wall
G -459 -454 -464 -473 -487
H -465 -467 -452 -465 -466
I -453 -453 -443 -450 -446
J -478 -466 -462 -436 -452
K -447 -471 -452 -463 -456 Floor
L -427 -428 -464 -450 -472

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half-cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 15 - HCP # 14 - Beam Tank B
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 19/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3
Point
A -169 -148 -140
B -190 -101 -143
C -180 -174 -108
D -168 -157 -133
E -157 -156 -144
F -169 -172 -135

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Background
Ag/Ag Cl mV Condition
Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half Cell Potential Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 19 - HCP # 15 - Column Tank B
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 19/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5
Point
A -257 -247 -282 -261 -251
B -278 -263 -251 -261 -258
C -282 -281 -224 -281 -284
D -248 -257 -270 -267 -277
E -234 -325 -315 -318 -296

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half Cell Potentail Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location 17 - HCP # 16 - (Wall+Floor) Tank B
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 19/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5
Point
A -439 -462 -450 -464 -450
B -420 -435 -433 -432 -421
C -424 -420 -409 -423 -439
D -417 -422 -411 -431 -432 Wall
E -380 -405 -390 -422 -420
F -358 -368 -370 -378 -381
G -368 -374 -371 -378 -369
H -371 -365 -355 -345 -367 Floor
I -351 -361 -374 -373 -378

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Half Cell Potentail Measurements

1 PROJECT INFORMATION
Project
1.1 Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Name:
Location AbuDhabi UAE
CITY STATE/PROVINCE COUNTRY

Process
1.2 Underground TSE Tank
Unit/Structure Name:

2 TEST DETAILS
2.1 Test Location: Location18- HCP # 17 - Floor Tank B
2.2 Nature: Destructive Nondestructive
2.3 Test Equipment: Elcometer 177
2.4 Inspector(s) Name(s): MS
2.5 Date(s) of Testing: Single Day Multiple days
MM-DD-YY 19/10/2022 MM-DD-YY through MM-DD-YY

2.6 Testing Conditions: Applicable Yes No Air/Substrate Temperature:

Moisture Content: Wet Dry Damp
2.7 Reference Standards: ASTM C876

3 DATA (mV)
Test
1 2 3 4 5
Point
A -390 -392 -402 -411 -402
B -427 -407 -406 -404 -427
C -442 -424 -416 -405 -411
D -429 -433 -425 -421 -386
E -436 -430 -422 -420 -416

4 DATA INTERPRETATION

Corrosion Activity

Ag/Ag Cl Background
Condition
mV Color

>-100 Low Green

-100 to -250 Moderate Orange

<-250 High Red

<-400 Severe Brown

5 GENERAL REMARKS

No Defects on Test Location

 Corrosion Activity
Background
Corrosion Rate µm/Yr Condition
Color
Less than 1 Negligable Green
Between 1 5 Low Yellow
Between 5 10 Moderate Orange
Greater than 10 High Red
LINEAR POLARIZATION RESISTANCE
Project Name: Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Project Ref: IN632293
Test Date: 19/10/2022
Report Date: Nov-22

Ecorr Icorr Study Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #1 Y/X 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl C
Tech. AS E -303.00 1.51 -296.00 1.58 -321.00 1.49
Date: 19/10/2022 F Min -321 1.49
Max -296 1.58

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #2 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. AS D -516 3.28 -494 2.98
Date: 19/10/2022 E -492 4.58 -500 3.68 Min -516 2.98
Max -492 4.58

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #3 x/y 1 3 4 6 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. AS D
Date: 19/10/2022 E -350 5.97 -319 7.06 -348 5.17 Min -350 5.17
Max -319 7.06

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #4 x/y 2 4 5 8 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. AS E -29 0.26 -135 0.47 -160 1.09 -129 0.49
Date: 19/10/2022 F Min -160 0.26
Max -29 1.09

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #5 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. AS D -408 2.19 -407 1.79
Date: 19/10/2022 E -330 2.98 Min -408 1.79
Max -330 2.98

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #6 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
A -181 3.82
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B -191 3.82 -188 2.86
Tech. AS C
Date: 19/10/2022 D Min -191 2.86
Max -181 3.82

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #7 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
C -307 0.35
RE Type: Ag/AgCl E -430 0.58
Tech. AS F -431 0.51
Date: 19/10/2022 K -381 0.74 Min -431 0.35
Max -307 0.74

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #8 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
A -300 0.68 -299 0.54
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. AS C -308 0.55
Date: 19/10/2022 D Min -308 0.54
Max -299 0.68

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #9 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
A -381 0.40
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B -354 0.99
Tech. AS D
Date: 19/10/2022 E -294 0.85 Min -381 0.40
Max -294 0.99
 Corrosion Activity
Background
Corrosion Rate µm/Yr Condition
Color
Less than 1 Negligable Green
Between 1 5 Low Yellow
Between 5 10 Moderate Orange
Greater than 10 High Red
LINEAR POLARIZATION RESISTANCE
Project Name: Underground TSE Tank & Pump Station Condition Assessment
Project Ref: IN632293
Test Date: 19/10/2022
Report Date: Nov-22

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #10 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
E -298 0.42
RE Type: Ag/AgCl F -308 0.58
Tech. AS G -320 1.07
Date: 19/10/2022 H -351 0.99 Min -351 0.42
Max -298 1.07

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #11 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
A -277 0.98
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B -215 1.11 -220 0.18
Tech. AS C
Date: 19/10/2022 D Min -277 0.18
Max -215 1.11

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #12 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
A -318 0.18
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. AS C -322 0.15
Date: 19/10/2022 E -322 0.17 Min -322 0.15
Max -318 0.18

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #13 x/y 1 2 4 5 Ecorr Icorr
D
RE Type: Ag/AgCl H -486 0.92 -486 0.86
Tech. AS J -489 0.41
Date: 19/10/2022 L -465 0.60 Min -489 0.41
Max -465 0.92

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #14 x/y 1 2 3 4 Ecorr Icorr
A -176 16.87
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B -190 16.31
Tech. AS C -213 0.16
Date: 19/10/2022 D Min -213 0.16
Max -176 16.87

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #15 x/y 1 2 3 5 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl D -314 0.85
Tech. AS E -358 0.44 -335 1.07
Date: 19/10/2022 F Min -358 0.44
Max -314 1.07

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #16 x/y 1 2 4 5 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl E -434 0.86
Tech. AS F -387 1.19
Date: 19/10/2022 G -380 1.39 Min -434 0.86
Max -380 1.39

Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr Ecorr Icorr

Location: HCP #17 x/y 1 2 4 5 Ecorr Icorr
A
RE Type: Ag/AgCl B
Tech. AS D -452 0.85
Date: 19/10/2022 E -382 0.79 -450 0.67 Min -452 0.67
Max -382 0.85
 O/Ref: IN632293_00

Appendix F – Concrete Core Log

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-1

AT
LOC # 1

RET. WALL
PUMP
STATION

Compressive Strength 61.8 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-2

AT
LOC # 2

FLOOR SLAB
PUMP
STATION

Compressive Strength 59.4 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-3

AT
LOC # 3

RET. WALL
PUMP
STATION

Compressive Strength 36.7 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-4

AT
LOC # 4

EXTERNAL
BEAM
PUMP
STATION

Compressive Strength 35.0 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-5

INTERNAL
COLUMN
PUMP
STATION

Compressive Strength 36.8 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-6

AT
LOC # 6
WALL

TSE TANK A

Compressive Strength 66.0 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-7

AT
LOC # 7
BEAM

TSE TANK A

Compressive Strength 61.8 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-8

AT
LOC # 8
WALL

TSE TANK A

Compressive Strength 70.5 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-9

AT
LOC # 9
FLOOR

TSE TANK A

Compressive Strength 59.4 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-10

AT
LOC # 10
WALL

TSE TANK A

Compressive Strength 64.1 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-11

AT
LOC # 11
WALL

TSE TANK A

Compressive Strength 77.8 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-12

AT
LOC # 12
COLUMN

TSE TANK A

Compressive Strength 66.4 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-13

AT
LOC # 13
FLOOR

TSE TANK A

Compressive Strength 63.4 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-14

AT
LOC # 14
WALL

TSE TANK B

Compressive Strength 70.9 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-15

AT
LOC # 15
BEAM

TSE TANK B

Compressive Strength 78.8 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-16

AT
LOC # 16
WALL

TSE TANK B

Compressive Strength 74.4 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-17

AT
LOC # 17
WALL

TSE TANK B

Compressive Strength 61.2 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-18

AT
LOC # 18
FLOOR

TSE TANK B

Compressive Strength 61.9 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-19

AT
LOC # 19
COLUMN

TSE TANK B

Compressive Strength 76.2 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-20

AT
LOC # 20
WALL

TSE TANK B

Compressive Strength 69.5 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 CORE LOG O/Ref: IN632293

CORE ID CORE CORE CORE LOCATION

CC-21

AT
LOC # 21
FLOOR

TSE TANK B

Compressive Strength 47.6 N/mm2

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 513, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
 O/Ref: IN632293_00

Appendix G – 3rd party Laboratory results

© SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch 2022

SIMCO Technologies Inc. Dubai Branch

CEO Building, Office 512, DIP-1, PO Box 122650, Dubai, UAE
T +971 4 887 8306 | F +971 4 887 8307 | www.simco-me.com
dar.com